The anatomy of humane bodies with figures drawn after the life by some of the best masters in Europe and curiously engraven in one hundred and fourteen copper plates : illustrated with large explications containing many new anatomical discoveries and chirurgical observations : to which is added an introduction explaining the animal œconomy : with a copious index / by William Cowper.
         Cowper, William, 1666-1709.
      
       
         
           1698
        
      
       Approx. 882 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 134 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2003-11 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A34837
         Wing C6698
         ESTC R10024
         11990002
         ocm 11990002
         51999
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A34837)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 51999)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1641-1700 ; 61:9)
      
       
         
           
             The anatomy of humane bodies with figures drawn after the life by some of the best masters in Europe and curiously engraven in one hundred and fourteen copper plates : illustrated with large explications containing many new anatomical discoveries and chirurgical observations : to which is added an introduction explaining the animal œconomy : with a copious index / by William Cowper.
             Cowper, William, 1666-1709.
          
           [138] p., 114 leaves of plates (some folded) : ill., port.
           
             Printed at the Theater for Sam. Smith and Benj. Walford ... London,
             Oxford :
             1698.
          
           
             Added t.p. engraved.
             Reproduction of original in British Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Human anatomy -- Atlases.
           Human anatomy -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2003-07 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2003-08 SPi Global
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2003-09 Mona Logarbo
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2003-09 Mona Logarbo
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2003-10 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
           
             
               Gulielmus
               Cowper
               Chyrurgus
            
             portrait
             
               ●
               Closterman
               pinxit
            
             
               I.
               Smith
               fecit
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
           
             
               THE
               ANATOMY
               of
               HUMANE
               BODIES
            
             
               By
               Will
               
               m.
               Cowper
               Surgeon
            
             
               1698.
               
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
         
           THE
           ANATOMY
           OF
           HUMANE
           BODIES
           ,
           WITH
           FIGURES
           DRAWN
           AFTER
           THE
           LIFE
           By
           some
           
             OF
             THE
             BEST
             MASTERS
          
           in
           Europe
           ,
           And
           Curiously
           Engraven
           In
           One
           Hundred
           and
           Fourteen
           Copper
           Plates
           ,
           ILLUSTRATED
           WITH
           LARGE
           EXPLICATIONS
           ,
           CONTAINING
           MANY
           NEW
           Anatomical
           Discoveries
           ,
           And
           CHIRURGICAL
           OBSERVATIONS
           :
           TO
           WHICH
           IS
           ADDED
           AN
           INTRODUCTION
           EXPLAINING
           THE
           ANIMAL
           OECONOMY
           .
           WITH
           A
           COPIOUS
           INDEX
           .
        
         
           BY
           William
           Cowper
           .
        
         
         
           OXFORD
           PRINTED
           AT
           THE
           THEATER
           .
           For
           SAM
           .
           SMITH
           and
           BENJ.
           WALFORD
           ,
           PRINTERS
           to
           the
           ROYAL
           SOCIETY
           .
           At
           the
           
             PRINCES
             ARMS
          
           in
           
             ST
             PAUL'S
             CHURCH
          
           Yard
           ,
           LONDON
           MDCXCVIII
           .
        
      
       
         
         
         
           TO
           THE
           RIGHT
           HONORABLE
           CHARLES
           MOUNTAGUE
           ,
           FIRST
           LORD
           OF
           THE
           TREASURY
           ;
           CHANCELLOR
           OF
           THE
           EXCHEQUER
           ;
           ONE
           OF
           THE
           LORDS
           OF
           HIS
           MAJESTY'S
           MOST
           HONORABLE
           PRIVY-COUNCIL
           ;
           AND
           PRESIDENT
           OF
           THE
           ROYAL-SOCIETY
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           
             SIR
             ,
          
        
         
           Having
           heard
           from
           those
           Persons
           who
           have
           often
           the
           Happiness
           of
           waiting
           on
           You
           ,
           how
           easie
           an
           Access
           You
           give
           to
           All
           ,
           I
           have
           presum'd
           to
           ask
           the
           Honor
           of
           being
           admitted
           into
           Your
           Presence
           .
           
           If
           this
           Address
           may
           be
           thought
           too
           forward
           ,
           it
           will
           be
           some
           Excuse
           ,
           to
           have
           it
           known
           ,
           that
           I
           was
           justly
           afraid
           of
           being
           prevented
           by
           those
           Numbers
           of
           Men
           ,
           Eminent
           in
           all
           Faculties
           and
           Professions
           ,
           who
           are
           preparing
           to
           make
           the
           same
           Attempt
           upon
           You.
           The
           Peace
           ,
           which
           His
           Most
           Sacred
           MAJESTY
           has
           with
           the
           greatest
           Glory
           brought
           Home
           to
           us
           ,
           as
           much
           as
           it
           owes
           to
           the
           Influence
           of
           Your
           particular
           Counsels
           ,
           will
           be
           very
           far
           from
           allowing
           You
           any
           Share
           of
           that
           Rest
           ,
           which
           it
           affords
           to
           all
           Europe
           besides
           :
           Believe
           me
           ,
           SIR
           ,
           the
           Men
           of
           Letters
           knowing
           now
           ,
           that
           Your
           Thoughts
           are
           no
           longer
           taken
           up
           by
           the
           War
           ,
           are
           all
           ready
           to
           break
           in
           upon
           You
           with
           their
           Offerings
           ;
           they
           look
           on
           You
           as
           their
           declar'd
           Patron
           and
           Protector
           ;
           they
           have
           upon
           this
           Prospect
           recover'd
           their
           Spirits
           ,
           and
           enlarg'd
           their
           Hopes
           ;
           and
           some
           of
           them
           have
           gone
           so
           far
           ,
           as
           to
           think
           they
           find
           You
           Born
           for
           their
           Advancement
           ,
           under
           that
           very
           Star
           ,
           which
           was
           never
           before
           observ'd
           to
           shine
           out
           in
           all
           its
           Lustre
           ,
           but
           only
           at
           the
           Birth
           of
           the
           Roman
           Mecaenas
           ,
           and
           the
           French
           Richlieu
           and
           Colbert
           .
        
         
           Every
           Art
           and
           Science
           pretends
           a
           Right
           to
           approach
           You
           ,
           because
           every
           one
           of
           'em
           is
           Familiarly
           known
           to
           you
           :
           ANATOMY
           has
           this
           also
           in
           particular
           to
           Alledge
           for
           it self
           ,
           that
           ,
           having
           receiv'd
           its
           Chief
           Improvements
           and
           Advantages
           from
           our
           own
           Country-men
           ,
           it
           may
           be
           accounted
           of
           English
           Growth
           ;
           which
           the
           World
           will
           agree
           ,
           is
           the
           most
           effectual
           Thing
           that
           can
           be
           said
           of
           it
           ,
           to
           Recommend
           
           it
           to
           Your
           Protection
           ,
           who
           lay
           the
           Honor
           and
           Interest
           of
           England
           so
           near
           Your
           Heart
           ,
           and
           whose
           Love
           for
           Your
           Country
           ,
           is
           not
           to
           be
           out-done
           ,
           but
           by
           the
           Love
           Your
           Country
           returns
           You.
           
        
         
           The
           Favor
           of
           Great
           Ministers
           to
           the
           Learned
           ,
           is
           a
           Subject
           that
           takes
           up
           but
           little
           Room
           in
           our
           
             British
             Annals
          
           .
           It
           has
           been
           thought
           to
           be
           the
           Defect
           of
           some
           Former
           Reigns
           ,
           Famous
           in
           all
           other
           respects
           ;
           and
           was
           reserv'd
           ,
           we
           believe
           ,
           to
           Compleat
           the
           Glories
           of
           This.
           My
           Lord
           Treasurer
           Burleigh
           was
           a
           better
           Servant
           to
           Queen
           Elizabeth
           ,
           than
           Patron
           to
           the
           Muses
           :
           But
           were
           Spenser
           ,
           who
           had
           the
           Misfortune
           of
           being
           born
           a
           Hundred
           Years
           too
           soon
           ,
           Alive
           at
           this
           Time
           ,
           we
           have
           Instances
           sufficient
           to
           Convince
           us
           ,
           that
           his
           Applications
           would
           meet
           with
           no
           Repulse
           .
           
             Mr.
             Stepny
             ,
             Mr.
             Prior
             ,
             Mr.
             Congreve
             ,
          
           and
           many
           more
           ,
           are
           as
           much
           Distinguish'd
           by
           Your
           Favor
           ,
           as
           by
           their
           own
           Merits
           ;
           the
           World
           at
           last
           being
           satisfied
           ,
           that
           Polite
           Learning
           in
           good
           Hands
           ,
           is
           so
           far
           from
           excluding
           Business
           ,
           that
           it
           gives
           a
           Grace
           to
           it
           ;
           and
           that
           a
           Genius
           truly
           Great
           ,
           will
           ,
           which
           way
           soever
           it
           is
           Directed
           ,
           Exert
           its
           Force
           and
           Maintain
           its
           Rank
           .
        
         
           You
           will
           please
           to
           bear
           this
           Freedom
           ,
           SIR
           ,
           in
           a
           Person
           who
           as
           little
           Capable
           as
           he
           is
           himself
           of
           making
           a
           right
           Iudgment
           of
           Men
           ,
           yet
           living
           in
           a
           Place
           ,
           where
           he
           is
           ever
           surrounded
           on
           all
           sides
           with
           Your
           Praises
           ,
           may
           have
           leave
           to
           Remember
           what
           he
           so
           often
           hears
           from
           the
           Knowing
           and
           Iudicious
           ,
           and
           
           to
           repeat
           a
           Character
           ,
           that
           comes
           Warranted
           to
           him
           ,
           by
           the
           most
           allow'd
           Authorities
           .
        
         
           The
           truest
           Mark
           of
           Worth
           ,
           SIR
           ,
           is
           to
           be
           Valued
           there
           ,
           where
           One
           is
           most
           Known
           .
           The
           People
           of
           Westminster
           ,
           who
           were
           acquainted
           with
           the
           First
           Parts
           of
           Your
           Life
           ,
           and
           have
           had
           the
           longest
           Experience
           of
           Your
           Virtues
           ,
           own
           Openly
           their
           just
           Esteem
           of
           You
           ,
           by
           Placing
           in
           You
           the
           Trust
           of
           Representing
           them
           in
           Parliament
           .
           'T
           is
           there
           ,
           in
           the
           Midst
           of
           Those
           that
           Choose
           You
           ,
           that
           Your
           Excellent
           Conduct
           of
           Publick
           Affairs
           is
           still
           Supplying
           Them
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           World
           ,
           with
           Fresh
           Matter
           of
           Applause
           and
           Admiration
           :
           But
           they
           had
           never
           more
           Reason
           to
           be
           Satisfied
           with
           their
           Choice
           ,
           than
           on
           that
           Glorious
           Day
           ,
           when
           Right
           was
           done
           to
           Your
           Merit
           ,
           by
           the
           Testimony
           of
           the
           Nation
           in
           a
           Vote
           of
           the
           
             House
             of
             Commons
          
           ;
           where
           it
           was
           
             Resolv'd
             ,
             That
             it
             is
             the
             Opinion
             of
             this
             House
             ,
             That
             the
             Honorable
             CHARLES
             MOUNTAGUE
             ESQUIRE
             ,
             CHANCELLOR
             OF
             THE
             EXCHEQUER
             ,
             for
             his
             Good
             Services
             to
             this
             Government
             ,
             do's
             Deserve
             His
             Majesty's
             Favor
             .
          
           A
           Vote
           ,
           that
           carries
           more
           Honor
           in
           it
           ,
           than
           all
           the
           Titles
           and
           Patents
           of
           Modern
           Heraldry
           ,
           than
           all
           the
           Inscriptions
           of
           Ancient
           Greece
           or
           Rome
           .
           What
           has
           ever
           happen'd
           like
           this
           to
           any
           of
           our
           Ancestors
           ,
           in
           all
           the
           Course
           of
           our
           Records
           and
           Histories
           ?
           Who
           besides
           ,
           has
           Receiv'd
           so
           Solemn
           ,
           so
           Noble
           ,
           and
           so
           Publick
           a
           Panegyrick
           from
           the
           Vocie
           of
           his
           Country
           ;
           Pronounc'd
           within
           those
           Walls
           ,
           where
           the
           
           Tongue
           is
           left
           to
           its
           Liberty
           ,
           and
           no
           Man
           Oblig'd
           to
           Speak
           otherwise
           than
           he
           Thinks
           ?
           'T
           is
           ,
           without
           doubt
           ,
           the
           First
           Wish
           an
           English-man
           would
           make
           ,
           thus
           to
           Deserve
           ,
           and
           Possess
           the
           United
           Favor
           of
           Prince
           and
           People
           ;
           and
           this
           Degree
           of
           Happiness
           has
           been
           Granted
           to
           You
           alone
           :
           The
           Next
           is
           ,
           to
           have
           a
           Place
           in
           the
           Good
           Opinion
           of
           Him
           that
           is
           so
           Universally
           Valued
           ;
           and
           this
           is
           the
           Utmost
           Ambition
           of
        
         
           
             SIR
             ,
          
           
             Your
             Most
             Humble
             and
             Most
             Obedient
             Servant
             
               WILLIAM
               COWPER
            
          
        
      
       
         
         
         
           THE
           INTRODUCTION
           Explaining
           the
           ANIMAL
           OECONOMY
           .
        
         
           THE
           Contemplation
           of
           Humane
           Bodies
           is
           doubtless
           one
           of
           the
           most
           Diverting
           and
           Noble
           Amusements
           ,
           in
           which
           a
           Philosophical
           Mind
           can
           employ
           it self
           .
           The
           Structure
           ,
           Contrivance
           ,
           and
           Disposition
           of
           the
           Parts
           are
           Astonishing
           ,
           and
           we
           can
           hardly
           desire
           more
           plain
           and
           convincing
           Proofs
           of
           the
           Wisdom
           and
           Providence
           of
           the
           Author
           of
           Nature
           ,
           than
           what
           may
           be
           deduc'd
           from
           this
           Source
           .
           How
           surpizing
           are
           the
           Discoveries
           which
           the
           Happy
           Industry
           of
           the
           present
           Age
           has
           made
           in
           the
           Animal
           World
           :
           The
           Doctrine
           of
           the
           Circulation
           of
           the
           Blood
           ;
           the
           Vnity
           of
           the
           Veins
           and
           Arteries
           ;
           the
           Origin
           and
           Distribution
           of
           the
           Chyle
           and
           Lympha
           ;
           the
           Ovaria
           in
           Females
           ;
           the
           Embriunculi
           in
           the
           Masculine
           Seed
           ,
           are
           equally
           certain
           and
           amazing
           ;
           besides
           a
           Multitude
           of
           other
           Curious
           Observations
           we
           Daily
           make
           by
           the
           Help
           of
           Microscopes
           ,
           Mercurial
           Injections
           ,
           and
           such
           like
           Methods
           .
        
         
           These
           are
           sufficient
           Motives
           to
           induce
           all
           Inquisitive
           Persons
           ,
           and
           Lovers
           of
           Natural
           History
           ,
           to
           the
           Study
           of
           Anatomy
           ;
           but
           all
           Professors
           of
           Medicine
           are
           more
           immediately
           concern'd
           to
           be
           Acquainted
           with
           it
           ;
           this
           being
           little
           less
           than
           the
           Basis
           and
           Foundation
           of
           their
           Art.
           Without
           a
           due
           Knowledge
           of
           the
           Animal
           Mechanism
           ,
           I
           doubt
           all
           our
           Attempts
           to
           Explain
           the
           Multiform
           Appearance
           of
           Animal
           Bodies
           ,
           will
           be
           Vain
           and
           Ineffectual
           ,
           and
           our
           Ideas
           of
           the
           Causes
           of
           Diseases
           and
           their
           Symptoms
           ,
           as
           Extravagant
           and
           Absurd
           as
           those
           of
           the
           Chinese
           and
           Indians
           ;
           nay
           I
           am
           afraid
           the
           whole
           Art
           of
           Physick
           will
           be
           little
           better
           than
           Empirical
           .
        
         
           But
           if
           the
           Knowledge
           of
           our
           Bodies
           do's
           so
           much
           conduce
           to
           advance
           true
           Philosophy
           and
           Medicine
           ;
           it
           is
           not
           less
           required
           in
           the
           Practice
           of
           Surgery
           :
           In
           this
           Case
           it
           seems
           not
           meerly
           convenient
           ,
           but
           absolutely
           necessary
           ;
           I
           mean
           so
           far
           as
           concerns
           the
           External
           Parts
           ,
           since
           the
           Artist
           here
           ,
           do's
           not
           as
           in
           the
           former
           Instances
           ,
           Acquiesce
           in
           Contemplating
           his
           Subject
           ,
           and
           the
           Manner
           how
           it
           is
           Affected
           ;
           but
           is
           often
           oblig'd
           to
           Perform
           some
           Difficult
           ,
           and
           perhaps
           Hazardous
           Operation
           on
           it
           .
           For
           my
           Part
           I
           cannot
           forbear
           wondring
           at
           the
           Confidence
           of
           Ignorant
           Men
           ,
           who
           dare
           Attack
           a
           Humane
           Body
           ,
           make
           Incisions
           ,
           apply
           Causticks
           Actual
           and
           Potential
           ;
           without
           a
           due
           Knowledge
           of
           the
           Site
           ,
           Position
           ,
           Dependance
           ,
           and
           other
           necessary
           Considerations
           of
           the
           Parts
           concern'd
           .
           The
           Fatal
           Consequences
           of
           these
           bold
           Practices
           are
           frequently
           felt
           ,
           an
           Instance
           or
           Two
           of
           which
           ,
           are
           Accidentally
           shewn
           ,
           Tab.
           13.
           
           Fig.
           1.
           
           Tab.
           15.
           
           Fig.
           2.
           
        
         
           I
           must
           confess
           frequent
           seeing
           and
           assisting
           at
           Chirurgical
           Operations
           may
           dispose
           Men
           to
           Perform
           the
           like
           again
           ,
           when
           Circumstances
           in
           all
           Points
           shall
           agree
           ;
           but
           without
           a
           Competent
           ,
           if
           not
           Accurate
           Knowledge
           of
           Anatomy
           ,
           and
           actual
           Administration
           of
           Dissection
           ,
           such
           Persons
           must
           be
           a
           long
           Time
           Spectators
           ,
           before
           they
           can
           Arrive
           at
           a
           tolerable
           Pretence
           to
           a
           General
           Practice
           :
           And
           therefore
           as
           I
           cannot
           but
           deplore
           the
           Profound
           and
           Universal
           Ignorance
           which
           prevails
           ,
           so
           I
           would
           candidly
           recommend
           it
           to
           most
           of
           the
           Surgeons
           in
           this
           vast
           and
           populous
           City
           ,
           to
           apply
           themselves
           with
           more
           Industry
           than
           they
           have
           hitherto
           done
           ,
           to
           so
           Useful
           a
           Part
           of
           their
           Art
           ;
           who
           would
           soon
           then
           be
           convinc'd
           this
           was
           no
           Dishonour
           to
           themselves
           ,
           and
           cease
           to
           Reproach
           others
           who
           have
           spent
           some
           of
           their
           vacant
           Hours
           in
           these
           Exercises
           .
        
         
           But
           this
           is
           foreign
           to
           my
           purpose
           ,
           and
           therefore
           I
           shall
           Address
           my self
           to
           the
           Business
           now
           before
           me
           ,
           which
           is
           to
           Present
           the
           Reader
           with
           a
           Brief
           and
           General
           Plan
           of
           the
           
             Animal
             Oeconomy
          
           ,
           as
           an
           Introduction
           to
           the
           following
           Tables
           .
        
         
           All
           the
           Functions
           of
           an
           Animate
           Body
           may
           be
           well
           enough
           divided
           into
           Natural
           and
           Animal
           ;
           by
           Natural
           ,
           I
           mean
           all
           which
           Terminate
           in
           the
           Body
           ,
           and
           Conduce
           to
           the
           preservation
           of
           the
           Individual
           or
           Propagation
           of
           the
           Species
           ;
           by
           Animal
           ,
           I
           understand
           such
           ,
           in
           which
           the
           Soul
           is
           concern'd
           ,
           which
           in
           Regard
           of
           the
           Body
           to
           which
           it
           is
           United
           ,
           are
           Passive
           or
           Active
           ;
           the
           First
           is
           Sense
           ;
           the
           Latter
           Voluntary
           Motion
           .
           For
           the
           more
           Orderly
           Distribution
           of
           the
           Whole
           ,
           we
           shall
           first
           Treat
           of
           the
           Former
           ,
           leaving
           the
           Animal
           Functions
           to
           succeed
           ;
           and
           here
           we
           shall
           follow
           the
           Process
           of
           Nature
           ;
           beginning
           with
           the
           First
           Reception
           of
           the
           Aliment
           in
           the
           Mouth
           ,
           and
           pursuing
           it
           thence
           thro'
           its
           several
           Stages
           .
        
         
           After
           the
           Aliment
           is
           taken
           into
           the
           Mouth
           ,
           (
           for
           the
           more
           Commodious
           doing
           of
           which
           ,
           the
           
             Dentes
             Incisorii
          
           are
           often
           Employ'd
           )
           it
           here
           suffers
           Comminution
           ,
           and
           is
           mixt
           with
           Saliva
           ,
           which
           is
           Previous
           to
           the
           Second
           Preparation
           ,
           it
           receives
           in
           the
           Stomach
           .
           This
           Operation
           is
           call'd
           Mastication
           ,
           and
           is
           perform'd
           by
           the
           Lower
           Jaw
           ,
           Variously
           mov'd
           by
           its
           Proper
           Muscles
           ,
           and
           Assisted
           by
           the
           Tongue
           ,
           Cheeks
           ,
           and
           Lips
           ;
           which
           last
           ,
           still
           apply
           the
           Less
           divided
           Parts
           of
           the
           Mass
           ,
           to
           the
           
             Dentes
             Molares
          
           ,
           for
           it
           's
           due
           Comminution
           ;
           while
           all
           the
           Neighbouring
           Muscles
           in
           their
           several
           Actions
           ,
           Compress
           the
           Parotid
           ,
           Maxillary
           ,
           Sublingual
           Salivary
           Glands
           ,
           and
           those
           of
           the
           Lips
           ,
           Cheeks
           ,
           &c.
           and
           force
           them
           to
           Discharge
           their
           Contents
           to
           mix
           with
           the
           Masticated
           Aliment
           ,
           now
           ready
           for
           Deglutition
           .
        
         
           The
           Aliment
           after
           it
           has
           undergone
           this
           Alteration
           ,
           do's
           not
           Descend
           into
           the
           Stomach
           by
           its
           own
           Weight
           ,
           but
           is
           convey'd
           thither
           by
           the
           joint
           Action
           of
           the
           Muscles
           of
           the
           Tongue
           ,
           
             Os
             Hyoides
             ,
             Fauces
          
           ,
           and
           Oesophagus
           ;
           all
           which
           Conspire
           in
           Deglutition
           ,
           by
           Raising
           and
           Dilating
           the
           Gula
           ,
           and
           Protruding
           the
           Meat
           into
           it
           .
           The
           whole
           Action
           do's
           very
           much
           resemble
           the
           pouring
           Corn
           into
           a
           Sack
           ,
           and
           is
           done
           in
           the
           Manner
           I
           shall
           just
           now
           Describe
           .
           The
           Root
           of
           the
           Tongue
           being
           Deprest
           by
           means
           of
           its
           Muscular
           Fibres
           ,
           its
           Tip
           and
           Sides
           are
           applied
           in
           a
           Semicircular
           Manner
           ,
           to
           the
           Insides
           of
           the
           whole
           Range
           of
           Teeth
           of
           the
           Upper
           Jaw
           or
           Gums
           ,
           when
           these
           happen
           to
           be
           wanting
           ;
           and
           the
           Whole
           in
           this
           Position
           is
           drawn
           Upwards
           ,
           by
           the
           
             Musculi
             Styloglossi
          
           and
           
             Stylohyoidei
             ,
             Tab.
          
           14.
           
           Fig.
           1.
           
           Tab.
           15.
           
           Fig.
           1.
           
           At
           the
           same
           Time
           the
           Fauces
           are
           Rais'd
           by
           the
           
             Musculi
             Stylopharyngaei
          
           ,
           which
           by
           their
           Oblique
           Position
           ,
           (
           as
           is
           Noted
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           38.
           )
           draw
           open
           their
           Mouth
           ,
           and
           Dilate
           that
           Cavity
           .
           Now
           Two
           Thirds
           at
           least
           of
           the
           Upper
           Surface
           of
           the
           Tongue
           ,
           being
           applied
           to
           the
           Roof
           of
           the
           Mouth
           ,
           and
           drawn
           as
           we
           have
           now
           Describ'd
           ,
           Upwards
           ,
           and
           Inwards
           ;
           the
           Epiglottis
           is
           Deprest
           in
           such
           Manner
           ,
           that
           the
           Aliment
           is
           Protruded
           over
           it
           (
           as
           on
           a
           Bridge
           )
           into
           the
           Dilated
           Cavity
           of
           the
           Fauces
           ,
           and
           thence
           by
           the
           Contraction
           of
           the
           
             Musculus
             Pterygopharyngaeus
          
           and
           
             Oesophagaeus
             ,
             App.
             Fig.
          
           38.
           it
           is
           Deprest
           into
           the
           Gulae
           ,
           which
           Helps
           its
           Descent
           into
           the
           Stomach
           ,
           by
           the
           Action
           of
           its
           Muscular
           Fibres
           .
        
         
           We
           must
           not
           omit
           to
           observe
           here
           ,
           That
           in
           the
           Instant
           the
           Aliment
           passes
           thro'
           the
           Isthmus
           of
           the
           Throat
           ,
           the
           Gargareon
           is
           drawn
           Upwards
           and
           Backwards
           ,
           by
           the
           
             Musculi
             Sphaenostaphylini
          
           ,
           (
           Exprest
           
             Append.
             Fig.
          
           8.
           )
           and
           the
           
           
             Foramina
             Narium
          
           by
           this
           means
           occluded
           ,
           while
           the
           Epiglottis
           below
           covers
           the
           Rimula
           ,
           as
           was
           above
           Noted
           ;
           and
           by
           this
           means
           the
           Matter
           in
           its
           Passage
           is
           hindred
           from
           Reverting
           by
           the
           Nose
           ,
           or
           Descending
           into
           the
           Wind-Pipe
           ;
           The
           first
           happens
           when
           the
           Gargareon
           is
           wanting
           ,
           whether
           by
           Venerial
           Exulcerations
           or
           otherwise
           ;
           or
           Intumified
           and
           Inflamed
           as
           in
           the
           Small
           Pox
           ,
           and
           cannot
           yield
           to
           this
           Motion
           .
           We
           may
           likewise
           Note
           ,
           That
           the
           
             Musculus
             Mylohyoideus
          
           (
           T.
           15.
           
           F.
           1.
           )
           in
           its
           Action
           does
           press
           the
           Sublingual
           and
           Maxillary
           Glands
           ,
           and
           force
           them
           to
           discharge
           their
           secreted
           Liquors
           ,
           by
           the
           Papillae
           ,
           situated
           at
           the
           Fraenum
           or
           Ligament
           of
           the
           Tongue
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           Muscles
           which
           Contract
           the
           Fauces
           ,
           have
           the
           same
           Effect
           on
           the
           Tonsills
           and
           other
           Glands
           of
           that
           Part
           ;
           all
           which
           Liquors
           ,
           discharged
           from
           the
           Mouths
           of
           their
           Excretory
           Channels
           ,
           do
           facilitate
           the
           Passage
           thro'
           the
           Gula
           ,
           and
           serve
           to
           Compose
           the
           Stomachick
           Menstruum
           ;
           of
           which
           further
           in
           the
           next
           Paragraph
           .
        
         
           After
           the
           Aliment
           ,
           thus
           alter'd
           by
           Comminution
           and
           Admistion
           with
           the
           Saliva
           ,
           is
           received
           into
           the
           Stomach
           ,
           we
           proceed
           next
           to
           consider
           ,
           how
           its
           Second
           Preparation
           is
           perform'd
           .
           The
           great
           Agent
           in
           Digestion
           is
           the
           Stomachick
           Juice
           ,
           secreted
           from
           the
           Blood
           by
           numerous
           Glands
           in
           this
           Part
           ,
           and
           discharged
           into
           its
           Cavity
           ,
           in
           Conjunction
           with
           the
           Spittle
           .
           This
           is
           that
           which
           acts
           promptly
           upon
           the
           Meat
           lodg'd
           in
           the
           Capacity
           of
           the
           Stomach
           ,
           and
           from
           the
           Mixture
           of
           these
           two
           Juices
           ,
           is
           compounded
           a
           proper
           Menstruum
           ,
           by
           which
           the
           Parts
           of
           the
           Aliment
           are
           dissolved
           ,
           and
           receive
           their
           first
           Transmutation
           within
           the
           Body
           .
           In
           this
           Action
           ,
           which
           is
           a
           Dissolution
           of
           the
           Texture
           of
           the
           Alimentary
           Mass
           ,
           the
           Aerial
           Parts
           included
           in
           its
           Pores
           ,
           now
           escape
           from
           their
           former
           Prisons
           ,
           and
           being
           rarified
           ,
           distend
           the
           whole
           Body
           of
           the
           Stomach
           ;
           and
           this
           I
           take
           to
           be
           the
           true
           Reason
           why
           most
           Men
           have
           less
           Appetite
           at
           some
           distance
           of
           Time
           ,
           viz.
           when
           this
           Intumescence
           is
           made
           ,
           than
           immediately
           after
           they
           cease
           from
           Eating
           :
           From
           the
           same
           Cause
           arise
           frequent
           Eructations
           ,
           great
           Inflation
           from
           divers
           Meats
           ,
           such
           as
           Old
           Pease
           ,
           Cabbage
           ,
           Roots
           ,
           Herbs
           ,
           and
           other
           Vegetables
           ,
           which
           very
           much
           disturb
           decay'd
           debilitated
           Stomachs
           .
           I
           am
           apt
           to
           suspect
           the
           Stomachick
           Menstruum
           may
           excite
           an
           Intestine
           motion
           of
           the
           Particles
           of
           the
           Mass
           in
           Digestion
           ;
           which
           yet
           I
           do
           not
           think
           fit
           to
           call
           Fermentation
           ,
           fearing
           so
           bold
           a
           Term
           may
           mislead
           us
           into
           a
           False
           Idea
           of
           a
           greater
           Conflict
           than
           really
           happens
           .
        
         
           The
           Intumescence
           or
           Dilatation
           of
           the
           Stomach
           has
           two
           Effects
           :
           First
           to
           compress
           the
           Gall
           Bladder
           and
           Pancreas
           ,
           and
           oblige
           their
           
             Ductus
             Excretorii
          
           to
           spue
           out
           their
           Contents
           into
           the
           Duodenum
           ;
           next
           to
           retard
           the
           Refluent
           Blood
           ,
           and
           by
           this
           means
           dispose
           the
           Muscular
           Fibres
           of
           the
           Ventricle
           to
           a
           Contraction
           .
           The
           Reason
           of
           this
           last
           Hint
           will
           appear
           by
           what
           we
           have
           offer'd
           concerning
           Muscular
           Motion
           ,
           in
           the
           Introduction
           to
           our
           
             Myotomia
             Reformata
          
           .
        
         
           For
           the
           Cause
           of
           Hunger
           which
           is
           an
           observable
           Phaenomenon
           belonging
           to
           this
           part
           ,
           I
           conceive
           it
           to
           be
           an
           Irritation
           of
           the
           Stomach
           ,
           arising
           from
           a
           copious
           Quantity
           of
           this
           Menstruum
           ,
           when
           it
           wants
           Matter
           to
           act
           upon
           .
           This
           conjecture
           seems
           more
           probable
           ,
           since
           it
           is
           Natural
           to
           discharge
           the
           Spittle
           out
           of
           the
           Mouth
           which
           comes
           into
           it
           at
           that
           Time
           ,
           rather
           than
           suffer
           it
           to
           descend
           into
           the
           Stomach
           ;
           and
           we
           may
           perpetually
           observe
           a
           depraved
           Appetite
           does
           follow
           a
           Vitiation
           of
           the
           Saliva
           ,
           as
           in
           Scorbutick
           Habits
           ,
           Salivations
           by
           Mercurial
           Medicines
           ,
           and
           such
           like
           Cases
           .
        
         
           When
           the
           Mass
           is
           sufficiently
           prepar'd
           and
           reduced
           to
           a
           Pultaceous
           Consistence
           ,
           the
           Stomach
           by
           the
           help
           of
           its
           Muscular
           Fibres
           contracts
           it self
           ,
           and
           expels
           its
           Contents
           thro'
           the
           Pylorus
           into
           the
           Duodenum
           ;
           where
           the
           Digested
           Mass
           is
           mixed
           with
           the
           Bile
           and
           Pancreatick
           Juice
           ,
           (
           forced
           to
           discharge
           it self
           here
           as
           was
           just
           now
           described
           )
           which
           Volatilize
           ,
           Subtiliate
           ,
           and
           Separate
           the
           more
           Fluid
           and
           Fine
           Parts
           of
           the
           Aliment
           ,
           from
           the
           more
           Impure
           and
           Gross
           ,
           and
           here
           it
           is
           that
           Chylification
           is
           first
           made
           perfect
           .
           Now
           the
           Bile
           abounding
           with
           Lixivial
           Salt
           ,
           is
           apt
           to
           intangle
           with
           the
           grosser
           Parts
           of
           the
           Chylaceous
           Mass
           ,
           and
           its
           Saline
           Quality
           not
           only
           cleanses
           the
           Cavities
           of
           the
           Guts
           from
           the
           Mucus
           ,
           Excreted
           by
           their
           Glands
           (
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           40.
           )
           (
           to
           smear
           their
           Inmost
           Coat
           ,
           and
           defend
           the
           Ostia
           of
           the
           Lacteal
           Vessels
           from
           being
           injured
           by
           Extraneous
           Bodies
           ,
           which
           may
           happen
           to
           pass
           that
           way
           )
           but
           Stimulates
           the
           Intestines
           in
           their
           Peristaltick
           Motion
           .
        
         
           The
           Peristaltick
           or
           Wormlike
           Motion
           of
           the
           Guts
           being
           thus
           Accelerated
           by
           the
           Acrimony
           of
           the
           Bile
           ,
           the
           Contents
           of
           the
           Intestines
           are
           carried
           on
           ,
           and
           the
           Thinner
           and
           more
           Fluid
           Parts
           ,
           fitted
           for
           the
           Pores
           of
           the
           Lacteal
           Vessels
           ,
           is
           absorbed
           by
           them
           ,
           and
           the
           Thicker
           move
           on
           more
           slowly
           ,
           till
           by
           the
           many
           Stops
           they
           meet
           with
           in
           the
           Connivent
           Valves
           ,
           all
           the
           Chyle
           is
           at
           length
           absorbed
           ,
           and
           the
           Remains
           being
           meerly
           Excrementitious
           ,
           are
           only
           fit
           to
           be
           excluded
           by
           Stool
           .
        
         
           This
           Vermicular
           Motion
           of
           the
           Guts
           ,
           is
           perform'd
           by
           the
           Alternate
           Contraction
           of
           their
           Longitudinal
           and
           Transverse
           Fibres
           ,
           (
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           39.40
           .
           )
           which
           at
           the
           same
           Time
           convey
           the
           Digested
           Mass
           thro'
           the
           Intestinal
           Tube
           ,
           and
           express
           the
           Chyle
           into
           the
           Orifices
           of
           the
           Lacteal
           Vessels
           adapted
           to
           receive
           it
           ;
           whose
           Progress
           from
           the
           Intestines
           ,
           till
           it
           is
           discharged
           into
           the
           Mass
           of
           Blood
           ,
           next
           presents
           it self
           to
           our
           Consideration
           :
           By
           the
           reciprocal
           Action
           of
           these
           differing
           Fibres
           ,
           and
           the
           Apposition
           of
           the
           Connivent
           Valves
           (
           Tab.
           39.
           
           Fig.
           2.
           )
           the
           Chyle
           is
           forced
           into
           the
           Lacteal
           Vessels
           ,
           
             Tab.
             ib.
             Fig.
          
           1.
           )
           and
           hence
           it
           is
           we
           cannot
           make
           any
           Fluid
           pass
           from
           the
           Cavity
           of
           the
           Guts
           into
           the
           same
           Vessels
           ,
           when
           the
           Peristaltick
           Motion
           ceases
           .
           A
           farther
           Use
           of
           the
           Contraction
           of
           these
           Muscular
           Fibres
           ,
           is
           to
           Accelerate
           the
           Chyle
           in
           its
           Progress
           ,
           till
           the
           Lympha
           derived
           from
           the
           Arteries
           of
           the
           Guts
           joyn
           with
           it
           ,
           which
           is
           done
           before
           it
           leaves
           the
           External
           Surface
           of
           the
           Intestines
           ;
           by
           this
           Addition
           the
           Chyle
           is
           diluted
           and
           assisted
           in
           its
           Progress
           towards
           the
           Mesenterick
           Glands
           ;
           in
           the
           Cells
           of
           which
           it
           is
           a
           Second
           Time
           Mixed
           with
           a
           Juice
           or
           Lymphatick
           Liquor
           there
           Secreted
           from
           the
           Arteries
           ,
           and
           so
           carried
           on
           to
           the
           
             Vasa
             Lactea
             secundi
             Generis
          
           .
           These
           Vessels
           resembling
           Pipes
           ,
           convey
           the
           Chyle
           from
           hence
           ,
           all
           emptying
           themselves
           into
           the
           
             Common
             Receptacle
          
           or
           Cistern
           ;
           the
           happy
           Discovery
           of
           which
           ,
           we
           owe
           to
           the
           Observation
           of
           Mons.
           Pecquet
           :
           It
           is
           here
           the
           Lympha
           returned
           from
           the
           Inferior
           Limbs
           and
           adjacent
           Parts
           ,
           is
           mixed
           with
           the
           Chyle
           ,
           (
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           11.
           )
           which
           not
           only
           serves
           to
           dilute
           ,
           but
           promotes
           its
           Ascent
           thro'
           the
           Thoracick
           Duct
           ,
           (
           
             Fig.
             ib.
          
           )
           to
           the
           Lest
           Subclavian
           Vein
           ,
           (
           
             Fig.
             ib.
          
           )
           where
           this
           Channel
           empties
           its
           Contents
           into
           the
           main
           Current
           of
           the
           Blood.
           If
           we
           consider
           in
           this
           Duct
           ,
           its
           several
           Divisions
           and
           Inosculations
           ,
           (
           resembling
           the
           Veins
           of
           the
           Testicles
           )
           its
           numerous
           Valves
           looking
           from
           below
           Upwards
           ,
           its
           advantageous
           Situation
           between
           the
           Great
           Artery
           and
           Vertebrae
           of
           the
           Back
           ,
           together
           with
           the
           Ducts
           discharging
           their
           Refluent
           Lympha
           from
           the
           Lungs
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           Neighbouring
           Parts
           ,
           we
           shall
           find
           all
           conduce
           to
           demonstrate
           the
           utmost
           Art
           of
           Nature
           ,
           used
           in
           furthering
           the
           Steep
           and
           Perpendicular
           Ascent
           of
           the
           Chyle
           ;
           which
           Beautiful
           Order
           is
           Represented
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           11.
           and
           cannot
           but
           equally
           Create
           in
           us
           Delight
           and
           Admiration
           .
        
         
           Having
           traced
           this
           Animal
           Juice
           to
           its
           Reception
           into
           the
           Blood
           ,
           with
           which
           it
           is
           at
           last
           Circulated
           and
           Assimulated
           ,
           we
           shall
           proceed
           to
           the
           Blood
           it self
           ,
           whose
           Circular
           Motion
           ,
           the
           various
           Artifices
           of
           Nature
           for
           adjusting
           the
           Proportions
           and
           other
           subordinate
           Contrivances
           ;
           the
           Manner
           and
           Cause
           of
           the
           Contraction
           of
           the
           Heart
           and
           Arteries
           ,
           Respiration
           ,
           with
           the
           whole
           Theory
           of
           the
           Lympha
           and
           Glandular
           Secretion
           in
           the
           Order
           of
           Nature
           ,
           follow
           .
        
         
           The
           Refluent
           Blood
           in
           the
           Upper
           and
           Lower
           Trunk
           of
           the
           
             Vena
             Cava
          
           meeting
           in
           the
           Right
           Auricle
           of
           the
           Heart
           ,
           is
           thence
           expelled
           by
           its
           Contraction
           into
           the
           Right
           Ventricle
           ,
           when
           the
           Heart
           is
           in
           its
           Diastole
           ;
           but
           by
           its
           Systole
           or
           Contraction
           ,
           it
           is
           thence
           driven
           into
           the
           
             Arteria
             Pulmonaris
          
           ,
           from
           whose
           Capillary
           Vessels
           it
           passes
           into
           the
           Extremities
           of
           the
           
             Vena
             Pulmonaris
          
           ,
           and
           thence
           returning
           ,
           is
           discharged
           into
           the
           Left
           Auricle
           and
           Ventricle
           of
           the
           Heart
           :
           From
           whence
           it
           is
           again
           by
           the
           Systole
           driven
           into
           the
           Aorta
           ,
           by
           whose
           Branches
           it
           is
           convey'd
           thro'
           the
           whole
           System
           of
           the
           Body
           :
           But
           when
           it
           arrives
           in
           the
           Capillary
           Arteries
           ,
           it
           do's
           not
           stop
           there
           ,
           but
           passes
           into
           the
           like
           Capillary
           Veins
           ,
           and
           from
           thence
           into
           the
           greater
           Branches
           ,
           next
           into
           the
           Trunk
           of
           the
           
             Vena
             Cava
          
           ,
           and
           so
           into
           the
           Right
           Ventricle
           again
           .
           In
           the
           mean
           time
           the
           Three
           Tricuspid
           Valves
           in
           the
           Right
           (
           Tab.
           22.
           
           Fig.
           6.
           )
           and
           the
           two
           Mitral
           Valves
           (
           
             Tab.
             ead
             .
             Fig.
          
           12.
           )
           in
           the
           Left
           Ventricle
           of
           the
           Heart
           ,
           oppose
           its
           return
           into
           the
           
             Vena
             Cava
          
           and
           
             Vena
             Pulmonaris
          
           ;
           and
           the
           Semilunary
           Valves
           of
           the
           
             Arteria
             Pulmonaris
          
           (
           
             Tab.
             ead
             .
             Fig.
          
           14.
           )
           and
           Aorta
           ,
           (
           
             Tab.
             ib.
             Fig.
          
           13.
           )
           prevent
           its
           Reflux
           into
           the
           Ventricles
           .
           The
           Structure
           and
           Position
           of
           which
           Membranes
           ,
           are
           sufficient
           alone
           to
           lead
           all
           Observing
           Men
           into
           a
           compleat
           Knowledge
           of
           its
           Motion
           and
           Progress
           .
        
         
           The
           Circular
           Motion
           of
           the
           Blood
           was
           first
           Explain'd
           ,
           and
           the
           whole
           Demonstrated
           in
           a
           Treatise
           expresly
           Writ
           upon
           that
           Subject
           ,
           and
           Published
           in
           the
           Year
           1628.
           by
           our
           Learned
           and
           Ingenious
           Dr.
           Harvey
           ;
           To
           omit
           all
           disputes
           here
           how
           far
           this
           was
           known
           to
           
             Cesalpinus
             ,
             Columbus
             ,
             Servetus
          
           ,
           or
           any
           of
           the
           Anatomists
           or
           Virtuoso's
           of
           the
           last
           Age.
           But
           the
           Manner
           how
           this
           Animal
           Liquor
           is
           transmitted
           from
           the
           Arteries
           to
           the
           Veins
           ,
           has
           remained
           hitherto
           a
           Secret
           ,
           and
           afforded
           Matter
           of
           Controversie
           .
           Some
           pretend
           this
           is
           done
           by
           some
           blind
           Imperceptible
           Meatus
           in
           the
           Carnous
           Parts
           ,
           and
           perplex
           themselves
           to
           give
           Irrational
           and
           Chimerical
           Accounts
           ,
           which
           we
           shall
           not
           here
           lose
           Time
           to
           enumerate
           or
           refute
           .
           But
           the
           late
           great
           Improvement
           of
           Microscopes
           has
           put
           an
           end
           to
           all
           these
           uncertain
           Conjectures
           ,
           by
           discovering
           to
           our
           Naked
           Eye
           ,
           that
           the
           Veins
           and
           Arteries
           are
           but
           one
           continued
           inflected
           Tube
           ,
           and
           the
           Blood
           passes
           from
           one
           to
           the
           other
           in
           an
           uninterrupted
           Current
           ;
           which
           Unity
           of
           the
           Blood-Vessels
           by
           a
           Parity
           of
           Reason
           ,
           we
           infer
           extends
           to
           the
           whole
           System
           ,
           and
           will
           hardly
           be
           questioned
           by
           those
           who
           consider
           the
           Prompt
           Passage
           of
           Mercury
           ,
           and
           other
           injected
           Liquors
           from
           the
           Arteries
           to
           the
           Veins
           ,
           or
           see
           the
           Globules
           of
           Blood
           passing
           these
           Angustia
           ,
           and
           reverting
           with
           incredible
           Rapidity
           in
           the
           
           Fins
           of
           Fishes
           ;
           (
           
             App.
             F.
          
           4
           ,
           5.
           )
           which
           curious
           Discovery
           ought
           not
           to
           be
           reputed
           the
           least
           Advancement
           which
           this
           Part
           of
           Natural
           History
           has
           receiv'd
           .
        
         
           The
           great
           Engine
           which
           sets
           all
           this
           Motion
           on
           Foot
           ,
           is
           the
           Heart
           ,
           (
           Tab.
           22.
           
           Fig.
           9.
           )
           by
           whose
           repeated
           Elastick
           Contraction
           ,
           the
           Blood
           is
           driven
           to
           the
           remotest
           Parts
           thro'
           the
           Arterial
           System
           ,
           (
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           3.
           )
           and
           forced
           to
           continue
           its
           Motion
           back
           thro'
           the
           Venous
           Channels
           .
           This
           Elastick
           Force
           is
           primarily
           seated
           in
           its
           own
           Muscular
           Fibres
           ,
           whose
           Spiral
           Contortion
           (
           Tab.
           22.
           
           Fig.
           2
           ,
           3.
           )
           is
           very
           well
           described
           by
           Dr.
           Lower
           in
           his
           Book
           
             De
             Corde
          
           ;
           but
           the
           Pendulous
           Position
           and
           the
           Fibres
           ,
           which
           compose
           its
           Great
           Arteries
           ,
           
             i.
             e.
          
           the
           Pulmonaris
           and
           Aorta
           ,
           assist
           very
           much
           ;
           and
           the
           Heart
           taken
           out
           of
           the
           Body
           and
           held
           up
           by
           the
           Arteries
           ,
           will
           continue
           the
           least
           gentle
           Motion
           imprest
           on
           it
           for
           a
           considerable
           Time
           ,
           which
           Effect
           can
           only
           be
           ascribed
           to
           the
           Elasticity
           of
           the
           Arterial
           Trunks
           by
           which
           it
           is
           suspended
           .
        
         
           The
           Heart
           is
           the
           immediate
           Instrument
           ,
           but
           what
           is
           the
           
             Vis
             Motrix
          
           which
           forces
           its
           Fibres
           to
           a
           Contraction
           ,
           is
           a
           far
           greater
           Difficulty
           ,
           and
           one
           of
           the
           most
           Abstruse
           ,
           Inscrutable
           Mysteries
           of
           Nature
           .
           It
           is
           in
           this
           respect
           our
           Bodies
           differ
           from
           Artificial
           Machines
           ;
           the
           Former
           having
           in
           themselves
           a
           perpetual
           Principle
           of
           Motion
           ,
           which
           the
           Latter
           by
           no
           Invention
           of
           Men
           can
           arrive
           at
           .
           In
           my
           Opinion
           the
           Heart
           of
           an
           Animal
           bears
           a
           great
           Analogy
           to
           the
           Pendulums
           of
           those
           Artificial
           Automata
           ,
           Clocks
           and
           Watches
           ,
           whilst
           its
           Motion
           is
           perform'd
           like
           that
           of
           other
           Muscles
           ,
           the
           Blood
           doing
           the
           Office
           of
           a
           Pondus
           .
           The
           Observation
           of
           the
           Curious
           Mons.
           
             Peyer
             in
             Parergo
             Septimo
          
           ,
           seems
           to
           favour
           this
           Opinion
           ;
           who
           tells
           us
           ,
           He
           has
           with
           Pleasure
           seen
           the
           Heart
           renew
           its
           Contraction
           ,
           by
           blowing
           into
           the
           Thoracick
           Duct
           ,
           when
           the
           Parts
           have
           began
           to
           grow
           stiff
           after
           Death
           .
           The
           like
           Motion
           of
           the
           Heart
           I
           have
           more
           than
           once
           observ'd
           to
           be
           restor'd
           ,
           by
           blowing
           into
           the
           Veins
           of
           a
           Dog
           ,
           and
           pouring
           warm
           Water
           on
           it
           ,
           or
           applying
           the
           Palm
           of
           the
           Hand
           not
           long
           after
           its
           Cessation
           .
        
         
           Besides
           the
           Quantity
           ,
           doubtless
           the
           Quality
           of
           the
           Blood
           has
           a
           Share
           ,
           since
           all
           Distempers
           which
           alter
           the
           Mass
           ,
           at
           the
           same
           Time
           create
           a
           Hurry
           and
           Disorder
           in
           its
           Motion
           .
           To
           explain
           the
           Action
           of
           the
           Blood
           in
           this
           Case
           ,
           and
           the
           Influence
           it
           has
           over
           the
           Motion
           of
           the
           Heart
           ,
           we
           must
           consider
           its
           Nature
           ,
           Constituent
           Parts
           ,
           and
           the
           Alterations
           it
           is
           disposed
           to
           receive
           .
           This
           Animal
           Fluid
           consists
           of
           Two
           Parts
           ,
           Serous
           and
           Globular
           .
           The
           Distinction
           of
           these
           Parts
           of
           the
           Blood
           is
           evident
           to
           the
           Naked
           Eye
           ,
           after
           its
           Stagnation
           in
           any
           Vessel
           ,
           but
           is
           clearly
           evinced
           by
           the
           Microscope
           in
           its
           Circulation
           thro'
           the
           Tails
           and
           Fins
           of
           Fishes
           ,
           and
           other
           Transparent
           Parts
           ,
           in
           the
           same
           manner
           as
           is
           Represented
           
             Appendix
             Fig.
          
           4
           ,
           5.
           where
           the
           Globules
           seem
           to
           Swim
           in
           the
           Serum
           in
           this
           state
           of
           Mixture
           .
           Now
           the
           Blood
           being
           in
           this
           manner
           a
           Heterogeneous
           Liquor
           ,
           Compos'd
           of
           Particles
           of
           various
           Magnitude
           and
           Figure
           ,
           must
           be
           subject
           to
           an
           Intestine
           Motion
           ;
           but
           the
           great
           Rapidity
           of
           its
           Current
           thro'
           the
           Arteries
           ,
           and
           the
           Angustiae
           in
           the
           Extremities
           of
           the
           Blood-Vessels
           ,
           not
           admitting
           any
           Retrograde
           Motion
           to
           be
           there
           made
           ,
           it
           is
           deferr'd
           till
           it
           arrives
           in
           the
           Great
           Veins
           ,
           where
           its
           Progress
           is
           retarded
           ,
           and
           the
           Room
           more
           spatious
           ,
           and
           the
           Intestine
           Motion
           there
           Commences
           ,
           which
           arises
           to
           a
           Greater
           or
           Less
           Height
           ,
           as
           the
           Blood
           is
           more
           or
           less
           Charged
           with
           Incongruous
           Parts
           .
           The
           Alteration
           which
           the
           Blood
           by
           this
           means
           receives
           ,
           has
           no
           inconsiderable
           Share
           in
           the
           Heart's
           Contraction
           ;
           and
           tho
           it
           be
           not
           the
           prime
           efficient
           Cause
           ,
           yet
           we
           cannot
           deny
           but
           that
           it
           is
           Partial
           and
           Incitative
           ,
           as
           appears
           in
           Fevers
           and
           several
           other
           Distempers
           ,
           where
           the
           whole
           Mass
           is
           Accelerated
           ,
           and
           the
           Pulse
           more
           frequent
           .
        
         
           Besides
           all
           these
           Causes
           ,
           the
           Brain
           by
           its
           Nervous
           Trunks
           sent
           to
           this
           Part
           ,
           which
           are
           very
           Thick
           and
           Tense
           ,
           yet
           lie
           very
           loose
           ,
           contributes
           much
           to
           this
           Action
           .
           And
           here
           we
           may
           observe
           ,
           not
           only
           these
           of
           the
           Heart
           ,
           but
           the
           whole
           System
           of
           Nerves
           which
           serve
           the
           Viscera
           in
           the
           Thorax
           and
           Lower
           Belly
           ,
           have
           their
           Propagines
           very
           Numerous
           and
           Tense
           ,
           notwithstanding
           which
           ,
           they
           lie
           Loose
           or
           Free
           in
           their
           Progress
           from
           the
           Brain
           to
           their
           respective
           Parts
           ;
           both
           which
           concur
           in
           disposing
           them
           to
           Receive
           and
           Retain
           all
           Impressions
           from
           their
           Extremities
           :
           This
           Faculty
           beginning
           to
           Exert
           it self
           even
           while
           the
           Foetus
           is
           in
           Vtero
           ,
           grows
           Familiar
           and
           Natural
           ,
           and
           from
           this
           early
           Habit
           and
           Practice
           of
           the
           Infant
           ,
           they
           after
           perform
           their
           Duty
           Sleeping
           or
           Waking
           ,
           without
           the
           least
           Advertence
           ;
           but
           this
           by
           the
           by
           .
           And
           now
           if
           what
           has
           been
           Noted
           ,
           shall
           be
           thought
           sufficient
           to
           give
           ground
           to
           Hope
           Future
           Enquiries
           may
           discover
           more
           Adequate
           Causes
           of
           this
           great
           Phaenomenon
           ,
           we
           have
           obtained
           our
           Desire
           ,
           and
           shall
           leave
           these
           Hints
           to
           be
           improv'd
           by
           Men
           of
           more
           Industry
           and
           Leasure
           .
        
         
           Before
           we
           leave
           this
           Subject
           ,
           we
           must
           not
           omit
           to
           Remark
           some
           Observable
           Artifices
           of
           Nature
           ,
           for
           the
           better
           carrying
           on
           the
           Circulation
           .
           The
           First
           is
           the
           Valves
           placed
           in
           the
           several
           Divarications
           of
           the
           Veins
           ,
           between
           their
           Capillar
           Extremities
           and
           Larger
           Trunks
           :
           These
           are
           Membranes
           proceeding
           from
           the
           inner
           Coat
           of
           the
           Vessels
           ,
           in
           the
           Form
           of
           a
           Crescent
           or
           C.
           which
           was
           the
           Ancient
           Greek
           Sigma
           ,
           and
           are
           generally
           Double
           ,
           with
           their
           Concavity
           looking
           towards
           the
           Heart
           ,
           and
           readily
           give
           way
           to
           the
           Current
           of
           the
           Blood
           thither
           ,
           as
           is
           Represented
           :
           (
           Tab.
           23.
           
           F.
           7.
           )
           But
           if
           by
           its
           Weight
           ,
           or
           any
           other
           Cause
           ,
           the
           Blood
           should
           Revert
           ,
           they
           oppose
           it
           ,
           and
           being
           Distended
           ,
           prevent
           its
           Return
           from
           the
           Great
           Trunks
           of
           Veins
           to
           the
           Lesser
           ,
           and
           at
           the
           same
           time
           hinder
           the
           Superincumbing
           Blood
           from
           pressing
           on
           the
           Inferior
           ;
           concerning
           which
           consult
           Tab.
           23.
           
           Fig.
           6.
           
        
         
           Another
           Considerable
           Artifice
           in
           Nature
           ,
           is
           the
           Conveying
           great
           Quantities
           of
           Refluent
           Blood
           from
           several
           Parts
           of
           the
           Trunk
           by
           particular
           Channels
           ,
           instead
           of
           discharging
           it
           by
           the
           next
           and
           most
           immediate
           Passage
           into
           the
           Neighbouring
           Current
           .
           Dr.
           Lower
           has
           well
           Observ'd
           ,
           that
           the
           Heart
           is
           not
           placed
           in
           the
           Center
           of
           the
           Body
           ,
           but
           inclines
           to
           its
           Upper
           Part
           ,
           which
           Position
           is
           necessary
           to
           Drive
           the
           Blood
           in
           its
           Systole
           to
           the
           Head
           ,
           with
           more
           Force
           then
           is
           required
           to
           make
           it
           Descend
           to
           the
           Feet
           ,
           to
           which
           its
           own
           Weight
           and
           Fluidity
           do's
           not
           a
           little
           Conduce
           .
           Now
           the
           Heart
           being
           seated
           so
           near
           the
           Upper
           Part
           ,
           as
           that
           Two
           Parts
           in
           Three
           of
           the
           whole
           Fabrick
           ,
           appear
           to
           be
           below
           it
           ,
           there
           must
           be
           a
           like
           Inequality
           of
           Blood
           sent
           to
           the
           Inferior
           Parts
           ,
           to
           that
           which
           Ascends
           to
           the
           Superior
           .
           And
           this
           we
           see
           Confirm'd
           by
           comparing
           the
           Diameter
           of
           the
           Blood-Vessels
           Descending
           with
           the
           Ascending
           ,
           the
           Former
           being
           much
           Larger
           then
           the
           Latter
           .
           This
           great
           Disproportion
           of
           Blood
           in
           the
           Upper
           System
           to
           that
           of
           the
           Lower
           ,
           seems
           to
           threaten
           a
           great
           Disturbance
           in
           the
           Animal
           Order
           ,
           but
           is
           prevented
           by
           the
           Provident
           Care
           of
           the
           Author
           of
           Nature
           ,
           in
           the
           Manner
           we
           are
           now
           about
           to
           Describe
           .
        
         
           The
           Intercostal
           Arteries
           
             App.
             F.
          
           3.
           which
           arise
           from
           the
           Lower
           System
           ,
           are
           accompanied
           with
           Veins
           (
           that
           Return
           the
           Blood
           they
           Exported
           )
           which
           do
           not
           enter
           into
           the
           next
           Large
           Trunk
           according
           to
           the
           ordinary
           Process
           of
           Nature
           in
           other
           Parts
           ;
           but
           are
           all
           United
           into
           One
           Channel
           (
           and
           sometimes
           Two
           )
           which
           Ascends
           by
           the
           Side
           of
           the
           Aorta
           ,
           and
           Empties
           it self
           into
           the
           Descending
           Trunk
           of
           the
           
             Vena
             Cava
          
           ,
           there
           Discharging
           all
           its
           Refluent
           Blood
           ;
           which
           had
           it
           been
           Inserted
           into
           the
           Ascending
           Trunk
           ,
           it
           must
           have
           added
           so
           great
           a
           Weight
           ,
           that
           the
           Blood
           could
           not
           have
           past
           up
           to
           the
           Heart
           ,
           which
           it
           now
           easily
           do's
           .
           Beside
           these
           ,
           the
           Mammary
           Veins
           likewise
           Empty
           themselves
           into
           the
           Subclavian
           ,
           so
           that
           all
           the
           Blood
           Arising
           from
           the
           Parietes
           of
           the
           Thorax
           ,
           the
           Back
           and
           its
           Muscles
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           those
           of
           the
           Scapulae
           ,
           returns
           again
           to
           the
           Heart
           ,
           by
           the
           Upper
           Trunk
           of
           the
           
             Vena
             Cava
          
           ,
           tho'
           it
           was
           sent
           thither
           from
           the
           Lower
           Trunk
           of
           the
           
             Arteria
             Magna
          
           .
        
         
           Another
           Contrivance
           of
           this
           Nature
           is
           Observable
           in
           the
           
             Vena
             Porta
          
           ,
           which
           Receives
           the
           Blood
           from
           the
           Stomach
           ,
           Omentum
           ,
           Spleen
           ,
           Pancreas
           ,
           Guts
           and
           Mesentery
           ,
           sent
           thither
           by
           the
           Coeliack
           and
           Mesenterick
           Arteries
           ,
           which
           large
           Quantity
           had
           it
           Enter'd
           into
           the
           
             Vena
             Cava
          
           ,
           immediately
           below
           the
           Liver
           or
           Kidneys
           ,
           its
           Weight
           so
           far
           beneath
           the
           Diaphragm
           ,
           must
           have
           Hindred
           its
           Ascent
           ;
           wherefore
           the
           
             Vena
             Porta
          
           (
           not
           unlike
           the
           Azygos
           of
           the
           Thorax
           before
           Noted
           )
           carries
           up
           all
           the
           Blood
           by
           another
           Channel
           ,
           and
           Discharges
           it
           into
           the
           Extremities
           of
           the
           
             Vena
             Cava
          
           within
           the
           Liver
           ,
           where
           it
           is
           Diluted
           and
           Propell'd
           by
           the
           Refluent
           Blood
           from
           the
           Splenick
           Vein
           ,
           and
           afterwards
           assisted
           in
           its
           Ascent
           ,
           by
           the
           Contraction
           of
           the
           Diaphragm
           .
        
         
           Here
           I
           cannot
           forbear
           making
           a
           Digression
           ,
           and
           presenting
           my
           Conjectures
           of
           the
           Use
           and
           Office
           of
           the
           Spleen
           ,
           since
           it
           ministers
           in
           this
           Part
           of
           the
           
             Animal
             Oeconomy
          
           .
           The
           
             Arteria
             Splenica
          
           is
           not
           only
           very
           large
           in
           Proportion
           to
           the
           Magnitude
           of
           the
           Spleen
           ,
           but
           has
           a
           Remarkable
           Tortuous
           Passage
           to
           it
           ,
           (
           Tab.
           36.
           
           F.
           1.
           )
           whence
           we
           may
           conceive
           as
           the
           Quantity
           of
           Blood
           sent
           to
           the
           Spleen
           is
           very
           great
           ,
           so
           it
           s
           Impetus
           is
           very
           much
           Abated
           :
           Next
           the
           Communications
           between
           the
           Extremities
           of
           its
           Arteries
           and
           Veins
           are
           very
           Large
           ,
           as
           appears
           by
           the
           Prompt
           Exit
           ,
           which
           Water
           pour'd
           into
           one
           Finds
           by
           the
           other
           ,
           and
           the
           Inflation
           of
           the
           Veins
           which
           is
           easily
           made
           by
           Blowing
           into
           the
           Arteries
           ,
           when
           the
           whole
           Spleen
           and
           its
           Veins
           become
           Distended
           with
           it
           .
           The
           Lymphe-ducts
           of
           the
           Spleen
           we
           have
           Observ'd
           ,
           (
           Tab.
           36.
           
           Fig.
           1.
           )
           to
           Arise
           from
           the
           Vesiculae
           at
           the
           Extremities
           of
           its
           Veins
           ,
           and
           Discharge
           their
           Contents
           into
           the
           Neighbouring
           Lymphatick
           Glands
           ,
           whence
           it
           is
           sent
           into
           the
           Receptacule
           of
           the
           Chyle
           :
           Its
           Nerves
           are
           Distributed
           thro'
           its
           whole
           Substance
           ,
           and
           serve
           to
           preserve
           its
           Tone
           and
           Regulate
           the
           Separation
           of
           its
           Lympha
           and
           Nutritive
           Juice
           .
           But
           the
           most
           exact
           Scrutiny
           of
           Anatomists
           could
           never
           yet
           Discover
           any
           Excretory-duct
           arising
           from
           this
           Viscus
           ;
           and
           indeed
           the
           Patent
           Communication
           of
           its
           Vessels
           seems
           a
           convincing
           Proof
           ,
           that
           no
           such
           Excretory-duct
           can
           Exist
           but
           must
           appear
           very
           plain
           .
           Besides
           it
           seems
           Extravagant
           and
           Unbecoming
           the
           Wonderful
           Providence
           of
           Nature
           ,
           to
           Separate
           any
           particular
           Juice
           in
           the
           Arteries
           here
           to
           be
           instantly
           Refunded
           into
           the
           Veins
           ,
           and
           we
           can
           hardly
           conceive
           the
           Blood
           can
           suffer
           any
           Alteration
           ,
           in
           a
           Place
           where
           the
           Transit
           from
           the
           one
           to
           the
           other
           ,
           is
           so
           Ample
           .
        
         
           After
           these
           Considerations
           Premis'd
           ,
           if
           the
           Problem
           be
           Propos'd
           ,
           What
           can
           be
           the
           Design
           of
           the
           great
           Architect
           of
           our
           Bodies
           ,
           in
           the
           Fabrication
           of
           so
           Large
           and
           Remarkable
           a
           Part
           ,
           without
           any
           Fluid
           Secreted
           in
           it
           ,
           besides
           its
           own
           Nutritive
           Juice
           and
           Lympha
           ?
           I
           believe
           our
           Hypothesis
           will
           enable
           us
           to
           give
           a
           sufficient
           Reply
           to
           this
           seeming
           invincible
           Difficulty
           ,
           with
           which
           Learned
           Men
           have
           exceedingly
           perplex'd
           themselves
           .
           I
           conceive
           then
           the
           Spleen
           is
           Design'd
           by
           Nature
           ,
           as
           
           a
           Diverticle
           to
           receive
           a
           large
           Proportion
           of
           Blood
           to
           be
           Refunded
           by
           its
           Veins
           into
           the
           Porta
           ,
           and
           promote
           the
           Reflux
           of
           the
           Blood
           Imported
           thither
           from
           the
           Stomach
           ,
           Guts
           ,
           Pancreas
           ,
           Mesentery
           ,
           &c.
           by
           whose
           slow
           Progress
           thro'
           the
           innumerable
           Glands
           of
           those
           Parts
           ,
           it
           returns
           Thick
           and
           unfit
           for
           Motion
           :
           And
           this
           seems
           but
           Necessary
           that
           a
           new
           Quantity
           of
           Blood
           ,
           charg'd
           with
           a
           Copious
           Serum
           ,
           should
           be
           Infunded
           into
           this
           Refluent
           Liquor
           before
           it
           Arrives
           at
           the
           Liver
           ,
           to
           dispose
           it
           to
           pass
           the
           Extremities
           of
           the
           
             Vena
             Cava
          
           ,
           and
           add
           a
           fresh
           Impetus
           to
           its
           Languid
           Motion
           caus'd
           by
           its
           Long
           and
           Tortutous
           Progress
           .
           This
           I
           take
           to
           be
           the
           Use
           and
           Office
           of
           the
           Spleen
           ,
           and
           seems
           to
           have
           all
           the
           Circumstances
           the
           Laws
           of
           Mechanism
           require
           for
           this
           Purpose
           .
           The
           Novelty
           of
           which
           Opinion
           will
           (
           I
           hope
           )
           be
           no
           Prejudice
           to
           its
           Reception
           in
           the
           Minds
           of
           Candid
           and
           Impartial
           Men.
           
        
         
           Having
           thus
           Represented
           the
           Circulation
           ;
           the
           Order
           of
           Nature
           leads
           us
           to
           Respiration
           ,
           which
           serves
           in
           conveying
           the
           Blood
           from
           the
           Right
           to
           the
           Left
           Ventricle
           of
           the
           Heart
           ,
           and
           Impregnates
           it
           with
           Parts
           proper
           for
           its
           further
           Elaborations
           .
        
         
           Respiration
           or
           Breathing
           is
           a
           double
           Action
           ,
           
             i.
             e.
          
           Inspiration
           or
           Receiving
           of
           Air
           into
           the
           Lungs
           ;
           and
           Expiration
           or
           Expelling
           it
           again
           :
           The
           whole
           is
           done
           by
           means
           of
           Widening
           and
           Straitning
           the
           Cavity
           of
           the
           Thorax
           ,
           in
           which
           the
           Lungs
           are
           contain'd
           .
        
         
           How
           the
           Cavity
           of
           the
           Thorax
           may
           be
           Enlarged
           and
           Contracted
           ,
           we
           may
           easily
           conceive
           ,
           if
           we
           consider
           the
           Order
           of
           its
           Bony
           Parietes
           ,
           (
           Tab.
           27
           ,
           and
           28.
           )
           and
           observe
           the
           Oblique
           Descending
           Position
           of
           the
           Ribs
           from
           the
           Vertebrae
           of
           the
           Back
           ,
           with
           their
           Cartilaginous
           Connection
           to
           the
           
             Os
             Pectoris
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Position
           and
           Action
           of
           the
           Diaphragm
           ,
           as
           is
           explained
           Tab.
           52.
           whence
           it
           appears
           when
           the
           Ribs
           are
           drawn
           up
           ,
           and
           the
           Superior
           Convex
           Surface
           of
           the
           Diaphragm
           deprest
           towards
           a
           Plain
           ,
           the
           Included
           Space
           must
           necessarily
           be
           Enlarged
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           contrary
           very
           much
           Straitned
           when
           the
           Ribs
           are
           drawn
           down
           ,
           and
           the
           Upper
           Surface
           of
           the
           Diaphragm
           Convex
           towards
           the
           Lungs
           ,
           as
           it
           is
           Represented
           in
           the
           last
           mention'd
           Table
           .
        
         
           The
           Elevation
           and
           Depression
           of
           the
           Ribs
           is
           perform'd
           by
           the
           Proper
           and
           Common
           Muscles
           of
           the
           Thorax
           :
           The
           First
           have
           their
           Rise
           and
           Termination
           confined
           to
           the
           Parts
           Composing
           its
           Parietes
           :
           The
           Other
           ,
           notwithstanding
           their
           Relation
           to
           other
           Parts
           ,
           yet
           chiefly
           respect
           This
           :
           Of
           the
           Common
           Muscles
           some
           are
           Principal
           ,
           immediately
           moving
           This
           ,
           together
           with
           those
           Parts
           from
           which
           they
           are
           derived
           :
           Others
           are
           Auxiliary
           ,
           which
           by
           moving
           the
           Contiguous
           Bodies
           ,
           Contribute
           to
           the
           better
           performing
           the
           Grand
           Motion
           :
           Thus
           the
           Elevation
           of
           the
           Shoulder-Blades
           is
           required
           in
           violent
           Respirations
           ,
           without
           which
           the
           
             Musculi
             Serrati
          
           (
           Tab.
           20.
           )
           (
           which
           spring
           from
           the
           Scapulae
           )
           (
           Tab.
           29.
           
           V.
           W.
           )
           could
           not
           Act
           ;
           hence
           it
           happens
           that
           Respiration
           is
           Interrupted
           when
           the
           Arms
           are
           in
           Action
           ,
           by
           reason
           the
           Scapulae
           at
           that
           time
           engage
           all
           their
           Muscles
           (
           especially
           the
           
             Serrati
             T.
          
           20.
           )
           to
           render
           them
           Stable
           ;
           and
           the
           Extension
           of
           the
           Vertebrae
           of
           the
           Neck
           becomes
           necessary
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           the
           
             Musculi
             Scaleni
          
           (
           Tab.
           18.
           
           B
           B.
           )
           may
           Raise
           the
           Upper
           Ribs
           .
        
         
           The
           Proper
           Muscles
           of
           the
           Thorax
           are
           the
           
             Intercostales
             Externi
          
           and
           Interni
           ,
           (
           Tab.
           26.
           
           Fig.
           1.
           )
           the
           Triangulares
           ,
           (
           Tab.
           and
           
             Fig.
             ead
          
           .
           )
           the
           
             Serrati
             Superiores
          
           and
           
             Inferiores
             Postici
             ,
             Tab.
          
           28.
           
        
         
           The
           
             Principal
             Common
          
           Muscles
           ,
           are
           the
           Scaleni
           ,
           (
           Tab.
           18.
           )
           the
           
             Subclavii
             ,
             Tab.
          
           20.
           the
           
             Serrati
             Majores
             &
             Minores
             Antici
          
           ,
           (
           
             Tab.
             ead
          
           .
           )
           and
           the
           Sacrolumbales
           ,
           (
           Tab.
           29.
           )
        
         
           The
           Auxiliary
           Muscles
           are
           such
           as
           Raise
           the
           Scapulae
           ,
           and
           draw
           them
           Backwards
           ,
           and
           those
           which
           Extend
           the
           whole
           Spine
           .
        
         
           The
           Cavity
           of
           the
           Thorax
           being
           dilated
           in
           the
           manner
           above
           mention'd
           ,
           the
           Ambient
           Air
           necessarily
           rushes
           thro'
           the
           
             Aspera
             Arteria
          
           and
           Bronchia
           ,
           into
           the
           Vesiculae
           of
           the
           Lungs
           ,
           whereby
           their
           whole
           Substance
           becomes
           Distended
           ;
           and
           this
           we
           call
           Inspiration
           .
        
         
           In
           Expiration
           ,
           the
           Air
           contain'd
           in
           the
           Vesiculae
           of
           the
           Lungs
           ,
           is
           Excluded
           ;
           in
           this
           Action
           the
           Lungs
           are
           not
           meerly
           Passive
           as
           in
           the
           Former
           ,
           but
           the
           Elasticity
           of
           the
           Ligaments
           of
           their
           Bronchia
           ,
           draw
           their
           Small
           Cartilages
           over
           each
           other
           ,
           and
           Conduce
           to
           the
           Expulsion
           of
           the
           Air
           contain'd
           in
           their
           Vesiculae
           .
        
         
           This
           Alternate
           Diastole
           and
           Systole
           of
           the
           Lungs
           and
           Thorax
           ,
           bears
           an
           Analogy
           to
           a
           Pair
           of
           Bellows
           ,
           whose
           Two
           Boards
           being
           drawn
           from
           each
           other
           ,
           the
           Ambient
           Air
           necessarily
           rushes
           in
           between
           them
           ,
           and
           Fills
           the
           Internal
           Space
           enlarg'd
           by
           the
           Deduction
           of
           their
           Sides
           ;
           which
           Air
           is
           again
           Expell'd
           from
           thence
           ,
           by
           Approaching
           them
           towards
           each
           other
           .
        
         
           The
           Inducements
           the
           Author
           of
           Nature
           had
           to
           Frame
           this
           Pulmonary
           Organ
           ,
           are
           many
           ;
           by
           this
           the
           Aerial
           Particles
           pass
           to
           the
           Mass
           of
           Blood
           ,
           which
           Rarifie
           ,
           Subtilize
           and
           render
           it
           fit
           for
           those
           Elaborations
           it
           afterwards
           undergoes
           :
           By
           these
           the
           Tenacious
           Serum
           of
           the
           Blood
           is
           Attenuated
           ,
           and
           the
           whole
           Mass
           rendred
           fit
           for
           Motion
           ;
           the
           Effects
           of
           which
           are
           Evident
           in
           those
           Rhumatick
           Asthmas
           and
           other
           Cases
           ,
           which
           Oblige
           some
           to
           leave
           this
           Town
           for
           a
           Clearer
           Air.
           
        
         
           The
           Lungs
           are
           the
           Intermediate
           Passage
           between
           the
           Two
           Ventricles
           of
           the
           Heart
           ,
           whereby
           the
           whole
           Mass
           of
           Blood
           passes
           thro'
           their
           Large
           Blood-Vessels
           in
           an
           equal
           Rapidity
           and
           Quantity
           ,
           with
           that
           of
           all
           other
           Parts
           of
           the
           Body
           besides
           ,
           and
           do
           by
           this
           means
           discharge
           the
           Blood
           of
           a
           great
           Quantity
           of
           its
           Serum
           ,
           by
           Halitus
           in
           Expiration
           ;
           wherefore
           the
           Accurate
           Dr.
           Tyson
           Reckons
           them
           among
           the
           Number
           of
           Glands
           .
        
         
           This
           Alternate
           Action
           in
           which
           Respiration
           consists
           ,
           is
           Necessary
           ,
           to
           the
           End
           the
           Blood
           may
           pass
           the
           Lungs
           ,
           whose
           Vesiculae
           ,
           if
           they
           were
           constantly
           Distended
           by
           the
           Inspired
           Air
           ,
           the
           Extremities
           of
           the
           Pulmonick
           Blood-Vessels
           would
           be
           Comprest
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           contrary
           ,
           if
           these
           Vesiculae
           were
           Collaps'd
           (
           as
           after
           Expiration
           )
           their
           Blood-Vessels
           would
           be
           consequently
           Corrugated
           ;
           but
           by
           this
           Vicissitude
           they
           become
           Permeable
           ,
           and
           the
           Blood
           easily
           passes
           their
           Extremities
           .
        
         
           We
           have
           Traced
           the
           Aliment
           from
           its
           First
           Reception
           till
           it
           is
           Elaborated
           into
           Blood
           ,
           and
           pursued
           in
           its
           Motion
           and
           Circulation
           thro'
           its
           several
           Channels
           .
           We
           ought
           next
           to
           take
           a
           View
           of
           the
           several
           Liquors
           or
           Fluids
           separated
           from
           it
           in
           its
           Tour.
           All
           Animal
           Juices
           except
           the
           Chyle
           are
           separated
           from
           the
           Arterial
           Blood
           ,
           which
           common
           Material
           in
           its
           Percolation
           in
           the
           Brain
           and
           Nerves
           ,
           yield
           the
           Contents
           of
           their
           Fibres
           ;
           in
           the
           Glands
           of
           the
           Mouth
           and
           Throat
           ,
           the
           Saliva
           ;
           in
           the
           Mammae
           ,
           the
           Milk
           ;
           in
           the
           Kidneys
           ,
           the
           Urine
           ;
           in
           the
           Testes
           ,
           Sperm
           ;
           (
           not
           to
           name
           the
           Sweat
           ,
           Mucilage
           of
           the
           Joints
           ,
           &c.
           )
           and
           thro'
           the
           Universal
           Body
           ,
           a
           Copious
           Quantity
           of
           Lympha
           ;
           which
           is
           not
           applied
           to
           any
           distinct
           Use
           in
           the
           
             Animal
             Oeconomy
          
           ,
           but
           is
           all
           discharg'd
           into
           the
           Great
           Cystern
           or
           Receptacle
           of
           the
           Chyle
           and
           Subclavian
           Vein
           ,
           and
           so
           Refunded
           into
           the
           Refluent
           Blood.
           
        
         
           The
           Doctrine
           of
           Secretions
           is
           the
           last
           and
           only
           remaining
           Part
           of
           those
           Natural
           Functions
           ,
           which
           are
           directed
           to
           the
           Preservation
           and
           Subsisting
           of
           the
           Individual
           .
           For
           the
           Nature
           and
           Properties
           of
           these
           Liquors
           ,
           their
           Use
           and
           Office
           ,
           and
           the
           peculiar
           Structure
           adapted
           for
           the
           Percolation
           of
           one
           ,
           and
           excluding
           the
           rest
           ;
           we
           must
           remit
           the
           Reader
           to
           the
           Description
           of
           the
           Organs
           themselves
           ,
           contenting
           our selves
           here
           with
           the
           Theory
           of
           the
           Origin
           of
           the
           Lympha
           ,
           and
           Secretion
           in
           General
           .
        
         
           The
           Knowledge
           of
           this
           Animal-liquor
           call'd
           Lympha
           ,
           and
           the
           Ducts
           which
           Convey
           it
           ,
           is
           owing
           to
           the
           Industry
           and
           Searches
           of
           this
           present
           Age.
           But
           whether
           
             Rudbeck
             ,
             Bartholine
          
           or
           our
           Countrey-man
           Dr.
           Iolive
           ought
           to
           carry
           the
           Honour
           of
           the
           Discovery
           ,
           I
           shall
           not
           pretend
           to
           decide
           .
           But
           the
           Rise
           ,
           Course
           ,
           and
           other
           particular
           Circumstances
           needful
           to
           inform
           us
           of
           their
           Use
           ,
           and
           the
           Design
           of
           Nature
           in
           the
           Fabrication
           of
           these
           Ducts
           ,
           has
           not
           been
           hitherto
           ,
           at
           least
           fully
           ,
           Demonstrated
           .
           Some
           have
           pretended
           to
           derive
           these
           Ducts
           from
           the
           Nerves
           ,
           others
           from
           the
           Membranes
           or
           Tendinous
           Parts
           of
           the
           Muscles
           ;
           but
           these
           are
           Impertinencies
           scarce
           worth
           a
           serious
           Refutation
           .
        
         
           The
           diligent
           Melpighius
           in
           his
           Epistle
           to
           the
           Royal-Socíety
           ,
           is
           follicitous
           in
           enquiring
           whether
           they
           are
           not
           Excretory-ducts
           to
           Export
           the
           Juice
           Secreted
           in
           the
           Conglobate
           Glands
           ,
           since
           there
           is
           none
           of
           these
           Glands
           so
           inconsiderable
           to
           be
           found
           which
           has
           not
           its
           Lymphe-ducts
           belonging
           to
           it
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           its
           Nerves
           and
           Blood-Vessels
           .
           After
           several
           Observations
           premis'd
           ,
           he
           concludes
           they
           Arise
           in
           exceeding
           Minute
           ,
           and
           scarce
           perceptible
           Sirculi
           ,
           from
           the
           Lesser
           Glands
           ,
           which
           afterwards
           are
           United
           to
           those
           Arising
           from
           other
           Glands
           ,
           forming
           Greater
           Trunks
           ,
           and
           so
           proceed
           till
           they
           Empty
           themselves
           into
           the
           Common
           Cystern
           of
           the
           Chyle
           .
           I
           shall
           not
           repeat
           the
           Reasons
           or
           Experiments
           of
           that
           Curious
           Gentleman
           to
           sustain
           his
           Opinion
           ,
           which
           mainly
           amounts
           to
           this
           ,
           That
           in
           pursuing
           these
           Ducts
           ,
           we
           cannot
           by
           the
           most
           exact
           Scrutiny
           ,
           or
           any
           Art
           yet
           known
           ,
           Trace
           them
           further
           .
           But
           we
           must
           crave
           leave
           to
           differ
           from
           him
           in
           this
           Point
           ,
           and
           perhaps
           the
           Reasons
           we
           shall
           offer
           ,
           will
           be
           sufficient
           to
           justifie
           our
           Dissent
           ,
           and
           give
           a
           more
           clear
           and
           satisfactory
           Account
           of
           the
           First
           Source
           of
           this
           Fluid
           .
        
         
           The
           Glands
           I
           must
           confess
           have
           a
           great
           Concern
           in
           preparing
           the
           Lympha
           ,
           insomuch
           that
           no
           Lymphe-duct
           can
           absolve
           its
           Course
           without
           Touching
           on
           them
           ;
           and
           their
           Necessity
           appears
           yet
           further
           ,
           while
           we
           see
           other
           Lymphe-ducts
           ,
           (
           when
           the
           main
           Trunk
           passes
           by
           ,
           )
           yet
           emit
           several
           Lateral
           Branches
           which
           Insert
           themselves
           into
           these
           Glands
           ,
           and
           after
           being
           remitted
           from
           thence
           ,
           are
           rejoin'd
           to
           the
           Former
           Trunk
           (
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           14.
           )
           Besides
           these
           Lymphe-ducts
           which
           Enter
           the
           Glands
           ,
           are
           frequently
           divided
           into
           several
           Branches
           ;
           which
           make
           their
           Exit
           again
           divided
           ,
           and
           after
           approaching
           each
           other
           ,
           join
           into
           one
           Current
           ,
           
             ib.
             Fig.
          
           13.
           
           But
           however
           Important
           the
           Glands
           may
           be
           ,
           I
           think
           they
           are
           far
           enough
           from
           being
           their
           Source
           .
        
         
           The
           Glands
           of
           the
           Mesentery
           have
           their
           Lacteals
           which
           Import
           ,
           and
           others
           which
           Export
           the
           Chyle
           from
           them
           .
           We
           shall
           find
           the
           Case
           of
           these
           Vessels
           to
           be
           entirely
           Parallel
           ;
           every
           Lymphatick
           Gland
           we
           have
           yet
           been
           able
           to
           Discover
           having
           both
           Species
           of
           Ducts
           ,
           the
           one
           to
           Import
           ,
           the
           other
           to
           Export
           the
           Lympha
           from
           them
           ;
           whence
           it
           is
           probable
           the
           Lesser
           not
           differing
           from
           the
           Greater
           in
           Structure
           ,
           but
           Magnitude
           only
           ,
           they
           serve
           to
           Transmit
           the
           Lympha
           ,
           and
           not
           give
           it
           its
           First
           Rise
           :
           This
           will
           be
           still
           more
           evident
           ,
           if
           we
           
           consider
           the
           Great
           Communication
           between
           the
           Blood-Vessels
           and
           these
           Ducts
           .
        
         
           The
           First
           Origination
           and
           Extremities
           of
           these
           Lymphe-ducts
           ,
           are
           too
           Subtile
           and
           Fine
           to
           be
           discern'd
           by
           the
           Eye
           ,
           even
           Assisted
           by
           the
           Microscope
           ,
           and
           must
           give
           Room
           for
           Suspition
           and
           Conjecture
           .
           The
           Arteries
           and
           Veins
           ,
           we
           have
           above
           Demonstrated
           ,
           are
           but
           one
           continuous
           Reflected
           Tube
           :
           For
           the
           Truth
           of
           this
           Assertion
           ,
           in
           the
           Transparent
           Parts
           of
           Animals
           (
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           4
           ,
           5.
           )
           we
           have
           the
           Evidence
           of
           our
           Senses
           ;
           and
           that
           the
           same
           Continuity
           is
           kept
           thro'
           the
           whole
           System
           of
           the
           Body
           ,
           no
           Rational
           Man
           who
           will
           please
           to
           Reflect
           on
           the
           Uniformity
           of
           Nature
           ,
           can
           with
           any
           Pretence
           of
           Reason
           doubt
           .
           Now
           as
           these
           Vessels
           Communicate
           with
           each
           other
           ,
           and
           admit
           a
           Prompt
           Passage
           of
           Air
           ,
           Tincted
           Liquors
           ,
           Mercury
           ,
           &c.
           from
           each
           to
           other
           ,
           so
           by
           some
           Experiments
           we
           find
           they
           have
           with
           the
           Excretory-ducts
           ,
           and
           Vice-versa
           ,
           those
           Liquors
           which
           we
           can
           convey
           into
           the
           Excretory-ducts
           after
           Death
           ,
           will
           pass
           from
           them
           into
           the
           Blood-Vessels
           and
           Lymphe-ducts
           ,
           which
           Experiment
           I
           have
           remark'd
           (
           Tab.
           43.
           
           Fig.
           5.
           )
           as
           an
           Objection
           to
           those
           who
           suppose
           Valves
           in
           the
           beginning
           of
           the
           Excretory-ducts
           .
        
         
           From
           these
           Demonstrative
           and
           Convincing
           Experiments
           ,
           we
           may
           conceive
           the
           true
           Origin
           of
           the
           Lymphe-ducts
           ,
           is
           from
           the
           Extremities
           of
           the
           Blood-Vessels
           ;
           and
           their
           Office
           to
           carry
           Back
           the
           superfluous
           Serum
           ,
           which
           is
           more
           Copious
           in
           the
           Arteries
           ,
           than
           is
           perhaps
           convenient
           in
           the
           Veins
           ,
           where
           the
           Progress
           of
           the
           Blood
           is
           Slower
           ,
           and
           the
           Quantity
           much
           greater
           .
           This
           Rise
           of
           the
           Lympha
           is
           still
           more
           clear
           ,
           *
           if
           we
           consider
           in
           some
           States
           or
           Habits
           of
           Body
           ,
           when
           the
           Crasis
           of
           the
           Blood
           is
           deprav'd
           ,
           some
           Parts
           of
           it
           pass
           this
           way
           ,
           and
           the
           Lympha
           is
           Ting'd
           by
           it
           ;
           as
           it
           happens
           by
           Injecting
           Water
           by
           the
           Arteries
           after
           Death
           ,
           when
           Part
           of
           the
           Blood
           still
           remains
           in
           its
           Vessels
           ,
           you
           will
           see
           the
           Lymphe-ducts
           fill'd
           with
           a
           Bloody
           Water
           .
        
         
           This
           Origination
           of
           the
           Lymphe-ducts
           from
           the
           Extremities
           of
           the
           Blood-Vessels
           ,
           we
           don't
           take
           to
           be
           altogether
           immediately
           from
           their
           Sides
           ,
           as
           we
           do
           that
           of
           the
           Secretory
           Tubes
           ,
           (
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           7.
           )
           but
           that
           they
           have
           a
           Double
           Origin
           ,
           the
           one
           from
           the
           Extremities
           of
           the
           Arteries
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           from
           the
           Cells
           or
           Tubes
           which
           contain
           the
           Nourishment
           of
           the
           Parts
           they
           Arise
           from
           :
           By
           this
           means
           not
           only
           the
           superabundant
           Serum
           of
           the
           Blood
           in
           the
           Arteries
           ,
           is
           carried
           off
           before
           it
           Arrives
           in
           the
           Veins
           ,
           but
           the
           superfluous
           Nutritive
           Juice
           also
           ,
           is
           return'd
           with
           the
           Lympha
           .
        
         
           In
           those
           Parts
           where
           we
           find
           the
           Passage
           of
           the
           Blood
           between
           the
           Arteries
           and
           Veins
           very
           Patent
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           Spleen
           and
           Penis
           ,
           the
           Lymphe-ducts
           Arise
           from
           their
           Vesiculae
           ;
           as
           has
           been
           Observ'd
           in
           the
           Former
           by
           the
           Accurate
           Nuck
           ,
           and
           by
           my self
           in
           the
           Latter
           .
        
         
           The
           like
           Origin
           of
           these
           Ducts
           may
           be
           Observ'd
           from
           the
           Spermatick
           Veins
           of
           the
           Testes
           and
           Ovaria
           ,
           in
           which
           the
           Blood
           returns
           very
           little
           Divested
           of
           its
           Serosity
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           its
           Globular
           Parts
           may
           the
           better
           Ascend
           in
           those
           Veins
           ,
           with
           a
           Less
           Proportion
           of
           Serum
           .
        
         
           These
           Ducts
           Empty
           themselves
           into
           the
           Vesiculae
           of
           their
           Glands
           ,
           as
           is
           Represented
           (
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           13
           ,
           14.
           )
           from
           whence
           the
           Exporting
           Ducts
           Arise
           ,
           and
           carry
           the
           Lympha
           on
           to
           the
           next
           Gland
           or
           Thoracick-duct
           ,
           (
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           11.
           )
           and
           so
           to
           the
           Subclavian
           Vein
           .
           Thus
           we
           find
           the
           Motion
           of
           the
           
             Lympha
             ,
             Chyle
          
           and
           Nutritive
           Juice
           ,
           is
           propell'd
           by
           means
           of
           the
           Systole
           of
           the
           Heart
           ,
           by
           which
           all
           the
           Secretions
           of
           the
           Animal
           Fluids
           ,
           are
           in
           like
           Manner
           carried
           on
           .
        
         
           In
           the
           Seventh
           Figure
           of
           our
           Appendix
           we
           have
           Exprest
           the
           Secretory
           Tubes
           Arising
           from
           the
           Venous
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           the
           Arterious
           Part
           of
           the
           Sanguineous
           Channel
           before
           its
           Inflection
           ;
           because
           we
           find
           there
           is
           a
           Transit
           from
           the
           Veins
           into
           these
           Vessels
           ;
           yet
           in
           my
           Opinion
           most
           of
           them
           Arise
           from
           the
           Artery
           ,
           where
           it
           Commences
           to
           grow
           Conical
           ,
           where
           the
           Sides
           of
           the
           Vessel
           thro'
           the
           Efforts
           made
           by
           the
           Parts
           of
           the
           Blood
           propell'd
           ,
           receive
           a
           more
           direct
           Pressure
           than
           in
           their
           Cylindrical
           Extremities
           ,
           and
           the
           Particles
           Adapted
           to
           their
           Pores
           ,
           are
           driven
           into
           the
           Tubes
           deriv'd
           from
           them
           .
        
         
           By
           this
           Scheme
           ,
           the
           Origin
           of
           the
           Lympha
           ,
           and
           the
           Manner
           of
           Secretion
           ,
           is
           well
           enough
           Explain'd
           .
           But
           why
           the
           Saliva
           is
           separated
           in
           the
           Parotid
           Maxillary
           and
           Sublingual
           Glands
           ,
           the
           Bile
           in
           those
           of
           the
           Liver
           ,
           the
           Urine
           by
           the
           Kidneys
           ,
           &c.
           must
           be
           deduc'd
           from
           their
           peculiar
           Structure
           ;
           the
           Magnitude
           ,
           Figure
           of
           their
           Pores
           ,
           and
           Various
           Disposition
           of
           their
           Arteries
           ,
           having
           a
           mighty
           share
           in
           these
           Operations
           .
           Thus
           we
           may
           Observe
           the
           Arteries
           of
           the
           Testes
           ,
           have
           a
           long
           and
           Flexuous
           Progress
           ,
           and
           contrary
           to
           the
           ordinary
           Method
           of
           Nature
           ,
           are
           smaller
           at
           their
           Originations
           from
           the
           Aorta
           ,
           than
           in
           their
           Trunks
           after
           a
           farther
           Descent
           ,
           as
           we
           have
           Noted
           (
           Tab.
           45.
           )
           all
           which
           conduce
           to
           abate
           the
           Impetus
           of
           the
           Blood
           ,
           before
           it
           Arrives
           in
           the
           Testes
           .
           On
           the
           other
           Hand
           the
           Current
           of
           the
           Blood
           to
           the
           Kidneys
           ,
           (
           by
           the
           Largeness
           ,
           Short
           and
           Streight
           Course
           of
           the
           Emulgents
           ,
           and
           their
           Vicinity
           to
           the
           Left
           Ventricle
           of
           the
           Heart
           ,
           )
           is
           very
           Rapid
           ,
           which
           discharges
           a
           great
           Quantity
           of
           Urine
           ,
           soon
           after
           the
           Use
           of
           Chalybeat
           Waters
           ,
           or
           other
           plentiful
           Drinking
           ,
           whilst
           it
           is
           infinitely
           more
           slow
           in
           the
           Salival
           Glands
           ,
           Pancreas
           ,
           Liver
           ,
           &c.
           
           We
           shall
           not
           here
           recite
           any
           further
           Particulars
           ,
           hoping
           the
           Reader
           will
           peruse
           our
           Tables
           and
           Discourse
           of
           the
           several
           Organs
           .
        
         
           Having
           done
           with
           our
           Doctrine
           of
           the
           First
           Order
           of
           Natural
           Functions
           ,
           we
           proceed
           to
           the
           Second
           ,
           or
           those
           which
           serve
           for
           the
           Propagation
           of
           the
           Species
           ;
           which
           Naturally
           divides
           its
           self
           into
           Two
           Parts
           ,
           (
           viz.
           )
           Generation
           ,
           and
           Accretion
           ,
           or
           what
           concerns
           the
           Foetus
           in
           its
           Formation
           ,
           and
           by
           what
           means
           and
           steps
           it
           's
           carried
           on
           to
           an
           Adult
           State.
           Since
           Animal
           Bodies
           are
           Transient
           and
           Temporary
           ,
           the
           Author
           of
           Nature
           has
           endued
           them
           with
           the
           Power
           of
           Propagation
           ,
           and
           a
           Set
           of
           Proper
           Organs
           to
           continue
           their
           Species
           ,
           and
           furnish
           a
           constant
           Supply
           of
           new
           Individuals
           .
           From
           the
           Difference
           of
           which
           Organs
           of
           Generation
           Arises
           the
           difference
           of
           Sexes
           .
        
         
           All
           Animals
           have
           been
           Divided
           into
           Viviparous
           and
           Oviparous
           ,
           till
           Dr.
           Harvey
           remov'd
           the
           Distinction
           ,
           by
           Demonstrating
           all
           Living
           Creatures
           to
           derive
           their
           Original
           from
           Eggs
           ,
           with
           this
           Difference
           only
           ;
           in
           one
           the
           Foetus
           is
           perfected
           within
           ,
           and
           in
           the
           other
           without
           the
           Mothers
           Body
           .
           This
           Doctrine
           of
           that
           great
           Man
           has
           since
           been
           fully
           evinc'd
           by
           the
           repeated
           Dissections
           ,
           Observations
           ,
           and
           Experiments
           of
           Later
           Anatomists
           :
           No
           Species
           of
           Fowls
           ,
           Fishes
           and
           Quadrupedes
           are
           found
           to
           want
           them
           :
           The
           Foetus
           being
           sometimes
           found
           in
           the
           passage
           between
           the
           Ovarium
           and
           Vterus
           ,
           ●ad
           the
           Alveoli
           deserted
           by
           them
           ,
           are
           sufficiently
           discernable
           in
           all
           Animals
           after
           Impregnation
           ;
           so
           that
           the
           Existence
           of
           These
           cannot
           be
           doubted
           ,
           or
           that
           there
           is
           a
           perfect
           Conformity
           between
           the
           
             Pullus
             in
             Ovo
          
           ,
           and
           the
           Foetus
           in
           the
           Womb.
           But
           here
           we
           must
           distinguish
           the
           Essential
           and
           Constituent
           Parts
           ,
           from
           those
           which
           are
           only
           Alimentary
           and
           Accessory
           .
           It
           is
           the
           Cicatricula
           alone
           in
           the
           Eggs
           of
           Fowls
           ,
           in
           which
           reside
           the
           Rudiments
           of
           the
           Foetus
           ,
           whilst
           the
           Vitellus
           and
           Albumen
           prepare
           and
           supply
           its
           Nourishment
           ;
           both
           bearing
           an
           exact
           Analogy
           to
           the
           Lobes
           and
           
             Plantula
             Seminalis
          
           in
           Vegetable
           Seeds
           .
           The
           Seminal
           Vesicula
           or
           Ovum
           found
           in
           the
           Testes
           of
           Women
           ,
           &c.
           agrees
           in
           every
           respect
           with
           the
           Cicatricula
           ,
           and
           the
           other
           Parts
           are
           unnecessary
           ,
           because
           the
           Foetus
           is
           nourish'd
           by
           Aliment
           supplied
           from
           the
           Mothers
           Body
           .
           Since
           the
           Discovery
           of
           these
           Eggs
           ,
           the
           Ancient
           Doctrine
           that
           the
           Foetus
           was
           Form'd
           from
           the
           Commistion
           of
           the
           Male
           and
           Female
           Seed
           ,
           has
           been
           by
           all
           Rejected
           ,
           and
           that
           Liquour
           which
           has
           been
           taken
           by
           all
           preceding
           Ages
           for
           Seed
           in
           the
           Latter
           ,
           is
           found
           to
           be
           only
           a
           Mucous
           Matter
           ,
           Secreted
           from
           the
           Glands
           of
           the
           Vagina
           ,
           (
           Tab.
           51.
           
           F.
           3.
           
           C.
           )
           and
           discharg'd
           without
           the
           Body
           ;
           which
           in
           Mares
           ,
           Cows
           ,
           and
           many
           other
           Animals
           is
           in
           much
           greater
           Quantity
           ,
           than
           is
           possible
           to
           be
           contain'd
           in
           their
           Testes
           .
        
         
           Tho'
           Generation
           
             ex
             Ovo
          
           may
           be
           justly
           reputed
           among
           the
           Modern
           Improvements
           of
           Anatomy
           ,
           yet
           this
           did
           not
           altogether
           escape
           the
           Notice
           of
           the
           Sagacious
           Hippocrates
           ,
           who
           in
           his
           Book
           
             De
             Natura
             Pueri
          
           ,
           informs
           us
           ,
           the
           Embryo
           after
           Conception
           is
           Included
           in
           a
           Membrane
           ,
           exactly
           resembling
           an
           Egg
           without
           its
           Shell
           ,
           and
           describes
           the
           Rudiments
           of
           the
           Vmbilicus
           and
           Placenta
           ,
           with
           its
           Plexus
           of
           Blood-Vessels
           ,
           and
           the
           Pellucid
           Liquor
           of
           the
           Amnios
           after
           the
           same
           Manner
           as
           Represented
           (
           Tab.
           57.
           
           Fig.
           2.
           )
           This
           Accurate
           Observation
           ,
           he
           acquaints
           us
           he
           made
           from
           an
           Abortion
           artificially
           procur'd
           within
           Six
           Days
           after
           Conception
           ,
           to
           preserve
           the
           Reputation
           of
           an
           Incontinent
           Wench
           ;
           which
           remarkable
           Passage
           (
           not
           ordinarily
           taken
           Notice
           of
           )
           was
           shewn
           me
           by
           my
           very
           Ingenious
           Friend
           Dr.
           Fern.
           Much
           of
           the
           same
           Age
           or
           something
           more
           ,
           and
           agreeing
           with
           the
           Description
           of
           Hippocrates
           ,
           are
           the
           Secundines
           which
           the
           Learned
           Dr.
           Hannes
           keeps
           among
           his
           other
           Anatomical
           Collections
           .
        
         
           Upon
           the
           Invention
           of
           these
           
             Ova
             ,
             De
             Graaf
          
           and
           Others
           ,
           who
           have
           successfully
           employ'd
           themselves
           in
           their
           Enquiries
           on
           this
           Subject
           ,
           began
           to
           Erect
           an
           Opinion
           ,
           That
           the
           Female
           only
           furnish'd
           the
           Matter
           of
           the
           Foetus
           ,
           and
           the
           Male
           serv'd
           to
           Actuate
           it
           by
           its
           Prolifick
           Influence
           .
           This
           Opinion
           ,
           which
           derogates
           much
           from
           the
           Dignity
           of
           the
           Male-Sex
           ,
           prevail'd
           till
           
             Mons.
             Leeuwenhoeck
          
           by
           the
           Help
           of
           his
           Exquisite
           Microscope
           ,
           in
           which
           he
           has
           been
           well
           pursued
           by
           Mr.
           Melling
           ,
           detected
           Innumerable
           small
           Animals
           in
           the
           Masculine
           Sperm
           ,
           and
           by
           this
           Noble
           Discovery
           ,
           at
           once
           remov'd
           that
           Difficulty
           ,
           and
           added
           much
           to
           the
           Theory
           of
           Generation
           :
           In
           his
           Letter
           to
           the
           Royal-Society
           ,
           he
           Acquaints
           them
           he
           had
           observ'd
           Incredible
           Numbers
           of
           these
           Animalcula
           in
           the
           Testicles
           of
           Froggs
           ,
           so
           slender
           ,
           as
           not
           to
           exceed
           the
           Thousandth
           Part
           of
           a
           single
           Hair
           ,
           with
           a
           Head
           proportionably
           larger
           than
           the
           rest
           of
           their
           Body
           ,
           all
           Variously
           moving
           to
           and
           fro
           ;
           That
           he
           had
           found
           the
           same
           in
           the
           Testicles
           of
           all
           Animals
           ,
           which
           he
           had
           Inspected
           ;
           and
           in
           another
           ,
           he
           gives
           them
           an
           Account
           ,
           That
           in
           the
           Spawn
           of
           a
           Cabeliaw
           he
           had
           found
           them
           to
           be
           still
           Lesser
           ,
           and
           more
           than
           Ten
           Thousand
           Swimming
           about
           in
           a
           Portion
           of
           Seed
           ,
           not
           exceeding
           a
           Grain
           of
           Sand
           ;
           and
           pretending
           to
           find
           by
           a
           Formal
           Computation
           all
           the
           Animals
           contain'd
           in
           the
           Lactes
           of
           this
           Fish
           ,
           to
           exceed
           more
           than
           Ten
           times
           the
           Number
           of
           Men
           on
           the
           Surface
           of
           the
           Earth
           .
           Foecundation
           he
           esteems
           to
           proceed
           from
           one
           of
           these
           Numerous
           Animalcula
           ,
           after
           Ejection
           ,
           striking
           thro'
           the
           Pores
           or
           Perforations
           on
           the
           Sides
           of
           the
           Ovum
           ,
           and
           Lodging
           it self
           in
           the
           Cicatricula
           ,
           which
           is
           dispos'd
           to
           Receive
           and
           Nourish
           it
           .
        
         
           From
           this
           surprizing
           Discovery
           ,
           it
           is
           evident
           That
           
           no
           
             Aura
             Seminalis
          
           ,
           or
           Influx
           of
           Active
           Spirituous
           Matter
           do's
           Delineate
           the
           Foetus
           ;
           and
           that
           Observation
           of
           Malpighius
           Illustrated
           ,
           That
           before
           Impregnation
           ,
           no
           Vestigia
           of
           the
           Pullus
           could
           be
           found
           ,
           and
           yet
           in
           some
           few
           Hours
           after
           ,
           it
           is
           distinct
           and
           visible
           .
           Having
           thus
           taken
           a
           short
           Prospect
           of
           the
           Materials
           ,
           we
           must
           proceed
           to
           the
           Order
           and
           Progress
           of
           Generation
           ,
           from
           the
           Inchoation
           ,
           till
           the
           Perfection
           of
           the
           Foetus
           in
           the
           Womb
           ,
           and
           its
           Exclusion
           ,
           and
           thence
           till
           its
           full
           Growth
           ,
           or
           Dimensions
           prescrib'd
           by
           Nature
           to
           the
           Species
           .
        
         
           The
           
             Arteriae
             Spermaticae
          
           in
           Men
           bring
           the
           Blood
           to
           the
           Testes
           ,
           in
           whose
           Convolutions
           ,
           it
           is
           Prepar'd
           and
           carry'd
           by
           the
           
             Vasa
             Deferentia
          
           to
           the
           
             Vesiculae
             Seminales
          
           ,
           where
           it
           is
           Lodg'd
           till
           in
           the
           Time
           of
           Coition
           ,
           it
           is
           Injected
           into
           the
           
             Vagina
             Vteri
          
           .
           The
           Manner
           of
           the
           Erection
           of
           the
           Penis
           in
           applying
           it
           to
           the
           Transverse
           Ligament
           of
           the
           
             Ossa
             Pubis
          
           ,
           by
           the
           
             Musculi
             Erigentes
          
           and
           the
           Constriction
           of
           the
           
             Corpus
             Cavernosum
             Vrethrae
          
           ,
           by
           the
           
             Musculi
             Acceleratores
          
           ,
           to
           Stop
           the
           Refluent
           Blood
           ,
           and
           Inflate
           the
           Bulb
           and
           Cavernous
           Bodies
           ,
           I
           shall
           wave
           Repeating
           ,
           having
           amply
           Describ'd
           this
           Artifice
           ,
           in
           the
           Appendix
           to
           my
           
             Myotomia
             Reformata
          
           .
        
         
           The
           Semen
           Injected
           into
           the
           Vagina
           of
           the
           Woman
           ,
           is
           Convey'd
           to
           the
           Ovaria
           ,
           thro'
           the
           Womb
           it self
           and
           the
           Falloppian
           Tubes
           ;
           which
           ,
           in
           the
           Time
           of
           Coition
           ,
           by
           means
           of
           their
           Reticular
           Structure
           ,
           are
           Inflated
           and
           strictly
           Embrace
           them
           .
           We
           have
           Describ'd
           the
           Manner
           how
           the
           Foliated
           Expansions
           of
           the
           Left
           Falloppian
           Tube
           ,
           Embrace
           the
           Ovarium
           on
           that
           Side
           ,
           and
           are
           Distended
           by
           the
           Refluent
           Blood
           from
           the
           Vagina
           ,
           whose
           Veins
           being
           Comprest
           by
           the
           Penis
           in
           Coition
           ,
           all
           ,
           or
           the
           greatest
           Part
           of
           its
           Blood
           ,
           passes
           up
           by
           the
           Spermatick
           Veins
           ,
           (
           which
           Inosculate
           with
           the
           Hypogastrick
           )
           and
           the
           Distended
           Tubes
           are
           Incurvated
           by
           the
           Broad
           Ligaments
           of
           the
           Vterus
           ,
           and
           the
           
             Fundus
             Vteri
          
           being
           Distended
           also
           ,
           and
           at
           the
           same
           Time
           the
           External
           Air
           Pent
           out
           by
           the
           Penis
           ,
           a
           free
           Passage
           is
           left
           for
           the
           Semen
           to
           the
           Ovarium
           .
           This
           I
           prefer
           as
           a
           more
           Compendious
           way
           of
           Conveying
           it
           ,
           than
           either
           thro'
           the
           whole
           Mass
           of
           Blood
           ,
           which
           must
           in
           my
           Opinion
           too
           much
           alter
           it
           ,
           or
           thro'
           the
           Porous
           Substance
           of
           the
           Vterus
           ,
           as
           others
           would
           have
           us
           believe
           .
           Nor
           can
           I
           conceive
           why
           any
           Man
           should
           scruple
           to
           think
           these
           small
           Animals
           may
           pass
           some
           Pore
           in
           the
           External
           Membranes
           ,
           as
           they
           do
           in
           Froggs
           ,
           Fish
           ,
           &c.
           where
           the
           Ovula
           are
           ejected
           out
           of
           the
           Female
           ,
           before
           they
           are
           Impregnated
           by
           the
           Male
           ,
           rather
           than
           suppose
           they
           should
           pass
           by
           the
           Spermatick
           Arteries
           to
           the
           Ovarium
           ,
           after
           several
           Circulations
           thro'
           the
           whole
           System
           of
           the
           Body
           .
           The
           immediate
           and
           direct
           Passage
           of
           the
           Semen
           is
           very
           much
           confirm'd
           ,
           by
           comparing
           the
           Appearances
           of
           these
           Uterine
           Parts
           in
           Fowl
           ,
           especially
           Hens
           .
        
         
           One
           ,
           or
           sometimes
           more
           of
           these
           Ova
           happening
           to
           be
           Foecundated
           at
           a
           Time
           ,
           are
           distended
           and
           break
           the
           Pedunculi
           ,
           by
           which
           they
           are
           affix'd
           ,
           and
           leaving
           their
           Folliculi
           ,
           pass
           into
           the
           Falloppian
           Tube
           ,
           which
           resembling
           the
           Ovi-ducts
           in
           Birds
           ,
           receive
           and
           convey
           them
           to
           the
           
             Fundus
             Vteri
          
           .
           The
           manner
           how
           they
           are
           carry'd
           on
           is
           not
           less
           Mechanical
           ,
           than
           most
           other
           Operations
           in
           the
           
             Animal
             Oeconomy
          
           ;
           for
           as
           the
           Turgescence
           of
           the
           Penis
           first
           remits
           in
           its
           Extremity
           ,
           so
           do's
           this
           exactly
           after
           the
           same
           manner
           ,
           and
           by
           Consequence
           drives
           the
           Ovum
           contain'd
           in
           it
           to
           the
           Fundus
           of
           the
           Womb.
           
        
         
           After
           the
           Ovum
           is
           arriv'd
           here
           ,
           it
           Fluctuates
           about
           some
           Time
           without
           being
           fix'd
           ,
           and
           receives
           Nourishment
           by
           Apposition
           only
           ,
           till
           at
           length
           some
           of
           its
           Vessels
           begin
           to
           Germinate
           ,
           and
           afterwards
           Inosculate
           with
           those
           of
           the
           Vterus
           .
           The
           Arteries
           of
           the
           Ovum
           protruding
           themselves
           into
           the
           Veins
           of
           the
           Vterus
           ,
           and
           the
           Veins
           Vice-versa
           into
           the
           Arteries
           ,
           from
           which
           mutual
           Intertexture
           of
           the
           Vessels
           ,
           the
           Placenta
           is
           compos'd
           .
        
         
           By
           Intervention
           of
           the
           Placenta
           and
           Umbilical
           Vessels
           ,
           the
           Foetus
           receives
           Blood
           from
           the
           Mother
           ,
           and
           a
           common
           Circulation
           is
           continu'd
           ,
           the
           Particulars
           of
           which
           ,
           and
           the
           Difference
           of
           its
           Course
           from
           the
           Circulation
           after
           the
           Birth
           ,
           is
           Describ'd
           in
           the
           Explication
           of
           the
           following
           Tables
           .
        
         
           The
           Aliment
           for
           Nutrition
           of
           the
           Foetus
           ,
           seems
           to
           be
           a
           sort
           of
           Chylous
           Juice
           separated
           by
           the
           Glands
           of
           the
           Placenta
           ,
           and
           reposited
           in
           the
           Capacity
           of
           the
           Amnios
           (
           Tab.
           55
           ,
           58.
           )
           which
           Grows
           considerable
           for
           its
           Quantity
           in
           the
           Second
           and
           Third
           Month
           ,
           and
           the
           Foetus
           begins
           to
           take
           it
           in
           at
           its
           Mouth
           ,
           for
           some
           time
           before
           its
           Birth
           ,
           whence
           it
           is
           convey'd
           to
           the
           Stomach
           and
           Intestines
           ,
           and
           Part
           passes
           into
           Chyle
           and
           Blood-Vessels
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Ordinary
           Method
           of
           Nature
           in
           an
           Adult
           ;
           the
           remainder
           Composing
           the
           Excrement
           we
           find
           in
           the
           Intestines
           of
           the
           Foetus
           ,
           and
           sometimes
           Floating
           in
           the
           Liquor
           of
           the
           Amnios
           .
           Besides
           which
           ,
           the
           Mammill●
           of
           Recent-born
           Infants
           of
           both
           Sexes
           ,
           contain
           a
           Serous
           Milky
           Liquor
           ,
           which
           is
           discharg'd
           into
           the
           Liquor
           of
           the
           Amnios
           .
        
         
           After
           the
           Foetus
           has
           lain
           Nine
           Months
           in
           the
           Womb
           ,
           it
           Arrives
           at
           such
           a
           Magnitude
           as
           makes
           it
           uneasie
           both
           for
           want
           of
           Room
           and
           Aliment
           .
           Besides
           the
           Excrements
           voided
           from
           its
           Anus
           foul
           the
           Contents
           of
           the
           Amnios
           ,
           and
           molest
           the
           Foetus
           ,
           which
           by
           its
           frequent
           and
           strenuous
           Struglings
           ,
           shakes
           the
           Placenta
           ,
           and
           breaks
           the
           slender
           Vessels
           ,
           which
           Connect
           it
           to
           the
           Vterus
           ;
           from
           the
           Conspiring
           of
           which
           Circumstances
           ,
           Parturition
           must
           necessarily
           follow
           .
        
         
           After
           the
           Secundines
           are
           remov'd
           ,
           and
           the
           Infant
           first
           Opens
           its
           Mouth
           ,
           the
           Ambient
           Air
           rushes
           into
           the
           Lungs
           ,
           and
           Distends
           the
           
             Vesiculae
             Aereoe
          
           ,
           which
           afterwards
           remain
           in
           some
           measure
           Inflated
           ,
           because
           the
           Extremity
           of
           the
           Bronchia
           which
           Open
           into
           them
           ,
           are
           much
           Less
           than
           the
           Vesiculae
           themselves
           ,
           and
           some
           Part
           of
           the
           Air
           will
           still
           continue
           in
           them
           ;
           whence
           they
           Gain
           a
           greater
           Specifick
           Lightness
           ,
           and
           Swim
           in
           Water
           .
           The
           Pulmonick
           Blood-Vessels
           which
           before
           the
           Birth
           lay
           Collaps'd
           ,
           have
           their
           Trunks
           and
           Ramifications
           Extended
           ,
           and
           admit
           the
           Blood
           to
           pass
           thro'
           them
           ;
           the
           
             Foramen
             Ovale
          
           ,
           and
           
             Canalis
             Arteriosus
          
           not
           lying
           in
           a
           Direct
           Line
           to
           the
           Propulsion
           of
           the
           Blood
           ;
           these
           Passages
           in
           Tract
           of
           Time
           ,
           become
           Obliterated
           ,
           and
           all
           the
           Blood
           from
           the
           Right
           Ventricle
           of
           the
           Heart
           ,
           passes
           thro'
           the
           Lungs
           ,
           before
           it
           can
           Arrive
           at
           the
           Left.
           These
           Alterations
           of
           the
           Oeconomy
           happen
           after
           the
           Foetus
           is
           brought
           into
           the
           World
           ,
           and
           Expos'd
           to
           the
           External
           Air.
           
        
         
           Having
           seen
           how
           the
           Infant
           is
           Generated
           and
           Usher'd
           into
           the
           World
           ,
           with
           the
           Alterations
           which
           attend
           its
           Birth
           ,
           we
           must
           consider
           next
           by
           what
           means
           Nutrition
           and
           Accretion
           are
           Effected
           ,
           or
           the
           Steps
           by
           which
           it
           proceeds
           insensibly
           from
           such
           small
           Beginnings
           ,
           to
           its
           due
           Size
           and
           Dimensions
           .
           It
           is
           certain
           ,
           that
           the
           Bodies
           of
           Animals
           are
           nothing
           else
           than
           a
           Vascular
           Compages
           ,
           and
           all
           their
           Parts
           Exist
           in
           the
           Foecundated
           Ovum
           ,
           which
           by
           the
           Accession
           of
           New
           Matter
           ,
           are
           only
           Distended
           and
           become
           Visible
           .
           From
           which
           Consideration
           we
           may
           infer
           ,
           That
           the
           Augmentation
           of
           the
           Body
           is
           made
           by
           a
           Simple
           Extension
           of
           all
           the
           Tubes
           ,
           Vessels
           and
           Cells
           ;
           which
           when
           they
           will
           no
           longer
           recede
           to
           admit
           the
           Nutritious
           Particles
           ,
           to
           be
           Lodg'd
           in
           the
           Interstices
           of
           the
           Fibres
           which
           Compose
           their
           Parietes
           ,
           and
           there
           remain
           no
           more
           Ostiola
           in
           the
           Sides
           of
           their
           Vessels
           ,
           by
           which
           the
           Fluids
           can
           Open
           a
           Passage
           ,
           the
           Body
           is
           Arriv'd
           at
           the
           utmost
           limits
           of
           its
           Growth
           .
           This
           Tenseness
           and
           Contiguity
           of
           the
           Fibres
           which
           refuses
           to
           admit
           more
           of
           the
           Nutritious
           Parts
           ,
           is
           that
           which
           Determines
           the
           Magnitude
           of
           Animals
           ,
           and
           the
           same
           Hypothesis
           will
           serve
           to
           Explicate
           the
           differing
           Sizes
           of
           Individuals
           of
           the
           same
           Species
           .
           In
           this
           Manner
           the
           Bones
           Arrive
           at
           their
           full
           Dimensions
           ,
           and
           then
           preserve
           their
           Stability
           and
           Figure
           ,
           whose
           Accretion
           and
           other
           Accidents
           Arising
           from
           its
           Vitiation
           ,
           are
           very
           well
           Explain'd
           by
           Dr.
           Havers
           in
           his
           Osteologia
           .
           But
           besides
           the
           gradual
           Increase
           and
           Formation
           of
           the
           Tubes
           and
           Vessels
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           necessity
           for
           a
           Supply
           of
           Fluids
           to
           maintain
           a
           Plenitude
           ,
           with
           a
           constant
           Reparation
           of
           the
           Blood
           and
           Humours
           to
           prevent
           the
           Collapse
           :
           Thus
           in
           an
           Atrophy
           ,
           the
           great
           Emaciation
           and
           apparent
           Loss
           of
           the
           Substance
           ,
           proceeds
           from
           a
           want
           of
           Proper
           Fluids
           to
           preserve
           the
           Arteries
           ,
           Veins
           ,
           Lymphe-ducts
           ,
           &c.
           and
           other
           Channels
           of
           the
           Body
           in
           their
           due
           Distention
           .
           I
           must
           confess
           a
           Corrosive
           Salt
           in
           some
           deprav'd
           Crases
           of
           the
           Blood
           ,
           may
           consume
           the
           Stable
           and
           Organick
           Parts
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           
             Spina
             Ventosa
          
           ,
           and
           such
           like
           Cases
           ,
           where
           the
           Bones
           sometimes
           (
           as
           I
           have
           seen
           in
           one
           of
           the
           Fingers
           )
           are
           wholly
           Dissolv'd
           ,
           while
           the
           External
           Teguments
           have
           not
           been
           injur'd
           ;
           but
           in
           this
           Case
           ,
           contrary
           to
           the
           other
           ,
           the
           Loss
           is
           Irreparable
           .
           Hence
           Appears
           the
           necessary
           Distinction
           between
           Accretion
           and
           Nutrition
           ,
           the
           First
           being
           an
           Accession
           to
           the
           Organical
           Parts
           ,
           by
           New
           Matter
           Intruding
           into
           the
           Interstices
           of
           their
           Fibres
           ,
           and
           there
           remaining
           ;
           and
           the
           Latter
           only
           a
           Supply
           of
           a
           Proper
           Pabulum
           to
           the
           Fluids
           ,
           to
           preserve
           them
           in
           a
           due
           Temper
           and
           Proportion
           .
           The
           First
           being
           fix'd
           and
           permanent
           ,
           and
           scarce
           alter'd
           once
           in
           the
           Term
           of
           a
           Man's
           Life
           ,
           and
           the
           Last
           in
           a
           perpetual
           Succession
           and
           Flux
           ;
           which
           therefore
           requires
           the
           superfluous
           Part
           of
           the
           
             Succus
             Nutritius
          
           ,
           not
           retain'd
           in
           the
           Proper
           Tubes
           and
           Cells
           to
           be
           Infunded
           into
           the
           Lymphe-ducts
           ,
           by
           which
           it
           is
           again
           return'd
           to
           the
           General
           Mass
           ;
           the
           Manner
           of
           which
           we
           may
           Conceive
           by
           Fig.
           6.
           of
           the
           Appendix
           .
        
         
           From
           the
           Natural
           ,
           we
           pass
           to
           the
           Animal
           Functions
           :
           That
           the
           Brain
           and
           Nervous
           System
           are
           the
           Common
           Medium
           of
           Sense
           and
           Motion
           is
           uncontested
           ;
           but
           the
           manner
           how
           the
           Impressions
           are
           convey'd
           from
           the
           External
           Organs
           to
           the
           
             Sedes
             Animae
          
           ,
           and
           Vice-versa
           from
           thence
           to
           the
           Organ
           ,
           and
           how
           a
           Material
           Substance
           can
           affect
           and
           be
           affected
           by
           an
           Immaterial
           ,
           is
           Obscure
           and
           scarce
           to
           be
           conceiv'd
           .
           Wherefore
           waving
           all
           Precarious
           Hypotheses
           ,
           I
           shall
           confine
           my self
           to
           the
           Description
           of
           such
           Phaenomena
           as
           are
           Matters
           of
           Fact
           ,
           and
           undeniable
           ,
           and
           leave
           the
           Reader
           at
           Liberty
           to
           erect
           what
           System
           he
           pleases
           .
           The
           Seat
           of
           Sense
           is
           the
           Brain
           ,
           whose
           Nervous
           Dispensations
           are
           the
           Intermediate
           Bodies
           between
           it
           and
           the
           Organs
           ,
           on
           which
           the
           External
           Objects
           act
           .
           When
           the
           Impression
           is
           made
           by
           the
           Object
           ,
           and
           receiv'd
           into
           the
           Organ
           of
           Sense
           ,
           it
           is
           convey'd
           from
           thence
           with
           the
           same
           Type
           or
           Character
           ,
           by
           an
           Agitation
           of
           its
           Nervous
           Expansions
           and
           their
           continued
           Trunks
           ,
           to
           the
           common
           Sensory
           :
           This
           is
           common
           to
           Men
           and
           Brutes
           ,
           and
           is
           by
           
             Des
             Cartes
          
           made
           the
           First
           Degree
           of
           Sensation
           :
           The
           Second
           is
           the
           Perception
           of
           the
           Soul
           attending
           that
           Motion
           ,
           which
           immediately
           follows
           the
           former
           Degree
           ,
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           intimate
           Connexion
           of
           the
           Soul
           to
           the
           
             Sensorium
             Commune
          
           .
           The
           Third
           comprehends
           all
           those
           Judgments
           which
           we
           form
           by
           the
           Occasion
           of
           those
           Motions
           :
           Hence
           
           it
           follows
           ,
           all
           Corporeal
           Objects
           are
           only
           Perceivable
           by
           us
           ,
           in
           as
           much
           as
           they
           affect
           the
           Nerves
           expanded
           ,
           in
           such
           and
           such
           Organs
           .
           This
           is
           the
           general
           Idea
           of
           Sensation
           so
           far
           as
           can
           be
           explain'd
           without
           Engaging
           in
           particular
           Schemes
           .
        
         
           Before
           we
           enter
           on
           the
           Consideration
           of
           the
           External
           Senses
           ,
           we
           shall
           offer
           a
           short
           Account
           of
           the
           Structure
           of
           the
           Brain
           and
           Nerves
           in
           general
           .
           The
           Cerebrum
           ,
           (
           Tab.
           10.
           
           Fig.
           1.
           )
           Cerebellum
           and
           
             Medulla
             Spinalis
          
           (
           Tab.
           and
           Fig.
           ib.
           )
           are
           evidently
           compos'd
           of
           Two
           Parts
           :
           the
           first
           which
           appears
           on
           the
           Surface
           of
           the
           Cerebrum
           and
           Cerebellum
           is
           of
           a
           Cineritious
           Colour
           ,
           and
           is
           call'd
           the
           Cortical
           and
           Glandulous
           Part
           ;
           the
           other
           or
           internal
           is
           Whiter
           and
           Harder
           ,
           and
           is
           call'd
           the
           Medullary
           ,
           Callose
           ,
           and
           Fibrous
           Part
           :
           This
           Order
           is
           inverted
           in
           the
           Spinal
           Marrow
           ,
           where
           the
           External
           Part
           is
           Callose
           and
           White
           ,
           and
           it
           's
           Internal
           ,
           Soft
           and
           Cineritious
           .
           The
           Cineritious
           or
           Cortical
           Part
           of
           the
           Cerebrum
           is
           remarkable
           in
           those
           Turnings
           and
           Windings
           which
           are
           deeply
           divided
           by
           the
           
             Pia
             Mater
          
           within
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           Cerebrum
           (
           Tab.
           10.
           
           Fig.
           1.
           
           C.
           )
           from
           whence
           it
           appears
           to
           have
           a
           very
           large
           Surface
           .
           The
           like
           Contrivance
           is
           observable
           in
           the
           Cerebellum
           ;
           the
           outward
           Appearance
           of
           the
           Sulci
           of
           which
           differ
           from
           those
           of
           the
           Cerebrum
           ,
           and
           are
           ranged
           in
           Parallel
           Lines
           according
           to
           its
           Length
           ,
           as
           exprest
           Tab.
           7.
           
           Fig.
           2.
           
           Besides
           the
           Cineritious
           Part
           of
           the
           Cerebrum
           plac'd
           on
           its
           Surface
           ,
           it
           has
           still
           other
           Cineritious
           Bodies
           or
           Protuberances
           added
           to
           its
           
             Corpus
             Callosum
          
           ;
           as
           the
           
             Corpora
             Striata
          
           ,
           (
           App.
           Fig.
           30.
           
           ΔΔ
           .
           )
           Nates
           and
           Testes
           .
           (
           Tab.
           10.
           
           Fig.
           1.
           )
        
         
           In
           a
           Horizontal
           Section
           of
           the
           Cerebrum
           ,
           its
           Cortical
           and
           Medullary
           Parts
           Appear
           ,
           as
           Represented
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           30.
           
           In
           a
           Transverse
           Section
           of
           the
           Cerebellum
           ,
           an
           Arboreous
           Disposition
           of
           the
           Latter
           Appear
           within
           the
           Former
           (
           Tab.
           10.
           
           Fig.
           1.
           )
           The
           Cineritious
           Colour
           of
           the
           Cortical
           Parts
           of
           the
           Brain
           Arises
           from
           the
           Number
           and
           Contortion
           of
           its
           Proper
           Blood-Vessels
           ,
           which
           Pass
           according
           to
           the
           Length
           of
           the
           Fibres
           in
           the
           Callose
           and
           White
           Part.
           
        
         
           In
           Viewing
           the
           Surface
           of
           the
           Cortical
           Parts
           ,
           it
           Appears
           Compos'd
           of
           a
           vast
           Number
           of
           small
           Glands
           of
           a
           Deprest
           Oval
           Figure
           ,
           from
           each
           of
           which
           Spring
           the
           Medullary
           Fibres
           ,
           which
           Compose
           the
           Callose
           or
           White
           Part
           ;
           all
           which
           make
           the
           
             Centrum
             Ovale
          
           of
           Vieussens
           (
           App.
           Fig.
           30.
           n
           n.
           )
           before
           they
           Compose
           the
           
             Crura
             Medullae
             Oblongatae
          
           ,
           (
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           29.
           
           B
           B.
           )
           In
           this
           Progress
           ,
           the
           Medullary
           Fibres
           of
           the
           Cerebrum
           ,
           give
           Originals
           to
           the
           Olfactory
           and
           Optick
           Nerves
           :
           At
           the
           Conjunction
           of
           the
           Crura
           ,
           the
           Third
           Pair
           of
           Nerves
           Arise
           ,
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           28
           ,
           3
           ,
           33
           :
           soon
           after
           the
           Annular
           Process
           or
           
             Pons
             Varolii
          
           ,
           (
           which
           partly
           Arisies
           from
           the
           Cerebellum
           )
           (
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           28.
           s
           s
           )
           is
           Join'd
           with
           the
           Crura
           .
           In
           this
           Part
           of
           the
           Conjunction
           of
           the
           Medullary
           Parts
           of
           the
           Cerebrum
           with
           the
           several
           Processes
           of
           the
           Cerebellum
           ,
           the
           Fourth
           ,
           Fifth
           ,
           Sixth
           and
           Seventh
           Pair
           of
           Nerves
           Arise
           :
           and
           at
           the
           Beginning
           of
           the
           
             Medulla
             Oblongata
          
           ,
           (
           whence
           Spring
           the
           Eighth
           and
           Ninth
           Pair
           of
           Nerves
           ,
           )
           there
           is
           a
           compleat
           Union
           of
           all
           the
           Medullary
           Parts
           of
           the
           Cerebrum
           and
           Cerebellum
           ;
           Where
           a
           Cineritious
           Part
           may
           be
           seen
           in
           its
           Middle
           ,
           as
           Appears
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           29.
           d
           d.
           This
           Inversion
           of
           the
           Order
           of
           the
           Callose
           and
           Cineritious
           Parts
           ,
           is
           kept
           thro'
           the
           whole
           
             Medulla
             Spinalis
          
           .
        
         
           From
           what
           has
           been
           above
           Observ'd
           ,
           it
           Appears
           ,
           the
           Surfaces
           of
           the
           Cortical
           Parts
           of
           the
           Cerebrum
           and
           Cerebellum
           are
           much
           larger
           than
           those
           of
           their
           Medullary
           ,
           consequently
           each
           Gland
           which
           helps
           to
           Compose
           them
           ,
           must
           be
           larger
           in
           its
           Diameter
           than
           the
           Medullary
           Fibre
           ,
           which
           Arises
           from
           it
           .
           This
           Consideration
           will
           lead
           us
           still
           farther
           ;
           for
           since
           it
           's
           plain
           ,
           the
           Surfaces
           of
           the
           Medullary
           Parts
           of
           the
           Brain
           and
           Cerebellum
           ,
           are
           much
           larger
           than
           they
           are
           afterwards
           in
           the
           
             Medulla
             Oblongata
          
           ,
           therefore
           the
           Fibres
           which
           Compose
           them
           ,
           must
           necessarily
           be
           thicker
           in
           their
           Diameters
           ,
           at
           each
           Gland
           ,
           than
           they
           are
           afterwards
           in
           their
           Progress
           to
           the
           Beginnings
           of
           the
           Nerves
           ,
           where
           they
           are
           considerably
           contracted
           ,
           and
           frame
           the
           Apex
           of
           a
           Cone
           .
        
         
           Here
           we
           must
           not
           omit
           to
           take
           notice
           ,
           that
           all
           those
           Medullary
           Fibres
           inservient
           to
           Motion
           in
           general
           ,
           and
           the
           Organs
           of
           Tasting
           and
           Touching
           ,
           are
           very
           much
           Contracted
           at
           the
           Beginnings
           of
           their
           Nerves
           ,
           without
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           Brain
           and
           
             Medulla
             Spinalis
          
           ;
           and
           on
           the
           other
           hand
           ,
           all
           those
           Medullary
           Fibres
           employ'd
           in
           the
           Organs
           of
           Seeing
           ,
           Hearing
           and
           Smelling
           are
           contracted
           ,
           or
           have
           the
           Apices
           of
           their
           Cones
           within
           the
           Body
           of
           the
           Brain
           :
           Thus
           the
           Nervous
           Fibres
           concern'd
           in
           Motion
           in
           general
           ,
           and
           such
           as
           are
           Mov'd
           by
           the
           Contact
           of
           Gross
           Objects
           ,
           are
           lessen'd
           between
           their
           Originals
           and
           several
           Divarications
           ,
           
             extra
             Cerebrum
          
           ;
           but
           those
           affected
           by
           the
           Mediation
           of
           Light
           and
           Air
           ,
           within
           the
           Brain
           .
        
         
           The
           utmost
           I
           could
           yet
           Observe
           in
           Viewing
           the
           Nervous
           Fibrillae
           with
           a
           Microscope
           (
           whether
           Composing
           the
           
             Corpus
             Callosum
          
           of
           the
           Brain
           ,
           or
           the
           Bodies
           of
           the
           Nerves
           themselves
           )
           is
           ,
           that
           they
           are
           Form'd
           of
           a
           Reticulated
           Compages
           of
           Fibres
           ;
           which
           in
           the
           Latter
           Appear
           Globular
           ;
           but
           in
           the
           Former
           or
           
             Corpus
             Callosum
          
           (
           by
           reason
           of
           the
           irregular
           Section
           ,
           or
           Expanding
           a
           Thin
           Divided
           Transparent
           Part
           of
           it
           on
           the
           Object-Plate
           of
           the
           Microscope
           )
           it
           Appears
           Reticulated
           ,
           and
           the
           Interstices
           of
           its
           Rete
           of
           various
           Angles
           .
           This
           Structure
           of
           the
           Nervous
           System
           ,
           seems
           to
           Plead
           against
           those
           Hypotheses
           of
           the
           Animal
           Functions
           ,
           Founded
           on
           the
           Motions
           of
           the
           Spirits
           or
           Fluids
           ,
           Deriv'd
           immediately
           from
           the
           Brain
           ,
           and
           Transmitted
           by
           the
           Nervous
           Channels
           .
           We
           shall
           here
           only
           present
           the
           Reader
           with
           an
           Anatomical
           Plan
           of
           the
           Organs
           of
           the
           External
           Senses
           ,
           and
           shew
           how
           Objects
           may
           be
           Imprest
           on
           them
           and
           Convey'd
           to
           the
           
             Sensorium
             Commune
          
           ,
           and
           leave
           him
           to
           Contemplate
           on
           the
           Elegant
           Fabrick
           of
           the
           Brain
           ,
           whose
           particular
           Contrivances
           have
           hitherto
           escap'd
           the
           Discovery
           of
           the
           most
           Sagacious
           Enquirers
           .
        
         
           The
           Five
           External
           Senses
           ,
           are
           so
           many
           differing
           Species
           of
           Perception
           from
           the
           Applications
           of
           Bodies
           to
           their
           several
           Organs
           ;
           either
           Immediate
           ,
           as
           in
           Feeling
           and
           Tasting
           ;
           or
           thro'
           a
           Proper
           Medium
           ,
           as
           in
           Smelling
           ,
           Hearing
           and
           Seeing
           .
           The
           Sense
           of
           Feeling
           is
           Extended
           thro'
           the
           whole
           Body
           ,
           except
           some
           few
           Parts
           ,
           as
           the
           Bones
           ,
           Cartilages
           ,
           &c.
           but
           chiefly
           Resides
           in
           the
           True
           Skin
           ,
           whose
           Structure
           ,
           so
           far
           as
           it
           Relates
           to
           this
           Sense
           ,
           is
           as
           follows
           .
           The
           Cuticula
           ,
           (
           Tab.
           4.
           
           Fig.
           1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3.
           )
           (
           which
           is
           a
           common
           Covering
           to
           the
           whole
           Surface
           of
           the
           Skin
           )
           being
           Remov'd
           ,
           certain
           Papillary
           Protuberances
           Discover
           themselves
           ,
           which
           View'd
           with
           a
           Microscope
           (
           Tab.
           4.
           
           Fig.
           6.
           )
           Appear
           made
           up
           of
           many
           Roundish
           Sudoriferous
           Glands
           ,
           with
           a
           vast
           Number
           of
           Nervous
           Fibrillae
           Expanded
           on
           their
           Surface
           :
           This
           Uneven
           Papillary
           Surface
           is
           necessary
           ,
           to
           the
           end
           those
           Fibrillae
           may
           be
           the
           more
           Expanded
           and
           Apply'd
           to
           Tangible
           Objects
           ;
           so
           that
           the
           Figure
           ,
           Modification
           and
           other
           manifest
           Qualities
           may
           be
           Discern'd
           ,
           and
           the
           Impressions
           Convey'd
           to
           the
           Common
           Sensory
           ,
           by
           the
           Mediation
           of
           their
           Nerves
           .
           Since
           the
           Extremities
           of
           the
           Fingers
           and
           Thumbs
           are
           (
           for
           many
           Reasons
           )
           necessary
           Parts
           to
           be
           Endued
           with
           an
           Exquisite
           Sense
           of
           Feeling
           ;
           therefore
           the
           Order
           of
           these
           Papillae
           are
           there
           Converted
           to
           a
           Contorted
           Series
           ,
           which
           Appear
           like
           so
           many
           Rugae
           under
           the
           Cuticula
           ,
           as
           is
           Represented
           in
           the
           last
           Mention'd
           Table
           ,
           Fig.
           4.
           
           The
           Cuticula
           here
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           in
           other
           Parts
           of
           the
           Skin
           ,
           is
           a
           necessary
           Medium
           between
           the
           Object
           and
           the
           Organ
           ;
           but
           when
           it
           Grows
           very
           Thick
           ,
           as
           in
           some
           Laborious
           Mechanicks
           ,
           it
           becomes
           an
           Impediment
           .
           From
           the
           vast
           Number
           of
           these
           Nervous
           Filaments
           ,
           any
           Solution
           of
           Continuity
           of
           the
           Skin
           it self
           ,
           is
           more
           Painful
           ,
           than
           most
           of
           its
           subjacent
           Parts
           .
        
         
           The
           Fabrication
           of
           the
           Tongue
           ,
           its
           Papillary
           Surface
           ,
           and
           the
           Manner
           of
           its
           Application
           to
           Objects
           ,
           bears
           a
           great
           Similitude
           to
           that
           of
           the
           Skin
           now
           Describ'd
           ,
           in
           so
           much
           that
           some
           have
           reckond
           the
           Sense
           of
           Tasting
           a
           Species
           of
           Tactus
           .
           The
           Structure
           of
           this
           Part
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           its
           Coverings
           and
           Papillary
           Bodies
           ,
           are
           Represented
           Tab.
           13.
           where
           Fig.
           2.
           
           Shews
           the
           External
           Membrane
           ,
           in
           which
           the
           Papillary
           Bodies
           lying
           under
           it
           ,
           Appear
           variously
           Figur'd
           ,
           some
           Conical
           ,
           others
           Round
           ,
           and
           others
           with
           their
           Extremities
           Forked
           .
           In
           some
           Animals
           these
           Papillae
           are
           externally
           Large
           ,
           and
           their
           Extremities
           Cartilaginous
           and
           Horny
           ,
           but
           in
           Humane
           Tongues
           it
           is
           far
           otherwise
           ;
           the
           Outward
           Membrane
           here
           being
           very
           Soft
           ,
           the
           Papillae
           Numerous
           and
           Small
           ,
           and
           appearing
           Villous
           to
           the
           Naked
           Eye
           .
           This
           Membrane
           being
           Rais'd
           (
           after
           sufficient
           Boyling
           the
           Tongue
           )
           the
           next
           which
           offers
           ,
           is
           more
           Spongy
           ,
           Softer
           and
           full
           of
           Blood-Vessels
           ,
           
             Tab.
             ib.
             Fig.
          
           6
           ,
           7.
           
           This
           is
           Perforated
           by
           the
           many
           Nervous
           Papillae
           ,
           immediately
           Plac'd
           under
           it
           :
           (
           
             Tab.
             ib.
             Fig.
          
           8.
           )
           the
           Tops
           of
           which
           are
           afterwards
           Receiv'd
           in
           the
           Vaginulae
           of
           the
           External
           Membrane
           .
           These
           Papillae
           Cleave
           to
           the
           Fleshy
           Fibres
           of
           the
           Tongue
           ,
           and
           are
           of
           various
           Sizes
           and
           Figures
           as
           above
           Noted
           .
           In
           the
           Interstices
           of
           these
           Papillae
           are
           Plac'd
           Divers
           Salival
           Glands
           ,
           the
           Excretory
           Tubes
           of
           which
           ,
           Discharge
           themselves
           by
           certain
           Apertures
           ;
           (
           
             Tab.
             ib.
             Fig.
          
           2.
           
           G
           G.
           )
           whereby
           the
           Villous
           Covering
           of
           the
           Tongue
           is
           Moisten'd
           ,
           and
           the
           Saporiferous
           Particles
           are
           readily
           Admitted
           to
           the
           
             Corpora
             Papillaria
          
           ,
           whose
           Nervous
           Expansions
           (
           on
           their
           Surface
           ,
           like
           those
           of
           the
           Cutis
           )
           Transmit
           the
           several
           Impressions
           (
           made
           by
           Objects
           of
           Various
           Figures
           )
           to
           the
           Common
           Sensory
           ,
           by
           the
           Mediation
           of
           the
           
             Par
             Quintum
          
           .
           Thus
           the
           Structure
           of
           the
           External
           Parts
           of
           the
           Tongue
           ,
           Agree
           with
           that
           of
           the
           Skin
           ,
           with
           this
           Difference
           ,
           the
           Former
           being
           Cloth'd
           (
           in
           Humane
           Bodies
           )
           with
           a
           very
           Thin
           Soft
           Membrane
           ,
           and
           its
           Papillae
           very
           Numerous
           ,
           Less
           and
           more
           Extruded
           or
           Longer
           ;
           whereas
           the
           
             Papillae
             Cutis
          
           ,
           are
           Larger
           ,
           Shorter
           ,
           and
           Cover'd
           with
           a
           more
           Dense
           Membrane
           or
           Cuticula
           .
           Hence
           the
           Tongue
           Appears
           to
           be
           an
           Exquisite
           Organ
           of
           Tactus
           .
           However
           the
           Sense
           of
           Taste
           principally
           Resides
           in
           the
           Tongue
           ,
           yet
           we
           must
           Refer
           the
           Organs
           of
           Smelling
           hither
           ,
           since
           Experience
           Shews
           us
           the
           Former
           Sense
           cannot
           be
           Compleat
           ,
           where
           the
           Latter
           is
           Deficient
           .
        
         
           The
           External
           Organ
           of
           Smelling
           is
           not
           Confin'd
           within
           the
           Cavities
           of
           the
           Nostrils
           ,
           but
           is
           Compos'd
           of
           a
           very
           Large
           Glandulous
           Nervous
           Membrane
           ,
           in
           like
           manner
           Extended
           within
           the
           Cavities
           of
           the
           
             Ossa
             Frontis
          
           (
           Tab.
           89.
           
           Fig.
           1.
           ib.
           Tab.
           91.
           
           Fig.
           2.
           )
           Fourth
           Pair
           of
           Bones
           of
           the
           Upper-Jaw
           ,
           (
           Tab.
           92.
           
           Fig.
           1.
           
           E.
           )
           and
           in
           that
           Part
           of
           the
           
             Os
             Sphenoides
          
           composing
           the
           
             Sella
             Turcica
          
           ,
           (
           Tab.
           89.
           
           Fig.
           2.
           )
           all
           which
           Open
           into
           the
           
             Foramina
             Narium
          
           .
           Besides
           these
           Cavities
           ,
           the
           Nostrils
           are
           furnish'd
           with
           Divers
           
             Ossa
             Spongiosa
          
           ,
           Describ'd
           ,
           Tab.
           92.
           
           Fig.
           1.
           
           H.
           on
           which
           the
           same
           Membrane
           is
           Expanded
           .
           This
           Membrane
           is
           in
           a
           great
           Measure
           compos'd
           of
           the
           Extremities
           of
           the
           Olfactory
           Nerves
           ,
           and
           is
           the
           Organ
           of
           this
           Sense
           ,
           which
           receives
           the
           Impression
           made
           by
           the
           Odoriferous
           Effluvia
           ,
           whether
           in
           Inspiration
           ,
           as
           in
           the
           Proper
           Action
           of
           Smelling
           ;
           or
           Expiration
           ,
           as
           in
           Tasting
           ,
           which
           happens
           in
           Mastication
           or
           Deglutition
           of
           the
           Aliment
           .
           
           What
           we
           have
           hinted
           concerning
           the
           Complication
           of
           Tasting
           with
           Smelling
           ,
           will
           in
           some
           Manner
           be
           evinc'd
           ,
           if
           we
           reflect
           on
           that
           Common
           Practice
           of
           Holding
           the
           Nose
           to
           avoid
           Nauseous
           Tasts
           :
           And
           when
           the
           
             Foramina
             Narium
          
           are
           partly
           Obstructed
           ,
           (
           as
           after
           taking
           Cold
           )
           how
           little
           we
           Distinguish
           the
           Proper
           Tasts
           of
           some
           Things
           ,
           especially
           such
           as
           are
           Odoriferous
           .
        
         
           The
           Organs
           of
           the
           Fourth
           External
           Sense
           ,
           are
           the
           Two
           Ears
           ,
           by
           which
           the
           Various
           Sounds
           Imprest
           on
           the
           Ambient
           Air
           ,
           are
           Represented
           to
           the
           Common
           Sensory
           .
           The
           External
           Ear
           or
           Auricula
           (
           Tab.
           12.
           
           Fig.
           1.
           )
           is
           Compos'd
           of
           a
           Cartilage
           Cover'd
           with
           the
           Cuticula
           and
           Cutis
           ;
           whose
           many
           Contorted
           Foldings
           ,
           are
           Fitted
           for
           the
           Reception
           of
           the
           External
           Undulating
           Air
           ,
           and
           Transmitting
           it
           to
           the
           
             Meatus
             Auditorius
          
           .
           The
           Winding
           Progress
           of
           the
           Meatus
           seems
           purposely
           contriv'd
           ,
           to
           prevent
           some
           Inconveniences
           which
           might
           Arise
           ,
           from
           the
           Violent
           Irruption
           of
           the
           Air
           thro'
           too
           Direct
           a
           Passage
           to
           the
           
             Membrana
             Tympani
          
           ,
           plac'd
           at
           the
           farther
           End
           of
           it
           :
           (
           
             Ap.
             Fig.
          
           15.
           e.
           )
           For
           the
           same
           Intent
           ,
           the
           Cerumen
           or
           Ear-Wax
           ,
           seems
           to
           be
           Separated
           by
           the
           Numerous
           Glands
           in
           the
           Membrane
           of
           the
           Meatus
           ,
           to
           Infringe
           its
           Motion
           .
           The
           Air
           which
           thus
           Passes
           the
           Meatus
           ,
           Shakes
           the
           
             Membrana
             Tympani
          
           more
           or
           less
           ,
           according
           to
           the
           Various
           Impressions
           made
           on
           it
           
             ab
             Extra
          
           :
           The
           Long
           Process
           of
           the
           Malleus
           (
           App.
           Fig.
           15.
           )
           which
           is
           Contiguous
           to
           this
           Membrane
           ,
           is
           necessarily
           Mov'd
           ,
           consequently
           the
           Incus
           which
           is
           Articulated
           with
           the
           Malleus
           ,
           (
           App.
           Fig.
           16.
           
           H
           ,
           I.
           )
           and
           the
           Stapes
           ,
           which
           is
           Articulated
           with
           the
           Incus
           ,
           by
           the
           Mediation
           of
           the
           
             Os
             Orbiculare
          
           ,
           (
           App.
           Fig.
           17.
           
           H
           I.
           )
           are
           all
           successively
           Mov'd
           by
           each
           other
           :
           Nor
           could
           any
           Tremulous
           Motions
           be
           Imprest
           on
           the
           
             Membrana
             Tympani
          
           by
           the
           External
           Air
           ,
           if
           the
           Cavity
           of
           the
           Tympanum
           it self
           had
           no
           Aperture
           ,
           by
           which
           its
           Contain'd
           Air
           could
           Fluctuate
           ,
           no
           more
           than
           a
           Drum
           it self
           would
           Sound
           if
           there
           were
           no
           Holes
           in
           its
           Sides
           .
           For
           this
           Reason
           a
           Passage
           from
           the
           Palate
           to
           the
           Tympanum
           is
           Form'd
           ,
           (
           
             Vid.
             App.
             Fig.
          
           8.
           
           N
           N.
           )
           By
           this
           Curious
           Artifice
           the
           Various
           Sounds
           Arising
           from
           the
           Vibrations
           of
           the
           External
           Air
           ,
           are
           Modifi'd
           ,
           and
           Articulately
           Represented
           to
           the
           Auditory
           Nerve
           ,
           Expanded
           within
           the
           Winding
           Cavities
           of
           the
           Labyrinth
           or
           Three
           Semicircular
           Ducts
           and
           Cochlea
           (
           App.
           Fig.
           17
           ,
           18.
           )
           by
           means
           of
           the
           Stapes
           ,
           whose
           Basis
           immediately
           Covers
           the
           
             Foramen
             Ovale
          
           or
           Entrance
           to
           those
           Cavities
           ,
           where
           the
           
             Aer
             Insitus
          
           or
           Congenitus
           ,
           is
           said
           to
           Reside
           .
           This
           Air
           tho'
           call'd
           Innate
           ,
           must
           Arise
           from
           that
           Contain'd
           in
           the
           Tympanum
           ,
           and
           necessarily
           has
           a
           Communication
           with
           it
           ,
           else
           we
           cannot
           see
           how
           the
           Vibrations
           made
           by
           the
           Stapes
           ,
           should
           be
           Communicated
           to
           these
           Contorted
           Channels
           .
           Nor
           can
           it
           be
           suppos'd
           ,
           the
           Basis
           of
           the
           Stapes
           has
           any
           loose
           Membranous
           Connexion
           to
           the
           Margin
           of
           the
           
             Foramen
             Ovale
          
           (
           which
           it
           must
           have
           ,
           to
           keep
           out
           the
           Air
           Contain'd
           in
           the
           Tympanum
           ;
           )
           Or
           that
           the
           Stapes
           adequately
           Closes
           that
           Foramen
           :
           Both
           which
           would
           meet
           with
           Equal
           Impediments
           from
           the
           Grosser
           Air
           in
           the
           Tympanum
           ,
           pressing
           on
           the
           Basis
           of
           the
           Stapes
           ,
           and
           hindring
           its
           Elevation
           .
        
         
           The
           Small
           Muscles
           which
           move
           the
           Malleus
           ,
           and
           that
           of
           the
           Stapes
           ,
           like
           the
           Heart
           ,
           Diaphragm
           and
           Muscles
           concern'd
           in
           Respiration
           ,
           do
           their
           Office
           Inadvertently
           ,
           and
           are
           Useful
           herein
           ,
           as
           we
           have
           Represented
           them
           in
           
             App.
             Fig.
          
           15
           ,
           16
           ,
           17.
           
           This
           Structure
           of
           the
           Auricula
           and
           Parts
           within
           the
           Tympanum
           ,
           Prepare
           the
           Impressions
           made
           in
           the
           External
           Air
           ,
           and
           Represent
           them
           to
           the
           Expansions
           of
           the
           Auditory
           Nerve
           ;
           not
           unlike
           the
           Membranes
           and
           Humours
           of
           the
           Eye
           ,
           Refracting
           the
           Rays
           of
           Light
           in
           passing
           to
           the
           
             Tunica
             Retina
          
           in
           the
           Eye
           ,
           which
           falls
           next
           under
           our
           Consideration
           .
        
         
           As
           the
           Air
           is
           the
           Vehicle
           of
           the
           Objects
           to
           the
           Two
           Former
           Organs
           ,
           so
           the
           Light
           is
           to
           this
           .
           The
           Nature
           and
           Properties
           of
           Light
           ,
           the
           Magnitude
           ,
           Figure
           or
           Motion
           of
           Luminous
           Particles
           ,
           as
           well
           as
           the
           Shape
           or
           Conformation
           of
           those
           Parts
           ,
           which
           Affect
           the
           Organs
           of
           the
           other
           Senses
           ,
           we
           omit
           as
           more
           Proper
           for
           the
           Disputes
           of
           the
           Schools
           than
           an
           Anatomical
           Discourse
           ,
           confining
           our
           Theory
           of
           Vision
           to
           the
           Structure
           of
           the
           Parts
           .
        
         
           In
           the
           Fabrication
           of
           these
           Organs
           ,
           the
           Eye-lids
           or
           Palpebrae
           (
           Tab.
           11.
           
           Fig.
           1
           ,
           2
           ,
           3
           ,
           4
           ,
           5.
           )
           are
           none
           of
           the
           least
           Remarkable
           .
           The
           Upper
           is
           Elevated
           and
           Deprest
           by
           Two
           Muscles
           ,
           the
           External
           of
           which
           is
           Circular
           and
           call'd
           Orbicularis
           .
           (
           Tab.
           12.
           
           Fig.
           4.
           )
           This
           Draws
           the
           Upper
           Eye-lid
           down
           ;
           the
           Internal
           is
           Straight
           (
           Tab.
           11.
           
           Fig.
           4.
           )
           and
           Pulls
           it
           up
           .
           By
           this
           Contrivance
           the
           Eye
           is
           not
           only
           Defended
           from
           Extraneous
           Bodies
           ,
           but
           the
           Discharge
           of
           the
           Lachrimal
           Humour
           is
           Accelerated
           by
           the
           several
           Ducts
           ,
           into
           the
           Internal
           Part
           of
           the
           Palpebrae
           next
           the
           Bulb
           of
           the
           Eye
           ,
           
             Vid.
             Tab.
          
           11.
           
           Fig.
           5.
           
           The
           Eye
           it self
           is
           Spherical
           and
           Mov'd
           by
           its
           Proper
           Muscles
           ,
           Represented
           in
           the
           last
           mention'd
           
             Tab.
             Fig.
          
           7
           ,
           8
           ,
           9
           ,
           10.
           
           Its
           Membranes
           ,
           Humours
           ,
           and
           the
           Parts
           which
           Compose
           it
           being
           Exprest
           
             Tab.
             ib.
             Fig.
          
           11
           ,
           12
           ,
           13
           ,
           14
           ,
           15
           ,
           16
           ,
           17
           ,
           18
           ,
           19
           ,
           21
           ,
           22
           ,
           23
           ,
           24.
           we
           shall
           here
           only
           take
           Notice
           of
           its
           Structure
           ,
           so
           far
           as
           Relates
           to
           its
           Action
           ,
           and
           Describe
           the
           Plan
           made
           by
           a
           Section
           thro'
           the
           Axis
           of
           Vision
           ,
           which
           will
           Conduce
           to
           the
           right
           Apprehending
           the
           Manner
           ,
           how
           Objects
           are
           Represented
           in
           the
           
             Sensorium
             Commune
          
           .
        
         
         
           A
           A
           ,
           The
           
             Tunica
             Cornea
          
           ,
           whose
           External
           Surface
           is
           a
           little
           more
           Convex
           than
           the
           Bulb
           of
           the
           Eye
           it self
           .
        
         
           B
           B
           ,
           The
           
             Tunica
             Sclerotica
          
           or
           Dura
           .
        
         
           C
           C
           ,
           Parts
           of
           the
           
             Tunica
             Adnata
          
           or
           Conjunctiva
           ,
           which
           are
           Continu'd
           to
           the
           Internal
           Parts
           of
           the
           Palpebrae
           .
        
         
           D
           D
           ,
           The
           Choroeides
           ,
           the
           Fore-part
           of
           which
           is
           call'd
           Vvea
           ;
           Its
           Blood-Vessels
           Appear
           very
           Beautiful
           ,
           when
           Injected
           with
           Mercury
           ,
           and
           seem
           to
           Compose
           Divers
           Glandulous
           Bodies
           .
        
         
           E
           E
           ,
           The
           Retina
           or
           Expansions
           of
           the
           Optick
           Nerve
           ,
           on
           which
           Objects
           are
           Depicted
           .
        
         
           F
           F
           ,
           The
           Iris
           which
           lies
           Loose
           or
           Floating
           in
           the
           Aqueous
           Humour
           .
        
         
           G
           G
           ,
           The
           
             Ligamentum
             Ciliare
          
           .
        
         
           H
           ,
           The
           Aqueous
           Humour
           .
        
         
           I
           ,
           The
           Chrystalline
           .
        
         
           K
           ,
           The
           Vitreous
           Humour
           .
        
         
           L
           ,
           Part
           of
           the
           Optick
           Nerve
           .
        
         
           The
           
             Tunica
             Cornea
          
           Receives
           the
           Various
           Rays
           of
           Light
           proceeding
           from
           all
           Points
           of
           the
           Object
           ,
           Collects
           and
           Transmits
           them
           thro'
           the
           Foramen
           of
           the
           Vvea
           ,
           or
           Pupill
           ,
           Refracting
           the
           Diverging
           Rays
           on
           each
           Side
           toward
           the
           Perpendicular
           .
           The
           Chrystalline
           Humour
           Receives
           the
           Rays
           First
           Infracted
           in
           the
           Cornea
           ,
           and
           beginning
           to
           Diverge
           again
           in
           the
           Aqueous
           Humour
           ,
           and
           Refracts
           them
           a
           Second
           Time
           ;
           So
           that
           all
           the
           Rays
           proceeding
           from
           the
           same
           Point
           of
           the
           Object
           ,
           by
           Passing
           thro'
           .
           this
           Dense
           Medium
           ,
           do
           Converge
           again
           ,
           and
           Terminate
           in
           the
           same
           Point
           on
           the
           Retina
           .
           From
           this
           Refraction
           or
           Direction
           of
           the
           Rays
           of
           Light
           ,
           to
           a
           Point
           ,
           distinct
           Pictures
           or
           Images
           of
           Visible
           Objects
           are
           Represented
           on
           the
           Retina
           ,
           as
           the
           Figures
           of
           External
           Bodies
           in
           passing
           thro'
           a
           Single
           Convex
           Glass
           on
           a
           Paper
           on
           the
           Wall
           of
           a
           dark
           Chamber
           ,
           the
           whole
           will
           be
           better
           Conceiv'd
           by
           the
           following
           Figure
           ,
           which
           Represents
           the
           same
           Section
           of
           the
           Eye
           ,
           as
           the
           Former
           with
           the
           Luminous
           Rays
           passing
           thro'
           .
        
         
         
           Thus
           the
           Rays
           in
           Passing
           thro'
           the
           Cornea
           and
           Humours
           of
           the
           Eyes
           ,
           are
           Inverted
           ,
           and
           the
           Image
           of
           the
           Object
           is
           so
           Depicted
           on
           the
           Concave
           of
           the
           Retina
           .
           How
           this
           Inversion
           is
           Reduc'd
           in
           the
           
             Sensorium
             Commune
          
           to
           a
           Right
           Perception
           ,
           may
           be
           Accounted
           for
           in
           our
           Proper
           Knowledge
           of
           Things
           ,
           in
           the
           same
           Manner
           ,
           as
           we
           know
           when
           we
           hold
           a
           Stick
           in
           each
           Hand
           cross
           each
           other
           ,
           that
           the
           Stick
           in
           the
           Right
           Touches
           such
           an
           Object
           ,
           and
           that
           in
           the
           Left
           another
           :
           Thus
           Vision
           being
           made
           by
           the
           Rayes
           of
           Light
           proceeding
           from
           the
           Object
           ,
           and
           making
           Due
           and
           Various
           Motions
           of
           the
           Nervous
           Fibres
           of
           the
           Retina
           ,
           which
           are
           Communicated
           to
           the
           Common
           Sensory
           by
           the
           Optick
           Nerves
           with
           the
           same
           Type
           and
           Character
           ;
           we
           may
           reckon
           this
           Sensation
           to
           be
           not
           altogether
           unlike
           that
           of
           Tactus
           .
        
         
           The
           Last
           of
           the
           Animal
           Functions
           which
           we
           should
           here
           speak
           of
           ,
           is
           Muscular
           Motion
           ,
           but
           having
           already
           Publish'd
           my
           Thoughts
           conerning
           that
           Phaenomenon
           in
           my
           
             Myotomia
             Reformata
          
           ,
           I
           shall
           not
           trouble
           the
           Reader
           here
           with
           a
           Repetition
           ,
           since
           no
           Experiment
           ,
           nor
           Observation
           (
           besides
           that
           mention'd
           in
           Tab.
           64.
           
           Fig.
           2.
           concerning
           the
           Fleshy
           Fibres
           )
           has
           since
           Occur'd
           ,
           which
           should
           Add
           to
           those
           Conjectures
           ,
           or
           Favour
           any
           other
           .
        
      
       
         
         
           To
           the
           READER
           .
        
         
           THE
           Fate
           of
           Authors
           ,
           when
           they
           appear
           on
           the
           Publick
           Stage
           of
           the
           World
           ,
           is
           extreamly
           uncertain
           ;
           Good
           or
           Ill
           Success
           ,
           Reputation
           or
           '
           Disgrace
           frequently
           depend
           more
           on
           the
           Humor
           and
           Prejudice
           of
           the
           Reader
           ,
           than
           the
           Merit
           of
           the
           Performance
           .
           This
           hard
           Fortune
           of
           all
           Writers
           has
           made
           it
           Dangerous
           for
           any
           Book
           to
           venture
           Abroad
           ,
           without
           some
           Harangue
           or
           Apology
           before
           it
           ,
           to
           bespeak
           a
           favourable
           Treatment
           .
           For
           my
           Part
           ,
           I
           have
           no
           Excuse
           to
           offer
           for
           not
           Complying
           with
           this
           reasonable
           Custom
           ;
           but
           wholly
           resign
           my
           Cause
           to
           all
           Well-wishers
           ,
           to
           the
           Advancement
           of
           Anatomy
           ,
           the
           proper
           Iudges
           of
           this
           Matter
           ;
           whose
           Candor
           and
           Indulgence
           ,
           I
           doubt
           not
           ,
           will
           be
           a
           better
           Protection
           ,
           from
           the
           Defects
           that
           shall
           be
           Discover'd
           in
           this
           Work
           ,
           than
           any
           Reasons
           I
           shall
           be
           able
           to
           alledge
           in
           my
           Defence
           .
        
         
           This
           Volume
           contains
           a
           General
           Description
           of
           the
           Fabrick
           of
           Humane
           Bodies
           ,
           after
           the
           Manner
           of
           a
           Commentary
           on
           the
           Tables
           ,
           which
           Represent
           their
           several
           Organs
           .
           The
           present
           and
           last
           Age
           ,
           have
           been
           Industrious
           in
           making
           Discoveries
           in
           the
           
             Animal
             Machine
          
           ,
           by
           Detecting
           the
           Structure
           of
           the
           Heart
           ,
           and
           Artifice
           of
           the
           Circulation
           ,
           the
           Origin
           and
           Course
           of
           the
           Lymphe-ducts
           ,
           the
           several
           Salival
           Glands
           and
           their
           Channels
           ,
           the
           Texture
           of
           the
           Bones
           ,
           and
           Medullary
           Cells
           ,
           the
           Mucilaginous
           Glands
           of
           the
           Ioints
           ,
           the
           Organs
           and
           Process
           of
           Generation
           ,
           the
           Organs
           of
           the
           External
           Senses
           ,
           in
           reforming
           the
           Myology
           ,
           (
           an
           Essay
           on
           the
           Last
           of
           These
           ,
           with
           some
           Remarks
           on
           the
           Structure
           and
           Erection
           of
           the
           Penis
           ,
           I
           some
           time
           since
           Publish'd
           ,
           )
           all
           which
           the
           Reader
           will
           find
           in
           the
           following
           Descriptions
           ,
           with
           my
           own
           Observations
           and
           Conjectures
           ,
           which
           in
           many
           Places
           differ
           from
           the
           General
           receiv'd
           Opinions
           .
           Besides
           the
           History
           of
           the
           Natural
           Structure
           ,
           I
           have
           thro'
           the
           whole
           Series
           of
           the
           Work
           ,
           Inserted
           some
           Phaenomena
           ,
           I
           have
           found
           in
           Dissecting
           Morbid
           Bodies
           ,
           and
           such
           Practical
           Instructions
           ,
           as
           I
           hope
           will
           be
           Useful
           in
           many
           Cases
           ,
           to
           the
           Chirurgical
           Operator
           .
        
         
           The
           whole
           is
           dispos'd
           in
           this
           Order
           :
           In
           the
           first
           Hundred
           and
           Five
           Tables
           ,
           after
           a
           Prospect
           of
           the
           Body
           ,
           with
           the
           Teguments
           ,
           Hair
           ,
           &c.
           the
           Parts
           of
           the
           Head
           ,
           Neck
           ,
           Brain
           ,
           
             Medulla
             Spinalis
          
           follow
           ,
           and
           so
           proceeds
           to
           those
           of
           the
           Breast
           ,
           Back
           ,
           Loins
           ,
           Lower-belly
           ,
           Uterus
           with
           the
           Foetus
           and
           its
           Adjuncts
           ;
           next
           the
           Muscles
           of
           the
           Limbs
           ,
           and
           lastly
           the
           Osteology
           .
           These
           Figures
           were
           Drawn
           after
           the
           Life
           ,
           by
           the
           Masterly
           Painter
           
             G.
             de
             Lairess
          
           ,
           and
           Engrav'd
           by
           no
           less
           a
           Hand
           ,
           and
           Represent
           the
           Parts
           of
           
             Humane
             Bodies
          
           far
           beyond
           any
           Exstant
           ;
           and
           were
           some
           time
           since
           Publish'd
           by
           
             Dr.
             Bidloo
          
           ,
           now
           Professor
           of
           Anatomy
           in
           the
           University
           of
           Leyden
           .
           I
           shall
           take
           the
           Liberty
           here
           to
           acquaint
           the
           Reader
           ,
           That
           in
           these
           Tables
           I
           have
           added
           above
           Seven-hundred
           References
           ,
           all
           which
           are
           Letter'd
           with
           a
           Pen
           in
           the
           several
           Figures
           ;
           among
           which
           it
           is
           hardly
           possible
           ,
           but
           Mistakes
           may
           occur
           in
           some
           Places
           ,
           (
           by
           those
           who
           have
           Inserted
           them
           )
           which
           I
           hope
           will
           not
           be
           imputed
           to
           my
           Inadvertence
           .
           The
           Parts
           which
           in
           many
           Places
           had
           their
           Nomenclature
           barely
           annex'd
           ,
           are
           here
           Copiously
           Describ'd
           ;
           to
           which
           ,
           as
           I
           before
           Noted
           ,
           are
           added
           such
           Observations
           of
           the
           Male
           Conformation
           and
           Vitiated
           Structure
           ,
           as
           may
           Illustrate
           the
           Pathology
           or
           History
           of
           Diseases
           ,
           their
           Symptoms
           and
           Causes
           ;
           I
           have
           likewise
           interspers'd
           several
           Remarks
           on
           the
           usual
           Method
           of
           Chirurgical
           Operations
           ,
           with
           Directions
           for
           performing
           them
           in
           a
           more
           Exact
           and
           Successful
           Manner
           ;
           and
           lastly
           given
           an
           Account
           of
           several
           Cases
           and
           Accidents
           rarely
           occurring
           ,
           and
           not
           (
           at
           least
           commonly
           )
           observ'd
           by
           Authors
           .
           The
           Appendix
           is
           partly
           a
           Supplement
           to
           the
           preceding
           Tables
           ,
           and
           partly
           a
           Correction
           of
           such
           Things
           as
           are
           not
           well
           Exprest
           ;
           for
           Instance
           ,
           The
           two
           First
           Tables
           present
           a
           Prospect
           or
           General
           View
           of
           the
           whole
           Body
           ,
           both
           on
           the
           Fore
           and
           Back-side
           ,
           Denuded
           of
           its
           Teguments
           ,
           and
           Clear'd
           from
           its
           Fat
           ;
           where
           the
           External
           Muscles
           with
           their
           Tendons
           ,
           Fasciculi
           and
           Series
           of
           Fibres
           ,
           Appear
           on
           the
           Surface
           .
           These
           are
           not
           Drawn
           by
           Invention
           ,
           but
           are
           Touch'd
           on
           after
           an
           Original
           Cast
           from
           the
           Life
           in
           
             Plaister
             of
             Paris
          
           ,
           which
           I
           have
           now
           by
           me
           .
           The
           Third
           Table
           contains
           a
           System
           of
           the
           Arteries
           Dissected
           from
           a
           Foetus
           ,
           with
           their
           several
           Trunks
           and
           Ramifications
           ,
           Delineated
           from
           the
           Life
           ,
           which
           I
           have
           also
           by
           me
           Injected
           with
           VVax
           ;
           how
           much
           this
           differs
           from
           that
           Describ'd
           (
           Tab.
           23.
           )
           may
           be
           soon
           Discover'd
           .
           In
           two
           other
           Figures
           of
           the
           same
           Table
           ,
           are
           the
           Prospects
           of
           the
           Extremities
           of
           the
           Veins
           and
           Arteries
           ,
           as
           they
           Appear
           in
           the
           Transparent
           Finns
           of
           a
           Grigg
           and
           Flounder
           ,
           view'd
           thro'
           a
           Microscope
           .
           Here
           the
           Method
           of
           Circulation
           ,
           the
           Continuity
           of
           the
           Venous
           and
           Arterious
           Channels
           ,
           the
           Globuli
           passing
           them
           in
           an
           uninterrupted
           Current
           ,
           is
           Demonstrated
           .
           In
           another
           Figure
           is
           Exprest
           our
           Conjecture
           of
           the
           Rise
           of
           those
           Ducts
           ,
           which
           Export
           the
           Lympha
           and
           redundant
           Nutriment
           .
           In
           the
           Fourth
           Table
           ,
           the
           
             Receptaculum
             Chyli
          
           is
           Represented
           ,
           Fill'd
           with
           Mercury
           ,
           with
           the
           Various
           Course
           of
           the
           Chyle-Vessels
           and
           Lymphe-ducts
           ,
           their
           Communicant
           Branches
           ,
           the
           Lumbal
           Glands
           ,
           the
           Triple-Division
           of
           the
           Receptacle
           ,
           hitherto
           Unobserv'd
           ,
           at
           least
           not
           Delineated
           .
           In
           the
           remaining
           Tables
           (
           I
           fear
           the
           tedious
           Enumeration
           of
           Particulars
           may
           tire
           the
           
           Reader
           's
           Patience
           )
           are
           the
           Organs
           of
           Hearing
           ,
           with
           the
           
             Meatus
             à
             Palato
             ad
             Aurem
          
           ,
           and
           that
           from
           the
           Inner
           Ear
           to
           the
           External
           Meatus
           ;
           the
           Foramina
           of
           the
           Tonsils
           which
           Evacuate
           the
           Pituita
           ;
           the
           several
           Parts
           of
           the
           Tongue
           and
           
             Aspera
             Arteria
          
           ;
           the
           Basis
           of
           the
           Brain
           ,
           that
           of
           the
           Cranium
           ;
           the
           Muscles
           of
           the
           Face
           and
           Lips
           ,
           several
           of
           which
           are
           not
           Describ'd
           ,
           and
           the
           rest
           Erroneously
           .
        
         
           In
           this
           Undertaking
           I
           have
           been
           Oblig'd
           to
           my
           Learned
           Friend
           
             Dr.
             Tancred
             Robinson
          
           ,
           in
           Revising
           as
           many
           Sheets
           as
           his
           Leasure
           would
           give
           him
           leave
           .
           In
           the
           last
           Place
           ,
           to
           render
           the
           whole
           more
           Useful
           ,
           a
           Copious
           Index
           is
           added
           at
           the
           End
           ;
           which
           if
           the
           Reader
           finds
           Useful
           ,
           he
           is
           Oblig'd
           to
           return
           his
           Thanks
           to
           the
           Deserving
           Mr.
           
             James
             Fern
          
           the
           Surgeon
           ,
           who
           was
           at
           the
           Trouble
           of
           digesting
           the
           Contents
           of
           this
           Work
           ,
           into
           an
           Alphabetical
           Order
           ,
           which
           my
           Avocations
           would
           by
           no
           means
           permit
           me
           to
           do
           .
        
         
           —
           If
           the
           Reader
           happens
           to
           Discover
           any
           Literal
           Errors
           ,
           of
           which
           some
           may
           be
           found
           ,
           it
           is
           hop'd
           he
           will
           Excuse
           them
           ,
           upon
           Account
           of
           the
           Haste
           and
           Distance
           of
           the
           Press
           ;
           the
           Practice
           in
           my
           Profession
           not
           suffering
           me
           always
           to
           Revise
           every
           minute
           Passage
           .
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
         
           THE
           ANATOMY
           OF
           HUMANE
           BODIES
           .
        
         
           BEFORE
           we
           enter
           on
           the
           Anatomical
           Description
           of
           Humane
           Bodies
           ,
           let
           us
           take
           a
           View
           of
           their
           External
           Parts
           ,
           as
           they
           appear
           in
           the
           Living
           State
           :
           Here
           we
           shall
           First
           briefly
           take
           notice
           of
           their
           most
           remarkable
           Appearance
           in
           the
           Embryo
           and
           Foetus
           of
           the
           Womb
           ;
           and
           thence
           proceed
           to
           observe
           the
           several
           Stages
           of
           Proportion
           from
           Children
           to
           those
           of
           a
           Full-grown
           State
           ,
           and
           Old
           Age
           :
           To
           these
           we
           shall
           add
           the
           different
           Proportions
           of
           Men
           and
           Women
           ;
           and
           lastly
           the
           External
           Appearance
           of
           the
           Muscles
           and
           other
           Parts
           in
           divers
           Actions
           .
        
         
           If
           a
           Praeexistence
           of
           Parts
           in
           an
           Embryo
           was
           allowable
           ,
           that
           at
           Twenty
           five
           days
           after
           Conception
           (
           Figured
           Tab.
           57.
           
           Fig.
           3.
           )
           would
           incline
           us
           to
           believe
           the
           Brain
           and
           whole
           Head
           had
           a
           Precedency
           ,
           since
           its
           Magnitude
           then
           exceeds
           the
           whole
           Bulk
           of
           the
           rest
           of
           the
           Parts
           ;
           but
           as
           the
           time
           of
           the
           Birth
           advances
           ,
           the
           Head
           of
           the
           Foetus
           does
           not
           commonly
           exceed
           a
           Fourth
           Part
           in
           its
           whole
           Length
           .
        
         
           The
           Center
           or
           Middle
           Part
           between
           the
           two
           Extreams
           of
           the
           Head
           and
           Feet
           of
           an
           Infant
           ,
           is
           in
           the
           Navel
           ;
           but
           that
           of
           an
           Adult
           in
           the
           
             Ossa
             Pubis
          
           :
           And
           this
           Proportion
           of
           dividing
           Children
           into
           Four
           Parts
           ,
           whereof
           the
           Head
           is
           one
           ,
           is
           commonly
           made
           use
           of
           by
           Painters
           and
           Sculptors
           ,
           &c.
           
        
         
           A
           Child
           Two
           Years
           old
           has
           about
           Five
           Heads
           in
           its
           whole
           Length
           ;
           but
           one
           of
           Four
           or
           five
           Years
           ,
           has
           about
           Six
           ;
           thus
           measured
           ,
           by
           dividing
           the
           whole
           Body
           into
           so
           many
           Lengths
           ,
           whereof
           the
           Head
           must
           be
           one
           .
           Hence
           it
           appears
           ,
           as
           the
           Growth
           of
           the
           Body
           advances
           ,
           there
           is
           a
           gradual
           Approach
           to
           the
           Proportion
           of
           an
           Adult
           of
           Eight
           ,
           nine
           ,
           or
           ten
           Faces
           in
           the
           whole
           Length
           .
        
         
           There
           are
           many
           Bodies
           in
           a
           Full-grown
           State
           ,
           which
           have
           not
           above
           Four
           or
           five
           Lengths
           or
           Faces
           ;
           but
           those
           are
           Miscarriages
           in
           Nature
           ,
           and
           therefore
           not
           Subjects
           of
           our
           present
           Consideration
           .
        
         
           About
           the
           Fifteenth
           or
           sixteenth
           Year
           ,
           Seven
           Faces
           or
           Lengths
           are
           then
           the
           Proportion
           or
           Measure
           ,
           and
           the
           Center
           inclines
           towards
           the
           upper
           Parts
           of
           the
           
             Ossa
             Pubis
          
           ;
           and
           tho'
           this
           Proportion
           may
           serve
           indifferently
           for
           a
           short
           well-set
           thick
           Person
           ,
           when
           the
           Shoulders
           are
           broad
           ,
           and
           the
           Limbs
           thick
           ,
           and
           strong
           ;
           yet
           if
           on
           the
           contrary
           the
           Shoulders
           are
           somewhat
           narrow
           ,
           and
           the
           Limbs
           slender
           ,
           it
           will
           represent
           a
           Youth
           :
           And
           however
           Paradoxical
           it
           may
           seem
           at
           first
           ,
           yet
           an
           Old
           Woman
           ,
           or
           the
           Goddess
           Vesta
           will
           fall
           under
           this
           Proportion
           of
           Lengths
           ,
           thro'
           the
           bending
           forwards
           of
           the
           Back-bones
           ;
           and
           tho'
           the
           Limbs
           bear
           a
           Proportion
           to
           one
           of
           Eight
           or
           nine
           Faces
           ,
           yet
           they
           not
           being
           duly
           extended
           (
           for
           want
           of
           the
           vigorous
           Action
           of
           the
           Muscles
           )
           render
           the
           Appearance
           of
           the
           whole
           Figure
           very
           short
           .
        
         
           The
           Ancients
           have
           commonly
           allowed
           Eight
           Heads
           to
           their
           Figures
           ,
           says
           the
           Author
           of
           the
           Observations
           on
           Mr.
           Du
           Fresnoy's
           Art
           of
           Painting
           ,
           made
           English
           by
           the
           Incomparable
           Mr.
           Dryden
           ;
           but
           we
           ,
           says
           he
           ,
           divide
           the
           Figure
           [
           of
           a
           Humane
           Body
           ]
           into
           Ten
           Faces
           ,
           from
           the
           Crown
           of
           the
           Head
           to
           the
           Sole
           of
           the
           Foot
           ,
           in
           the
           following
           manner
           :
           N.B.
           That
           this
           Number
           of
           Faces
           depends
           on
           the
           Age
           ,
           as
           above
           hinted
           ,
           and
           the
           Quality
           of
           the
           Persons
           represented
           .
           The
           Apollo
           and
           
             Venus
             de
             Medices
          
           have
           more
           than
           Ten
           Faces
           .
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIRST
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             FROM
             the
             Crown
             of
             the
             Head
             1
             ,
             to
             the
             upper
             part
             of
             the
             Forehead
             A
             ,
             is
             the
             Third
             Part
             of
             a
             Face
             .
          
           
             The
             Face
             begins
             at
             the
             Roots
             of
             the
             lowest
             Hairs
             ,
             which
             are
             upon
             the
             Forehead
             AB
             ,
             and
             ends
             at
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Chin
             I.
             
          
           
             The
             Face
             is
             divided
             into
             Three
             proportionable
             Parts
             ;
             the
             First
             contains
             the
             Forehead
             AB
             ;
             the
             Second
             the
             Nose
             C
             ;
             and
             the
             Third
             the
             Mouth
             and
             Chin
             GHI
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Chin
             to
             the
             Pit
             between
             the
             Two
             Coller-bones
             ,
             or
             upper
             Part
             of
             the
             Sternum
             ,
             are
             Two
             Lengths
             of
             a
             Nose
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Pit
             between
             the
             Two
             Coller-bones
             to
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Breast
             ,
             called
             
               Scrobiculus
               Cordis
            
             N
             ,
             One
             Face
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Breasts
             to
             the
             Navel
             R
             ,
             one
             Face
             ;
             the
             Apollo
             has
             a
             Nose
             more
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Navel
             to
             the
             Pudenda
             S
             ,
             One
             Face
             ;
             but
             the
             Apollo
             has
             Half
             a
             Nose
             more
             :
             and
             the
             upper
             Half
             of
             the
             
               Venus
               de
               Medices
            
             is
             to
             the
             lower
             Part
             of
             the
             Belly
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             the
             Privy
             Parts
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Genitories
             or
             Pudenda
             ,
             to
             the
             upper
             Part
             of
             the
             Knee
             ,
             called
             the
             Thigh
             W
             ,
             Two
             Faces
             .
          
           
             The
             Knee
             contains
             Half
             a
             Face
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             lower
             part
             of
             the
             Knee
             to
             the
             Ancle
             ,
             call'd
             the
             Leg
             ,
             Two
             Faces
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Ancle
             or
             
               Malleolus
               internus
            
             to
             the
             Sole
             of
             the
             Foot
             ,
             Half
             a
             Face
             .
          
           
             A
             Man
             ,
             when
             his
             Arms
             are
             stretched
             out
             ,
             is
             from
             the
             Extremity
             of
             the
             Longest
             Finger
             of
             his
             Right
             Hand
             to
             the
             Extremity
             of
             the
             Longest
             of
             his
             Left
             ,
             as
             broad
             as
             he
             is
             long
             .
          
           
             From
             one
             side
             of
             the
             Breasts
             to
             the
             other
             below
             the
             Paps
             M
             M
             ,
             Two
             Faces
             .
          
           
             The
             Bone
             of
             the
             Arm
             call'd
             Humerus
             is
             the
             Length
             of
             Two
             Faces
             from
             its
             Conjunction
             with
             the
             Shoulder-blade
             to
             the
             Elbow
             .
             Here
             we
             think
             our
             Author
             is
             mistaken
             ,
             for
             if
             you
             allow
             Two
             Faces
             to
             that
             Part
             of
             the
             Arm
             between
             the
             Shoulder
             and
             bending
             of
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             and
             Two
             more
             from
             the
             Elbow
             to
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             Little
             Finger
             ,
             when
             the
             Fingers
             contain
             Half
             a
             Face
             ,
             and
             the
             Distance
             between
             the
             Point
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             ,
             and
             Pit
             of
             the
             Throat
             ,
             a
             Whole
             Face
             ;
             you
             will
             make
             Five
             Faces
             and
             Half
             on
             each
             Side
             or
             Half
             Length
             ,
             which
             amounts
             to
             Eleven
             Faces
             in
             the
             Whole
             :
             But
             if
             you
             add
             to
             this
             what
             he
             says
             afterwards
             ,
             that
             the
             Boxes
             of
             the
             Elbows
             with
             the
             Humerus
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Humerus
             with
             the
             Shoulder-blade
             ,
             bear
             a
             Proportion
             of
             Half
             a
             Face
             ,
             when
             the
             Arms
             are
             stretched
             out
             ;
             then
             the
             Whole
             Distance
             between
             the
             Extremities
             of
             the
             Two
             Middle
             Fingers
             ,
             when
             the
             Arms
             are
             so
             extended
             ,
             will
             amount
             to
             Eleven
             Faces
             and
             a
             Half
             ;
             wherefore
             we
             think
             the
             Account
             may
             stand
             Corrected
             thus
             .
          
           
             From
             the
             Pit
             of
             the
             Throat
             to
             the
             Top
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             or
             Extremity
             of
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             One
             Face
             ;
             from
             thence
             to
             the
             bending
             of
             the
             Cubit
             or
             Elbow
             ,
             one
             Face
             and
             a
             half
             ;
             thence
             again
             to
             the
             Wrist
             ,
             One
             Face
             and
             a
             Nose
             .
             The
             Hand
             with
             the
             Fingers
             Extended
             contain
             One
             Face
             :
             hence
             it
             follows
             that
             Four
             Faces
             ,
             a
             Nose
             ,
             and
             Half
             a
             Face
             ,
             is
             the
             distance
             between
             the
             Throat
             Pit
             ,
             and
             Extremity
             of
             the
             Middle
             Finger
             ;
             which
             upon
             extension
             of
             the
             whole
             Arm
             ,
             &c.
             will
             amount
             to
             Five
             Faces
             ,
             or
             rather
             more
             than
             less
             .
          
           
             The
             Sole
             of
             the
             Foot
             ,
             is
             the
             Sixth
             part
             of
             the
             whole
             Figure
             ,
             says
             our
             Author
             ;
             but
             the
             Foot
             ought
             not
             to
             exceed
             a
             Face
             ,
             and
             a
             Nose
             in
             Length
             .
          
           
             As
             for
             the
             Breadth
             of
             the
             Limbs
             ,
             no
             precise
             Measure
             can
             be
             given
             ,
             because
             the
             Measures
             themselves
             are
             not
             only
             changeable
             according
             to
             the
             Quality
             of
             the
             Persons
             ,
             but
             according
             to
             the
             Movement
             of
             the
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             A
             Man
             is
             Two
             Lengths
             or
             Faces
             from
             the
             Point
             of
             each
             Shoulder
             ;
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             from
             the
             Upper
             Part
             of
             the
             Sternum
             between
             the
             Claviculae
             call'd
             the
             Pit
             of
             the
             Throat
             ,
             to
             the
             Extremity
             of
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             call'd
             the
             Top
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             ,
             One
             Length
             ;
             and
             so
             on
             the
             other
             Side
             .
          
           
             The
             Breadth
             of
             the
             Hips
             of
             a
             Man
             is
             One
             Length
             and
             a
             Half
             ;
             that
             is
             ,
             from
             the
             great
             Trochanter
             of
             the
             Thigh
             Bone
             of
             one
             Side
             ,
             to
             that
             of
             the
             other
             :
             The
             precise
             Places
             of
             which
             Bones
             are
             intersected
             by
             an
             Horizontal
             Line
             drawn
             from
             the
             Pubes
             to
             each
             Side
             .
          
           
             
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Pomum
                 Adami
              
               ,
               or
               Protuberant
               Part
               of
               the
               Larynx
               ,
               which
               in
               Men
               is
               much
               larger
               than
               in
               Women
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               Sternum
               or
               
                 Os
                 Pectoris
              
               appearing
               under
               the
               Skin
               &c.
               between
               the
               Two
               Pectoral
               Muscles
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               The
               
                 Scrobiculus
                 Cordis
              
               commonly
               call'd
               the
               Pit
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               under
               the
               Skin
               ,
               &c.
               
               Precisely
               in
               this
               Place
               ,
               is
               the
               
                 Cartilago
                 Ensiformis
              
               .
            
             
               O
               P
               ,
               The
               Epigastrium
               .
            
             
               Q
               Q
               ,
               That
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               denotes
               the
               Inguina
               ;
               that
               of
               the
               Right
               ,
               the
               Ilia
               .
            
             
               R
               ,
               The
               Region
               of
               the
               Navel
               .
            
             
               S
               ,
               The
               Penis
               .
            
             
               T
               T
               ,
               The
               Arms.
               
            
             
               V
               V
               ,
               The
               Legs
               .
            
             
               W
               W
               ,
               The
               Thighs
               .
            
             
               X
               X
               ,
               The
               Feet
               .
            
             
               Y
               Y
               ,
               The
               Shoulders
               .
            
             
               Z
               Z
               ,
               The
               Hands
               .
            
             
               δ
               δ
               The
               Hypocondrium
               .
            
             
               **
               ,
               The
               Hypogastrium
               .
            
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SECOND
             TABLE
          
           
             REPRESENTS
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             a
             Woman
             ,
             in
             whom
             the
             Symmetry
             or
             Proportion
             differs
             from
             that
             of
             a
             Man
             :
             First
             ,
             that
             most
             remarkably
             the
             Shoulders
             are
             narrower
             ;
             the
             Man
             having
             Two
             Lengths
             or
             Faces
             in
             the
             Breadth
             of
             his
             Shoulders
             ,
             and
             One
             and
             a
             Half
             in
             his
             Hips
             ;
             whereas
             a
             Woman
             on
             the
             contrary
             ,
             has
             but
             one
             Face
             and
             a
             Half
             in
             her
             Shoulders
             ,
             and
             Two
             in
             her
             Hips
             :
             Secondly
             ,
             the
             Claviculae
             or
             Channel-bones
             ,
             and
             Muscles
             in
             general
             do
             not
             appear
             in
             Women
             as
             in
             Men
             ;
             whence
             it
             is
             ,
             the
             out
             Line
             of
             the
             one
             ,
             as
             Painters
             call
             it
             ,
             differs
             very
             much
             from
             that
             of
             the
             other
             .
             Nor
             will
             any
             Action
             ,
             in
             which
             a
             Woman
             uses
             her
             utmost
             Strength
             ,
             occasion
             such
             Swellings
             or
             Risings
             of
             the
             Muscles
             and
             other
             Parts
             to
             appear
             ,
             as
             they
             do
             in
             Men
             ;
             since
             the
             great
             Quantity
             of
             Fat
             placed
             under
             the
             Skins
             of
             Women
             so
             cloaths
             their
             Muscles
             ,
             &c.
             as
             prevents
             any
             such
             Appearance
             .
          
           
             We
             cannot
             conceive
             this
             one
             Quantity
             ,
             and
             more
             equal
             Distribution
             of
             Fat
             under
             the
             Skins
             of
             Women
             does
             intirely
             proceed
             from
             any
             peculiar
             Qualification
             ,
             either
             in
             their
             Whole
             Frame
             ,
             or
             intimate
             Structure
             of
             their
             Parts
             where
             it
             is
             produced
             ;
             but
             by
             reason
             they
             lead
             a
             more
             sedentary
             Life
             ,
             and
             are
             scarce
             at
             any
             time
             accustom'd
             to
             hard
             Labours
             ,
             whereby
             their
             Fatty
             Vesiculae
             (
             exprest
             Tab.
             4.
             
             Fig.
             14.1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             )
             are
             comprest
             ,
             by
             the
             frequent
             Operations
             of
             their
             Muscles
             ,
             so
             as
             to
             prevent
             that
             more
             equal
             Distribution
             ,
             and
             increase
             of
             their
             contain'd
             Oyl
             :
             Yet
             on
             the
             other
             hand
             ,
             it
             must
             be
             acknowleg'd
             ,
             that
             the
             Legs
             ,
             and
             Feet
             of
             Women
             ,
             and
             even
             those
             who
             walk
             much
             ,
             do
             not
             afford
             those
             Muscular
             Appearances
             like
             those
             of
             Men
             ,
             which
             we
             might
             expect
             ,
             were
             it
             not
             that
             Women
             did
             suffer
             very
             much
             in
             those
             Parts
             ;
             whether
             in
             the
             time
             of
             Impregnation
             ,
             when
             the
             Uterus
             by
             its
             Extension
             so
             presses
             the
             Iliack
             Veins
             ,
             as
             to
             hinder
             the
             Progress
             of
             the
             refluent
             Blood
             ,
             whence
             the
             whole
             Legs
             become
             Swell'd
             ,
             and
             frequently
             Varices
             of
             their
             External
             Veins
             proceed
             ;
             or
             when
             the
             Menstrua
             are
             Obstructed
             ,
             the
             Legs
             (
             thro'
             a
             Plenitude
             of
             Serosities
             in
             the
             Vessels
             )
             are
             incident
             to
             suffer
             in
             like
             manner
             in
             their
             outward
             Inclosures
             ,
             by
             reason
             of
             the
             Unaptness
             of
             their
             Position
             to
             discharge
             their
             refluent
             Blood.
             
          
           
             The
             other
             remarkable
             Parts
             ,
             which
             differ
             from
             a
             Man
             ,
             and
             appear
             Externally
             in
             a
             Woman
             ,
             are
             ;
          
           
             
               A
               A
               ,
            
             
               The
               Mammae
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
            
             
               The
               Pudendum
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             THIRD
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             WHAT
             has
             been
             said
             ,
             in
             the
             preceding
             Table
             ,
             relating
             to
             the
             Appearance
             of
             the
             External
             Parts
             of
             a
             Man
             ,
             or
             Woman
             ,
             may
             indifferently
             serve
             this
             Place
             ;
             wherefore
             we
             shall
             proceed
             to
             the
             last
             Part
             of
             our
             Design
             in
             these
             Animadversions
             ,
             viz.
             Of
             the
             External
             Appearance
             of
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             other
             Parts
             ,
             in
             divers
             Actions
             .
             If
             a
             strong
             Person
             is
             to
             be
             represented
             in
             a
             vigorous
             Action
             ,
             such
             as
             Hercules
             &c.
             after
             a
             suitable
             Proportion
             to
             such
             a
             Figure
             ,
             and
             the
             Action
             is
             design'd
             ;
             the
             next
             Thing
             the
             Painter
             ,
             or
             Sculptor
             is
             to
             consider
             ,
             which
             are
             those
             Parts
             ,
             or
             Limbs
             imploy'd
             in
             the
             chiefest
             Force
             of
             the
             Action
             ;
             and
             if
             the
             Figure
             is
             standing
             ,
             let
             him
             be
             sure
             one
             Leg
             ,
             and
             particularly
             its
             Foot
             ,
             be
             in
             a
             Right
             Line
             ,
             or
             Perpendicular
             to
             the
             Trunk
             ,
             or
             Bulk
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             where
             the
             Center
             of
             its
             Gravity
             may
             be
             plac'd
             in
             an
             Aequilibrium
             :
             This
             Center
             is
             determin'd
             by
             the
             Heel
             ;
             or
             if
             the
             Figure
             is
             on
             Tiptoe
             ,
             as
             it
             's
             call'd
             ,
             then
             the
             Ball
             of
             the
             Great
             Toe
             is
             the
             Center
             ;
             the
             Muscles
             of
             this
             Leg
             ,
             which
             thus
             support
             the
             Body
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             exprest
             more
             in
             Action
             ,
             or
             Swelled
             in
             their
             Bellies
             ,
             and
             their
             Tendons
             drawn
             more
             to
             an
             Extension
             ,
             than
             those
             of
             the
             other
             Leg
             ,
             which
             is
             plac'd
             only
             in
             Order
             ,
             to
             receive
             the
             Weight
             of
             the
             Body
             towards
             that
             Way
             ,
             to
             which
             the
             Action
             inclines
             it
             :
             As
             for
             Example
             ,
             suppose
             Hercules
             was
             with
             a
             Club
             ,
             or
             the
             like
             ,
             striking
             at
             any
             Thing
             which
             stood
             before
             him
             towards
             his
             Left
             Side
             ;
             then
             let
             his
             Right
             Leg
             be
             plac'd
             so
             as
             to
             support
             the
             whole
             Weight
             of
             his
             Body
             ,
             and
             the
             Left
             loosly
             touching
             the
             Ground
             only
             with
             its
             Toes
             .
             Here
             the
             External
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Right
             Leg
             ought
             to
             be
             exprest
             very
             Strong
             ,
             or
             much
             Tumified
             :
             but
             those
             of
             the
             Left
             ,
             scarcely
             appearing
             more
             than
             if
             the
             whole
             Figure
             was
             in
             some
             sedentary
             Posture
             ;
             except
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Case
             now
             mention'd
             ,
             the
             Foot
             being
             extended
             ,
             then
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             which
             compose
             the
             Calf
             of
             the
             Leg
             ,
             are
             in
             Action
             ,
             and
             appear
             very
             Strong
             ;
             as
             it
             is
             well
             exprest
             in
             the
             Right
             Leg
             of
             that
             excellent
             Figure
             of
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             the
             Gladiator
             in
             Prince
             
             Borgheses's
             Palace
             at
             Rome
             ;
             of
             which
             ,
             we
             have
             only
             a
             Copy
             ,
             or
             Cast
             ,
             plac'd
             by
             the
             Canal
             in
             St.
             
             Iames's
             Park
             .
             When
             we
             say
             ,
             the
             External
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Right
             Leg
             ,
             or
             that
             which
             supports
             the
             Weight
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             ought
             to
             be
             exprest
             very
             Strong
             ;
             we
             don't
             mean
             that
             all
             those
             Muscles
             should
             be
             exprest
             equally
             Swell'd
             ,
             or
             in
             Action
             ;
             but
             that
             those
             chiefly
             Concern'd
             in
             that
             Action
             ,
             or
             Posture
             ,
             that
             the
             Leg
             is
             then
             in
             :
             As
             for
             Example
             ,
             if
             the
             Leg
             ,
             or
             Tibia
             is
             extended
             ,
             then
             the
             extending
             Muscles
             ,
             plac'd
             on
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             are
             most
             Swell'd
             ;
             if
             it
             is
             Bended
             ,
             then
             the
             Bending
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             their
             Tendons
             appear
             most
             .
             The
             like
             may
             be
             observ'd
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             in
             General
             ,
             when
             it
             is
             in
             pursuit
             of
             some
             vigorous
             Action
             ;
             as
             appears
             in
             that
             Figure
             of
             the
             Gladiator
             last
             mention'd
             .
             The
             Laocoon
             in
             the
             Vatican
             Garden
             at
             Rome
             also
             furnishes
             us
             with
             an
             Example
             of
             this
             Muscular
             Appearance
             thro'
             the
             Whole
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             
               Antinous
               ,
               Apollo
            
             ,
             and
             other
             Figures
             also
             of
             the
             Ancients
             ,
             in
             the
             Vatican
             ,
             and
             other
             Places
             ,
             in
             Postures
             where
             no
             considerable
             Actions
             are
             design'd
             ,
             we
             see
             their
             Muscles
             exprest
             but
             Faintly
             ,
             or
             scarcely
             Appearing
             ;
             whence
             we
             can't
             but
             think
             the
             Sculptors
             of
             those
             Times
             were
             very
             well
             acquainted
             with
             these
             Observations
             .
             Tho
             it
             be
             granted
             ,
             the
             ancient
             Greeks
             were
             accustom'd
             to
             see
             Nudities
             very
             Often
             ,
             nay
             ,
             almost
             Constantly
             ;
             yet
             the
             Difficulty
             of
             Copying
             these
             things
             from
             the
             Life
             is
             so
             Great
             ,
             that
             unless
             they
             were
             well
             acquainted
             with
             such
             like
             Remarks
             ,
             they
             would
             fall
             short
             of
             Nature
             in
             such
             Performances
             ;
             since
             it
             is
             well
             known
             ,
             even
             the
             Life
             it self
             ,
             when
             expos'd
             to
             the
             Artist
             ,
             can't
             continue
             those
             vigorous
             Actions
             for
             any
             time
             ;
             but
             the
             Muscles
             fall
             ,
             and
             the
             Parts
             loose
             their
             necessary
             Appearance
             in
             Action
             ,
             tho'
             the
             Posture
             is
             the
             same
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             Limbs
             ,
             tho'
             Cast
             ,
             or
             Moulded
             from
             the
             Life
             it self
             ,
             are
             not
             strictly
             to
             be
             follow'd
             ,
             unless
             the
             Life
             could
             continue
             the
             whole
             Spirit
             ,
             or
             Force
             of
             the
             Action
             during
             the
             time
             ,
             that
             the
             Mould
             was
             making
             from
             it
             ,
             which
             I
             am
             apt
             to
             think
             is
             next
             to
             an
             Impossibility
             ;
             however
             it
             might
             be
             attempted
             ,
             at
             least
             in
             some
             particular
             Parts
             .
             Wherefore
             a
             rational
             Theory
             must
             help
             us
             ,
             at
             least
             ,
             to
             such
             Hints
             ,
             that
             when
             we
             see
             ,
             we
             may
             know
             what
             to
             observe
             ,
             and
             the
             Reason
             why
             it
             appears
             so
             in
             the
             Life
             .
          
           
             This
             is
             indeed
             a
             very
             Entertaining
             Study
             ,
             which
             many
             of
             our
             Modern
             Painters
             and
             Sculptors
             are
             least
             acquainted
             with
             .
          
           
             Thus
             far
             ,
             in
             General
             ,
             relating
             to
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             &c.
             
             In
             the
             next
             Place
             ,
             let
             us
             take
             Notice
             of
             some
             particular
             Appearances
             of
             the
             External
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             other
             Parts
             :
             First
             ,
             of
             the
             
               Musculi
               Mastoidii
               (
               vid.
               App.
               Fig.
            
             1.14.14
             .
             )
             if
             either
             of
             these
             Act
             ,
             the
             Head
             is
             turn'd
             to
             the
             contrary
             Side
             ,
             and
             the
             Muscle
             ,
             which
             performs
             the
             Action
             ,
             appears
             very
             Plain
             under
             the
             Skin
             ,
             and
             is
             often
             well
             exprest
             both
             by
             Painters
             and
             Sculptors
             ,
             as
             is
             represented
             in
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Figure
             of
             the
             First
             Table
             .
          
           
             If
             the
             Arms
             are
             lifted
             up
             ,
             the
             Swelling
             of
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             plac'd
             on
             the
             Shoulders
             ,
             which
             perform
             that
             Action
             ,
             call'd
             
               Deltoides
               ,
               (
               App.
               Fig.
            
             1.20
             .
             )
             make
             the
             Extremities
             of
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Shoulder-blades
             ,
             (
             
               App.
               Fig.
            
             2.
             ii
             .
             )
             call'd
             the
             Tops
             of
             the
             Shoulders
             ,
             appear
             Hollow
             ,
             or
             Indented
             .
          
           
             The
             Shoulder-blades
             follow
             the
             Elevation
             of
             the
             Arms
             ,
             their
             
               Basis
               (
               App.
               ib.
               l
               ,
               l.
               )
            
             incline
             ,
             at
             that
             Time
             ,
             Obliquely
             Downwards
             .
          
           
             If
             the
             Arms
             are
             drawn
             Down
             ,
             put
             Forwards
             ,
             or
             pull'd
             Backwards
             ;
             the
             Shoulder-blades
             necessarily
             vary
             their
             Positions
             accordingly
             ;
             all
             which
             is
             to
             be
             learnt
             by
             consulting
             the
             Life
             only
             ;
             when
             being
             well
             acquainted
             with
             what
             then
             appears
             in
             the
             very
             Action
             ,
             the
             Artist
             will
             be
             able
             to
             comprehend
             an
             Idea
             ,
             how
             to
             express
             it
             :
             Hence
             it
             is
             ,
             we
             seldom
             find
             the
             Back
             so
             well
             exprest
             ,
             as
             the
             Fore-parts
             ;
             the
             Latter
             not
             being
             subject
             to
             such
             various
             Alterations
             ,
             as
             the
             Motions
             of
             the
             Shoulder-blades
             cause
             in
             the
             Former
             .
          
           
             When
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             or
             Arm
             is
             Bended
             ,
             the
             Two-headed
             Muscle
             call'd
             
               Biceps
               Internus
               (
               App.
               Fig.
            
             22.
             )
             has
             it's
             Belly
             very
             much
             Rais'd
             ;
             as
             appears
             in
             the
             Left
             Arm
             of
             the
             Figure
             of
             the
             First
             Table
             :
             The
             like
             may
             be
             observ'd
             of
             the
             
               Biceps
               Externus
            
             ,
             call'd
             
               Gemellus
               ,
               (
               App.
               Fig.
            
             2.17
             ,
             17.
             )
             when
             the
             Arm
             is
             extended
             .
          
           
             The
             Right
             Muscle
             of
             the
             
               Abdomen
               (
               App.
               Fig.
            
             1.41.41
             .
             )
             appears
             very
             Strong
             in
             Rising
             from
             a
             decumbent
             Posture
             .
          
           
             Those
             Parts
             of
             the
             great
             Saw-Muscle
             before
             ,
             (
             
               App.
               ib.
            
             40
             ,
             40.
             )
             which
             are
             receiv'd
             in
             the
             Teeth
             ,
             or
             Beginnings
             of
             the
             Oblique
             Descending
             Muscle
             (
             ib.
             38
             ,
             38.
             )
             are
             very
             much
             Swell'd
             ,
             when
             the
             Arm
             on
             the
             same
             Side
             is
             thrust
             Forwards
             ;
             that
             Saw-Muscle
             then
             being
             in
             Action
             in
             drawing
             the
             Scapula
             Forwards
             also
             .
          
           
             The
             long
             extending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Trunk
             ,
             plac'd
             on
             each
             Side
             the
             Back-bone
             ,
             (
             
               App.
               Fig.
            
             2.
             
             **
             )
             Act
             alternately
             in
             Walking
             after
             this
             manner
             ;
             if
             the
             Right
             Leg
             bears
             the
             Weight
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             and
             the
             Left
             is
             in
             Translation
             ,
             as
             on
             Tiptoe
             ;
             the
             last
             mention'd
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Back
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             ,
             may
             be
             observ'd
             to
             be
             Tumified
             about
             the
             Region
             of
             the
             Loyns
             ;
             and
             so
             on
             the
             other
             Side
             .
          
           
             The
             Trocanthers
             ,
             or
             outward
             ,
             and
             uppermost
             Heads
             of
             the
             Thigh-bones
             (
             
               App.
               Fig.
            
             2.
             
               r
               ,
               r.
            
             )
             vary
             in
             their
             Positions
             ,
             in
             such
             manner
             ,
             as
             no
             precise
             Observations
             can
             explain
             their
             several
             Appearances
             ;
             but
             the
             Study
             after
             the
             Life
             will
             soon
             inform
             the
             diligent
             observing
             Artist
             .
          
           
             If
             the
             Thigh
             is
             Extended
             ,
             as
             when
             the
             whole
             Weight
             of
             the
             Body
             rests
             on
             that
             Side
             ,
             the
             Glutaeus
             ,
             or
             Buttock-Muscle
             ,
             (
             
               App.
               Fig.
            
             2.
             32
             ,
             32.
             )
             makes
             a
             different
             Appearance
             ,
             from
             what
             offers
             at
             another
             Time
             ;
             but
             if
             the
             Thigh
             is
             drawn
             Backwards
             ,
             that
             Muscle
             appears
             still
             more
             ,
             and
             more
             Tumified
             .
          
           
             When
             the
             whole
             Leg
             is
             drawn
             Upwards
             ,
             Forwards
             ,
             and
             at
             the
             same
             time
             the
             Foot
             inclin'd
             Inwards
             ,
             the
             upper
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Sartorius
               (
               App.
               Fig.
            
             1.44
             .
             )
             appears
             rising
             very
             strong
             ;
             in
             other
             Positions
             of
             the
             Thigh
             that
             Muscle
             makes
             a
             furrowing
             Appearance
             in
             its
             whole
             Progress
             ,
             as
             is
             exprest
             in
             the
             Figure
             of
             the
             First
             Table
             .
          
           
             If
             a
             Man
             is
             on
             Tiptoe
             ,
             the
             extending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Shank
             ,
             placed
             on
             the
             Forepart
             of
             the
             Thigh
             (
             
               App.
               Fig.
            
             1.
             46
             ,
             47
             ,
             48.
             )
             and
             those
             of
             the
             Foot
             ,
             which
             compose
             the
             Calf
             of
             the
             Leg
             ,
             (
             
               App.
               Fig.
            
             2.
             43
             ,
             44.
             )
             appear
             very
             strong
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Musculus
               Peroneus
               primus
               (
               App.
               Fig.
            
             1.55
             .
             )
             makes
             a
             considerable
             Indentation
             ,
             or
             furrowing
             at
             that
             time
             in
             its
             Progress
             ,
             on
             the
             Outside
             of
             the
             Leg.
             
          
           
             Besides
             these
             Remarks
             we
             could
             mention
             many
             more
             ,
             which
             will
             soon
             be
             taken
             Notice
             of
             by
             the
             observing
             Artist
             in
             consulting
             the
             Life
             ;
             to
             which
             he
             ought
             to
             apply
             himself
             ,
             after
             he
             is
             well
             acquainted
             with
             the
             Anatomy
             of
             the
             External
             Parts
             ;
             see
             the
             First
             ,
             and
             Second
             Figures
             of
             our
             Appendix
             .
          
           
             
               A
               B
               ,
               The
               Hairy
               ,
               or
               Back
               part
               of
               the
               Head.
               
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Right
               Temple
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Hair
               tied
               up
               on
               the
               Occiput
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Neck
               ,
               where
               Fontanels
               are
               usually
               made
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Shoulders
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Back
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Loins
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               Buttocks
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               Thighs
               .
            
             
               L
               L
               ,
               The
               Legs
               .
            
             
               M
               M
               ,
               The
               Arms.
               
            
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FOURTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               REPRESENTS
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               Cuticula
               or
               Scarf-skin
               ,
               rais'd
               from
               the
               Back
               of
               the
               Hand
               ,
               and
               viewed
               with
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Perforations
               or
               Pores
               ,
               whereby
               the
               Sweat
               is
               discharged
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Indentures
               or
               Furrows
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Bladder
               like
               Protuberances
               ;
               both
               these
               arise
               from
               the
               Inequallity
               of
               the
               Papillary
               Surface
               of
               the
               Skin
               it self
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Hairs
               which
               break
               forth
               through
               the
               Cuticula
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Asperities
               or
               Filaments
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Cuticula
               is
               fastned
               to
               the
               True
               Skin
               .
            
             
               With
               the
               Assistance
               of
               the
               Microscope
               ,
               the
               Cuticula
               appears
               composed
               of
               divers
               Strata
               or
               Beds
               of
               Scales
               ,
               fastned
               to
               the
               Papillary
               Surface
               of
               the
               Skin
               ;
               and
               are
               so
               intangled
               with
               each
               other
               ,
               as
               that
               they
               appear
               a
               continued
               Pellicle
               or
               Membrane
               when
               rais'd
               from
               the
               True
               Skin
               ,
               whether
               by
               the
               Application
               of
               Blister-Plasters
               in
               Living
               People
               ,
               or
               Scalding
               Water
               ,
               Hot
               Irons
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ,
               in
               Dead
               Bodies
               :
               According
               to
               the
               Number
               of
               these
               Strata
               or
               Beds
               of
               Scales
               ,
               the
               Skin
               appears
               to
               be
               more
               ,
               or
               less
               Fair
               ,
               and
               the
               Person
               is
               commonly
               said
               to
               have
               a
               thicker
               or
               thinner
               Skin
               ;
               tho'
               very
               frequently
               the
               Jaundice
               and
               other
               Diseases
               give
               it
               an
               ill
               Tincture
               .
               The
               Cuticula
               like
               the
               True
               Skin
               is
               not
               Uniform
               ,
               in
               divers
               Parts
               of
               it
               the
               Number
               of
               its
               Scales
               and
               their
               Strata
               exceed
               those
               of
               others
               ;
               on
               the
               Lips
               not
               above
               two
               Strata
               appear
               ;
               on
               other
               parts
               more
               ,
               seldom
               less
               ;
               in
               the
               Bottoms
               of
               the
               Feet
               of
               those
               who
               walk
               much
               ,
               and
               the
               Palms
               of
               the
               Hands
               of
               Laborious
               Mechanicks
               ,
               these
               Strata
               are
               not
               only
               very
               numerous
               ,
               but
               each
               Scale
               is
               thickned
               .
               If
               you
               Macerate
               the
               Cuticle
               in
               Water
               ,
               after
               some
               days
               ,
               its
               Strata
               of
               Scales
               will
               appear
               ,
               and
               you
               may
               divide
               it
               into
               Two
               ,
               sometimes
               Three
               ,
               or
               Four
               Pellicles
               ;
               the
               like
               Division
               of
               it
               may
               be
               also
               observ'd
               in
               Vesicatories
               or
               Blisters
               rais'd
               on
               Living
               Persons
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Cuticula
               rais'd
               from
               the
               Bottom
               of
               the
               Foot
               ,
               and
               view'd
               with
               the
               same
               Microscope
               as
               the
               former
               ;
               where
               its
               remarkable
               Thickness
               appears
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Cuticula
               rais'd
               from
               the
               Back
               ;
               in
               which
               the
               Indentures
               ,
               Furrows
               ,
               &c.
               agree
               with
               those
               of
               Figure
               the
               1st
               .
               The
               Surface
               of
               the
               True
               Skin
               of
               that
               Part
               being
               exactly
               agreeable
               with
               that
               of
               the
               other
               ;
               but
               at
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Fingers
               ,
               and
               Thumbs
               ,
               the
               Cuticle
               is
               variously
               wreathed
               and
               contorted
               ,
               conformable
               to
               the
               subjacent
               Papillary
               Protuberances
               of
               the
               True
               Skin
               ,
               as
               appears
               in
               the
               following
               Figure
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Upper
               and
               Inner
               Side
               of
               the
               Thumb
               drawn
               likewise
               by
               the
               Assistance
               of
               the
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               From
               the
               Point
               arise
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Two
               Lines
               ,
               of
               a
               Circular
               Disposition
               ;
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Others
               which
               form
               Triangles
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Other
               Lines
               variously
               contorted
               or
               winding
               .
            
             
               The
               Cuticle
               being
               remov'd
               ,
               the
               Cutis
               or
               Skin
               it self
               appears
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Skin
               of
               the
               Arm
               ,
               as
               it
               appears
               on
               its
               External
               Surface
               to
               the
               naked
               Eye
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               The
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               Skin
               ,
               when
               view'd
               with
               a
               Microscope
               ;
               where
               its
               Internal
               Structure
               or
               Rete
               of
               Blood
               Vessels
               are
               also
               exprest
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Papillae
                 Pyramidales
              
               ;
               made
               up
               of
               divers
               Pyramidal
               Roundish
               Glands
               ,
               in
               whose
               Composition
               the
               Nerves
               have
               a
               considerable
               Share
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Capillaments
               of
               the
               little
               Aqueous
               Vessels
               placed
               between
               the
               Papillae
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
               I
               must
               confess
               notwithstanding
               all
               the
               Diligence
               I
               could
               yet
               use
               in
               examining
               this
               Part
               with
               the
               Microscope
               ,
               or
               otherwise
               ,
               I
               have
               hitherto
               doubted
               of
               the
               Existence
               of
               these
               Aqueous
               Vessels
               ,
               between
               the
               Cuticula
               and
               Cutis
               ;
               in
               which
               some
               have
               placed
               the
               Seat
               of
               that
               Tawny
               Tincture
               of
               the
               Aegyptians
               ,
               and
               that
               Black
               one
               of
               the
               Aethiopians
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Sudoriferous
               Glands
               ,
               which
               compose
               the
               Papillae
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Sweat
               Vessels
               or
               Excretory-ducts
               arising
               from
               the
               last
               mentioned
               Glands
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Hairs
               arising
               near
               the
               Pores
               of
               the
               Sweat
               Vessels
               :
               Besides
               these
               Vessels
               ,
               the
               Skin
               is
               furnished
               with
               Arteries
               ,
               Veins
               ,
               Nerves
               ,
               and
               Lympheducts
               ;
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Two
               former
               are
               well
               exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               F
               F
               :
               Hence
               it
               appears
               the
               Skin
               can
               no
               more
               be
               esteem'd
               a
               Similar
               or
               Simple
               Part
               ,
               than
               any
               of
               those
               call'd
               Dissimular
               or
               Compounded
               Parts
               .
               Nor
               is
               there
               any
               Part
               of
               the
               whole
               Animal
               Oeconomy
               ,
               that
               can
               be
               justly
               esteem'd
               Simple
               or
               not
               Compounded
               ;
               even
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               ,
               Nerves
               ,
               and
               Lympheducts
               are
               Compounded
               Parts
               ,
               as
               shall
               be
               else
               where
               demonstrated
               .
               Besides
               the
               Pyramidal
               Sudoriferous
               Glands
               ,
               which
               compose
               the
               
                 Papillae
                 Cutis
              
               ,
               there
               are
               other
               Sudoriferous
               Glands
               placed
               on
               the
               Internal
               Surface
               of
               the
               Skin
               ;
               the
               most
               considerable
               of
               these
               we
               find
               in
               the
               Axillae
               ,
               where
               they
               are
               sometimes
               call'd
               Axillares
               ,
               but
               more
               properly
               Miliares
               ,
               from
               their
               Figure
               ;
               the
               Axillary
               Glands
               lying
               underneath
               these
               Sudoriferous
               ones
               ;
               they
               receiving
               the
               Lympha
               ,
               brought
               into
               them
               by
               the
               Lympheducts
               springing
               from
               the
               whole
               Arm
               ,
               do
               discharge
               it
               again
               into
               the
               Exporting
               Lympheducts
               in
               its
               Way
               to
               the
               Thoracick
               Duct
               .
               There
               are
               other
               Sudoriferous
               Glands
               ,
               tho'
               not
               so
               evident
               to
               the
               naked
               Eye
               ,
               under
               the
               Skin
               of
               the
               Fingers
               ,
               Inguina
               ,
               and
               behind
               the
               Ears
               :
               The
               Hairy-scalp
               ,
               Skin
               of
               the
               Forehead
               ,
               Palms
               of
               the
               Hands
               ,
               and
               Soles
               of
               the
               Feet
               are
               also
               furnished
               with
               these
               Glands
               ;
               wherefore
               we
               shall
               not
               distinguish
               them
               with
               the
               Names
               of
               the
               Places
               of
               their
               Situation
               ,
               but
               choose
               to
               give
               them
               a
               more
               general
               Denomination
               ,
               either
               as
               to
               their
               Office
               ,
               as
               
                 Glandulae
                 Sudoriferae
              
               ,
               or
               Figure
               ,
               as
               Miliares
               .
               In
               the
               Skin
               also
               are
               placed
               those
               Bodies
               whence
               the
               Hairs
               arise
               ;
               these
               ,
               by
               some
               are
               also
               esteem'd
               Glands
               ,
               and
               call'd
               Piliferae
               :
               These
               Piliferous
               Bodies
               or
               Glands
               ,
               are
               furnished
               at
               their
               Roots
               with
               Importing
               and
               Exporting
               Blood
               Vessels
               ,
               Nerves
               ,
               &c.
               the
               Hairs
               being
               as
               it
               were
               their
               Excretory
               Ducts
               with
               this
               Difference
               from
               those
               of
               other
               Parts
               ,
               viz.
               They
               receiving
               their
               separated
               Juyce
               immediatly
               from
               the
               Pores
               in
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               ;
               whereas
               the
               Hairs
               ,
               as
               we
               conceive
               ,
               have
               their
               Radical
               Moisture
               transmitted
               to
               them
               by
               the
               Mediation
               of
               a
               Spongious
               Body
               which
               absorbs
               it
               from
               the
               circumjacent
               Parts
               :
               Hence
               it
               is
               that
               the
               Hairs
               grow
               in
               dead
               Bodies
               ,
               when
               the
               Natural
               Motions
               of
               the
               Fluids
               cease
               .
               The
               Hair
               between
               the
               Light
               ,
               and
               naked
               Eye
               ,
               appears
               pellucid
               ;
               but
               if
               viewed
               with
               a
               Microscope
               in
               that
               Position
               ,
               it
               appears
               Spongy
               ,
               or
               not
               unlike
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               a
               Cane
               :
               It
               seems
               to
               be
               compos'd
               of
               horny
               globular
               Particles
               variously
               joyn'd
               together
               ,
               and
               colour'd
               ,
               where
               it
               hath
               Plenty
               of
               Moisture
               ,
               it
               is
               commonly
               Pendulous
               ;
               if
               more
               Dry
               ,
               it
               is
               Curl'd
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7
               ,
               8.
               
            
             
               Two
               of
               the
               Hairs
               of
               the
               Head
               figur'd
               with
               a
               Microscope
               :
            
             
               A
               ,
               It
               s
               spongious
               Body
               compos'd
               of
               horny
               globular
               Particles
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               B
               ,
               Its
               straight
               and
               transverse
               Stalks
               ,
               which
               joyn
               its
               Globules
               together
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               woolly
               or
               downy
               Part
               of
               the
               Hair
               ,
               which
               descends
               from
               above
               ,
               and
               stands
               obliquely
               downwards
               ;
               whence
               it
               happens
               ,
               when
               the
               Ends
               of
               the
               Hairs
               are
               not
               placed
               in
               their
               right
               Position
               ,
               the
               Hairs
               are
               apt
               to
               intangle
               in
               Combing
               ,
               as
               it
               do's
               in
               those
               Periwigs
               made
               of
               what
               they
               call
               Combings
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Top
               of
               the
               Hair
               divided
               :
            
             
               E
               ,
               It
               s
               Middle
               Part
               :
            
             
               F
               ,
               Its
               Root
               arising
               from
               the
               Piliferous
               Body
               ,
               placed
               within
               the
               Skin
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Cuticle
               ,
               which
               commonly
               sticks
               to
               the
               Hair
               when
               extracted
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               9.
               
            
             
               The
               Branches
               ,
               which
               sometimes
               appear
               on
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Hair
               by
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               10
               ,
               11
               ,
               12.
               
            
             
               The
               different
               Thickness
               of
               the
               Hairs
               of
               divers
               Parts
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               when
               view'd
               with
               the
               same
               Microscope
               .
               Figure
               the
               Tenth
               ,
               that
               of
               the
               Groin
               ;
               the
               Eleventh
               ,
               that
               of
               the
               Nostrils
               ;
               the
               Twelfth
               Figure
               represents
               the
               Hairs
               of
               the
               Eyelids
               .
            
             
               Immediatly
               under
               the
               Skin
               is
               placed
               the
               Fat
               in
               Humane
               Bodies
               ;
               nor
               is
               it
               found
               in
               all
               Parts
               alike
               ;
               on
               the
               Forehead
               it
               is
               very
               little
               ,
               under
               the
               Hairy
               Scalp
               less
               ,
               except
               its
               Hinder
               Part
               ,
               on
               the
               Eyelids
               and
               Penis
               none
               ,
               nor
               on
               the
               
                 Muscu●us
                 Quadratus
                 Colli
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               13.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Fat
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               It
               s
               External
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               It
               s
               Internal
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Globules
               of
               the
               Fat
               with
               their
               Blood
               Vessels
               passing
               to
               them
               ,
               whence
               their
               oyly
               Contents
               are
               deriv'd
               .
            
             
               
                 1.
                 
                 The
                 Integument
                 or
                 Covering
                 of
                 the
                 Globules
                 of
                 Fat
                 rais'd
                 .
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 The
                 Globules
                 of
                 Fat
                 themselves
                 .
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 Some
                 of
                 the
                 Globules
                 divided
                 from
                 the
                 rest
                 ;
                 in
                 which
                 the
                 Breaking
                 off
                 of
                 their
                 Membranes
                 ,
                 and
                 Blood
                 Vessels
                 ,
                 are
                 exprest
                 :
                 Hence
                 it
                 appears
                 ,
                 that
                 the
                 Fat
                 is
                 a
                 Congeries
                 or
                 Heap
                 of
                 Membranous
                 Cells
                 ,
                 which
                 in
                 the
                 Microscope
                 appear
                 distended
                 with
                 Oyl
                 :
                 If
                 the
                 Existence
                 of
                 those
                 
                   Ductus
                   Adiposi
                
                 could
                 be
                 demonstrated
                 ,
                 as
                 Bidloo
                 intimates
                 at
                 C
                 C
                 in
                 the
                 last
                 describ'd
                 Figure
                 ,
                 I
                 should
                 incline
                 to
                 think
                 of
                 another
                 Office
                 of
                 them
                 intended
                 in
                 Nature
                 ,
                 than
                 what
                 Malpigbius
                 has
                 assigned
                 them
                 ,
                 viz.
                 To
                 convey
                 the
                 oily
                 Contents
                 of
                 the
                 Adipose
                 Cells
                 to
                 some
                 neighbouring
                 Interstices
                 ,
                 whether
                 of
                 Muscles
                 ,
                 or
                 other
                 Parts
                 ,
                 that
                 are
                 on
                 Occasion
                 mov'd
                 ,
                 or
                 slide
                 on
                 each
                 other
                 ;
                 or
                 into
                 some
                 remarkable
                 Cavity
                 ,
                 as
                 into
                 that
                 of
                 the
                 Abdomen
                 ,
                 &c.
                 where
                 it
                 meets
                 with
                 a
                 Mucilage
                 separated
                 by
                 the
                 Mucilaginous
                 Glands
                 placed
                 in
                 the
                 neighbouring
                 Membranes
                 ,
                 and
                 serves
                 to
                 make
                 up
                 a
                 Composition
                 to
                 Lubricate
                 the
                 Parts
                 according
                 to
                 Doctor
                 
                 Havers's
                 
                   Osteologia
                   Nova
                
                 ,
                 Pag.
                 209.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               14.
               
            
             
               The
               Outside
               of
               the
               last
               Common
               Integument
               of
               the
               whole
               Body
               ,
               call'd
               the
               Common
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Muscles
               ;
               some
               divide
               this
               into
               Two
               Membranes
               ,
               and
               distinguish
               them
               by
               the
               Names
               of
               Carnosa
               and
               
                 Communis
                 Musculorum
              
               ;
               which
               we
               look
               on
               to
               be
               altogether
               needless
               as
               may
               appear
               by
               the
               following
               Description
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               15.
               
            
             
               The
               Inside
               of
               the
               Membrane
               last
               described
               :
               The
               rise
               of
               this
               Membrane
               is
               commonly
               said
               to
               be
               from
               the
               Spines
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Back
               ,
               because
               as
               I
               suppose
               that
               is
               the
               most
               stable
               Part
               to
               which
               it
               's
               Connected
               :
               It
               is
               coextended
               with
               the
               Skin
               it self
               ,
               as
               appears
               in
               most
               Parts
               ,
               and
               has
               its
               Corresponding
               Foramina
               for
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               Nostrils
               ,
               Ears
               ,
               Mouth
               ,
               Anus
               ,
               and
               Pudendum
               :
               As
               to
               its
               Intimate
               Structure
               ,
               I
               have
               always
               met
               with
               concurring
               Experiments
               and
               Observations
               ,
               of
               its
               being
               an
               Extensible
               Body
               ,
               compos'd
               of
               divers
               Strata
               or
               Membranes
               ,
               framing
               Cells
               ,
               which
               have
               divers
               lesser
               Cells
               or
               Loculi
               within
               them
               ;
               and
               in
               divers
               Parts
               ,
               where
               the
               Loosness
               of
               the
               Skin
               it self
               would
               admit
               ,
               those
               lesser
               Cells
               or
               Loculi
               ,
               are
               fill'd
               with
               Oil
               ,
               and
               are
               call'd
               Fat
               ;
               but
               in
               other
               Parts
               where
               either
               the
               Hardness
               of
               the
               subjacent
               Bone
               ,
               when
               the
               Skin
               is
               extended
               ,
               as
               on
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               or
               the
               repeated
               quick
               Motions
               ,
               as
               of
               the
               Eye-lids
               ,
               or
               the
               Structure
               of
               the
               Part
               ,
               as
               of
               the
               Penis
               ;
               these
               Membranous
               Loculi
               are
               not
               so
               extended
               with
               Oil
               ,
               as
               to
               make
               an
               Appearance
               of
               Fat
               ;
               whence
               it
               is
               we
               find
               this
               Membrane
               much
               thicker
               in
               those
               Parts
               last
               mentioned
               ,
               than
               in
               others
               ;
               and
               on
               the
               contrary
               ,
               thinner
               and
               fewer
               Strata
               of
               Laminae
               ,
               where
               its
               Cells
               are
               partly
               possest
               with
               Fat.
               This
               Common
               Membrane
               is
               furnished
               with
               Vessels
               of
               all
               sorts
               ;
               nor
               is
               it
               confin'd
               to
               the
               Surface
               of
               the
               Muscles
               only
               ,
               but
               insinuates
               in
               their
               Interstitia
               ,
               and
               helps
               to
               compose
               their
               Coverings
               ;
               whence
               it
               happens
               that
               by
               blowing
               into
               the
               divided
               Strata
               of
               the
               Cells
               of
               this
               Membrane
               ,
               the
               whole
               Body
               of
               the
               Animal
               is
               Tumified
               ;
               which
               is
               commonly
               practised
               by
               Butchers
               ,
               especially
               in
               dressing
               their
               Veal
               .
            
             
               The
               common
               Integuments
               of
               the
               whole
               Body
               being
               demonstrated
               ,
               we
               proceed
               to
               those
               particularly
               belonging
               to
               the
               Head
               ;
               nor
               shall
               we
               omit
               speaking
               again
               of
               these
               hereafter
               ,
               where
               any
               thing
               in
               their
               particular
               Parts
               occurs
               to
               our
               Observation
               or
               Memory
               ,
               which
               the
               succeeding
               Figures
               may
               help
               us
               to
               explain
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIFTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               &c.
               SHEWS
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Hairy
               Scalp
               ,
               as
               it
               appears
               after
               a
               cross
               Section
               ,
               and
               hanging
               down
               ,
               when
               free'd
               from
               its
               subjacent
               Membrane
               the
               Pericranium
               .
               The
               Thickness
               of
               the
               Hairy
               Scalp
               is
               not
               only
               owing
               to
               the
               Number
               of
               its
               Piliferous
               Bodies
               ,
               and
               they
               so
               much
               larger
               than
               those
               of
               other
               Parts
               ,
               except
               the
               Chin
               ,
               Lips
               ,
               &c.
               but
               it
               is
               also
               plentifully
               furnish'd
               with
               Sudoriferous
               Miliary
               Glands
               ;
               both
               which
               appear
               in
               a
               Division
               of
               the
               Scalp
               :
               Hence
               so
               many
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               and
               they
               so
               very
               large
               ,
               are
               to
               be
               found
               in
               this
               Part
               ;
               whence
               such
               large
               Fluxes
               of
               Blood
               arise
               in
               dividing
               the
               Scalp
               in
               Living
               Bodies
               ,
               as
               is
               commonly
               done
               to
               apply
               the
               Trepan
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               &c.
               Part
               of
               the
               Pericranium
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Frontal
               Muscle
               on
               the
               Left
               Side
               hanging
               down
               :
               The
               Pericranium
               like
               the
               common
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Muscles
               may
               be
               divided
               into
               divers
               Lamellae
               ,
               or
               Membranes
               ,
               as
               is
               hinted
               in
               the
               Explanation
               of
               the
               preceeding
               Table
               :
               It
               is
               plentifully
               furnish'd
               with
               Blood-Vessels
               which
               chiefly
               spring
               from
               the
               Temporal
               and
               Occipital
               Arteries
               ;
               but
               divers
               of
               them
               arise
               from
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               which
               pass
               thro'
               the
               Skull
               ;
               of
               which
               Two
               remarkable
               Trunks
               may
               be
               observ'd
               ,
               one
               on
               each
               Side
               the
               Longitudinal
               Suture
               ,
               between
               that
               Part
               call'd
               the
               Sinciput
               and
               Occiput
               ,
               a
               little
               above
               the
               
                 Lamdoidal
                 Suture
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Pericranium
               cleaving
               to
               its
               Subjacent
               Membrane
               the
               Periostium
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Periostium
               rais'd
               and
               reclin'd
               to
               the
               Right
               Side
               ,
               where
               the
               Pores
               of
               that
               Membrane
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               for
               the
               Transit
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               are
               exprest
               :
               Nor
               is
               the
               Periostium
               of
               this
               Part
               truly
               distinct
               from
               the
               Pericranium
               ,
               but
               seems
               to
               be
               a
               Continuation
               of
               its
               Inferior
               ,
               or
               Internal
               Lamellae
               ;
               the
               Distribution
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               being
               in
               common
               to
               both
               ,
               except
               where
               they
               are
               distinguish'd
               by
               the
               Temporal
               Muscles
               ,
               under
               which
               the
               Periostium
               is
               plac'd
               ,
               and
               the
               Pericranium
               runs
               over
               them
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Frontis
              
               ,
               and
               Bregmatis
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Temporal
               Muscle
               divested
               of
               the
               Pericranium
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Coronal
               Suture
               on
               the
               Left
               Side
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Sagital
               Suture
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               A
               small
               Artery
               ,
               together
               with
               a
               Branch
               of
               a
               Nerve
               passing
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               to
               the
               Frontal
               Muscle
               ;
               in
               the
               former
               an
               Aneurism
               has
               happen'd
               on
               a
               sudden
               ,
               and
               a
               great
               Laughter
               ,
               when
               all
               Attempts
               in
               the
               Cure
               thereof
               prov'd
               unsuccesful
               ,
               till
               with
               a
               pointed
               Actual
               Cautery
               the
               Bone
               was
               so
               burnt
               ,
               as
               to
               cause
               an
               Exfoliation
               of
               its
               External
               Lamina
               ;
               the
               concealed
               bleeding
               Artery
               being
               then
               not
               only
               more
               expos'd
               to
               a
               Compress
               ,
               but
               by
               the
               Removal
               of
               the
               circumjacent
               Bone
               ,
               the
               neigbouring
               Blood-Vessels
               in
               its
               Meditullium
               ,
               were
               at
               Liberty
               to
               confirm
               a
               Cicatrice
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               ,
               with
               its
               Membranes
               ,
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Skull
               being
               remov'd
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               covering
               the
               Brain
               on
               the
               Right
               Side
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Left
               Hemisphere
               of
               the
               Brain
               cover'd
               with
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               only
               ,
               where
               the
               Anfractus
               of
               the
               Brain
               are
               elegantly
               exprest
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               on
               the
               Left
               Side
               divided
               ,
               and
               reclin'd
               laterally
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               A
               faint
               Appearance
               of
               the
               Brain
               thro'
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               lying
               in
               its
               Duplicature
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               which
               was
               contiguous
               to
               the
               Coronal
               Suture
               ,
               where
               divers
               Blood-Vessels
               pass
               from
               it
               to
               the
               Skull
               ,
               of
               which
               some
               pass
               thro'
               to
               the
               Hairy
               Scalp
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Veins
               of
               the
               Brain
               lying
               in
               the
               Duplicature
               of
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               ,
               before
               they
               enter
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               ;
               here
               it
               is
               they
               are
               subject
               to
               Rupture
               in
               Concussions
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               and
               let
               out
               their
               contain'd
               Blood
               between
               the
               Dura
               and
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               ;
               which
               Case
               I
               have
               seen
               more
               than
               once
               ,
               where
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ought
               to
               have
               been
               divided
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Edges
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SIXTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               cover'd
               with
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               as
               it
               appears
               after
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Skull
               is
               taken
               off
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Edge
               of
               the
               Forepart
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               whence
               the
               Upper
               Part
               was
               divided
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Temporal
               Muscle
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               covering
               the
               whole
               Brain
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               Divers
               Impressions
               on
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               which
               adhered
               to
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               near
               the
               Coronal
               Suture
               ;
               where
               divers
               Blood-Vessels
               pass
               between
               it
               ,
               and
               the
               Hairy
               Scalp
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               distended
               with
               Wind.
               
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               opened
               from
               near
               its
               Beginning
               at
               the
               
                 Os
                 Crista
                 Galli
              
               ,
               to
               its
               Entrance
               into
               the
               Two
               Lateral
               Sinus's
               ,
               as
               exprest
               in
               the
               following
               Figure
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Back
               Part
               of
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               opened
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Lateral
               One
               on
               the
               Left
               Side
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               broken
               off
               and
               turn'd
               down
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Sinus
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Torcular
                 Herophili
              
               ,
               at
               the
               Conjunction
               of
               the
               Two
               Lateral
               Sinus's
               with
               the
               Longitudinal
               One.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               Divers
               transverse
               strong
               Ligaments
               in
               the
               Lateral
               Sinus
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Orifices
               of
               the
               Veins
               of
               the
               Brain
               in
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               which
               adhered
               to
               the
               Lamdoidal
               Suture
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               going
               out
               of
               the
               great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               in
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               Cerebellum
               cover'd
               with
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               opened
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Veins
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               before
               they
               enter
               the
               Sinus
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Their
               Orifices
               opening
               into
               the
               Sinus
               variously
               ;
               some
               of
               them
               being
               parallel
               to
               their
               Trunks
               ;
               other
               Veins
               first
               pass
               in
               the
               Duplicature
               of
               the
               Sinus
               forwards
               ,
               and
               others
               backwards
               ;
               by
               which
               means
               the
               Progressive
               Motion
               of
               the
               Blood
               is
               not
               only
               assisted
               in
               some
               Positions
               of
               the
               Head
               ,
               and
               it
               s
               too
               rapid
               Motion
               prevented
               in
               others
               ;
               but
               a
               due
               Mixture
               and
               Reunion
               of
               its
               Parts
               are
               made
               ,
               after
               undergoing
               so
               elaborate
               a
               Strainer
               ,
               as
               that
               of
               the
               whole
               Substance
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               especially
               in
               its
               Cortical
               or
               Glandulous
               Part.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Posterior
               and
               Lateral
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               covered
               with
               its
               Meninges
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               broken
               off
               from
               the
               Cranium
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               in
               like
               manner
               divided
               from
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               and
               Tortuous
               Part
               of
               the
               Lateral
               Sinus
               on
               the
               Left
               Side
               opened
               ,
               in
               which
               may
               be
               observed
               its
               transverse
               strong
               Ligaments
               ,
               exprest
               Fig.
               2.
               
               E.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Cavity
               in
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               or
               Specus
               ,
               which
               receives
               the
               Bulbous
               Part
               of
               the
               Lateral
               Sinus
               at
               the
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Jugular
               Vein
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Internal
               Jugular
               Vein
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               A
               Probe
               inserted
               into
               the
               Jugular
               Vein
               by
               the
               Sinus
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Bulbous
               Part
               of
               the
               Lateral
               Sinus
               ,
               which
               was
               contained
               in
               the
               Specus
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Lateral
               Sinus
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               A
               lacerated
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               which
               involv'd
               that
               Sinus
               ,
               expanded
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Bulbous
               Part
               of
               that
               Sinus
               ,
               which
               was
               contain'd
               in
               the
               Specus
               or
               Cavity
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ;
               which
               is
               a
               Diverticulum
               to
               the
               Refluent
               Blood
               ,
               least
               it
               should
               too
               suddenly
               press
               into
               the
               Internal
               Jugular
               Vein
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Filaments
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               broken
               off
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Internal
               Jugular
               Vein
               .
            
             
               As
               the
               Structure
               of
               the
               Veins
               of
               this
               Part
               differ
               from
               that
               of
               others
               ;
               so
               also
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               have
               a
               peculiar
               Organization
               at
               their
               Entrance
               from
               the
               ordinary
               Course
               of
               those
               of
               other
               Parts
               ,
               as
               does
               somewhat
               appear
               in
               the
               following
               Figure
               :
               We
               have
               also
               Figured
               this
               Disposition
               of
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Carotid
               Arteries
               ,
               finding
               them
               much
               more
               Tortuous
               ,
               than
               they
               are
               here
               represented
               .
               
                 Vid.
                 App.
                 Fig.
              
               3.13
               ,
               14.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Carotid
               Artery
               passing
               towards
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               B
               C
               ,
               Part
               of
               its
               Membrane
               borrowed
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               separated
               and
               expanded
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               lower
               Part
               of
               the
               Artery
               next
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               The
               Vertebral
               Arteries
               also
               enter
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Skull
               very
               much
               Contorted
               ,
               as
               appears
               in
               the
               Third
               Figure
               of
               our
               Appendix
               ,
               and
               again
               in
               the
               Eighth
               Figure
               ;
               where
               II
               ,
               shews
               their
               passing
               through
               the
               Transverse
               Process
               of
               the
               first
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               ;
               K
               K
               ,
               their
               Trunks
               marching
               between
               the
               first
               Vertebra
               and
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               to
               the
               great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               last
               named
               Bone
               ,
               through
               which
               they
               pass
               into
               the
               Skull
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               conjunctly
               make
               up
               the
               Cervical
               Artery
               .
               The
               Design
               of
               these
               Curvations
               in
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               before
               they
               enter
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               is
               to
               prevent
               too
               great
               a
               Swiftness
               of
               the
               Current
               of
               the
               Blood
               through
               the
               whole
               Substance
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               which
               being
               placed
               so
               near
               the
               Heart
               ,
               would
               also
               suffer
               by
               its
               too
               great
               Pulsation
               ;
               were
               it
               not
               that
               the
               Contorted
               Trunks
               of
               these
               Arteries
               lessened
               its
               force
               ;
               else
               the
               frequent
               disorderly
               Motions
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               would
               make
               us
               as
               often
               incident
               to
               suffer
               great
               Inconveniences
               in
               the
               Brain
               ;
               yet
               nevertheless
               we
               are
               incident
               to
               suffer
               in
               some
               Degree
               ;
               whence
               't
               is
               that
               the
               Passions
               of
               the
               Mind
               ,
               wherein
               the
               Heart
               is
               affected
               so
               suddenly
               ,
               disorders
               the
               Reason
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SEVENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               REPRESENTS
               the
               Posterior
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               as
               it
               appears
               lying
               on
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               it
               s
               Upper
               Part
               being
               free'd
               from
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Hinder
               Lobes
               of
               the
               Brain
               raised
               ,
               and
               drawn
               somewhat
               forwards
               .
            
             
               B
               C
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Ligature
               ,
               and
               Two
               Pieces
               of
               Wood
               ,
               made
               use
               of
               for
               the
               better
               supporting
               the
               Brain
               in
               that
               Position
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               Parts
               of
               divers
               Quadruplicatures
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               A
               Division
               of
               the
               Second
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               on
               the
               Left
               Side
               ;
               in
               which
               the
               Cerebellum
               appears
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Cerebellum
               laid
               bare
               in
               that
               Division
               .
            
             
               G
               H
               ,
               The
               Second
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               on
               the
               Right
               Side
               intirely
               covering
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               Edge
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               whence
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Skull
               is
               divided
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               Common
               Integuments
               of
               the
               Head
               turned
               off
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Inner
               Face
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Cerebellum
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Cerebellum
               inclined
               forwards
               towards
               the
               
                 Cella
                 Turcica
              
               ,
               so
               that
               its
               Back
               Part
               ,
               which
               rests
               on
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitale
              
               ,
               comes
               in
               view
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Hindmost
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               ,
               in
               its
               Passage
               out
               of
               the
               great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               b
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Vermiformis
              
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               C
               ,
               Divers
               Roots
               of
               the
               Eighth
               ,
               Ninth
               and
               Part
               of
               the
               Tenth
               Pairs
               of
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               The
               Accessory
               Nerves
               accompanying
               those
               of
               the
               Eighth
               Pair
               ,
               at
               their
               Egress
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               &c.
               The
               
                 Crassa
                 Meninx
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               &c.
               Part
               of
               the
               Edge
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Hairy
               Scalp
               diffected
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Pericranium
               raised
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Left
               Ear.
               
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             EIGHTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               IS
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Falx
               ,
               dri'd
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Falx
               supported
               ,
               so
               as
               to
               shew
               its
               proper
               Extent
               and
               Figure
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Sinus
                 Falcis
                 Superior
              
               or
               Longitudinalis
               ,
               opened
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Sinus
                 Falcis
                 Inferior
              
               ,
               not
               distinguished
               in
               this
               Figure
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Orifices
               of
               Veins
               opening
               into
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               ,
               and
               Trunks
               of
               other
               Veins
               going
               to
               it
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               at
               the
               
                 Os
                 Crista
                 Galli
              
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Left
               Lateral
               Sinus
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               G
               ,
               Two
               Parts
               of
               the
               Quadruplicatures
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               lying
               between
               the
               Cerebrum
               and
               Cerebellum
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Sticks
               ,
               Thread
               ,
               and
               Pins
               made
               use
               of
               ,
               to
               support
               the
               Membrane
               in
               drying
               it
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               Parts
               of
               the
               above
               mentioned
               Sinus
               distended
               with
               Wind
               and
               dried
               ,
               together
               with
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Two
               Lateral
               Sinus's
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Fourth
               Sinus
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               A
               large
               Vein
               ,
               which
               empties
               its
               Blood
               at
               the
               Conjunction
               of
               the
               Four
               Sinus's
               ;
               which
               Union
               of
               the
               Sinus's
               ,
               is
               called
               
                 Torcular
                 Herophili
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Connection
               or
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Falx
               ,
               at
               the
               
                 Os
                 Crista
                 Galli
              
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Cribrosum
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Crista
                 Galli
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Falx
               cleaving
               to
               the
               
                 Crista
                 Galli
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               the
               Falx
               dried
               ,
               and
               exprest
               somewhat
               bigger
               than
               the
               Life
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Forepart
               of
               the
               Falx
               ;
            
             
               B
               ,
               It
               s
               Hindpart
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Falx
               where
               the
               Fifth
               Sinus
               passes
               ,
               called
               
                 Sinus
                 Falcis
                 Inferior
              
               .
               To
               this
               lower
               part
               of
               the
               Falx
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               firmly
               adheres
               ,
               where
               divers
               Veins
               pass
               into
               its
               Lower
               Sinus
               as
               well
               as
               its
               Upper
               one
               ;
               which
               together
               with
               divers
               Adnascences
               the
               Falx
               has
               with
               the
               two
               Hemispheres
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               (
               as
               may
               be
               seen
               by
               freeing
               it
               from
               them
               )
               the
               Brain
               is
               kept
               suspended
               ,
               least
               its
               Superiour
               Part
               should
               press
               too
               much
               on
               its
               Inferiour
               ;
               which
               Office
               cannot
               be
               ascribed
               either
               to
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               called
               Fornix
               ,
               as
               the
               former
               and
               some
               later
               Anatomists
               pretend
               ,
               or
               to
               the
               
                 Corpus
                 Callosum
              
               ,
               as
               Vieussenius
               will
               have
               it
               :
               A
               further
               use
               of
               the
               Falx
               is
               by
               its
               Extension
               between
               the
               Two
               Hemispheres
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               to
               prevent
               the
               Superincumbence
               of
               the
               one
               upon
               the
               other
               ,
               when
               we
               lie
               on
               either
               Side
               ;
               and
               by
               its
               Connection
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Crista
                 Galli
              
               ,
               and
               Continuation
               of
               it
               to
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               and
               its
               Second
               Processes
               ,
               lying
               between
               the
               Cerebrum
               ,
               and
               Cerebellum
               ,
               the
               whole
               Brain
               is
               kept
               suspended
               ,
               and
               especially
               its
               Hinder
               Lobes
               ,
               from
               pressing
               on
               the
               Cerebellum
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               Divers
               Veins
               of
               the
               Brain
               before
               they
               enter
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               as
               it
               appears
               after
               a
               Transverse
               Section
               of
               it
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               which
               covered
               the
               Left
               Hemisphere
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Superiour
               and
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               on
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Two
               Hemispheres
               or
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Cerebellum
               ,
               as
               they
               appear
               when
               the
               whole
               Brain
               is
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               and
               laid
               on
               its
               Basis.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Two
               Hemispheres
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Cerebellum
               covered
               with
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Vermiformis
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               E
               F
               ,
               The
               Forepart
               of
               the
               Division
               of
               the
               Two
               Hemispheres
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Falx
               is
               inserted
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Middle
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Brain
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               ,
               separated
               and
               turned
               to
               one
               side
               ,
               which
               we
               take
               to
               be
               the
               External
               Membrane
               or
               Lamina
               of
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               .
               That
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               is
               composed
               of
               divers
               Strata
               of
               Membranes
               ,
               not
               unlike
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ,
               does
               not
               only
               appear
               in
               an
               Hydrocephalus
               or
               Hydropical
               Brain
               ;
               but
               in
               ordinary
               Diffections
               we
               find
               it
               Double
               ,
               especially
               about
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
                 ,
                 Processus
                 Annularis
              
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               In
               Wounds
               of
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               ,
               and
               Brain
               ,
               we
               meet
               with
               very
               great
               Fungus's
               ,
               even
               to
               the
               Size
               of
               a
               Tenis
               Ball
               above
               the
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               and
               Skull
               ;
               which
               may
               be
               taken
               off
               by
               Incision
               without
               a
               dangerous
               Flux
               of
               Blood
               :
               An
               Instance
               of
               which
               we
               have
               had
               more
               than
               once
               an
               Opportunity
               of
               observing
               ;
               and
               notwithstanding
               these
               Excrescences
               have
               been
               frequently
               removed
               ,
               yet
               they
               have
               grown
               again
               ,
               and
               the
               Patient
               has
               Languished
               ,
               and
               died
               .
               
                 Vid.
                 Diemerbroeck
                 ,
                 Anatom
              
               .
               Lib.
               III.
               Cap.
               V.
               
            
             
               I
               I
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               remaining
               on
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               L
               ,
               The
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               Brain
               composed
               of
               divers
               turnings
               and
               windings
               of
               its
               Cortical
               Part.
               
            
             
               M
               M
               ,
               The
               Retiform
               Distribution
               of
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               between
               the
               External
               and
               Internal
               Lamina
               of
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               ;
               the
               largest
               of
               these
               Vessels
               on
               the
               Superior
               and
               External
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               are
               Veins
               which
               discharge
               their
               Blood
               into
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               ,
               from
               whence
               they
               are
               here
               cut
               off
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             NINTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               whole
               Brain
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               free'd
               from
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               and
               lay'd
               on
               its
               Hemispheres
               ,
               its
               Basis
               being
               uppermost
               .
               In
               this
               Figure
               many
               things
               are
               unobserv'd
               ,
               and
               others
               very
               ill
               exprest
               ,
               wherefore
               we
               shall
               add
               a
               Figure
               of
               the
               Brain
               in
               this
               Position
               ,
               more
               correctly
               drawn
               after
               the
               Life
               .
               
                 Vid.
                 Appendix
              
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Basis
               of
               the
               Brain
               ;
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               &c.
               Its
               Division
               into
               Four
               Lobes
               ;
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Foremost
               Lobes
               ,
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Hindmost
               Lobes
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Infundibulum
               ,
               very
               ill
               exprest
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Two
               white
               Protuberances
               behind
               the
               Infundibulum
               ,
               not
               well
               exprest
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Annular
               Process
               ,
               or
               
                 Pons
                 Varolii
              
               ,
               and
               Beginning
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               cut
               off
               near
               its
               Egress
               at
               the
               great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               ,
               where
               it
               is
               apparently
               Double
               between
               the
               Annular
               Protuberance
               ,
               and
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               L
               L
               The
               Cerebellum
               cover'd
               with
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               O
               O
               ,
               The
               Cerebellum
               cover'd
               with
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               A
               Section
               in
               the
               Cerebellum
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               The
               Arborescent
               Distribution
               of
               Blood
               Vessels
               within
               the
               Cerebellum
               .
            
             
               P
               P
               Superior
               ,
               The
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Carotid
               Arteries
               injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               and
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               P
               P
               Inferior
               ,
               The
               Cervical
               Artery
               in
               like
               manner
               injected
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               NB.
               That
               the
               Two
               Semicircular
               Branches
               ,
               which
               join
               these
               Two
               last
               mentioned
               Arteries
               together
               ,
               call'd
               the
               Communicant
               Branches
               ,
               are
               exprest
               too
               large
               in
               this
               Figure
               ,
               or
               else
               the
               Subject
               ,
               from
               whence
               it
               was
               taken
               ,
               differed
               very
               much
               from
               the
               ordinary
               Course
               of
               Nature
               ;
               neither
               of
               which
               are
               mentioned
               by
               Bidloo
               .
            
             
               Q
               R
               S
               ,
               The
               Olfactory
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               T
               T
               ,
               The
               Optick
               Nerves
               ;
            
             
               V
               ,
               Their
               Conjunction
               ;
            
             
               W
               W
               ,
               Their
               Trunks
               cut
               off
               at
               their
               Egress
               from
               within
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               X
               X
               ,
               The
               Third
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Oculorum
                 Motorii
              
               .
            
             
               Y
               Y
               ,
               The
               Upper
               and
               Forepart
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Annularis
              
               .
            
             
               Z
               Z
               ,
               
                 Par
                 Patheticum
              
               ,
               or
               the
               Fourth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               The
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               b
               b
               ,
               The
               Sixth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               NB.
               The
               Seventh
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               are
               not
               here
               exprest
               ,
               tho'
               Bidloo
               pretends
               to
               describe
               them
               at
               c
               c
               d
               e.
               
            
             
               c
               c
               ,
               d
               ,
               e
               ,
               f
               ,
               g
               ,
               Confused
               Descriptions
               of
               several
               Pairs
               of
               Nerves
               erroneously
               multiply'd
               into
               divers
               Pairs
               by
               Bidloo
               .
            
             
               h
               h
               ,
               The
               Spinal
               Accessory
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               **
               The
               Beginnings
               of
               the
               Ninth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               i
               i
               ,
               k
               k
               ,
               The
               Tenth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               ,
               or
               the
               First
               of
               the
               Neck
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               on
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Forepart
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Fingers
               which
               support
               it
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               following
               Parts
               come
               in
               view
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Infundibulum
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Glandula
                 Pituitaria
              
               lying
               within
               the
               
                 Cella
                 Turcica
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Membranous
               Connection
               of
               the
               Infundibulum
               to
               the
               
                 Glandula
                 Pituitaria
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               A
               Blood
               Vessel
               passing
               thro'
               the
               Lateral
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               ,
               which
               Bidloo
               has
               grosly
               mistaken
               for
               the
               Olfactory
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               G
               ,
               Portions
               of
               the
               Optick
               Nerves
               so
               divided
               ,
               that
               Parts
               of
               them
               remain
               on
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               on
               the
               Brain
               it self
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Third
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Motorii
                 Oculi
                 ,
                 in
                 situ
              
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               after
               the
               Brain
               is
               taken
               out
               ,
               and
               Portions
               of
               the
               Ten
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Brain
               remaining
               at
               their
               Egress
               ,
               together
               with
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Edges
               of
               the
               divided
               Skull
               in
               which
               the
               Duploi
               may
               be
               seen
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Crista
                 Galli
              
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Cribriforme
              
               on
               both
               Sides
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               &c.
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               cleaving
               to
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Occipitale
              
               bared
               from
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               Portions
               of
               the
               Olfactory
               Nerves
               cut
               off
               ,
               near
               their
               Egress
               at
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cribriforme
              
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Optick
               Nerves
               in
               like
               manner
               cut
               off
               ,
               before
               they
               pass
               the
               First
               Foramina
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               .
            
             
               g
               g
               ,
               The
               Carotid
               Arteries
               also
               divided
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Third
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               Pituitary
               Gland
               within
               the
               
                 Cella
                 Turcica
              
               ,
               lying
               under
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               Infundibulum
               .
            
             
               L
               L
               ,
               The
               Fourth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               ,
               or
               
                 Par
                 Patheticum
              
               going
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               with
               the
               Third
               and
               Sixth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               M
               M
               ,
               The
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               N
               N
               ,
               The
               Sixth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               running
               under
               ,
               or
               in
               the
               Duplicature
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               at
               a
               considerable
               Distance
               before
               they
               march
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               at
               the
               Two
               Second
               Perforations
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
                 .
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               89.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
               C.D.I.
               
            
             
               O
               O
               ,
               The
               Seventh
               ,
               or
               Auditory
               Nerves
               passing
               out
               at
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Petrosa
              
               .
            
             
               NB.
               That
               O
               on
               the
               Right
               Side
               should
               have
               been
               placed
               a
               quarter
               of
               an
               Inch
               below
               the
               M
               on
               the
               same
               Side
               .
            
             
               P
               ,
               The
               Eighth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               ,
               or
               
                 Par
                 Vagum
              
               going
               out
               at
               the
               Second
               Perforations
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               with
               the
               Lateral
               Sinus's
               ,
               which
               lead
               to
               the
               Internal
               Jugular
               Veins
               .
            
             
               Q
               Q
               ,
               The
               Spinal
               Accessory
               Nerves
               passing
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               with
               the
               
                 Par
                 Vagum
              
               .
            
             
               R
               R
               ,
               The
               Ninth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               passing
               thro'
               the
               Third
               Perforations
               of
               the
               Occipital-bone
               .
            
             
               T
               ,
               The
               First
               and
               great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               passes
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               to
               the
               Specus
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Back
               .
            
             
               The
               Sinus's
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               which
               appear
               where
               it
               cleaves
               to
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               are
               exprest
               in
               a
               Figure
               of
               our
               Appendix
               ;
               where
               the
               Egress
               of
               the
               Ten
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Brain
               are
               also
               represented
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               most
               considerable
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               which
               come
               in
               ,
               and
               go
               out
               from
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
             
             
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             TENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               Brain
               together
               with
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               continu'd
               to
               it
               ,
               when
               free'd
               from
               the
               Skull
               ,
               and
               Specus
               or
               Cavity
               of
               all
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               Back
               ,
               and
               Loins
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               free'd
               from
               the
               Brain
               ,
               and
               somewhat
               expanded
               .
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Falx
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               cut
               Transverily
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Division
               in
               its
               Cortical
               Part
               ,
               which
               compose
               those
               turnings
               ,
               and
               windings
               on
               its
               External
               Surface
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Cortical
               ,
               or
               Cinericious
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               ;
               by
               some
               call'd
               the
               Glandulous
               Part.
               
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Medullary
               ,
               or
               white
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               ;
               by
               some
               call'd
               the
               Callous
               ,
               and
               Fibrous
               Part.
               
            
             
               f
               f
               ,
               The
               Hindmost
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               which
               rested
               on
               the
               Second
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               F
               G
               H
               ,
               The
               Right
               and
               Left
               Ventricles
               of
               the
               Brain
               open'd
               ;
               where
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               of
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               ,
               which
               Line
               them
               ,
               may
               be
               seen
               :
               F
               ,
               their
               Upper
               and
               Foreparts
               ,
               which
               are
               largest
               ,
               and
               become
               still
               less
               ,
               and
               less
               towards
               their
               Lower
               ,
               and
               Back-parts
               ,
               G.
               
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Corpus
                 Callosum
              
               .
            
             
               I
               K
               ,
               The
               Roots
               of
               the
               Fornix
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               
                 Thalamus
                 Nervi
                 Optici
              
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               ;
               that
               of
               the
               Left
               ,
               not
               being
               Leuer'd
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               
                 Corpus
                 Transversale
              
               of
               the
               
                 Corpus
                 Callosum
              
               .
            
             
               N
               N
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Striata
              
               whole
               .
            
             
               O
               O
               ,
               The
               Nates
               .
            
             
               P
               P
               ,
               The
               Testes
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               The
               
                 Glandula
                 Pinealis
                 ,
                 in
                 situ
              
               .
            
             
               RR
               ,
               The
               
                 Plexus
                 Coroeides
              
               compos'd
               of
               Blood
               Vessels
               of
               both
               Kinds
               ,
               Lympheducts
               ,
               Membranes
               ,
               and
               Glands
               .
               See
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               S
               S
               ,
               The
               First
               Process
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               ,
               going
               to
               the
               Nates
               .
            
             
               T
               ,
               A
               Transverse
               Process
               joyning
               the
               Two
               Pathetick
               Nerves
               ,
               and
               last
               mentioned
               Process
               .
            
             
               s
               ,
               The
               Fourth
               Ventricle
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Calamus
                 Scriptorius
              
               .
            
             
               V
               V
               ,
               The
               Pathetick
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               W
               W
               ,
               Two
               Processes
               of
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               which
               compose
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Ventricle
               .
            
             
               X
               Y
               Z
               ,
               The
               Meditullium
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               appearing
               in
               an
               Arboreous
               Manner
               ,
               after
               a
               Transverse
               Section
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               .
            
             
               a
               b
               ,
               a
               b
               ,
               &c.
               
               The
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               which
               incloses
               the
               Spinall
               Marrow
               ,
               divided
               ,
               and
               expanded
               .
            
             
               c
               c
               ,
               &c.
               The
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               as
               yet
               inclosing
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               ,
               but
               raised
               with
               a
               Probe
               in
               its
               Lower
               Part
               ,
               where
               it
               inverts
               the
               
                 Cauda
                 Equina
              
               .
            
             
               1
               2
               3
               ,
               &c.
               
               The
               several
               Pairs
               of
               Nerves
               springing
               from
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               :
               From
               1
               to
               9
               the
               Origins
               of
               the
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Neck
               ;
               the
               First
               of
               which
               passes
               out
               at
               the
               Third
               Perforation
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               and
               ●●
               reckoned
               the
               Tenth
               of
               the
               Brain
               ;
               the
               rest
               march
               out
               between
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               Back
               ,
               Loins
               ,
               and
               Perforations
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               successively
               ;
               that
               of
               Fig.
               9
               marching
               out
               between
               the
               Sixth
               and
               Seventh
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               ;
               those
               of
               10
               to
               21
               are
               the
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Back
               :
               From
               22
               to
               27
               those
               of
               the
               Loins
               ;
               the
               rest
               go
               out
               at
               the
               Foramina
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               boyl'd
               ,
               and
               view'd
               with
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Membranes
               of
               the
               Brain
               separated
               ;
               of
               which
               the
               External
               is
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ;
               the
               Two
               Internal
               compose
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               C
               D
               ,
               The
               Reticular
               Distribution
               of
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               near
               their
               Extremities
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               Divers
               Orders
               of
               Cortical
               Glands
               on
               the
               Surface
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Tubes
               deriv'd
               from
               those
               Cortical
               Glands
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Lobes
               ,
               or
               distinct
               Clusters
               of
               Glands
               wreathed
               with
               various
               Angles
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Complicated
               Tubes
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               Nervous
               Fibres
               deriv'd
               from
               the
               last
               mentioned
               Tubes
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Plexus
                 Coroeides
              
               delineated
               ,
               by
               the
               help
               of
               a
               Magnifying
               Glass
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Membranous
               inclosures
               of
               the
               Fasciculi
               of
               the
               Vessels
               ,
               separated
               .
            
             
               B
               C
               ,
               The
               Blood
               Vessels
               extended
               with
               Plaister
               of
               Paris
               ,
               and
               their
               own
               Blood.
               
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               Branches
               of
               Lympheducts
               ,
               somewhat
               extended
               with
               Wind.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               Nervous
               Tubuli
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               ,
               which
               I
               can
               by
               no
               means
               conceive
               to
               be
               existent
               in
               the
               
                 Plexus
                 Coroeides
              
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Glands
               of
               the
               
                 Plexus
                 Coroeides
              
               placed
               irregular
               ,
               of
               which
               ,
               some
               are
               Hard
               ,
               and
               Fibrous
               ,
               others
               are
               Vesiculous
               ,
               and
               Flaccid
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               cut
               off
               ,
               and
               divided
               laterally
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               ;
               exprest
               somwhat
               bigger
               than
               the
               Life
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Fore
               and
               Back
               Part.
               
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Nervous
               Fibrillae
               arising
               from
               the
               Fore
               ,
               and
               Back
               Part
               of
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               Portions
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               left
               ,
               to
               shew
               its
               Perforations
               for
               the
               Nerves
               ,
               as
               they
               pass
               out
               of
               the
               Specus
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Plexus
                 Ganglioso●mes
              
               of
               the
               Nerves
               at
               their
               Egress
               from
               between
               the
               Vertebrae
               :
               Two
               or
               Three
               of
               the
               Bodies
               of
               the
               Nerves
               themselves
               are
               exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               pinn'd
               out
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               ,
               cut
               off
               about
               the
               Third
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Back
               ,
               exprest
               somewhat
               bigger
               than
               the
               Life
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Continuation
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               expanded
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Nervous
               Fibres
               arising
               from
               the
               Fore
               and
               Back
               Parts
               of
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Nervous
               Fibrillae
               collectively
               passing
               thro'
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               Their
               Gangliform
               Plexus
               at
               the
               Beginnings
               of
               the
               Bodies
               of
               the
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               A
               Division
               of
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               Some
               Vestigia
               of
               Bloud
               Vessels
               ,
               which
               pass
               on
               the
               Outside
               of
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               The
               Structure
               of
               a
               Nerve
               exprest
               by
               the
               Assistance
               of
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Branch
               of
               a
               Nerve
               dissected
               from
               the
               Neck
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Bloud
               Vessels
               passing
               in
               the
               Nervous
               Fibrillae
               :
               These
               Bloud
               Vessels
               I
               had
               an
               Opportunity
               once
               of
               discovering
               with
               my
               naked
               Eye
               in
               a
               very
               small
               Branch
               of
               the
               
                 Par
                 Quintum
              
               of
               the
               Head
               ,
               where
               they
               were
               fill'd
               with
               Mercury
               ,
               by
               pouring
               it
               into
               the
               Carotid
               Artery
               ;
               but
               in
               examining
               the
               same
               Branch
               of
               the
               Nerve
               with
               my
               Microscope
               ,
               I
               discovered
               a
               vast
               Number
               of
               smaller
               Branches
               of
               Blood
               Vessels
               ,
               which
               did
               not
               before
               appear
               ,
               lying
               still
               parallel
               with
               the
               Nervous
               Fibres
               ,
               as
               here
               exprest
               ;
               tho'
               without
               doubt
               divers
               of
               the
               Trunks
               of
               those
               Blood
               Vessels
               do
               intersect
               ,
               and
               pass
               obliquely
               over
               the
               Nervous
               Fibres
               ,
               especially
               near
               their
               Extremities
               .
               From
               those
               Blood
               Vessels
               I
               am
               inclin'd
               to
               think
               the
               Globular
               Contents
               of
               the
               Nervous
               Fibres
               take
               their
               rise
               immediatly
               ,
               and
               not
               from
               the
               Brain
               ,
               as
               it
               has
               been
               generally
               suppos'd
               ;
               since
               the
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Nerves
               themselves
               do
               neither
               of
               them
               appear
               Tubulated
               ,
               or
               hollowed
               Pipes
               according
               to
               their
               Length
               ;
               but
               their
               Cavities
               are
               frequently
               interrupted
               with
               divers
               Cells
               ,
               which
               make
               a
               Globular
               like
               Appearance
               ;
               and
               this
               Structure
               of
               the
               Nervous
               Tubes
               is
               very
               easily
               demonstrated
               in
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Retina
              
               of
               the
               Eye
               by
               the
               Assistance
               of
               the
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               A
               Fasciculus
               of
               the
               Nervous-Tubes
               separated
               ,
               and
               expanded
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Cohesion
               of
               the
               Tubes
               by
               Lateral
               Fibres
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Villous
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Tubes
               as
               they
               could
               be
               delineated
               .
               What
               has
               been
               said
               above
               ,
               relating
               to
               the
               intimate
               Structure
               of
               the
               Nerves
               ,
               interferes
               very
               much
               with
               those
               Hypotheses
               commonly
               propos'd
               concerning
               the
               Animal
               Spirits
               ,
               by
               some
               call'd
               
                 Fluidum
                 Animale
              
               ;
               and
               that
               not
               only
               because
               their
               Original
               is
               suppos'd
               to
               be
               in
               the
               Brain
               ,
               but
               that
               they
               are
               transfer'd
               from
               thence
               by
               the
               Nerves
               so
               very
               quick
               to
               serve
               those
               Offices
               ,
               to
               which
               they
               are
               on
               such
               frequent
               Occasions
               said
               to
               be
               imploy'd
               in
               :
               Neither
               of
               which
               can
               reasonably
               ,
               nay
               possibly
               ,
               happen
               ,
               from
               the
               Structure
               of
               the
               Nerves
               themselves
               :
               Besides
               ,
               if
               the
               Animal
               Spirits
               ,
               or
               Fluid
               were
               ordered
               to
               skip
               up
               and
               down
               at
               that
               rate
               ,
               another
               visible
               Impediment
               would
               be
               incident
               to
               obstruct
               them
               ,
               at
               the
               Originals
               of
               the
               Nervous
               Tubes
               from
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               ;
               where
               those
               Tubes
               are
               much
               contracted
               ,
               and
               again
               expanded
               ,
               and
               frame
               Gangleons
               ,
               as
               appears
               in
               this
               Figure
               at
               E
               ;
               nor
               can
               we
               conceive
               what
               should
               give
               the
               Spirits
               that
               Impetus
               to
               drive
               them
               up
               and
               down
               in
               that
               manner
               ;
               wherefore
               we
               should
               rather
               incline
               to
               believe
               the
               Contiguities
               of
               those
               Globuli
               ,
               above
               mentioned
               ,
               are
               the
               Mediums
               between
               the
               Objects
               ,
               and
               Common
               Sensory
               .
               There
               is
               too
               much
               of
               Argument
               belongs
               to
               this
               Subject
               ,
               to
               be
               inserted
               in
               this
               Place
               ;
               wherefore
               we
               must
               proceed
               in
               our
               present
               Undertaking
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Specus
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Back
               ,
               together
               with
               its
               Common
               Integument
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Back
               Part
               of
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               next
               the
               Spines
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               C
               ,
               The
               External
               ,
               or
               Common
               Integument
               (
               accompanying
               that
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               the
               whole
               Length
               of
               the
               Specus
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               )
               here
               being
               partly
               rais'd
               and
               supported
               with
               a
               Stylus
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               or
               First
               Proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               E
               ,
               Divers
               Sacculi
               of
               Fat
               lying
               between
               the
               Proper
               and
               Common
               Membranes
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               8.
               
            
             
               The
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Thorax
               :
            
             
               A
               ,
               It
               s
               Spinal
               Process
               ,
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Its
               oblique
               descending
               Processes
               ,
               which
               are
               Articulated
               with
               the
               ascending
               Processes
               of
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Second
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Thorax
               ;
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Transverse
               Processes
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Body
               of
               the
               Vertebra
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               Vertebra
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               descends
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               Some
               fatty
               Mucilaginous
               Glands
               ,
               which
               are
               continued
               thro'
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               whole
               Specus
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               .
            
             
               The
               Office
               of
               these
               Glands
               is
               to
               separate
               a
               Liquor
               to
               lubricate
               the
               Membranes
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               ,
               and
               Inner
               Part
               of
               the
               Specus
               ;
               which
               Liquor
               I
               have
               frequently
               found
               in
               such
               Quantity
               ,
               as
               to
               run
               out
               ,
               in
               breaking
               up
               the
               Vertebrae
               to
               discover
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             ELEVENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               External
               Parts
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               as
               they
               appear
               when
               the
               Eye-lids
               are
               open'd
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               The
               Eye-brow
               :
               B
               ,
               the
               various
               Disposition
               of
               its
               Hairs
               in
               this
               Subject
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Great
               Canthus
               of
               the
               Eye
               next
               the
               Nose
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Lesser
               Canthus
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Eye-lid
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Lower
               —
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               White
               of
               the
               Eye
               cover'd
               with
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Adnata
              
               or
               Conjunctiva
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               One
               of
               the
               Lachrimal
               Glands
               plac'd
               in
               the
               great
               Canthus
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Caruncula
                 Lachrimalis
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Glandula
                 Lachrimalis
                 Inferior
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Eye-lids
               shut
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Eye-brow
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               former
               Figure
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Great
               Canthus
               of
               the
               Eye
               towards
               the
               Nose
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Lesser
               Canthus
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Superior
               Palpebra
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               Palpebra
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Skin
               with
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Orbicularis
                 Palpebrarum
              
               remov'd
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Orbit
               of
               the
               Eye
               bared
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Great
               Lachrimal
               Gland
               involv'd
               with
               Fat.
               
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               A
               faint
               Appearance
               of
               the
               Excretory
               Ducts
               of
               the
               Lacrhimal
               Glands
               ,
               by
               Borrichius
               ,
               call'd
               Hygroophthahmicos
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               Divers
               little
               Glands
               interpos'd
               between
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Ducts
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               Parts
               of
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Eye-lids
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Aperiens
                 Palpebram
                 Rectus
              
               ,
               at
               its
               Implantation
               to
               the
               Upper
               Eye-lid
               :
               The
               Origin
               of
               this
               Muscle
               is
               sharp
               and
               fleshy
               at
               the
               profoundest
               Part
               of
               the
               Orbit
               ,
               near
               the
               Egress
               of
               the
               Optick
               Nerve
               ,
               accompanying
               the
               
                 Rectus
                 Oculi
                 Attollens
              
               in
               its
               Progress
               ,
               becoming
               broad
               ,
               thin
               and
               tendonous
               ,
               as
               it
               passeth
               over
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               to
               its
               Implantation
               at
               the
               whole
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Upper
               Eye-lid
               .
            
             
               B
               C
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Orbicularis
                 Palpebrarion
              
               turn'd
               down
               ,
               it
               still
               remaining
               to
               the
               Upper
               Eye-lid
               :
               A
               Description
               of
               which
               Muscle
               will
               be
               inserted
               in
               the
               following
               Table
               .
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Lachrimal
               Glandules
               ,
               &c.
               within
               the
               Orbit
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               represented
               much
               bigger
               than
               the
               Life
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Orbit
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Superior
               Lachrimal
               Gland
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Vasa
                 Lachrimasia
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Ductus
                 Hygroopluhalmici
              
               ,
               whose
               Orifices
               open
               into
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Palpebrae
               ,
               whence
               the
               separated
               Liquor
               ,
               convey'd
               by
               the
               Tubes
               ,
               issues
               to
               moisten
               the
               Palpebrae
               ,
               and
               External
               Part
               of
               the
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eye
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               E
               ,
               Divers
               Lachrimal
               Glands
               interspers'd
               between
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Ducts
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               Cilia
               joyn'd
               together
               with
               divers
               Membranes
               G.
               
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Hairs
               of
               the
               Eye-lids
               turn'd
               Upwards
               ,
               whose
               Ramifications
               appear
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Superior
               Lachrimal
               Gland
               ,
               by
               Bidleo
               call'd
               ,
               
                 Glans
                 Lachrimalis
              
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               Bones
               of
               the
               Nose
               broken
               off
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               following
               Ducts
               may
               appear
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               Ducts
               ,
               which
               convey
               the
               superfluous
               Moisture
               of
               the
               
                 Vasa
                 Lachrimalia
              
               from
               between
               the
               Palpebrae
               ,
               and
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               into
               the
               
                 Foramina
                 Narium
              
               :
               The
               Orifices
               of
               these
               Ducts
               appear
               in
               the
               two
               Papillae
               of
               the
               Upper
               and
               Lower
               Eye-lid
               ,
               at
               the
               Great
               Canthus
               of
               the
               Eye
               .
               Fig.
               1.
               
               H.
               and
               are
               evident
               to
               the
               naked
               Eye
               ,
               especially
               in
               those
               ,
               who
               Cry
               much
               ,
               and
               are
               call'd
               ,
               
                 Puncta
                 Lachrimalia
              
               :
               Soon
               after
               these
               Two
               Ducts
               leave
               the
               Great
               Canthus
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               they
               are
               united
               into
               One
               Trunk
               ,
               call'd
               the
               Lachrimal
               Duct
               ,
               which
               descends
               in
               a
               Foramen
               of
               the
               Second
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               Tab.
               92.
               
               Fig.
               1.
               
               D.
               into
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Nostrils
               .
               In
               the
               great
               Canthus
               of
               the
               Eye
               arise
               those
               Tumours
               ,
               call'd
               Aegilopes
               ,
               whose
               contain'd
               Matter
               ,
               when
               it
               degenerates
               into
               an
               Abscess
               ,
               frequently
               frames
               Fistula's
               in
               that
               Part
               ;
               and
               when
               the
               Membrane
               ,
               which
               composes
               the
               Lachrimal
               Duct
               ,
               within
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Bone
               ,
               becomes
               Tumified
               ;
               the
               Passage
               of
               that
               Duct
               is
               rendred
               impervious
               ,
               and
               Part
               of
               the
               Humor
               imploy'd
               in
               moistning
               the
               Eye-lids
               ,
               is
               hindred
               in
               its
               Discharge
               that
               Way
               ;
               whence
               the
               Cheeks
               become
               inflam'd
               by
               its
               running
               down
               on
               them
               ;
               in
               which
               latter
               Case
               ,
               besides
               opening
               the
               Tumor
               largely
               ,
               we
               must
               also
               Perforate
               the
               Second
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               or
               
                 Os
                 Lachrimale
              
               ,
               into
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Nose
               ,
               whereby
               the
               Lachrimal
               Humor
               will
               afterwards
               be
               discharg'd
               :
               This
               Operation
               is
               best
               Practis'd
               with
               a
               pointed
               Actual
               Cautery
               ,
               fitted
               with
               a
               proper
               Cannula
               or
               Director
               .
               The
               Incision
               in
               these
               Cases
               may
               be
               made
               according
               to
               the
               Direction
               of
               the
               Fibres
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Orbicularis
                 Palpebrarum
              
               ;
               and
               in
               using
               the
               Actual
               Cautery
               ,
               great
               care
               must
               be
               taken
               to
               defend
               the
               Palpebrae
               ;
               which
               we
               have
               sometimes
               seen
               expos'd
               to
               the
               heated
               Cannula
               thro'
               the
               Strugling
               of
               the
               Patient
               :
               After
               this
               Operation
               is
               thus
               perform'd
               ,
               it
               is
               not
               necessary
               you
               should
               keep
               the
               External
               Wound
               open
               to
               expect
               an
               Exfoliation
               of
               the
               Fragments
               of
               the
               Bone
               thro'
               it
               ;
               but
               after
               Three
               or
               Four
               days
               ,
               when
               the
               Callosity
               is
               remov'd
               ,
               and
               the
               Matter
               discharg'd
               ,
               you
               ought
               to
               lessen
               your
               Dozils
               ,
               or
               Tents
               ,
               and
               permit
               the
               Sinus
               to
               fill
               with
               Flesh
               ,
               and
               hasten
               a
               Cicatrice
               ,
               and
               the
               Edges
               of
               the
               perforated
               Bone
               will
               pass
               off
               by
               the
               Nostril
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               that
               Part
               of
               the
               Bone
               thrust
               in
               by
               the
               Cautery
               .
               Nor
               will
               any
               great
               Inconveniency
               follow
               if
               the
               Healed
               up
               Part
               should
               Imposthumate
               again
               ,
               thro'
               the
               moving
               of
               the
               Fragments
               of
               the
               Bone
               towards
               the
               External
               Wound
               ,
               if
               it
               is
               again
               open'd
               by
               Incision
               to
               discharge
               them
               ;
               but
               should
               you
               keep
               the
               External
               Wound
               open
               long
               ,
               either
               by
               hard
               Tents
               ,
               or
               Escharoticks
               ,
               you
               will
               not
               only
               procure
               a
               Discharge
               of
               the
               superfluous
               Tears
               ,
               or
               Moisture
               that
               way
               ;
               but
               the
               Perforation
               made
               in
               the
               
                 Os
                 Lachrimale
              
               will
               fill
               up
               ,
               and
               you
               must
               be
               oblig'd
               to
               repeat
               the
               Use
               of
               the
               Actual
               Cautery
               ,
               or
               thrust
               a
               Probe
               thro'
               it
               .
               I
               had
               almost
               forgot
               to
               tell
               you
               ,
               that
               after
               the
               First
               Incision
               made
               in
               the
               External
               Parts
               ,
               it
               is
               necessary
               you
               should
               pass
               your
               Knife
               down
               to
               the
               very
               Bone
               ,
               and
               divide
               the
               Trunk
               of
               a
               large
               Artery
               ,
               and
               Vein
               ,
               which
               pass
               that
               way
               with
               the
               Lachrimal
               Duct
               ,
               least
               the
               Flux
               of
               Blood
               at
               the
               time
               of
               the
               Operation
               should
               so
               cool
               the
               Cautery
               ,
               as
               to
               prevent
               its
               Action
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               The
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eye
               lying
               within
               the
               Orbit
               after
               the
               Superior
               Palpebra
               is
               remov'd
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Adnata
              
               plac'd
               on
               the
               Forepart
               of
               the
               Sclerotis
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Iris
               ,
               in
               whose
               Center
               is
               the
               Pupilla
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Lower
               Eye-lid
               ,
               
                 in
                 situ
              
               ,
               together
               with
               Part
               of
               the
               Upper
               ,
               dissected
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Bone
               of
               the
               Orbit
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Margin
               of
               the
               Lower
               Eye-lid
               ,
               where
               the
               Hairs
               grow
               out
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7
               ,
               and
               8.
               
            
             
               The
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               as
               they
               appear
               within
               the
               Orbit
               ,
               when
               clear'd
               of
               the
               Fat
               ,
               and
               adjacent
               Parts
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 A●usculus
                 Attolens
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               (
               Fig.
               8.
               )
               
                 Musculus
                 Adducens
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               Deprimens
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Abducens
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Orbit
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Obliquus
                 Superior
              
               passing
               thro'
               the
               Trochlea
               K
               ,
               to
               its
               Insertion
               behind
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Attollens
              
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               External
               Part
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Orbit
               next
               the
               Nose
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               Trochlea
               ,
               or
               little
               Cartilage
               ,
               on
               which
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               Oblique
               Superior
               Muscle
               is
               reflected
               .
            
             
               X
               ,
               Fig.
               7.
               
               The
               Optick
               Nerve
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               9.
               
            
             
               The
               Fore-parts
               of
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Right
               Eye
               ,
               when
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Orbit
               ,
               and
               clear'd
               from
               the
               Fat
               ,
               Membranes
               ,
               and
               Glands
               ,
               a
               ;
               and
               Expanded
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               Attollens
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Deprimens
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               Adducens
               ,
               which
               Bidloo
               calls
               Abducens
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Abducens
               ,
               which
               be
               in
               like
               manner
               mistakes
               ,
               and
               calls
               Adducens
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               
                 Trochlearis
                 Musculus
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Obliquus
                 Superior
                 cum
                 Trochlea
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Trochlea
               Cartilage
               ,
               exprest
               
                 in
                 situ
              
               .
               Fig.
               7.
               
               K.
               
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Obliquus
                 Inferior
              
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Adnata
              
               ,
               together
               with
               another
               Membranous
               Tegument
               deriv'd
               from
               the
               Tendons
               of
               the
               Four
               straight
               Muscles
               ,
               mention'd
               by
               
                 Realdus
                 Columbus
              
               .
               Lib.
               X.
               
            
             
               I
               ,
               Is
               scarce
               seen
               ,
               but
               is
               plac'd
               in
               the
               Center
               of
               the
               Bulb
               ,
               and
               distinguishes
               the
               Pupilla
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Optick
               Nerve
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               10.
               
            
             
               The
               Back
               Parts
               of
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               same
               Eye
               ,
               when
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Orbit
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Abducens
              
               ,
               or
               Indignatorius
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Adducens
               ,
               or
               Bibitorius
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               
                 Obliquus
                 Inferior
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Brevissimus
                 Oculi
                 Musculus
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Attollens
               ,
               or
               Superbus
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               Deprimens
               ,
               or
               Humilis
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               
                 Obliquus
                 Superior
              
               ,
               seu
               
                 Longissimus
                 Oculi
                 Musculus
              
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Trochlea
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Optick
               Nerve
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               Back
               Part
               of
               the
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               compos'd
               by
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Sclerotis
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               11.
               
            
             
               The
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eye
               and
               Optick
               Nerve
               free'd
               from
               the
               Muscles
               and
               their
               Common
               Membranes
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               proper
               Membranes
               of
               their
               Surface
               appear
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Adnata
              
               ,
               which
               is
               continued
               to
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Palpebrae
               ,
               which
               can
               by
               no
               means
               prevent
               the
               Retraction
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               when
               any
               of
               the
               straight
               Muscles
               Act
               ,
               as
               some
               Anatomists
               conjecture
               .
            
             
               B
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Sclerotis
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Cornea
              
               ,
               circumscrib'd
               by
               the
               Iris
               ,
               in
               whose
               Center
               is
               the
               Pupilla
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Optick
               Nerve
               cover'd
               with
               a
               Tunick
               deriv'd
               from
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               12.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Sclerotis
               open'd
               ,
               to
               shew
               the
               Choroeide
               Tunick
               immediately
               under
               it
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Chorocides
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Cornea
                 ,
                 Iris
              
               ,
               &c.
               as
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               13.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Ciliare
              
               view'd
               with
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Ciliare
              
               consisting
               of
               Two
               Sorts
               of
               Fibres
               ;
               the
               one
               extended
               thro'
               its
               whole
               Breadth
               ,
               A
               A
               ;
               the
               other
               end
               in
               the
               Mid-way
               B
               B
               :
               Between
               these
               are
               plac'd
               divers
               Lympheducts
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
               This
               Musculous
               Contexture
               of
               the
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Ciliare
              
               moves
               the
               Uvea
               ,
               or
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Retina
              
               composing
               the
               Iris
               ,
               by
               which
               means
               the
               Inner
               Edge
               of
               the
               Iris
               approaches
               towards
               the
               Center
               of
               the
               Pupilla
               ,
               or
               is
               retracted
               ,
               whereby
               the
               Pupil
               is
               enlarg'd
               ,
               or
               diminish'd
               according
               to
               the
               different
               Radiation
               of
               Light.
               In
               some
               Animals
               ,
               as
               Cats
               ,
               &c.
               we
               find
               a
               Musculous
               Structure
               in
               the
               Iris
               also
               ,
               for
               a
               more
               effectual
               narrowing
               their
               Pupils
               ;
               which
               Contrivance
               in
               those
               Creatures
               ,
               perhaps
               ,
               is
               the
               more
               requisite
               in
               regard
               their
               Horny
               Tunicks
               have
               a
               Surface
               not
               so
               prominent
               in
               Proportion
               to
               the
               Bulbs
               of
               their
               Eyes
               ,
               as
               those
               of
               other
               Animals
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               14.
               
            
             
               The
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eye
               together
               with
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               Optick
               Nerve
               ,
               where
               a
               Division
               of
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Sclerotis
              
               together
               with
               the
               Chorocides
               is
               made
               ,
               to
               exhibit
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Retina
              
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Retina
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               15.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               the
               Optick
               Nerve
               together
               with
               the
               Tunicks
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               after
               the
               Humors
               (
               Fig.
               19
               ,
               20.
               )
               are
               taken
               out
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Inner
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Retina
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               16.
               
            
             
               Another
               View
               of
               the
               Internal
               and
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               Tunicks
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               after
               the
               Humors
               are
               discharg'd
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Sclerosis
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Cornea
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Optick
               Nerve
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               17.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               and
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Tunicks
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               when
               the
               Humors
               are
               discharg'd
               by
               a
               transverse
               Section
               thro'
               the
               Bulb
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Cornea
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Inner
               Surface
               of
               the
               Iris
               ,
               next
               the
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Ciliare
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Retina
                 Chorocides
              
               ,
               and
               Sclerosis
               together
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               18.
               
            
             
               The
               Inner
               Surface
               of
               the
               Back
               Part
               of
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Tunicks
               of
               the
               Eye
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Optick
               Nerve
               cut
               off
               ;
               in
               which
               Division
               its
               Blood-Vessels
               are
               exprest
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Sclerosis
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Retina
                 ,
                 in
                 situ
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               19
               ,
               and
               20.
               
            
             
               The
               Vitreous
               and
               Crystalline
               Humors
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               when
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Tunicks
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Crystalline
               Humor
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Vestigia
               of
               the
               Ciliar
               Ligaments
               on
               the
               Vitreous
               and
               Edge
               of
               the
               Crystalline
               Humor
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Vitreous
               Humor
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               21.
               
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               The
               Crystalline
               Humor
               taken
               out
               ;
               A
               ,
               its
               Fore-part
               next
               the
               Aqueous
               Humor
               ;
               B
               ,
               as
               it
               appears
               Laterally
               .
            
             
               The
               Aqueous
               Humor
               cannot
               easily
               be
               exprest
               after
               the
               Life
               ,
               wherefore
               we
               shall
               here
               speak
               of
               its
               Interstice
               ,
               where
               it
               is
               lodg'd
               ,
               whereby
               its
               Figure
               is
               circumscrib'd
               ;
               its
               Forepart
               is
               Convext
               by
               means
               of
               a
               Concave
               fram'd
               by
               the
               Cornea
               in
               the
               Center
               ,
               and
               Iris
               in
               the
               Circumference
               ;
               the
               Back
               Part
               of
               the
               Aqueous
               Humor
               is
               Concave
               ,
               to
               receive
               the
               Convex
               Surface
               of
               the
               Crystalline
               Humor
               ;
               it's
               sides
               are
               Circular
               ,
               conformable
               to
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Bulb
               ;
               whence
               it
               appears
               the
               Aqueous
               Humor
               is
               Circular
               in
               its
               Circumference
               ,
               Convext
               forewards
               ,
               and
               Concave
               backwards
               ,
               like
               the
               following
               Figure
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               22.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               and
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Vitreous
               Humor
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               A
               Concave
               in
               the
               Vitreous
               Humor
               ,
               which
               receives
               the
               Crystalline
               Humor
               .
               The
               Tunicle
               ,
               which
               is
               said
               to
               inclose
               the
               Vitreous
               Humor
               ,
               do's
               not
               appear
               ,
               but
               when
               it
               is
               expos'd
               to
               the
               Air
               ;
               wherefore
               
                 Dr.
                 Briggs
              
               supposes
               it
               to
               be
               meerly
               adventitious
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               23.
               
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               The
               Crystalline
               Humor
               dri'd
               ;
               which
               Bidloo
               according
               to
               some
               Anatomists
               ,
               calls
               
                 Tunica
                 Aranea
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Crystaloeides
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               24.
               
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               The
               Vitreous
               Humor
               dri'd
               in
               like
               manner
               ;
               leaving
               its
               supposed
               investing
               Membrane
               only
               .
            
             
               I
               should
               in
               this
               place
               (
               as
               I
               have
               hitherto
               ,
               and
               shall
               hereafter
               in
               describing
               of
               Parts
               ,
               to
               which
               any
               considerable
               Operation
               of
               Surgery
               do's
               belong
               )
               speak
               of
               the
               Couching
               of
               Cataracts
               ;
               but
               I
               am
               afraid
               I
               have
               already
               transgress'd
               the
               limits
               of
               my
               Page
               ;
               wherefore
               I
               shall
               only
               tell
               you
               that
               in
               Practising
               that
               Operation
               ,
               the
               Puncture
               thro
               the
               Adnata
               ,
               ought
               to
               be
               at
               a
               greater
               Distance
               from
               the
               Pupilla
               ,
               than
               Authors
               commonly
               direct
               ;
               and
               that
               a
               round
               Needle
               is
               to
               be
               preferr'd
               ;
               for
               the
               edges
               of
               the
               Needle
               else
               are
               lyable
               to
               wound
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Choroeid
               Tunick
               largely
               ,
               and
               an
               Extravasation
               of
               Blood
               happens
               between
               that
               Tunick
               ,
               and
               the
               Sclerotis
               ;
               which
               may
               be
               of
               ill
               consequence
               to
               the
               Patient
               .
            
             
             
             
             
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             TWELFTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               IN
               this
               Figure
               there
               is
               a
               Repetition
               of
               the
               same
               Letters
               of
               the
               Alphabet
               ;
               the
               one
               on
               the
               External
               Parts
               of
               the
               Auricle
               ;
               the
               other
               on
               its
               Muscles
               ,
               and
               Parts
               adjacent
               :
            
             
               The
               First
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               Margin
               of
               the
               Outward
               Ear
               ,
               call'd
               Helix
               ,
               and
               Capreolus
               ,
               from
               its
               Tortuous
               Disposition
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               
                 Anthelix
                 Auriculae
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               
                 Hircus
                 Auriculae
              
               ,
               by
               some
               call'd
               Antitragus
               .
            
             
               D
               E
               ,
               Circumscribe
               the
               Concha
               ;
               D
               ,
               
                 Tragus
                 Auriculae
              
               ,
               below
               which
               is
               the
               Lobus
               .
            
             
               The
               Second
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Attollens
                 Auriculam
              
               ;
               which
               derives
               its
               partly
               fleshy
               ,
               and
               Membranous
               Origin
               ,
               from
               above
               the
               Temporal
               Muscle
               ,
               and
               descending
               over
               it
               to
               its
               Insertion
               at
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Cartilage
               of
               the
               Root
               of
               the
               Auricle
               .
            
             
               B
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Retrahens
                 Auriculam
              
               ,
               whose
               Origin
               we
               have
               always
               observed
               with
               
                 M.
                 Du
                 Verney
              
               ,
               to
               be
               from
               the
               
                 Apophysis
                 Mastoides
              
               ;
               the
               whole
               Muscle
               is
               here
               exprest
               much
               larger
               than
               it
               is
               commonly
               found
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Parotid
               Gland
               cleaving
               to
               the
               Outward
               Ear
               :
            
             
               E
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Excretory
               Ducts
               arising
               from
               that
               Gland
               ,
               which
               compose
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Salivalis
                 Superior
              
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Salivalis
                 Superior
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               Exhibits
               the
               Back
               Part
               of
               the
               Auricle
               ,
               when
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Skin
               ,
               &c.
               divided
               from
               the
               Hairy-Scalp
               ,
               and
               free'd
               from
               the
               Cranium
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Internal
               ,
               or
               Back
               Part
               of
               the
               Ear
               next
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Auricle
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Meatus
                 Auditorius
              
               ;
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Thickness
               of
               its
               Cartilage
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               Represents
               the
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Salivalis
              
               injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               and
               free'd
               from
               the
               Parotid
               Gland
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Salivalis
              
               cut
               off
               at
               its
               Progress
               over
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Masseter
              
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               C
               ,
               The
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Salival
               Ductus
               free'd
               ,
               which
               arise
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Arteries
               within
               the
               Parotid
               Gland
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               Represents
               divers
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Face
               after
               the
               
                 Quadratus
                 Genae
              
               is
               taken
               off
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               This
               formal
               Appearance
               of
               circular
               Fibres
               about
               the
               
                 Alae
                 Nasi
              
               ,
               I
               suspect
               to
               be
               fictitious
               ,
               having
               never
               observ'd
               such
               a
               Disposition
               in
               any
               Subject
               ,
               tho'
               I
               have
               purposely
               examined
               this
               Part
               ;
               yet
               the
               like
               Figure
               of
               them
               may
               be
               seen
               in
               Placentinus
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               A
               Muscle
               ,
               whose
               Position
               renders
               it
               capable
               of
               pulling
               up
               the
               
                 Ala
                 Nasi
              
               ;
               whence
               it
               is
               called
               
                 Elevator
                 Alae
                 Nasi
              
               ;
               and
               by
               
                 Casserius
                 ,
                 Pyramidalis
              
               ,
               from
               its
               Figure
               ;
               nor
               do
               we
               commonly
               find
               this
               Muscle
               in
               Dissection
               ;
               the
               fleshy
               Fibres
               on
               this
               Part
               ,
               frequently
               taking
               the
               same
               Course
               with
               those
               of
               the
               
                 Orbicularis
                 Palpebrarum
              
               ,
               do
               pass
               by
               the
               
                 Ala
                 Nasi
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Elevator
                 Labii
                 superioris
                 proprius
              
               .
            
             
               DD
               ,
               The
               
                 Orbicularis
                 Palpebrarum
              
               ;
               This
               is
               a
               thin
               fleshy
               Muscle
               ,
               circularly
               environing
               the
               Eyelids
               ,
               to
               which
               it
               is
               inserted
               ,
               not
               unlike
               the
               Sphincter
               Muscles
               of
               other
               Parts
               ,
               as
               of
               the
               Lips
               ,
               and
               the
               Bladder
               of
               Urin
               :
               It
               acts
               in
               drawing
               the
               Eyelids
               nearer
               each
               other
               ;
               which
               we
               call
               shutting
               the
               Eyelids
               ;
               but
               if
               this
               Muscle
               Acts
               vigorously
               ,
               it
               not
               only
               draws
               the
               Eyelids
               close
               together
               ,
               but
               forces
               the
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eye
               into
               the
               Orbit
               .
               Galen
               and
               the
               ancient
               Anatomists
               not
               discovering
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Aperiens
                 Palpebrarum
                 Rectus
              
               ,
               (
               since
               found
               out
               by
               Fallopius
               ,
               )
               were
               at
               a
               loss
               for
               assigning
               a
               proper
               Instrument
               to
               draw
               up
               the
               Upper
               Eyelid
               ;
               wherefore
               they
               erroneously
               divided
               this
               Orbicular
               Muscle
               into
               Two
               :
               The
               like
               error
               has
               been
               incident
               to
               some
               later
               Writers
               ,
               among
               which
               Bidloo
               falls
               into
               the
               same
               Mistake
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Zygomaticus
               or
               
                 Distortor
                 Oris
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               A
               Branch
               of
               an
               Artery
               ,
               which
               arises
               from
               the
               Carotid
               in
               the
               Neck
               ,
               and
               passing
               through
               the
               Inferior
               Maxillary
               Gland
               ,
               runs
               over
               the
               Lower
               Jawbone
               ,
               at
               the
               Insertion
               of
               the
               Masseter
               Muscle
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               here
               exprest
               .
            
             
               I
               have
               frequently
               met
               with
               Tumors
               on
               this
               Part
               ,
               which
               have
               required
               Incision
               ;
               in
               which
               Case
               the
               dividing
               of
               this
               Artery
               ought
               to
               be
               regarded
               ;
               wherefore
               I
               have
               rather
               chosen
               first
               to
               make
               Two
               Perforations
               ,
               one
               on
               each
               Side
               this
               Artery
               ,
               whether
               by
               Caustick
               or
               otherwise
               ,
               and
               then
               pass
               a
               Ligature
               to
               comprehend
               the
               Artery
               for
               some
               Days
               ;
               and
               tho'
               I
               cannot
               advise
               the
               Practice
               of
               letting
               the
               Ligature
               divide
               the
               whole
               ,
               by
               frequently
               straightening
               it
               ;
               yet
               in
               Three
               or
               Four
               Days
               time
               the
               Ligature
               will
               so
               compress
               the
               Artery
               ,
               that
               you
               may
               cut
               through
               free
               from
               any
               dangerous
               Flux
               of
               Blood.
               
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Lower
               Jawbone
               made
               bare
               by
               the
               removing
               of
               the
               Skin
               ,
               and
               
                 Musculus
                 Quadratus
                 Colli
              
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Carotid
               Artery
               .
            
             
               K
               M
               N
               ,
               The
               Temporal
               Muscle
               ;
               K
               N
               its
               Outside
               ;
               M
               its
               Inside
               next
               the
               Cranium
               turned
               down
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Parotid
               Gland
               ,
               the
               greater
               Part
               of
               which
               Gland
               being
               cut
               away
               ,
               to
               exhibit
               the
               following
               Muscle
               .
            
             
               O
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Masseter
                 in
                 situ
              
               :
               The
               Origination
               ,
               Progress
               ,
               and
               Insertion
               of
               this
               ,
               and
               the
               Temporal
               Muscle
               ,
               are
               sufficiently
               exprest
               in
               this
               ,
               and
               the
               following
               Figure
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               Exhibits
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Lips
               ,
               and
               some
               of
               those
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Buccinator
              
               free'd
               from
               its
               Origin
               at
               the
               
                 Procossus
                 Coronae
              
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               (
               nearer
               N
               )
               and
               left
               at
               its
               Insertion
               at
               the
               Angle
               of
               the
               Lips
               :
               Here
               we
               may
               observe
               ,
               that
               in
               this
               Figure
               (
               as
               in
               the
               Life
               )
               the
               Fibres
               of
               this
               Muscle
               run
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               ,
               contrary
               to
               the
               Description
               Bidloo
               ,
               and
               others
               give
               of
               it
               ;
               through
               this
               Muscle
               passes
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Salivalis
              
               of
               the
               Parotid
               Gland
               into
               the
               Mouth
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Elevator
                 Labiorum
                 Communis
              
               ;
               This
               arises
               from
               the
               
                 Os
                 Quartum
              
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               and
               descends
               directly
               to
               its
               Insertion
               under
               the
               Termination
               of
               the
               Zygomaticus
               ;
               in
               this
               Figure
               (
               as
               we
               have
               likewise
               seen
               it
               )
               a
               Fasciculus
               of
               fleshy
               Fibres
               of
               this
               Muscle
               run
               over
               the
               Termination
               of
               the
               Zygomaticus
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Elevator
                 Labii
                 superioris
                 proprius
              
               ,
               and
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Dilatator
                 Alae
                 Nasi
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Zygomaticus
              
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               
                 Depressor
                 Labiorum
                 Communis
              
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               
                 Depressor
                 Labii
                 inferioris
                 proprius
              
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               
                 Constrictor
                 Labiorum
              
               .
            
             
               K
               M
               N
               ,
               The
               Temporalis
               ;
               N
               ,
               its
               Implantation
               at
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Coronae
              
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Parotid
               Gland
               .
            
             
               O
               ,
               The
               Masseter
               cut
               from
               its
               Origin
               at
               the
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               ,
               and
               left
               at
               its
               Insertion
               to
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               P
               Q
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Origin
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Pterygoideus
                 externus
                 in
                 situ
              
               ;
               This
               springs
               from
               the
               External
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Pterygoides
              
               ,
               and
               Upper
               Part
               of
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoeides
              
               ,
               and
               runs
               backwards
               to
               its
               Insertion
               at
               the
               Neck
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Condyloides
              
               :
               To
               discover
               the
               Progress
               of
               this
               Muscle
               ,
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Coronae
              
               should
               be
               cut
               off
               with
               a
               Chizel
               .
            
             
               R
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Condyliformis
              
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               which
               is
               here
               in
               a
               great
               Part
               lay'd
               bare
               .
            
             
               S
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Digastricus
              
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             THIRTEENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               External
               Parts
               of
               the
               Nose
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               
                 Fauces
                 ,
                 Gargareon
              
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               ,
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Back
               of
               the
               Nose
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Spine
               ,
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Tip
               ,
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Septum
                 Narium
              
               or
               Bridge
               ,
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Alae
                 Nasi
              
               or
               Sides
               of
               the
               Nose
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Cheeks
               divided
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               Parts
               within
               the
               Mouth
               may
               appear
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Tongue
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Gargareon
               or
               
                 Uvula
                 in
                 Situ
              
               ,
               cover'd
               with
               the
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Palat.
               
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               Tonsillae
               described
               in
               our
               
                 Appen
                 .
                 Fig.
              
               9.
               
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               Gums
               of
               both
               Jaws
               .
            
             
               L
               L
               ,
               The
               Palat
               or
               Roof
               of
               the
               Mouth
               ,
               whose
               Glandules
               are
               exprest
               Tab.
               14.
               
               Fig.
               4.
               
               B
               C.
               
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Epiglottis
               raised
               through
               the
               Depressure
               of
               the
               Tongue
               .
               We
               seldom
               see
               the
               Epiglottis
               in
               looking
               into
               the
               Mouths
               of
               Living
               People
               ;
               but
               in
               some
               few
               I
               have
               some
               times
               seen
               its
               Upper
               Part
               ,
               by
               very
               much
               depressing
               the
               Tongue
               to
               inspect
               the
               Fauces
               ;
               in
               such
               Persons
               some
               (
               very
               Ignorant
               in
               Anatomy
               )
               have
               taken
               it
               for
               an
               Excrescence
               ,
               and
               have
               proposed
               its
               Extraction
               .
               A
               Mistake
               ,
               equally
               as
               pernicious
               ,
               has
               been
               incident
               to
               some
               Practitioners
               ,
               in
               supposing
               the
               Foramina
               of
               the
               
                 Excretory
                 Ducts
              
               of
               the
               Tonsillae
               when
               fill'd
               with
               a
               Tenacious
               Matter
               ,
               (
               as
               in
               Cases
               of
               taking
               Cold
               ,
               as
               it
               's
               call'd
               ,
               &c.
               )
               to
               be
               Ulcers
               ;
               as
               Fallopius
               takes
               notice
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Outward
               Covering
               of
               the
               Tongue
               view'd
               with
               a
               Microscope
               :
               This
               Figure
               together
               with
               the
               3
               d
               ,
               4
               th
               ,
               5
               th
               ,
               6
               th
               ,
               7
               th
               ,
               and
               8
               th
               ,
               were
               done
               after
               the
               Tongues
               of
               some
               Quadrupedes
               ,
               as
               of
               Bulls
               ,
               Sheep
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               .
               With
               the
               Assistance
               of
               a
               Microscope
               ,
               an
               Appearance
               not
               altogether
               unlike
               this
               may
               be
               found
               on
               a
               Humane
               Tongue
               ;
               without
               any
               Horny
               Covering
               like
               that
               described
               by
               Bidloo
               in
               these
               Figures
               ,
               as
               follows
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               That
               Part
               towards
               the
               Tip
               of
               the
               Tongue
               ,
            
             
               B
               ,
               That
               towards
               the
               Root
               may
               be
               seen
               ,
               arising
               from
               the
               Membrane
               underneath
               ,
               a
               sort
               of
               Bodies
               of
               a
               Toothlike
               Form
               C
               C
               ,
               &c.
               hard
               as
               Cartilages
               ,
               or
               the
               Nailes
               ;
               for
               which
               reason
               (
               says
               he
               )
               I
               call
               them
               Ungulae
               :
               Betwixt
               these
               (
               he
               further
               adds
               )
               are
               placed
               certain
               forked
               Bodies
               of
               the
               same
               Structure
               :
               (
               See
               Fig.
               3.
               )
               Between
               these
               Two
               Kinds
               of
               Bodies
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               upon
               them
               ,
               are
               placed
               certain
               Bladder-like
               Pyriformal
               ,
               and
               
                 Pellucid
                 Globuli
              
               .
               (
               Fig.
               2.
               
               D.
               )
               These
               Ungulae
               are
               framed
               by
               the
               manifold
               joyning
               together
               of
               
                 Fibrous
                 Lamellae
              
               .
               (
               See
               Fig.
               4.
               
               A.
               )
               whose
               Middle
               B
               ,
               is
               Medullary
               and
               Pervious
               ;
               but
               the
               Globuli
               are
               hollow
               like
               Bladders
               :
               Both
               these
               kinds
               are
               clotted
               about
               with
               a
               strong
               tensile
               Membrane
               (
               Fig.
               2.
               
               E.
               )
               to
               which
               they
               are
               fastned
               on
               their
               Sides
               .
               This
               Membrane
               is
               supported
               with
               Hairy
               Stamina
               F.
               like
               the
               Membrane
               immediatly
               under
               it
               ,
               which
               subjacent
               Membrane
               is
               Perforated
               by
               the
               aforesaid
               Bodies
               ,
               as
               appears
               in
               (
               Fig.
               6.
               )
               In
               some
               of
               the
               Interstices
               of
               these
               Bodies
               there
               may
               certain
               Cavities
               G
               ,
               Fig.
               2.
               be
               discover'd
               ;
               whose
               Bottom
               is
               very
               Porous
               .
               The
               Appearance
               of
               the
               Back
               Part
               of
               these
               Bodies
               is
               represented
               in
               Fig.
               5.
               
               A
               ,
               The
               broken
               Globuli
               .
               B
               ,
               The
               Asperities
               of
               the
               Ungulae
               .
               C
               ,
               The
               Hairy
               Membranous
               Covering
               .
               D
               ,
               The
               porous
               Apertures
               .
               The
               Upper
               Covering
               being
               remov'd
               ,
               the
               Second
               or
               Subjacent
               Membrane
               ,
               mention'd
               above
               ,
               comes
               in
               view
               .
               Fig.
               6.
               
               Spread
               like
               a
               Net
               ;
               the
               Duct
               of
               whose
               Fibres
               is
               so
               intricate
               and
               various
               ,
               that
               nothing
               certain
               can
               be
               determin'd
               of
               their
               Order
               ;
               For
               in
               a
               Raw
               Tongue
               it
               is
               glutinous
               ,
               in
               a
               Boyl'd
               one
               extendible
               ;
               its
               Superiour
               Part
               exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               ,
               is
               whitish
               and
               thinner
               ;
               but
               the
               Lower
               is
               observ'd
               to
               be
               thick
               ,
               and
               more
               tenacious
               .
               (
               See
               Fig.
               7.
               )
               Its
               Perforations
               AA
               ,
               Fig.
               6.
               answer
               to
               the
               Number
               of
               the
               Ungulae
               :
               Here
               also
               may
               be
               observ'd
               several
               small
               Vessels
               B
               ,
               creeping
               along
               ,
               and
               running
               to
               the
               Superficies
               of
               the
               Tongue
               .
               The
               Edges
               of
               these
               Perforations
               are
               made
               rough
               by
               small
               Fibres
               and
               Vessels
               of
               their
               own
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               of
               the
               broken
               Ungulae
               .
               The
               like
               Structure
               may
               be
               observ'd
               every
               where
               in
               the
               Membrane
               in
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Mouth
               ,
               especially
               in
               the
               Palat.
               Under
               this
               Net-like
               Covering
               some
               Nervous
               Papillary
               
                 Plexus
                 .
                 Fig.
              
               8.
               
               A
               ,
               and
               certain
               Glands
               B
               are
               hid
               ;
               the
               Tops
               of
               which
               are
               inseparably
               joyn'd
               to
               the
               above
               nam'd
               Medullary
               Middles
               of
               the
               Ungulae
               :
               So
               that
               these
               Ungulae
               ,
               like
               little
               Horns
               ,
               cover
               those
               Papillary
               Bodies
               like
               a
               Membrane
               spread
               over
               them
               :
               These
               Papillae
               are
               tyed
               in
               several
               Places
               to
               the
               Carnous
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Tongue
               ;
               of
               these
               ,
               some
               are
               Large
               C
               ;
               some
               Smaller
               D
               ;
               some
               confused
               and
               in
               Heaps
               E
               ;
               others
               more
               distant
               ,
               and
               distinct
               ,
               and
               of
               different
               Figures
               ;
               about
               These
               are
               placed
               a
               great
               many
               Glands
               F
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               Vessels
               of
               the
               Net-like
               Covering
               do
               adhere
               .
               The
               same
               Organs
               ,
               tho'
               in
               a
               larger
               Form
               ,
               do
               arise
               out
               of
               the
               Coverings
               of
               the
               Lips
               and
               Cheeks
               ,
               as
               above
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               9.
               
            
             
               The
               Musculous
               Structure
               of
               the
               Tongue
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               continued
               according
               to
               the
               Length
               of
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               (
               viz.
               )
               from
               its
               Basis
               to
               its
               Tip
               ;
               between
               these
               are
               interspersed
               (
               B
               B
               B
               )
               divers
               Glandules
               and
               Lobes
               of
               Fat
               ,
               B
               B.
               
            
             
               C
               D
               ,
               The
               Second
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               which
               descend
               from
               the
               Upper
               Part
               towards
               its
               Basis.
               
            
             
               E
               F
               ,
               Other
               Fibres
               arising
               from
               the
               Basis
               go
               to
               the
               Superficies
               of
               the
               Tongue
               .
            
             
               G
               H
               ,
               Others
               carried
               from
               the
               Middle
               of
               the
               Tongue
               towards
               the
               Sides
               ;
               the
               Tendinous
               Extremities
               of
               these
               Fibres
               are
               fastned
               to
               the
               Coverings
               of
               the
               Tongue
               :
               At
               the
               Middle
               of
               the
               lower
               Part
               of
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               are
               Two
               distinct
               Classes
               of
               Fibres
               very
               intricately
               disposed
               ,
               which
               contribute
               to
               those
               various
               Motions
               the
               Tongue
               is
               necessarily
               imploy'd
               in
               ,
               whether
               in
               Speaking
               ,
               Mastication
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               10.
               
            
             
               The
               Structure
               of
               the
               Gums
               magnifyed
               with
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Gums
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Two
               of
               the
               Foreteeth
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Covering
               of
               the
               Gums
               opened
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Duct
               of
               the
               Fibres
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Glands
               situated
               between
               the
               Fibres
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               broken
               off
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FOURTEENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               DIVERS
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               ,
               and
               Larynx
               ,
               as
               they
               appear
               in
               their
               proper
               Situation
               ,
               after
               the
               Side
               of
               the
               Lower-Jaw
               is
               taken
               off
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Tongue
               Pinn'd
               up
               B.
               
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Styloglossus
                 in
                 Situ
              
               ;
               It
               arising
               from
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Styloides
              
               is
               inserted
               to
               the
               Root
               of
               the
               Tongue
               immediately
               below
               the
               Implantation
               of
               the
               Ceratoglossus
               ;
               it
               draws
               the
               Tongue
               up
               ,
               and
               inwards
               ,
               in
               the
               Action
               of
               Deglutition
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Ceratoglossus
              
               ,
               Arising
               Fleshy
               from
               the
               Horns
               at
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               ,
               and
               is
               so
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Tongue
               :
               If
               this
               with
               its
               Partner
               Act
               ,
               they
               draw
               the
               Tongue
               directly
               into
               the
               Mouth
               ;
               if
               One
               of
               them
               Acts
               ,
               it
               pulls
               the
               Tongue
               to
               one
               Side
               .
            
             
               E
               F
               G
               I
               L
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Genioglossus
                 in
                 Situ
              
               ;
               It
               arising
               from
               the
               Middle
               of
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               and
               is
               Implanted
               at
               the
               Root
               of
               the
               Tongue
               ;
               when
               this
               with
               its
               Partner
               Act
               ,
               they
               draw
               the
               Tongue
               Forwards
               ,
               and
               thrust
               it
               out
               of
               the
               Mouth
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Fauces
               contiguous
               to
               the
               Root
               of
               the
               Tongue
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Sternohyoideus
              
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               Part
               of
               Coracohyoideus
               .
            
             
               N.
               B.
               That
               L
               
                 is
                 inserted
                 in
                 Two
                 different
                 Parts
                 of
                 this
                 Figure
                 ;
                 wherefore
                 the
                 Reader
                 is
                 desired
                 to
                 take
                 Notice
                 that
                 the
                 Lowermost
                 belongs
                 to
                 the
                 last
                 Reference
                 .
              
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Styloceratohyoideus
              
               ;
               Its
               Origin
               ,
               Progress
               and
               Insertion
               ,
               are
               so
               well
               exprest
               in
               the
               Figure
               ,
               that
               there
               needs
               no
               other
               Description
               to
               be
               added
               ;
               this
               Muscle
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Styloglossus
               ,
               and
               Stylopharyngaeus
               ,
               with
               their
               Partners
               on
               the
               other
               Side
               ,
               Act
               in
               Drawing
               up
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
                 ,
                 Tongue
                 ,
                 Larynx
                 ,
              
               and
               Pharynx
               in
               Deglutition
               ;
               by
               which
               means
               the
               Aliment
               when
               fitted
               for
               Swallowing
               ,
               do's
               not
               only
               Descend
               into
               the
               Pharynx
               (
               which
               is
               at
               that
               Time
               dilated
               ;
               )
               but
               the
               Epiglottis
               is
               in
               that
               Position
               of
               the
               Tongue
               by
               consequence
               deprest
               ,
               and
               adequately
               Covers
               the
               Rimula
               of
               the
               Larynx
               ;
               whereby
               ,
               the
               least
               Particle
               of
               the
               Aliment
               is
               hindred
               ,
               in
               its
               Descent
               into
               the
               Larynx
               ,
               and
               
                 Aspera
                 Arteria
              
               ;
               which
               is
               a
               wonderful
               Mechanism
               in
               Nature
               !
               Hence
               't
               is
               we
               can
               by
               no
               means
               Expire
               in
               the
               Action
               of
               Swallowing
               of
               the
               Aliment
               ,
               without
               some
               Part
               of
               it
               Descending
               into
               the
               Rimula
               of
               the
               Larynx
               ;
               which
               is
               so
               troublesome
               as
               to
               cause
               an
               incessant
               Coughing
               ,
               till
               it
               's
               ejected
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Mylohyoides
              
               ,
               Cut
               from
               its
               Origination
               at
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw-Bone
               ,
               and
               left
               at
               its
               Implantation
               to
               the
               Middle
               and
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               .
            
             
               O
               ,
               The
               Geniohyoides
               Muscle
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               P
               ,
               The
               Middle
               Part
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw-Bone
               ,
               which
               composes
               the
               Chin
               ,
               broke
               off
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Surface
               of
               the
               Upper
               Lip.
               
            
             
               R
               ,
               The
               Inside
               of
               the
               Cheek
               .
            
             
               S
               ,
               The
               Gustatory
               Nerve
               ;
               being
               a
               Branch
               of
               the
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               in
               its
               Way
               to
               the
               Tongue
               .
            
             
               T
               ,
               The
               Motory
               Nerve
               of
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               springing
               from
               the
               Ninth
               Pair
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               t
               ,
               A
               small
               Branch
               of
               the
               Ninth
               Pair
               going
               to
               the
               Larynx
               .
            
             
               V
               ,
               The
               Left
               Horn
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               .
            
             
               W
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Carotid
                 Artery
              
               .
            
             
               X
               X
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Digastricus
              
               left
               to
               its
               Origination
               at
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Mastoides
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               Represents
               ,
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               ,
               the
               Salival
               Ducts
               free'd
               from
               the
               Inferior
               Maxillary
               Gland
               ,
               exprest
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               ,
               in
               Fig.
               1.
               of
               the
               following
               Table
               M
               M.
               I
               cannot
               conceive
               this
               Figure
               of
               the
               Salival
               Ducts
               was
               design'd
               after
               the
               Life
               ;
               nor
               do's
               it
               express
               any
               other
               Excretory
               Duct
               which
               occurs
               to
               my
               Memory
               ;
               wherefore
               I
               shall
               here
               add
               the
               Description
               of
               it
               by
               Bidloo
               .
               A
               ,
               The
               Twigs
               of
               the
               Salival
               Duct
               ,
               above
               mention'd
               ,
               injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               and
               free'd
               from
               the
               Glandules
               :
               B
               ,
               The
               larger
               Branches
               :
               C
               ,
               The
               Common
               Duct
               :
               D
               ,
               It
               's
               Orifice
               inclos'd
               with
               an
               Edging
               .
               E
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               investing
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Mouth
               cut
               off
               .
               See
               the
               Figure
               of
               the
               Salival
               Ducts
               of
               the
               Lower
               Maxillary
               Glands
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Sublingual
               Glands
               in
               our
               Appendix
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Inner
               Face
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               and
               Fauces
               ,
               after
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               is
               taken
               off
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Roof
               of
               the
               Mouth
               ,
               or
               Palat.
               
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Fauces
               near
               the
               Tonsillae
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Divers
               Foramina
               in
               the
               Surface
               of
               the
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Mouth
               or
               Palat
               ,
               thro'
               which
               issues
               a
               Juice
               separated
               in
               its
               Glandules
               ,
               exprest
               Fig.
               4.
               
               B
               ,
               B
               ,
               C
               ,
               C.
               
            
             
               D
               E
               ,
               The
               Forepart
               of
               the
               Palat
               near
               the
               
                 Dentes
                 Incisores
              
               ,
               where
               the
               Bone
               underneath
               is
               Perforated
               ,
               to
               transmit
               divers
               Blood-Vessels
               and
               Nerves
               ;
               but
               in
               Bulls
               and
               some
               Animals
               ,
               in
               this
               Part
               ,
               is
               a
               Perforation
               thro'
               both
               the
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Palat
               ,
               and
               that
               of
               the
               Nostrils
               ,
               and
               is
               a
               common
               Passage
               between
               their
               
                 Foramina
                 Narium
              
               and
               Mouths
               ;
               which
               in
               them
               is
               call'd
               Fretum
               ,
               and
               serves
               to
               convey
               Part
               of
               the
               Matter
               separated
               by
               the
               Glands
               of
               their
               Nostrils
               into
               their
               Mouths
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               A
               Stylus
               put
               thro'
               the
               Left
               Nostril
               into
               the
               Fauces
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Vvula
               or
               Gargareon
               hanging
               down
               from
               the
               Palat.
               
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               which
               helps
               to
               compose
               the
               Back
               Part
               of
               the
               Fauces
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Musculi
                 Flexores
                 Capitis
              
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Longi
                 Colli
              
               .
            
             
               L
               L
               ,
               The
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Inside
               of
               the
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Palat
               ,
               as
               it
               appears
               when
               Rais'd
               ,
               and
               View'd
               with
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Palatina
              
               Rais'd
               from
               the
               Bone
               ,
               and
               Pinn'd
               out
               .
            
             
               B
               C
               D
               ,
               The
               Glandules
               ,
               and
               Carnous
               Fibres
               ,
               which
               compose
               the
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               Two
               
                 Dentes
                 Incisores
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Fourth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               by
               some
               call'd
               
                 Os
                 Palati
              
               ,
               whose
               Surface
               is
               full
               of
               Vestigia
               ,
               where
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Palati
              
               did
               Adhere
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Foramina
                 Narium
              
               Open'd
               ,
               by
               taking
               off
               the
               Greater
               Half
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               or
               
                 Os
                 Palati
              
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Pituitary
               or
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               ,
               which
               invests
               the
               Foramen
               of
               the
               Left
               Nostril
               ,
               separated
               from
               the
               
                 Septum
                 Narium
              
               B.
               
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               extended
               ,
               so
               as
               to
               receive
               a
               strong
               (
               D
               D
               )
               Reflection
               of
               Light
               ,
               by
               means
               of
               a
               Stylus
               D
               D
               ,
               introduc'd
               as
               in
               Fig.
               3.
               
               The
               Structure
               of
               this
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               is
               altogether
               agreeable
               to
               that
               of
               the
               Palat
               Fauces
               ,
               &c.
               so
               that
               we
               need
               not
               say
               more
               of
               it
               in
               this
               Place
               ;
               but
               that
               it
               is
               not
               only
               extended
               to
               all
               the
               tortuous
               Meanders
               of
               these
               Cavities
               of
               the
               Nostrils
               ,
               but
               it
               also
               invests
               the
               Cavities
               of
               the
               Cheek-Bones
               ,
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               ,
               and
               Frontis
               ;
               all
               which
               communicate
               with
               the
               Nostrils
               ,
               where
               they
               discharge
               their
               Pituita
               ;
               as
               shall
               be
               demonstrated
               in
               the
               Osteological
               Part
               of
               this
               Work.
               
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIFTEENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               DIVERS
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               and
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
                 in
                 Situ
              
               ,
               the
               Skin
               ,
               and
               
                 Musculus
                 Quadratus
                 Colli
              
               being
               Remov'd
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               C
               ,
               The
               Musculus
               Digastricus
               or
               Biventer
               ;
               B
               ,
               its
               Fleshy
               Origination
               from
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Mammillaris
              
               ;
               C
               ,
               its
               Middle
               Tendon
               passing
               thro'
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Styloceratohyoideus
              
               (
               N
               )
               ,
               and
               an
               Annular
               Ligament
               arising
               from
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               ,
               to
               its
               Fleshy
               Termination
               A
               ,
               in
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               (
               D
               )
               .
            
             
               The
               Middle
               Tendon
               of
               this
               Digastric
               Muscle
               ,
               and
               its
               Partner
               ,
               passing
               thro'
               Two
               Annular
               Ligaments
               Fixt
               to
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               ,
               as
               the
               Ropes
               thro'
               a
               Double
               Pully
               ,
               is
               a
               necessary
               Contrivance
               in
               Nature
               to
               render
               them
               capable
               of
               pulling
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               Down
               ;
               which
               ,
               had
               their
               Progress
               been
               direct
               from
               their
               Originations
               ,
               they
               could
               not
               have
               perform'd
               ;
               nor
               is
               there
               any
               Processes
               ,
               whether
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               or
               Neighbouring
               Parts
               ,
               that
               could
               give
               Originations
               to
               these
               Muscles
               below
               their
               Insertions
               ,
               as
               in
               some
               Quadrupedes
               :
               Wherefore
               the
               Divine
               Architect
               ,
               in
               Humane
               Bodies
               ,
               has
               plac'd
               this
               Double-Pully
               below
               their
               Terminations
               ,
               by
               which
               means
               they
               are
               made
               capable
               of
               performing
               their
               design'd
               Office.
               Hence
               Deglutition
               is
               Hindred
               ,
               when
               these
               Muscles
               are
               in
               Action
               ,
               they
               at
               that
               Time
               preventing
               the
               Ascent
               of
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               and
               Larynx
               ;
               neither
               can
               we
               in
               the
               Time
               of
               Swallowing
               ,
               draw
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               down
               ,
               because
               the
               
                 Center
                 of
                 Direction
              
               is
               pull'd
               up
               ;
               wherefore
               we
               are
               oblig'd
               to
               keep
               the
               Jaws
               close
               in
               that
               Action
               .
               But
               in
               Dogs
               ,
               and
               other
               Voracious
               Animals
               ,
               (
               wherein
               these
               Muscles
               Arise
               from
               the
               Transverse
               Processes
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               )
               these
               Actions
               do
               not
               Depend
               upon
               each
               other
               ;
               whence
               it
               is
               they
               devour
               their
               Aliment
               so
               Quick
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               Edge
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               Bone
               made
               bare
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Mylohyoideus
              
               ,
               which
               derives
               its
               Fleshy
               Origin
               from
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               partly
               under
               the
               Inferior
               Maxillary
               Glands
               ,
               and
               partly
               at
               the
               Insertions
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Digastricus
              
               ;
               whence
               Descending
               with
               a
               Double
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               ,
               here
               elegantly
               Exprest
               ,
               is
               inserted
               to
               the
               Superior
               and
               Forepart
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               .
               Immediately
               under
               this
               Muscle
               lie
               the
               
                 Glandulae
                 Sublinguales
              
               ,
               and
               Salival
               Ducts
               of
               the
               Inferior
               and
               Maxillary
               Gland
               ;
               both
               which
               are
               Comprest
               by
               it
               ,
               and
               their
               contain'd
               Saliva
               driven
               Forewards
               into
               the
               Mouth
               when
               this
               Muscle
               Acts
               ,
               as
               in
               Deglutition
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Sternohyoidei
              
               ,
               Arising
               from
               the
               Internal
               and
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Claviculae
               ,
               and
               not
               from
               the
               Sternum
               ,
               as
               it
               's
               Vulgarly
               suppos'd
               ,
               and
               are
               inserted
               to
               the
               Inferior
               ,
               and
               Forepart
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Ceracohyoidei
               ,
               coming
               from
               under
               the
               Mastoid
               Muscles
               (
               II
               )
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Sternothyroidei
               ,
               which
               spring
               from
               the
               Superior
               and
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Sternum
               ,
               and
               march
               under
               the
               Sternohyoidei
               to
               their
               Terminations
               in
               the
               
                 Thyroide
                 Cartilage
              
               ,
               as
               appears
               in
               the
               following
               Figure
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               Mastoidei
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Masseter
               on
               the
               Right
               Side
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Parotid
               Gland
               on
               the
               same
               Side
               .
            
             
               M
               M
               ,
               The
               
                 Glandulae
                 Maxillae
                 Inferioris
              
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Stylohyoideus
              
               ,
               that
               is
               Perforated
               to
               transmit
               the
               Middle
               Tendon
               of
               the
               Biventral
               Muscle
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ;
               which
               together
               with
               an
               Annular
               Ligament
               ,
               springing
               from
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               ,
               in
               like
               manner
               involving
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Middle
               Tendon
               of
               that
               Muscle
               ,
               do's
               like
               a
               Pully
               render
               it
               capable
               of
               pulling
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               down
               ,
               as
               above
               Noted
               .
            
             
               O
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Internal
               Jugular
               Vein
               .
            
             
               P
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Carotid
               Artery
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               A
               Blood-Vessel
               cut
               off
               and
               ti'd
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               Divers
               Muscles
               lying
               under
               those
               exprest
               in
               the
               former
               Figure
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Lower
               Edge
               of
               the
               Inferior
               Jaw-Bone
               laid
               bare
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Sternohyoidei
              
               free'd
               from
               their
               Insertions
               ,
               and
               left
               at
               their
               Originations
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Coracohyoidei
               are
               a
               Pair
               of
               Digastrick
               Muscles
               ;
               they
               Arise
               Fleshy
               from
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Coracoides
                 Scapulae
              
               ,
               and
               Ascend
               under
               the
               
                 Musculi
                 Mastoidei
              
               where
               they
               become
               Tendinous
               ,
               but
               Growing
               Fleshy
               again
               ,
               are
               Inserted
               at
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Fore-Bone
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               ;
               this
               draws
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               downwards
               ,
               and
               pulls
               it
               somewhat
               inwards
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Stylohyoideus
              
               at
               its
               Termination
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Mylohyoideus
              
               ;
               on
               the
               Right
               Side
               not
               quite
               Free'd
               from
               its
               Origination
               ;
               on
               the
               Left
               ,
               so
               Rais'd
               ,
               as
               that
               the
               
                 Glandula
                 Sublingualis
              
               W
               ,
               do's
               Appear
               ;
               this
               Bidloo
               calls
               Geniohyoidei
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Geniohyoidei
               ,
               by
               Bidloo
               call'd
               Anthereohyoidei
               ;
               they
               Arise
               Fleshy
               from
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               which
               composes
               the
               Chin
               ,
               and
               are
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Superior
               ,
               and
               Forepart
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               :
               When
               these
               Muscles
               Act
               ,
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               is
               pull'd
               Upwards
               ,
               and
               Forewards
               ,
               and
               Assist
               the
               Genioglossi
               in
               Thrusting
               the
               Tongue
               out
               of
               the
               Mouth
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Digastrick
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               cut
               from
               their
               Insertions
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Mastodei
               Muscles
               ;
               that
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               being
               cut
               from
               its
               Origination
               and
               left
               at
               its
               Insertion
               ,
               that
               of
               the
               Left
               remaining
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               of
               the
               Larynx
               ,
               which
               makes
               what
               they
               call
               ,
               the
               
                 Pomum
                 Adami
              
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Aspera
                 Arteria
              
               or
               Wind-Pipe
               .
            
             
               L
               L
               ,
               The
               
                 Glandulae
                 Thyroidaeae
              
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Masseter
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Pterygoideus
                 Internus
                 in
                 Situ
              
               ;
               it
               A●●es
               partly
               Tendinous
               ,
               and
               partly
               Fleshy
               ,
               from
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Winglike
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
                 .
                 Tab.
              
               29.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
               K.
               whence
               it
               Descends
               to
               its
               Implantation
               at
               the
               Internal
               and
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw-Bone
               ,
               opposite
               to
               the
               Termination
               of
               the
               Masseter
               :
               Either
               this
               ,
               or
               its
               partner
               Acting
               ,
               draws
               the
               Jaw
               to
               the
               contrary
               Side
               ;
               if
               both
               Act
               ,
               they
               Assist
               the
               
                 Musculi
                 Temporales
              
               ,
               and
               Masseteres
               .
            
             
               O
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Parotid
               Gland
               .
            
             
               P
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Hyothyroideus
              
               ;
               it
               Arising
               from
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               ,
               is
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Lower
               Part
               of
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               ;
               this
               draws
               the
               Larynx
               Upwards
               in
               an
               Acute
               Tone
               of
               the
               Voice
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               The
               Cricothyroideus
               .
               See
               Tab.
               24.
               
               Fig.
               5.
               
               H
               H.
               
            
             
               R
               ,
               The
               Sternothyroideus
               ending
               in
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               S
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Jugular
               Vein
               ,
               whose
               Lower
               Part
               is
               at
               some
               distance
               plac'd
               under
               that
               Part
               of
               the
               Mastoid
               Muscle
               ,
               (
               
                 App.
                 Fig.
              
               1.14
               .
               )
               which
               springs
               from
               the
               Clavicle
               ,
               which
               Part
               of
               that
               Muscle
               is
               most
               commonly
               Contracted
               in
               those
               who
               are
               said
               to
               have
               Wry
               Necks
               ,
               which
               the
               Operator
               in
               that
               Case
               ought
               to
               Observe
               ,
               least
               in
               too
               boldly
               Thrusting
               in
               his
               Knife
               to
               divide
               the
               contracted
               Part
               ,
               he
               also
               Wounds
               this
               large
               Blood-Vessel
               ,
               and
               the
               Flux
               of
               Blood
               prove
               Destructive
               to
               the
               Patient
               ;
               for
               tho'
               its
               Flux
               may
               easily
               be
               restrain'd
               outwardly
               ,
               yet
               the
               Vein
               lying
               in
               so
               large
               an
               Interstice
               ,
               defended
               by
               the
               Clavicle
               ,
               and
               Adjacent
               Muscles
               ,
               the
               Blood
               will
               nevertheless
               pass
               out
               of
               the
               Vessel
               between
               the
               Muscles
               ,
               and
               Neighbouring
               Parts
               .
               When
               such
               a
               Mischief
               is
               done
               ,
               we
               ought
               to
               divide
               the
               External
               Integuments
               largely
               ,
               and
               clear
               the
               Part
               of
               the
               Coagulated
               Blood
               ,
               and
               apply
               a
               moderate
               Compress
               on
               the
               Wounded
               Vessel
               :
               An
               Instance
               of
               which
               Practice
               we
               had
               once
               Occasion
               to
               make
               in
               a
               Wound
               between
               the
               Pectoral
               ,
               and
               Deltoid
               Muscles
               ,
               immediately
               under
               the
               Clavicula
               ,
               where
               the
               Subclavian
               Vein
               was
               Wounded
               .
               In
               such
               like
               Cases
               ,
               how
               can
               those
               Ignorant
               in
               Anatomy
               ,
               Practice
               without
               Fear
               and
               Trembling
               ?
            
             
               T
               ,
               The
               Carotid
               Artery
               .
            
             
               V
               ,
               A
               large
               Vein
               proceeding
               from
               the
               Thyroide
               Gland
               to
               the
               
                 Ramus
                 Subclavius
              
               .
            
             
               W
               ,
               The
               
                 Glandula
                 Sublingualis
              
               lying
               immediately
               under
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Mylohyoideus
              
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SIXTEENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THE
             External
             Muscles
             which
             move
             the
             Head
             as
             they
             appear
             on
             the
             Back-part
             ;
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Cucularis
             being
             taken
             off
             ,
             and
             some
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Shoulder-blade
             ,
             and
             Thorax
             ,
             rais'd
             and
             reclined
             laterally
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Splenius
               in
               Situ
            
             ;
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             
             &c.
             It
             s
             partly
             Tendinous
             ,
             and
             partly
             Fleshy
             Origination
             from
             the
             Five
             or
             Six
             Spines
             of
             the
             Superior
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ;
             the
             Lower
             Part
             of
             this
             Muscle
             appears
             in
             most
             Subjects
             distinct
             from
             its
             Superior
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Third
             ,
             Fourth
             ,
             and
             Fifth
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             as
             is
             Exprest
             at
             e
             e
             e.
             
          
           
             C
             C
             ,
             &c.
             The
             Origination
             of
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Splenius
             from
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Inferior
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             D
             D
             its
             Fleshy
             Termination
             at
             the
             
               Os
               Occipitis
            
             .
          
           
             E
             E
             ,
             The
             Splenius
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             raised
             ,
             and
             reclined
             laterally
             ;
          
           
             e
             e
             e
             ,
             It
             s
             Three
             ,
             sometimes
             Four
             ,
             Tendinous
             Terminations
             inserted
             to
             as
             many
             of
             the
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Neck
             :
             Anatomists
             have
             erred
             in
             reckoning
             the
             Splenii
             among
             the
             Proper
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             since
             they
             are
             also
             Implanted
             to
             the
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             wherefore
             they
             are
             to
             be
             esteemed
             as
             Common
             to
             the
             Head
             ,
             and
             Neck
             ,
             so
             that
             if
             either
             of
             Them
             Acts
             ,
             it
             draws
             the
             Head
             together
             with
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             to
             which
             it
             's
             inserted
             ,
             to
             that
             Side
             Backwards
             ;
             if
             they
             both
             Act
             ,
             they
             pull
             the
             Head
             directly
             Backwards
             ,
             together
             with
             those
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             .
          
           
             F
             G
             H
             ,
             &c.
             The
             
               Complexus
               Implicatus
            
             or
             Tergeminus
             ,
             on
             both
             Sides
             
               in
               Situ
            
             ;
             the
             Left
             being
             laid
             bare
             ;
          
           
             H
             H
             ,
             It
             s
             partly
             Tendinous
             ,
             and
             partly
             Fleshy
             Origin
             ,
             from
             the
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ,
             which
             becomes
             still
             more
             Fleshy
             in
             its
             Ascent
             F
             G
             ,
             and
             is
             so
             inserted
             to
             the
             
               Os
               Occipitis
            
             I
             I
             ,
             immediatly
             under
             the
             Termination
             of
             the
             Splenius
             D
             D.
             
          
           
             f
             f
             ,
             A
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Complexus
            
             ,
             Inserted
             to
             the
             
               Processus
               Mammiformis
            
             ,
             and
             is
             by
             Fallopius
             described
             as
             a
             distinct
             Muscle
             ;
             but
             to
             avoid
             Confusion
             ,
             and
             multiplying
             the
             Number
             of
             Muscles
             ,
             we
             have
             hitherto
             look'd
             on
             it
             as
             not
             perfectly
             distinct
             ,
             having
             in
             some
             Subjects
             found
             it
             inseparably
             join'd
             with
             the
             other
             Part
             of
             the
             Complexus
             .
          
           
             Either
             of
             these
             Complexi
             Acting
             ,
             draws
             the
             Head
             to
             the
             same
             Side
             Backwards
             ;
             if
             they
             both
             Act
             ,
             they
             draw
             it
             directly
             Backwards
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Serratus
               Superior
               Posticus
            
             ,
             raised
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             Rhomboides
             in
             like
             manner
             raised
             and
             reclined
             laterally
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             Upper
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Longissimus
               Dorsi
            
             ,
             and
             Sacrolumbalis
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Levator
               Scapulae
            
             ,
             partly
             appears
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SEVENTEENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             SEVERAL
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Head
             and
             Neck
             ,
             lying
             under
             those
             represented
             in
             the
             precedent
             Table
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Rectus
               Major
               Posticus
            
             Dissected
             from
             its
             Insertion
             at
             the
             Occiput
             D
             ,
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             ,
             and
             hanging
             down
             from
             its
             Origination
             at
             the
             Double
             Spine
             of
             the
             Second
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             :
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             same
             Muscle
             
               in
               Situ
            
             ,
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             .
          
           
             C
             C
             E
             ,
             The
             
               Rectus
               Minor
               Posticus
            
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             laid
             bare
             ,
             and
             remaining
             
               in
               Situ
            
             ;
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             it
             is
             partly
             hid
             by
             the
             
               Rectus
               Major
            
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             Insertions
             of
             the
             
               Recti
               Minores
            
             to
             the
             
               Os
               Occipitis
            
             ;
             they
             derive
             their
             Originations
             from
             the
             Back-part
             of
             the
             First
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             not
             from
             any
             Condyliform
             Process
             of
             that
             Vertebra
             ,
             as
             Bidloo
             discribes
             them
             ;
             the
             First
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             not
             only
             wanting
             such
             a
             Process
             ,
             but
             is
             constantly
             without
             any
             Process
             in
             that
             Part
             ,
             as
             has
             been
             taken
             Notice
             of
             by
             most
             ,
             if
             not
             all
             Anatomists
             .
          
           
             Those
             
               Recti
               Minores
            
             pull
             the
             Head
             backward
             on
             the
             First
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             from
             their
             Use
             may
             be
             call'd
             Renuentes
             or
             Nodders
             backwards
             ,
             and
             are
             Antagonists
             to
             a
             small
             Pair
             of
             Muscles
             in
             the
             Forepart
             of
             a
             Right
             Position
             also
             ;
             to
             distinguish
             which
             ,
             from
             these
             ,
             we
             call
             them
             
               Recti
               Minores
               Antici
            
             ,
             and
             Annuentes
             from
             their
             Use
             ,
             of
             which
             ,
             we
             shall
             add
             a
             Figure
             in
             our
             Appendix
             .
          
           
             F
             F
             ,
             The
             
               Obliqui
               Inferiores
            
             ;
             that
             of
             the
             Right
             Side
             remaining
             
               in
               Situ
            
             ,
             the
             Left
             being
             free'd
             from
             its
             Insertion
             and
             remaining
             at
             its
             Origin
             :
             Either
             of
             them
             ,
             arises
             from
             one
             of
             the
             Double
             Spinal
             Process's
             of
             the
             Second
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             after
             an
             Oblique
             Ascent
             ,
             is
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Transverse
             Process
             of
             the
             First
             Vertebra
             .
          
           
             When
             either
             of
             these
             Inferior
             Oblique
             Muscles
             Acts
             ,
             it
             draws
             the
             Transverse
             Process
             of
             the
             First
             Vertebra
             near
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             Second
             ,
             and
             the
             Head
             by
             Consequence
             ,
             is
             mov'd
             to
             the
             same
             Side
             ,
             and
             is
             very
             much
             assisted
             by
             the
             Mastoideus
             on
             the
             contrary
             Side
             ,
             of
             which
             in
             the
             following
             Table
             ;
             If
             both
             Act
             ,
             they
             conspire
             to
             hold
             the
             Head
             more
             stable
             .
          
           
             G
             H
             ,
             The
             
               Obliqui
               Superiores
            
             ;
             that
             of
             the
             Right
             Side
             remaining
             
               in
               Situ
            
             G
             ;
             the
             Left
             being
             cut
             from
             its
             Implantation
             at
             the
             
               Os
               Occipitis
            
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             its
             Origin
             at
             the
             Transverse
             Process
             of
             the
             First
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             :
             Tho'
             these
             Superior
             Oblique
             Muscles
             perform
             the
             same
             Office
             with
             the
             
               Recti
               Majores
            
             last
             treated
             of
             ,
             when
             the
             Head
             is
             in
             an
             Erect
             Position
             in
             pulling
             it
             directly
             backwards
             ;
             yet
             in
             regard
             it
             is
             necessary
             the
             Head
             should
             be
             mov'd
             also
             backwards
             ,
             at
             the
             same
             Time
             it
             is
             turn'd
             to
             one
             Side
             ;
             it
             is
             an
             Argument
             of
             a
             considerable
             Council
             of
             the
             Author
             of
             Nature
             ,
             to
             add
             these
             and
             the
             
               Recti
               Minores
            
             to
             Act
             at
             that
             Time
             ;
             since
             the
             
               Recti
               Majores
            
             are
             then
             so
             extended
             by
             that
             Rotation
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             that
             they
             cannot
             well
             Act.
             
          
           
             I
             I
             ,
             An
             Asperity
             of
             the
             Bone
             of
             the
             Occiput
             ,
             where
             the
             
               Musculi
               Splenii
            
             and
             Complexi
             Terminate
             .
          
           
             K
             K
             ,
             The
             Under
             Sides
             of
             the
             
               Musculi
               Complexi
            
             ,
             as
             they
             appear
             when
             rais'd
             and
             reclin'd
             laterally
             ,
             the
             greater
             Part
             of
             that
             of
             the
             Right
             Side
             being
             cut
             off
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             
               Longissimus
               Dorsi
            
             and
             Sacrolumbales
             .
          
           
             M
             N
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Spinalis
               Colli
            
             ;
             this
             arises
             Fleshy
             from
             all
             the
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             except
             the
             First
             and
             Second
             ;
             and
             is
             Inserted
             ,
             after
             an
             Oblique
             Ascending
             Progress
             ,
             to
             the
             Inferior
             Margin
             of
             the
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Second
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             here
             exprest
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             :
             This
             and
             its
             Partner
             Acting
             ,
             draw
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             directly
             backwards
             .
          
           
             O
             O
             ,
             The
             Spines
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             .
          
           
             P
             P
             ,
             The
             
               Musculi
               Interspinales
            
             ;
             of
             which
             ,
             in
             our
             Appendix
             .
          
           
             Q
             ,
             The
             
               Elevator
               Scapulae
            
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             EIGHTEENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             DIVERS
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Head
             and
             Neck
             ,
             which
             appear
             in
             the
             Forepart
             after
             the
             Lower-Jaw
             ,
             Tongue
             ,
             
               Larynx
               ,
               Aspera
               Arteria
            
             and
             Gula
             are
             removed
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             ,
             The
             
               Musculi
               Longi
               Colli
            
             ,
             which
             arise
             partly
             Tendinous
             ,
             but
             chiefly
             Fleshy
             ,
             from
             the
             Foreparts
             of
             the
             Five
             Superior
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ,
             and
             after
             a
             Dilatation
             ,
             in
             the
             Middle
             of
             their
             Progress
             to
             Fleshy
             Bellies
             ,
             they
             are
             inserted
             ,
             in
             like
             Manner
             as
             they
             begin
             ,
             to
             the
             Foreparts
             of
             all
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             :
          
           
             These
             may
             be
             called
             
               Flexores
               Colli
            
             from
             their
             Use.
             
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             The
             Three
             
               Scaleni
               in
               Situ
            
             :
             The
             First
             of
             these
             Muscles
             arises
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Forepart
             of
             the
             Second
             ,
             Third
             and
             Fourth
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             descending
             obliquely
             forewards
             ,
             becomes
             Tendinous
             at
             its
             Insertion
             to
             the
             First
             Rib
             ,
             the
             Axilary
             Nerves
             pass
             between
             this
             and
             the
             following
             :
             
               Scalenus
               Secundus
            
             ,
             in
             like
             manner
             springs
             from
             the
             Second
             ,
             Third
             ,
             Fourth
             and
             Fifth
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             is
             inserted
             to
             the
             Second
             and
             sometime
             Third
             Rib.
             
               Scalenus
               Tertius
            
             ,
             arises
             from
             the
             same
             Transverse
             Processes
             with
             the
             former
             ;
             as
             also
             from
             the
             Fifth
             and
             Sixth
             ,
             and
             is
             soon
             implanted
             into
             the
             First
             Rib.
             
          
           
             I
             I
             ,
             The
             Mas●oidei
             ,
             which
             arises
             partly
             Tendinous
             and
             partly
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Upper
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Pectoris
            
             or
             Sternum
             ,
             and
             near
             Half
             the
             Clavicula
             M
             ,
             with
             Two
             and
             sometimes
             Three
             distinct
             Beginnings
             (
             as
             in
             this
             Subject
             K
             K
             K
             )
             which
             ascend
             obliquely
             and
             joyn
             in
             Half
             their
             Progress
             ;
             composing
             a
             somewhat
             round
             ,
             thick
             ,
             Fleshy
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             marching
             over
             the
             Upper
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Elevator
               Scapulae
            
             ,
             becomes
             broader
             again
             and
             Tendinous
             ,
             at
             its
             Implantation
             to
             the
             Back-part
             of
             the
             
               Processus
               Mammillaris
            
             ,
             and
             the
             adjoyning
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Occipitis
            
             ,
             above
             the
             Implantation
             of
             Part
             of
             the
             Splenius
             .
          
           
             The
             Origin
             ,
             Progress
             ,
             and
             Insertion
             of
             this
             Muscle
             ,
             not
             being
             duly
             considered
             ,
             has
             led
             Anatomists
             into
             Errors
             concerning
             its
             Use
             :
             For
             if
             this
             Muscle
             Acts
             on
             either
             Side
             ,
             the
             Mammillary
             Process
             on
             the
             same
             Side
             ,
             is
             brought
             towards
             a
             Right
             Position
             with
             its
             Original
             at
             the
             Sternum
             ,
             and
             the
             Head
             is
             turned
             to
             the
             Contrary
             Side
             ;
             and
             this
             Action
             of
             it
             is
             commonly
             well
             exprest
             by
             Painters
             ;
             but
             should
             it
             more
             and
             more
             contract
             ,
             it
             will
             draw
             the
             Head
             to
             one
             Side
             forewards
             ,
             as
             we
             see
             in
             Wry
             Necks
             (
             commonly
             so
             called
             )
             where
             one
             of
             these
             Muscles
             remains
             contracted
             ;
             but
             if
             they
             ,
             both
             Act
             together
             ,
             the
             Head
             is
             rather
             pulled
             back
             than
             forewards
             ,
             by
             how
             much
             their
             Insertions
             are
             rather
             behind
             the
             Mammillary
             Processes
             ,
             than
             upon
             them
             ;
             which
             Processes
             are
             
               e
               Diametro
            
             opposite
             to
             the
             Articulation
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             with
             the
             First
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             .
          
           
             L
             L
             ,
             The
             
               Recti
               Interni
               Majores
               Antici
            
             ,
             by
             some
             called
             
               Par
               Rectum
               Internum
               Colli
            
             ,
             says
             Bidloo
             ;
             we
             have
             elsewhere
             called
             them
             
               Flexores
               Capitis
            
             from
             their
             Use
             :
             They
             Arise
             partly
             Fleshy
             ,
             but
             chiefly
             Tendinous
             from
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             all
             the
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             except
             the
             First
             and
             Second
             becoming
             Fleshy
             ,
             are
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Anterior
             Appendix
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Occipitis
            
             ,
             before
             the
             great
             Foramen
             that
             transmits
             the
             
               Medulla
               Oblongata
            
             .
          
           
             They
             are
             imployed
             in
             Bending
             the
             Head
             forewards
             .
          
           
             M
             M
             ,
             The
             Claviculae
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Uvula
             .
          
           
             P
             P
             ,
             The
             Bodies
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             NINETEENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1
               ,
               2.
               
            
             
               ONE
               of
               the
               Mammae
               or
               Breasts
               of
               both
               Sexes
               ;
               some
               distinguish
               them
               by
               their
               Denominations
               ,
               calling
               that
               of
               a
               Woman
               Fig.
               1.
               
               Mamma
               ,
               and
               that
               of
               a
               Man
               Fig.
               2.
               
               Mammilla
               :
               We
               commonly
               call
               them
               the
               Breasts
               ;
               but
               in
               Woman
               Dugs
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Skin
               Rais'd
               and
               Pinn'd
               out
               ,
               to
               shew
               its
               Inside
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Protuberant
               Parts
               of
               the
               Breasts
               of
               both
               Sexes
               ,
               in
               which
               that
               of
               the
               Woman
               exceeds
               that
               of
               a
               Man.
               
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Papillae
               ,
               or
               Nipples
               ;
               the
               Difference
               in
               the
               Magnitude
               of
               which
               ,
               is
               very
               Conspicuous
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Areolae
               whose
               Difference
               is
               here
               very
               well
               Exprest
               between
               the
               Man
               and
               the
               Woman
               ,
               as
               they
               appear
               to
               the
               naked
               Eye
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Glandules
               of
               the
               Mamma
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Plexu's
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               and
               Lactiferous
               Ducts
               lying
               between
               each
               Glandulous
               Protuberance
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               Divers
               
                 Sacculi
                 Adiposi
              
               lying
               on
               the
               last
               mentioned
               Vessels
               and
               Ducts
               between
               the
               Mammary
               Glandules
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Adipose
               Membrane
               Pinn'd
               out
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Papilla
               and
               Areola
               of
               a
               Womans
               Breast
               view'd
               with
               a
               Microscope
               ,
               and
               Represented
               Six
               times
               bigger
               than
               the
               Life
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Head
               or
               Top
               of
               the
               Papilla
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Its
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Orifices
               of
               the
               Lactiferous
               Vessels
               in
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Papilla
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Areola
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               It
               s
               rough
               Membrane
               .
               The
               Areola
               in
               Virgins
               is
               of
               a
               Pale
               Colour
               ,
               and
               somewhat
               hard
               ;
               in
               those
               with
               Child
               and
               give
               Suck
               ,
               it
               is
               Brown
               ;
               and
               in
               Old
               Women
               Blackish
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Papillary
               Protuberances
               of
               the
               Areola
               ;
               from
               each
               of
               which
               a
               Hair
               proceeds
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               Some
               Vestigiae
               of
               the
               Lactiferous
               Tubes
               in
               their
               Progress
               from
               the
               Mamma
               thro'
               the
               Areola
               to
               the
               Papilla
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4
            
             
               The
               Papilla
               of
               a
               Womans
               Breast
               in
               like
               manner
               Exprest
               with
               the
               Assistance
               of
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Papilla
               ,
               separated
               and
               expanded
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Divers
               Glands
               of
               the
               Papilla
               cleaving
               to
               its
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Lactiferous
               Tubes
               which
               arise
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Arteries
               within
               the
               Mamma
               ,
               in
               their
               way
               to
               their
               Orifices
               in
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Papilla
               ,
               C
               C
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Glands
               of
               the
               Papilla
               whose
               Sec●e●o●y
               Ducts
               discharge
               their
               Contents
               into
               the
               last
               mentioned
               Lactiferous
               Tubes
               .
            
             
               To
               examine
               the
               Papilla
               or
               Nipple
               ,
               the
               following
               Method
               may
               be
               Practis'd
               .
               Insert
               a
               Blow-Pipe
               into
               one
               of
               the
               largest
               of
               the
               Lactiferous
               Tubes
               on
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Nipple
               C
               C
               ,
               Fig.
               3.
               and
               after
               making
               a
               straight
               Ligature
               on
               the
               Nipple
               and
               Blow-Pipe
               ,
               you
               may
               Blow
               up
               all
               the
               Lactiferous
               Tubes
               of
               the
               Mamma
               ,
               thro'
               their
               Communications
               with
               each
               other
               ,
               before
               they
               approach
               the
               Nipple
               Figur'd
               by
               
                 Nuck
                 Adenog
                 .
                 Curiosa
              
               ,
               Fig.
               11.
               
               Fol.
               15.
               
               All
               the
               Lactiferous
               Tubes
               of
               the
               Mamma
               being
               thus
               extended
               with
               Wind
               ;
               those
               Parts
               of
               Them
               which
               help
               to
               compose
               the
               Papilla
               (
               C
               C
               ;
               )
               together
               with
               their
               Extremities
               within
               the
               Glands
               D
               D
               ,
               being
               very
               much
               extended
               ;
               make
               a
               straight
               Ligature
               on
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Nipple
               next
               the
               Breast
               ,
               then
               cut
               off
               the
               Nipple
               from
               the
               Breast
               and
               Dry
               it
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               by
               cutting
               it
               Variously
               ,
               you
               may
               easily
               examine
               its
               Structure
               :
               By
               these
               means
               the
               Nipple
               appears
               to
               be
               compos'd
               of
               a
               Double
               Series
               of
               Fibres
               ;
               the
               one
               somewhat
               Large
               ,
               the
               other
               Less
               ;
               both
               of
               a
               Net-like
               Disposition
               ,
               being
               full
               of
               Perforations
               of
               divers
               Forms
               ;
               the
               like
               of
               which
               is
               not
               to
               be
               found
               in
               other
               Parts
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               says
               Nuck
               in
               his
               Tract
               above
               mention'd
               ;
               to
               this
               add
               a
               vast
               Number
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               which
               every
               where
               adorn
               the
               Papilla
               :
               Hence
               an
               Account
               may
               be
               given
               how
               the
               Nipples
               strut
               out
               ,
               and
               are
               so
               extended
               in
               Nurses
               ,
               and
               on
               the
               contrary
               so
               Limp
               in
               those
               who
               discontinue
               giving
               Suck
               .
            
             
               I
               could
               never
               discover
               any
               Valves
               in
               the
               Lactiferous
               Vessels
               of
               the
               Mammae
               of
               Women
               ,
               which
               some
               describe
               ;
               tho'
               I
               have
               made
               Injections
               of
               divers
               Liquors
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               Mercury
               into
               them
               ;
               the
               like
               has
               been
               done
               by
               the
               Accurate
               Nuck
               ,
               who
               ,
               with
               what
               I
               have
               frequently
               observ'd
               ,
               also
               takes
               Notice
               that
               the
               Mercury
               so
               Injected
               passes
               into
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Mamma
               ,
               especially
               its
               Arteries
               .
               But
               our
               last
               nam'd
               Author
               takes
               Notice
               of
               divers
               Straitnesses
               in
               the
               Lactiferous
               Vessels
               ,
               occasion'd
               ,
               as
               He
               suspects
               ,
               by
               divers
               fatty
               hard
               Substances
               compressing
               Them
               ,
               even
               to
               that
               Degree
               ,
               that
               if
               their
               contain'd
               Milk
               becomes
               a
               little
               Thickned
               ,
               it
               there
               stops
               thro'
               the
               Narrowness
               of
               the
               Duct
               ,
               or
               requiring
               a
               longer
               Stay
               ,
               it
               becomes
               so
               Vitiated
               as
               to
               Affect
               the
               Breast
               variously
               ,
               especially
               with
               what
               are
               commonly
               call'd
               Milky
               Tumors
               ;
               in
               which
               Case
               an
               Abscess
               succeeds
               ,
               and
               the
               Milky
               Tubes
               break
               and
               discharge
               their
               Contents
               with
               the
               Pus
               .
               The
               Milk
               by
               these
               means
               flowing
               at
               the
               Ulcer
               ,
               frequently
               proves
               troublesome
               ,
               and
               hinders
               its
               Cicatrice
               or
               Closing
               ,
               as
               it
               happen'd
               in
               the
               Case
               of
               a
               Patient
               I
               not
               long
               since
               had
               under
               my
               Care
               ,
               who
               at
               the
               same
               time
               was
               infected
               with
               the
               Itch
               ,
               in
               whom
               the
               Milk
               flow'd
               from
               the
               Ulcer
               for
               at
               least
               Three
               Months
               ;
               nor
               could
               I
               find
               any
               tollerable
               Abatement
               of
               the
               Milky
               Flux
               ,
               notwithstanding
               her
               dry
               Diet
               ,
               and
               Drinking
               of
               a
               Decoction
               of
               
                 Sarsa
                 ,
                 China
                 ,
                 Guaiacum
              
               ,
               &c.
               till
               she
               had
               taken
               proper
               Remedies
               for
               the
               Itch.
               
            
             
               The
               Expert
               Nuck
               takes
               Notice
               that
               the
               Lactiferous
               Tubes
               ,
               tho'
               very
               Capacious
               in
               the
               Mamma
               ,
               yet
               are
               Straitned
               at
               their
               Orifices
               in
               the
               Papilla
               ,
               insomuch
               ,
               that
               a
               Bristle
               of
               the
               smallest
               Size
               will
               not
               enter
               them
               :
               This
               Contrivance
               ,
               He
               adds
               ,
               is
               very
               necessary
               ,
               least
               the
               separated
               Milk
               contain'd
               in
               the
               Tubes
               should
               be
               continually
               apt
               to
               run
               out
               ,
               and
               that
               it
               should
               be
               only
               so
               retain'd
               ,
               that
               the
               Nipple
               of
               the
               Mother
               when
               Suckt
               by
               the
               Infant
               may
               easily
               void
               it
               :
               This
               Structure
               is
               very
               evident
               in
               the
               Tets
               of
               Quadrupedes
               ,
               especially
               where
               their
               pendulous
               Position
               renders
               this
               Contrivance
               very
               necessary
               ;
               yet
               when
               the
               Lactiferous
               Tubes
               are
               fill'd
               with
               Milk
               ,
               it
               is
               apt
               to
               run
               out
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Inferior
               and
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Areola
               and
               Basis
               of
               the
               Papilla
               after
               Dissection
               from
               the
               Mamma
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Circumference
               of
               the
               Areola
               next
               the
               Mamma
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Mammary
               Glands
               plac'd
               under
               the
               Areola
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Lactiferous
               Tubes
               in
               their
               way
               to
               the
               Nipple
               .
            
             
               The
               Arteries
               which
               convey
               Blood
               to
               the
               Mamma
               ,
               are
               many
               small
               Branches
               ,
               Springing
               from
               the
               Mammary
               and
               Intercostal
               Arteries
               ;
               of
               these
               I
               told
               Six
               ,
               which
               afforded
               a
               Flux
               of
               Blood
               without
               Pulsation
               in
               taking
               off
               a
               Schirrous
               Breast
               Here
               I
               cannot
               omit
               recommending
               to
               Practitioners
               of
               Surgery
               the
               Tying
               of
               these
               Arteries
               ;
               the
               doing
               of
               which
               is
               so
               easie
               ,
               that
               it
               is
               hardly
               possible
               for
               One
               tollerably
               acquainted
               with
               the
               same
               Practice
               in
               taking
               off
               of
               Limbs
               ,
               to
               be
               at
               a
               loss
               in
               this
               .
               The
               Trunks
               of
               these
               Arteries
               Arising
               from
               the
               Mammary
               and
               Intercostal
               Arteries
               ,
               are
               very
               small
               ,
               as
               they
               pass
               between
               the
               Pectoral
               Muscle
               and
               Mamma
               ,
               as
               appears
               from
               the
               Blood
               not
               having
               any
               Pulsation
               as
               it
               flows
               from
               them
               when
               divided
               in
               Living
               Bodies
               ,
               except
               the
               Breast
               which
               was
               taken
               off
               is
               much
               Tumified
               .
               You
               must
               not
               expect
               to
               ful
               them
               with
               Wax
               by
               Injecting
               into
               the
               Aorta
               ;
               because
               you
               are
               oblig
               d
               to
               raise
               the
               Sternum
               in
               order
               to
               Practice
               that
               Operation
               ;
               whereby
               you
               cut
               off
               their
               Communication
               with
               the
               large
               Mammary
               Artery
               adjacent
               〈…〉
               ;
               nor
               do's
               Wax
               commonly
               pass
               the
               Intercostal
               Arteries
               so
               far
               as
               to
               reach
               these
               .
               The
               Veins
               of
               the
               Mamma
               are
               Numerous
               ,
               and
               pass
               on
               the
               Outside
               of
               the
               Mamma
               under
               the
               Skin
               only
               ,
               and
               are
               very
               Conspicuous
               in
               those
               who
               give
               Suck
               ,
               or
               have
               had
               Children
               :
               These
               Arise
               ,
               or
               are
               continued
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Arteries
               and
               composing
               many
               large
               Trunks
               which
               discharge
               their
               Blood
               into
               the
               Mammary
               and
               Intercostal
               Veins
               ;
               some
               pass
               up
               to
               the
               Subclavian
               Vein
               .
               The
               Nerves
               are
               commonly
               said
               to
               Arise
               from
               the
               Thoracick
               Nerves
               ,
               and
               pass
               thro'
               the
               Intercostal
               and
               Pectoral
               Muscles
               to
               the
               Mamma
               :
               I
               must
               confess
               I
               never
               yet
               trac'd
               Them
               ,
               nor
               do's
               Vieussemus
               Figure
               Them
               ;
               but
               in
               his
               XXIV
               .
               Table
               Expresses
               Two
               Branches
               U
               ,
               X
               ,
               Arising
               from
               the
               Sixth
               and
               Seventh
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Neck
               composing
               one
               Trunk
               ,
               which
               descends
               and
               gives
               Branches
               to
               the
               
                 Musculi
                 Serratus
                 minor
                 anticus
                 ,
                 Pectoralis
                 ,
                 Serratus
                 major
                 anticus
                 ,
              
               and
               to
               the
               Coverings
               of
               those
               Muscles
               :
               From
               the
               same
               Nervous
               Stock
               I
               am
               apt
               to
               think
               may
               also
               Spring
               some
               Branches
               passing
               to
               the
               Mamma
               ,
               whence
               those
               painful
               Communications
               between
               the
               Mamma
               and
               Axilla
               may
               proceed
               .
               Besides
               these
               Vessels
               the
               Lymphe-Ducts
               of
               the
               Mamma
               are
               also
               mention'd
               ;
               I
               must
               confess
               I
               never
               yet
               saw
               these
               Ducts
               Arising
               from
               the
               Mamma
               ,
               yet
               I
               can't
               doubt
               of
               their
               Existence
               on
               that
               Part
               ,
               when
               I
               reflect
               on
               what
               Use
               they
               are
               of
               in
               General
               ,
               in
               the
               Animal
               Oeconomy
               ,
               of
               which
               elsewere
               .
               The
               Communication
               between
               the
               Lactiferous
               Tubes
               and
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               is
               demonstrated
               in
               the
               above
               mention'd
               Experiment
               ,
               by
               Injecting
               Mercury
               into
               the
               Former
               ,
               and
               its
               Running
               out
               again
               by
               the
               Later
               .
               The
               Opinion
               that
               the
               Chyle
               is
               transmitted
               to
               the
               Mamma
               immediately
               from
               the
               Thoracick
               Duct
               is
               now
               altogether
               Exploded
               ,
               and
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Experiment
               seems
               to
               evince
               the
               Milk
               to
               be
               deriv'd
               immediately
               from
               the
               Blood
               within
               the
               Mamma
               .
               It
               is
               evident
               ,
               the
               Milk
               is
               not
               Transparent
               like
               other
               Liquors
               separated
               from
               the
               Blood
               ,
               as
               the
               
                 Saliva
                 ,
                 Urine
                 ,
                 Bile
              
               ,
               &c.
               but
               by
               a
               Microscope
               it
               appears
               compos'd
               of
               Globules
               not
               unlike
               those
               of
               the
               Blood
               ,
               except
               that
               the
               Globules
               of
               the
               Blood
               are
               somewhat
               larger
               than
               those
               of
               Milk.
               
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             TWENTIETH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             DIVERS
             Muscles
             on
             the
             Superior
             and
             Fore-Part
             of
             the
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Subclavius
               in
               Situ
            
             ;
             when
             free'd
             from
             the
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Body
             and
             left
             to
             the
             Clavicula
             ;
             (
             see
             Tab.
             66.
             
             P.
             )
             It
             ariseth
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             Half
             the
             Clavicula
             next
             its
             Connexion
             to
             the
             
               Spina
               Scapulae
            
             ,
             whence
             its
             Fibres
             Descend
             Obliquely
             Forewards
             ,
             to
             it
             s
             partly
             Tendinous
             and
             partly
             Fleshy
             Implantation
             at
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             First
             Rib
             next
             the
             Sternum
             .
          
           
             The
             Office
             of
             this
             Subclavian
             Muscle
             is
             to
             draw
             up
             the
             First
             Rib
             ,
             and
             consequently
             the
             rest
             in
             Inspiration
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Clavicula
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             Cartilaginous
             Ending
             of
             the
             First
             Rib
             at
             the
             Sternum
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Serratus
               Major
               Anticus
               in
               Situ
            
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             ;
             It
             ariseth
             Broad
             and
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             whole
             
               Basis
               Scapulae
               ,
               Tab.
            
             65.
             
             G
             G
             ,
             and
             running
             on
             the
             
               Subscapularis
               Tab.
               ib.
            
             E
             ,
             becomes
             broader
             and
             thicker
             as
             it
             passes
             Forewards
             to
             its
             Fleshy
             Insertions
             at
             the
             Eight
             Superior
             Ribs
             Laterally
             E
             E
             &c.
             by
             divers
             distinct
             Portions
             by
             some
             called
             Digituli
             ;
             of
             which
             ,
             the
             Three
             Inferior
             ,
             are
             Indented
             with
             the
             
               Musculus
               Obliquus
               Descendens
               Abdominis
            
             ,
             as
             is
             here
             Exprest
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             ;
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             the
             
               Serratus
               Major
               Anticus
            
             E
             F
             is
             raised
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Obliquus
               Descendens
            
             on
             the
             Lest
             Side
             Indented
             with
             the
             last
             mentioned
             Serratus
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             
               Pectoralis
               in
               Situ
            
             ,
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             ;
             this
             Muscle
             has
             a
             Broad
             Semicircular
             Fleshy
             Beginning
             ;
             above
             from
             near
             Half
             the
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             the
             Clavicula
             B
             ;
             below
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Pectoris
            
             L
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Cartilaginous
             Endings
             of
             the
             Six
             Superior
             Ribs
             M
             M
             ,
             and
             from
             the
             Bony
             Part
             of
             the
             Seventh
             Rib
             ,
             it
             hath
             sometimes
             a
             distinct
             Fasciculus
             of
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             which
             I
             have
             frequently
             seen
             Confounded
             with
             the
             
               Obliquus
               Descendens
            
             ;
             hence
             it
             passeth
             Transversely
             over
             the
             Upper-Part
             of
             the
             
               Biceps
               Cubiti
            
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             made
             into
             a
             short
             and
             broad
             strong
             Tendon
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Superior
             and
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             above
             the
             Termination
             of
             the
             Deltoides
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Right
             Pectoral
             Muscle
             rais'd
             ,
             where
             the
             Decussation
             of
             its
             Fibres
             near
             its
             Insertion
             is
             well
             Exprest
             :
             This
             crossing
             of
             its
             Fibres
             is
             a
             Contrivance
             in
             Nature
             to
             render
             its
             Action
             more
             Vigorous
             ;
             the
             Fibres
             of
             its
             Upper-Part
             Descending
             to
             the
             Lower-Part
             of
             its
             Implantation
             to
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             its
             Lower-Part
             Ascend
             to
             the
             Superior
             ;
             crossing
             each
             other
             with
             Acute
             Angles
             .
             This
             Muscle
             is
             call'd
             
               Adductor
               Humeri
            
             ;
             when
             it
             Acts
             ,
             it
             moves
             the
             Arm
             variously
             according
             to
             the
             Operation
             of
             its
             several
             Series
             of
             Fibres
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Serratus
               Minor
               Anticus
            
             ,
             raised
             from
             its
             Implantation
             at
             the
             Bony
             Parts
             of
             the
             Second
             ,
             Third
             ,
             Fourth
             and
             Fifth
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             its
             Origin
             at
             the
             
               Processus
               Carocoides
               Scapulae
            
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Pectoris
            
             or
             Sternum
             .
          
           
             M
             M
             ,
             The
             Cartilaginous
             Endings
             of
             the
             Superior
             Ribs
             Connexed
             to
             the
             Sternum
             .
          
           
             N
             N
             ,
             The
             
               Deltoides
               .
               Vide
               Tab.
            
             66.
             
             XX.
             
          
           
             O
             O
             ,
             The
             Superior
             Parts
             of
             the
             
               Recti
               Abdominis
               .
               Vide
               Tab.
            
             32
             ,
             Fig.
             1.
             
             N
             O
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             P
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Coracobrachialis
               .
               Vide
               Tab.
            
             65.
             
             F.
             
          
           
             Q
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Biceps
               Cubiti
               .
               Tab.
               ib.
            
             1.
             
          
        
         
         
         
         
         
           
           
             THE
             TWENTY-FIRST
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             SHEWS
             the
             Sternum
             Rais'd
             ,
             and
             the
             Principal
             Organs
             contain'd
             in
             the
             Thorax
             partly
             in
             View
             .
             A
             ,
             The
             Inner-Face
             of
             the
             Sternum
             or
             
               Os
               Pectoris
            
             .
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             The
             Cartilages
             of
             the
             True
             Ribs
             ,
             cut
             from
             the
             Bony
             Extremities
             of
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Connexions
             to
             the
             Sternum
             :
             Upon
             these
             Cartilages
             are
             plac'd
             the
             
               Musculi
               Triangulares
            
             ;
             which
             Muscles
             Arise
             from
             the
             Inferior
             and
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             Sternum
             ,
             and
             after
             an
             Oblique
             Progress
             are
             inserted
             to
             the
             Bony
             Endings
             of
             the
             Fourth
             ,
             Fifth
             ,
             Sixth
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             Seventh
             ,
             and
             Eight
             Ribs
             .
             These
             Triangular
             Muscles
             scarcely
             appear
             in
             Macilent
             Subjects
             ,
             as
             is
             Exprest
             in
             this
             Figure
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             Mediastinum
             free'd
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Pectoris
            
             ,
             where
             ,
             in
             Humane
             Bodies
             it
             appears
             Double
             ,
             being
             a
             Continuation
             of
             the
             Pleura
             from
             both
             Sides
             the
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ;
             whence
             it
             Descends
             and
             firmly
             Cleaves
             to
             the
             Pericardium
             ,
             dividing
             the
             Thorax
             into
             Two
             Cavities
             ,
             and
             the
             Right
             Lobes
             of
             the
             Lungs
             from
             the
             Left
             :
             In
             this
             Progress
             of
             the
             Mediastinum
             it
             parts
             with
             One
             of
             its
             Laminae
             to
             cover
             the
             large
             Blood-Vessels
             within
             the
             Thorax
             .
             A
             Triangular
             Interstice
             is
             fram'd
             immediately
             under
             the
             Sternum
             at
             the
             Approach
             of
             the
             Pleura
             ,
             from
             each
             Side
             as
             it
             Descends
             to
             compose
             the
             Mediastinum
             :
             Nor
             is
             this
             Interstice
             an
             empty
             Space
             as
             it
             is
             commonly
             suppos'd
             ,
             but
             is
             interwoven
             with
             various
             Orders
             of
             Fibres
             ,
             framing
             Loculi
             or
             little
             Cells
             .
             
               Real
               .
               Columbus
            
             Lib.
             xi
             .
             Cap.
             iii.
             Proposes
             the
             letting
             out
             of
             Pus
             ,
             collected
             in
             this
             Interstice
             by
             Perforating
             the
             Sternum
             .
             As
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Mediastinum
             plainly
             appears
             a
             Continuation
             of
             the
             
             Pleura
             ●
             so
             its
             Back-part
             is
             evidently
             a
             Continuation
             of
             the
             same
             Membrane
             ,
             as
             it
             advances
             towards
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Back
             .
             In
             Dissecting
             a
             Morbid
             Body
             ,
             I
             found
             the
             Right
             Side
             of
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Thorax
             so
             extended
             with
             a
             Serous
             Humor
             ,
             as
             its
             External
             Appearance
             ,
             (
             especially
             at
             the
             Cartilaginous
             Endings
             of
             the
             True
             Ribs
             ,
             )
             was
             Prominent
             :
             Nor
             would
             the
             least
             Portion
             of
             the
             Lungs
             on
             the
             same
             Side
             Swim
             in
             common
             Water
             ,
             but
             Sunk
             to
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Vessel
             :
             In
             this
             Subject
             I
             could
             not
             find
             any
             Part
             of
             the
             Hydropick
             or
             Serous
             Humor
             in
             the
             other
             Side
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ;
             but
             the
             Lungs
             on
             that
             Side
             in
             no
             very
             ill
             State.
             By
             this
             ,
             we
             may
             be
             assur'd
             that
             the
             Mediastinum
             adequately
             divides
             the
             Right
             Side
             of
             the
             Thorax
             from
             the
             Left.
             The
             Mediastinum
             also
             supports
             the
             Pericardium
             ,
             leaft
             its
             Flaccidity
             impede
             the
             Systole
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             sustains
             the
             Trunks
             of
             the
             Nerves
             of
             the
             
               Par
               Vagum
            
             in
             their
             Progress
             thro'
             the
             Thorax
             .
             The
             Diaphragm
             is
             also
             said
             to
             be
             suspended
             by
             the
             Mediastinum
             ,
             leaft
             the
             Liver
             ,
             to
             whose
             Lower-Side
             it
             's
             Connexed
             ,
             should
             become
             Insupportable
             .
             The
             Mediastinum
             receives
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Mammary
             and
             Intercostal
             Branches
             ;
             it
             has
             Two
             large
             Veins
             which
             discharge
             their
             Blood
             into
             the
             Subclavian
             and
             Neighbouring
             Trunks
             :
             Its
             Nerves
             are
             said
             to
             Spring
             from
             the
             Eighth
             Pair
             .
             The
             Lymphe-Ducts
             of
             the
             Mediastinum
             pass
             towards
             the
             Thymus
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             Pericardium
             or
             
               Capsula
               Cordis
            
             Open'd
             and
             Pinn'd
             up
             .
             The
             Pericardium
             Arises
             from
             the
             large
             Vessels
             at
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             and
             seems
             to
             be
             compos'd
             of
             a
             Continuation
             of
             the
             Pleura
             or
             Mediastinum
             .
             It
             adheres
             to
             the
             Diaphragm
             below
             ,
             and
             laterally
             to
             the
             Mediastinum
             .
             It
             has
             Blood-Vessels
             from
             the
             Diaphragm
             and
             Mammary-Vessels
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             Accurate
             Ruysch
             in
             his
             lately
             publish'd
             Epistles
             :
             The
             Capillary
             Extremities
             of
             these
             Blood-Vessels
             are
             very
             Numerous
             ,
             as
             will
             appear
             when
             Injected
             with
             Mercury
             .
             There
             are
             divers
             Lymphe-Ducts
             on
             the
             Pericardium
             ,
             which
             convey
             the
             Lympha
             to
             the
             Thoracick-Duct
             .
             The
             Glands
             ,
             which
             are
             in
             the
             Pericardium
             and
             at
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             which
             separate
             that
             Humor
             imploy'd
             in
             Moistening
             the
             Inside
             of
             that
             Membrane
             and
             Surface
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             are
             not
             to
             be
             discover'd
             by
             the
             naked
             Eye
             in
             ordinary
             Dissections
             ;
             no
             more
             than
             those
             on
             the
             Inside
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             and
             Surface
             of
             the
             Intestines
             ,
             which
             afford
             a
             Humor
             to
             Lubricate
             those
             Parts
             ;
             but
             when
             either
             of
             these
             Parts
             are
             Diseased
             so
             that
             those
             Glands
             are
             Affected
             ,
             their
             Existence
             then
             is
             Demonstrable
             ;
             as
             appear'd
             in
             the
             Pericardium
             of
             an
             Infant
             I
             lately
             Dissected
             ,
             where
             the
             Neighbouring
             Parts
             and
             Pericardium
             its
             self
             were
             Apostumated
             .
             In
             the
             Pericardiums
             of
             this
             Subject
             we
             found
             Two
             or
             Three
             Ounces
             of
             Purulent
             Matter
             in
             place
             of
             the
             Serous
             Humor
             ;
             and
             the
             External
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Heart
             so
             loosned
             ,
             as
             its
             Surface
             appear'd
             Villous
             ;
             nor
             did
             any
             Fat
             appear
             on
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
             In
             an
             Adult
             Person
             who
             Died
             suddenly
             I
             found
             the
             Pericardium
             somewhat
             Thickned
             and
             no
             Humor
             contain'd
             in
             it
             ;
             but
             in
             Two
             ,
             or
             Three
             Places
             cleaving
             to
             the
             Heart
             especially
             near
             its
             Basis
             ,
             and
             the
             Heart
             it self
             intirely
             cover'd
             with
             Fat
             ;
             The
             Use
             of
             the
             Pericardium
             is
             to
             defend
             the
             Heart
             in
             its
             Systole
             from
             the
             Neighbouring
             Parts
             ,
             and
             to
             contain
             a
             Humor
             to
             Moisten
             the
             External
             Surface
             of
             the
             Heart
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             Heart
             lying
             within
             the
             Pericardium
             .
          
           
             F
             F
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             Lungs
             on
             both
             Sides
             the
             
               Thorax
               in
               Situ
            
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             
               Thymus
               in
               Situ
            
             .
             The
             Magnitude
             of
             the
             Thymas
             varies
             according
             to
             the
             Age
             of
             the
             Body
             ;
             in
             a
             Faetus
             Two
             Months
             after
             Conception
             it
             is
             larger
             in
             Proportion
             to
             the
             Bulk
             of
             the
             Body
             than
             in
             One
             of
             Five
             or
             Six
             Months
             :
             In
             a
             Faetus
             of
             Nine
             Months
             it
             almost
             fills
             the
             Interstice
             which
             the
             Lungs
             after
             the
             Birth
             begin
             to
             take
             up
             in
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Thorax
             .
             The
             Thymus
             after
             the
             Birth
             gradually
             decreases
             ,
             except
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Cavity
             in
             the
             Thorax
             is
             Capacious
             enough
             for
             its
             Reception
             ,
             as
             appear'd
             in
             an
             Anatomical
             Subject
             I
             lately
             Dissected
             of
             Thirty
             Years
             of
             Age
             ,
             in
             whom
             the
             Thymus
             was
             very
             large
             :
             I
             must
             confess
             I
             never
             yet
             met
             with
             a
             Subject
             ,
             tho
             never
             so
             Old
             ,
             in
             whom
             the
             Thymus
             was
             wanting
             .
             In
             those
             Bodi●●
             the
             Thymus
             is
             less
             than
             ordinary
             ,
             we
             find
             the
             Subclavian
             Glands
             ,
             those
             of
             the
             Internal
             Jugular
             Veins
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Glandule
               Thyraidam
            
             larger
             ;
             as
             they
             lately
             appear'd
             in
             a
             Boy
             of
             about
             Eight
             Years
             of
             Age.
             In
             Women
             the
             Thymus
             and
             Thyroid
             Glands
             are
             larger
             than
             in
             Men
             ,
             but
             the
             Subclavian
             Glands
             are
             less
             ;
             by
             reason
             the
             Claviculae
             in
             Women
             are
             straight
             and
             shorter
             than
             those
             of
             Men
             ;
             whence
             a
             much
             less
             Interstice
             is
             frain'd
             for
             entertaining
             those
             Glands
             .
             I
             have
             more
             than
             once
             found
             the
             Lymphe-Ducts
             fill'd
             with
             Wax
             ,
             which
             Arise
             from
             the
             Thymus
             ,
             and
             empty
             themselves
             into
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Thoracick-Duct
             ;
             by
             Injecting
             that
             Duct
             by
             the
             
               Vesica
               Chyli
            
             :
             See
             
               App.
               Fig.
            
             12.
             
             D.
             
          
           
             From
             what
             has
             been
             abovesaid
             ,
             it
             appears
             the
             Thymus
             bears
             a
             Proportion
             to
             the
             Head
             ;
             whether
             in
             the
             Faetus
             or
             in
             Bodies
             before
             they
             become
             Adult
             ,
             which
             we
             conceive
             ,
             is
             in
             order
             to
             receive
             a
             Proportionable
             Quantity
             of
             Lympha
             ,
             deriv'd
             from
             thence
             :
             And
             as
             the
             Subclavian
             Glands
             of
             Women
             are
             less
             than
             those
             of
             Men
             ;
             so
             the
             Thyroide
             Glands
             and
             Thymus
             are
             larger
             :
             Hence
             also
             it
             appears
             the
             Thymus
             is
             a
             Lymphatick
             Gland
             ,
             and
             Varies
             its
             Magnitude
             according
             to
             the
             Quantity
             of
             the
             Lympha
             ,
             that
             is
             necessarily
             transmitted
             thro'
             it
             from
             the
             Superior
             Parts
             ;
             or
             as
             the
             Neighbouring
             Lymphatick
             Glands
             do
             more
             or
             less
             transmit
             their
             Lympha
             to
             it
             :
             Besides
             this
             common
             Office
             of
             the
             Thymus
             ,
             whether
             in
             the
             Faetus
             or
             Adult
             ;
             it
             has
             another
             Use
             which
             was
             first
             suggested
             to
             Me
             by
             Injecting
             a
             Liquid
             into
             the
             Thoracick-Duct
             ;
             when
             finding
             it
             not
             only
             fill
             the
             Lymphe-Ducts
             of
             the
             Thymus
             ,
             but
             the
             Thymus
             it self
             was
             Extended
             with
             it
             :
             The
             like
             Observation
             ,
             I
             since
             found
             ,
             was
             made
             by
             the
             Expert
             Anatomist
             Dr.
             Tyson
             ,
             some
             Time
             since
             ;
             whence
             I
             conceive
             ,
             the
             Thymus
             and
             its
             Lymphe-Ducts
             are
             Diverticula
             to
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             when
             too
             great
             a
             Quantity
             is
             pressing
             forewards
             towards
             the
             Subclavian
             Vein
             .
             I
             know
             it
             may
             be
             Objected
             that
             the
             Valves
             of
             the
             Lymphe-Ducts
             oppose
             this
             contrary
             Course
             of
             Liquours
             in
             them
             ;
             but
             repeated
             Observations
             convince
             me
             ,
             that
             not
             only
             these
             Lymphe-Ducts
             of
             the
             Thymus
             ,
             which
             are
             large
             and
             have
             very
             few
             if
             any
             Valves
             ,
             (
             as
             appears
             by
             their
             being
             Injected
             with
             Wax
             )
             but
             those
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             and
             their
             Glands
             from
             whence
             they
             Arise
             ,
             are
             frequently
             fill'd
             with
             Chyle
             ,
             when
             no
             Compress
             is
             made
             on
             the
             Thoracick-Duct
             .
             Hence
             it
             is
             ,
             a
             Milky
             Liquor
             has
             been
             commonly
             found
             in
             the
             Thymus
             ,
             but
             more
             frequent
             in
             that
             of
             a
             P●tus
             than
             i●
             an
             Adult
             ;
             and
             that
             not
             only
             because
             the
             Thymus
             and
             its
             Lymphe-Ducts
             are
             much
             larger
             Proportionably
             in
             the
             former
             State
             or
             Faetus
             ,
             but
             the
             bended
             Position
             of
             the
             Thoracick-Duct
             of
             the
             
               Fetus
               in
               Vter●
            
             ,
             renders
             the
             Ascent
             of
             the
             Chyle
             by
             that
             Duct
             more
             liable
             to
             Regurgitate
             by
             the
             Lymphe-Ducts
             of
             the
             Thymus
             .
          
           
             H
             H
             ,
             The
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Diaphragma
             free'd
             from
             the
             Cartilaginous
             Endings
             of
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             Pinn'd
             up
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             TWENTY-SECOND
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               Heart
               with
               Parts
               of
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               great
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Heart
               ;
               a
               Portion
               of
               which
               is
               Rais'd
               and
               hangs
               Down
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Left
               Side
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               adorn'd
               with
               in
               Coronary
               Vessels
               .
            
             
               C
               ψ
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Right
               Auricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Left
               Auricle
               on
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Cone
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               which
               conveys
               the
               Refluent
               Blood
               from
               the
               whole
               Field
               of
               the
               Body
               into
               the
               Right
               Auricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               when
               the
               Heart
               i●
               i●
               Systole
               ;
               whence
               the
               Blood
               is
               again
               transmitted
               into
               the
               Right
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               when
               it
               is
               in
               Diastole
               :
               So
               that
               when
               the
               Auricles
               of
               the
               Heart
               are
               in
               Diastole
               or
               Relaxation
               ,
               they
               are
               fill'd
               with
               Blood
               ,
               and
               the
               Heart
               it self
               is
               in
               Systole
               or
               Contraction
               ,
               and
               
                 Vice
                 versa
              
               when
               the
               Heart
               is
               in
               Diastole
               ,
               the
               Auricles
               are
               in
               Systole
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Arteria
                 Pulmonalis
              
               or
               
                 Vena
                 Arteriosa
              
               which
               carries
               the
               Blood
               from
               the
               Right
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               into
               the
               Lungs
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Vena
                 Pulmonica
              
               or
               
                 Arteria
                 Venosa
              
               which
               conveys
               the
               Refluent
               Blood
               from
               the
               Lungs
               into
               the
               Left
               Auricle
               and
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               not
               unlike
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               Arising
               out
               of
               the
               Left
               Ventricle
               ,
               which
               conveys
               the
               Mass
               of
               Blood
               from
               the
               Heart
               thro'
               the
               Field
               of
               the
               Body
               ;
               from
               whose
               capillary
               Extremities
               the
               Veins
               are
               continued
               ,
               as
               appears
               by
               a
               Microscope
               in
               the
               transparent
               Parts
               of
               living
               Animals
               :
               See
               
                 App.
                 Fig.
              
               4.
               and
               5.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Heart
               divested
               of
               its
               External
               Membrane
               and
               Carnous
               Fibres
               after
               Boyling
               ;
               so
               that
               the
               Disposition
               of
               the
               Subjacent
               Fibres
               may
               appear
               .
               The
               way
               of
               preparing
               the
               Heart
               to
               exhibit
               this
               Disposition
               of
               its
               Fibres
               ,
               may
               be
               practis'd
               after
               the
               following
               Manner
               .
               The
               Heart
               with
               Portions
               of
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               large
               Blood-Vessels
               being
               taken
               off
               ;
               the
               Blood
               as
               well
               within
               its
               Ventricles
               as
               Blood-Vessels
               being
               evacuated
               ,
               then
               with
               Tow
               ,
               or
               Pieces
               of
               Rags
               ,
               fill
               the
               Ventricles
               ,
               Auricles
               ,
               and
               large
               Vessels
               on
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Heart
               ;
               the
               Mouths
               of
               the
               large
               Blood-Vessels
               being
               stitch'd
               up
               ,
               least
               their
               Contents
               should
               be
               Extruded
               by
               the
               Contraction
               of
               the
               Heart
               in
               Boyling
               .
               This
               done
               ,
               Boyl
               it
               according
               to
               its
               Bulk
               ;
               if
               it
               is
               the
               Heart
               of
               an
               Ox
               ,
               &c.
               
               Boyl
               it
               Four
               or
               Five
               Hours
               ;
               if
               of
               a
               Man
               ,
               One
               or
               Two.
               
            
             
               N.
               B.
               
                 This
                 Figure
                 is
                 Printed
                 reverst
              
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               A
               Sinus
               plac'd
               between
               both
               Ventricles
               ,
               in
               which
               a
               large
               Trunk
               of
               one
               of
               the
               Coronary
               Arteries
               is
               convey'd
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Cochleated
               or
               Oblique
               descending
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Left
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               External
               and
               Oblique
               descending
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Right
               Ventricle
               ;
               which
               decussate
               the
               former
               or
               Subjacent
               Fibres
               in
               Acute
               Angles
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Pulmonalis
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Aorta
               .
            
             
               ee
               ,
               The
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Coronary
               Arteries
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Right
               Auricle
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Left.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Sinus
               above
               mention'd
               between
               the
               Ventricles
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Tortuous
               Disposition
               of
               the
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Right
               Ventricle
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               Those
               of
               the
               Left.
               
            
             
               The
               Heart
               consists
               chiefly
               of
               divers
               Strata
               of
               Oblique
               descending
               Fibres
               ;
               the
               External
               passing
               more
               straight
               or
               less
               Contorted
               than
               the
               Internal
               ;
               whence
               it
               happens
               that
               the
               External
               Fibres
               are
               seen
               to
               Decussate
               the
               Internal
               with
               Acute
               Angles
               ;
               the
               former
               Arising
               from
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Heart
               at
               the
               Roots
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               and
               End
               in
               the
               Cone
               ;
               the
               later
               Arise
               from
               the
               same
               Place
               ,
               and
               Terminate
               either
               in
               the
               
                 '
                 Parietes
              
               of
               the
               Ventricles
               or
               
                 Columnae
                 Carneae
              
               Fig.
               7.
               g
               g
               ,
               from
               which
               divers
               Tenditious
               Filaments
               are
               continued
               to
               the
               Lower-parts
               of
               the
               Tricuspid
               and
               Mitral
               Valves
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Aorta
               divided
               between
               its
               Origin
               from
               the
               Heart
               and
               Valves
               ,
               and
               reclin'd
               to
               One
               Side
               ,
               hanging
               by
               its
               Two●
               Coronary
               Arteries
               ;
               Exprest
               Fig.
               2.
               e
               e.
               
            
             
               e
               e
               ,
               The
               Three
               Semilunary
               Valves
               of
               the
               Aorta
               ,
               which
               hinder
               a
               Return
               of
               the
               Blood
               into
               the
               Left
               Ventricle
               ,
               when
               the
               Heart
               is
               in
               Diastole
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Concourse
               of
               Fibres
               near
               the
               Cone
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               as
               they
               appear
               after
               a
               Transverse
               Section
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               Some
               Fasciculi
               of
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Left
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               The
               Two
               Tendinous
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Oblique
               Fleshy
               Fibres
               ,
               Exprest
               Fig.
               2
               ,
               3.
               
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Fleshy
               Parts
               of
               the
               Fibres
               between
               the
               Two
               Tendons
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Collateral
               Fibres
               which
               appear
               in
               dividing
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Fasciculi
               :
               Nor
               are
               these
               any
               other
               than
               Parts
               of
               the
               Fibres
               of
               the
               divided
               Fasciculus
               ,
               and
               lay
               Parallel
               to
               each
               other
               according
               to
               their
               length
               .
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               and
               Nerves
               passing
               between
               these
               Fibres
               make
               a
               Reticular
               Appearance
               ,
               when
               divided
               ,
               as
               here
               Exprest
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               The
               Right
               Auricle
               ,
               and
               Part
               of
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Right
               Auricle
               expanded
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Three
               Tricuspid
               Valves
               ;
               Two
               of
               which
               ,
               are
               extended
               by
               Pinning
               out
               their
               Tendons
               ,
               deriv'd
               from
               the
               
                 Columnae
                 Carneae
              
               :
               See
               Fig.
               7.
               g
               g
               ,
               Fig.
               10.
               
               A
               ,
               Inferior
               .
               The
               Office
               of
               the
               Auricles
               is
               to
               receive
               Part
               of
               the
               Refluent
               Blood
               whilst
               the
               Heart
               is
               in
               Systole
               ,
               and
               to
               discharge
               that
               Blood
               again
               into
               the
               Ventricles
               of
               the
               Heart
               when
               it
               is
               in
               Diastole
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               Auricles
               of
               the
               Heart
               seem
               as
               Diverticula
               to
               the
               Blood
               in
               its
               passing
               into
               its
               Ventricles
               ;
               else
               a
               Repercussion
               of
               the
               Blood
               in
               the
               Veins
               would
               necessarily
               happen
               in
               the
               Systole
               of
               the
               Heart
               ;
               which
               would
               prevent
               the
               regular
               Influx
               of
               the
               Blood
               to
               the
               Ventricles
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               The
               Heart
               with
               its
               Left
               Ventricle
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Inside
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Pulmonalis
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Aorta
               in
               like
               manner
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Septum
                 Cordis
              
               ,
               which
               divides
               the
               Right
               Ventricle
               from
               the
               Left.
               
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Left
               Auricle
               intire
               which
               in
               Humane
               Bodies
               is
               very
               little
               ,
               as
               appears
               by
               this
               Figure
               ;
               and
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Pulmonick
               Vein
               very
               large
               .
            
             
               d
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Arterìa
                 Pulmonica
              
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               e
               e
               ,
               Two
               of
               the
               Three
               Semilunary
               Valves
               at
               the
               Beginning
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               ;
               which
               hinder
               the
               Reflux
               of
               the
               Blood
               when
               the
               Heart
               is
               in
               Diastole
               ;
               in
               which
               Action
               they
               are
               Exprest
               ,
               Fig.
               3.
               e
               e.
               
            
             
               f
               f
               ,
               The
               Two
               Mitral
               Valves
               in
               the
               Pulmonick
               Vein
               ,
               which
               prevent
               the
               Blood
               repassing
               that
               Vessel
               when
               the
               Heart
               is
               in
               Systole
               .
            
             
               g
               g
               ,
               The
               
                 Carneae
                 Columnae
              
               compos'd
               of
               Muscular
               Fibres
               ,
               deriv'd
               from
               those
               of
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               whençe
               divers
               small
               Tendinous
               Filaments
               do
               Arise
               ,
               and
               are
               faltned
               to
               the
               Inferior
               Limbus
               of
               the
               Mitral
               Valves
               ;
               by
               which
               means
               those
               Valves
               are
               drawn
               down
               towards
               the
               Cone
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               and
               prevent
               the
               Blood
               from
               passing
               out
               again
               that
               way
               when
               the
               Heart
               is
               in
               Systole
               .
               I
               know
               Dr.
               Lower
               in
               his
               Accurate
               Book
               
                 De
                 Corde
              
               ,
               Supposes
               that
               these
               Mitral
               and
               Tricuspid
               Valves
               are
               Relax'd
               in
               the
               Systole
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               and
               by
               their
               Rising
               up
               stop
               up
               the
               Passages
               of
               the
               Veins
               :
               But
               if
               the
               Structure
               of
               the
               Heart
               and
               these
               Parts
               are
               Attentively
               consider'd
               in
               a
               large
               Animal
               ,
               as
               in
               an
               Ox
               ,
               &c.
               it
               will
               appear
               reasonable
               to
               conceive
               that
               these
               Mitral
               and
               Tricuspid
               Valves
               are
               rather
               drawn
               down
               than
               suffer
               Extrusion
               upwards
               :
               nor
               need
               Nature
               have
               been
               at
               any
               trouble
               in
               making
               those
               Valves
               at
               the
               Orifices
               of
               the
               Veins
               ,
               any
               otherwise
               than
               the
               Reverse
               of
               the
               Semilunary
               Valves
               of
               Arteries
               ;
               if
               as
               the
               Expert
               
                 Dr.
                 Lower
              
               Supposes
               they
               are
               driven
               up
               and
               Extended
               like
               a
               Sail
               with
               Wind
               when
               the
               Heart
               is
               in
               Systole
               ;
               but
               by
               fastening
               those
               Tendinous
               Fibres
               to
               the
               Lower-parts
               of
               those
               Tricuspid
               and
               Mitral
               Valves
               ;
               which
               ,
               are
               of
               a
               Conical
               Figure
               ,
               seems
               to
               me
               to
               be
               an
               Argument
               that
               they
               cannot
               suffer
               such
               Extension
               upwards
               ,
               without
               letting
               some
               Part
               of
               the
               Blood
               repass
               them
               in
               the
               Systole
               of
               the
               Heart
               :
               Besides
               there
               must
               constantly
               a
               considerable
               Part
               of
               the
               Blood
               remain
               in
               the
               Ventricles
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               if
               those
               Valves
               are
               so
               dispos'd
               in
               its
               Systole
               ;
               which
               I
               think
               the
               Dr.
               himself
               seems
               no
               where
               to
               conceive
               ;
               but
               on
               the
               contrary
               the
               Ventricles
               of
               the
               Heart
               are
               with
               great
               Strength
               adequately
               Comprest
               in
               it's
               Systole
               ,
               for
               which
               End
               the
               Insides
               of
               its
               Ventricles
               are
               compos'd
               of
               divers
               Fleshy
               Columns
               ;
               between
               which
               divers
               Intersticia
               necessarily
               Result
               ,
               (
               that
               are
               elegantly
               Exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               ,
               )
               by
               which
               means
               ,
               the
               Ventricles
               are
               more
               exactly
               Closed
               in
               their
               Systole
               ,
               than
               they
               could
               have
               been
               ,
               had
               they
               been
               smooth
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               8.
               
            
             
               The
               Heart
               with
               its
               Right
               Ventricle
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Inside
               of
               the
               Right
               Auricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               as
               it
               appears
               when
               Open'd
               and
               Pinn'd
               out
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Left
               Auricle
               Intire
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Coronary
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Heart
               ;
               from
               these
               ,
               particularly
               from
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               Spring
               those
               of
               the
               Auricles
               and
               large
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Heart
               ;
               as
               the
               Accurate
               Ruysch
               describes
               them
               in
               his
               
                 Anatomical
                 Epistles
              
               Pag.
               15.
               
               The
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Heart
               Spring
               from
               the
               Eighth
               Pair
               and
               Intercostal
               Nerves
               ;
               a
               particular
               Description
               of
               which
               ,
               may
               be
               found
               in
               Dr.
               
               Lower's
               Book
               
                 De
                 Corde
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Vieussenius
                 Nervographia
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Right
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Arteriosa
              
               or
               
                 Arteria
                 Pulmonalis
              
               Divided
               and
               Expanded
               .
            
             
               f
               f
               f
               ,
               The
               Three
               
                 Valvulae
                 Sigmoides
              
               or
               Semilunares
               ,
               which
               oppose
               the
               Return
               of
               the
               Blood
               from
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               by
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Pulmonica
              
               into
               the
               Heart
               ,
               when
               it
               is
               in
               Diastole
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               9.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Heart
               cut
               Transversely
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               it
               next
               its
               Basis.
               
            
             
               C
               ,
               That
               next
               its
               Cone
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Right
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Left
               —
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Septum
                 Cordis
              
               or
               the
               Partition
               between
               the
               Two
               Ventricles
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               A
               Stylus
               put
               thro'
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               into
               the
               Right
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               Another
               passing
               from
               the
               same
               Ventricle
               thro'
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Pulmonalis
              
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               A
               Stylus
               in
               the
               Left
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               passing
               out
               at
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               ;
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               Another
               Inserted
               into
               the
               same
               Ventricle
               ,
               by
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Pulmonica
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               10.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               Inferior
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Columna
                 Carnis
              
               of
               One
               of
               the
               Ventricles
               of
               the
               Heart
               cut
               off
               :
               See
               Fig.
               7.
               g
               g
               ,
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Tendinous
               Fibres
               deriv'd
               from
               the
               Fleshy
               Column
               ,
               and
               fastned
               to
               the
               Inferior
               Margin
               of
               One
               of
               the
               Tricuspid
               Valves
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Superior
               ,
               Portions
               of
               the
               Tricuspid
               Valves
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               11.
               
            
             
               The
               Coronary
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Heart
               as
               they
               appear
               on
               its
               Surface
               when
               Injected
               ,
               after
               Drying
               the
               whole
               Heart
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Arteries
               fill'd
               with
               Mercury
               fix'd
               with
               Tin.
               
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Veins
               Extended
               with
               Wax
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               12.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Pulmonalis
              
               next
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Mitral
               Valves
               Pinn'd
               out
               by
               their
               Tendons
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               13.
               
            
             
               The
               Inner
               Surface
               of
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               cut
               off
               at
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Heart
               when
               Divided
               and
               Expanded
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Three
               Semilunary
               Valves
               well
               Exprest
               when
               Pinn'd
               out
               ;
               One
               of
               them
               being
               cut
               thro'
               in
               its
               Middle
               ,
               in
               dividing
               the
               Great
               Artery
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               14.
               
            
             
               Represents
               in
               like
               manner
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Pulmonalis
              
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Three
               Sigmoidal
               or
               Semilunary
               Valves
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             TWENTY-THIRD
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               REPRESENTS
               the
               External
               Coat
               of
               a
               Vein
               viewed
               with
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               C
               D
               ,
               The
               Fibres
               extended
               according
               to
               the
               Length
               of
               the
               Vessel
               ,
               where
               may
               be
               observed
               the
               
                 Vasa
                 Vasorum
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Second
               Coat
               of
               the
               Vein
               ,
               called
               by
               
                 Dr.
                 Willis
              
               ,
               the
               Vasculous
               and
               Glandulous
               Coat
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Third
               or
               Internal
               Tunick
               of
               a
               Vein
               composed
               of
               Circular
               Fibres
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4
            
             
               The
               External
               Coat
               of
               an
               Artery
               consisting
               of
               a
               Rete
               of
               small
               Nerves
               (
               A
               ,
               )
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               (
               B
               )
               and
               Membranous
               Expansions
               (
               C
               ▪
               )
               On
               this
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Artery
               divers
               Glandulous
               Bodies
               appear
               composing
               greater
               and
               lesser
               Clusters
               ,
               D
               E
               ,
               variously
               dispersed
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               The
               Second
               Coat
               of
               an
               Artery
               consisting
               of
               divers
               Strata
               of
               Fibres
               variously
               decussating
               each
               other
               ,
               and
               joyned
               with
               the
               Internal
               or
               Third
               Coat
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               A
               B
               C
               ,
               The
               Inner
               and
               Smooth
               Surface
               of
               the
               Third
               or
               most
               Internal
               Coat
               of
               the
               Artery
               ;
               where
               the
               Foramina
               for
               the
               Branches
               which
               arise
               out
               of
               it
               ,
               are
               exprest
               ,
               and
               its
               Fibres
               extended
               according
               to
               its
               length
               B
               ,
               C.
               The
               great
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Arteries
               do
               evidently
               appear
               to
               consist
               of
               a
               greater
               Number
               of
               Strata
               of
               Fibres
               ,
               than
               those
               of
               the
               Veins
               ;
               but
               the
               farther
               they
               recede
               from
               the
               Heart
               ,
               they
               are
               both
               still
               more
               and
               more
               subdivided
               ,
               and
               their
               Trunks
               and
               Capillary
               Branches
               become
               still
               thinner
               and
               thinner
               ,
               till
               their
               outmost
               Extremities
               consist
               of
               one
               single
               transparent
               Membrane
               ;
               chiefly
               composed
               of
               such
               Tubes
               ,
               as
               only
               convey
               their
               
                 Succus
                 Nutritius
              
               .
               And
               this
               I
               am
               apt
               to
               think
               may
               serve
               for
               the
               Description
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               in
               general
               ;
               and
               shall
               farther
               consider
               the
               Organization
               of
               the
               several
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               in
               speaking
               of
               their
               particular
               Offices
               relating
               to
               Secretion
               in
               the
               several
               Parts
               ;
               wherefore
               at
               present
               shall
               only
               mention
               ,
               that
               the
               Extremities
               of
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               are
               continued
               Channels
               ,
               variously
               contorted
               and
               not
               all
               of
               them
               of
               an
               equal
               Size
               ,
               even
               in
               Parts
               which
               are
               uniform
               or
               the
               same
               .
               
                 Vid.
                 App.
                 Fig.
              
               4.5
               .
            
             
               After
               the
               Blood
               has
               past
               the
               Extremities
               of
               its
               Vessels
               ,
               and
               is
               in
               its
               Return
               to
               the
               Heart
               again
               by
               the
               Veins
               ;
               it
               there
               meets
               with
               divers
               Valves
               or
               Stops
               ,
               which
               prevent
               the
               Weight
               of
               the
               Blood
               of
               the
               Inferior
               Parts
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               and
               the
               Recoiling
               of
               it
               in
               the
               Superior
               ,
               (
               when
               any
               violent
               Motions
               affect
               the
               Thorax
               ,
               as
               in
               Coughing
               ,
               from
               pressing
               on
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Vessels
               ,
               and
               hindering
               its
               progressive
               Motion
               .
               That
               there
               is
               a
               Recoiling
               of
               the
               Blood
               in
               any
               extraordinary
               Motions
               of
               the
               Thorax
               ,
               in
               the
               Jugular
               Veins
               ,
               may
               be
               observ'd
               in
               taking
               Blood
               from
               thence
               ,
               especially
               in
               Children
               .
               Hence
               it
               is
               the
               Valves
               in
               those
               Veins
               are
               necessary
               ;
               least
               the
               Blood
               should
               again
               repass
               into
               the
               Vessels
               of
               the
               Brain
               with
               great
               Violence
               ;
               which
               is
               also
               prevented
               in
               the
               Contortion
               made
               in
               the
               Internal
               Jugular
               Vein
               ,
               in
               its
               Specus
               in
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
               I
               must
               confess
               I
               never
               yet
               observed
               above
               Two
               Valves
               (
               one
               opposite
               to
               the
               other
               )
               in
               the
               largest
               Vein
               that
               is
               furnished
               with
               Valves
               ;
               however
               Anatomists
               commonly
               mention
               Three
               ,
               and
               Professor
               Bidloo
               tells
               us
               of
               Four
               and
               Five
               Valves
               ,
               as
               they
               appear
               in
               the
               following
               Figures
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               a
               Vein
               extended
               with
               Wind
               and
               dried
               ,
               having
               a
               double
               Valve
               or
               Two
               Valves
               of
               Semilunary
               Figures
               ,
               placed
               opposite
               to
               each
               other
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               8.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Jugular
               Vein
               blowed
               up
               and
               dried
               ;
               B
               B
               B
               ,
               Its
               Three-fold
               Valves
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               9.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               a
               Vein
               with
               Five
               Valves
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               10
               ,
               11.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Portions
               of
               Veins
               exprest
               in
               the
               Two
               preceeding
               Figures
               lay'd
               open
               ;
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               &c.
               Their
               Valves
               as
               they
               appear
               in
               their
               Insides
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               12.
               
            
             
               The
               Valves
               as
               they
               appear
               in
               the
               Insides
               of
               the
               Veins
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               13.
               
            
             
               Two
               Valves
               as
               they
               appear
               when
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Veins
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               14.
               
            
             
               The
               unequal
               Distance
               of
               the
               Valves
               in
               the
               Veins
               ;
               the
               Vestigia
               of
               the
               Valves
               being
               here
               only
               exprest
               ,
               as
               they
               appear
               when
               the
               Vein
               is
               extended
               with
               Wind.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               15.
               
            
             
               Represents
               (
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               )
               a
               System
               of
               the
               Arteries
               injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               and
               free'd
               from
               the
               Body
               of
               an
               Infant
               Six
               Months
               Old
               ;
               which
               he
               tells
               us
               he
               has
               reserved
               :
               If
               so
               ,
               it
               is
               a
               great
               Rarity
               indeed
               !
               For
               having
               more
               than
               once
               free'd
               the
               Arteries
               from
               the
               Body
               of
               an
               Infant
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               from
               an
               Adult
               ,
               and
               finding
               them
               far
               differing
               from
               this
               Figure
               ,
               and
               not
               much
               disagreeing
               with
               the
               Descriptions
               and
               Figures
               of
               Vesalius
               and
               others
               ;
               I
               cannot
               look
               on
               this
               ,
               but
               as
               a
               Prodigy
               in
               Nature
               .
               Wherefore
               I
               shall
               here
               give
               you
               his
               Description
               of
               it
               ,
               and
               refer
               you
               to
               my
               
                 Appendix
                 .
                 Fig.
              
               3.
               
               Where
               their
               common
               Appearance
               is
               exprest
               ,
               as
               I
               now
               have
               them
               injected
               by
               me
               ,
               and
               dissected
               from
               the
               Body
               of
               an
               Infant
               .
            
             
               The
               
                 Arteria
                 Aorta
              
               (
               say's
               Bidloo
               )
               arising
               from
               the
               Heart
               ,
               soon
               sends
               out
               Two
               small
               Coronary
               Branches
               .
               B
               ,
               in
               the
               Body
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
               It
               s
               Trunk
               is
               divided
               on
               the
               Pericordium
               into
               the
               Ascendens
               C
               ,
               and
               Descendens
               D.
               The
               First
               gives
               Branches
               to
               the
               Parts
               above
               the
               Heart
               ,
               and
               is
               divided
               into
               the
               Subclavii
               E
               ,
               from
               which
               the
               Axillares
               F
               ,
               and
               Internal
               Mammary
               G
               ,
               Three
               or
               Four
               Intercostales
               H
               ,
               and
               Cervicales
               I.
               do
               arise
               .
               From
               the
               Axillary
               Artery
               are
               Branches
               communicated
               to
               the
               Scapula
               K
               ,
               and
               to
               the
               Superior
               Parts
               of
               the
               Thorax
               .
               When
               it
               has
               got
               between
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Cubit
               ,
               it
               is
               divided
               into
               Two
               little
               Branches
               ;
               the
               First
               of
               which
               L
               ,
               goes
               to
               the
               Wrist
               ,
               Thumb
               ,
               and
               Fore-Finger
               ;
               the
               other
               to
               the
               Three
               other
               Fingers
               .
               It
               divides
               into
               Two
               about
               the
               Thymus
               ,
               and
               Forms
               the
               Carotides
               M.
               These
               ascending
               near
               the
               Wind-pipe
               after
               having
               sent
               several
               Branches
               to
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               Larynx
               and
               Parts
               adjacent
               ,
               and
               are
               divided
               into
               the
               External
               N
               ,
               and
               Internal
               Branch
               O
               ,
               the
               Exterior
               supplies
               the
               Face
               ,
               Lips
               ,
               partly
               the
               Ear
               and
               lower
               Teeth
               ;
               the
               other
               Branch
               serves
               the
               Forehead
               ,
               Temples
               and
               Neighbouring
               Parts
               .
            
             
               The
               Inward
               Branch
               ascending
               streight
               through
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphoenoides
              
               creeps
               under
               the
               
                 '
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               and
               forming
               various
               Plexus's
               ,
               in
               that
               Part
               within
               the
               Skull
               ,
               it
               is
               cover'd
               with
               a
               particular
               Coat
               already
               describ'd
               ;
               it
               sends
               out
               small
               Branches
               near
               the
               Optick
               Nerves
               ;
               but
               the
               large
               Trunks
               creep
               back
               again
               ,
               sometimes
               united
               and
               by
               and
               by
               separated
               from
               each
               other
               .
               There
               are
               small
               Branches
               convey'd
               to
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               ,
               partly
               above
               and
               partly
               below
               the
               Heart
               .
               From
               the
               Axillarie's
               ,
               and
               ascending
               and
               descending
               Trunks
               ,
               it
               derives
               several
               Branches
               which
               reflected
               into
               a
               Circle
               ,
               creep
               through
               its
               Coverings
               and
               several
               Parts
               of
               the
               Head.
               The
               descending
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Aorta
               D
               ,
               supply's
               some
               of
               the
               Intercostals
               1
               ,
               and
               the
               Neighbouring
               Muscles
               and
               Parts
               ;
               there
               is
               a
               large
               Trunk
               2
               ,
               also
               sent
               to
               the
               Diaphragm
               ;
               under
               the
               Diaphragm
               the
               Branches
               of
               the
               Viscera
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               are
               remarkable
               .
               viz.
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               3.
               
               The
               Inferior
               and
               Superior
               Meseraic
               Branches
               ,
               4
               ,
               5
               ,
               those
               of
               the
               Omentum
               ,
               or
               Caul
               ,
               6
               ,
               of
               the
               Liver
               ,
               7
               ,
               of
               the
               Kidneys
               8
               ,
               the
               Spermatics
               9
               ,
               and
               so
               on
               .
               About
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               this
               Trunk
               is
               divided
               into
               Two
               Branches
               ,
               from
               which
               others
               are
               again
               deriv'd
               to
               the
               Right
               Gut
               and
               Pudenda
               ,
               some
               to
               the
               Hips
               ,
               some
               to
               the
               Thighs
               and
               Legs
               ,
               as
               well
               Internally
               ,
               as
               Externally
               .
               Thus
               much
               concerning
               the
               principal
               Distribution
               of
               the
               Aorta
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               next
               Place
               Professor
               Bidloo
               gives
               us
               the
               Anatomy
               of
               the
               Blood.
               In
               the
               Anatomy
               of
               the
               Blood
               Chymically
               performed
               (
               say's
               he
               )
               it
               is
               manifest
               there
               is
               a
               Water
               in
               it
               ,
               which
               as
               well
               as
               it
               can
               be
               ,
               is
               simply
               to
               be
               considered
               )
               a
               Spirit
               and
               Salts
               both
               fixt
               and
               volatile
               .
               Tho'
               by
               this
               Method
               (
               he
               very
               well
               say's
               )
               some
               Parts
               are
               very
               accurately
               discover'd
               ;
               yet
               doth
               it
               exceedingly
               destroy
               the
               Appearances
               of
               some
               Figures
               ,
               which
               ought
               by
               no
               means
               to
               be
               alter'd
               ;
               wherefore
               he
               proposed
               the
               following
               Figure
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               16.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               A
               small
               Drop
               of
               Blood
               inclosed
               in
               a
               Glass
               Tube
               ,
               and
               its
               Particles
               by
               the
               Help
               of
               a
               Microscope
               are
               represented
               very
               much
               magnifyed
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Globular
               Bladders
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               little
               Fibres
               variously
               turned
               ,
               laid
               ,
               and
               disposed
               ,
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
               I
               must
               confess
               I
               have
               frequently
               view'd
               the
               Blood
               in
               the
               same
               Manner
               as
               here
               Exprest
               with
               a
               Microscope
               ,
               and
               have
               constantly
               observed
               its
               Appearance
               as
               here
               represented
               :
               Nor
               could
               I
               ever
               apprehend
               the
               Blood
               was
               furnished
               with
               Fibres
               (
               so
               much
               talk'd
               of
               )
               but
               that
               the
               Fibrous
               Appearance
               it
               has
               ,
               (
               when
               any
               Blood-Vessel
               is
               open
               in
               the
               Mouth
               ,
               or
               in
               Bleeding
               into
               warm
               Water
               and
               the
               like
               )
               is
               owing
               to
               a
               Coagulation
               of
               its
               Serum
               ,
               by
               which
               Means
               its
               Globules
               are
               entangled
               and
               frame
               those
               Fibrous
               Bodies
               :
               The
               Streaked
               Mass
               represented
               at
               D
               ,
               E.
               (
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               )
               I
               am
               apt
               to
               think
               proceeded
               from
               a
               Coagulation
               of
               the
               Serous
               Part
               of
               the
               Blood
               ,
               by
               sealing
               the
               Tube
               Hermetically
               ;
               in
               doing
               which
               the
               Glass
               must
               be
               heated
               .
               To
               this
               our
               Author
               adds
               another
               Way
               of
               Anatomizing
               the
               Blood
               ,
               thus
               :
            
             
               The
               watery
               whitish
               Liquor
               ,
               which
               is
               of
               a
               different
               Substance
               ,
               being
               separated
               from
               the
               cold
               coagulated
               Mass
               of
               Blood
               ,
               and
               set
               on
               the
               Fire
               ,
               thickens
               in
               a
               short
               Time
               ;
               the
               red
               Part
               which
               remains
               ,
               (
               of
               which
               the
               more
               fluid
               Part
               being
               frequently
               washt
               away
               with
               warm
               Water
               ,
               )
               appears
               like
               a
               grumous
               Heap
               ;
               every
               Particle
               of
               which
               resembles
               a
               Globular
               Bladder
               ;
               of
               which
               ,
               some
               are
               Transparent
               ,
               others
               not
               .
               The
               rest
               of
               the
               Mass
               which
               consists
               of
               very
               flexible
               Fibres
               ,
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               ,
               and
               being
               exposed
               to
               the
               Air
               and
               Cold
               ,
               become
               very
               tough
               ,
               tensile
               ,
               and
               seem
               like
               Net-work
               ,
               owe
               that
               Appearance
               to
               a
               Combination
               of
               the
               Globules
               variously
               stratified
               on
               each
               other
               .
            
             
               The
               Third
               Way
               (
               which
               our
               Author
               proposes
               )
               of
               enquiring
               into
               the
               Blood
               ,
               is
               when
               the
               Blood
               is
               separated
               from
               the
               Serum
               or
               Liquor
               it
               swims
               in
               ,
               and
               put
               on
               a
               Piece
               of
               Paper
               dawb'd
               over
               with
               Lard
               ,
               is
               become
               a
               little
               dry
               ;
               after
               an
               External
               View
               of
               the
               Particles
               ,
               gently
               with
               the
               Finger
               break
               off
               a
               little
               of
               the
               Mass
               of
               Blood
               ;
               in
               which
               ,
               you
               will
               presently
               behold
               little
               Globes
               of
               a
               differing
               Frame
               and
               Figure
               ,
               little
               Fibres
               ,
               and
               Streaks
               of
               the
               same
               Kind
               .
            
             
             
             
             
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             TWENTY-FOURTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               Fore-parts
               of
               all
               the
               Viscera
               within
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Thorax
               ,
               when
               taken
               out
               together
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Heart
               cover'd
               with
               the
               Pericardium
               ,
               and
               hanging
               to
               the
               Lungs
               by
               its
               Membranes
               and
               Vessels
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Descending
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               ,
               on
               the
               Right
               Side
               ,
               and
               the
               Aorta
               on
               the
               Left.
               
            
             
               b
               b
               b
               ,
               The
               Ascending
               Branches
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               ,
               which
               make
               the
               Two
               Carotides
               and
               Right
               Subclavian
               Branch
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Mediastinum
               cut
               from
               the
               Sternum
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Right
               and
               Left
               Anterior
               Lobes
               of
               the
               Lungs
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Two
               Posterior
               Lobes
               of
               the
               Lungs
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               Portions
               of
               the
               Nerves
               call'd
               
                 Par
                 Vagum
              
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Gala.
               
            
             
               In
               freeing
               the
               Lungs
               from
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Thorax
               ,
               we
               frequently
               find
               their
               Outward
               Membrane
               cleaving
               to
               the
               Pleura
               ,
               nor
               has
               any
               known
               Inconveniencies
               attended
               such
               Persons
               when
               Living
               .
               The
               many
               Phoenomena
               which
               have
               occurr'd
               to
               our
               Observation
               in
               Dissecting
               Morbid
               Bodies
               ,
               in
               whom
               these
               Parts
               have
               been
               Diseas'd
               ,
               are
               too
               Numerous
               to
               be
               inserted
               in
               this
               Place
               ;
               wherefore
               I
               shall
               only
               mention
               what
               I
               have
               more
               than
               once
               taken
               Notice
               of
               in
               examining
               these
               Parts
               ,
               when
               they
               have
               not
               been
               Diseas'd
               (
               viz.
               )
               by
               Blowing
               into
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               (
               
                 i.
                 e.
              
               )
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Arteriosa
              
               and
               
                 Arteria
                 Venosa
              
               those
               Vessels
               deriv'd
               from
               the
               Pleura
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               those
               by
               Ruysch
               call'd
               
                 Arteriae
                 Bronchales
              
               ,
               (
               Corresponding
               to
               which
               I
               have
               frequently
               observ'd
               Veins
               which
               empty
               themselves
               into
               the
               Subclavian
               Branches
               ;
               )
               all
               which
               I
               have
               found
               to
               Communicate
               with
               each
               other
               upon
               Distension
               ;
               by
               which
               we
               may
               be
               inform'd
               the
               Blood
               do's
               not
               enjoy
               such
               particular
               Vessels
               in
               its
               Circulation
               thro'
               these
               Parts
               ,
               as
               some
               have
               conceiv'd
               ;
               but
               that
               Part
               of
               the
               Blood
               which
               Arises
               from
               the
               Right
               Auricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               may
               pass
               into
               the
               Bronchial
               Veins
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               into
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Venosa
              
               ;
               and
               on
               the
               other
               Hand
               ,
               the
               Blood
               Springing
               from
               the
               Bronchial
               Arteries
               ,
               may
               partly
               pass
               into
               the
               Left
               Auricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               by
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Venosa
              
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               by
               its
               Corresponding
               Bronchial
               Veins
               before
               mentioned
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               One
               of
               the
               Lobes
               of
               the
               Lungs
               cut
               off
               ,
               and
               a
               Division
               made
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               ,
               so
               that
               a
               Branching
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               and
               Bronchus
               do
               appear
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               A
               Branch
               of
               the
               Pulmonick
               Vein
               ,
               or
               
                 Arteria
                 Venosa
              
               ,
               lying
               on
               that
               of
               the
               Bronchus
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               A
               Branch
               of
               the
               Bronchus
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Pulmonick
               Artery
               ,
               or
               
                 Vena
                 Arteriosa
              
               ,
               cut
               Transversely
               ,
               lying
               on
               the
               other
               Side
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               Another
               Lobe
               of
               the
               Lungs
               Dissected
               as
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Pulmonick
               Artery
               Accompanying
               those
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               :
               See
               Tab.
               25.
               
               Fig.
               10.
               
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               External
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Lungs
               Rais'd
               and
               Pinn'd
               out
               to
               shew
               its
               Blood-Vessels
               :
               These
               Vessels
               partly
               Arise
               from
               the
               Pulmonick
               Vessels
               last
               mention'd
               ,
               and
               partly
               from
               the
               Arteriae
               and
               
                 Venae
                 Bronchiales
              
               ,
               as
               appears
               from
               what
               has
               been
               above
               Noted
               ;
               and
               do
               frequently
               Germinate
               and
               Inosculate
               with
               the
               Intercostal
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Pleura
               :
               The
               Germination
               and
               Inosculations
               of
               these
               Vessels
               I
               have
               had
               frequent
               Opportunities
               of
               observing
               to
               be
               in
               several
               little
               Parcels
               or
               Fasciculi
               ,
               and
               of
               an
               Inch
               or
               Two
               in
               Length
               between
               the
               Lungs
               and
               Pleura
               :
               They
               very
               often
               appear
               in
               Filaments
               more
               or
               less
               Divided
               ,
               and
               I
               am
               apt
               to
               think
               are
               frequently
               the
               Beginnings
               of
               those
               Adhesions
               of
               the
               Lungs
               with
               the
               Pleura
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Bronchia
               or
               Branch
               of
               the
               Trachea
               made
               bare
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Lungs
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Larynx
               ,
               and
               Part
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Common
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Larynx
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Sternothyroideus
              
               ,
               not
               well
               Exprest
               ;
               it
               being
               here
               as
               it
               were
               continuous
               with
               the
               Hyothyroideus
               C
               E.
               
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               ,
               or
               Bone
               of
               the
               Tongue
               reclin'd
               Laterally
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Upper
               and
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               
                 Epiglottis
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Cricothyroidei
              
               ;
               on
               the
               Left
               Side
               One
               of
               them
               hanging
               down
               at
               its
               Beginning
               ;
               the
               other
               remaining
               in
               Situ
               .
               These
               Muscles
               Spring
               from
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Annular
               Cartilage
               ,
               and
               are
               soon
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Internal
               ,
               and
               Lower
               Part
               of
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               O
               ,
               The
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               
                 Cartilago
                 Annularis
              
               ,
               made
               bare
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               The
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Larynx
               ,
               and
               its
               Muscles
               plac'd
               on
               it
               ;
               Exprest
               very
               Confusedly
               ;
               which
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               former
               Figure
               ,
               is
               Erroneously
               describ'd
               by
               Bidloo
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               G
               K
               L
               M
               P
               Q
               ,
               Should
               Express
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               
                 Cartilago
                 Annularis
              
               cover'd
               with
               the
               
                 Musculi
                 Cricoarytenoidei
                 Postici
              
               ,
               as
               it
               's
               Represented
               in
               our
               Appendix
               .
            
             
               N
               N
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Arytenoideus
              
               .
            
             
               O
               ,
               The
               Internal
               and
               Concave
               Part
               of
               the
               Epiglottis
               ,
               as
               it
               appears
               when
               Pinn'd
               up
               .
            
             
               R
               ,
               The
               Posterior
               Edge
               of
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               .
            
             
               S
               ,
               The
               Membranous
               Part
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               next
               the
               Gula.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               ,
               or
               Bone
               of
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               the
               Cartilages
               which
               compose
               the
               Larynx
               ,
               and
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Aspera
                 Arteria
              
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               and
               Convex
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Cartilago
                 Scutiformis
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Internal
               and
               Concave
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               ;
               which
               Part
               of
               it
               necessarily
               comes
               in
               View
               in
               this
               Position
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Annular
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Epiglottis
               ,
               Exprest
               with
               the
               Internal
               Concave
               Part
               Forewards
               ,
               as
               is
               truly
               Exhibited
               in
               the
               following
               Figure
               ;
               which
               on
               the
               contrary
               ,
               should
               have
               been
               here
               Represented
               with
               its
               External
               and
               Convext
               Part
               ,
               as
               in
               Fig.
               5.
               
               F.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Aspera
                 Arteria
              
               ,
               or
               Wind-Pipe
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Glandulae
                 Thyroideae
              
               :
               From
               what
               I
               have
               hitherto
               observ'd
               ,
               these
               Glands
               seem
               to
               be
               of
               the
               same
               Office
               with
               the
               Thymus
               :
               Nor
               do's
               their
               Colour
               or
               Compactness
               distinguish
               them
               from
               the
               Thymus
               ;
               if
               we
               consider
               ,
               that
               by
               their
               Situation
               on
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               ,
               they
               are
               perpetually
               in
               Motion
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Motion
               of
               the
               Blood
               is
               very
               much
               hasten'd
               thro'
               them
               ,
               and
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               consequently
               Enlarg'd
               ,
               whence
               their
               Colour
               and
               Compactness
               do's
               Arise
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               Two
               long
               Processes
               of
               the
               Thyroide
               Cartilage
               ,
               or
               Scutiformis
               ty'd
               to
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               8.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               and
               Back
               part
               of
               the
               Lar●yx
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               Convext
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               .
               This
               Bone
               of
               the
               Tongue
               appears
               in
               this
               preceding
               Figure
               ,
               to
               be
               compos'd
               of
               Three
               Bones
               ;
               the
               Middle-Bone
               A
               ,
               is
               joyn'd
               to
               One
               of
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Two
               Side-Bones
               ,
               by
               a
               Cartilaginous
               Interposition
               call'd
               Sychondrosis
               ;
               the
               Two
               other
               Extremities
               of
               these
               Side-Bones
               are
               ty'd
               to
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Two
               long
               Processes
               of
               the
               Thyroide
               Cartilage
               G
               G
               ,
               Fig.
               7.
               by
               a
               Ligament
               ;
               which
               Connexion
               is
               call'd
               Syndesinusis
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Concave-part
               of
               the
               Epiglottis
               next
               the
               Glottis
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Arytenoidal
               Cartilages
               cover'd
               with
               the
               Glottis
               ,
               or
               Internal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Oesophagus
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Cricoidal
               Cartilage
               cover'd
               with
               the
               Internal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Oesophagus
               which
               composes
               the
               Glottis
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Two
               Sides
               ,
               or
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Thyroidal
               Cartilage
               ,
               whence
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Oesophageus
              
               do's
               Arise
               ;
               which
               Muscle
               in
               a
               Semi-circular
               Manner
               Invests
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Oesophagus
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Back-parts
               of
               the
               Thyroidal
               Glands
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Posterior-part
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               where
               it
               is
               Membranous
               ,
               and
               receives
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Gula
               in
               its
               way
               to
               the
               Stomach
               .
            
             
               Having
               View'd
               the
               Fore
               and
               Back-parts
               of
               the
               whole
               Larynx
               ,
               we
               come
               in
               the
               next
               place
               to
               Examine
               those
               Cartilages
               which
               Compose
               it
               ,
               when
               Separated
               from
               each
               other
               .
            
             
               1
               ,
               The
               External
               Convext-part
               of
               the
               Thyroidal
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               2
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Concave-part
               of
               the
               same
               Cartilage
               :
               In
               these
               Two
               Figures
               ,
               the
               Two
               Kinds
               of
               Processes
               of
               the
               Thyroidal
               Cartilage
               are
               Remarkable
               ;
               the
               Two
               Superior
               or
               long
               Processes
               are
               joynd
               with
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               G
               G
               ,
               Fig.
               7.
               the
               Two
               Inferior
               are
               fastned
               to
               the
               Cricoidal
               Cartilage
               Laterally
               .
            
             
               3
               ,
               4
               ,
               The
               Cricoidal
               Cartilage
               ;
               3
               ,
               the
               Fore-part
               ;
               4
               ,
               the
               Back-part
               of
               this
               Cartilage
               :
               That
               Figure
               of
               the
               Right
               Hand
               (
               towards
               the
               Figure
               of
               the
               Lungs
               and
               Heart
               )
               Expresses
               the
               External
               ,
               Inferior
               ,
               and
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Annular
               Cartilage
               ;
               That
               of
               the
               Left
               Hand
               ,
               Represents
               the
               Inferior
               ,
               Internal
               ,
               and
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Annular
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               5
               ,
               6
               ,
               5
               ,
               6
               ,
               Two
               different
               Views
               of
               the
               Arytenoidal
               Cartilages
               ,
               which
               are
               Articulated
               to
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Cricoidal
               Cartilage
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             TWENTY-FIFTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               External
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               Rais'd
               and
               Pinn'd
               out
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Muscular
                 Fasciculi
              
               lying
               between
               the
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               ,
               where
               divers
               Clusters
               of
               Glandules
               of
               a
               different
               Magnitude
               are
               Exprest
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               ,
               compos'd
               of
               Fibres
               extended
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               ;
               between
               this
               Internal
               and
               Longitudinal
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               ,
               and
               the
               Cartilages
               ,
               are
               plac'd
               another
               Transverse
               Order
               ,
               which
               pass
               Circularly
               according
               to
               the
               Disposition
               of
               the
               Cartilages
               :
               These
               Internal
               Transverse
               Fleshy
               Fibres
               are
               more
               Numerous
               than
               the
               Superior
               Longitudinal
               Ones
               :
               Both
               these
               Orders
               of
               Fibres
               are
               Exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               .
               This
               Disposition
               of
               the
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Internal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               ,
               is
               very
               Conspicuous
               in
               the
               Wind-Pipes
               of
               most
               Quadrupedes
               ,
               especially
               in
               the
               Larger
               sort
               ,
               as
               Oxen
               ,
               Horses
               ,
               &c.
               
               But
               chiefly
               ,
               (
               considering
               the
               Bulk
               of
               the
               Animal
               )
               in
               a
               Hog
               ,
               in
               whose
               Wind-Pipe
               this
               Membrane
               appears
               compos'd
               of
               Strong
               Fleshy
               Fibres
               ;
               whence
               an
               Account
               may
               not
               improbably
               be
               suggested
               ,
               why
               that
               Animal
               is
               capable
               of
               altering
               the
               Tone
               of
               the
               Voice
               from
               a
               Base
               to
               a
               Treble
               :
               For
               when
               these
               Fibres
               Contract
               ,
               the
               Channel
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               is
               very
               much
               Straitned
               ,
               as
               well
               in
               its
               Diameter
               as
               Length
               ;
               whence
               the
               Tone
               is
               rendred
               more
               Acute
               .
               This
               Constructure
               of
               the
               Inward
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               ,
               is
               continued
               to
               the
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               ,
               where
               these
               Fleshy
               Fibres
               lessen
               and
               bear
               a
               Proportion
               to
               the
               Cavities
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               ,
               and
               are
               at
               length
               so
               Thinn'd
               as
               to
               Frame
               Transparent
               Membranes
               ,
               which
               help
               to
               compose
               the
               Vesiculae
               of
               the
               Lungs
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               One
               of
               the
               Lobes
               of
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               with
               the
               Bronchia
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               to
               exhibit
               the
               Lobuli
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Bronchial
               Tube
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Lobuli
               ,
               or
               distinct
               Clusters
               of
               the
               Vesiculae
               ,
               partly
               compos'd
               of
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               ;
               and
               partly
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Lungs
               :
               These
               Lobuli
               are
               not
               always
               of
               the
               same
               Figure
               ,
               some
               being
               Round
               ,
               others
               Oval
               ,
               some
               Oblong
               ,
               and
               others
               Variously
               Figur'd
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Interstitia
               of
               the
               Lobuli
               ;
               which
               are
               Invested
               with
               the
               Internal
               Lamina
               of
               the
               Proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               here
               Pinn'd
               out
               ;
               on
               which
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               are
               very
               Conspicuous
               :
               These
               Interstitia
               ,
               or
               Spaces
               between
               the
               Lobuli
               ,
               Appear
               in
               the
               Lungs
               of
               a
               Foetus
               very
               plain
               ,
               and
               do
               not
               Communicate
               with
               the
               Vesiculae
               of
               the
               Lobuli
               ,
               but
               are
               distinguish'd
               from
               them
               ,
               as
               do's
               Appear
               by
               Blowing
               into
               these
               Interstitia
               ;
               which
               may
               be
               done
               with
               a
               Blow-Pipe
               ,
               after
               Wounding
               the
               External
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               and
               you
               will
               find
               the
               Interstitia
               of
               the
               Lobuli
               very
               much
               Distended
               with
               Wind
               ,
               and
               the
               Vesiculae
               not
               at
               all
               Inflated
               :
               Nor
               on
               the
               Contrary
               ,
               will
               these
               Interstitia
               be
               any
               ways
               Inflated
               by
               Blowing
               into
               the
               Bronchia
               ,
               tho'
               the
               Vesiculae
               and
               Lobuli
               are
               very
               much
               Extended
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Branches
               of
               the
               Pulmonick
               Vein
               and
               Artery
               on
               each
               Side
               the
               Bronchia
               :
               See
               Fig.
               10.
               
               A
               ,
               B.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               with
               divers
               Lobuli
               of
               One
               of
               the
               Lobes
               of
               the
               Lungs
               .
               Dr.
               Willis
               who
               has
               given
               a
               Figure
               of
               these
               Lobuli
               ,
               after
               the
               Manner
               as
               they
               are
               here
               Represented
               ,
               says
               ,
               that
               by
               filling
               the
               Bronchia
               with
               a
               Liquid
               ,
               these
               Lobuli
               may
               be
               separated
               from
               each
               other
               .
               I
               must
               confess
               I
               have
               more
               than
               once
               Attempted
               to
               Divide
               these
               Lobuli
               ,
               but
               could
               not
               be
               satisfied
               of
               their
               Appearance
               like
               this
               Figure
               :
               The
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               Lobuli
               in
               the
               Foetus
               Appear
               Angular
               ,
               and
               are
               in
               a
               Cubical
               manner
               plac'd
               by
               each
               other
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Inside
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               ,
               where
               the
               Holes
               for
               divers
               of
               its
               Ramifications
               which
               pass
               out
               of
               it
               ;
               and
               the
               Straight
               Progress
               of
               the
               Fibres
               of
               its
               Internal
               Membrane
               do
               Appear
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Bronchia
               divided
               into
               lesser
               Branches
               ;
               to
               which
               the
               Lobuli
               are
               Fastned
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Lobuli
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               more
               or
               less
               Divided
               ,
               and
               are
               compos'd
               of
               the
               Vesiculae
               .
               The
               Vesiculae
               as
               above
               hinted
               ,
               are
               Fram'd
               by
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               ,
               and
               the
               Pulmonick
               Blood-Vessels
               .
            
             
               N.
               B.
               The
               Lobuli
               
                 in
                 this
                 Figure
                 may
                 be
                 observ'd
                 to
                 have
                 the
                 Extremities
                 of
                 the
                 Blood-Vessels
                 Branch'd
                 on
                 Them.
                 Each
              
               Vesicula
               
                 also
                 has
                 One
                 of
                 the
                 Extremities
                 of
                 the
                 Pulmonick
                 Veins
                 and
                 Arteries
                 Branch'd
                 on
                 it
                 ;
                 and
                 without
                 doubt
                 (
                 Conformable
                 to
                 the
                 Extremities
                 of
                 the
                 Blood-Vessels
                 of
                 other
                 Parts
                 )
                 those
                 Vessels
                 also
                 are
                 continued
                 Channels
                 on
                 the
              
               Vesiculae
               
                 of
                 the
                 Lungs
                 .
                 Here
                 the
                 Art
                 of
                 Nature
                 is
                 very
                 Extraordinary
                 ,
                 in
                 Framing
                 the
                 Extremities
                 of
                 these
                 Blood-Vessels
                 of
                 the
                 Lungs
                 so
                 very
                 small
                 ,
                 and
                 confining
                 their
                 vast
                 Number
                 in
                 so
                 narrow
                 a
                 Compass
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 Body
                 of
                 the
                 Lungs
                 ;
                 for
                 these
                 Pulmonick
                 Blood-Vessels
                 Correspond
                 to
                 those
                 of
                 the
                 whole
                 Field
                 of
                 the
                 Body
                 ,
                 in
                 constantly
                 '
                 Discharging
                 the
                 Blood
                 thro'
                 them
                 ,
                 as
                 well
                 as
                 thro'
                 the
                 Heart
                 ;
                 whilst
                 Life
                 with
                 perfect
                 Health
                 is
                 maintain'd
                 .
                 And
                 notwithstanding
                 One
                 Half
                 of
                 the
                 Lungs
                 is
                 compleatly
                 Vitiated
                 ,
                 (
                 as
                 I
                 have
                 more
                 than
                 once
                 found
                 in
                 Dissecting
                 Morbid
                 Bodies
                 )
                 yet
                 nevertheless
                 the
                 Circulation
                 of
                 the
                 Blood
                 has
                 been
                 still
                 carried
                 on
                 for
                 some
                 time
                 .
                 Tho'
                 in
                 this
                 Case
                 Respiration
                 must
                 not
                 only
                 be
                 very
                 Quick
                 and
                 Attended
                 with
                 no
                 small
                 Difficulty
                 on
                 frequent
                 Occasions
                 ;
                 but
                 the
                 Heart
                 must
                 also
                 Labour
                 very
                 much
                 to
                 drive
                 the
                 Blood
                 on
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               Lungs
               cut
               from
               them
               ,
               when
               Dri'd
               ,
               after
               Inflation
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Lamellae
               of
               the
               External
               Membrane
               ,
               which
               pass
               between
               the
               Vesiculae
               and
               compose
               the
               Lobuli
               ;
               between
               which
               ,
               the
               Interstitia
               necessarily
               Result
               .
            
             
               C
               D
               ,
               The
               Lobuli
               compos'd
               of
               the
               Vesiculae
               ,
               which
               are
               here
               well
               Exprest
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               8.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Aspera
                 Arteria
              
               or
               Wind-Pipe
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Bronchus
               or
               Ramifications
               of
               it
               ,
               free'd
               from
               the
               Lungs
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Division
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               into
               Two
               Branches
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               into
               more
               ,
               call'd
               Bronchus
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Larger
               Branches
               of
               the
               Bronchus
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Lesser
               ,
               from
               whose
               Extremities
               the
               Vesiculae
               are
               Pull'd
               off
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Semicircular
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               .
            
             
               F
               G
               H
               ,
               The
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               of
               Various
               Figures
               and
               Sizes
               ;
               some
               of
               which
               are
               Circular
               F
               F
               ;
               others
               Semicircular
               ,
               Triangular
               G
               ;
               Quadrangular
               &c.
               H.
               These
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               Bronchus
               are
               not
               Connexed
               to
               each
               other
               like
               those
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               it self
               ;
               but
               the
               Lower-parts
               of
               the
               Superior
               receive
               the
               Upper-parts
               of
               the
               Inferior
               ;
               not
               unlike
               the
               Crustaceous
               Coverings
               of
               the
               Locusts
               ,
               or
               Tail
               of
               a
               Lobster
               :
               so
               that
               in
               Inspiration
               the
               Bronchus
               may
               be
               Coextended
               with
               the
               Tumified
               Lungs
               ;
               for
               these
               Ligaments
               between
               the
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               Bronchus
               have
               an
               Elastick
               Power
               of
               Restitution
               ;
               not
               unlike
               that
               strong
               Ligament
               ,
               plac'd
               on
               the
               Spines
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Necks
               of
               Quadrupedes
               ;
               by
               which
               means
               the
               Superior
               Parts
               of
               the
               Lower
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               Bronchus
               are
               drawn
               under
               the
               Inferior
               Parts
               of
               the
               Upper
               ,
               in
               Expiration
               :
               But
               in
               Inspiration
               the
               Ligaments
               are
               Extended
               ,
               and
               the
               Inferior
               Cartilages
               are
               with-drawn
               from
               under
               the
               Superior
               ;
               and
               to
               this
               Action
               in
               Expiration
               the
               Longitudinal
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               (
               which
               pass
               into
               the
               Bronchus
               )
               do
               concur
               to
               Contract
               them
               .
               In
               Inspiration
               the
               Weight
               of
               the
               Superincumbent
               Air
               is
               sufficient
               to
               Extend
               the
               Bronchus
               ,
               and
               consequently
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               when
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Thorax
               is
               Widen'd
               by
               the
               Muscles
               which
               Draw
               the
               Bibs
               up
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               9.
               
            
             
               A
               small
               Portion
               of
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               whose
               Bronchial
               Branch
               is
               fill'd
               with
               Injected
               Quick-Silver
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Bronchial
               Branch
               ;
               on
               both
               Sides
               of
               which
               ,
               the
               Pulmonick
               Blood-Vessels
               Appear
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               10.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               the
               Largest
               Branches
               of
               the
               Bronchus
               free'd
               from
               One
               of
               the
               Lungs
               ;
               together
               with
               the
               Pulmonick
               Blood-Vessels
               and
               Lobes
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Pulmonick
               Vein
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Artery
               fill'd
               with
               different
               Colour'd
               Wax
               .
               Besides
               freeing
               the
               Bronchia
               ,
               as
               in
               Fig.
               8.
               there
               is
               another
               way
               of
               Demonstrating
               their
               Ramifications
               by
               pouring
               of
               Melted
               Tin
               into
               them
               ;
               which
               may
               be
               Practis'd
               in
               the
               following
               Manner
               .
               Cut
               off
               one
               Side
               of
               the
               Humane
               Lungs
               at
               the
               Division
               of
               the
               Trachea
               B
               B
               ,
               Fig.
               8.
               and
               with
               the
               Feather
               End
               of
               a
               Goose-Quill
               so
               wipe
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               ,
               by
               often
               thrusting
               it
               into
               their
               Various
               Ramifications
               ,
               that
               at
               length
               it
               no
               longer
               comes
               out
               wet
               with
               the
               Mucus
               they
               have
               in
               them
               .
               The
               Insides
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               being
               thus
               throughly
               Dri'd
               with
               a
               Feather
               :
               In
               like
               Manner
               Anoint
               them
               with
               Linseed
               Oyl
               .
               This
               done
               ,
               Tye
               the
               Mouth
               of
               the
               Divided
               Trachea
               to
               a
               Tin
               or
               Iron
               Tunnel
               :
               This
               Tunnel
               must
               be
               so
               plac'd
               that
               the
               Lungs
               may
               hang
               Pendulous
               and
               Free
               ;
               but
               least
               their
               Flaccidity
               should
               too
               much
               Compress
               the
               Bronchia
               ,
               it
               's
               convenient
               to
               pass
               divers
               Threads
               thro'
               the
               External
               Parts
               of
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               and
               so
               Fasten
               them
               to
               the
               Floor
               and
               other
               convenient
               Places
               ,
               that
               the
               Lungs
               may
               be
               Extended
               thereby
               :
               In
               doing
               of
               which
               ,
               be
               sure
               you
               do
               not
               distort
               the
               Lungs
               from
               a
               direct
               Pendulous
               Position
               ;
               but
               that
               the
               large
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               remains
               Perpendicular
               to
               the
               Tunnel
               .
               This
               done
               ,
               Melt
               Block-Tin
               and
               pour
               it
               into
               the
               Tunnel
               ;
               in
               doing
               of
               which
               ,
               stand
               at
               some
               Distance
               ,
               least
               the
               Conflict
               which
               arises
               from
               the
               hot
               Metal
               in
               its
               meeting
               with
               the
               remaining
               Moisture
               in
               the
               Bronchus
               ,
               scatters
               it
               on
               your
               Hands
               ,
               or
               Face
               ,
               &c.
               N.
               B.
               
                 If
                 the
                 Metal
                 is
                 made
                 very
                 hot
                 it
                 will
                 so
                 Scorch
                 the
                 First
                 Passages
                 of
                 the
              
               Bronchia
               
                 as
                 to
                 Contract
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 thereby
                 Obstruct
                 the
                 rest
                 :
                 Nor
                 must
                 it
                 want
                 Fluidity
                 ,
                 least
                 its
                 passing
                 into
                 the
                 smaller
                 Branches
                 is
                 thereby
                 Hindred
                 .
                 The
              
               Bronchus
               
                 being
                 thus
                 Injected
                 in
                 the
                 Lungs
                 ;
                 lay
                 them
                 in
                 Water
                 ,
                 Nine
                 ,
                 or
                 Ten
                 Days
                 ▪
                 till
                 they
                 begin
                 to
                 Putrifie
                 ;
                 then
                 Boyl
                 the
                 whole
                 Lungs
                 off
                 the
                 Block-Tin
                 ,
                 and
                 you
                 may
                 expect
                 to
                 see
                 it
                 much
                 fuller
                 of
                 Branches
                 than
                 it
                 's
                 Exprest
                 in
                 the
              
               11
               
                 th
                 Figure
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               11.
               
            
             
               Represents
               the
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               in
               Block-Tin
               ,
               as
               above
               Describ'd
               .
            
             
             
               
            
          
        
         
           
           
           
             THE
             TWENTY-SIXTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Body
               lying
               in
               a
               Supine
               Posture
               ,
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Pectoris
              
               or
               Sternum
               rais'd
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               Ribs
               which
               are
               connexed
               to
               it
               ;
               so
               that
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Thorax
               after
               its
               Viscera
               are
               remov'd
               ,
               comes
               in
               view
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Thorax
               invested
               with
               the
               Pleura
               ,
               whose
               smooth
               Surface
               towards
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               is
               here
               seen
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Triangulares
              
               as
               they
               Arise
               from
               the
               Inferior
               and
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Sternum
               ,
               and
               Ascend
               to
               their
               Insertions
               at
               the
               Bony
               Endings
               of
               the
               Fourth
               ,
               Fifth
               ,
               and
               Sixth
               Ribs
               :
               In
               this
               View
               of
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Sternum
               ,
               the
               Mammary
               Blood-Vessels
               on
               each
               Side
               of
               it
               are
               conspicuous
               :
               The
               Cartilaginous
               Endings
               of
               the
               Two
               First
               Ribs
               are
               also
               remarkable
               ,
               being
               somewhat
               longer
               than
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               b
               ,
               The
               Ensiformal
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               C
               D
               ,
               Superior
               )
               The
               Course
               of
               the
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Internal
               Intercostal
               Muscles
               which
               appear
               thro'
               the
               Pleura
               A
               A.
               
            
             
               C
               D
               ,
               Inferior
               )
               The
               External
               Intercostal
               Muscles
               whose
               Fibres
               decussate
               the
               Internal
               like
               the
               Letter
               X.
               
            
             
               These
               Intercostal
               Muscles
               arise
               from
               the
               Lower
               Edge
               of
               each
               Superior
               Rib
               ,
               and
               are
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Upper
               Edge
               of
               each
               Inferior
               one
               :
               They
               are
               employ'd
               in
               bringing
               the
               Ribs
               nearer
               each
               other
               ,
               to
               Enlarge
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Thorax
               in
               Inspiration
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               &c
               ,
               The
               Seven
               Superior
               or
               True
               Ribs
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Saw-like
               Endings
               of
               the
               
                 Serratus
                 Major
                 Anticus
              
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Diaphragm
               free'd
               from
               the
               Cartilaginous
               Endings
               of
               the
               Ribs
               and
               Ensiformal
               Cartilage
               ,
               b.
               
            
             
               f
               f
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Psoii
              
               partly
               in
               view
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Cartilage
               of
               One
               of
               the
               Bastard-Ribs
               which
               is
               not
               joyned
               to
               the
               Sternum
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Bodies
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Thorax
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               Lower
               Jaw-Bone
               made
               bare
               .
            
             
               k
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Pterigoideus
                 Internus
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               L
               L
               ,
               The
               Claviculae
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Deltoides
               Muscle
               .
            
             
               3
               ,
               4
               ,
               5
               ,
               6
               ,
               The
               Bony
               Endings
               of
               the
               Third
               ,
               Fourth
               ,
               Fifth
               and
               Sixth
               Ribs
               ,
               cut
               from
               the
               Cartilages
               which
               are
               fastened
               to
               the
               Sternum
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               See
               Tab.
               52.
               
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             TWENTY-SEVENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THE
             Skin
             ,
             Fat
             ,
             and
             Membranes
             being
             removed
             ,
             the
             Muscles
             appear
             on
             the
             Back
             as
             follows
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             ,
             B
             B
             ,
             C
             ,
             D
             D
             ,
             E
             ,
             F
             F
             ,
             G
             ,
             H
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Cucularis
            
             or
             Trapezius
             on
             both
             Sides
             
               in
               Situ
            
             :
          
           
             Either
             of
             these
             arises
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Occipitis
            
             ,
             and
             Tendinous
             from
             the
             
               Ligamentum
               Colli
            
             and
             Points
             of
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Three
             Lowest
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             Eight
             Superior
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ;
             from
             which
             broad
             Origination
             becoming
             thick
             and
             Fleshy
             A
             A
             D
             D
             F
             ,
             is
             so
             inserted
             to
             the
             Claviculae
             E
             and
             Tendinous
             H
             F
             to
             the
             
               Spina
               Scapulae
            
             I.
             These
             move
             the
             Scapulae
             variously
             according
             to
             their
             Directions
             of
             Fibres
             ,
             as
             Upwards
             ,
             Backwards
             ,
             and
             Downwards
             .
          
           
             J
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Spina
               Scapulae
            
             .
          
           
             K
             O
             O
             ,
             The
             
               Latissimus
               Dorsi
            
             or
             Aniscalptor
             :
             A
             thin
             ,
             broad
             Tendinous
             Origination
             of
             This
             is
             deriv'd
             from
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Seven
             Inferior
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             and
             Superior
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             ;
             as
             also
             from
             the
             Posterior
             Part
             of
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             R
             ,
             and
             begins
             to
             grow
             Fleshy
             as
             it
             marches
             over
             the
             
               Longissimus
               Dorsi
            
             and
             Sacrolumbus
             ,
             K.
             and
             in
             its
             Ascent
             over
             the
             Ribs
             laterally
             ,
             it
             has
             divers
             Fasciculi
             of
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             arising
             from
             thence
             and
             joining
             with
             it
             ,
             becomes
             still
             thicker
             ,
             more
             Fleshy
             ,
             and
             narrower
             ,
             marching
             over
             the
             lowest
             Angle
             of
             the
             Scapulae
             ;
             whence
             sometimes
             a
             Fleshy
             Portion
             of
             this
             Muscle
             do's
             arise
             ,
             which
             we
             have
             commonly
             found
             in
             those
             Bodies
             in
             whom
             the
             
               Teres
               Minor
            
             was
             wanting
             ,
             as
             it
             was
             in
             this
             Subject
             ,
             and
             is
             at
             Length
             Inserted
             with
             a
             short
             flat
             strong
             Tendon
             to
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             at
             the
             Implantation
             of
             the
             
               Teres
               Major
            
             :
             Its
             Use
             is
             to
             draw
             the
             Arm
             Downwards
             and
             Backwards
             .
          
           
             L
             L
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             
               Obliqui
               Descendentes
               Abdominis
            
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Deltoides
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             Infraspinalis
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             .
          
           
             O
             O
             ,
             The
             Sacrolumbalis
             lying
             under
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Latissimus
               Dorsi
            
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             The
             Basis
             of
             the
             Right
             Scapula
             .
          
           
             Q
             Q
             ,
             The
             
               Rotundi
               Majores
            
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             The
             Spine
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Magnus
            
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
           
             THE
             TWENTY-EIGHTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THE
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Back
             lying
             under
             those
             Represented
             in
             the
             preceding
             Table
             .
          
           
             A
             B
             C
             D
             ,
             The
             
               Rhomboides
               in
               Situ
            
             ,
             It
             arises
             Tendinous
             from
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Two
             Inferior
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             Three
             or
             Four
             of
             the
             Superior
             of
             the
             Thorax
             C
             ;
             growing
             Fleshy
             in
             its
             Oblique
             Descent
             ,
             it
             is
             inserted
             to
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Scapula
             D
             :
             It
             draws
             the
             Scapula
             Upwards
             and
             Backwards
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             Rhomboides
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             ,
             remaining
             at
             its
             Origin
             at
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Scapula
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             A
             Portion
             of
             the
             Rhomboides
             which
             we
             frequently
             find
             distinct
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Elevator
               Scapulae
            
             or
             
               Musculus
               Patientiae
            
             :
             This
             Muscle
             has
             divers
             separate
             Originations
             from
             the
             Second
             ,
             Third
             ,
             Fourth
             and
             Fifth
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             composing
             a
             large
             Fleshy
             Muscle
             ,
             which
             is
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Superior
             Angle
             of
             the
             Scapula
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             That
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Basis
               Scapulae
            
             towards
             its
             Superior
             Angle
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             
               Serratus
               Superior
               Posticus
            
             Arising
             thin
             and
             Tendinous
             from
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Two
             Inferior
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             and
             Two
             Superior
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ;
             and
             after
             an
             Oblique
             Descent
             over
             the
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Splenius
               Capitis
            
             and
             Upper
             Parts
             of
             the
             
               Longissimus
               Dorsi
            
             and
             Sacrolumbalis
             ,
             becomes
             Fleshy
             ,
             marching
             under
             the
             Scapula
             to
             its
             Insertions
             at
             the
             Second
             ,
             Third
             ,
             and
             Fourth
             Ribs
             .
             This
             Muscle
             assists
             in
             drawing
             the
             Ribs
             Upwards
             in
             Inspiration
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Serratus
               Inferior
               Posticus
            
             :
             The
             Origination
             of
             this
             Muscle
             is
             much
             larger
             than
             this
             Figure
             seems
             to
             represent
             .
             I
             have
             frequently
             taken
             Notice
             of
             a
             Series
             of
             Tendinous
             Fibres
             continued
             between
             the
             
               Serratus
               Superior
            
             and
             this
             Muscle
             ;
             and
             its
             Lower
             Part
             in
             like
             Manner
             continued
             to
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             ,
             strictly
             embracing
             the
             Sacrolumbus
             and
             
               Dorsi
               Longissimus
            
             ;
             in
             which
             it
             performs
             the
             Office
             of
             a
             Bandage
             as
             shall
             be
             hereafter
             mentioned
             .
             These
             Inferior
             Saw-Muscles
             ,
             in
             this
             Figure
             ,
             are
             free'd
             from
             their
             Originations
             at
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Thorax
             and
             Loins
             ,
             in
             raising
             the
             
               Latissimi
               Dorsi
            
             ,
             Exprest
             in
             the
             preceding
             Table
             K
             L
             O
             O
             ,
             whose
             Tendinous
             Originations
             in
             most
             Subjects
             ,
             do
             inseparably
             cleave
             to
             these
             Serrati
             near
             the
             Spines
             :
             This
             Figure
             demonstrating
             the
             Progress
             and
             Insertion
             of
             these
             Muscles
             ,
             I
             shall
             only
             add
             ;
             their
             Use
             is
             to
             draw
             the
             Ribs
             Downwards
             ,
             and
             Contract
             the
             Thorax
             in
             Expiration
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Cucullaris
             left
             at
             its
             Insertion
             to
             the
             Clavicula
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             
               Latissimus
               Dorsi
            
             rais'd
             and
             left
             hanging
             at
             its
             Insertion
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             ;
             the
             like
             is
             done
             on
             the
             Left
             ,
             but
             not
             Letter'd
             .
          
           
             N
             O
             P
             Q
             ;
             The
             
               Longissimi
               Dorsi
            
             ;
             This
             Muscle
             and
             its
             Companion
             the
             Sacrolumbalis
             are
             insepable
             at
             their
             Origination
             from
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             ,
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Sacrum
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loins
             ;
             Externally
             it
             is
             Tendinous
             ;
             Internally
             Fleshy
             ;
             in
             its
             Ascent
             it
             bestows
             divers
             Insertions
             on
             the
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loins
             ;
             but
             proceeding
             farther
             ,
             it
             continues
             to
             derive
             Tendinous
             Originations
             from
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             lower
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ,
             which
             in
             their
             Progress
             become
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             ,
             and
             Terminate
             in
             the
             Fifth
             ,
             Sixth
             and
             Seventh
             Spines
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ;
             and
             this
             Part
             of
             this
             Muscle
             Bidloo
             calls
             Semispinatus
             :
             The
             other
             larger
             Part
             of
             it
             ,
             in
             its
             Ascent
             on
             the
             Thorax
             ,
             divides
             it self
             after
             the
             Manner
             of
             a
             Palm-branch
             ,
             into
             many
             Fleshy
             Portions
             which
             become
             Tendinous
             at
             their
             Insertions
             to
             the
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             each
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ,
             and
             Tubercle
             of
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             some
             of
             the
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ;
             This
             Muscle
             is
             not
             only
             imploy'd
             in
             keeping
             the
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Body
             Erect
             and
             Bending
             it
             Backwards
             ;
             but
             in
             Progression
             ,
             it
             has
             also
             a
             considerable
             Office
             ;
             for
             when
             either
             Leg
             is
             mov'd
             Forewards
             ,
             this
             Muscle
             on
             the
             same
             Side
             ,
             near
             its
             Origin
             ,
             may
             be
             observed
             to
             be
             in
             Action
             ;
             which
             we
             suppose
             is
             necessary
             to
             render
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             at
             that
             Time
             stable
             ,
             to
             the
             End
             the
             Thigh-Bone
             may
             be
             more
             commodiously
             moved
             in
             its
             Acetabulum
             of
             the
             Coxendix
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             The
             Sacrolumbalis
             which
             we
             shall
             describe
             hereafter
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Magnus
            
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             The
             Spine
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             .
          
           
             T
             ,
             The
             
               Splenius
               Capitis
            
             .
          
           
             V
             ,
             The
             Deltoides
             .
          
           
             W
             ,
             The
             Infraspinatus
             .
          
           
             X
             ,
             The
             
               Teres
               Major
            
             .
          
           
             Y
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Spina
               Scapulae
            
             ,
             above
             which
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Supraspinatus
             may
             be
             seen
             .
          
           
             Z
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Serratus
               Major
               Anticus
            
             .
          
           
             ψ
             ,
             The
             Seventh
             Rib
             made
             bare
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             TWENTY-NINTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             DIVERS
             Muscles
             imploy'd
             in
             moving
             the
             Back
             ,
             Thorax
             and
             Arms.
             
          
           
             A
             B
             D
             E
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Sacrolumbalis
            
             :
             Its
             Origin
             is
             already
             describ'd
             in
             the
             preceding
             Table
             with
             the
             
               Dorsi
               Longissimus
            
             ,
             they
             arising
             inseparably
             :
             At
             their
             parting
             below
             the
             last
             Rib
             ,
             the
             Fleshy
             Part
             of
             the
             Sacrolumbus
             is
             divided
             into
             divers
             Parts
             ,
             which
             become
             so
             many
             distinct
             Tendons
             and
             Terminate
             on
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             as
             may
             be
             seen
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             of
             this
             Figure
             :
             Besides
             these
             Fleshy
             and
             Tendinous
             Productions
             of
             this
             Sacrolumbal
             Muscle
             ;
             it
             has
             another
             Order
             of
             Tendinous
             and
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             which
             may
             be
             esteemed
             as
             so
             many
             distinct
             Muscles
             ;
             They
             arising
             partly
             Tendinous
             and
             partly
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             and
             Posterior
             Prominence
             of
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             that
             is
             connexed
             to
             the
             Transverse
             Process's
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             whence
             Ascending
             Obliquely
             outwards
             ,
             become
             Fleshy
             ,
             and
             growing
             Tendinous
             ,
             do
             pass
             over
             Three
             or
             Four
             of
             the
             Superior
             Ribs
             ,
             and
             join
             with
             the
             First
             describ'd
             Tendons
             at
             their
             several
             Terminations
             above
             mentioned
             .
             This
             Disposition
             of
             the
             Sacrolumbus
             is
             continued
             the
             whole
             Length
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ,
             even
             to
             the
             Fourth
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Neck
             ;
             which
             Upper
             Part
             of
             it
             is
             call'd
             by
             
               Diemerbroek
               ,
               Cervicalis
               Descendens
            
             ,
             and
             by
             him
             made
             a
             distinct
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             Tendon
             of
             the
             last
             described
             Muscle
             and
             
               Longissimus
               Dorsi
            
             ,
             cut
             from
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loins
             .
          
           
             F
             H
             I
             K
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Longissimi
               Dorsi
            
             ;
             that
             of
             the
             Right
             Side
             being
             free'd
             from
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Back
             and
             Loins
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             Spines
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loins
             .
          
           
             M
             M
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Semispinatus
            
             or
             
               Transversalis
               Dorsi
            
             :
             The
             Course
             of
             the
             Fibres
             of
             this
             Muscle
             agree
             exactly
             with
             that
             lying
             below
             it
             ,
             called
             
               Musculus
               Sacer
            
             G
             ;
             which
             is
             Exprest
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             of
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loins
             between
             L
             M
             C
             :
             They
             are
             call'd
             
               Transversales
               Dorsi
            
             and
             Lumborum
             ,
             because
             they
             arise
             from
             the
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             those
             Vertebrae
             ;
             from
             whence
             they
             ascend
             Obliquely
             and
             are
             inserted
             to
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Superior
             Vertebrae
             ;
             which
             Oblique
             ascending
             Disposition
             of
             these
             Fibres
             may
             be
             observed
             in
             this
             Figure
             M
             M.
             
          
           
             N
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Trapezius
            
             left
             on
             the
             Neck
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Serratus
               Superior
               Posticus
            
             left
             at
             its
             Insertion
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Spina
               Scapulae
            
             .
          
           
             Q
             ,
             The
             
               Basis
               Scapulae
            
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             
               Musculus
               Deltoides
            
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             Infraspinatus
             .
          
           
             T
             ,
             
               Teres
               Major
            
             .
          
           
             V
             W
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             
               Serrati
               Majores
               Antici
            
             ;
             that
             of
             the
             Left-Side
             representing
             its
             Progress
             over
             the
             Subscapularis
             ,
             as
             it
             arises
             from
             the
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Basis
               Scapulae
            
             as
             is
             mentioned
             Tab.
             20.
             
          
           
             X
             X
             X
             ,
             The
             
               Serrati
               Inferiores
               Postici
            
             rais'd
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Insertions
             .
          
           
             Y
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Obliquus
               Descendens
            
             .
          
           
             Z
             Z
             ,
             The
             Spines
             of
             the
             
               Ossa
               Ilii
            
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
           
             THE
             THIRTIETH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             SOME
             of
             the
             Muscles
             imployed
             in
             Extending
             the
             Back
             and
             Loins
             ,
             Rais'd
             .
          
           
             A
             B
             C
             D
             E
             F
             G
             H
             I
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Longissimi
               Dorsi
            
             and
             Sacrolumbales
             near
             their
             Originations
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             Sacrolumbalis
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             free'd
             from
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             &c.
             and
             hanging
             loose
             from
             the
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Body
             .
          
           
             M
             M
             ,
             Those
             Tubercles
             of
             the
             Ribs
             connexed
             to
             the
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Thorax
             made
             bare
             ;
             whence
             the
             other
             Order
             of
             the
             Tendinous
             and
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             of
             the
             Sacrolumbal
             Muscle
             (
             mention'd
             in
             the
             precedent
             Table
             )
             do
             arise
             .
          
           
             N
             N
             ,
             The
             Spinal
             Processes
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Back
             made
             bare
             .
          
           
             n
             n
             ,
             Their
             Transverse
             Processes
             .
          
           
             O
             O
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             
               Musculi
               Splenii
               Capitis
            
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             The
             Infraspinatus
             Rais'd
             from
             the
             Scapula
             .
          
           
             Q
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Rotundus
               Major
            
             .
          
           
             R
             R
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             
               Serrati
               Majores
               Antici
            
             on
             both
             Sides
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             The
             Upper
             Part
             of
             the
             Bone
             of
             the
             Arm
             laid
             bare
             .
          
           
             T
             ,
             The
             last
             or
             Twelfth
             Rib.
             
          
           
             V
             ,
             The
             
               quadratus
               Lumborum
            
             :
             It
             arises
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Posterior
             Part
             of
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             ,
             and
             after
             an
             Oblique
             ascending
             Progress
             is
             so
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Transverse
             Processes
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loins
             :
             This
             not
             unlike
             the
             
               Rectus
               Abdominis
            
             ,
             moves
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loins
             or
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             nearer
             each
             other
             ,
             as
             either
             is
             held
             most
             stable
             :
             So
             when
             we
             stand
             on
             one
             Foot
             it
             draws
             the
             Vertebrae
             to
             that
             Side
             ,
             and
             makes
             the
             Trunk
             come
             towards
             a
             Perpendicular
             Direction
             of
             its
             Gravity
             to
             that
             Foot
             ;
             as
             appears
             in
             the
             Figure
             of
             the
             First
             Table
             ,
             where
             the
             Right
             Leg
             sustains
             the
             Weight
             of
             the
             whole
             Trunk
             ,
             and
             Superior
             Parts
             :
             But
             if
             we
             hang
             by
             the
             Hands
             ,
             then
             either
             of
             these
             
               Musculi
               Quadrati
            
             Acting
             ,
             draws
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             nearer
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loins
             .
          
           
             It
             was
             necessary
             the
             Muscles
             imploy'd
             in
             Extending
             the
             Head
             ,
             Neck
             ,
             Back
             and
             Loins
             should
             be
             framed
             strong
             enough
             not
             only
             to
             sustain
             the
             Head
             and
             Trunk
             in
             their
             Projection
             forewards
             from
             the
             Axis
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             ;
             but
             that
             they
             should
             move
             the
             whole
             Spine
             variously
             ,
             especially
             in
             Bending
             it
             backwards
             :
             Hence
             it
             is
             these
             Muscles
             are
             not
             only
             more
             Numerous
             ;
             but
             are
             Multiform
             ,
             as
             appears
             in
             the
             
               Dorsi
               Longissimus
            
             and
             Sacrolumbalis
             ;
             whereas
             the
             Bending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Trunk
             and
             Head
             are
             but
             one
             Pair
             to
             each
             ,
             and
             they
             of
             a
             Longitudinal
             Order
             of
             Fibres
             only
             ;
             namely
             ,
             the
             
               Par
               Rectum
               Internum
               Capitis
            
             ,
             or
             
               Flexores
               Capitis
               ,
               Tab.
            
             18.
             
             LL
             ;
             and
             the
             
               Recti
               Abdominis
               Tab.
            
             31.
             
             EE
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             THIRTY-FIRST
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             REPRESENTS
             the
             Common
             Integuments
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             and
             the
             External
             Appearance
             of
             its
             Muscles
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             A
             A
             ,
             The
             Skin
             together
             with
             the
             Fat
             and
             Membranes
             of
             the
             Left
             Side
             Rais'd
             .
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             The
             Fat
             remaining
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             after
             Raising
             the
             Skin
             ;
             where
             the
             Lobi
             of
             Fat
             and
             the
             Blood-Vessels
             passing
             between
             them
             ,
             are
             Elegantly
             Exprest
             .
          
           
             C
             D
             E
             F
             G
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Obliquus
               Descendens
               in
               Situ
            
             ;
             CC
             ,
             It
             s
             Fleshy
             Part
             Springing
             from
             the
             Ribs
             ;
             D
             D
             ,
             It
             s
             Inferior
             Tendinous
             Part
             ,
             under
             which
             the
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             of
             the
             Ascendens
             do
             Appear
             .
          
           
             E
             E
             ,
             The
             Sraight
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Rectus
            
             ,
             as
             they
             Appear
             under
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Descending
             and
             Ascending
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             F
             F
             ,
             The
             Tendinous
             Interfections
             of
             the
             Rectus
             Appearing
             thro'
             the
             Two
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Oblique
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             G
             G
             ,
             The
             
               Linea
               Semilunaris
            
             compos'd
             by
             the
             Two
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Oblique
             Muscles
             before
             they
             March
             over
             the
             Rectus
             to
             the
             
               Linea
               Alba.
            
             
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             
               Linea
               Alba.
            
             
          
           
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             THIRTY-SECOND
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               ABCDEFG
               ,
               THE
               
                 Obliquus
                 Descendens
              
               ,
               or
               Declivis
               Rais'd
               :
               See
               
                 App.
                 Fig.
              
               1.38
               ,
               38.
               
               It
               Arises
               with
               several
               partly
               Fleshy
               and
               partly
               .
               Tendinous
               Acute
               Productions
               from
               the
               Lower
               Margins
               of
               the
               Fifth
               ,
               Sixth
               ,
               Seventh
               and
               Eight
               Ribs
               ;
               where
               its
               several
               separate
               Origins
               lie
               between
               the
               Indentations
               of
               the
               
                 Serratus
                 Major
                 Anticus
              
               ;
               these
               ,
               for
               better
               distinction
               we
               call
               its
               Former
               Origin
               ;
               Besides
               which
               ,
               it
               continues
               to
               derive
               more
               Heads
               in
               like
               Manner
               from
               the
               Ninth
               ,
               Tenth
               ,
               Eleventh
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               from
               the
               Extremity
               of
               the
               last
               Bastard-Rib
               ;
               (
               
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               29
               ,
               Y.
               )
               where
               it
               's
               frequently
               Indented
               with
               the
               
                 Serratus
                 Inferior
                 Posticus
              
               (
               
                 Tab.
                 ib.
              
               XX.
               )
               as
               Vesalius
               takes
               Notice
               :
               From
               its
               Former
               Origin
               B
               B
               B
               ,
               its
               Oblique
               Descending
               Fleshy
               Part
               E
               E
               ,
               Expands
               its
               self
               into
               a
               Broad
               Membranous
               Tendon
               F
               F
               ,
               before
               it
               Marches
               over
               the
               Rectus
               P
               P
               ,
               to
               its
               Insertion
               in
               the
               
                 Linea
                 Alba
                 Tab.
              
               31.
               
               H
               ,
               and
               
                 Os
                 Pubis
              
               G
               :
               From
               its
               Latter
               Origin
               ,
               in
               the
               same
               Manner
               Descending
               ,
               (
               
                 Vid.
                 App.
                 Fig.
              
               2.31
               .
               )
               it
               Ends
               partly
               Tendinous
               in
               the
               
                 Ligamentam
                 Pubis
              
               C
               C
               ,
               but
               chiefly
               Fleshy
               on
               the
               Superior
               and
               Fore-Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Illum
              
               .
               Besides
               the
               Offices
               commonly
               Ascrib'd
               to
               this
               Muscle
               in
               Compressing
               the
               Intestines
               and
               Bladder
               ,
               &c.
               either
               in
               Extruding
               the
               Foeces
               and
               Urine
               in
               both
               Sexes
               ,
               or
               Foetus
               in
               Women
               ;
               They
               have
               still
               a
               farther
               Use
               :
               That
               Part
               of
               this
               Muscle
               that
               's
               Interjacent
               between
               its
               Lower
               Origin
               and
               Spine
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Ilium
                 ,
                 Tab.
              
               29.
               
               Y.
               bearing
               an
               Analogy
               in
               its
               Position
               to
               the
               Mastordeus
               of
               the
               Head
               ,
               (
               
                 App.
                 Fig.
              
               1.14
               .
               )
               serves
               for
               the
               Circumrotation
               of
               the
               Trunk
               upon
               the
               Axis
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               ;
               as
               when
               we
               Convert
               our
               Bodies
               to
               the
               contrary
               Side
               ,
               the
               Feet
               remaining
               Stable
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Cartilaginous
               Endings
               of
               the
               Seventh
               ,
               Eighth
               ,
               Ninth
               ,
               and
               Tenth
               Ribs
               ;
               which
               ,
               in
               the
               following
               Table
               are
               cut
               off
               at
               the
               Bony
               Parte
               of
               the
               Ribs
               and
               Rais'd
               :
               
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               33.
               
               K
               K.
               
            
             
               1
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Transversalis
              
               Rais'd
               from
               the
               Peritonaum
               and
               Reclin'd
               Laterally
               ;
               It
               derives
               a
               Tendinous
               Origin
               from
               the
               Transverse
               Processes
               of
               the
               
                 Vertebrae
                 Lumbares
              
               ,
               and
               a
               Fleshy
               One
               ,
               from
               the
               Cartilaginous
               Endings
               of
               the
               Ribs
               ,
               Spine
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Ilium
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Pubis
              
               ;
               whence
               it
               passes
               over
               the
               Convext
               Surface
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ,
               composing
               a
               Broad
               Tendon
               as
               it
               Marches
               under
               the
               Rectus
               to
               its
               Termination
               in
               the
               whole
               Length
               of
               the
               
                 Linea
                 Alba.
              
               When
               this
               Muscle
               and
               its
               Partner
               Act
               ,
               they
               press
               the
               Abdomen
               directly
               Inwards
               .
            
             
               L
               M
               N
               O
               P
               ,
               The
               
                 Recti
                 Abdominis
              
               ;
               One
               remaining
               
                 in
                 Sat●
              
               the
               other
               being
               Rais'd
               :
               Either
               of
               these
               Muscles
               derives
               its
               Origin
               from
               Two
               of
               the
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               True
               ,
               and
               One
               of
               Bastard
               Ribs
               ;
               and
               in
               its
               Descent
               has
               Four
               ,
               sometimes
               Five
               Tendinous
               Intersections
               O
               O
               O
               O
               ;
               still
               Lessening
               it self
               below
               the
               Navel
               ,
               becomes
               Tendinous
               ,
               immediately
               above
               the
               
                 Os
                 Pubis
              
               ,
               where
               it
               's
               Implanted
               M
               :
               This
               Bends
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Body
               .
            
             
               P
               P
               ,
               The
               Under-Side
               of
               the
               Rectus
               ,
               where
               the
               Epigastrick
               and
               Mammary
               Blood-Vessels
               may
               be
               seen
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               The
               Pyramidales
               ,
               which
               derive
               their
               Fleshy
               Origin
               from
               the
               Upper-Part
               of
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Pubis
              
               ,
               and
               Terminate
               in
               the
               
                 Linea
                 Alba.
              
               
            
             
               R
               R
               S
               S
               ,
               The
               
                 Obliquus
                 Ascendens
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Acclavis
                 in
                 Situ
              
               :
               It
               Arises
               from
               the
               Fore-Part
               of
               the
               Spine
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Ilium
              
               and
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Pubis
              
               ,
               whence
               Mounting
               with
               an
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               Inclining
               Forewards
               ,
               Forms
               a
               Broad
               Membranous
               Thin
               Tendon
               SS
               ,
               Marching
               over
               the
               Rectus
               to
               its
               Implantation
               in
               the
               
                 Linea
                 Alba
              
               ;
               the
               Posterior
               Part
               of
               it
               being
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               Eighth
               ,
               Ninth
               ,
               Tenth
               ,
               Eleventh
               ,
               and
               Twelfth
               Ribs
               .
               Besides
               its
               Office
               in
               Compressing
               the
               Contents
               of
               the
               Lower
               Belly
               ;
               that
               Part
               of
               it
               that
               's
               between
               the
               Spine
               of
               the
               Ilium
               and
               Cartilaginous
               Endings
               of
               the
               Ribs
               ,
               is
               not
               only
               Useful
               in
               drawing
               the
               Ribs
               Downwards
               in
               Expiration
               ;
               but
               its
               Fleshy
               Fibres
               (
               Intersecting
               those
               of
               the
               Descendens
               in
               the
               Ilia
               )
               are
               also
               imploy'd
               in
               Converting
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Body
               to
               the
               same
               Side
               ,
               as
               the
               Descendens
               above
               Noted
               ,
               do's
               to
               the
               Contrary
               .
               In
               the
               Structure
               and
               Reciprocal
               Cooperations
               of
               these
               Parts
               of
               the
               Ascending
               and
               Descending
               Oblique
               Muscles
               ,
               the
               Art
               of
               Nature
               is
               very
               Admirable
               .
            
             
               T
               T
               V
               V
               ,
               The
               Peritonaeum
               under
               which
               the
               Intestines
               Appear
               TT
               .
               Tho'
               the
               Peritonaeum
               is
               a
               Transparent
               ,
               Thin
               Membrane
               ,
               yet
               it
               consists
               of
               divers
               Laminae
               ,
               and
               is
               apparently
               Double
               in
               divers
               Parts
               ,
               especially
               between
               the
               Navel
               and
               
                 Os
                 Pubis
              
               :
               Besides
               its
               giving
               an
               External
               Double
               Integument
               to
               all
               the
               Viscera
               of
               the
               Lower
               Belly
               ,
               it
               Provides
               still
               others
               Investing
               each
               Viscus
               ,
               and
               Helps
               to
               compose
               the
               Omentum
               and
               Mesentery
               .
               What
               vast
               Extensions
               the
               Membranes
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               are
               capable
               of
               ,
               is
               well
               known
               to
               those
               who
               have
               seen
               it
               Affected
               with
               a
               Dropsie
               ;
               for
               in
               its
               Duplicature
               I
               have
               often
               taken
               out
               above
               Fourscore
               Pints
               .
               
                 Iob
                 Meekren
              
               in
               his
               
                 Ob.
                 Med.
              
               at
               Chir.
               tells
               us
               of
               a
               Hundred
               and
               Twenty-Five
               Pints
               of
               clear
               Water
               contain'd
               within
               the
               Duplicature
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ;
               besides
               ,
               the
               Membranes
               themselves
               (
               in
               the
               Case
               now
               mention'd
               )
               were
               Thickned
               beyond
               a
               Thumbs
               Breadth
               ,
               and
               their
               Internal
               Surface
               furnish'd
               with
               many
               Fleshy
               Bodies
               and
               Water-Bladders
               ,
               call'd
               Hydatides
               ;
               so
               that
               the
               whole
               ,
               when
               taken
               out
               ,
               seem'd
               to
               be
               a
               Monstrous
               Mass
               of
               Fleshy
               Matter
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Texture
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               Examin'd
               with
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Nervous
               Fibres
               Running
               according
               to
               the
               Length
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Other
               Fibres
               carri'd
               in
               a
               Circular
               Manner
               from
               the
               Nervous
               Plexus
               thro'
               to
               the
               Breadth
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Fibrillae
               which
               join
               the
               preceding
               Fibres
               together
               ,
               and
               are
               Complicated
               with
               them
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Nerves
               and
               their
               Branches
               which
               are
               very
               Remarkable
               about
               the
               Ventricle
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               broken
               off
               .
            
             
               Concerning
               the
               Lymphe-Ducts
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ,
               &c.
               consult
               
                 Nuck's
                 Adenographia
                 Curiosa
              
               ,
               Cap.
               IX
               .
            
             
               The
               Peritonaeum
               has
               divers
               Perforations
               ;
               Forewards
               ,
               for
               the
               Umbilical
               Vessels
               in
               the
               Faetus
               ;
               in
               its
               Upper-Part
               ,
               for
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
                 ,
                 Gula
              
               ,
               and
               Eighth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               ,
               &c.
               
               In
               the
               Lower-Part
               by
               the
               Anus
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               ,
               and
               Vterus
               in
               Women
               :
               in
               this
               Lower-Part
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ,
               it
               's
               Two
               Processes
               attending
               the
               Spermatick
               Vessels
               fall
               next
               under
               our
               Inspection
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Process
               of
               its
               Internal
               Membrane
               ,
               proceeding
               from
               within
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Spermatick
               Vessels
               as
               yet
               Cover'd
               with
               the
               Double
               Process
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               .
               We
               call
               it
               a
               Double
               Process
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               in
               Men
               ,
               that
               passes
               thro'
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               in
               the
               Inguen
               ,
               because
               it
               consists
               of
               Two
               Membranes
               of
               different
               Extents
               ;
               the
               External
               of
               which
               ,
               being
               a
               Continuation
               of
               the
               External
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ,
               is
               there
               call'd
               
                 Tunica
                 Vaginalis
              
               ,
               Inclosing
               the
               Spermatick-Vessels
               and
               Testicle
               ;
               the
               Internal
               Process
               Descends
               about
               Four
               Fingers
               Breath
               on
               the
               Spermatick-Vessels
               in
               the
               Inguina
               ,
               and
               then
               Cleaves
               to
               them
               Inseparably
               (
               and
               this
               Nuck
               calls
               a
               Diverticulum
               )
               as
               it
               's
               Exprest
               ,
               tho'
               somewhat
               stifly
               ,
               in
               the
               following
               Figure
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Internal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Orifice
               or
               Anulus
               of
               its
               Process
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               Its
               Progress
               on
               the
               Spermatick-Vessels
               ,
               call'd
               Divertitulum
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Its
               Cohesion
               to
               the
               Spermatick-Vessels
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             THIRTY-THIRD
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             SHEWS
             the
             Viscera
             of
             the
             Lower
             Belly
             
               in
               Situ
            
             ,
             after
             the
             Common
             and
             Proper
             Integuments
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             are
             laid
             Open
             ,
             and
             some
             of
             them
             cut
             off
             ,
             and
             the
             Cartilaginous
             Endings
             of
             the
             Bastard
             Ribs
             divided
             from
             their
             Bony
             Parts
             ,
             and
             turn'd
             Upwards
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             B
             B
             ,
             The
             Omentum
             ,
             where
             its
             Upper
             Membrane
             Appears
             Contiguous
             to
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             from
             whose
             Inferior
             Coronary
             Vessels
             it
             receives
             its
             
               Arteriae
               Gastricae
               ,
               Emploicae
               Dextrae
               ,
               Sinistrae
            
             and
             Mediae
             ,
             which
             have
             their
             Correspondent
             Veins
             entering
             into
             the
             Coronary
             Veins
             ,
             and
             Convey
             their
             Blood
             to
             the
             
               Vena
               Porta
            
             ;
             the
             Arteries
             being
             Propagated
             from
             the
             Coeliack
             Arteries
             .
             This
             Superior
             Part
             of
             Lamina
             of
             the
             Omentum
             is
             not
             only
             a
             Continuation
             of
             that
             External
             One
             of
             the
             Ventricle
             ,
             Borrow'd
             from
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             but
             its
             Right
             Ala
             in
             like
             Manner
             is
             deriv'd
             from
             the
             Lower
             Part
             of
             the
             Liver
             ,
             and
             it
             s
             Left
             from
             the
             Concave
             Part
             of
             the
             Spleen
             :
             Thus
             the
             Superior
             and
             Outwardmost
             Part
             of
             the
             Omentum
             Arises
             ;
             and
             after
             Descending
             on
             the
             Intestines
             ,
             joins
             or
             is
             continued
             to
             its
             Inferior
             or
             Inward
             Part
             ,
             in
             like
             Manner
             deriv'd
             from
             the
             Colon
             :
             Between
             these
             Superior
             and
             Inferior
             Parts
             ,
             is
             fram'd
             the
             
               Bursa
               Omenti
            
             ;
             which
             may
             be
             plainly
             Discover'd
             ,
             if
             you
             pour
             Water
             into
             its
             Cavity
             ;
             and
             tho'
             the
             Water
             will
             pass
             it
             's
             many
             Foramina
             ,
             yet
             it
             will
             nevertheless
             Discover
             the
             Lower
             Part
             of
             the
             Omentum
             to
             be
             Double
             .
          
           
             C
             C
             ,
             The
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Stomach
             where
             its
             Inferior
             Coronary
             Blood-Vessels
             may
             be
             seen
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             Liver
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             
               Ligamentum
               Suspensorium
               Hepatis
            
             ,
             in
             which
             the
             Umbilical
             Ligament
             is
             Inclos'd
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Fissure
             made
             by
             the
             Umbilical
             Ligament
             .
          
           
             G
             G
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Colon
             near
             its
             Beginning
             in
             the
             Right
             Ilia
             .
          
           
             H
             H
             I
             I
             I
             ,
             The
             Small
             Guts
             ,
             some
             of
             which
             being
             here
             Cover'd
             with
             the
             Omentum
             .
          
           
             K
             K
             ,
             The
             Cartilaginous
             Endings
             of
             the
             Bastard
             Ribs
             cut
             from
             their
             Bony
             Parts
             ,
             and
             turn'd
             up
             towards
             the
             Sternum
             :
             To
             these
             Cartilages
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             Transverse
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             and
             the
             Diaphragma
             may
             be
             seen
             to
             Adhere
             in
             this
             Figure
             .
          
           
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             THIRTY-FOURTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Omentum
               ,
               the
               Cells
               of
               which
               being
               fill'd
               with
               Oily
               Contents
               are
               call'd
               Fat.
               
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Fatty
               Glandules
               of
               the
               Omentum
               which
               are
               plac'd
               in
               the
               Arboreous
               Distribution
               of
               the
               Fat.
               
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Divers
               Foraminulae
               Collateral
               to
               the
               Arboreous
               Fatty
               Bodies
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Membranes
               of
               the
               Omentum
               free'd
               from
               their
               Oily
               Contents
               ;
               which
               Professor
               Bidloo
               Proposes
               to
               be
               done
               after
               the
               following
               Manner
               .
               When
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Omentum
               are
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               or
               any
               Tenacious
               Body
               ,
               then
               dip
               the
               whole
               in
               hot
               Oil
               of
               Turpentine
               ,
               and
               with
               your
               Hand
               squeese
               it
               ,
               and
               move
               it
               up
               and
               down
               till
               the
               whole
               Mass
               of
               Fat
               is
               disolv'd
               in
               that
               Oil.
               Afterwards
               expose
               the
               Membranes
               to
               the
               Air
               ,
               or
               gentle
               Fire
               to
               dry
               them
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Lamella
               or
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Omentum
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Lower
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Omentum
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Foraminulae
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Arboreous
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Porous
               Cells
               ,
               whence
               the
               Fat
               or
               Oil
               is
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3
               ,
               4.
               
            
             
               These
               Figures
               of
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Pharynx
               are
               Copied
               after
               
               Bourdon's
               Table
               4.
               
               Fig.
               28
               ,
               29.
               and
               are
               agreeable
               to
               the
               Erroneous
               Descriptions
               of
               those
               Muscles
               by
               
                 Ryolan
                 ,
                 Spigelius
                 ,
                 Veslingius
                 ,
                 Bartholin
                 ,
              
               &c.
               
               The
               Muscular
               Contrivance
               of
               this
               Organ
               being
               vastly
               differing
               from
               what
               is
               here
               Exprest
               ,
               I
               shall
               add
               a
               Figure
               of
               it
               in
               the
               Appendix
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Stomach
               with
               Part
               of
               the
               Omentum
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               ;
               the
               Stomach
               being
               somewhat
               Extended
               with
               Wind
               ,
               and
               plac'd
               according
               to
               its
               proper
               Position
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               and
               Anterior
               Surface
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               Cover'd
               with
               a
               Common
               Membrane
               deriv'd
               from
               the
               Peritonaeum
               .
            
             
               B
               C
               ,
               Two
               Bunchings
               out
               in
               the
               Lower
               Part
               ,
               or
               Fundus
               of
               the
               Stomach
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Gula
               at
               the
               Upper
               or
               Left
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               call'd
               Cardia
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Intestinum
                 Duodenum
              
               Arising
               from
               the
               Right
               or
               Lower
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               call'd
               the
               Pylorus
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Superior
               Coronary
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               and
               the
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Eighth
               Pair
               Complicated
               with
               each
               other
               ,
               are
               here
               Elegantly
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               Coronary
               Artery
               and
               Vein
               of
               the
               Stomach
               .
               These
               Coronary
               Blood-Vessels
               are
               in
               like
               Manner
               distributed
               to
               the
               Omentum
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Superior
               or
               Outward
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Omentum
               ,
               hanging
               at
               the
               Bottom
               of
               the
               Stomach
               .
            
             
               In
               Dissecting
               the
               Morbid
               Body
               of
               a
               Young
               Gentle-woman
               ,
               by
               the
               Order
               of
               Dr.
               Radcliff
               :
               Amongst
               other
               Phaenomena
               of
               the
               Viscera
               in
               the
               Abdomen
               ,
               I
               found
               the
               Omentum
               so
               Lessen'd
               ,
               that
               at
               first
               Sight
               ,
               it
               Appear'd
               doubtful
               wether
               there
               ever
               had
               been
               such
               a
               Part
               fram'd
               in
               that
               Subject
               ;
               but
               upon
               stricter
               Enquiry
               ,
               that
               little
               Remains
               of
               it
               seem'd
               to
               Represent
               a
               Heap
               of
               small
               Glands
               ,
               containing
               a
               Steotomatous
               or
               Suet-like
               Matter
               .
               Nor
               was
               this
               Appearance
               of
               these
               Steotomae
               on
               the
               Omentum
               only
               ;
               but
               a
               Multitude
               of
               Little
               White
               Bodies
               or
               Specks
               (
               not
               unlike
               those
               of
               the
               Omentum
               )
               plac'd
               at
               some
               small
               Distance
               from
               each
               other
               ,
               were
               spread
               on
               the
               Outward
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               Intestines
               ,
               and
               Internal
               Surface
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               .
               In
               this
               Subject
               the
               External
               Parts
               of
               the
               Small
               Guts
               so
               stuck
               to
               each
               other
               ,
               that
               they
               seem'd
               to
               be
               contain'd
               in
               One
               proper
               Covering
               ,
               or
               not
               unlike
               the
               Brain
               Cover'd
               with
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               :
               so
               strictly
               did
               the
               Intestines
               Cleave
               to
               each
               other
               ,
               that
               it
               was
               not
               without
               Violence
               I
               could
               any
               where
               Divide
               them
               to
               see
               the
               Mesentery
               :
               By
               this
               means
               the
               Peristaltick
               Motion
               of
               the
               Guts
               must
               needs
               be
               very
               much
               Lessen'd
               ,
               if
               not
               quite
               Hindred
               ;
               so
               that
               it
               was
               no
               wonder
               to
               find
               their
               whole
               Chanel
               fill'd
               with
               Excrements
               ,
               even
               from
               the
               Pylorus
               to
               the
               Anus
               :
               Besides
               the
               Intestines
               had
               suffer'd
               Mortifications
               in
               divers
               Parts
               ,
               whilst
               other
               Parts
               of
               them
               were
               Inflam'd
               and
               very
               much
               Thickned
               :
               Nor
               was
               there
               any
               Part
               of
               them
               Appear'd
               of
               a
               Natural
               Constitution
               ;
               so
               general
               did
               this
               Diseas'd-Habit
               Affect
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ,
               in
               all
               its
               Expansions
               .
               Nor
               can
               I
               omit
               doing
               Justice
               to
               the
               Inquisitive
               Dr.
               Radcliff
               ,
               who
               upon
               frequent
               Observations
               of
               the
               Symptoms
               of
               this
               Case
               ,
               left
               this
               Prognostick
               ,
               
                 That
                 there
                 was
                 scarce
                 any
                 of
                 the
              
               Viscera
               
                 of
                 the
                 Lower
                 Belly
                 which
                 had
                 escap'd
                 the
                 Attacks
                 of
                 the
                 Disease
                 :
              
               All
               which
               he
               suppos'd
               to
               Arise
               from
               a
               Scrophulous-Habit
               ,
               as
               Appear'd
               by
               very
               large
               Tumified
               Glands
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               ;
               of
               which
               Two
               very
               Remarkable
               Ones
               had
               so
               Comprest
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               ,
               as
               very
               little
               (
               if
               any
               )
               of
               the
               Aliment
               could
               at
               Length
               pass
               into
               the
               Blood.
               Whence
               the
               Body
               became
               so
               very
               much
               Emaciated
               ,
               that
               scarce
               any
               thing
               but
               Bones
               Appear'd
               under
               the
               Skin
               :
               Nor
               did
               I
               any
               where
               see
               the
               least
               Lobe
               of
               Fat
               in
               the
               whole
               Dissection
               .
               From
               what
               has
               been
               above
               taken
               Notice
               of
               in
               the
               Omentum
               ,
               and
               Surface
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ,
               whether
               Covering
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               ,
               or
               Outsides
               of
               the
               Intestines
               ;
               It
               Appears
               ,
               that
               when
               the
               Mucus
               ,
               which
               is
               necessary
               in
               Lubricating
               the
               Intestines
               ,
               is
               obstructed
               ;
               those
               Parts
               are
               Subject
               to
               Adhesions
               ,
               and
               the
               Peristaltick
               Motion
               of
               the
               Latter
               can
               no
               longer
               be
               Perform'd
               ,
               and
               tho'
               the
               Existence
               of
               proper
               Glands
               for
               separating
               this
               Mucus
               from
               the
               Blood
               do's
               not
               offer
               in
               Common
               Dissections
               ,
               yet
               it
               may
               be
               hop'd
               that
               the
               frequent
               Examining
               of
               Morbid
               Bodies
               ,
               will
               at
               one
               time
               or
               other
               Demonstrate
               them
               ;
               which
               ,
               I
               am
               apt
               to
               believe
               ,
               not
               unlike
               the
               Sweating
               Glands
               of
               the
               Skin
               ,
               are
               plac'd
               at
               certain
               Distances
               ,
               and
               do
               discharge
               their
               Mucus
               from
               their
               Excretory
               Pores
               in
               like
               Manner
               ;
               which
               Mucus
               may
               joyn
               with
               Fatty
               Exsudations
               from
               the
               Omentum
               ,
               &c.
               and
               make
               a
               Composition
               necessary
               for
               making
               the
               Intestines
               slide
               on
               each
               other
               .
               That
               there
               is
               a
               Slimy
               Matter
               besmearing
               these
               Parts
               ,
               may
               be
               observ'd
               in
               Opening
               any
               Large
               Animal
               ,
               not
               Diseas'd
               ,
               soon
               after
               Death
               .
               It
               is
               well
               known
               to
               the
               Butchers
               that
               this
               Mucus
               makes
               the
               Hands
               Glib
               or
               Smooth
               ;
               to
               which
               End
               they
               commonly
               Use
               it
               ,
               so
               soon
               as
               they
               have
               Open'd
               any
               Animal
               ,
               by
               Rubbing
               their
               Hands
               with
               the
               Intestines
               .
               I
               know
               it
               's
               commonly
               suppos'd
               the
               Water
               in
               an
               Ascites
               proceeds
               from
               a
               broken
               Lymphe-Duct
               within
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               ;
               but
               it
               's
               not
               unlikely
               that
               that
               Scrosity
               may
               at
               least
               sometimes
               Arise
               from
               an
               Exsudation
               by
               thos●
               Glands
               ;
               since
               we
               constantly
               find
               the
               Peritonaeum
               very
               much
               Thickned
               in
               those
               Cases
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             THIRTY-FIFTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THE
             Membranes
             ,
             Glandules
             ,
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             &c.
             which
             compose
             the
             Stomach
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1
               ,
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               &c.
               Portions
               of
               the
               Stomach
               shewing
               its
               First
               or
               External
               Membrane
               ,
               borrow'd
               from
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ;
               the
               Veins
               being
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               are
               extended
               beyond
               their
               Natural
               Magnitude
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Superior
               and
               Inferior
               Coronary
               Veins
               ,
               Inosculating
               with
               each
               other
               in
               their
               Large
               Trunks
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Branches
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               on
               the
               External
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               Representing
               their
               Various
               Plexusses
               and
               Mutual
               Inosculations
               with
               each
               other
               ,
               viz.
               The
               Veins
               being
               join'd
               with
               Veins
               ,
               and
               Arteries
               with
               Arteries
               ,
               before
               they
               become
               Capillary
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Second
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               call'd
               the
               Muscular
               Membrane
               ,
               consisting
               of
               Two
               Orders
               of
               Fibres
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               First
               and
               Superior
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               ,
               continued
               between
               the
               Pylorus
               and
               Upper
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Stomach
               .
            
             
               A
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Second
               or
               Inferior
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               ,
               embracing
               the
               Fundus
               of
               the
               Stomach
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Second
               or
               Muscular
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Stomach
               Dri'd
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               First
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               ,
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Second
               ;
               Consisting
               of
               Fleshy
               and
               Tendinous
               Parts
               ,
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Their
               Fleshy
               Parts
               ,
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               Their
               Tendinous
               Parts
               .
            
             
               The
               Third
               ,
               or
               Internal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               may
               be
               Divided
               into
               Three
               Lamellae
               ,
               and
               therefore
               may
               be
               consider'd
               in
               a
               Threefold
               Manner
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Inward
               Surface
               of
               the
               Third
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               by
               Dr.
               Willis
               call'd
               the
               Villous
               Tunicle
               :
               The
               Villi
               or
               Velvet-like
               Surface
               of
               it
               ,
               is
               best
               shewn
               by
               dipping
               it
               in
               Scalding
               Water
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Glandules
               as
               they
               Appear
               obscurely
               under
               the
               Villi
               .
            
             
               C
               D
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Glandules
               and
               Vessels
               of
               the
               Stomach
               as
               they
               Appear
               where
               the
               Villi
               are
               taken
               off
               ,
               which
               may
               easily
               be
               done
               with
               the
               Assistance
               of
               Hot
               Water
               .
               This
               may
               be
               esteem'd
               the
               Second
               Part
               of
               the
               Third
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Stomach
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               The
               Third
               or
               Last
               Division
               of
               this
               Internal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               which
               Bidloo
               and
               others
               call
               the
               Tendinous
               ,
               and
               Dr.
               Willis
               the
               Nervous
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               Divers
               Perforations
               for
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               to
               pass
               thro'
               this
               Membrane
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               8.
               
            
             
               The
               whole
               Stomach
               partly
               laid
               Open
               to
               shew
               the
               Foldings
               of
               its
               Internal
               or
               Third
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Foldings
               of
               the
               Internal
               and
               Third
               Membrane
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Villous
               Surface
               do's
               Appear
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Upper
               and
               Left
               Orifice
               or
               Mouth
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               with
               Part
               of
               the
               Gula.
               
            
             
               C
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Intestinum
                 Duodenum
              
               continued
               to
               the
               Pylorus
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Pylorus
               or
               Lower
               and
               Right
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Stomach
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Antrum
                 Pylori
              
               .
            
             
               The
               Omentum
               and
               Superior
               and
               Inferior
               Coronary
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               are
               here
               again
               Exprest
               as
               in
               the
               preceding
               Table
               ,
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               9
               ,
               10.
               
            
             
               The
               Two
               Orifices
               of
               the
               Stomach
               when
               Dri'd
               after
               Inflation
               .
               Fig.
               9
               ,
               The
               Superior
               .
               Fig.
               10
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               .
            
             
               The
               Plexus
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               Appearing
               in
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               Fig.
               8.
               are
               Remarkable
               ,
               and
               their
               Appearance
               is
               owing
               to
               the
               Stagnation
               of
               the
               Blood
               in
               them
               .
               The
               Stomach
               cannot
               be
               Wounded
               into
               its
               Cavity
               ,
               but
               many
               of
               these
               Vessels
               ,
               especially
               the
               Arteries
               must
               be
               Divided
               ,
               and
               no
               small
               Effusion
               of
               Blood
               must
               necessarily
               happen
               ,
               which
               if
               it
               flows
               into
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               must
               either
               be
               Ejected
               by
               Vomit
               ,
               or
               pass
               down
               the
               Intestines
               with
               the
               Excrements
               ,
               if
               the
               Patient
               Survives
               :
               An
               Instance
               of
               which
               lately
               occur'd
               ,
               where
               my
               Friend
               Mr.
               Goodier
               call'd
               me
               to
               see
               the
               Patient
               ;
               who
               had
               receiv'd
               a
               Wound
               by
               a
               Sword
               on
               the
               Right
               Hypochondrium
               ,
               which
               past
               Obliquely
               to
               the
               
                 Linea
                 Alba
              
               ,
               immediately
               below
               the
               Ensiformal
               Cartilage
               :
               A
               Vomitting
               of
               Blood
               soon
               follow'd
               with
               Syncopes
               ,
               which
               denoted
               the
               Stomach
               to
               be
               Wounded
               ,
               not
               less
               than
               a
               Pound
               of
               Coagulated
               Blood
               being
               Ejected
               by
               the
               Mouth
               so
               soon
               as
               he
               was
               brought
               to
               his
               Bed.
               After
               some
               Hours
               the
               Vomiting
               ceas'd
               ,
               and
               the
               Pulse
               was
               recover'd
               which
               before
               was
               very
               feeble
               :
               Nor
               was
               it
               many
               Days
               before
               the
               Patient
               Recover'd
               and
               could
               Drink
               Two
               or
               Three
               Quarts
               of
               Strong
               Drink
               at
               a
               Sitting
               ;
               what
               became
               of
               him
               afterwards
               ,
               we
               could
               by
               no
               means
               learn.
               By
               this
               it
               Appears
               that
               Wounds
               in
               the
               Stomach
               are
               not
               always
               Mortal
               ,
               tho'
               they
               very
               frequently
               prove
               so
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Case
               of
               one
               Wounded
               in
               like
               manner
               with
               a
               Sword
               on
               the
               Left
               Hypochondrium
               ,
               in
               whom
               the
               Stomach
               was
               Wounded
               also
               ;
               but
               in
               this
               the
               Contents
               of
               the
               Stomach
               in
               no
               small
               Quantity
               ,
               were
               Discharg'd
               with
               a
               great
               deal
               of
               Blood
               into
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               ,
               as
               Appear'd
               on
               Dissecting
               his
               Body
               .
               If
               the
               Trunk
               of
               a
               Large
               Artery
               happens
               to
               be
               Wounded
               on
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               it
               is
               a
               great
               Chance
               but
               it
               proves
               Mortal
               thro'
               the
               Flux
               of
               Blood
               ,
               but
               if
               the
               Wound
               happens
               where
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               are
               Capillary
               ,
               the
               Flux
               of
               Blood
               do's
               not
               prove
               Fatal
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
           
             THE
             THIRTY-SIXTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               SHEWS
               the
               Lower
               Part
               of
               the
               Stomach
               and
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Intestinum
                 Duodenum
              
               continued
               to
               it
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Pancreas
               and
               Spleen
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Duodenum
               continued
               from
               the
               Right
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Stomach
               or
               Pylorus
               ,
               in
               a
               Semicircular
               Manner
               ;
               in
               which
               Bending
               of
               the
               Gut
               ,
               the
               Common
               Passage
               for
               the
               Gall
               and
               Pancreatick
               Juice
               empties
               it self
               N.
               This
               Curvation
               of
               the
               Intestine
               is
               here
               necessary
               ,
               left
               the
               Aliment
               after
               having
               undergone
               a
               Preparation
               in
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               should
               too
               quickly
               descend
               into
               the
               Small
               Guts
               ,
               before
               it
               has
               met
               with
               a
               due
               Mixture
               with
               the
               Gall
               and
               Pancreatick
               Juice
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Ductus
                 Pancreaticus
              
               made
               bare
               ,
               before
               it
               enters
               the
               External
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Intestine
               ,
               between
               which
               ,
               and
               the
               Internal
               Membrane
               ,
               it
               passes
               before
               it
               arrives
               at
               its
               Orifice
               N
               ,
               in
               Conjunction
               with
               the
               Common
               Gall-Duct
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Progress
               of
               the
               Common
               Gall-Duct
               in
               like
               Manner
               between
               the
               Membranes
               of
               the
               Gut
               ,
               before
               it
               arrives
               at
               its
               Orifice
               N
               ,
               in
               Conjunction
               with
               the
               Pancreatick
               Duct
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Superior
               and
               External
               Part
               of
               the
               Pancreas
               as
               it
               appears
               in
               its
               proper
               Situation
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               E
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Bottom
               of
               the
               Stomach
               next
               the
               
                 Pancreas
                 ,
                 Colon
              
               and
               Spleen
               ;
               whence
               divers
               Blood-Vessels
               are
               propagated
               ,
               especially
               Veins
               ,
               which
               discharge
               Part
               of
               the
               Blood
               from
               the
               Stomach
               into
               the
               
                 Ramus
                 Splenicus
              
               :
               The
               most
               remarkable
               of
               these
               have
               obtained
               the
               Denomination
               of
               
                 Vasa
                 Brevia
              
               ;
               to
               which
               ,
               some
               Anatomists
               have
               inconsiderately
               assign'd
               divers
               Uses
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Concave
               Part
               of
               the
               Spleen
               next
               the
               Pancreas
               and
               Stomach
               ,
               cover'd
               with
               its
               Proper
               Membrane
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               a
               Common
               one
               continu'd
               from
               the
               Peritonaeum
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               External
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Pancreas
               rais'd
               and
               pinn'd
               out
               :
            
             
               H
               ,
               That
               of
               the
               Spleen
               in
               like
               Manner
               rais'd
               and
               pinn'd
               out
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               I
               ,
               Divers
               Vesiculae
               or
               Airy
               Bladder-like
               Appearances
               ,
               occasion'd
               by
               the
               Breaking
               forth
               of
               the
               Wind
               into
               the
               Interstitia
               of
               the
               Common
               and
               Proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Pancreas
               ,
               in
               Blowing
               into
               its
               
                 Ductus
                 Excretorius
              
               B.
               
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               Duodenum
               open'd
               ,
               to
               shew
               the
               Common
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Gall
               and
               Pancreatick
               Duct
               .
            
             
               L
               L
               ,
               The
               Pancreatick
               Duct
               made
               bare
               in
               divers
               Parts
               of
               the
               Pancreas
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Common
               Gall-Duct
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               The
               Common
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Gall
               and
               Pancreatick
               Ducts
               ,
               opening
               into
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               
                 Intestinum
                 Duodenum
              
               .
            
             
               O
               O
               ,
               &c.
               The
               
                 Arteria
                 Splenica
              
               injected
               with
               Wax
               ;
               its
               Magnitude
               and
               Tortuous
               Progress
               being
               very
               remarkable
               as
               it
               is
               truly
               Exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               .
            
             
               P
               P
               ,
               Divers
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Pancreas
               arising
               out
               of
               the
               Splenick
               Artery
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               The
               
                 Vena
                 Splenica
              
               in
               whose
               Cavity
               a
               Blow-Pipe
               is
               inserted
               .
            
             
               R
               ,
               One
               of
               the
               Lympheducts
               arising
               from
               the
               Spleen
               pinn'd
               out
               .
               In
               Blowing
               into
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Splenica
              
               of
               a
               Castling
               Calf
               ,
               I
               have
               frequently
               observ'd
               the
               Lympheducts
               of
               the
               Spleen
               distended
               with
               Wind
               :
               The
               like
               has
               happen'd
               by
               Blowing
               into
               the
               Splenick
               Artery
               after
               tying
               the
               Vein
               ,
               tho'
               not
               so
               immediatly
               as
               by
               Blowing
               into
               the
               Vein
               .
               The
               same
               Phaenomena
               I
               have
               observ'd
               in
               the
               Penis
               of
               a
               Dog
               by
               Blowing
               into
               the
               Veins
               of
               that
               Part.
               The
               Accurate
               Nuck
               in
               his
               
                 Adenograp
                 .
                 Curio
              
               .
               p.
               52.
               tells
               us
               by
               forcibly
               Blowing
               into
               the
               Splenick
               Artery
               ,
               he
               has
               not
               only
               seen
               divers
               Vesiculae
               to
               rise
               on
               the
               Surface
               of
               the
               Spleen
               ;
               but
               divers
               Lymphatick
               Vessels
               arising
               from
               those
               Vesiculae
               and
               distended
               with
               Wind
               also
               :
               In
               the
               Subsequent
               Page
               he
               takes
               Notice
               that
               the
               Spermatick
               Vein
               of
               the
               Testicle
               being
               distended
               with
               Wind
               ,
               shews
               the
               Lympheducts
               on
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Vaginalis
              
               ,
               but
               in
               Blowing
               into
               the
               Spermatick
               Artery
               of
               that
               Part
               ,
               the
               Lymphe-Ducts
               are
               by
               no
               Means
               distended
               with
               Wind
               :
               By
               this
               ,
               it
               appears
               the
               Lympheducts
               of
               the
               Spleen
               ,
               Penis
               and
               Testicles
               ,
               do
               not
               arise
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               those
               Parts
               ,
               as
               the
               Lympheducts
               of
               other
               Parts
               seem
               to
               do
               ;
               but
               that
               the
               Venous
               Chanels
               of
               those
               Parts
               seem
               to
               give
               the
               immediate
               Originations
               to
               their
               Lympheducts
               .
            
             
               S
               ,
               The
               Spleen
               partly
               made
               bare
               of
               its
               Integument
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Ductus
                 Pancreaticus
              
               injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               and
               free'd
               from
               the
               Body
               of
               the
               Pancreas
               ,
               together
               with
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Intestinum
                 Duodenum
              
               and
               Common
               Gall-Duct
               dried
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Duodenum
               dried
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Ductus
                 Pancreaticus
              
               lying
               between
               the
               Membranes
               of
               the
               Intestine
               before
               it
               joyns
               with
               the
               Common
               Gall-Duct
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Common
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Gall
               and
               Pancreatick
               Duct
               opening
               into
               the
               Intestine
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Common
               Gall-Duct
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Pancreatick
               Duct
               .
            
             
               F
               G
               ,
               The
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Pancreatick
               Duct
               ,
               which
               arise
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Pancreas
               .
            
             
               Among
               the
               Opinions
               hitherto
               held
               concerning
               the
               Office
               of
               the
               Pancreatick
               Juice
               ,
               that
               of
               Brunnerus
               seems
               most
               probable
               :
               That
               like
               the
               Saliva
               it
               is
               a
               Dissolvent
               or
               Menstruum
               for
               a
               farther
               Concoction
               ,
               in
               Order
               to
               Chylification
               .
               Nor
               can
               I
               conceive
               the
               
                 Succus
                 Pancreaticus
              
               can
               Act
               with
               any
               Hostility
               by
               Way
               of
               Fermentation
               with
               the
               Bile
               and
               Aliment
               ,
               as
               
                 Franc.
                 Sylvius
                 ,
                 Bern.
                 Swalve
                 ,
                 Rog.
                 de
                 Gaff
                 ,
              
               and
               
                 Isbrand
                 de
                 Diemerbroek
              
               apprehend
               ;
               or
               that
               it
               takes
               off
               the
               Acrimony
               of
               the
               Gall
               ;
               which
               Latter
               ,
               would
               be
               to
               rectifie
               a
               Mistake
               in
               Nature
               that
               might
               have
               been
               avoided
               in
               the
               First
               Design
               :
               Wherefore
               the
               Pancreas
               appears
               to
               be
               a
               Large
               Salival
               Gland
               ,
               or
               One
               of
               the
               Largest
               of
               the
               Glands
               of
               the
               Intestines
               ,
               which
               continually
               supplies
               a
               proportionable
               Quantity
               of
               Liquor
               for
               the
               End
               above
               mention'd
               .
               Besides
               ,
               the
               Pancreas
               has
               another
               as
               it
               were
               accidental
               Use
               ,
               (
               viz.
               )
               To
               discharge
               those
               Serosities
               from
               the
               Blood
               which
               we
               find
               in
               taking
               of
               Purging
               Medicines
               ;
               Or
               at
               other
               Times
               ,
               when
               the
               Blood
               is
               disordered
               so
               that
               a
               Diarrhaea
               happens
               ,
               the
               Pancreas
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Glands
               of
               the
               Intestines
               are
               those
               Strainers
               which
               discharge
               the
               Vitiated
               Juices
               from
               the
               Mass
               of
               Blood.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Spleen
               with
               its
               Blood-Vessels
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Concave
               Part
               of
               the
               Spleen
               next
               the
               Stomach
               and
               Pancreas
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Splenick
               Arteries
               Injected
               with
               Red
               Wax
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Veins
               fill'd
               with
               White
               Wax
               .
            
             
               D
               E
               ,
               The
               Various
               Flexures
               and
               Contortions
               of
               the
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               near
               the
               Surface
               of
               the
               Spleen
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Spleen
               of
               some
               Quadrupede
               cut
               off
               ,
               after
               the
               whole
               Spleen
               has
               been
               distended
               with
               Wind
               and
               dried
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               External
               common
               Membrane
               deriv'd
               from
               the
               Peritonaeum
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Spleen
               .
            
             
               D
               E
               ,
               &c
               ,
               The
               Cells
               of
               its
               Cavernous
               Body
               ,
               which
               open
               into
               the
               Large
               Veins
               of
               the
               Spleen
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               Humane
               Spleen
               these
               Cells
               are
               more
               Numerous
               and
               Less
               ,
               and
               open
               into
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               .
               I
               know
               Ruysch
               in
               his
               Accurate
               
                 Anatomical
                 Epistles
              
               lately
               publish'd
               ,
               denies
               the
               Existence
               of
               these
               Cells
               as
               well
               as
               Fibres
               in
               the
               Humane
               Spleen
               ,
               but
               if
               you
               blow
               into
               the
               Splenick
               Vein
               ,
               or
               Inject
               Water
               by
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               when
               the
               Outward
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Spleen
               is
               not
               torn
               or
               broke
               in
               taking
               it
               out
               (
               which
               are
               very
               liable
               to
               happen
               in
               freeing
               the
               Humane
               Spleen
               )
               you
               may
               be
               satisfied
               of
               the
               Existence
               of
               its
               Cells
               ;
               and
               if
               you
               Inject
               the
               Veins
               with
               Wax
               you
               will
               find
               this
               Difference
               from
               that
               of
               a
               Quadrupede
               ;
               that
               the
               Wax
               in
               the
               Humane
               Spleen
               do's
               not
               reach
               the
               Cells
               ,
               except
               it
               is
               driven
               on
               with
               great
               Force
               ,
               and
               Injected
               very
               hot
               ;
               but
               if
               you
               Inject
               Wax
               into
               the
               Spleen
               of
               an
               Ox
               ,
               Dog
               ,
               or
               the
               like
               ,
               you
               will
               find
               all
               its
               Cells
               soon
               distended
               with
               it
               ,
               and
               the
               great
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Veins
               scarce
               to
               be
               distinguished
               ,
               by
               Reason
               the
               Wax
               so
               soon
               passes
               out
               of
               their
               Sides
               into
               the
               Cells
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Face
               of
               the
               Proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Spleen
               of
               a
               Quadrupede
               .
            
             
               B
               C
               ,
               The
               Fibres
               broke
               off
               which
               pass
               between
               the
               Cells
               to
               each
               Side
               of
               the
               proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Spleen
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               Some
               of
               the
               larger
               Cells
               of
               the
               Spleen
               of
               various
               Figures
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               The
               whole
               Spleen
               free'd
               from
               its
               External
               and
               Proper
               Membranes
               ,
               after
               its
               Blood-Vessels
               were
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Arteries
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Veins
               of
               the
               Spleen
               fill'd
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               a
               a
               b
               b
               ,
               The
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               before
               they
               enter
               the
               Body
               of
               the
               Spleen
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Capsula
               or
               Proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Spleen
               ,
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Nervous
               Plexus
               .
            
             
               E
               F
               ,
               The
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               at
               their
               Extremities
               ,
               into
               whose
               Sides
               the
               Cells
               of
               the
               Humane
               Spleen
               open
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Interstitia
               at
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               which
               Bidloo
               Calls
               the
               Cells
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Lympheducts
               ,
               and
               divers
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Spleen
               .
               The
               Texture
               and
               Composition
               of
               the
               Spleen
               being
               thus
               known
               ,
               we
               should
               in
               the
               next
               Place
               consider
               what
               Office
               this
               Part
               has
               in
               the
               Animal
               Oeconomy
               ;
               but
               that
               being
               a
               Task
               too
               great
               for
               the
               Limits
               of
               our
               present
               Page
               ,
               I
               shall
               insert
               my
               Thoughts
               of
               it
               elsewhere
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             THIRTY-SEVENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               Superior
               Convex
               Surface
               of
               the
               Liver
               here
               Printed
               on
               the
               Reverse
               .
            
             
               AA
               ,
               The
               Superior
               Gibbous
               Part
               of
               the
               Liver
               ,
               where
               divers
               Lympheducts
               may
               be
               seen
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Suspensorium
                 Hepatis
              
               ,
               fasten'd
               to
               the
               Diaphragma
               ,
               its
               Fore-Part
               being
               cut
               from
               the
               Ensiformal
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Diaphragma
               ;
               in
               which
               its
               Fleshy
               and
               Tendinous
               Parts
               appear
               together
               with
               its
               Blood-Vessels
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Umbilicale
              
               pinn'd
               out
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Liver
               which
               is
               Extended
               towards
               the
               Left
               Side
               ,
               and
               rests
               on
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               and
               is
               sometimes
               (
               as
               in
               this
               Subject
               )
               divided
               into
               Lobes
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               Seems
               to
               be
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Diaphragma
                 :
                 Bidloo
              
               makes
               it
               to
               be
               a
               Ligament
               that
               adheres
               to
               the
               Ensiformal
               Cartilage
               ,
               which
               I
               can
               by
               no
               Means
               conceive
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               External
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Liver
               ,
               continued
               from
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ,
               rais'd
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Inferior
               Concave
               Surface
               of
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Right
               Side
               of
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Suspensorium
                 Hepatis
              
               pinn'd
               out
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Umbilicale
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               External
               and
               Common
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Liver
               rais'd
               and
               pinn'd
               out
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Liver
               cut
               into
               ,
               to
               shew
               its
               Inside
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Diaphragm
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Arteria
                 Hepatica
              
               ,
               which
               we
               commonly
               find
               divided
               into
               Two
               Branches
               or
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Size
               of
               this
               here
               Exprest
               ,
               before
               they
               enter
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               as
               it
               enters
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               
                 Capsula
                 Communis
              
               or
               Production
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ,
               which
               is
               said
               to
               inclose
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
                 ,
                 Arteria
                 Hepatica
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Ductus
                 Bilarii
              
               in
               their
               Progress
               thro'
               the
               Liver
               ;
               which
               Description
               of
               it
               ,
               I
               am
               apt
               to
               think
               ,
               is
               rather
               imposed
               on
               it
               in
               Favor
               of
               some
               Conjectures
               concerning
               the
               Office
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               within
               the
               Liver
               ,
               than
               any
               real
               Appearance
               of
               it
               in
               Nature
               ;
               tho'
               it
               is
               very
               plain
               those
               Vessels
               within
               the
               Liver
               do
               appear
               cover'd
               with
               a
               Common
               Inclosure
               ;
               the
               like
               of
               which
               may
               be
               seen
               on
               the
               Vessels
               within
               the
               Spleen
               ,
               Kidneys
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               Extended
               on
               a
               Pencil
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               Gall-Bladder
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               A
               Lympheduct
               passing
               on
               the
               Surface
               of
               the
               Gall-Bladder
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               The
               
                 Ductus
                 Cysticus
              
               .
            
             
               O
               ,
               The
               Common
               Gall-Duct
               .
            
             
               P
               ,
               The
               Lympheducts
               of
               the
               Liver
               marching
               on
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               towards
               their
               Lymphatick
               Glands
               ,
               placed
               on
               the
               Trunk
               of
               that
               Vein
               below
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               Concerning
               the
               Distribution
               of
               the
               Vessels
               of
               the
               Liver
               ,
               and
               the
               intimate
               Structure
               of
               that
               great
               Gland
               ,
               consult
               the
               following
               Table
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
           
             THE
             THIRTY-EIGHTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Liver
               Boyl'd
               and
               View'd
               with
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Outward
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Liver
               Rais'd
               and
               Pinn'd
               out
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Lobuli
               compos'd
               of
               small
               Glands
               ,
               of
               Various
               Figures
               and
               Sizes
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Membranes
               continued
               from
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               which
               divide
               the
               Lobuli
               from
               each
               other
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               of
               which
               some
               are
               Broken
               off
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Gall-Ducts
               ,
               many
               of
               which
               are
               in
               like
               Manner
               Broken
               off
               as
               they
               Arise
               from
               the
               Lobuli
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               A
               Branch
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               .
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               Its
               Extremities
               within
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               A
               Branch
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               .
            
             
               b
               b
               ,
               Its
               Extremities
               in
               like
               Manner
               not
               join'd
               with
               the
               former
               ,
               says
               Bidloo
               .
               In
               preparing
               the
               Liver
               to
               Inject
               its
               Blood-Vessels
               with
               Wax
               ,
               I
               found
               such
               a
               Communication
               between
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               and
               Porta
               ,
               that
               I
               could
               by
               no
               means
               but
               Conceive
               the
               Extremities
               of
               those
               Vessels
               are
               continued
               Chanels
               ;
               for
               by
               pouring
               Water
               or
               Spirit
               of
               Wine
               into
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               ,
               with
               the
               assistance
               of
               a
               Tunnel
               only
               ,
               I
               found
               it
               soon
               run
               out
               again
               by
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               :
               Nor
               do's
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Liver
               seem
               less
               Communicative
               with
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               ;
               for
               by
               Syringing
               Water
               into
               the
               Hepatick
               Arteries
               ,
               it
               easily
               passes
               into
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               ,
               or
               Porta
               .
               In
               Blowing
               into
               the
               Hepatick
               Arteries
               or
               Gall-Ducts
               ,
               I
               commonly
               find
               the
               Lympheducts
               of
               the
               Liver
               Distended
               with
               Wind.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Gall-Bladder
               and
               its
               Ducts
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Ductus
                 Cysticus
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Cysticus
              
               Appearing
               after
               Raising
               the
               External
               .
               This
               Internal
               Membrane
               is
               much
               Larger
               than
               the
               External
               ,
               by
               which
               means
               it
               Frames
               divers
               Valves
               or
               Rugae
               in
               the
               Cavity
               of
               this
               Duct
               .
               These
               Rugae
               (
               which
               some
               call
               Valves
               )
               prevent
               the
               perpetual
               Effusion
               of
               the
               Bile
               into
               the
               Duodenum
               :
               Nor
               do
               they
               Oppose
               the
               Retrocession
               of
               the
               Gall
               by
               the
               Cystick-Duct
               ,
               as
               some
               pretend
               ;
               for
               if
               you
               either
               Blow
               ,
               or
               Inject
               Water
               into
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Communis
              
               ,
               the
               Gall-Bladder
               soon
               becomes
               Distended
               .
               In
               Examining
               the
               Gall-Ducts
               of
               a
               Lamb's
               Liver
               ,
               I
               clearly
               Discover'd
               divers
               Ducts
               of
               Gall
               Arising
               from
               the
               Liver
               ,
               and
               emptying
               themselves
               into
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Cysticus
              
               :
               Nor
               could
               I
               by
               any
               means
               observe
               in
               that
               Subject
               any
               Gall-Ducts
               Arising
               from
               the
               Liver
               ,
               and
               Discharging
               their
               Contents
               into
               the
               Gall-Bladder
               at
               its
               Neck
               ,
               as
               some
               pretend
               .
               I
               have
               more
               than
               once
               emptied
               the
               Gall-Bladder
               of
               a
               Humane
               Body
               ,
               and
               made
               a
               Ligature
               on
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Cysticus
              
               some
               Distance
               from
               its
               Neck
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               forcibly
               Distended
               the
               Hepatick-Ducts
               with
               Wind
               ,
               but
               could
               by
               no
               means
               Raise
               the
               Gall-Bladder
               :
               I
               have
               also
               made
               the
               same
               Experiment
               in
               Quadrupedes
               with
               Mercury
               ,
               by
               Injecting
               it
               by
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Hepaticus
              
               ,
               but
               could
               not
               find
               it
               come
               into
               the
               Gall-Bladder
               immediately
               ;
               but
               in
               the
               
                 Ductae
                 Cysticus
              
               about
               a
               Quarter
               of
               an
               Inch
               from
               the
               Gall-Bladder
               ,
               I
               have
               seen
               the
               Mercury
               Arise
               from
               Two
               or
               Three
               Gall-Ducts
               proceeding
               from
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Ductus
                 Hepaticus
              
               cut
               from
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Communis
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Gall-Bladder
               partly
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 Cysticus
              
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Divers
               Blood-Vessels
               Propagated
               between
               the
               Gall-Bladder
               and
               Liver
               ,
               which
               Bidloo
               takes
               to
               be
               some
               of
               the
               Lesser
               Cystick-Ducts
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               One
               of
               the
               Larger
               of
               the
               last
               mentioned
               Vessels
               ,
               which
               Bidloo
               in
               like
               Manner
               Describes
               as
               One
               of
               the
               Largest
               of
               the
               Cystick-Ducts
               ,
               with
               its
               Orifice
               E
               F
               ,
               looking
               into
               the
               Gall-Bladder
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Liver
               and
               Gall-Ducts
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               and
               free'd
               from
               their
               Extremities
               which
               compose
               the
               Glands
               .
               This
               Scheme
               or
               Distribution
               of
               these
               Vessels
               may
               be
               prepar'd
               after
               the
               following
               Manner
               .
               The
               whole
               Liver
               being
               taken
               out
               with
               the
               Trunks
               of
               its
               Blood-Vessels
               left
               to
               it
               of
               a
               convenient
               length
               ;
               wash
               out
               the
               Blood
               from
               its
               Vessels
               by
               Syringing
               of
               warm
               Water
               into
               Them
               :
               This
               done
               ,
               fill
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               with
               Spirit
               of
               Wine
               or
               Alum-Water
               ,
               or
               Inject
               them
               with
               Oyl
               of
               Turpentine
               a
               little
               warm'd
               .
               After
               some
               Hours
               ,
               dip
               the
               whole
               Liver
               in
               hot
               Water
               ,
               and
               Inject
               Wax
               of
               a
               different
               Colour
               into
               all
               its
               Blood-Vessels
               and
               Secretory-Ducts
               ;
               the
               Arteries
               being
               fill'd
               with
               Red
               ;
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               with
               a
               Dark
               Colour
               ;
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               of
               a
               Distinguishable
               Colour
               ;
               and
               the
               Gall-Ducts
               with
               Yellow
               Wax
               :
               This
               done
               ,
               free
               the
               Liver
               of
               its
               Outward
               Membranes
               ,
               and
               with
               your
               Fore-Finger
               begin
               to
               divide
               the
               Lobuli
               from
               each
               other
               ,
               by
               thrusting
               it
               thro'
               the
               Glandulous
               Surface
               even
               to
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Large
               Blood-Vessels
               .
               The
               Lobuli
               of
               the
               Liver
               being
               very
               much
               divided
               ,
               dip
               the
               whole
               in
               warm
               Water
               ,
               and
               with
               a
               stubbed
               Brush
               ,
               made
               of
               the
               stiffest
               Hogs-Bristles
               ,
               begin
               to
               Brush
               off
               the
               Glandules
               of
               the
               Liver
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Injected
               Blood-Vessels
               .
               In
               doing
               of
               this
               be
               Cautious
               ,
               left
               you
               break
               off
               the
               Large
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Injected
               Vessels
               ,
               always
               remembring
               to
               begin
               at
               the
               Surface
               of
               the
               Glands
               ,
               and
               after
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Injected
               Vessels
               are
               clear'd
               ,
               than
               proceed
               to
               their
               Larger
               Branches
               and
               Trunks
               .
               If
               due
               care
               is
               taken
               in
               managing
               this
               Preparation
               of
               the
               Vessels
               of
               the
               Liver
               ,
               you
               will
               find
               them
               more
               Numerous
               than
               this
               Figure
               Represents
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Right
               Side
               of
               the
               Liver
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Left.
               
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Larger
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Hepatick
               Arteries
               Injected
               with
               Red
               Wax
               .
            
             
               c
               c
               c
               ,
               The
               Branches
               of
               the
               Arteries
               which
               do
               Accompany
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               ,
               and
               Hepatick
               Gall-Ducts
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               fill'd
               with
               Green
               Wax
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Diaphragm
               .
            
             
               F
               G
               H
               ,
               The
               Three
               Large
               Branches
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               within
               the
               Liver
               ,
               lying
               towards
               its
               Superior
               and
               Convex
               Surface
               ,
               and
               not
               Associating
               with
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               and
               other
               Vessels
               ,
               framing
               Acute
               Angles
               in
               their
               Intersecting
               those
               of
               the
               Porta
               .
            
             
               g
               h
               i
               ,
               The
               Lesser
               Branches
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               cut
               off
               ,
               after
               being
               Injected
               with
               White
               Wax
               .
            
             
               L
               L
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Capsula
               which
               includes
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               ,
               Hepatick
               Arteries
               ,
               and
               Gall-Ducts
               together
               .
            
             
               1
               ,
               2
               ,
               3
               ,
               4
               ,
               5
               ,
               The
               Large
               Branches
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               Gall-Bladder
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               The
               Roots
               of
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Cysthepatici
              
               ,
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
            
             
               O
               ,
               The
               
                 Ductus
                 Cysticus
              
               .
            
             
               P
               ,
               The
               
                 Ductus
                 Hepatius
              
               :
               p
               ,
               their
               Branches
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               The
               
                 Ductus
                 Communis
              
               .
            
             
               R
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Umbilicale
              
               .
            
             
               S
               ,
               The
               
                 Canalis
                 Venosus
              
               between
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               and
               Cava
               ,
               become
               a
               Ligament
               .
            
             
               T
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Hepatick
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               V
               ,
               Some
               of
               the
               Lympheducts
               of
               the
               Liver
               Marching
               on
               the
               Capsula
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               .
            
             
               Hence
               it
               Appears
               the
               Liver
               is
               a
               Glandulous
               Body
               compos'd
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               Excretory-Ducts
               ,
               Nerves
               and
               Lympheducts
               .
               The
               Vessels
               which
               Import
               Blood
               into
               it
               ,
               are
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               and
               
                 Arteria
                 Hepatica
              
               ;
               at
               their
               Extremities
               Arise
               ,
               or
               are
               Continued
               ,
               the
               Branches
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               :
               Nor
               are
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Liver
               equally
               lessen'd
               like
               the
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               of
               other
               Parts
               ,
               as
               the
               above
               mention'd
               Experiment
               of
               pouring
               Water
               only
               into
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               ,
               and
               its
               running
               out
               by
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               do's
               Evince
               ;
               or
               by
               gentle
               Syringing
               Water
               by
               the
               Hepatick
               Arteries
               ,
               and
               it
               s
               easily
               passing
               by
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               ;
               so
               that
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Hepatick
               Blood-Vessels
               seem
               to
               be
               largely
               Inosculated
               with
               each
               other
               ,
               especially
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               with
               the
               Cava
               .
               The
               Gall-Ducts
               Arise
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               and
               tho'
               they
               Communicate
               immediately
               with
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               yet
               Liquors
               convey'd
               into
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               and
               the
               like
               ,
               do
               not
               so
               readily
               pass
               into
               these
               Ducts
               as
               the
               other
               Blood-Vessels
               ;
               because
               the
               Ortiolae
               in
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               whence
               those
               Ducts
               Arise
               ,
               are
               much
               less
               than
               the
               Pore
               of
               those
               Vessels
               themselves
               .
               Besides
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Liver
               ,
               which
               are
               furnish'd
               with
               Pores
               for
               the
               Secretion
               of
               the
               Gall
               ,
               there
               are
               still
               other
               Branches
               of
               the
               same
               Vessels
               which
               Administer
               a
               proper
               Nourishment
               to
               the
               Gland
               it self
               .
               By
               
                 the
                 Gland
                 it self
              
               .
               I
               mean
               the
               Parietes
               of
               those
               Vessels
               which
               compose
               the
               Liver
               :
               For
               I
               cannot
               conceive
               the
               Liver
               to
               be
               any
               thing
               else
               then
               a
               Compages
               of
               Vessels
               more
               or
               less
               Distended
               .
               As
               there
               is
               a
               proper
               Nourishment
               due
               to
               
                 the
                 Gland
                 it self
              
               ,
               so
               it
               is
               Necessary
               ,
               that
               besides
               its
               Secretory-Ducts
               ,
               the
               Liver
               should
               be
               also
               furnish'd
               with
               Lympheducts
               ,
               to
               carry
               off
               the
               Redundancy
               of
               its
               Nutritive
               Juice
               ,
               continually
               supplied
               by
               the
               Arteries
               ;
               but
               of
               this
               elsewhere
               .
               The
               Nerves
               are
               necessary
               in
               the
               Liver
               ,
               as
               they
               are
               in
               all
               Parts
               where
               Membranes
               are
               Useful
               ;
               not
               because
               they
               Import
               any
               Liquor
               as
               some
               conceive
               ,
               as
               an
               Ingredient
               to
               the
               Matter
               separated
               ;
               but
               by
               the
               Nerves
               the
               Tone
               of
               Parts
               is
               in
               a
               great
               Measure
               maintain'd
               ;
               for
               if
               the
               Nerves
               are
               Relaxt
               ,
               the
               Parts
               to
               which
               they
               belong
               ,
               suffers
               an
               Atrophia
               ,
               tho
               the
               Blood
               has
               its
               free
               Accession
               to
               the
               Part
               as
               before
               ;
               but
               of
               this
               also
               in
               another
               Place
               .
            
             
               In
               Dissecting
               a
               Morbid
               Body
               which
               before
               Death
               was
               much
               afflicted
               with
               Hypochondriack
               Pains
               ,
               I
               found
               the
               Liver
               very
               much
               lessen'd
               ,
               and
               its
               Surface
               uneven
               ,
               not
               unlike
               a
               heap
               of
               small
               Bullets
               .
               In
               Dissecting
               the
               Body
               of
               a
               Noble-Man
               afflicted
               with
               the
               like
               Pains
               ,
               I
               found
               that
               Part
               of
               the
               Liver
               which
               Appears
               below
               the
               Cartilaginous
               Endings
               of
               the
               Ribs
               ,
               of
               a
               Livid
               Colour
               ,
               and
               the
               whole
               somewhat
               Lessen'd
               ,
               the
               Gall-Bladder
               very
               much
               Contracted
               ,
               and
               fill'd
               with
               Two
               or
               Three
               small
               Stones
               ;
               the
               Peritonaeum
               on
               the
               Parts
               adjacent
               being
               much
               Thickned
               ,
               and
               its
               Blood-Vessels
               Turgid
               .
               In
               the
               Body
               of
               a
               Young
               Lady
               (
               reduc'd
               to
               a
               Marasmus
               from
               a
               Scrophulous
               Indisposition
               )
               I
               found
               the
               whole
               Surface
               of
               the
               Liver
               very
               Black.
               In
               a
               Person
               who
               is
               now
               Living
               ,
               and
               in
               tollerable
               Health
               ,
               I
               could
               Three
               Years
               since
               discover
               (
               by
               feeling
               the
               Right
               Hypochondrium
               )
               the
               Lower
               Part
               of
               the
               Liver
               exceedingly
               Tumified
               and
               Hard
               ;
               which
               is
               now
               intirely
               Vanish't
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             THIRTY-NINTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               PART
               of
               the
               Iejunum
               or
               Hungry
               Gut
               ,
               together
               with
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Surface
               of
               the
               Iejunum
               Cover'd
               with
               its
               External
               Membrane
               continued
               from
               that
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               ,
               it
               being
               produc'd
               from
               ,
               or
               a
               continuation
               of
               the
               Internal
               Lamina
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Vasa
                 Lactea
              
               not
               Extended
               ,
               being
               here
               Exprest
               by
               simple
               Lines
               only
               ,
               as
               they
               pass
               from
               the
               Intestines
               thro'
               the
               Mesentery
               .
            
             
               The
               Lacteal-Vessels
               carry
               both
               Chyle
               and
               Lympha
               Promiscuously
               ,
               and
               have
               a
               Two-fold
               Origin
               ;
               the
               One
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Arteries
               ;
               the
               Other
               from
               divers
               Ostiolae
               in
               the
               Cavities
               of
               the
               Guts
               :
               The
               Former
               Appears
               not
               only
               by
               Injecting
               of
               Mercury
               by
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               D
               ,
               and
               its
               passing
               into
               the
               Lacteals
               B
               ;
               but
               when
               these
               Milky-Vessels
               are
               not
               imploy'd
               in
               conveying
               of
               Chyle
               ,
               they
               are
               constantly
               charg'd
               with
               Lympha
               :
               The
               Latter
               Origin
               of
               these
               Milky-Tubes
               from
               divers
               Ostiolae
               in
               the
               Cavities
               of
               the
               Guts
               ,
               Appear
               in
               their
               receiving
               of
               Chyle
               from
               thence
               .
               The
               Lympha
               from
               the
               Arteries
               meets
               with
               the
               Chyle
               at
               the
               beginnings
               of
               the
               Lacteal-Vessels
               ,
               by
               which
               means
               its
               Progress
               towards
               the
               next
               Lymphatick
               Gland
               is
               promoted
               :
               The
               
                 Vasa
                 Lactea
                 primi
                 generis
              
               ,
               Arise
               with
               Capillary
               Branches
               very
               much
               Divided
               ,
               and
               become
               United
               into
               large
               Trunks
               ,
               in
               the
               Mid-way
               between
               the
               Intestine
               and
               Lymphatick
               Gland
               ;
               and
               are
               sometimes
               again
               Divided
               before
               their
               Entrance
               into
               the
               Vesiculae
               of
               the
               Gland
               .
               The
               Chyle
               and
               Lympha
               thus
               receiv'd
               into
               the
               Vesiculae
               of
               the
               Mesenterick
               Glands
               ,
               there
               meets
               with
               other
               Lympha
               brought
               into
               those
               Vesiculae
               by
               the
               Arteries
               ;
               whereby
               the
               Chyle
               is
               not
               only
               more
               diluted
               ,
               but
               its
               Ascension
               towards
               the
               
                 Vesica
                 Chyli
              
               is
               promoted
               ,
               by
               its
               receiving
               a
               fresh
               Impetus
               from
               the
               Lympha
               so
               mixing
               with
               it
               .
               Thus
               we
               may
               conceive
               the
               Progress
               of
               Chyle
               towards
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Commune
              
               is
               carri'd
               on
               ,
               by
               means
               of
               the
               Lympha
               joining
               with
               it
               in
               its
               several
               Stages
               thither
               .
               Nor
               would
               the
               Valves
               of
               the
               Lacteal-Vessels
               be
               of
               any
               considerable
               Use
               ,
               if
               the
               Chyle
               did
               not
               receive
               an
               Additional
               Impetus
               from
               the
               Arteries
               in
               their
               supplying
               it
               with
               fresh
               Lympha
               ,
               as
               well
               in
               the
               Lymphatick
               Glands
               ,
               as
               at
               the
               Beginnings
               of
               the
               
                 Vasa
                 Lactea
                 primi
                 generis
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               External
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Intestine
               Rais'd
               and
               Pinn'd
               out
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Muscular
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Intestine
               lying
               immediately
               under
               the
               External
               Membrane
               consisting
               of
               a
               Longitudinal
               and
               Circular
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Mesenterick
               Arteries
               Propagated
               to
               the
               Intestine
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Veins
               which
               Arise
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               and
               discharge
               the
               Refluent
               Blood
               into
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               A
               Branch
               of
               the
               Mesenterick
               Nerve
               made
               bare
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Vasa
                 Lactea
                 primi
                 generis
              
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               Intestine
               Adorn'd
               with
               Blood-Vessels
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               Glands
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               into
               whose
               Vesiculae
               the
               
                 Vasa
                 Lactea
                 primi
                 generis
              
               Import
               their
               Contents
               ,
               as
               above
               noted
               ;
               whence
               the
               
                 Vasa
                 Lactea
                 secundi
                 generis
              
               Arise
               ,
               and
               convey
               their
               Contents
               in
               like
               manner
               ,
               either
               into
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               immediately
               ,
               or
               into
               the
               
                 Pancreas
                 Asellii
              
               .
               Tab.
               40.
               
               L
               ,
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Iejunum
               dri'd
               after
               being
               Distended
               with
               Wind
               ,
               whereby
               its
               
                 Valvuiae
                 Conniventes
              
               ,
               fram'd
               by
               the
               loosness
               of
               its
               Inward
               Membranes
               Appear
               as
               here
               Represented
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               C
               D
               ,
               The
               Various
               Disposition
               of
               the
               Valves
               in
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Intestine
               ;
               some
               of
               them
               taking
               up
               near
               Two
               Thirds
               of
               the
               Circumference
               of
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Gut
               ,
               A
               ,
               Inferior
               :
               Others
               B
               D
               ,
               about
               a
               Fourth
               Part
               ;
               whilst
               others
               are
               Semicircular
               .
            
             
               As
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Duodenum
               next
               the
               Pylorus
               is
               Furnish'd
               with
               large
               Valves
               ,
               so
               they
               gradually
               Decrease
               in
               the
               small
               Guts
               as
               well
               in
               Magnitude
               as
               Number
               ,
               as
               they
               approach
               the
               Lower
               Parts
               of
               those
               Intestines
               towards
               the
               Colon
               :
               Hence
               the
               
                 Valvulae
                 Conniventes
              
               of
               the
               Duodenum
               are
               very
               Large
               ;
               that
               at
               the
               Pylorus
               being
               Circular
               ;
               The
               Valves
               of
               the
               Iejunum
               less
               ;
               those
               of
               the
               Ilium
               still
               less
               ;
               insomuch
               ,
               that
               the
               Lower
               Part
               of
               this
               Gut
               next
               the
               Colon
               scarce
               affords
               any
               Appearance
               of
               them
               :
               See
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               These
               Valves
               are
               compos'd
               of
               the
               Internal
               Membranes
               of
               the
               Intestines
               ,
               which
               being
               much
               larger
               then
               the
               Exterior
               ,
               are
               necessarily
               laid
               up
               in
               Foldings
               ,
               and
               Frame
               these
               Parts
               .
               These
               Connivent
               Valves
               hinder
               the
               quick
               Descent
               of
               the
               Contents
               of
               the
               Intestines
               ,
               least
               the
               Chyle
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Excrementitious
               Parts
               should
               escape
               the
               Mouth
               of
               the
               Lacteal
               Veins
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Ilium
               dri'd
               after
               Inflation
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               Intestine
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Internal
               —
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Valves
               of
               this
               Intestine
               much
               less
               then
               in
               the
               Iejunum
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               That
               end
               of
               the
               Ilium
               next
               the
               Iejunum
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               That
               next
               the
               Colon.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Colon
               ,
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Coecum
               ,
               together
               with
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               Ilium
               dri'd
               after
               Inflation
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Coecum
               Adorn'd
               with
               its
               Blood-Vessels
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Colon
               plac'd
               in
               the
               Right
               Ilia
               G
               G
               ,
               Tab.
               33.
               and
               C
               ,
               Tab.
               40.
               
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Its
               Blood-Vessels
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Ilium
               as
               it
               enters
               the
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Colon.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               same
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Colon
                 ,
                 Ilium
              
               ,
               and
               Coecum
               ,
               Exprest
               in
               the
               precedent
               Figure
               ,
               Open'd
               to
               shew
               the
               Valves
               of
               the
               Colon
               ,
               and
               the
               entrance
               of
               the
               Ilium
               into
               the
               Colon
               as
               they
               Appear
               after
               Inflation
               and
               drying
               them
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Valve
               at
               the
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Coecum
               in
               the
               Colon.
               
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Colon
               Open'd
               to
               shew
               its
               Inside
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Ilium
               before
               it
               enters
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Colon.
               
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               End
               of
               the
               Ilium
               which
               hangs
               down
               loose
               into
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Colon
               ,
               as
               Appears
               before
               drying
               of
               the
               Guts
               ,
               which
               here
               Frames
               an
               Appearance
               of
               a
               Connivent
               Valve
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Ilium
               Opening
               into
               the
               Colon.
               
            
             
               By
               this
               Contrivance
               we
               may
               easily
               conceive
               how
               the
               Excrements
               ,
               when
               they
               have
               past
               the
               Small
               Guts
               into
               the
               Colon
               ,
               cannot
               return
               again
               :
               A
               likeness
               of
               which
               ,
               may
               be
               imitated
               if
               you
               take
               a
               Piece
               of
               Gut
               and
               put
               One
               End
               of
               it
               into
               the
               Neck
               of
               a
               Bottle
               ,
               and
               tying
               the
               other
               end
               of
               the
               Gut
               on
               the
               Outside
               of
               the
               Nosel
               of
               the
               Bottle
               ,
               filling
               the
               Bottle
               with
               Water
               by
               that
               Gut
               ;
               and
               tho'
               you
               afterwards
               turn
               the
               Nose
               of
               the
               Bottle
               downwards
               ,
               yet
               no
               Part
               of
               the
               contain'd
               Water
               can
               come
               out
               ,
               till
               it
               has
               so
               Prest
               out
               the
               end
               of
               the
               Gut
               in
               the
               Bottle
               that
               it
               becomes
               Inverted
               .
               This
               may
               serve
               to
               give
               us
               an
               Idea
               how
               it
               may
               happen
               in
               this
               Part
               when
               the
               Excrements
               are
               rejected
               by
               the
               Mouth
               in
               Cholick
               and
               Iliack
               Passions
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               large
               Valves
               of
               the
               Colon
               ,
               which
               like
               those
               of
               the
               small
               Guts
               are
               partly
               Fram'd
               by
               the
               Loosness
               of
               the
               Internal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Gut
               ;
               and
               are
               here
               in
               the
               Colon
               chiefly
               made
               by
               a
               Corrugation
               or
               Folding
               of
               the
               Membranes
               of
               the
               Gut
               it self
               ,
               by
               means
               of
               its
               Ligaments
               ,
               Tab.
               40.
               
               Fig.
               1.
               
               D
               ,
               and
               Tab.
               54.
               d
               d.
               These
               Ligaments
               of
               the
               Colon
               are
               truly
               Fleshy
               Fibres
               ,
               and
               I
               am
               apt
               to
               think
               are
               capable
               of
               contracting
               themselves
               and
               promote
               the
               passing
               on
               of
               the
               Contents
               of
               this
               Gut.
               When
               the
               Ligaments
               of
               the
               Colon
               are
               divided
               ,
               the
               Foldings
               of
               it
               which
               help
               to
               compose
               its
               Valves
               ,
               are
               loosned
               ,
               and
               the
               whole
               Gut
               becomes
               almost
               plain
               without
               any
               Inequalities
               .
               As
               the
               Ligaments
               of
               the
               Colon
               Descend
               towards
               the
               Rectum
               they
               begin
               to
               Expand
               themselves
               ,
               and
               at
               length
               Frame
               an
               External
               Membrane
               for
               the
               Rectum
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Concave
               Surface
               of
               the
               Cells
               of
               the
               Colon.
               
            
             
               I
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               External
               Convex
               Surface
               of
               the
               Cells
               of
               the
               same
               Gut.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Rectum
               with
               Part
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               continued
               to
               it
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               Rectum
               ,
               on
               which
               the
               Ligaments
               of
               the
               Colon
               compose
               a
               Tegument
               ,
               whose
               Fibres
               are
               very
               strong
               ,
               and
               are
               Extended
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Fatty
               Appendages
               ,
               whose
               Extremities
               have
               divers
               Figures
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Mesentery
               .
            
             
               F
               G
               ,
               The
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               The
               Rectum
               Divided
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               ,
               and
               Expanded
               to
               shew
               its
               Inside
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Internal
               Tunicle
               of
               the
               Rectum
               ,
               which
               being
               much
               larger
               than
               the
               External
               ,
               necessarily
               Appears
               in
               many
               Folds
               in
               this
               Position
               .
               This
               Internal
               Tunick
               of
               the
               Rectum
               is
               compos'd
               of
               a
               vast
               Number
               of
               Glands
               ,
               to
               which
               divers
               Blood-Vessels
               belong
               ;
               of
               these
               ,
               the
               Veins
               are
               considerably
               Large
               and
               are
               commonly
               fill'd
               with
               Blood
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               their
               Position
               and
               the
               Blood
               Ascending
               directly
               in
               them
               ;
               whence
               it
               happens
               they
               become
               very
               much
               Distended
               when
               the
               Blood
               do's
               not
               readily
               pass
               on
               in
               their
               Superior
               Trunks
               ;
               or
               when
               any
               sharp
               Humor
               Affects
               this
               Membrane
               ,
               these
               Veins
               become
               Tumified
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               discharge
               their
               Blood
               ,
               and
               are
               call'd
               
                 Haemorrhoides
                 Apertae
              
               ;
               if
               no
               Blood
               flows
               from
               those
               Tumified
               Veins
               ,
               they
               are
               call'd
               
                 Haemorrhoides
                 Caecae
              
               .
               The
               Glandules
               imploy'd
               in
               separating
               a
               Matter
               to
               Lubricate
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Rectum
               ,
               and
               cause
               the
               Excrements
               ,
               tho'
               very
               much
               harden'd
               to
               pass
               off
               easily
               ,
               are
               in
               this
               Case
               also
               very
               much
               Swell'd
               ,
               and
               a
               great
               Quantity
               of
               Mucus
               flows
               from
               them
               :
               Hence
               the
               whole
               Inward
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Rectum
               becomes
               much
               Thickned
               ,
               and
               when
               prest
               down
               beyond
               the
               Stricture
               of
               the
               Sphincter
               Muscle
               of
               the
               Anus
               ,
               it
               is
               call'd
               
                 Procidentia
                 Ani.
              
               Tho'
               it
               is
               commonly
               suppos'd
               the
               Outward
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Rectum
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Internal
               ,
               is
               driven
               out
               in
               a
               Common
               
                 Procidentia
                 Ani
              
               ;
               yet
               the
               following
               Case
               seems
               to
               evince
               the
               contrary
               ,
               and
               that
               it
               is
               the
               Internal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Rectum
               only
               that
               is
               then
               Prolaps'd
               .
            
             
               A
               Gentleman
               of
               about
               Twenty
               Seven
               Years
               of
               Age
               ,
               had
               for
               several
               Years
               been
               very
               much
               Afflicted
               with
               the
               Haemorrhoides
               and
               a
               
                 Procidentia
                 Ani
              
               ,
               who
               after
               a
               sudden
               Debauch
               had
               a
               great
               Inflamation
               and
               Tumor
               Affected
               the
               Anus
               ,
               attended
               with
               great
               Pain
               :
               In
               the
               space
               of
               Twelve
               Hours
               ,
               the
               Parts
               about
               the
               Anus
               Appear'd
               of
               a
               Livid
               Colour
               ;
               soon
               after
               a
               Mortification
               follow'd
               .
               The
               Sphincter
               Muscle
               of
               the
               Anus
               being
               Relaxt
               ,
               a
               
                 Procidentia
                 Ani
              
               follow'd
               ;
               the
               Prolapsed
               Intestine
               (
               being
               expos'd
               to
               the
               Matter
               which
               flow'd
               from
               the
               Adjacent
               Parts
               )
               soon
               suffer'd
               Mortification
               .
               The
               Patient
               after
               some
               Weeks
               recover'd
               his
               usual
               Strength
               ,
               and
               in
               a
               few
               Months
               became
               perfectly
               Well
               .
               Nor
               did
               any
               inconveniency
               follow
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               Mortification
               of
               the
               Prolapsed
               Intestine
               ;
               but
               on
               the
               Contrary
               ,
               He
               continued
               Well
               ,
               and
               was
               free'd
               not
               only
               from
               the
               Habitual
               Haemorrhoides
               ,
               but
               was
               afterwards
               free'd
               from
               a
               
                 Procidentia
                 Ani.
              
               
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
           
             THE
             FORTIETH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Body
               lying
               in
               a
               Supine
               Posture
               ,
               and
               some
               of
               the
               Viscera
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               Expos'd
               to
               View
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Common
               and
               Proper
               Integuments
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               Dissected
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Under-side
               of
               the
               Omentum
               as
               it
               Appears
               when
               Rais'd
               and
               remaining
               Contiguous
               to
               the
               Colon.
               
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Colon
               at
               its
               Beginning
               in
               the
               Right
               Ilia
               ,
               and
               in
               its
               Progress
               over
               the
               Right
               Kidney
               ,
               by
               the
               Pylorus
               and
               under
               the
               Bottom
               of
               the
               Stomach
               :
               The
               farther
               Progress
               of
               this
               Intestine
               is
               commonly
               so
               well
               Describ'd
               ,
               that
               we
               need
               not
               say
               more
               of
               it
               in
               this
               Place
               .
            
             
               c
               c
               ,
               The
               Coecum
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               That
               Part
               call'd
               One
               of
               the
               Ligaments
               of
               the
               Colon
               ,
               which
               we
               take
               to
               be
               Compos'd
               of
               Fleshy
               Fibres
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Intestina
                 Tenuia
              
               ,
               or
               Thin
               Guts
               ,
               which
               are
               the
               
                 Duodenum
                 Iejunum
              
               ,
               and
               Ileum
               ;
               to
               these
               some
               add
               the
               Coecum
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Intestina
                 Crassa
              
               ,
               or
               Thick
               Guts
               ,
               are
               the
               Colon
               and
               the
               Rectum
               ;
               to
               these
               the
               Coecum
               is
               commonly
               reckon'd
               .
            
             
               G
               H
               I
               ,
               The
               Mesentery
               to
               which
               the
               Intestines
               are
               Contiguous
               .
               The
               Mesentery
               is
               Compos'd
               of
               divers
               Strata
               of
               Membranes
               ,
               the
               outwardmost
               of
               which
               ,
               on
               both
               Sides
               of
               it
               ,
               is
               a
               Continuation
               of
               the
               Internal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Peritonoeum
               ;
               between
               these
               are
               plac'd
               divers
               Membranaceous
               Loculi
               ,
               which
               Inclose
               its
               Glands
               K
               K
               :
               This
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               is
               by
               some
               Esteem'd
               as
               a
               Third
               Membrane
               proper
               to
               this
               Part.
               The
               Rise
               or
               Connexion
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               to
               the
               Stable
               Parts
               ,
               is
               at
               the
               Three
               Superior
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Loins
               on
               both
               Sides
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               ,
               where
               it
               sends
               out
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Coeliaca
              
               and
               
                 Mesenterica
                 Superior
              
               .
               Besides
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               the
               Mesentery
               is
               plentifully
               furnish'd
               with
               Lympheducts
               and
               Nerves
               ;
               the
               Latter
               are
               well
               Describ'd
               by
               Dr.
               Willis
               and
               Vieusenius
               ;
               the
               Lympheducts
               are
               mention'd
               in
               the
               precedent
               Table
               ;
               its
               Arteries
               are
               :
               Figur'd
               in
               our
               Appendix
               ;
               its
               Veins
               Correspond
               to
               them
               ,
               and
               discharge
               their
               Blood
               into
               the
               Liver
               by
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Porta
              
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               Glands
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               thro
               which
               the
               Chyle
               and
               Lympha
               passes
               to
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               A
               Large
               Gland
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               near
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               ,
               call'd
               by
               
                 Asellius
                 ,
                 Pancreas
              
               .
            
             
               M
               M
               ,
               The
               Fat
               which
               in
               Humane
               Bodies
               is
               commonly
               very
               plentifully
               plac'd
               between
               the
               Membranes
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               .
               In
               some
               Quadrupedes
               ,
               especially
               in
               Dogs
               ,
               the
               Fat
               only
               Accompanies
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               This
               Figure
               is
               Copied
               from
               
               Bourdon's
               Third
               Table
               ,
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Mesentery
               in
               which
               its
               Vessels
               and
               Glands
               are
               here
               only
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Intestines
               .
            
             
               C
               D
               ,
               The
               Glandules
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               ,
               thro'
               which
               the
               Chyle
               and
               Lympha
               pass
               together
               from
               the
               Intestines
               to
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               .
               C
               D
               ,
               Those
               Glands
               which
               receive
               the
               Contents
               of
               the
               
                 Vasa
                 Lactea
                 Primi
                 Generis
              
               ;
               F
               ,
               That
               plac'd
               near
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               which
               receive
               the
               Contents
               of
               the
               
                 Venae
                 Lacteae
                 Secundi
                 Generis
              
               .
               A
               A
               ,
               Inferior
               ,
               Denote
               the
               
                 Venae
                 Lacteae
                 Primi
                 Generis
              
               .
               A
               ,
               Superior
               and
               E
               ,
               Represents
               the
               
                 Venae
                 Lacteae
                 Secundi
                 Generis
              
               .
               E
               ,
               Superior
               ,
               Part
               of
               a
               Lympheduct
               Arising
               from
               the
               Spleen
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               ,
               or
               the
               Beginning
               of
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Thoracicus
              
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Arteria
                 Mesenterica
              
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               
                 Vena
                 Mesenterica
              
               .
            
             
               A
               further
               Description
               of
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               and
               
                 Ductus
                 Thoracicus
              
               ,
               is
               Inserted
               in
               the
               
                 Appendix
                 ,
                 Fig.
              
               11
               ,
               12.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3
               ,
               4.
               
            
             
               Shew
               the
               different
               Insertions
               of
               the
               Thoracick-Duct
               into
               the
               Lower
               Side
               of
               the
               Left
               Subclavian
               Vein
               ;
               which
               in
               these
               Figures
               are
               Erroneously
               Exprest
               in
               the
               Right
               Subclavian
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Subclavian
               Veins
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Thoracick-Ducts
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5
               ,
               6.
               
            
             
               A
               B
               B
               ,
               One
               of
               the
               Lacteal-Vessels
               Blow'd
               up
               and
               Dri'd
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Valves
               Appear
               at
               a
               greater
               Distance
               from
               each
               other
               ,
               then
               in
               a
               Lympheduct
               prepar'd
               in
               the
               same
               Manner
               ,
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FORTY-FIRST
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             SHEWS
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Viscera
             as
             they
             Appear
             within
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             after
             the
             Intestines
             together
             with
             the
             Mesentery
             ,
             are
             remov'd
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             ,
             The
             Lower
             Parts
             of
             the
             Kidneys
             .
             It
             's
             well
             known
             the
             Kidneys
             are
             those
             Parts
             which
             separate
             the
             Urine
             from
             the
             Blood
             ;
             whence
             it
             is
             Convey'd
             by
             the
             Ureters
             into
             the
             Bladder
             of
             Urine
             .
             Concerning
             the
             Structure
             of
             the
             Kidneys
             ;
             See
             Tab.
             43.
             
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             The
             Ureters
             partly
             Cover'd
             with
             Fat
             ,
             in
             their
             way
             from
             the
             Kidneys
             to
             the
             Bladder
             of
             Urine
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             Bladder
             of
             Urine
             somewhat
             Distended
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             Spermatick
             Vein
             and
             Artery
             on
             both
             Sides
             Involv'd
             with
             Fat
             and
             Membranes
             ,
             as
             they
             pass
             towards
             the
             Testicles
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             Right
             Side
             of
             the
             Scrotum
             ,
             with
             the
             Testicle
             of
             that
             Side
             remaining
             in
             it
             .
             This
             Right
             Side
             of
             the
             Scrotum
             is
             Divested
             from
             the
             Left
             by
             a
             
               Suptum
               Intermedium
            
             ,
             mention'd
             by
             the
             Accurate
             Ruysch
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Left
             Testicle
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             Scrotum
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Stomach
             
               in
               Situ
            
             .
          
           
             H
             H
             ,
             The
             Liver
             
               in
               Situ
            
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Pancreas
             as
             it
             Appears
             in
             its
             Proper
             Situation
             after
             the
             Intestines
             are
             remov'd
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             A
             Portion
             of
             the
             Duodenum
             cut
             off
             and
             tied
             below
             the
             Insertion
             of
             the
             Gall
             and
             Pancreatick
             Ducts
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             Lower
             Part
             of
             the
             Rectum
             in
             like
             Manner
             tied
             up
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Mesentery
             according
             to
             Bidloo
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             Descending
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Magna
            
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Ascending
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             The
             Internal
             Surface
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             as
             it
             Appears
             when
             Divided
             in
             a
             Crucial
             Manner
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Common
             and
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Proper
             Integuments
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             .
             In
             the
             Upper
             Part
             of
             this
             Appearance
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             the
             Fibres
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Transversalis
            
             may
             be
             seen
             as
             they
             lie
             under
             it
             .
          
           
             Q
             Q
             ,
             The
             Fat
             withinside
             the
             Skin
             .
          
           
             R
             R
             ,
             The
             Superior
             and
             Inferior
             Parts
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Rectus
               Abdominis
            
             ,
             Divided
             as
             above
             Noted
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             The
             Lower
             Part
             of
             the
             Spleen
             
               in
               Situ
            
             .
          
           
             T
             ,
             The
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Mesenterica
               Superior
            
             cut
             off
             near
             the
             Aorta
             .
          
           
             V
             ,
             A
             Portion
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Mesenterica
               Inferior
            
             in
             like
             Manner
             Divided
             .
          
           
             W
             ,
             The
             Umbilical
             Ligament
             of
             the
             Liver
             turn'd
             Upwards
             ,
             and
             not
             free'd
             from
             its
             Inclosing
             Membranes
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
           
             THE
             FORTY-SECOND
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             REPRESENTS
             the
             Kidneys
             ,
             Testicles
             ,
             Bladder
             of
             Urine
             ,
             and
             Spermatick
             Vessels
             ,
             free'd
             from
             the
             Body
             and
             Display'd
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             ,
             The
             Right
             Kidney
             :
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             It
             's
             
               Membrana
               Adiposa
            
             partly
             Separated
             .
          
           
             C
             C
             ,
             The
             Left
             Kidney
             free'd
             from
             the
             
               Membrana
               Adiposa
            
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             
               Glandulae
               Renales
            
             :
             After
             frequent
             Injecting
             of
             Wax
             into
             the
             Veins
             of
             a
             Foetus
             ,
             I
             have
             constantly
             found
             the
             Cavities
             of
             these
             Glands
             fill'd
             with
             the
             Wax
             .
             If
             you
             Blow
             into
             the
             Veins
             of
             a
             Foetus
             ,
             the
             Glands
             of
             the
             Kidneys
             will
             soon
             become
             Distended
             with
             Wind
             :
             These
             Glands
             are
             soft
             and
             and
             Membranous
             in
             the
             Foetus
             ,
             in
             the
             Adult
             very
             hard
             ,
             and
             proportionably
             Less
             ,
             and
             not
             capable
             of
             being
             Distended
             by
             Blowing
             into
             their
             Veins
             ;
             nor
             do's
             any
             Fluid
             Iniected
             by
             the
             Veins
             ,
             of
             an
             Adult
             ,
             pass
             into
             the
             Cavities
             of
             these
             Glands
             .
             The
             
               Glandula
               Renalis
            
             of
             the
             Right
             Side
             has
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Emulgent
             ,
             and
             
               Arteria
               Phrenica
            
             .
             The
             Gland
             of
             the
             Left
             Kidney
             has
             divers
             small
             Arteries
             from
             the
             Descending
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Magna
            
             :
             Their
             Veins
             are
             Two
             Trunks
             ;
             One
             to
             each
             Gland
             ,
             that
             of
             the
             Right
             Side
             Arising
             only
             from
             the
             Gland
             of
             the
             Kidney
             it self
             ,
             is
             Less
             than
             the
             Left
             ,
             and
             empties
             its
             self
             into
             the
             Ascending
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             ,
             above
             the
             Emulgent
             Vein
             ;
             that
             of
             the
             Left
             ,
             Arises
             from
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Neighbouring
             Parts
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             from
             those
             of
             the
             Gland
             it self
             ,
             and
             Discharges
             its
             self
             into
             the
             Left
             Emulgent
             Vein
             K.
             
          
           
             1
             E
             ,
             The
             
               Arteria
               Coeliaca
            
             cut
             off
             near
             its
             Origin
             .
          
           
             2
             E
             ,
             The
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Mesenterica
            
             in
             like
             Manner
             cut
             off
             .
          
           
             a
             F
             ,
             The
             Descending
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Aorta
             below
             the
             Kidneys
             .
          
           
             F
             F
             ,
             The
             External
             Iliack
             Branches
             of
             the
             Great
             Artery
             .
          
           
             G
             G
             ,
             The
             Ascending
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             below
             the
             Kidneys
             .
          
           
             g
             g
             g
             ,
             The
             Iliack
             Branches
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             .
          
           
             X
             G
             ,
             The
             Spermatick
             Artery
             of
             the
             Right
             Testicle
             ,
             which
             commonly
             Arises
             from
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Aorta
             near
             the
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Left
             Spermatick
             Artery
             ;
             but
             in
             the
             Subject
             whence
             this
             Figure
             was
             taken
             ,
             it
             seems
             to
             Arise
             with
             Two
             Trunks
             from
             the
             Right
             Emulgent
             Artery
             ,
             or
             else
             the
             Operator
             committed
             a
             Mistake
             in
             Dissecting
             these
             Parts
             here
             Exprest
             .
             In
             all
             the
             Subjects
             I
             have
             hitherto
             Examin'd
             ,
             I
             have
             constantly
             found
             the
             Spermatick
             Arteries
             to
             Arise
             near
             each
             other
             ,
             on
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             as
             is
             Exprest
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             ,
             and
             commonly
             Describ'd
             by
             Anatomists
             .
             Riolan
             tells
             us
             he
             has
             observ'd
             One
             of
             the
             Spermatick
             Arteries
             to
             Arise
             from
             the
             Emulgent
             ;
             the
             like
             I
             have
             more
             than
             once
             thought
             I
             had
             seen
             ,
             but
             upon
             strict
             Examination
             ,
             I
             found
             it
             a
             Branch
             from
             the
             Emulgent
             Artery
             ,
             Descending
             in
             the
             Duplicature
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             with
             the
             Spermatick
             Artery
             and
             Vein
             ;
             nor
             could
             I
             observe
             any
             Inosculation
             between
             it
             and
             the
             Spermatick
             Artery
             .
          
           
             The
             Spermatick
             Arteries
             being
             very
             small
             as
             they
             Arise
             out
             of
             the
             Aorta
             ,
             I
             don't
             much
             wonder
             that
             they
             have
             escap'd
             the
             Eyes
             of
             the
             less
             Accurate
             Dissectors
             ,
             and
             give
             them
             occasion
             to
             suppose
             they
             were
             sometimes
             wanting
             .
          
           
             †
             G
             ,
             The
             Spermatick
             Vein
             of
             the
             Right
             Testicle
             ,
             Ending
             in
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             constantly
             Observ'd
             it
             .
          
           
             xF
             ,
             The
             Left
             Spermatick
             Artery
             Arising
             from
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Descending
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Aorta
             towards
             the
             Left
             Side
             .
          
           
             †
             F
             ,
             The
             Spermatick
             Vein
             of
             the
             Left
             Testicle
             which
             empties
             it self
             into
             the
             Left
             Emulgent
             Vein
             in
             one
             Trunk
             most
             commonly
             ;
             but
             sometimes
             I
             have
             seen
             it
             ,
             as
             in
             this
             Figure
             ,
             Divided
             a
             little
             below
             the
             Emulgent
             Vein
             .
          
           
             H
             H
             ,
             The
             Ureters
             of
             their
             common
             Size
             Descending
             from
             the
             Kidneys
             to
             the
             Bladder
             of
             Urine
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Urine
             Bladder
             Distended
             with
             Wind.
             
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             Left
             Emulgent
             Vein
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Emulgent
             Artery
             of
             the
             Right
             Side
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Mesenterica
               Inferior
            
             .
          
           
             N
             N
             ,
             The
             Testicles
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Epididymis
             of
             the
             Left
             Testicle
             .
          
           
             P
             P
             ,
             The
             
               Vasa
               Deferentia
            
             free'd
             from
             the
             
               Tunica
               Vaginalis
            
             of
             the
             Preparantia
             .
          
           
             22
             ,
             Divers
             Blood-Vessels
             Propagated
             to
             the
             Peritonaeum
             from
             the
             Spermatick
             Vessels
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FORTY-THIRD
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               External
               and
               Inferior
               Side
               of
               the
               Left
               Kidney
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Kidney
               covering
               above
               Two
               Thirds
               of
               its
               Body
               :
               The
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Kidney
               being
               free'd
               from
               its
               Membrane
               ,
               some
               Vestigiae
               of
               its
               Lobuli
               (
               when
               in
               the
               Foetus
               )
               do
               Appear
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Emulgent
               Artery
               Pinn'd
               out
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Emulgent
               Vein
               Pinn'd
               out
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Vreter
               ,
               and
               its
               Expansion
               within
               the
               Kidney
               ,
               call'd
               the
               Pelvis
               ,
               made
               bare
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Concave
               Part
               of
               the
               same
               Kidney
               Represented
               in
               the
               former
               Figure
               ,
               Open'd
               ,
               to
               shew
               the
               Ramifications
               of
               its
               Pelvis
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Vreter
               and
               its
               Pelvis
               Branching
               within
               the
               Body
               of
               the
               Kidney
               .
               A
               piece
               of
               a
               Tobacco-Pipe
               being
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Superior
               Branch
               of
               the
               Pelvis
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               Half
               of
               the
               Kidney
               when
               Divided
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               Convex
               Surface
               and
               Glandulous
               Part
               of
               the
               Kidney
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Tubuli
                 Vrinarii
              
               Arising
               from
               the
               Glands
               of
               the
               Kidney
               in
               their
               Way
               towards
               the
               Papillae
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Half
               of
               the
               Pelvis
               Expanded
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Vreter
               from
               it
               may
               be
               seen
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Vreter
               hanging
               down
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Kidney
               .
            
             
               The
               Proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Kidney
               is
               here
               Pinn'd
               out
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Kidney
               Divided
               thro'
               its
               whole
               Length
               ,
               from
               its
               Back
               to
               the
               Pelvis
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Urinary
               Tubes
               as
               they
               Appear
               in
               divers
               Classes
               ,
               in
               their
               Way
               towards
               the
               Papillae
               in
               the
               Pelvis
               .
            
             
               B
               C
               ,
               The
               Glands
               and
               Urinary
               Tubes
               Interspers'd
               with
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Kidney
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Pelvis
               or
               Infundibulum
               Open'd
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               going
               out
               of
               the
               Vreter
               may
               be
               seen
               .
            
             
               d
               ,
               The
               Vreter
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Carunculae
                 Papillares
              
               compos'd
               of
               the
               Endings
               of
               the
               Urinary
               Tubes
               ,
               which
               open
               into
               the
               Branchings
               of
               the
               Pelvis
               ,
               into
               which
               the
               Urine
               is
               discharg'd
               ,
               in
               Order
               to
               its
               being
               transmitted
               to
               the
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               by
               the
               Vreter
               .
            
             
               e
               e
               ,
               The
               Fat
               within
               the
               Kidney
               lying
               on
               the
               Pelvis
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               and
               Urinary
               Tubes
               of
               the
               Kidney
               Exprest
               by
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Kidney
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Ends
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               broke
               off
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Kidney
               which
               help
               to
               compose
               its
               Glands
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Glands
               of
               the
               Kidney
               compos'd
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               Urinary
               Tubes
               ,
               Nerves
               and
               Lympheducts
               .
            
             
               The
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Kidneys
               as
               well
               as
               of
               other
               Glands
               in
               the
               Abdomen
               furnished
               with
               Excretory
               Ducts
               ,
               are
               very
               few
               ,
               and
               their
               Trunks
               very
               small
               ;
               nor
               do's
               any
               exquisite
               Pains
               affect
               the
               Kidneys
               themselves
               ,
               tho'
               Stones
               compos'd
               of
               divers
               Angles
               are
               lodg'd
               in
               their
               Glandulous
               Parts
               ;
               but
               the
               Parts
               whose
               Nerves
               are
               Complext
               with
               those
               of
               the
               Kidneys
               ,
               suffer
               most
               in
               such
               Cases
               .
               Tho'
               we
               reckon
               the
               Nerves
               among
               the
               Parts
               which
               compose
               the
               Glands
               of
               the
               Kidneys
               ,
               yet
               we
               cannot
               think
               they
               are
               any
               otherwise
               Useful
               here
               ,
               than
               Subservient
               to
               the
               other
               Vessels
               which
               are
               immediately
               imploy'd
               in
               the
               Secretion
               of
               the
               Urine
               ,
               as
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               and
               Urinary
               Tubes
               ;
               which
               are
               the
               Parts
               Organiz'd
               for
               Separating
               the
               Urine
               from
               the
               Blood.
               Nor
               are
               the
               Lympheducts
               otherwise
               imploy'd
               here
               than
               we
               have
               elsewhere
               taken
               Notice
               of
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Liver
               ;
               to
               carry
               off
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Succus
                 Nutritius
              
               which
               is
               constantly
               convey'd
               to
               the
               Gland
               it self
               .
               How
               these
               Parts
               are
               Organiz'd
               ,
               the
               following
               Experiments
               may
               a
               little
               Inform
               us
               .
            
             
               If
               you
               Blow
               into
               the
               Emulgent
               Artery
               ,
               the
               Wind
               will
               pass
               into
               the
               Vein
               of
               that
               Name
               ,
               Vreter
               ,
               and
               Lympheducts
               ;
               the
               the
               like
               will
               happen
               if
               you
               Blow
               either
               into
               the
               Vreter
               or
               Emulgent
               Vein
               .
               If
               you
               Inject
               Mercury
               ,
               all
               these
               Vessels
               will
               in
               like
               Manner
               be
               Distended
               .
               If
               you
               Syringe
               Water
               into
               the
               Emulgent
               Arteries
               ,
               it
               will
               at
               first
               pass
               the
               Veins
               and
               Vreter
               ;
               but
               if
               you
               continue
               Injecting
               it
               for
               any
               time
               ,
               the
               whole
               Kidney
               will
               at
               Length
               become
               Distended
               ,
               and
               the
               Water
               will
               no
               longer
               pass
               off
               again
               by
               those
               Vessels
               .
               Hence
               it
               Appears
               the
               Blood
               consisting
               of
               Globular
               Bodies
               ,
               (
               Proportionated
               to
               the
               Magnitude
               of
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Vessels
               moving
               in
               the
               Serum
               )
               readily
               pass
               on
               by
               a
               Succession
               of
               Globules
               still
               driving
               others
               before
               them
               ;
               whilst
               the
               Urinary
               Tubes
               (
               as
               they
               Arise
               with
               small
               Orifices
               from
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               )
               receive
               the
               Thinner
               or
               Urinous
               Part
               of
               the
               Blood
               ,
               and
               Discharge
               it
               into
               the
               Pelvis
               of
               the
               Kidney
               .
               In
               the
               Body
               of
               a
               Person
               of
               the
               First
               Rank
               I
               lately
               Dissected
               ,
               I
               found
               the
               Left
               Kidney
               Large
               ,
               its
               Texture
               very
               Loose
               ;
               and
               by
               Blowing
               into
               its
               Vreter
               ,
               the
               Emulgent
               Vein
               very
               suddenly
               became
               Distended
               :
               In
               this
               Person
               among
               other
               Disorders
               ,
               he
               had
               near
               Twenty
               Years
               before
               his
               Death
               ,
               very
               Feculent
               Urine
               :
               If
               his
               Urine
               was
               Evaporated
               by
               Heat
               as
               in
               a
               Spoon
               over
               a
               Candle
               ,
               its
               Feculent
               Part
               became
               still
               thicker
               ;
               by
               which
               it
               appear'd
               the
               Nutritious
               Parts
               of
               the
               Serum
               of
               the
               Blood
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Urinous
               Part
               ,
               past
               off
               by
               the
               too
               great
               Laxity
               of
               the
               Urinous
               Pores
               in
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               in
               the
               Kidney
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Urinary
               Tubes
               in
               their
               way
               from
               the
               Glands
               to
               the
               Papillae
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               which
               Compose
               the
               Glands
               of
               the
               Kidney
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Urinary
               Tubes
               Composing
               the
               Papillae
               ,
               where
               their
               Mouths
               open
               into
               one
               of
               the
               Branches
               of
               the
               Pelvis
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               A
               Branch
               of
               the
               Pelvis
               cut
               off
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Concave
               Part
               of
               the
               Kidney
               opened
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Vreter
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Pelvis
               free'd
               of
               the
               Kidney
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Branches
               of
               the
               Pelvis
               within
               the
               Kidney
               also
               made
               bare
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Urinary
               Tubes
               which
               Arise
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               of
               the
               Kidney
               ,
               and
               open
               into
               the
               Branches
               of
               the
               Pelvis
               ,
               Composing
               the
               Papillae
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Vreter
                 ,
                 Pelvis
              
               and
               its
               Ramifications
               free'd
               from
               the
               Kidney
               and
               dried
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Vreter
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Pelvis
               or
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Vreter
               lying
               within
               the
               Body
               of
               the
               Kidney
               .
            
             
               C
               D
               ,
               The
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Pelvis
               cut
               from
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Papillaria
              
               ,
               or
               Endings
               of
               the
               Urinary
               Tubes
               .
            
             
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FORTY-FOURTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               Membranes
               of
               the
               Ureter
               View'd
               with
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               &c.
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Ureter
               cut
               off
               near
               the
               Bladder
               and
               Expanded
               ;
            
             
               B
               ,
               It
               s
               Exterior
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               C
               D
               ,
               It
               s
               Membranaceous
               Fibres
               running
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               ,
               fill'd
               with
               Fat.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Second
               Membrane
               or
               Lamella
               of
               the
               Ureters
               ,
               consisting
               of
               Oblique
               Muscular
               Fibres
               Intersecting
               each
               other
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               lying
               between
               this
               and
               the
               First
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Third
               or
               Internal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Ureter
               ,
               compos'd
               of
               Fibres
               much
               Looser
               and
               standing
               at
               greater
               Distances
               ,
               than
               those
               of
               the
               Former
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               Divers
               Glandules
               which
               Appear
               in
               this
               Membrane
               ,
               and
               Emit
               a
               Mucus
               to
               Defend
               the
               Ureter
               from
               the
               Acrimonious
               Salts
               of
               the
               Urine
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Inferior
               or
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               ,
               &c.
               together
               with
               the
               Penis
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               &c.
               Portions
               of
               the
               Ureters
               in
               their
               Tortuous
               Progress
               to
               their
               Oblique
               Insertions
               ,
               between
               the
               Exterior
               and
               Inferior
               Membranes
               of
               the
               Bladder
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               cover'd
               with
               Fat
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               commonly
               found
               in
               Humane
               Bodies
               .
            
             
               The
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               may
               be
               said
               to
               be
               a
               Dilatation
               of
               the
               Ureters
               ;
               the
               intimate
               Structure
               of
               the
               Membrane
               of
               both
               agree
               ,
               except
               that
               the
               Muscular
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Bladder
               are
               Stronger
               and
               Larger
               than
               those
               of
               the
               Ureters
               ;
               the
               Superior
               and
               Largest
               of
               them
               embracing
               the
               Bladder
               ,
               like
               a
               Hand
               ,
               as
               Spigelius
               compares
               them
               ;
               the
               Internal
               are
               Less
               ,
               and
               Decussate
               the
               Superior
               with
               Various
               Angles
               :
               Some
               Anatomists
               reckon
               these
               among
               the
               Muscles
               ,
               and
               call
               them
               
                 Detrusores
                 Urinae
              
               .
               The
               Glands
               of
               the
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               are
               also
               Larger
               than
               those
               of
               the
               Ureters
               ,
               and
               are
               frequently
               Tumified
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Fibres
               in
               Diseas'd
               Bodies
               ,
               especially
               in
               those
               who
               for
               some
               time
               have
               been
               Afflicted
               with
               a
               Stone
               in
               this
               Part
               ,
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               Bladder
               have
               been
               very
               much
               Thickned
               ;
               and
               by
               Compressing
               them
               a
               Mucus
               may
               be
               seen
               to
               Arise
               from
               its
               Internal
               Surface
               ,
               thro'
               divers
               Ostiola
               or
               Excretory
               Ducts
               .
               The
               Bladder
               is
               Situated
               in
               the
               Hypogastrium
               in
               the
               Duplicature
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               :
               When
               it
               's
               Inflated
               in
               the
               Body
               ,
               it
               exactly
               fill's
               that
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               ,
               call'd
               the
               Pelvis
               ;
               its
               Upper
               Part
               is
               Suspended
               by
               the
               Urachus
               ,
               which
               in
               some
               Animals
               would
               be
               liable
               to
               fall
               on
               its
               Neck
               and
               hinder
               the
               Evacuation
               of
               Urine
               .
            
             
               The
               Use
               of
               the
               Bladder
               is
               to
               Receive
               the
               Urine
               from
               the
               Ureters
               ,
               and
               Contain
               it
               till
               the
               Time
               of
               Excretion
               ;
               whence
               it
               's
               Squees'd
               out
               partly
               by
               its
               own
               Carnous
               Fibres
               ,
               but
               chiefly
               by
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Urethra
               that
               is
               Bended
               under
               the
               
                 Os
                 Pubis
              
               in
               its
               Proper
               Situation
               ,
               and
               is
               plac'd
               between
               the
               Sphincter
               Muscle
               of
               the
               Anus
               and
               Prostatae
               .
               This
               Part
               of
               the
               Urethra
               is
               liable
               to
               be
               Wounded
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               Perforated
               by
               too
               hastily
               Introducing
               the
               Conductor
               into
               the
               Bladder
               ,
               after
               an
               Incision
               is
               made
               in
               the
               Perinaeum
               in
               Cutting
               for
               the
               Stone
               ;
               whereby
               the
               Operator
               afterwards
               thrusts
               his
               Forceps
               between
               the
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               and
               Rectum
               .
               This
               Inadvertency
               I
               am
               perswaded
               is
               very
               often
               Practis'd
               among
               the
               Pretenders
               to
               Lythotomy
               ,
               and
               frequently
               proves
               fatal
               to
               the
               Patient
               .
               One
               would
               think
               it
               was
               hardly
               possible
               a
               Man
               in
               his
               Senses
               ,
               and
               but
               tollerably
               acquainted
               with
               Anatomy
               ,
               could
               commit
               such
               Errors
               ;
               yet
               of
               this
               I
               have
               met
               with
               more
               than
               one
               Instance
               ,
               when
               being
               call'd
               to
               Dissect
               the
               Deceased
               ,
               in
               whom
               such
               Operators
               have
               been
               so
               Unfortunate
               as
               to
               leave
               the
               Stone
               still
               in
               the
               Bladder
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Vasa
                 Preparantia
              
               or
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Testes
               ,
               involv'd
               in
               the
               Peritonaeum
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Testicle
               .
               Between
               F
               and
               E
               G
               ,
               is
               that
               Part
               of
               the
               Spermatick
               Vessels
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Corpus
                 Pyramidale
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Plexus
                 Pampiniformis
              
               or
               Varicosus
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               Ascending
               from
               the
               Testicle
               to
               the
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               Blow'd
               up
               by
               the
               
                 Vasa
                 Deferentia
              
               ;
               that
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               having
               a
               Blow-Pipe
               still
               remaining
               in
               it
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               Back-Part
               of
               the
               Prostatae
               or
               
                 Corpus
                 Glandosum
              
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               Back-Part
               of
               the
               Penis
               .
            
             
               L
               L
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Directores
                 Penis
              
               ,
               whose
               Origin
               ,
               Progress
               ,
               and
               Termination
               are
               Exprest
               Tab.
               47.
               
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Cavernous
               Body
               of
               the
               Urethra
               Devested
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Accelerator
                 Urinae
              
               ,
               Exprest
               in
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Table
               ;
               that
               Part
               of
               the
               Bulb
               towards
               the
               Anus
               being
               cut
               off
               ;
               its
               Internal
               Cavernous
               Part
               here
               Appears
               Deprest
               ,
               or
               drawn
               Inwards
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FORTY-FIFTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               IS
               the
               Testes
               with
               its
               Vessels
               and
               Membranes
               when
               free'd
               from
               the
               Scrotum
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Body
               of
               the
               Testicle
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Some
               Appearances
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Cremaster
              
               (
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
               )
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Vaginalis
              
               ;
            
             
               D
               ,
               It
               s
               Inferior
               Part
               cleaving
               to
               the
               Testicle
               ;
            
             
               E
               ,
               It
               s
               Superior
               Part
               continued
               to
               the
               Peritonaeum
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Serpentine
               Distribution
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               on
               the
               Testes
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Testes
               next
               the
               Epididymis
               .
            
             
               h
               ,
               The
               Epididymis
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               whole
               Thickness
               and
               Cavity
               is
               very
               truly
               Exprest
               at
               its
               Extremity
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               A
               particular
               Vaginal-Tunicle
               of
               the
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               ,
               which
               Bidloo
               says
               has
               Circular
               Fibres
               ,
               but
               not
               here
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Testicle
               call'd
               
                 Vasa
                 Praeparantia
              
               ,
               as
               they
               Appear
               before
               any
               Injection
               or
               Inflation
               is
               made
               into
               them
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               Nerve
               of
               the
               Testicle
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Testes
                 ,
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Vasa
                 Praeparantia
              
               Display'd
               ,
               together
               with
               some
               Lympheducts
               of
               the
               Former
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Arteria
                 Spermatica
              
               continued
               from
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               Descending
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               :
               I
               can't
               but
               suspect
               this
               Part
               of
               the
               Figure
               to
               be
               Erroneous
               ,
               since
               in
               the
               many
               Subjects
               I
               have
               always
               observ'd
               the
               Origin
               of
               the
               Spermatick
               Artery
               to
               be
               very
               Small
               ,
               even
               much
               Smaller
               than
               its
               Inferior
               Trunk
               ;
               insomuch
               ,
               that
               its
               Cavity
               Arising
               from
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               ,
               would
               scarce
               admit
               the
               Smallest
               Probe
               commonly
               us'd
               ,
               it
               being
               but
               just
               Capacious
               enough
               to
               receive
               a
               Large
               Hogs
               Bristle
               .
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               &c.
               
               The
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Spermatick
               Artery
               in
               their
               Descent
               to
               the
               Testes
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Spermatick
               Vein
               with
               a
               Portion
               o●
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               ,
               into
               which
               it
               Enters
               ;
            
             
               C
               D
               bb
               ,
               &c.
               
               It
               s
               Various
               Anastomoses
               and
               Retiforme
               Inosculations
               ,
               as
               it
               Ascends
               from
               the
               Testes
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Valves
               of
               the
               Spermatick
               Vein
               which
               look
               from
               below
               Upwards
               ,
               and
               prevent
               the
               Descent
               of
               the
               Blood
               in
               that
               Vessel
               .
               Should
               it
               be
               askt
               why
               the
               Spermatick
               Veins
               in
               Humane
               Bodies
               ,
               and
               the
               Arteries
               in
               Quadrupedes
               should
               have
               a
               Tortuous
               Progress
               towards
               the
               Testicles
               ;
               and
               
                 Vice
                 Versa
              
               the
               Humane
               Spermatick
               Arteries
               and
               Veins
               of
               Quadrupedes
               should
               pass
               Straight
               ?
               We
               answer
               ,
               Tho'
               the
               Separation
               of
               the
               Semen
               in
               the
               Testicle
               is
               after
               the
               Manner
               of
               that
               of
               other
               Liquors
               in
               Conglomerate
               Glands
               ,
               yet
               we
               constantly
               find
               in
               all
               Animals
               ,
               that
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Testes
               are
               Propagated
               from
               their
               Large
               Trunks
               at
               a
               considerable
               Distance
               from
               them
               ;
               and
               those
               of
               the
               Conglomerate
               Glands
               ,
               are
               always
               supply'd
               with
               Blood-Vessels
               from
               the
               next
               Neighbouring-Branch
               :
               And
               this
               Practice
               in
               Nature
               we
               can't
               at
               present
               Account
               for
               otherwise
               ,
               than
               that
               the
               Blood
               in
               the
               Testicles
               should
               not
               pass
               with
               that
               Velocity
               as
               it
               do's
               in
               other
               Glands
               ;
               else
               what
               should
               be
               the
               Design
               of
               those
               many
               Turnings
               and
               Windings
               made
               in
               the
               Spermatick
               Arteries
               of
               most
               ,
               if
               not
               all
               Quadrupedes
               ?
               But
               that
               every
               Angle
               of
               their
               Contortions
               should
               take
               off
               the
               Impetus
               of
               the
               Impell'd
               Blood
               from
               the
               Heart
               .
               But
               the
               Subject
               of
               our
               present
               Animadversions
               here
               ,
               offers
               an
               Objection
               .
               Why
               than
               are
               the
               Spermatick
               Arteries
               in
               Humane
               Bodies
               Straight
               ,
               when
               their
               Progress
               is
               towards
               a
               Perpendicular
               Descent
               ,
               upon
               the
               Account
               of
               the
               Erect
               Position
               of
               the
               Body
               ?
               We
               answer
               ,
               That
               the
               Descending
               Progress
               of
               the
               Blood
               might
               be
               a
               very
               good
               Argument
               of
               its
               Enjoying
               a
               freer
               Accession
               to
               the
               Testes
               ;
               but
               we
               constantly
               Observe
               in
               all
               Humane
               Bodies
               ,
               that
               the
               Spermatick
               Arteries
               are
               (
               as
               we
               have
               Intimated
               above
               )
               very
               Small
               at
               their
               Originals
               from
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               ,
               which
               is
               a
               sufficient
               Impediment
               to
               any
               great
               Impetus
               of
               the
               Blood
               from
               the
               Great
               Artery
               :
               Nor
               was
               this
               Contrivance
               in
               Nature
               necessary
               in
               Quadrupedes
               ,
               because
               it
               would
               be
               an
               Impediment
               in
               them
               in
               providing
               that
               Requisite
               Stock
               of
               Semen
               to
               Impregnate
               the
               Female
               with
               her
               Numbers
               ;
               or
               in
               regard
               a
               greater
               Proportion
               of
               Semen
               was
               in
               them
               necessary
               on
               the
               Account
               of
               the
               Length
               of
               the
               
                 Cornua
                 Uteri
              
               ,
               which
               it
               must
               first
               pass
               thro'
               ,
               before
               it
               can
               Arrive
               at
               the
               
                 Fallopian
                 Tubes
              
               and
               Ovaria
               :
               Whence
               it
               is
               ,
               that
               the
               Testes
               of
               Quadrupedes
               are
               much
               Larger
               in
               Proportion
               ,
               than
               the
               Humane
               .
               But
               why
               the
               Humane
               Spermatick
               Veins
               are
               thus
               Divided
               and
               Inosculated
               with
               each
               other
               ,
               when
               those
               of
               Quadrupedes
               are
               Straight
               and
               fewer
               Trunks
               ,
               is
               Accountable
               from
               their
               Positions
               ;
               those
               of
               Men
               being
               towards
               a
               Perpendicular
               Ascent
               to
               convey
               the
               refluent
               Blood
               ;
               and
               those
               of
               Quadrupedes
               near
               Horizontal
               .
               From
               hence
               the
               Necessity
               of
               making
               one
               of
               these
               Blood-Vessels
               Varicous
               ,
               do's
               Appear
               ,
               especially
               the
               Humane
               Spermatick
               Veins
               ;
               which
               ,
               if
               had
               the
               Arteries
               been
               also
               ,
               as
               in
               Quadrupedes
               ;
               the
               Spaces
               or
               Perforations
               in
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               for
               their
               Egress
               ,
               must
               have
               been
               so
               Large
               ,
               as
               that
               the
               Intestines
               would
               have
               been
               continually
               liable
               to
               an
               Extrusion
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Epididymis
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Glandulous
               Part
               of
               the
               Testicle
               Devested
               of
               its
               Proper
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               partly
               free'd
               from
               the
               Epididymis
               ,
               to
               Exhibit
               some
               of
               its
               Contortions
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Vaginalis
              
               of
               the
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Albuginea
              
               ,
               with
               some
               of
               the
               Glandulous
               Part
               of
               the
               Testicle
               Rais'd
               with
               it
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Elythroides
              
               or
               Vaginalis
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               Some
               of
               the
               Lympheducts
               of
               the
               Testicle
               Pinn'd
               out
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               that
               Composes
               the
               Epididymis
               ,
               done
               much
               bigger
               than
               the
               Life
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Testicle
               .
            
             
               B
               D
               ,
               The
               Tortuous
               or
               Serpentine
               Disposition
               of
               the
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               in
               the
               Epididymis
               ;
               in
               which
               Manner
               the
               whole
               Body
               of
               the
               Epididymis
               is
               Compos'd
               of
               that
               Vessel
               ,
               or
               Secretory
               Duct
               of
               the
               Testicle
               .
            
             
               C
               D
               ,
               Another
               Separation
               of
               the
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               in
               the
               Epididymis
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Vaginalis
              
               of
               the
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               Compos'd
               of
               Circular
               Fibres
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FORTY-SIXTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               THE
               Glandulous
               Part
               of
               the
               Testicle
               Devested
               of
               its
               Proper
               Integument
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Albuginea
              
               ,
               or
               Proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Testes
               Rais'd
               and
               Pinn'd
               up
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Vessels
               of
               the
               Testes
               broken
               off
               in
               Raising
               the
               Albuginea
               .
            
             
               D
               E
               ,
               &c.
               Some
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               which
               Perforate
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Albuginea
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Foldings
               of
               the
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               ,
               which
               Composes
               the
               Epididymis
               ,
               made
               bare
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               ;
            
             
               H
               ,
               Its
               Cavity
               or
               Ductus
               which
               is
               very
               Conspicuous
               in
               all
               the
               Figures
               of
               the
               preceding
               Table
               ,
               and
               not
               Letter'd
               .
            
             
               I
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Vasa
                 Praeparantia
              
               or
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Testes
               involv'd
               in
               their
               Proper
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               Nerve
               of
               the
               Testes
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Testes
               Devested
               of
               its
               
                 Tunica
                 Albuginea
              
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Seminal-Vessels
               of
               the
               Testes
               Collectively
               passing
               to
               their
               Egress
               ,
               in
               Order
               to
               Compose
               the
               Epididymis
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Albuginea
              
               free'd
               from
               the
               Testes
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Glandulous
               Part
               of
               the
               Testicle
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Seminal-Vessels
               or
               Tubes
               deriv'd
               from
               their
               Originals
               ,
               in
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               Arteries
               that
               Compose
               the
               Glands
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Orifices
               made
               by
               breaking
               off
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               as
               they
               pass
               thro'
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Albuginea
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Seminal
               Tubes
               passing
               out
               of
               the
               Testes
               ,
               which
               are
               afterwards
               United
               into
               one
               Trunk
               ,
               whose
               Foldings
               ,
               Turnings
               or
               Windings
               Compose
               the
               Epididymis
               ;
               whence
               it
               's
               continued
               (
               as
               is
               Exprest
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               )
               and
               call'd
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Testes
               Dissected
               Transversely
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Tunica
                 Albuginea
              
               Rais'd
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Glandulous
               Part
               of
               the
               Testes
               where
               some
               Vestigia
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               Appear
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Progress
               of
               the
               Seminal
               Tubes
               thro'
               the
               Substance
               of
               the
               Testes
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Their
               Trunks
               Collectively
               passing
               towards
               their
               Egress
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Former
               Figure
               ,
               which
               by
               some
               is
               call'd
               
                 Ductus
                 Highmorianus
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Vessels
               of
               the
               Testes
               Exprest
               with
               a
               Microscope
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               ,
               whose
               Description
               take
               as
               follows
               .
               A
               ,
               The
               Seminal-Vessels
               separated
               from
               each
               other
               .
               B
               ,
               Their
               Cavities
               Swelling
               in
               the
               Manner
               of
               Valves
               .
               C
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               Accompanying
               the
               aforesaid
               Vessels
               ,
               and
               Covering
               them
               with
               Glands
               .
               D
               E
               ,
               The
               Fragments
               of
               the
               Small
               Membranes
               .
               I
               am
               apt
               to
               believe
               this
               Figure
               of
               the
               Seminal-Vessels
               of
               the
               Testes
               is
               Fictitious
               ,
               or
               that
               it
               may
               be
               of
               the
               Seminal-Vessels
               of
               the
               Epididymis
               ;
               for
               I
               am
               well
               assur'd
               the
               Seminal-Vessels
               of
               the
               Testes
               and
               their
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               can
               with
               no
               Art
               be
               so
               Display'd
               as
               Bidloo
               Describes
               these
               to
               be
               so
               Represented
               with
               a
               Microscope
               :
               But
               grant
               it
               was
               Practicable
               so
               to
               Display
               those
               Vessels
               ,
               yet
               I
               am
               sure
               it
               is
               not
               possible
               to
               distinguish
               the
               Vessels
               which
               carry
               the
               Semen
               from
               those
               of
               the
               Blood
               ;
               so
               that
               such
               a
               Description
               must
               be
               Precarious
               .
               The
               Experiments
               I
               have
               made
               in
               Examining
               the
               Testes
               ,
               convince
               me
               that
               the
               Extremities
               of
               their
               Blood-Vessels
               which
               Compose
               their
               Glands
               ,
               are
               much
               Less
               or
               more
               Tender
               than
               those
               of
               other
               Parts
               ;
               whence
               it
               is
               ,
               if
               you
               Inject
               Mercury
               by
               the
               Spermatick
               Artery
               ,
               it
               will
               not
               pass
               back
               again
               by
               the
               Vein
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Kidneys
               and
               other
               Glands
               ;
               but
               the
               Mercury
               upon
               pushing
               it
               Forwards
               ,
               will
               sooner
               break
               the
               Extremities
               of
               these
               Vessels
               ,
               and
               get
               out
               in
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Albuginea
              
               ,
               and
               Extend
               the
               whole
               Stone
               than
               return
               again
               by
               the
               Spermatick
               Vein
               :
               Nor
               could
               I
               ever
               find
               the
               Lympheducts
               fill'd
               with
               Mercury
               ,
               upon
               Injecting
               it
               into
               the
               Spermatick
               Artery
               ;
               but
               by
               Blowing
               into
               the
               Vein
               of
               that
               Name
               ,
               the
               Lympheducts
               soon
               become
               Distended
               ,
               as
               Nuck
               has
               also
               taken
               Notice
               in
               his
               
                 Adenographia
                 Curiosa
              
               ,
               Pag.
               53.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Testicle
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               and
               not
               Separated
               from
               their
               Inward
               Membrane
               ,
               deriv'd
               from
               the
               Peritonaeum
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Spermatick
               Artery
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Vein
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Spermatick
               Blood-Vessels
               above
               the
               Testes
               which
               are
               Distributed
               to
               the
               Epididymis
               .
               E
               ,
               
                 Vasa
                 Deferentia
              
               ;
               F
               ,
               
                 Tunica
                 Albuginea
              
               ;
               G
               ,
               and
               to
               the
               Stone
               it self
               H.
               The
               Sixth
               Figure
               shews
               the
               other
               Side
               of
               the
               same
               Testicle
               and
               Vessels
               ,
               which
               are
               Distinguish'd
               by
               the
               same
               Letters
               .
            
             
               From
               what
               has
               been
               said
               ,
               it
               Appears
               the
               
                 Vasa
                 Deferentia
              
               like
               the
               Secretory
               Ducts
               of
               other
               Glands
               ,
               Spring
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Testes
               ;
               and
               agreeable
               to
               the
               Length
               and
               Tortuous
               Progress
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               these
               Parts
               ,
               so
               their
               Secretory
               Ducts
               or
               
                 Vasa
                 Deferentia
              
               are
               of
               a
               vast
               Length
               also
               ,
               and
               Dispos'd
               in
               divers
               Foldings
               in
               Composing
               that
               Part
               call'd
               the
               Epididymis
               .
               The
               
                 Vasa
                 Deferentia
              
               thus
               Arising
               from
               the
               Epididymis
               ,
               pass
               up
               Straight
               with
               the
               Preparantia
               :
               Soon
               after
               they
               are
               in
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               ,
               these
               Deferent
               Vessels
               leave
               the
               Preparantia
               ,
               and
               Descend
               over
               the
               Ureters
               in
               the
               Pelvis
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               ,
               between
               the
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               and
               the
               Rectum
               ;
               where
               they
               begin
               to
               Dilate
               themselves
               and
               Open
               into
               the
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               ,
               as
               Appears
               in
               the
               following
               Table
               ,
               Fig.
               1
               ,
               2.
               
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FORTY-SEVENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               SHEWS
               the
               Fore-parts
               of
               the
               
                 Penis
                 ,
                 Glandulae
                 Prostatae
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               .
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               ;
               B
               B
               ,
               their
               Branches
               on
               the
               Vesiculae
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Membrane
               which
               covers
               the
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               and
               
                 Vasa
                 Deferentia
              
               .
            
             
               D
               Superior
               ,
               The
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               appearing
               very
               much
               enlarg'd
               before
               it
               enters
               the
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               of
               that
               Side
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               Inferior
               ,
               The
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Neck
               of
               the
               Bladder
               cut
               off
               at
               the
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Fore-Part
               of
               the
               Prostatae
               divided
               to
               shew
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Caruncula
               or
               
                 Caput
                 Gallinaginis
              
               on
               the
               Inferior
               or
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               ;
               as
               it
               appears
               when
               the
               Superior
               or
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               is
               divided
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Two
               Orifices
               of
               the
               Seed-Vessels
               ,
               as
               they
               appear
               when
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Caruncula
               or
               
                 Caput
                 Gallinaginis
              
               is
               snipt
               off
               with
               a
               Pair
               of
               Sizars
               .
               The
               
                 Ostia
                 Prostatarum
              
               on
               both
               Sides
               the
               Caruncula
               do
               somewhat
               appear
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Penis
               ,
               call'd
               ,
               
                 Dorsum
                 Penis
              
               ,
               cover'd
               with
               its
               
                 Membrana
                 Carnosa
              
               ,
               whose
               Fore-part
               with
               the
               True-skin
               ,
               composes
               the
               Praeputium
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
                 Penis
              
               cut
               from
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Pubis
              
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Cavernous
               Body
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               .
            
             
               The
               Figure
               of
               the
               Cavernous
               Body
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               differs
               very
               much
               from
               those
               of
               the
               Penis
               ;
               That
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               being
               less
               in
               its
               Middle
               ,
               and
               Large
               at
               both
               Ends
               ;
               whereas
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
                 Penis
              
               are
               Less
               at
               their
               Extremities
               ,
               and
               Large
               in
               their
               Middles
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               Glans
               composing
               the
               other
               Extream
               of
               the
               Cavernous
               Body
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               .
            
             
               N
               N
               ,
               The
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Penis
               pinn'd
               out
               .
            
             
               O
               O
               ,
               The
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Penis
               .
            
             
               P
               ,
               The
               
                 Vena
                 Ipsius
                 Penis
              
               where
               it
               is
               Comprest
               by
               the
               Transverse
               Ligament
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Pubis
              
               ,
               when
               the
               Penis
               is
               Erected
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Carnosa
                 Penis
              
               pinn'd
               out
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               cut
               through
               after
               Inflation
               and
               drying
               them
               ,
               to
               shew
               their
               Insides
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               C
               ,
               The
               Cells
               of
               the
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               so
               extended
               by
               Inflation
               ,
               that
               the
               Rete
               or
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Minores
              
               in
               their
               Insides
               do
               not
               appear
               .
            
             
               D
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Insides
               of
               the
               
                 Vasa
                 Deferentia
              
               in
               like
               Manner
               so
               Extended
               by
               Inflation
               ,
               that
               their
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Minores
              
               do
               not
               appear
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Two
               Seminal
               Ducts
               which
               discharge
               the
               Semen
               into
               the
               Vrethra
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Prostatae
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               A.
               The
               
                 Corpus
                 Glandulosum
              
               or
               Prostatae
               divided
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               C
               ,
               &c.
               It
               s
               Glandulous
               Inside
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Ducts
               of
               the
               Prostatae
               which
               open
               into
               the
               Vrethra
               ,
               at
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               
                 Caput
                 Gallinaginis
              
               ,
               which
               are
               elegantly
               Exprest
               in
               the
               following
               Table
               ,
               Fig.
               1.
               
               K.
               
            
             
               F
               ,
               F.
               Part
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Prostatae
               blow'd
               up
               ,
               their
               Excretory
               Tubes
               in
               the
               Vrethra
               and
               dry'd
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               A
               ,
               The
               Exterior
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               B
               ,
               The
               Interior
               Membrane
               compos'd
               of
               more
               carneous
               Fibres
               than
               the
               former
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               C
               ,
               &c.
               Their
               Transparent
               Vesicules
               extended
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               D
               ,
               Some
               of
               the
               Vesicules
               broke
               up
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               E
               ,
               Other
               Vesiculae
               that
               remain
               Hard
               and
               Extended
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               F
               ,
               Some
               Parts
               of
               the
               Ducts
               remaining
               Extended
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               G
               ,
               The
               Fragments
               of
               the
               Membranes
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Anus
               and
               
                 Penis
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               B
               ,
               C
               ,
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Sphincter
                 Ani
              
               :
               The
               Figure
               and
               Situation
               of
               this
               Muscle
               is
               here
               well
               Exprest
               ;
               tho'
               Part
               of
               it
               be
               frequently
               divided
               in
               Opening
               a
               Fistulous
               Sinus
               of
               the
               Anus
               ,
               yet
               the
               remaining
               Part
               of
               it
               is
               sufficient
               for
               its
               proper
               Office
               of
               retaining
               the
               Faeces
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Levatores
                 Ani
              
               :
               The
               Origination
               of
               which
               Muscles
               are
               best
               seen
               after
               dividing
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Pubis
              
               ,
               to
               take
               out
               the
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               with
               the
               Penis
               :
               They
               spring
               from
               the
               Internal
               Parts
               of
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Bones
               ,
               and
               descend
               close
               over
               the
               
                 Corpus
                 Glandulosum
              
               or
               Prostatae
               .
               The
               Hinder
               Parts
               of
               these
               Muscles
               derive
               their
               Broad
               ,
               Thin
               ,
               Fleshy
               Beginnings
               from
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Ischii
              
               and
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               ;
               from
               these
               Places
               their
               Fibres
               descend
               to
               their
               Implantation
               ,
               into
               the
               Lower
               End
               of
               the
               
                 Intestinum
                 Rectum
              
               in
               the
               Anus
               .
            
             
               These
               Muscles
               have
               a
               Two-fold
               Office
               ;
               first
               in
               drawing
               up
               the
               Anus
               ,
               least
               it
               should
               be
               too
               much
               press'd
               upon
               by
               the
               Foeces
               ;
               secondly
               they
               Compress
               the
               Prostatae
               and
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
                 in
                 Coitu
              
               ,
               in
               Order
               to
               discharge
               their
               Contents
               or
               Semen
               into
               the
               Vrethra
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Directores
                 Penis
              
               or
               Erectores
               :
               They
               arise
               Fleshy
               from
               the
               Lower
               Margin
               of
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Pubis
              
               where
               they
               are
               join'd
               to
               the
               Ischii
               ;
               whence
               they
               ascend
               to
               their
               Implantations
               near
               the
               Beginnings
               of
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
                 Penis
              
               .
            
             
               The
               Position
               of
               these
               Muscles
               renders
               them
               capable
               of
               pulling
               the
               Penis
               Inwards
               and
               Downwards
               ;
               but
               by
               Means
               of
               a
               Ligament
               arising
               from
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Pubis
              
               ,
               which
               is
               fastned
               to
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Penis
               ,
               they
               have
               a
               different
               Effect
               by
               drawing
               the
               Penis
               somewhat
               Upwards
               and
               Nearer
               the
               Pubes
               ,
               whereby
               the
               great
               Vein
               on
               the
               
                 Dorsum
                 Penis
              
               is
               Comprest
               ,
               and
               the
               Erection
               of
               the
               Penis
               Promoted
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
                 Penis
              
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Accelerator
                 Vrinae
              
               covering
               the
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Cavernous
               Body
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               :
               This
               derives
               its
               Origin
               from
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               L
               ,
               Fig.
               1.
               on
               both
               Sides
               ,
               and
               encompassing
               the
               Bulb
               ,
               meets
               on
               its
               Inferior
               Part
               ,
               but
               after
               a
               considerable
               Progress
               on
               that
               Part
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               in
               the
               Perinaeum
               ;
               this
               Muscle
               divides
               its
               self
               and
               makes
               Two
               Tendinous
               Insertions
               on
               both
               Sides
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
                 Penis
              
               ,
               as
               is
               Exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               .
            
             
               Besides
               the
               Offices
               commonly
               ascrib'd
               to
               this
               Muscle
               of
               compressing
               the
               Vrethra
               in
               driving
               out
               the
               Remains
               of
               Urine
               ,
               and
               promoting
               the
               Ejaculation
               of
               the
               Semen
               ,
               both
               which
               Actions
               are
               chiefly
               done
               by
               the
               last
               describ'd
               Parts
               of
               it
               ,
               embracing
               the
               Vrethra
               .
               It
               also
               Assists
               the
               
                 Musculi
                 Directores
              
               in
               promoting
               the
               Erection
               of
               the
               Penis
               ,
               by
               compressing
               the
               Bulb
               whose
               contain'd
               Blood
               is
               then
               driven
               towards
               the
               Glans
               ,
               in
               a
               greater
               Quantity
               than
               can
               immediately
               be
               discharg'd
               by
               the
               Veins
               of
               the
               Bulb
               ;
               the
               Glans
               thereby
               suddenly
               becomes
               distended
               :
               But
               the
               Vigorous
               Action
               of
               this
               Muscle
               not
               continuing
               long
               ,
               the
               Veins
               of
               the
               Bulb
               which
               were
               then
               compress'd
               ,
               are
               again
               at
               Liberty
               to
               discharge
               the
               retain'd
               Blood
               ,
               and
               the
               Glans
               suddenly
               Sinks
               :
               Whence
               it
               comes
               that
               the
               Glans
               is
               not
               always
               duly
               extended
               ,
               when
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
                 Penis
              
               are
               Erected
               .
            
             
               This
               Part
               of
               the
               Bulb
               and
               Accelerator
               Muscle
               ,
               &c.
               are
               divided
               in
               Lithotomy
               ,
               or
               Cutting
               for
               the
               Stone
               in
               the
               Bladder
               ;
               Whence
               it
               happens
               that
               the
               Cicatrice
               of
               these
               Parts
               afterwards
               ,
               often
               hinders
               a
               compleat
               Extention
               of
               the
               
                 Glans
                 Penis
              
               in
               an
               Erection
               .
               The
               like
               happn'd
               in
               a
               Patient
               I
               was
               not
               long
               since
               call'd
               to
               ,
               who
               had
               a
               Fistulous
               Sinus
               in
               the
               Perinaeum
               ,
               in
               whom
               I
               found
               this
               Bulbous
               Part
               of
               the
               Cavernous
               Body
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               very
               much
               Indurated
               :
               Upon
               Enquiry
               he
               told
               me
               ,
               
                 When
                 his
              
               Penis
               
                 was
                 Erected
                 ,
                 the
              
               Glans
               
                 remained
                 shrivelld
                 and
                 no
                 Ways
                 Extended
              
               :
               Nor
               could
               the
               
                 Corpus
                 Cavernosum
                 Vrethrae
              
               be
               extended
               ,
               and
               therefore
               he
               could
               by
               no
               Means
               Ejaculate
               the
               Semen
               at
               the
               Time
               of
               Erection
               ;
               but
               the
               Semen
               often
               came
               with
               the
               Urine
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Transversalis
                 Penis
              
               on
               the
               Left
               Side
               ,
               that
               of
               the
               Right
               not
               being
               Letter'd
               ;
               It
               Arises
               from
               the
               Knob
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Ischium
              
               immediately
               below
               the
               Origination
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Director
              
               ,
               and
               passes
               transversly
               to
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Cavernous
               Body
               of
               the
               Vrethra
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               Glans
               or
               Balanus
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               Praeputium
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               Fraenum
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               The
               Vrethra
               open'd
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FORTY-EIGHTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               Upper
               and
               Fore-parts
               of
               the
               Penis
               and
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               ,
               well
               Exprest
               after
               a
               Curious
               Dissection
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Cavernous
               Bodies
               of
               the
               Penis
               Whole
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Skin
               which
               Composes
               the
               Praeputium
               .
            
             
               b
               ,
               The
               Reduplication
               or
               Inner
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Praeputium
               .
            
             
               C
               D
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               which
               Adorn
               the
               Upper-part
               or
               
                 Dorsum
                 Penis
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Glans
               or
               Balanus
               .
            
             
               About
               the
               Neck
               of
               the
               Glans
               where
               the
               Prepuce
               is
               join'd
               to
               the
               Penis
               ,
               are
               plac'd
               the
               
                 Glandulae
                 Odoriferae
              
               ,
               taken
               Notice
               of
               by
               the
               Accurate
               Anatomist
               Dr.
               Tyson
               .
               These
               separate
               a
               Matter
               ,
               which
               serves
               to
               Lubricate
               the
               Prepuce
               ,
               and
               make
               it
               slide
               easily
               on
               the
               Glans
               .
               These
               Glandules
               of
               the
               Prepuce
               are
               frequently
               very
               much
               Tumified
               in
               Venereal
               Contacts
               ,
               and
               especially
               if
               these
               Parts
               happen
               to
               be
               Ulcerated
               ,
               whence
               a
               Foetide
               Matter
               proceeds
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Urine
               Bladder
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Ureters
               next
               the
               Bladder
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               Portions
               of
               the
               
                 Vasa
                 Deferentia
              
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               in
               View
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               Caruncula
               or
               
                 Caput
                 Gallinaginis
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Ostiolae
                 Prostatarum
              
               as
               they
               Appear
               after
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Urethra
               is
               Divided
               .
            
             
               K
               L
               ,
               The
               Prostatae
               whose
               Upper-part
               is
               Divided
               with
               the
               Urethra
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               Vein
               of
               the
               Penis
               which
               is
               Comprest
               in
               an
               Erection
               ,
               by
               a
               Ligament
               plac'd
               under
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 pubis
              
               .
            
             
               N
               N
               ,
               The
               Two
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Penis
               .
            
             
               O
               O
               ,
               The
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               P
               P
               ,
               The
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
              
               free'd
               from
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Pubis
              
               and
               their
               
                 Musculi
                 Erectores
              
               .
            
             
               Q
               Q
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Accelerator
                 Urinae
              
               free'd
               from
               the
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Cavernous
               Body
               of
               the
               Urethra
               ,
               and
               Expanded
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Glans
                 Penis
              
               view'd
               with
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Common
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Penis
               or
               Praeputium
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Proper
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Glans
               separated
               .
            
             
               D
               E
               F
               G
               ,
               Divers
               Rows
               of
               Fibres
               dispos'd
               like
               Membranes
               ,
               and
               Intricately
               interwoven
               with
               the
               Internal
               Membranes
               and
               Blood-Vessels
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Fore-part
               of
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               Penis
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Glans
               Dri'd
               after
               Inflation
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Inner-parts
               of
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
                 Penis
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Septum
               of
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
              
               .
            
             
               C
               D
               ,
               The
               Cells
               of
               the
               Cavernous
               Bodies
               which
               Open
               into
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               Veins
               ,
               and
               are
               Sustain'd
               by
               the
               Fibres
               which
               pass
               to
               and
               fro'
               from
               the
               Capsula
               or
               Exterior
               Membrane
               of
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
              
               and
               Septum
               .
               These
               Fibres
               are
               not
               so
               Conspicuous
               in
               the
               Humane
               Penis
               ,
               as
               in
               that
               of
               a
               Horse
               :
               Nor
               are
               the
               Cells
               of
               a
               Humane
               Penis
               so
               Evident
               as
               they
               are
               in
               Quadrupedes
               :
               This
               Structure
               of
               the
               Cavernous
               Bodies
               of
               the
               Penis
               seeming
               to
               agree
               with
               the
               Spleen
               in
               the
               same
               Animal
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Arteries
               passing
               thro'
               the
               Middle
               of
               each
               Cavernous
               Body
               of
               the
               Penis
               .
            
             
               After
               taking
               off
               the
               Tops
               of
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
                 Penis
              
               ,
               from
               a
               Patient
               who
               had
               the
               Glans
               very
               much
               Ulcerated
               ,
               I
               could
               easily
               take
               hold
               of
               the
               Ends
               of
               the
               Bleeding
               Arteries
               with
               my
               Forceps
               ,
               and
               pass
               a
               Ligature
               on
               their
               Trunks
               ,
               and
               Tie
               them
               ;
               which
               Practice
               in
               such
               Cases
               is
               Preferable
               to
               the
               Application
               of
               Stypticks
               which
               cause
               Pain
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Glans
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Orifice
               of
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 Urinarius
              
               in
               the
               Glans
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Hinder-part
               of
               the
               Penis
               in
               like
               Manner
               prepar'd
               by
               Inflation
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Capsula
               of
               the
               Cavernous
               Body
               of
               the
               Penis
               cut
               ,
               and
               rais'd
               up
               ;
               on
               which
               Part
               of
               the
               Rete
               of
               the
               
                 Corpus
                 Cavernosum
              
               do's
               Appear
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Corpus
                 Cavernosum
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Urethra
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Corpus
                 Cavernosum
                 Urethrae
              
               Divided
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               remaining
               Part
               of
               the
               Urethra
               and
               its
               Cavernous
               Body
               entire
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Glans
                 Penis
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5
               ,
               6.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
                 Penis
              
               and
               that
               of
               the
               Urethra
               ,
               after
               a
               Transverse
               Section
               when
               Inflated
               and
               Dri'd
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Capsula
               or
               Strong
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Cavernous
               Bodies
               of
               the
               Penis
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
                 Penis
              
               ;
               in
               the
               Middle
               of
               each
               of
               which
               the
               Trunks
               of
               Two
               Arteries
               pass
               according
               to
               their
               Length
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Septum
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Strong
               Membrane
               or
               Capsula
               of
               the
               
                 Corpus
                 Cavernosum
                 Urethrae
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Circular
               Cavernous
               Body
               of
               the
               Urethra
               .
            
             
               A
               particular
               Account
               of
               the
               Structure
               of
               this
               Part
               is
               Inserted
               in
               an
               Appendix
               to
               our
               
                 Myotomia
                 Reformata
              
               ;
               where
               the
               Lympheducts
               of
               the
               Humane
               Penis
               are
               Describ'd
               ,
               and
               some
               Phaenomena
               relating
               to
               them
               Explain'd
               :
               Since
               the
               Writing
               of
               which
               ,
               I
               have
               had
               an
               Opportunity
               of
               seeing
               the
               Lympheducts
               on
               the
               Penis
               of
               a
               Dog
               ,
               where
               I
               Observ'd
               by
               Blowing
               into
               the
               Veins
               ,
               the
               Lympheducts
               were
               immediately
               Distended
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FORTY-NINTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             SHEWS
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             of
             a
             Woman
             after
             the
             Intestines
             ,
             Mesentery
             ,
             &c.
             are
             remov'd
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             ,
             The
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Common
             and
             Proper
             Integuments
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             after
             a
             Crucial
             Section
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Right
             Falloppian
             Tube
             of
             the
             Uterus
             somewhat
             Rais'd
             from
             within
             the
             Pelvis
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             A
             Portion
             of
             the
             
               Intestinum
               Rectum
            
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             Bladder
             of
             Urine
             
               in
               Situ
            
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             Pubes
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             
               Arteria
               Magna
            
             with
             its
             Iliac
             Branches
             lying
             on
             those
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             Stomach
             supported
             with
             a
             Stylus
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Liver
             
               in
               Situ
            
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Spleen
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Left
             Kidney
             .
          
           
             M
             M
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Psoi
               Magni
            
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             
               Ligamentum
               Venosum
               Umbilicale
            
             Turn'd
             up
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIFTIETH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             REPRESENTS
             the
             Parts
             of
             Generation
             in
             a
             Woman
             Curiously
             Diffected
             ,
             and
             plac'd
             in
             their
             Natural
             Site
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             Right
             Kidney
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Left
             Kidney
             .
          
           
             CC
             ,
             The
             
               Glandulae
               Renales
            
             with
             their
             Blood-Vessels
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             
               Arteria
               Magna
            
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             Ureters
             .
          
           
             a
             ,
             The
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Mesenterica
               Superior
            
             cut
             off
             .
          
           
             b
             ,
             The
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Mesenterica
               Inferior
            
             .
          
           
             e
             e
             ,
             &c.
             The
             rest
             of
             the
             Branches
             of
             the
             Great
             Artery
             ;
             of
             which
             the
             Superior
             are
             the
             Emulgents
             ,
             the
             Inferior
             the
             
               Iliaci
               Externi
            
             ,
             and
             Interni
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Ascending
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             .
          
           
             f
             f
             f
             ,
             The
             Various
             Ramifications
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             ;
             whereof
             the
             Superior
             are
             the
             Emulgentes
             ,
             the
             Middle
             the
             Vertebrales
             ,
             the
             Inferior
             the
             External
             and
             Internal
             Iliac
             Branches
             .
          
           
             G
             G
             ,
             The
             Spermatick
             Artery
             and
             Vein
             in
             their
             Progress
             to
             and
             from
             the
             Ovaria
             Blow'd
             up
             ,
             and
             Separated
             from
             each
             other
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             .
          
           
             H
             H
             ,
             The
             Spermatick
             Artery
             and
             Vein
             of
             the
             Left
             Side
             ,
             still
             remaining
             within
             their
             Coverings
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             A
             Portion
             of
             the
             
               Intestinum
               Rectum
            
             Tied
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Fundus
               Uteri
            
             lying
             under
             the
             Internal
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             Bladder
             of
             Urine
             ,
             in
             like
             Manner
             ,
             under
             the
             Internal
             Lamina
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
          
           
             M
             M
             ,
             The
             
               Tubae
               Falloppianae
            
             Adorn'd
             with
             their
             Blood-Vessels
             .
          
           
             m
             m
             ,
             The
             Cavities
             of
             the
             Falloppian
             Tubes
             .
          
           
             N
             N
             ,
             The
             Ovaria
             .
          
           
             n
             n
             ,
             The
             Fimbriae
             of
             the
             Falloppian
             Tubes
             which
             Embrace
             the
             Ovaria
             after
             Impregnation
             ,
             as
             Appears
             Tab.
             53.
             
             B
             ,
             C.
             Fig.
             1.
             
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Orifice
             of
             the
             Vagina
             or
             Pudendum
             .
          
           
             P
             P
             ,
             The
             
               Labii
               Pudendi
            
             .
          
           
             Q
             ,
             The
             
               Praeputium
               Clitoridis
            
             made
             by
             the
             Nymphae
             .
          
           
             R
             R
             ,
             The
             Nymphae
             .
          
           
             T
             ,
             The
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Pudendum
             towards
             the
             
               Mons
               Veneris
            
             .
          
           
             V
             ,
             The
             Extremity
             of
             the
             Clitoris
             call'd
             Glans
             ,
             cover'd
             with
             the
             Nymphae
             .
          
           
             W
             W
             ,
             The
             
               Ligamentia
               Teretia
            
             continued
             to
             the
             
               Fundus
               Uteri
            
             ,
             and
             Pinn'd
             out
             .
          
           
             Tho'
             these
             Parts
             have
             obtain'd
             the
             Name
             of
             Ligaments
             ,
             yet
             their
             Structure
             and
             Composition
             differ
             very
             much
             from
             the
             Ligaments
             of
             other
             Parts
             ,
             which
             are
             Hard
             ,
             Dry
             and
             very
             Compact
             Bodies
             ;
             whereas
             these
             Round
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Uterus
             are
             Compos'd
             of
             a
             great
             Number
             of
             Veins
             and
             Arteries
             ;
             the
             Nerves
             and
             Lympheducts
             are
             also
             said
             to
             Enter
             into
             their
             Composition
             :
             They
             Appear
             to
             be
             very
             Extensible
             Parts
             ,
             and
             are
             Coextended
             with
             the
             
               Fundus
               Vteri
            
             after
             Impregnation
             :
             They
             are
             Broad
             towards
             the
             
               Fundus
               Vteri
            
             ,
             and
             gradually
             Lessen
             themselves
             and
             become
             Round
             as
             they
             Approach
             the
             Pubis
             ,
             where
             they
             Terminate
             under
             the
             Fat
             :
             They
             pass
             thro'
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             not
             unlike
             the
             Spermatick
             Vessels
             in
             Men
             ,
             whence
             Women
             are
             sometimes
             liable
             to
             have
             a
             
               Hernia
               Intestinalis
            
             ;
             but
             the
             Perforations
             of
             the
             Muscles
             not
             being
             so
             Large
             as
             in
             Men
             ,
             those
             Ruptures
             do
             not
             so
             often
             happen
             in
             Women
             .
          
           
             X
             X
             ,
             &c.
             A
             Large
             Portion
             of
             the
             Internal
             Lamina
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             covering
             the
             Surface
             of
             the
             
               Fundus
               Vteri
            
             ,
             Bladder
             of
             Urine
             ,
             Ovaria
             and
             the
             like
             :
             This
             by
             some
             is
             Erroneously
             call'd
             the
             
               Ligamentum
               Latum
               Vteri
            
             .
             Nor
             is
             there
             any
             such
             Ligament
             belonging
             to
             the
             Vterus
             ,
             unless
             this
             Part
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             may
             be
             so
             call'd
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIFTY-FIRST
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               Clitoris
               and
               Parts
               annex'd
               ,
               Dissected
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Clitoris
               with
               its
               Veins
               ,
               which
               are
               comprest
               by
               the
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Transversum
              
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Pubis
              
               in
               the
               Time
               of
               Coition
               ,
               in
               like
               Manner
               as
               the
               Vein
               of
               the
               Penis
               is
               in
               its
               Erection
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Two
               
                 Crura
                 Clitoridis
              
               ,
               which
               arise
               from
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 P●bis
              
               ,
               where
               they
               appear
               Porous
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Labia
                 Pudendi
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Glans
                 Clitoridis
              
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Nymphae
               which
               compose
               the
               
                 Praeputium
                 Clitoridis
              
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Meatus
                 Vrinaruis
              
               ,
               or
               Passage
               of
               Urine
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Erectores
                 Clitoridis
              
               ,
               which
               arise
               from
               the
               External
               Margin
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Ischium
              
               ,
               and
               are
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Beginnings
               of
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
              
               of
               the
               Clitoris
               :
               Their
               Office
               is
               to
               draw
               the
               Clitoris
               to
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Pubis
              
               ,
               in
               Order
               to
               stop
               the
               Refluent
               Blood
               in
               its
               large
               Vein
               ,
               whence
               the
               Clitoris
               like
               the
               Penis
               becomes
               Extended
               .
               By
               these
               Means
               the
               Clitoris
               is
               not
               only
               Dilated
               ,
               but
               the
               
                 Labii
                 Pudendi
              
               are
               in
               like
               Manner
               Extended
               by
               Two
               Cavernous
               Bodies
               or
               Retia
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               plac'd
               on
               each
               Side
               the
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Vagina
               externally
               .
               These
               are
               accurately
               describ'd
               by
               
                 Reg.
                 de
                 Graaf
                 de
                 Mulierum
                 Organis
                 ,
                 Cap.
                 VII
                 .
              
               and
               call'd
               
                 Plexus
                 Retiformis
              
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Sphincter
                 Vaginae
              
               left
               at
               the
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Clitoris
               .
               The
               Circular
               Fibres
               of
               this
               Muscle
               Encompass
               the
               Vagina
               on
               the
               Retiform
               Plexus
               ,
               and
               Compress
               its
               Veins
               ,
               (
               which
               discharge
               their
               Blood
               into
               the
               Vein
               of
               the
               Clitoris
               A.
               )
               By
               which
               Means
               the
               Plexus
               is
               fill'd
               with
               Blood
               ,
               and
               the
               External
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Vagina
               (
               about
               the
               
                 Carunculae
                 Myrtiformes
              
               )
               is
               straighten'd
               and
               adequately
               embraces
               the
               Penis
               in
               a
               Mutual
               Coitus
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               the
               Clitoris
               cut
               off
               after
               Inflation
               and
               Drying
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               little
               Head
               or
               
                 Glans
                 Clitoridis
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Its
               Proper
               Membrane
               or
               Capsula
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               Its
               Cavernulous
               Contexture
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               It
               s
               Septum
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Pudendum
               and
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               
                 Vagina
                 Vteri
              
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Vagina
               ,
               which
               lies
               under
               the
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Vagina
               and
               
                 Meatus
                 Vrinarius
              
               divided
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Corpus
                 Glandulosum
              
               or
               Part
               Analogous
               to
               the
               Prostatae
               in
               Men
               ,
               divided
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Ductus
                 Secretorii
              
               or
               Lacunae
               of
               
                 De
                 Graaf
              
               ,
               within
               the
               Gland
               ,
               which
               have
               divers
               Ostiola
               about
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 Vrinarius
              
               ,
               whence
               Issues
               Part
               of
               the
               Matter
               emitted
               
                 in
                 Coitu
              
               .
            
             
               Besides
               these
               Ducts
               arising
               from
               Glands
               plac'd
               about
               the
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 Vrinarius
              
               ,
               there
               are
               others
               of
               the
               same
               Kind
               in
               the
               Vagina
               ,
               and
               Two
               remarkable
               ones
               arising
               from
               Two
               very
               conspicuous
               Glands
               ,
               plac'd
               towards
               the
               Lower
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Orificium
                 Pudendi
              
               by
               the
               Anus
               ,
               whose
               Ducts
               open
               at
               the
               Roots
               of
               the
               
                 Carunculae
                 Myrtiformes
              
               externally
               on
               each
               Side
               the
               Pudendum
               .
               These
               and
               the
               above-mention'd
               Ducts
               discharge
               the
               Matter
               commonly
               call'd
               Semen
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Meatus
                 Vrinarius
              
               open'd
               ;
               at
               whose
               Extremity
               divers
               of
               the
               aforesaid
               Ostiola
               appear
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Labia
                 Pudendi
              
               open'd
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Rugous
               Membrane
               of
               the
               
                 Vagina
                 Vteri
              
               :
               This
               Internal
               Membrane
               is
               much
               fuller
               of
               Rugae
               towards
               its
               Upper
               Part
               ,
               B
               ,
               C
               ,
               D
               ,
               here
               divided
               ,
               than
               in
               the
               Lower
               ,
               G
               ,
               next
               the
               Rectum
               :
               As
               it
               approaches
               the
               Pudendum
               ,
               it
               becomes
               somewhat
               Narrower
               ,
               and
               behind
               or
               above
               the
               Orifice
               of
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 Vrinarius
              
               it
               frames
               a
               Valvulous
               Appearance
               in
               Virgins
               of
               above
               16
               or
               17
               Years
               of
               Age.
               In
               Girls
               of
               7
               or
               8
               ,
               it
               appears
               to
               be
               a
               Transverse
               Membrane
               having
               a
               Small
               Perforation
               towards
               its
               Upper
               Part.
               When
               the
               Hymen
               is
               broke
               ,
               whether
               
                 in
                 Coitu
              
               or
               otherwise
               ,
               the
               divided
               Parts
               of
               it
               make
               the
               
                 Carunculae
                 Myrtiformes
              
               ,
               whence
               it
               is
               ,
               the
               Figure
               and
               Number
               of
               those
               Caruncles
               are
               uncertain
               ;
               
                 Wierus
                 ,
                 Parry
                 ,
                 Hildanus
              
               and
               others
               give
               us
               Histories
               of
               Cases
               where
               the
               Hymen
               has
               been
               Impervious
               after
               Twenty-Two
               Years
               of
               Age
               ,
               and
               such
               a
               Quantity
               of
               Menstrua
               Pent
               in
               the
               Vagina
               ,
               &c.
               extend
               the
               Lower
               Belly
               ,
               as
               if
               they
               had
               gone
               with
               Child
               .
               Some
               Years
               since
               I
               was
               call'd
               by
               my
               Ingenious
               Friend
               Dr.
               Chamberlin
               to
               see
               a
               Marry'd
               Woman
               of
               above
               Twenty
               Years
               of
               Age
               ,
               whose
               Lower
               Belly
               was
               very
               much
               Distended
               ,
               as
               if
               with
               Child
               .
               Upon
               Examining
               the
               Pudendum
               ,
               we
               found
               the
               Hymen
               altogether
               Impervious
               ,
               and
               driven
               out
               beyond
               the
               
                 Labia
                 Pudendi
              
               in
               such
               Manner
               ,
               that
               at
               First
               Sight
               it
               appear'd
               not
               unlike
               a
               
                 Prolapsus
                 Vteri
              
               .
               In
               the
               Upper
               Part
               towards
               the
               Clitoris
               we
               found
               the
               Orifice
               of
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 Vrinarius
              
               very
               open
               ,
               and
               its
               Sides
               Extruded
               not
               unlike
               the
               Anus
               or
               Cloaca
               of
               a
               Cock
               ,
               and
               without
               any
               Difficulty
               I
               could
               put
               my
               Fore-finger
               into
               the
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               .
               On
               dividing
               the
               Hymen
               ,
               at
               least
               a
               Gallon
               of
               Grumous
               Blood
               of
               divers
               Colours
               and
               Consistencies
               came
               from
               her
               ,
               which
               was
               the
               retain'd
               Menstrua
               .
               The
               next
               Day
               no
               less
               a
               Quantity
               of
               the
               same
               Matter
               flow'd
               after
               removing
               the
               Pessary
               which
               I
               had
               put
               in
               the
               Day
               before
               .
               After
               Three
               ,
               or
               Four
               Days
               she
               was
               easie
               ,
               and
               soon
               after
               recover'd
               ,
               and
               with
               in
               a
               Year
               was
               deliver'd
               of
               a
               healthful
               Child
               .
               Her
               Husband
               told
               us
               ,
               Tho'
               lying
               with
               her
               at
               First
               was
               very
               painful
               to
               himself
               as
               well
               as
               to
               her
               ,
               yet
               at
               last
               he
               had
               a
               more
               easie
               Access
               ;
               which
               could
               be
               by
               no
               other
               Way
               than
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 Vrinarius
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Vterus
                 ,
                 Ovaria
              
               and
               Falloppian
               Tubes
               Dissected
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Fundus
                 Vteri
              
               open'd
               to
               shew
               the
               Cavity
               and
               Thickness
               of
               its
               Sides
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Collum
                 Vteri
              
               leading
               from
               the
               Vagina
               to
               the
               Fundus
               ,
               likewise
               open'd
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Tincae
              
               or
               Orifice
               of
               the
               
                 Collum
                 Minus
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Vagina
                 Vteri
              
               divided
               to
               shew
               its
               Rugae
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Cavity
               of
               the
               
                 Fundus
                 Vteri
              
               as
               it
               appears
               before
               Impregnation
               ,
               it
               being
               of
               a
               somewhat
               Triangular
               Figure
               ,
               and
               not
               exceeding
               the
               Magnitude
               it
               's
               here
               represented
               of
               .
               Between
               D
               and
               F
               is
               the
               
                 Collum
                 Minus
              
               or
               
                 Cervix
                 Fundi
                 Vteri
              
               ,
               where
               divers
               Rugae
               are
               truly
               represented
               ,
               in
               whose
               Sulci
               are
               the
               Orifices
               of
               divers
               small
               Tubes
               ,
               which
               arise
               from
               a
               Glandulous
               Contexture
               of
               the
               Vessels
               of
               this
               Part
               ;
               whence
               proceeds
               a
               Pituitous
               Serous
               Matter
               ,
               as
               may
               be
               seen
               by
               Compressing
               this
               Part
               externally
               .
            
             
               
                 De
                 Graaf
                 de
                 Mul.
                 Organ
                 .
                 Generat
                 .
                 Inseroi
                 .
              
               Cap.
               VIII
               .
               acknowledges
               his
               Ignorance
               ,
               to
               what
               End
               this
               Matter
               is
               here
               separated
               ,
               unless
               it
               be
               to
               moisten
               the
               Parts
               and
               excite
               Venery
               ,
               &c.
               
               In
               preparing
               a
               Humane
               Vterus
               after
               Three
               Months
               Impregnation
               ,
               I
               found
               the
               
                 Os
                 Tincae
              
               and
               
                 Collum
                 Minus
              
               very
               much
               dilated
               ,
               and
               fill'd
               with
               a
               very
               Tough
               ,
               Glutinous
               Matter
               .
               The
               like
               is
               taken
               Notice
               of
               by
               Spigellius
               ,
               Lib.
               VIII
               .
               Cap.
               XXIII
               .
               As
               the
               Time
               of
               the
               Partus
               draws
               in
               ,
               the
               
                 Os
                 Tincae
              
               still
               becomes
               Larger
               ,
               and
               the
               Glutinous
               Matter
               encreases
               ,
               whereby
               it
               prevents
               Abortions
               by
               opposing
               any
               Extrusion
               of
               the
               Chorion
               ,
               notwithstanding
               the
               Efforts
               made
               by
               the
               Foetus
               from
               within
               towards
               the
               Time
               of
               the
               Partus
               :
               This
               Glutinous
               Matter
               also
               hinders
               the
               Intrusion
               of
               any
               Thing
               from
               the
               Vagina
               after
               Impregnation
               .
               When
               this
               Matter
               is
               Vitiated
               as
               in
               a
               
                 Fluor
                 Albus
              
               ,
               Impregnation
               is
               Hindered
               .
            
             
               G
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Orifices
               of
               the
               Falloppian
               Tubes
               in
               the
               Two
               Superior
               Angles
               of
               the
               
                 Fundus
                 Vteri
              
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               I
               I
               ,
               Two
               Probes
               Inserted
               into
               each
               of
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Tubes
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               A
               small
               Constricture
               in
               the
               Mouth
               of
               the
               Tube
               .
            
             
               L
               L
               ,
               The
               Right
               Falloppian
               Tube
               Open'd
               and
               Expanded
               ,
               whose
               Internal
               Membrane
               is
               somewhat
               Rugous
               .
            
             
               M
               N
               ,
               The
               Right
               Ovaria
               entire
               .
            
             
               O
               O
               O
               ,
               The
               Fimbriae
               or
               
                 Expansum
                 Foliacium
                 Tubae
              
               .
            
             
               P
               P
               ,
               A
               Broad
               Ligament
               between
               the
               Ovarium
               and
               Tube
               ,
               not
               unlike
               to
               a
               Bat's
               Wing
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               The
               Left
               Ovaria
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               R
               R
               ,
               The
               External
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Ovarium
               .
            
             
               S
               S
               ,
               T
               T
               ,
               Divers
               Glands
               and
               Transparent
               little
               Vessicules
               ,
               which
               compose
               the
               Ovaria
               .
            
             
               V
               V
               ,
               The
               Peritonaeum
               or
               External
               Tegument
               of
               the
               Vterus
               ,
               which
               is
               call'd
               the
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Latum
              
               .
            
             
               W
               W
               ,
               Portions
               of
               the
               
                 Ligamenta
                 rotunda
                 Vterina
              
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIFTY-SECOND
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THE
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             after
             its
             Viscera
             are
             remov'd
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             ,
             The
             Common
             and
             Proper
             Integuments
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             Dissected
             and
             turn'd
             Aside
             .
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             The
             
               Diaphragma
               in
               Situ
            
             :
             It
             Arises
             Tendinous
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             from
             the
             Third
             ,
             Second
             and
             First
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             and
             last
             of
             the
             Back
             (
             H
             )
             ;
             On
             the
             Left
             ,
             from
             the
             First
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             and
             Last
             Vertebra
             of
             the
             Back
             ;
             hence
             Ascending
             with
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             on
             each
             Side
             running
             Straight
             ,
             but
             towards
             the
             Middle
             they
             pass
             somewhat
             Curvedly
             ,
             Intersecting
             each
             other
             near
             the
             Oesophagus
             (
             D
             )
             ,
             do
             as
             it
             were
             Embrace
             it
             :
             After
             which
             they
             become
             Tendinous
             and
             join
             with
             its
             Upper-part
             (
             F
             )
             ,
             which
             Arises
             Thin
             and
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Pectoris
            
             or
             Sternum
             :
             It
             s
             Lateral
             Parts
             derive
             their
             Origins
             from
             the
             Cartilaginous
             Endings
             of
             the
             Ribs
             and
             Lower
             Margin
             of
             the
             Last
             Rib
             (
             G
             )
             on
             each
             Side
             .
             From
             these
             Parts
             the
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             of
             the
             Diaphragm
             (
             like
             Lines
             drawn
             from
             a
             Circumference
             towards
             a
             Center
             )
             pass
             to
             its
             Middle
             Part
             ,
             where
             its
             Tendinous
             Fibres
             are
             Intercussated
             with
             each
             other
             and
             Exhibit
             a
             Rete
             .
             Besides
             its
             Perforation
             for
             the
             Oesophagus
             in
             its
             Fleshy
             Part
             ,
             it
             has
             another
             in
             its
             Tendinous
             one
             ,
             no
             less
             remarkable
             ,
             to
             Transmit
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             (
             C
             )
             .
             It
             s
             Double
             Origin
             at
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loins
             gives
             Way
             to
             the
             Descending
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Magna
            
             (
             E
             )
             ,
             and
             Two
             Ascending
             of
             the
             
               Ductus
               Chyliferus
            
             and
             
               Vena
               Azygos
            
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             .
             In
             Expiration
             this
             Lower
             Surface
             of
             the
             Diaphragm
             is
             Concave
             towards
             the
             Abdomen
             (
             as
             here
             Exprest
             )
             ,
             and
             its
             Upper
             ,
             Convex
             towards
             the
             Thorax
             .
             In
             Inspiration
             it
             Approaches
             towards
             a
             Plane
             next
             the
             Thorax
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Abdomen
             .
             If
             the
             Viscera
             of
             the
             Lower
             Belly
             are
             taken
             out
             in
             Vivisection
             ,
             the
             Inferior
             Surface
             of
             the
             Diaphragm
             will
             Appear
             Convex
             in
             Inspiration
             ,
             and
             more
             especially
             if
             Two
             small
             Wounds
             should
             be
             made
             into
             the
             Cavities
             on
             both
             Sides
             the
             Thorax
             ,
             so
             that
             the
             Ambient
             Air
             may
             Rush
             into
             its
             Cavities
             on
             each
             Side
             the
             Mediastinum
             ;
             the
             Diaphragma
             than
             will
             still
             remain
             Concave
             towards
             the
             Thorax
             ,
             and
             Convex
             towards
             the
             Abdomen
             .
             Nor
             can
             Respiration
             be
             perform'd
             ,
             except
             the
             Wounds
             in
             the
             Thorax
             are
             Large
             enough
             to
             Discharge
             it
             s
             contain'd
             Air
             freely
             again
             ;
             whence
             it
             happens
             that
             Wounds
             in
             the
             Thorax
             may
             suddenly
             prove
             Mortal
             ,
             when
             no
             contain'd
             Part
             is
             Injured
             .
             But
             in
             such
             Cases
             the
             External
             Wounds
             ought
             to
             be
             Enlarg'd
             that
             the
             Air
             may
             have
             a
             Free
             Egress
             ,
             which
             the
             Perforation
             of
             the
             Skin
             and
             Muscles
             not
             corresponding
             ,
             Hinders
             ;
             but
             this
             seldom
             happens
             ,
             because
             both
             Sides
             of
             the
             Thorax
             are
             not
             very
             liable
             to
             be
             Wounded
             in
             such
             Manner
             at
             the
             same
             time
             .
             If
             one
             Side
             of
             the
             Thorax
             only
             is
             Wounded
             ,
             the
             External
             Air
             ought
             by
             all
             means
             to
             be
             Pent
             out
             ,
             tho'
             the
             Patient
             is
             not
             Incident
             to
             be
             Suffocated
             ;
             because
             the
             other
             Side
             of
             the
             Lungs
             are
             not
             Incommoded
             ,
             yet
             the
             Intruded
             Air
             ought
             to
             be
             let
             out
             ,
             tho'
             it
             only
             Hinders
             the
             Dilatation
             of
             one
             Side
             of
             the
             Lungs
             .
             In
             Dissecting
             a
             Morbid
             Body
             which
             had
             one
             Side
             of
             the
             Diaphragm
             very
             much
             Deprest
             ,
             (
             by
             the
             contain'd
             Water
             on
             the
             same
             Side
             of
             the
             Thorax
             )
             I
             found
             the
             Lungs
             on
             that
             Side
             in
             great
             Part
             Mortified
             ,
             and
             the
             Blood
             Stagnated
             ;
             there
             being
             some
             Air
             also
             broke
             out
             from
             the
             Bronchia
             into
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ,
             which
             compleatly
             Hinder'd
             Inspiration
             on
             that
             Side
             of
             the
             Lungs
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Blood-Vessels
             of
             the
             Diaphragm
             ,
             call'd
             Phrenicae
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             Perforation
             for
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             Gula
             or
             Oesophagus
             cut
             off
             before
             it
             passes
             the
             Diaphragm
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Magna
            
             in
             like
             Manner
             divided
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Diaphragm
             towards
             the
             
               Cartilago
               Ensiformis
            
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             Back-part
             Contiguous
             to
             the
             last
             Rib.
             
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             Tendinous
             Origin
             of
             the
             Diaphragm
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             call'd
             Appendix
             .
             The
             Chief
             Action
             of
             the
             Diaphragm
             is
             to
             Compress
             the
             Viscera
             of
             the
             Lower
             Belly
             ,
             in
             Order
             to
             Enlarge
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Thorax
             in
             Inspiration
             :
             Nor
             can
             we
             see
             any
             reason
             to
             doubt
             its
             being
             a
             Muscle
             elegantly
             Fram'd
             for
             this
             Action
             ,
             wherein
             divers
             contingent
             Offices
             occur
             ;
             as
             the
             great
             Work
             of
             Chylification
             is
             Assisted
             by
             the
             frequent
             Compresses
             made
             by
             it
             ,
             in
             its
             repeated
             Contractions
             ;
             and
             that
             not
             only
             in
             Promoting
             the
             Descent
             of
             the
             Contents
             of
             the
             Stomach
             and
             Intestines
             ;
             but
             also
             the
             Ascent
             of
             the
             Chyle
             by
             the
             
               Vasa
               Lactea
            
             and
             Blood
             by
             the
             
               Vena
               Porta
            
             are
             also
             Promoted
             .
             It
             also
             hastens
             the
             Discharge
             of
             those
             Liquors
             contain'd
             in
             the
             Excretory
             Ducts
             of
             those
             many
             Large
             Glands
             within
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             as
             the
             Liver
             ,
             Pancreas
             ,
             Kidneys
             ,
             &c.
             
             Not
             to
             mention
             many
             other
             contingent
             Offices
             of
             this
             Part
             ;
             as
             in
             the
             Exclusion
             of
             the
             Foeces
             and
             Urine
             in
             both
             Sexes
             ,
             and
             Foetus
             in
             Women
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             I
             I
             ,
             The
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loins
             with
             their
             Cartilaginous
             Interstitia
             join'd
             by
             Ligaments
             .
          
           
             K
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Psoas
               Magnus
            
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             ;
             the
             
               Psoas
               Parvus
            
             in
             this
             Subject
             perhaps
             was
             wanting
             .
          
           
             L
             L
             ,
             The
             
               Psoas
               Magnus
            
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             somewhat
             free'd
             from
             the
             Vertebrae
             ,
             and
             Pin'd
             out
             :
             This
             large
             Fleshy
             Muscle
             derives
             its
             Origin
             from
             all
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loins
             Internally
             ,
             Laterally
             within
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             whence
             Descending
             over
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             and
             Spine
             of
             the
             Ilium
             ,
             where
             it
             joins
             with
             the
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             of
             the
             
               Iliacus
               Internus
            
             (
             N
             )
             ,
             and
             passes
             to
             its
             Implantation
             on
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Lesser
             Trochanter
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             .
             This
             pulls
             the
             Thigh
             Upwards
             ,
             and
             moves
             it
             Forewards
             in
             Walking
             ,
             Running
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Quadratus
               Lumborum
            
             ,
             Describ'd
             Tab.
             30.
             
          
           
             N
             N
             N
             ,
             The
             
               Iliaci
               Interni
               in
               Situ
            
             :
             Either
             of
             these
             Muscles
             Arises
             from
             above
             half
             the
             Superior
             Region
             and
             Internal
             Concave
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             ,
             and
             joining
             with
             the
             
               Psoas
               Magnus
            
             ,
             is
             Inserted
             with
             it
             to
             the
             Lesser
             Trochanter
             .
             The
             Office
             of
             this
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Psoas
               Magnus
            
             are
             the
             same
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Gracilis
             .
          
           
             P
             P
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             Triceps
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIFTY-THIRD
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               REPRESENTS
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               
                 Fundus
                 Uteri
              
               not
               long
               after
               Impregnation
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Parts
               Annext
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Fundus
                 Vteri
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Left
               Falloppian
               Tube
               Distended
               ,
               and
               it
               s
               Foliated
               Expansions
               Embracing
               the
               Ovarium
               ;
               which
               Action
               ,
               according
               to
               
                 De
                 Graaf
              
               do's
               not
               Appear
               in
               Rabbets
               till
               Twenty-four
               Hours
               after
               the
               Coitus
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Ovaria
               with
               their
               Protuberant
               Ova
               in
               their
               Folliculi
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               more
               Extended
               with
               Blood
               than
               before
               Impregnation
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Right
               Falloppian
               Tube
               with
               its
               Fimbriae
               Expanded
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               Portions
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Ovaria
               call'd
               Praeparantia
               and
               Spermatica
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               which
               makes
               the
               External
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Vterus
               ,
               and
               call'd
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Latum
                 Vteri
              
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Uterine
               Round
               Ligaments
               lying
               under
               the
               Peritonaeum
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               
                 Cervix
                 Vteri
              
               Divested
               of
               its
               Common
               Membrane
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ,
               to
               shew
               its
               Blood-Vessels
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Vagina
                 Vteri
              
               Inverted
               ,
               where
               its
               Internal
               Rugae
               are
               well
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Mouth
               of
               the
               Vterus
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Os
                 Tincae
              
               ,
               somewhat
               Dilated
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Left
               Uterine
               Tube
               (
               Exprest
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               )
               pull'd
               from
               the
               Ovaria
               it
               Embrac'd
               with
               its
               Fimbriae
               ;
               which
               remain
               Extended
               ,
               together
               with
               its
               whole
               Ductus
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Fimbriated
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Tube
               Open.
               
            
             
               C
               ,
               Its
               Progress
               towards
               the
               
                 Fundus
                 Vteri
              
               :
               The
               whole
               Tube
               being
               of
               a
               deep
               Red
               Colour
               from
               its
               many
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               especially
               the
               Veins
               which
               Frame
               a
               Reticular
               Body
               ,
               as
               may
               be
               Demonstrated
               either
               by
               Injecting
               them
               with
               Mercury
               ,
               or
               Inflation
               .
               Hence
               it
               Appears
               the
               Uterine
               Tubes
               (
               not
               unlike
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavernosa
                 Penis
                 Clitoridis
              
               ,
               &c.
               )
               have
               their
               Reticulated
               Sides
               Extended
               ,
               and
               their
               Internal
               Cavities
               of
               Consequence
               Enlarg'd
               upon
               a
               particular
               Stop
               of
               the
               Refluent
               Blood
               ;
               but
               whether
               this
               Stop
               or
               Retardation
               of
               the
               Blood
               in
               the
               Veins
               ,
               made
               in
               the
               time
               of
               the
               Coitus
               ,
               (
               which
               for
               some
               Reasons
               we
               are
               enclin'd
               to
               suppose
               )
               or
               as
               
                 De
                 Graaf
              
               intimates
               Five
               or
               Six
               and
               Twenty
               Hours
               after
               ;
               neither
               our
               present
               Occasions
               nor
               Opportunities
               will
               allow
               us
               to
               Examine
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Falloppian
               Tube
               Open'd
               ,
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               .
            
             
               B
               C
               C
               ,
               Its
               Internal
               Membrane
               Divided
               and
               Expanded
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               A
               Probe
               Inserted
               into
               its
               Beginning
               near
               the
               
                 Fundus
                 Vteri
              
               ,
               which
               is
               not
               yet
               Divided
               .
            
             
               The
               rest
               of
               the
               Adjacent
               Parts
               of
               this
               Figure
               are
               Explain'd
               Tab.
               51.
               
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Inferior
               or
               Back-part
               of
               the
               same
               Impregnated
               Vterus
               ,
               &c.
               
               Exprest
               Fig.
               1.
               
               Its
               Vessels
               here
               being
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Fundus
                 Vteri
              
               somewhat
               Enlarg'd
               by
               reason
               its
               Veins
               are
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Veins
               fill'd
               with
               a
               Dark
               Colour'd
               Wax
               :
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Arteries
               with
               Red
               Wax
               :
               Both
               which
               Vessels
               become
               Distended
               by
               Injecting
               of
               their
               Large
               Trunks
               on
               either
               Side
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               External
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Vterus
               deriv'd
               from
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ,
               Rais'd
               from
               the
               
                 Cervix
                 Vteri
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Latum
                 Vteri
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Ovaria
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Falloppian
               Tubes
               also
               fill'd
               with
               White
               Wax
               ,
               and
               very
               Tortuous
               in
               this
               Position
               ,
               their
               Extremities
               being
               drawn
               from
               the
               Ovaria
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Round
               Ligament
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               Broad
               Ligaments
               like
               Batt's
               Wings
               joining
               the
               Falloppian
               Tubes
               to
               the
               Ovaria
               ,
               where
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               passing
               to
               and
               from
               the
               Ovaria
               ,
               are
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Vasa
                 Spermatica
              
               cut
               off
               .
               These
               Spermatick
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               are
               not
               only
               Inosculated
               in
               their
               Large
               Trunks
               ,
               with
               the
               Hypogastrick
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Vterus
               ,
               but
               those
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               of
               the
               Vterus
               ,
               are
               Inosculated
               with
               the
               Left
               ,
               in
               such
               Manner
               that
               by
               Injecting
               of
               Wax
               into
               one
               of
               the
               Spermatick
               Veins
               ,
               it
               will
               not
               only
               fill
               the
               Hypogastricks
               ,
               but
               the
               Spermatick
               Vein
               also
               of
               the
               contrary
               Side
               .
               The
               like
               will
               not
               happen
               by
               Injecting
               Wax
               into
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               because
               their
               Trunks
               are
               Smaller
               than
               the
               Veins
               .
               But
               Mercury
               readily
               passes
               from
               the
               Arteries
               of
               one
               Side
               to
               those
               of
               the
               other
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIFTY-FOURTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             SHEWS
             the
             Abdomen
             of
             a
             Woman
             open'd
             after
             Seven
             Months
             gone
             with
             Child
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             A
             A
             ,
             The
             common
             Integuments
             of
             the
             whole
             Body
             divided
             and
             turn'd
             off
             .
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             The
             proper
             Integuments
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             viz.
             The
             Muscles
             and
             Peritonaeum
             in
             like
             Manner
             divided
             .
          
           
             C
             C.
             The
             
               Fundus
               Uteri
            
             very
             much
             enlarg'd
             ;
             and
             in
             this
             Subject
             enclines
             more
             towards
             the
             Right
             Side
             than
             the
             Left.
             
          
           
             D
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             Colon
             and
             Parts
             of
             the
             small
             Gutts
             as
             they
             appear
             above
             the
             
               Fundus
               Uteri
            
             .
          
           
             d
             d
             ,
             The
             Muscular
             Compages
             of
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             call'd
             the
             
               Ligamentum
               Coli
            
             ,
             well
             Exprest
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             That
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Fundus
               Uteri
            
             towards
             the
             
               Collum
               minus
            
             .
          
           
             F
             F
             F
             ,
             The
             Veins
             of
             the
             Uterus
             very
             much
             Dilated
             .
          
           
             As
             the
             Time
             of
             the
             Birth
             draws
             on
             ,
             so
             the
             Thickness
             of
             the
             Uterus
             is
             still
             said
             to
             encrease
             ,
             and
             the
             Trunks
             of
             the
             Veins
             become
             still
             more
             and
             more
             distended
             .
             The
             Trunks
             of
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Uterus
             are
             also
             at
             that
             Time
             proportionably
             Dilated
             .
             These
             Blood-Vessels
             of
             the
             Uterus
             are
             inosculated
             with
             those
             of
             the
             Placenta
             ,
             as
             may
             appear
             by
             the
             Passing
             of
             Mercury
             from
             One
             to
             the
             Other
             ,
             so
             that
             if
             you
             pour
             it
             into
             the
             Hypogastrick
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Mother
             ,
             it
             will
             pass
             into
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Placenta
             as
             well
             as
             those
             of
             the
             Uterus
             :
             And
             on
             the
             contrary
             the
             Mercury
             will
             pass
             from
             the
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Placenta
             to
             the
             Hypogastrick
             Veins
             of
             the
             Mother
             ,
             as
             also
             into
             the
             Veins
             of
             the
             Placenta
             .
             Hence
             it
             appears
             there
             is
             a
             Circulation
             of
             Blood
             between
             the
             Mother
             and
             Foetus
             ;
             and
             it
             seems
             as
             if
             the
             Blood-Vessels
             of
             both
             did
             Germinate
             and
             Inosculate
             with
             each
             other
             .
             But
             this
             requires
             too
             much
             Speculation
             for
             my
             Occasions
             to
             admit
             of
             a
             farther
             Enquiry
             at
             present
             .
             Therefore
             I
             shall
             here
             only
             speak
             of
             some
             Phaenomena
             which
             offer
             in
             Child-bearing
             .
          
           
             If
             the
             
               Fundus
               Uteri
            
             remain
             Tumifi'd
             after
             Child-bearing
             or
             an
             Abortion
             ,
             the
             Flux
             of
             Blood
             proves
             very
             great
             and
             sometimes
             destructive
             to
             the
             Mother
             ,
             because
             the
             Uterus
             do's
             not
             Collapse
             ,
             and
             by
             that
             Means
             close
             the
             Orifices
             of
             the
             Broken-off
             Arteries
             of
             the
             Mother
             .
             The
             like
             Flux
             also
             happens
             from
             the
             same
             Cause
             ,
             when
             but
             Part
             of
             the
             Placenta
             comes
             away
             in
             the
             Partus
             ;
             in
             which
             Case
             the
             remaining
             Part
             ought
             to
             be
             remov'd
             as
             soon
             as
             possible
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIFTY-FIFTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             IS
             the
             Abdomen
             of
             the
             same
             Woman
             Open'd
             ,
             Represented
             in
             the
             Precedent
             Table
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             A
             ,
             The
             
               Fundus
               Uteri
            
             after
             a
             Crucial
             Section
             Expanded
             .
          
           
             B
             B
             Inferior
             ,
             The
             Inside
             of
             the
             Skin
             Cover'd
             with
             Fat.
             
          
           
             B
             B
             Superior
             ,
             C
             C
             ,
             The
             Inside
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Colon
             above
             the
             
               Fundus
               Uteri
            
             .
          
           
             E
             E
             ,
             The
             External
             Convex
             Surface
             of
             the
             Placenta
             free'd
             from
             the
             
               Fundus
               Uteri
            
             .
          
           
             F
             G
             H
             ,
             The
             Asperities
             F
             ,
             Little
             Hollownesses
             G
             ,
             and
             Tubercles
             H
             ,
             of
             the
             Uterus
             ,
             which
             receive
             and
             were
             receiv'd
             by
             the
             like
             in
             the
             Placenta
             .
          
           
             I
             K
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Chorion
             cleaving
             to
             the
             Internal
             Concave
             Surface
             of
             the
             Placenta
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Urinary
             Membrane
             or
             Allantoides
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Amnios
             made
             bare
             ,
             as
             it
             Appears
             fill'd
             with
             its
             containing
             Liquor
             .
          
           
             Tho'
             this
             Membrane
             which
             immediately
             Involves
             the
             Foetus
             ,
             Appears
             in
             most
             Parts
             very
             Transparent
             ,
             yet
             here
             are
             a
             vast
             Number
             of
             Blood-Vessels
             every
             where
             dispers'd
             thro'
             it
             .
             In
             divers
             Parts
             of
             the
             Amnios
             in
             Cows
             ,
             I
             have
             more
             than
             once
             Observ'd
             Various
             Clusters
             of
             somewhat
             Opacous
             Bodies
             ,
             which
             I
             am
             apt
             to
             think
             are
             a
             Congeries
             of
             Glands
             ,
             and
             help
             to
             Separate
             from
             the
             Blood
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Contents
             of
             the
             Amnios
             in
             which
             the
             Foetus
             mov'd
             ,
             and
             is
             receiv'd
             by
             its
             Mouth
             towards
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Partus
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Chorion
             Rais'd
             from
             the
             Amnios
             ,
             and
             Left
             to
             the
             Uterus
             it self
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             .
          
           
             Part
             of
             the
             Liver
             Appears
             above
             the
             Intestines
             immediately
             under
             the
             Ensiformal
             Cartilage
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIFTY-SIXTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THE
             Abdomen
             and
             Uterus
             of
             the
             same
             Woman
             (
             Figur'd
             in
             the
             Two
             precedent
             Tables
             )
             Open'd
             ,
             after
             Seven
             Months
             gone
             with
             Child
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             
               Placenta
               Uterina
            
             free'd
             from
             the
             Upper
             Part
             of
             the
             Uterus
             ,
             and
             drawn
             towards
             the
             Right
             Side
             ,
             so
             that
             its
             Internal
             Concave
             Surface
             next
             the
             Amnios
             ,
             Appears
             Cover'd
             with
             the
             Chorion
             ;
             under
             which
             the
             Arboreous
             Disposition
             of
             its
             Blood-Vessels
             are
             elegantly
             Exprest
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Chorion
             free'd
             from
             the
             Amnios
             ,
             and
             Rais'd
             with
             the
             Placenta
             ,
             to
             whose
             Concave
             Part
             it
             Adheres
             ,
             and
             it
             s
             continued
             (
             H
             )
             on
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Urinary
             Membrane
             free'd
             from
             the
             Amnios
             ,
             and
             cleaving
             to
             the
             Chorion
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             Uterus
             with
             the
             Chorion
             Divided
             Cross-ways
             and
             Expanded
             .
             The
             Inequalities
             of
             the
             Internal
             Surface
             of
             the
             Uterus
             are
             here
             Remarkable
             :
             Its
             Blood-Vessels
             as
             well
             as
             those
             of
             the
             Placenta
             not
             only
             Germinate
             ,
             but
             Inosculate
             with
             each
             other
             ,
             as
             is
             above
             Noted
             .
          
           
             E
             E
             ,
             The
             Proper
             Integuments
             of
             the
             
               Abdomen
               ,
               (
               viz.
            
             )
             the
             Muscles
             and
             Peritonaeum
             in
             like
             Manner
             Divided
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Foetus
             lying
             within
             the
             Transparent
             Membrane
             call'd
             Amnios
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             Amnios
             entire
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             Umbilical
             Rope
             Arising
             from
             the
             Placenta
             ,
             and
             passing
             to
             the
             Navel
             of
             the
             Foetus
             :
             Its
             Progress
             is
             Various
             ,
             sometimes
             it
             Marches
             over
             the
             Right
             Shoulder
             ,
             sometimes
             over
             the
             Left
             close
             to
             the
             Neck
             ;
             at
             other
             times
             it
             Ascends
             towards
             the
             Breast
             ,
             whence
             it
             is
             again
             Reflected
             to
             the
             Back
             of
             the
             Foetus
             ,
             and
             thence
             to
             the
             Navel
             .
             Tho'
             the
             Blood-Vessels
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             are
             Dispos'd
             in
             the
             best
             Manner
             (
             
               Vid.
               Tab.
            
             60.62
             .
             Fig.
             5.
             )
             to
             avoid
             their
             being
             Comprest
             in
             any
             Contorted
             Position
             ;
             yet
             it
             sometimes
             happens
             either
             thro'
             the
             shortness
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Case
             mention'd
             by
             
               Hildanus
               ,
               Cent.
               II.
               Observ.
               LI.
            
             or
             by
             the
             great
             Strugling
             of
             the
             
               Foetus
               in
               Utero
            
             ;
             that
             it
             is
             so
             Comprest
             ,
             that
             the
             Blood
             cannot
             pass
             in
             its
             Vessels
             :
             In
             which
             Case
             if
             an
             Abortion
             do's
             not
             happen
             ,
             or
             if
             it
             is
             at
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Partus
             ,
             and
             the
             Birth
             do's
             not
             presently
             follow
             ,
             the
             Dead
             Foetus
             with
             its
             Secondines
             are
             retain'd
             in
             the
             Uterus
             ;
             and
             if
             the
             Mother
             Survives
             ,
             they
             do
             gradually
             Putrifie
             and
             come
             away
             ;
             as
             Appears
             in
             the
             History
             of
             a
             Case
             very
             well
             Attested
             in
             the
             Excellent
             Works
             of
             the
             above
             mention'd
             Author
             ,
             where
             the
             Bones
             with
             Part
             of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Limbs
             were
             taken
             out
             near
             the
             Navel
             of
             the
             Mother
             ,
             some
             Months
             after
             the
             Secondines
             gradually
             came
             away
             at
             her
             Pudendum
             .
             A
             like
             Instance
             was
             lately
             Communicated
             to
             me
             by
             the
             Ingenious
             Mr.
             Dale
             the
             Apothecary
             ,
             who
             was
             an
             Eye-witness
             of
             it
             in
             a
             Woman
             in
             the
             Country
             where
             he
             lives
             .
          
           
             I
             K
             L
             M
             N
             O
             P
             ,
             The
             Foetus
             lying
             in
             the
             Vterus
             in
             its
             Natural
             Posture
             .
          
           
             The
             Posture
             of
             the
             Foetus
             in
             the
             Uterus
             varies
             very
             much
             ,
             especially
             towards
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Partus
             ;
             this
             Order
             of
             it
             is
             then
             Inverst
             ,
             the
             Head
             at
             that
             time
             is
             downwards
             towards
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Womb.
             In
             the
             most
             easie
             Births
             ,
             the
             Face
             is
             turn'd
             towards
             the
             Back-bones
             or
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             .
             If
             any
             Part
             ,
             besides
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Foetus
             offers
             it self
             first
             ,
             (
             except
             both
             Legs
             together
             ,
             )
             the
             Birth
             proves
             Laborious
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             very
             Dangerous
             ;
             wherefore
             the
             Operator
             in
             such
             a
             Case
             is
             Oblig'd
             (
             if
             possible
             )
             to
             reduce
             those
             Parts
             ,
             and
             turn
             the
             Foetus
             to
             the
             most
             Natural
             Order
             that
             can
             be
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIFTY-SEVENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             ,
             B
             B
             ,
             DIVERS
             Eggs
             of
             a
             different
             Size
             taken
             from
             the
             Ovaria
             of
             a
             Maid
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               An
               Egg
               Impregnated
               ;
               in
               which
               the
               Branches
               and
               Plexus
               of
               divers
               Blood-Vessels
               Appear
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               A
               Foetus
               with
               its
               Secondines
               ,
               Twenty-five
               Days
               after
               Conception
               ;
               in
               which
               the
               Rudimerits
               of
               all
               the
               Limbs
               Appear
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Placenta
                 Uterina
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Chorion
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Urinary
               Membrane
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Amnios
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Umbilical
               Rope
               between
               the
               Placenta
               and
               Foetus
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Foetus
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               A
               Foetus
               Forty
               Days
               after
               Conception
               ,
               in
               which
               all
               the
               External
               Parts
               Appear
               Distinct.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               A
               Masculine
               Foetus
               about
               Two
               Months
               and
               a
               Half
               after
               Conception
               ;
               in
               which
               the
               Magnitude
               of
               the
               Head
               in
               Proportion
               to
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Body
               is
               Remarkable
               .
               The
               Conformation
               of
               the
               Bones
               at
               that
               time
               may
               be
               seen
               in
               the
               100.
               
               
                 Tab.
                 Fig.
              
               3
               ,
               4.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               An
               Abortive
               Three
               Months
               after
               Conception
               ,
               or
               there
               abouts
               Dri'd
               ;
               so
               that
               the
               Connection
               of
               its
               Bones
               may
               be
               seen
               in
               divers
               Parts
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               A
               Foetus
               of
               Eight
               Months
               taken
               out
               of
               the
               Uterus
               ,
               together
               with
               its
               Placenta
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               A
               Male
               Foetus
               ,
               whose
               Hands
               are
               Contracted
               and
               Feet
               Contorted
               Inwards
               .
            
             
               B
               C
               D
               ,
               The
               Umbilical
               Rope
               continued
               in
               its
               wonted
               Progress
               between
               the
               Foetus
               and
               Placenta
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Chorion
               covering
               the
               Internal
               Concave
               Surface
               of
               the
               Placenta
               ,
               and
               its
               Arboreous
               Ramifications
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               deriv'd
               from
               the
               Umbilical
               Rope
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Urinary
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Ammios
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Chorion
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIFTY-EIGHTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             SHEWS
             the
             External
             Convext
             Surface
             of
             the
             
               Placenta
               Uterina
            
             free'd
             from
             the
             Vterus
             .
          
           
             The
             Placenta
             is
             compos'd
             of
             Blood-Vessels
             of
             both
             Kinds
             deriv'd
             from
             the
             Mother
             and
             Foetus
             ,
             which
             Frame
             Glandulous
             Bodies
             and
             Fibres
             ,
             to
             which
             divers
             Succiferous
             Ducts
             are
             Inserted
             ,
             says
             Bidloo
             .
          
           
             These
             Succiferous
             Tubes
             and
             Glands
             I
             must
             confess
             never
             yet
             Occur'd
             to
             my
             Observation
             in
             Dissection
             ,
             nor
             do
             I
             at
             present
             know
             who
             besides
             Professor
             Bidloo
             mentions
             them
             :
             Here
             he
             only
             Names
             them
             among
             other
             Vessels
             of
             the
             Placenta
             ,
             and
             in
             Tab.
             66.
             he
             Represents
             divers
             Succiferous
             Ducts
             in
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             ;
             nor
             do's
             he
             any
             where
             mention
             what
             Juice
             these
             Ducts
             of
             the
             Placenta
             carry
             ,
             or
             those
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             ;
             wherefore
             I
             shall
             here
             Venture
             to
             add
             my
             Conjecture
             ,
             and
             so
             proceed
             .
             If
             any
             Liquor
             Transcolated
             by
             Glands
             of
             the
             Placenta
             is
             convey'd
             towards
             the
             Foetus
             ,
             it
             is
             most
             likely
             that
             contain'd
             in
             the
             Amnios
             ;
             and
             tho'
             we
             have
             Observ'd
             Tab.
             ●5
             .
             divers
             Glands
             plac'd
             at
             Various
             Distances
             in
             the
             Amnios
             of
             Cows
             ,
             yet
             we
             can
             by
             no
             means
             think
             they
             are
             sufficient
             to
             supply
             that
             Membrane
             with
             a
             Necessary
             Quantity
             of
             Liquor
             for
             Entertaining
             the
             Foetus
             :
             And
             since
             we
             have
             Observ'd
             divers
             Tubercles
             on
             the
             Surface
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             ,
             mention'd
             in
             the
             following
             Table
             (
             P
             )
             .
             We
             cannot
             tell
             how
             to
             reconcile
             those
             Phaenomena
             ,
             but
             by
             supposing
             the
             greatest
             Part
             of
             the
             Liquor
             of
             the
             Amnios
             ,
             is
             convey'd
             thither
             from
             the
             Glands
             of
             the
             Placenta
             ,
             by
             the
             Ducts
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             .
          
           
             This
             Liquor
             of
             the
             Amnios
             not
             only
             serves
             to
             Facilitate
             the
             Motions
             of
             the
             Foetus
             ,
             but
             towards
             the
             time
             of
             the
             Partus
             it
             is
             partly
             receiv'd
             by
             its
             Mouth
             ,
             and
             is
             convey'd
             into
             its
             Stomach
             and
             Guts
             ,
             and
             Administers
             Chyle
             to
             its
             Lacteals
             and
             Thoracick-Duct
             ;
             which
             is
             receiv'd
             by
             the
             Subclavian
             Vein
             of
             the
             Foetus
             ,
             and
             there
             joins
             with
             the
             Blood
             Transmitted
             from
             the
             Mother
             to
             the
             Foetus
             .
             Thus
             the
             Stomach
             and
             Intestines
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Common
             Passages
             of
             Chyle
             and
             Lympha
             of
             the
             Foetus
             are
             imploy'd
             in
             the
             Uterus
             ;
             by
             which
             means
             those
             Channels
             are
             the
             more
             readily
             made
             use
             of
             ,
             soon
             after
             the
             Birth
             ,
             when
             the
             Infant
             has
             no
             other
             way
             of
             receiving
             its
             Nourishment
             but
             by
             the
             Mouth
             .
             The
             Chyle
             thus
             mingling
             with
             the
             Blood
             of
             the
             Foetus
             ,
             so
             Thins
             it
             ,
             that
             its
             Circulation
             may
             be
             the
             better
             carried
             on
             by
             the
             weak
             Systole
             of
             its
             Heart
             ;
             whereby
             its
             Blood
             may
             be
             again
             Discharg'd
             into
             the
             Hypogastrick
             Veins
             of
             the
             Mothers
             Uterus
             .
             The
             Liquor
             of
             the
             Amnios
             has
             another
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             Accidental
             Use
             ,
             in
             Lubricating
             the
             Vagina
             at
             the
             Time
             of
             the
             Partus
             ;
             the
             Foetus
             then
             breaking
             the
             Amnios
             by
             its
             Strugling
             ,
             its
             Contents
             flow
             by
             the
             Pudendum
             ,
             which
             they
             commonly
             call
             
               The
               Breaking
               of
               the
               Water
            
             .
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             The
             Furrows
             or
             Clifts
             of
             the
             Placenta
             ,
             which
             more
             or
             less
             Result
             from
             its
             Tubercles
             .
          
           
             C
             C
             ,
             The
             Tubercles
             of
             the
             Placenta
             ,
             which
             are
             Thick
             and
             Large
             towards
             their
             Center
             ,
             and
             Less
             towards
             their
             Circumference
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             Chorion
             or
             External
             Membrane
             Involving
             the
             Foetus
             ,
             Varigated
             with
             Blood-Vessels
             Springing
             from
             the
             Placenta
             ,
             (
             and
             Umbilical
             Rope
             in
             some
             Animals
             )
             and
             the
             Vterus
             it self
             in
             Humane
             Bodies
             .
          
           
             E
             E
             ,
             The
             Urinary
             Membrane
             call'd
             Alantoides
             ,
             lying
             immediately
             under
             the
             Chorion
             ,
             and
             cleaving
             to
             it
             by
             Vessels
             and
             Fibres
             ;
             it
             Environing
             the
             whole
             Foetus
             ,
             according
             to
             Bidloo
             .
          
           
             The
             Existence
             of
             this
             Membrane
             is
             much
             Doubted
             of
             in
             Humane
             Bodies
             .
             I
             must
             confess
             I
             never
             met
             with
             a
             Subject
             in
             which
             I
             could
             Discover
             it
             .
             The
             Midwives
             take
             Notice
             of
             a
             
               By
               Water
            
             ,
             as
             they
             call
             it
             ,
             near
             the
             Time
             of
             the
             Partus
             ;
             which
             I
             am
             apt
             to
             think
             is
             the
             Contents
             of
             this
             Membrane
             breaking
             forth
             ,
             which
             often
             happens
             some
             Weeks
             before
             the
             Birth
             ,
             and
             no
             ill
             Consequence
             follows
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Amnios
             or
             Internal
             Membrane
             Involving
             the
             Foetus
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             Tied
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIFTY-NINTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             EXPRESSES
             the
             Membranes
             which
             Involve
             the
             Foetus
             ;
             together
             with
             the
             Internal
             Concave
             Part
             of
             the
             Placenta
             next
             the
             Foetus
             and
             Umbilical
             Rope
             .
             Which
             altogether
             are
             call'd
             the
             Secondine
             ,
             or
             After-Birth
             ,
             or
             Burden
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             ,
             The
             Amnios
             Separated
             from
             the
             Urinary
             Membrane
             ;
             Tho'
             the
             Amnios
             appears
             Transparent
             to
             the
             Naked
             Eye
             ,
             it
             is
             full
             of
             Blood-Vessels
             of
             both
             Kinds
             deriv'd
             from
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             :
             If
             Mercury
             is
             Injected
             into
             its
             Arteries
             and
             Veins
             ,
             their
             Extremities
             will
             (
             by
             the
             Assistance
             of
             a
             Microscope
             )
             appear
             continued
             to
             each
             other
             ;
             as
             in
             a
             Preparation
             of
             Part
             of
             the
             Amnios
             I
             have
             now
             by
             me
             ,
             taken
             from
             a
             Cow
             ,
             mention'd
             in
             the
             55
             th
             Table
             .
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             A
             Portion
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             arising
             from
             about
             the
             Middle
             of
             the
             Internal
             Concave
             Side
             of
             the
             Placenta
             .
          
           
             C
             C
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Urinary
             Membrane
             not
             free'd
             from
             the
             Chorion
             :
             In
             Cows
             and
             other
             Quadrupedes
             ,
             it
             is
             Long
             and
             Unequal
             ;
             whence
             it
             's
             call'd
             Allantoides
             or
             Farciminalis
             :
             It
             is
             plac'd
             between
             the
             Amnios
             and
             Chorion
             ,
             and
             receives
             the
             Urine
             from
             the
             Bladder
             by
             the
             Urachus
             thro'
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             .
             The
             Urachus
             of
             Humane
             Bodies
             is
             scarce
             Pervious
             .
             I
             must
             acknowledge
             in
             the
             Subjects
             I
             have
             Examin'd
             ,
             I
             could
             never
             make
             the
             Wind
             pass
             from
             the
             Bladder
             of
             Urine
             into
             the
             Urachus
             in
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             ;
             but
             I
             have
             constantly
             found
             the
             Urachus
             evidently
             Hollow
             from
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Bladder
             to
             the
             Navel
             in
             a
             Foetus
             ,
             and
             very
             little
             further
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             Chorion
             strictly
             cleaving
             to
             the
             Internal
             Concave
             Side
             of
             the
             Placenta
             .
          
           
             E
             E
             ,
             The
             Cavities
             and
             Tracts
             of
             the
             Succiferous
             Ducts
             according
             to
             Bidloo
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Umbilical
             Arteries
             Distended
             .
          
           
             G
             G
             ,
             The
             Internal
             Concave
             Surface
             of
             the
             Placenta
             next
             the
             Foetus
             .
          
           
             H
             I
             ,
             The
             Ramifications
             of
             the
             Arteries
             tending
             towards
             the
             Circumference
             of
             the
             Placenta
             .
          
           
             K
             K
             ,
             The
             Large
             Ramifications
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Veins
             Distended
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             Their
             Lesser
             Branches
             .
          
           
             N
             N
             ,
             Divers
             Indentations
             made
             in
             the
             Veins
             where
             the
             Arteries
             pass
             over
             them
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Concourse
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Vessels
             to
             their
             Inclosure
             in
             the
             External
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             (
             P
             )
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             That
             Part
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             ,
             whose
             External
             Surface
             in
             Cows
             is
             full
             of
             Tubercles
             ,
             which
             we
             suppose
             are
             plac'd
             at
             the
             Extremities
             of
             the
             Succiferous
             Ducts
             ,
             where
             they
             Discharge
             their
             Contents
             into
             the
             Amnios
             .
             This
             Part
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             in
             these
             Animals
             we
             find
             Distended
             with
             a
             Mucilaginous
             Matter
             ,
             somewhat
             Thicker
             than
             that
             contain'd
             in
             the
             Amnios
             ,
             but
             like
             it
             in
             Colour
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SIXTIETH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               DEMONSTRATES
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               Part
               of
               the
               Umbilical
               Rope
               and
               Placenta
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               The
               Concave
               Internal
               Surface
               of
               the
               Placenta
               next
               the
               Foetus
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Chorion
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Urinary
               Membrane
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Umbilical
               Arteries
               fill'd
               with
               Red
               Wax
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Veins
               in
               like
               Manner
               Injected
               with
               White
               Wax
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Umbilical
               Rope
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               I
               K
               M
               ,
               The
               Propagations
               of
               Vessels
               from
               the
               Umbilical
               Rope
               to
               the
               Placenta
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Placenta
               cut
               transversly
               .
            
             
               B
               C
               ,
               The
               Thickness
               of
               the
               Placenta
               in
               a
               Transverse
               Section
               .
            
             
               D
               D.
               It
               s
               Glandulous
               Body
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               Some
               large
               Branches
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               Propagated
               from
               the
               Umbilical
               Rope
               under
               the
               Chorion
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Succiferous
               Ducts
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               Their
               little
               Hollownesses
               or
               Interstitia
               like
               Fat.
               
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Chorion
               ,
               free'd
               from
               the
               Placenta
               and
               suspended
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               which
               lie
               between
               the
               Chorion
               and
               Placenta
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               Their
               Ramifications
               as
               they
               appear
               under
               the
               Chorion
               on
               the
               internal
               Concave
               Surface
               of
               the
               Placenta
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Urinary
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Amnios
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               The
               Umbilical
               Rope
               cut
               off
               and
               ty'd
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Umbilical
               Rope
               with
               Part
               of
               the
               Chorion
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Chorion
               free'd
               from
               the
               internal
               Concave
               Part
               of
               the
               Placenta
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Umbilical
               Rope
               cut
               transversly
               from
               the
               Foetus
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Two
               Umbilical
               Arteries
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Umbilical
               Vein
               in
               like
               Manner
               divided
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Urachus
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               ,
               Exprest
               in
               the
               following
               Figure
               between
               the
               Two
               Arteries
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Umbilical
               Rope
               cover'd
               with
               its
               loose
               Membrane
               continu'd
               from
               the
               Amnios
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Umbilical
               Rope
               cut
               transversly
               and
               view'd
               with
               a
               Microscope
               ,
               after
               its
               being
               immers'd
               in
               hot
               Water
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Umbilical
               Vein
               divided
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Two
               Umbilical
               Arteries
               in
               like
               Manner
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Succiferous
               Tubes
               also
               divided
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Fibres
               contracted
               by
               the
               hot
               Water
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               thin
               contorted
               Tube
               of
               the
               Urachus
               ,
               lying
               between
               the
               Two
               Arteries
               like
               a
               loose
               or
               flagging
               Membrane
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Umbilical
               Vein
               and
               Two
               Arteries
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               and
               dry'd
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               Urachus
               and
               Succiferous
               Tubes
               disappear
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SIXTY-FIRST
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               EXHIBITS
               the
               
                 Placenta
                 Uterina
              
               ,
               after
               the
               Blood
               is
               Wash'd
               out
               of
               it
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Chorion
               partly
               Rais'd
               from
               the
               Placenta
               ,
               and
               lying
               Loosely
               on
               it
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Urinary
               Membrane
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Contexture
               ,
               and
               Reticular
               Plexus
               of
               the
               Vessels
               of
               the
               Placenta
               made
               bare
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Concave
               Surface
               of
               the
               Placenta
               next
               the
               Foetus
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Umbilical
               Rope
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Chorion
               separated
               from
               the
               Urinary
               Membrane
               ,
               and
               supported
               on
               a
               Piece
               of
               Paper
               .
            
             
               B
               C
               ,
               The
               Urinary
               Membrane
               Pinn'd
               out
               ,
               from
               which
               the
               Chorion
               is
               separated
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               A
               Piece
               of
               Paper
               Rold
               up
               to
               support
               the
               Chorion
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               A
               B
               B
               ,
               Part
               of
               one
               of
               the
               Umbilical
               Arteries
               free'd
               from
               the
               Umbilical
               Rope
               ,
               and
               Extended
               with
               Wind
               ;
               in
               which
               the
               Various
               Inequalities
               of
               its
               Trunk
               (
               occasion'd
               by
               its
               Contortions
               with
               its
               Companion
               and
               the
               Umbilical
               Vein
               )
               are
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               same
               Artery
               Open'd
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               ,
               and
               Expanded
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               Part
               of
               the
               Umbilical
               Rope
               .
            
             
               A
               Inferior
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Umbilical
               Vein
               Open'd
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Umbilical
               Arteries
               inclos'd
               in
               their
               Proper
               Membranes
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Umbilical
               Rope
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Two
               Arteries
               fill'd
               with
               Red
               Wax
               ,
               in
               which
               may
               be
               observ'd
               the
               Inequalities
               of
               their
               Trunks
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Vein
               Distended
               with
               a
               Dark
               Colour'd
               Wax
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Chorion
               free'd
               from
               the
               Placenta
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               both
               Kinds
               free'd
               from
               the
               Glands
               Succiferous
               Tubes
               and
               Ducts
               ,
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7
               ,
               8.
               
            
             
               The
               Branching
               of
               the
               Arteries
               and
               Veins
               on
               the
               Chorion
               ,
               whose
               Capillary
               Extremities
               frame
               Glands
               ,
               and
               Escape
               the
               Sight
               of
               the
               Naked
               Eye
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               9.
               
            
             
               This
               is
               not
               taken
               Notice
               of
               by
               Bidloo
               ;
               but
               I
               supose
               it
               Represents
               Part
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               Umbilical
               Rope
               ,
               free'd
               from
               their
               Membranes
               and
               not
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               or
               any
               Thing
               else
               ;
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Two
               Arteries
               and
               Vein
               appearing
               Flaccid
               .
            
             
             
               
            
             
             
               
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SIXTY-SECOND
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THE
             Abdomen
             of
             a
             Female
             Foetus
             Seven
             Months
             after
             Conception
             open'd
             ,
             to
             shew
             the
             Progress
             of
             the
             Umbilical
             Vessels
             towards
             its
             Navel
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             Umbilical
             Rope
             suspended
             .
          
           
             C
             C
             ,
             The
             Common
             and
             Proper
             Integuments
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             turn'd
             aside
             .
          
           
             E
             G
             ,
             The
             Umbilical
             Vein
             entering
             the
             Liver
             at
             a
             Fissure
             near
             the
             Middle
             of
             its
             lower
             Part
             ,
             whence
             the
             
               Ligamentum
               Suspensorium
               Hepatis
            
             may
             be
             here
             seen
             continu'd
             to
             the
             Ensiformal
             Cartilage
             and
             Diaphragm
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Liver
             ,
             which
             in
             Proportion
             to
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Viscera
             in
             a
             Foetus
             ,
             is
             very
             large
             ,
             extending
             it self
             to
             both
             Hypochondria
             .
          
           
             The
             Magnitude
             of
             the
             Liver
             in
             a
             Foetus
             rather
             Proceeds
             from
             a
             greater
             Quantity
             of
             Blood
             carri'd
             into
             it
             by
             the
             
               Vena
               Umbilicalis
            
             ,
             than
             any
             proper
             Office
             it
             then
             Executes
             :
             This
             Disproportion
             of
             the
             Liver
             do's
             not
             remit
             in
             an
             Infant
             ,
             but
             seems
             to
             continue
             in
             some
             Measure
             ,
             till
             they
             are
             Four
             or
             Five
             Years
             Old
             :
             Hence
             it
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Intestines
             of
             Infants
             and
             Children
             are
             suppli'd
             with
             more
             Gall
             than
             those
             of
             riper
             Years
             ;
             and
             are
             therefore
             incident
             to
             be
             gript
             much
             in
             the
             lower
             Belly
             ,
             and
             attended
             with
             a
             Diarrhoea
             .
             Nor
             do
             I
             in
             this
             conceive
             Nature
             has
             any
             Ways
             committed
             a
             Mistake
             ;
             for
             sure
             it
             is
             very
             necessary
             some
             notable
             Discharge
             ought
             to
             be
             made
             of
             the
             Serosities
             in
             Children
             ,
             whilst
             their
             Limbs
             are
             not
             able
             to
             perform
             those
             Exercises
             which
             promote
             Perspiration
             and
             the
             like
             .
          
           
             The
             Blood
             imported
             into
             the
             Liver
             by
             the
             Umbilical
             Vein
             meets
             with
             a
             contrary
             Current
             of
             Blood
             in
             the
             
               Vena
               Porta
            
             ,
             as
             it
             passes
             the
             Sinus
             to
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             ;
             whereby
             some
             of
             the
             Capillary
             Vessels
             about
             the
             Liver
             or
             Umbilical
             Vein
             are
             frequently
             broken
             ,
             and
             the
             Blood
             is
             discharg'd
             into
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             .
          
           
             In
             an
             Abortive
             Humane
             Foetus
             (
             after
             Seven
             Months
             Conception
             )
             I
             found
             the
             Abdomen
             without
             any
             Integuments
             ;
             it
             s
             Viscera
             being
             expos'd
             ,
             as
             in
             this
             Figure
             :
             Nor
             could
             I
             find
             so
             much
             as
             any
             Part
             of
             the
             Peritonaeum
             that
             had
             cover'd
             them
             ;
             which
             I
             suspected
             might
             have
             been
             broken
             .
             The
             Left
             Kidney
             also
             was
             expos'd
             to
             View
             .
             Besides
             this
             ,
             the
             Top
             of
             the
             Skull
             was
             wanting
             ,
             and
             instead
             of
             it
             a
             Membrane
             distended
             with
             Grumous
             Blood.
             Very
             little
             Part
             of
             the
             Brain
             appear'd
             on
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Skull
             ,
             but
             it
             was
             chiefly
             contain'd
             in
             the
             Specus
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             .
             The
             Left
             Eye
             and
             Ear
             were
             wanting
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Nose
             .
             A
             Ligament
             of
             about
             an
             Inch
             in
             Length
             ,
             fasten'd
             the
             great
             Toe
             of
             the
             Right
             Foot
             to
             the
             Bone
             of
             the
             upper
             Jaw
             .
             The
             Left
             Arm
             was
             wanting
             ;
             and
             instead
             of
             it
             ,
             something
             like
             a
             Hand
             was
             fram'd
             ,
             seeming
             to
             have
             a
             Thumb
             and
             Fore-Finger
             :
             This
             was
             ty'd
             by
             Two
             Ligaments
             ;
             the
             one
             springing
             from
             the
             Carpus
             was
             short
             ,
             and
             fasten'd
             it
             to
             the
             Scapula
             ;
             the
             other
             Ligament
             was
             longer
             ,
             and
             arising
             between
             those
             Parts
             which
             represented
             a
             Finger
             and
             Thumb
             ,
             was
             sixt
             to
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             Skull
             on
             the
             same
             Side
             .
          
           
             Upon
             opening
             the
             Thorax
             I
             found
             the
             Cone
             of
             the
             Heart
             pointing
             upwards
             ;
             its
             Basis
             towards
             the
             Diaphragm
             .
             And
             both
             Extremities
             of
             the
             Bastard
             Ribs
             of
             the
             Left
             Side
             resting
             on
             their
             Vertebrae
             .
          
           
             G
             G
             ,
             The
             Two
             Umbilical
             Arteries
             Arising
             from
             the
             Two
             Internal
             Iliack
             Branches
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Magna
            
             ,
             and
             passing
             on
             both
             Sides
             the
             Bladder
             of
             Urine
             to
             the
             Umbilical
             Rope
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             Bladder
             of
             Urine
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Vrachus
             where
             it
             is
             visibly
             pervious
             .
          
           
             The
             
               Ligamentum
               Suspensorium
               Hepatis
            
             ,
             is
             here
             well
             Exprest
             between
             the
             Umbilical
             Vein
             and
             Enfiformal
             Cartilage
             ;
             and
             the
             Small
             Gutts
             in
             their
             Natural
             Situation
             ,
             are
             also
             Represented
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SIXTY-THIRD
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             REPRESENTS
             the
             Cavities
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             and
             Thorax
             open'd
             of
             the
             same
             Female
             Foetus
             ,
             Exprest
             in
             the
             preceding
             Table
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             Umbilical
             Rope
             suspended
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Umbilical
             Vein
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             Its
             Insertion
             into
             the
             Liver
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             Two
             Umbilical
             Arteries
             ,
             arising
             from
             the
             Two
             internal
             Iliack
             Branches
             of
             the
             
               Arteria
               Magna
               .
               Vid.
               App.
               Fig.
            
             3.56.56
             .
          
           
             E
             E
             ,
             The
             External
             Iliack
             Branches
             of
             the
             Great
             Artery
             ,
             by
             our
             Author
             said
             to
             be
             Internal
             ;
             which
             in
             this
             View
             of
             the
             Parts
             do's
             not
             appear
             .
          
           
             F
             G
             ,
             The
             Urachus
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             Umbilicus
             cut
             from
             the
             Common
             Integuments
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Head
             of
             the
             Foetus
             ,
             which
             in
             Proportion
             to
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Body
             is
             much
             larger
             than
             in
             the
             Adult
             :
             See
             the
             Description
             at
             Tab.
             1.
             
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             Mammae
             ,
             which
             in
             a
             Foetus
             of
             both
             Sexes
             contain
             a
             Serous
             Liquor
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             Thorax
             open'd
             .
          
           
             M
             M
             ,
             The
             Abdomen
             in
             like
             Manner
             open'd
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             Thymus
             in
             Proportion
             to
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Parts
             ,
             is
             very
             large
             in
             a
             Foetus
             ,
             and
             gradually
             lessens
             in
             the
             Adult
             :
             See
             Tab.
             21.
             
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Heart
             ,
             which
             in
             Regard
             to
             the
             other
             Viscera
             is
             very
             large
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             The
             Lungs
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             .
          
           
             Q
             Q
             ,
             The
             Kidneys
             ,
             which
             appear
             Conglomerate
             ,
             and
             are
             somewhat
             large
             .
          
           
             R
             R
             ,
             The
             Glands
             of
             the
             Kidneys
             or
             
               Capsulae
               Atrabilares
            
             are
             also
             large
             ,
             and
             are
             here
             remov'd
             from
             their
             proper
             Situation
             ;
             they
             not
             only
             bordering
             on
             the
             Kidneys
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Adult
             ,
             but
             lie
             upon
             them
             ,
             embracing
             their
             Upper
             Parts
             :
             In
             this
             Figure
             they
             seem
             to
             be
             remov'd
             from
             their
             Proper
             Situation
             .
          
           
             S
             S
             ,
             The
             Ureters
             ,
             which
             are
             also
             large
             and
             unequal
             .
          
           
             T
             ,
             The
             Bladder
             extended
             with
             Urine
             .
          
           
             V
             ,
             The
             Falloppian
             Tube
             ,
             somewhat
             long
             ,
             and
             very
             large
             in
             Proportion
             to
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Parts
             .
          
           
             W
             ,
             The
             Ovaria
             are
             also
             Large
             and
             Tumid
             .
          
           
             X
             ,
             The
             
               Fundus
               Uteri
            
             somewhat
             rais'd
             by
             the
             Suspension
             of
             the
             Bladder
             of
             Urine
             .
          
           
             a
             ,
             The
             Round
             Ligament
             of
             the
             Vterus
             of
             the
             Left
             Side
             .
          
           
             b
             ,
             The
             
               Arteria
               Magna
            
             ,
             where
             the
             Emulgent
             Arteries
             pass
             to
             the
             Kidneys
             .
          
           
             c
             ,
             The
             Ascending
             Trunk
             of
             the
             
               Vena
               Cava
            
             cut
             off
             .
          
           
             d
             d
             ,
             The
             Diaphragma
             divided
             .
          
           
             e
             ,
             The
             Spleen
             
               in
               Situ
            
             .
          
           
             The
             Stomach
             and
             Intestines
             are
             here
             laid
             aside
             .
          
           
             f
             ,
             The
             Sternum
             rais'd
             together
             with
             the
             Cartilaginous
             Endings
             of
             the
             Ribs
             ,
             where
             the
             Mammary
             Vessels
             on
             both
             Sides
             are
             Exprest
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               of
               a
               Foetus
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Its
               Ureters
               fill'd
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               C
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Umbilical
               Vein
               and
               Two
               Arteries
               ,
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               ,
               which
               we
               cannot
               think
               to
               be
               well
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Descending
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               Its
               Bifurcation
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               It
               s
               Two
               Internal
               Iliack
               Arteries
               ,
               whence
               the
               Umbilical
               Arteries
               arise
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SIXTY-FOURTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THE
             Professor
             Bidloo
             in
             Imitation
             of
             Steno
             and
             Bourdon
             ,
             here
             adds
             Geometrical
             Figures
             of
             the
             Disposition
             of
             the
             Tendons
             and
             Fleshly
             Fibres
             of
             divers
             Muscles
             ;
             First
             of
             a
             single
             Fibre
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Fleshy
               Part
               of
               the
               Fibre
               of
               a
               Muscle
               ;
            
             
               B
               C
               ,
               B
               C
               ,
               Its
               Two
               Tendinous
               Extreams
               making
               Obtuse
               Angles
               with
               the
               Fleshy
               Part.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               Many
               of
               the
               Fibres
               Represented
               in
               the
               First
               Figure
               ,
               Expos'd
               in
               the
               same
               Plan
               together
               ,
               Framing
               an
               Oblique
               Angled
               Parallelogram
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               B
               ,
               The
               Order
               of
               the
               Moving
               ,
               or
               Fleshy
               Fibres
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               D
               ,
               F
               ,
               G
               ,
               E
               ,
               H
               ,
               I
               ,
               K
               ,
               Their
               Tendinous
               Extremities
               :
               When
               any
               Additional
               Matter
               passes
               into
               these
               Fleshy
               Fibres
               and
               Distends
               them
               ,
               the
               Breadth
               which
               they
               thereby
               Acquire
               ,
               necessarily
               Shortens
               them
               ,
               and
               their
               Tendinous
               Extremities
               fixt
               to
               the
               most
               Movable
               Part
               ,
               is
               pull'd
               nearer
               the
               more
               Stable
               .
               This
               Additional
               Matter
               we
               take
               to
               be
               the
               Blood
               ,
               which
               is
               constantly
               in
               a
               Progressive
               Motion
               ,
               as
               well
               in
               the
               Capillary
               as
               in
               the
               Larger
               Trunks
               of
               its
               Vessels
               ;
               and
               when
               a
               sudden
               Stop
               or
               Retardation
               of
               it
               happens
               in
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Veins
               in
               Muscles
               ,
               the
               Blood
               in
               the
               Extremities
               of
               those
               Veins
               necessarily
               breaks
               forth
               by
               their
               Collateral
               Pores
               ,
               and
               passes
               into
               the
               Cells
               of
               the
               Fleshy
               Fibres
               ;
               whence
               an
               Intumescence
               of
               those
               Fibres
               follows
               ,
               and
               their
               Length
               is
               necessarily
               Lessen'd
               .
               When
               I
               say
               the
               Blood
               as
               a
               Pondus
               Acts
               in
               Muscular
               Motion
               :
               I
               mean
               that
               as
               a
               Fluid
               ,
               it
               Insinuates
               where
               ever
               there
               is
               a
               Passage
               ,
               and
               necessarily
               Distends
               the
               Cells
               of
               the
               Fleshy
               Fibres
               ,
               when
               it
               is
               push'd
               on
               by
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               and
               d
               o's
               not
               readily
               return
               by
               the
               Veins
               .
               This
               Structure
               of
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               in
               Muscles
               ,
               renders
               the
               Appearance
               of
               their
               Fleshy
               Fibres
               Red
               or
               more
               Bloody
               than
               other
               Parts
               ,
               which
               are
               Furnish'd
               with
               a
               far
               greater
               Number
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               than
               the
               Muscles
               ;
               as
               the
               Pancreas
               ,
               Salival
               Glands
               ,
               and
               Cortical
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
               The
               Liver
               ,
               Spleen
               ,
               and
               Kidneys
               have
               their
               Colour
               ,
               from
               the
               Number
               and
               Magnitude
               of
               their
               Blood-Vessels
               always
               fill'd
               with
               Blood.
               The
               Question
               is
               ,
               How
               the
               Venose
               Channels
               are
               so
               instantaneously
               Comprest
               that
               the
               Refluent
               Blood
               is
               Retarded
               ?
               Till
               Enquiry
               and
               Observation
               affords
               me
               something
               to
               the
               purpose
               ,
               I
               shall
               say
               no
               more
               ;
               choosing
               to
               Recommend
               such
               Speculations
               ,
               to
               those
               who
               have
               more
               Talent
               and
               Time
               to
               bestow
               on
               them
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Fibres
               of
               a
               Muscle
               Framing
               a
               Simple
               Parallelepipede
               Figure
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               B
               ,
               C
               ,
               D
               ,
               E
               ,
               F
               ,
               G
               ,
               The
               Carnous
               Part.
               
            
             
               H
               I
               ,
               K
               L
               ,
               The
               Tendinous
               Parts
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Disposition
               of
               the
               Fibres
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Deltoides
              
               ,
               said
               to
               be
               Compos'd
               of
               Twelve
               simple
               Muscles
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Deltoides
               towards
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Shoulder
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Its
               Lower-part
               .
            
             
               1
               ,
               2
               ,
               3
               ,
               4
               ,
               5
               ,
               6
               ,
               7
               ,
               8
               ,
               9
               ,
               10
               ,
               11
               ,
               12
               ,
               The
               Order
               of
               the
               Fleshy
               Fibres
               which
               Frame
               Parallelograms
               ,
               and
               Compose
               the
               Deltoide
               Muscle
               ,
               fixt
               to
               their
               Tendinous
               Extremities
               A
               B.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Biceps
                 Humeri
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Membranosus
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               The
               Fibres
               of
               Part
               of
               the
               Gemellus
               .
            
             
               We
               come
               next
               to
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Artus
               or
               Limbs
               ;
               and
               First
               to
               those
               of
               the
               Whole
               Arm
               ,
               by
               which
               is
               understood
               all
               the
               Part
               fastned
               to
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               Arising
               at
               the
               Shoulder
               .
               Fig.
               8.
               
               The
               Arm
               in
               common
               Acceptation
               ,
               is
               taken
               to
               be
               all
               that
               Part
               between
               the
               Neck
               of
               the
               Shoulder-blade
               and
               Wrist
               (
               H
               )
               .
               The
               Arm
               strictly
               speaking
               ,
               is
               that
               Part
               between
               the
               Shoulder
               and
               Elbow
               (
               B
               )
               ,
               which
               ,
               otherwise
               ,
               is
               call'd
               Humerus
               :
               It
               consisting
               of
               One
               Bone
               ,
               and
               is
               call'd
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               ,
               the
               Shoulder-bone
               ,
               or
               Arm-bone
               .
               The
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Arm
               from
               the
               Elbow
               (
               B
               )
               to
               the
               Wrist
               (
               H
               )
               ,
               is
               call'd
               the
               Cubit
               ,
               and
               consists
               of
               Two
               Bones
               ,
               call'd
               Vlna
               and
               Radius
               ;
               we
               shall
               elsewhere
               speak
               of
               the
               Articulations
               of
               these
               and
               other
               Bones
               .
               As
               some
               have
               Comprehended
               the
               Shoulder
               or
               Arm
               ,
               Cubit
               ,
               Hand
               ,
               and
               Fingers
               under
               the
               Title
               of
               the
               Whole
               Arm
               ;
               so
               others
               have
               call'd
               all
               those
               together
               ,
               
                 The
                 Whole
                 Hand
              
               .
               The
               Hand
               in
               common
               Acceptation
               ,
               is
               meant
               all
               that
               Part
               below
               the
               Cubit
               ,
               or
               Wrist
               ,
               consisting
               of
               Four
               Fingers
               (
               M
               N
               O
               P
               )
               and
               a
               Thumb
               (
               L
               )
               .
               The
               Palm
               (
               C
               )
               call'd
               
                 Vola
                 Manus
              
               ;
               opposite
               to
               which
               is
               the
               Back
               of
               the
               Hand
               or
               
                 Dorsum
                 Manus
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               8.
               
            
             
               The
               External
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Arm
               ,
               Cubit
               and
               Palm
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Skin
               with
               its
               Parts
               Annext
               free'd
               from
               the
               Muscles
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Tubercle
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               ,
               whence
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Pronator
                 Radii
                 Teres
                 ,
                 Palmaris
                 Longus
                 ,
                 Flexores
                 Digitorum
                 Communes
                 ,
              
               and
               
                 Flexores
                 Carpi
              
               do
               Arise
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Tendinous
               Expansion
               of
               the
               
                 Palmaris
                 Longus
              
               in
               the
               Palm
               ;
               where
               ,
               near
               the
               Root
               of
               the
               Fingers
               it
               's
               Divided
               ,
               to
               give
               Way
               to
               the
               Tendons
               of
               the
               
                 Flexores
                 Digitorum
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Biceps
                 Cubiti
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Pronator
                 Radii
                 Teres
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Long
               Tendon
               of
               the
               Palmaris
               deriv'd
               from
               a
               small
               Fleshy
               Bodied
               Muscle
               ,
               springing
               from
               the
               Internal
               Protuberance
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               ,
               here
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Radialis
                 Flexor
                 Carpi
              
               ,
               whose
               Description
               may
               be
               seen
               Tab.
               67
               ,
               68.
               
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Transverse
               Ligament
               of
               the
               Carpus
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               
                 Abductive
                 Pollicis
              
               Arising
               from
               the
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Transversale
                 Carpi
              
               ,
               and
               Ending
               at
               the
               Superior
               and
               External
               Part
               of
               the
               Second
               Bone
               of
               the
               Thumb
               .
               It
               draws
               the
               Thumb
               from
               the
               Fingers
               ,
               whence
               it
               derives
               its
               Name
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Palmaris
                 Brevis
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Caro
                 Musculosa
                 Quadrata
              
               ;
               This
               springs
               from
               the
               External
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Metacarpi
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
              
               ,
               with
               a
               Thin
               Tendon
               Encompassing
               the
               External
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Abductor
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
              
               becoming
               a
               Thin
               Disgregated
               Fleshy
               Muscle
               in
               the
               Palm
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               here
               Represented
               ;
               it
               passes
               under
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Palmaris
                 Longus
              
               ,
               to
               its
               Tendinous
               Termination
               in
               the
               Eighth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Carpus
               .
            
             
               This
               Hollows
               the
               Palm
               by
               drawing
               the
               Bale
               of
               the
               Thumb
               or
               
                 Mons
                 Lunae
              
               ,
               and
               Metacarpal
               Bone
               of
               the
               Little
               Finger
               ,
               nearer
               each
               other
               .
            
             
               L
               M
               N
               O
               P
               ,
               The
               Thumb
               and
               Four
               Fingers
               ,
               with
               Part
               of
               the
               Skin
               remaining
               on
               them
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               The
               Head
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               which
               was
               Articulated
               with
               the
               Scapula
               .
            
             
               R
               R
               R
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               and
               Nerves
               passing
               withinside
               the
               Arm
               ,
               between
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Biceps
              
               and
               Gemellus
               ,
               of
               which
               the
               Former
               especially
               the
               Arteries
               are
               to
               be
               Comprest
               in
               the
               time
               of
               Amputation
               ;
               which
               may
               be
               perform'd
               with
               the
               Fingers
               only
               ,
               without
               any
               Compress
               or
               Boulsters
               under
               them
               ;
               or
               with
               the
               hard
               Twisting
               of
               a
               Ligature
               ,
               which
               some
               use
               :
               The
               Compression
               being
               thereby
               the
               more
               easily
               Commanded
               ,
               to
               let
               the
               Arterious
               Blood
               pass
               out
               in
               Order
               to
               Discover
               the
               Divided
               Large
               Arteries
               ,
               so
               that
               they
               may
               be
               taken
               hold
               of
               with
               the
               Ends
               of
               the
               Forceps
               and
               Ti'd
               ;
               which
               Practice
               we
               can't
               but
               Recommend
               in
               Amputations
               ,
               or
               in
               other
               Cases
               where
               Large
               Fluxes
               of
               Blood
               happen
               .
               Nor
               have
               I
               found
               any
               considerable
               Inconveniency
               to
               the
               Patient
               ,
               tho'
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Nerve
               has
               been
               also
               Ti'd
               up
               with
               the
               Artery
               ,
               which
               the
               Diligent
               Operator
               may
               very
               easily
               avoid
               .
            
             
               S
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Deltoides
              
               .
            
             
               T
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Gemellus
               or
               
                 Biceps
                 Externus
              
               .
            
             
               V
               V
               ,
               The
               Tendinous
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Supinator
                 Radii
                 Longus
              
               .
            
             
               W
               ,
               The
               
                 Flexor
                 Carpi
                 Vlnaris
              
               .
            
             
               X
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Flexor
                 Digitorum
                 Perforatus
              
               .
            
             
               Y
               ,
               The
               
                 Abductor
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
              
               .
            
             
               Z
               ,
               
                 Flexor
                 Primi
              
               &
               
                 Secundi
                 Ossis
                 Pollicis
              
               ;
               It
               Arises
               Fleshy
               from
               the
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Transversale
                 Carpi
              
               ,
               Bones
               of
               the
               Carpus
               at
               the
               Bottom
               of
               the
               
                 Mons
                 Lunae
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Os
                 Metacarpi
              
               of
               the
               Middle
               Finger
               ;
               whence
               passes
               to
               its
               Insertion
               partly
               to
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Sesamoidea
              
               of
               the
               Second
               Internode
               ,
               and
               partly
               to
               the
               First
               Bone
               of
               the
               Thumb
               :
               This
               Disgregated
               Fleshy
               Muscle
               is
               very
               Divisible
               as
               Vesalius
               takes
               Notice
               ,
               and
               Appears
               Tab.
               68.
               
               M
               N
               O
               O
               P.
               It
               moves
               the
               Thumb
               Variously
               according
               to
               the
               several
               Disposition
               of
               its
               Series
               of
               Fibres
               ,
               Inclining
               its
               First
               and
               Second
               Bones
               ,
               either
               Directly
               or
               Obliquely
               towards
               the
               Carpus
               and
               Palm
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SIXTY-FIFTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             REPRESENTS
             divers
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Arm
             and
             Cubit
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Deltoides
            
             Rais'd
             from
             its
             Origination
             and
             left
             at
             its
             Insertion
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Clavicula
             made
             bare
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             That
             Part
             of
             the
             Deltoide
             Muscle
             ,
             which
             Arises
             from
             the
             
               Spina
               Scapulae
            
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             Pectoralis
             cut
             from
             its
             Original
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             its
             Implantation
             .
          
           
             d
             ,
             The
             
               Rotundus
               Major
            
             :
             It
             Arises
             from
             the
             Inferior
             Angle
             of
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             and
             becoming
             a
             round
             Fleshy
             Body
             ,
             passes
             under
             the
             Superior
             Head
             of
             the
             Gemellus
             ,
             where
             it
             Grows
             Thinner
             and
             makes
             a
             Broad
             Flat
             but
             short
             Tendon
             Implanted
             below
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             .
             It
             s
             Office
             is
             to
             draw
             the
             Arm
             Backwards
             and
             pull
             it
             somewhat
             Downwards
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             Subscapularis
             or
             Immersus
             :
             It
             fills
             the
             Internal
             Concave
             Part
             of
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             Arising
             Fleshy
             from
             its
             whole
             Basis
             and
             Superior
             and
             Inferior
             Costa
             Internally
             ,
             and
             in
             its
             Progress
             Lessens
             its
             self
             according
             to
             the
             Configuration
             of
             the
             Scapula
             ,
             and
             Running
             over
             its
             Juncture
             ;
             it
             's
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             in
             a
             Semicircular
             Manner
             .
             This
             draws
             the
             Arm
             to
             the
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             and
             is
             made
             Use
             of
             by
             the
             Bag-pipe-Player
             to
             Compress
             his
             Bellows
             under
             his
             Arm.
             
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Coracobrachialis
             :
             Its
             partly
             Fleshy
             and
             partly
             Tendinous
             Origination
             ,
             is
             at
             the
             extream
             Point
             of
             the
             
               Processus
               Coracoides
               Scapulae
            
             ,
             in
             its
             Descent
             Growing
             Thicker
             ,
             strictly
             Adhering
             to
             the
             Internal
             Head
             of
             the
             Biceps
             ,
             which
             it
             Parts
             from
             near
             it
             s
             partly
             Tendinous
             and
             partly
             Fleshy
             Insertion
             ,
             about
             the
             Middle
             of
             the
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             .
          
           
             f
             ,
             A
             Trunk
             of
             a
             Nerve
             which
             passes
             thro'
             the
             last
             Describ'd
             Muscle
             ;
             whence
             it
             's
             also
             call'd
             Persoratus
             .
          
           
             G
             G
             ,
             The
             
               Basis
               Scapulae
            
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             
               Processus
               Coracoides
               Scapulae
            
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Biceps
             whose
             Two
             Heads
             or
             Tendinous
             Beginnings
             are
             here
             Exprest
             ;
             the
             one
             Arising
             from
             the
             
               Processus
               Coracoides
            
             (
             H
             )
             call'd
             the
             Internal
             Head
             ,
             the
             other
             Springing
             from
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Brink
             of
             the
             
               Acetabulum
               Scapulae
            
             under
             the
             broad
             Ligament
             of
             the
             Articulation
             ,
             and
             is
             call'd
             the
             External
             Head
             ,
             passing
             in
             a
             Sulcus
             or
             Channel
             on
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Arm-Bone
             (
             
               Vide
               Tab.
            
             96.
             
             Fig.
             1.
             
             D
             ,
             E
             ,
             )
             wherein
             it
             's
             inclos'd
             by
             a
             Proper
             Ligament
             :
             In
             its
             Descent
             becomes
             Fleshy
             ,
             and
             joins
             with
             its
             other
             Head
             ,
             Composing
             a
             Large
             Fleshy
             Muscle
             ,
             which
             becomes
             Less
             near
             the
             Articulation
             of
             the
             Cubit
             with
             the
             Shoulder-Bone
             ,
             and
             presently
             Growing
             perfectly
             Tendinous
             ,
             which
             Tendon
             is
             again
             Divided
             into
             Two
             ;
             the
             External
             being
             Thin
             ,
             passes
             over
             the
             
               Musculus
               Pronator
               Radii
               Rotundus
            
             ,
             and
             makes
             an
             External
             Inclosure
             to
             all
             the
             Muscles
             on
             the
             Cubit
             .
             (
             
               Vide
               App.
               Fig
            
             1.
             m.
             )
             The
             Internal
             (
             which
             is
             Short
             Thick
             and
             Round
             ,
             as
             it
             is
             here
             Exprest
             )
             is
             fastned
             to
             a
             Protuberance
             near
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Radius
             .
             (
             
               Vide
               Tab.
            
             96.
             
             Fig.
             6.
             
             A.
             )
             When
             this
             Muscle
             Acts
             ,
             it
             Bends
             the
             Arm
             :
             Besides
             its
             common
             Office
             to
             which
             its
             Lower
             External
             Tendon
             also
             more
             Advantagiously
             Contributes
             ,
             by
             how
             much
             the
             more
             it
             Approaches
             towards
             the
             other
             Extream
             of
             the
             Radius
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             :
             This
             Lower
             Tendinous
             Expansion
             ,
             by
             us
             call'd
             
               Fascia
               Tendinosa
            
             ,
             has
             also
             a
             further
             Use
             in
             Corroborating
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Carpus
             and
             Fingers
             in
             their
             Strenuous
             Actions
             ,
             whose
             Office
             we
             have
             Endeavour'd
             to
             Explain
             in
             our
             Treatise
             of
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             where
             an
             Extraordinary
             Case
             in
             Practice
             ,
             relating
             to
             this
             Muscle
             ,
             is
             Explain'd
             .
             
               Vid.
               Myotomia
               Resormata
            
             ,
             Pag.
             149.
             
          
           
             K
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Brachiaeus
               Internus
            
             :
             It
             Arises
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             at
             the
             Terminations
             of
             the
             Deltoides
             and
             
               Musculus
               Coracobrachialis
            
             ,
             and
             Descending
             over
             the
             Juncture
             of
             the
             Cubit
             with
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             it
             's
             Inserted
             partly
             Fleshy
             and
             partly
             Tendinous
             to
             the
             Superior
             and
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             and
             Part
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             as
             this
             Figure
             Expresses
             ;
             which
             Latter
             I
             must
             confess
             I
             never
             yet
             Observ'd
             in
             Nature
             .
             It
             Bends
             the
             Cubit
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Brachiaeus
               Externus
            
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             Internal
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             Ulna
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Radius
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SIXTY-SIXTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             DIVERS
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Arm
             and
             Cubit
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             Biceps
             free'd
             from
             its
             Subjacent
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             
               Brachiaeus
               Internus
               in
               Situ
            
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             D
             ,
             E
             ,
             The
             
               Biceps
               Externus
            
             or
             Gemellus
             :
             It
             has
             a
             Twofold
             Origin
             ;
             the
             First
             (
             C
             )
             or
             Superior
             ,
             Arises
             Tendinous
             from
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Inferior
             Costa
             of
             the
             Scapula
             Internally
             ,
             and
             Marching
             out
             from
             between
             the
             Two
             Round
             Muscles
             ,
             soon
             Grows
             Fleshy
             ,
             and
             joins
             with
             its
             Second
             Beginning
             (
             D
             )
             ,
             which
             Arises
             Broad
             and
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Upper
             and
             Back-part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             under
             the
             Deltoide
             Muscle
             ;
             soon
             after
             the
             Conjunction
             of
             these
             Two
             Heads
             ,
             it
             becomes
             Externally
             Tendinous
             (
             E
             )
             ,
             and
             is
             so
             Implanted
             to
             the
             Superior
             and
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             call'd
             
               Olecranum
               ,
               Ancon
            
             ,
             or
             the
             Elbow
             .
             It
             s
             Office
             is
             to
             Extend
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             which
             it
             do's
             the
             more
             Advantageously
             ,
             by
             how
             much
             the
             more
             it
             is
             Intertext
             with
             Various
             Orders
             of
             Fibres
             .
             Hence
             it
             comes
             that
             Tumblers
             when
             they
             stand
             on
             their
             Hands
             ,
             can
             by
             the
             sudden
             Extension
             of
             their
             Cubits
             ,
             immediately
             return
             to
             their
             Feet
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Infraspinatus
             :
             It
             lieth
             below
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             Scapula
             ;
             It
             Arises
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Basis
               Scapulae
            
             ,
             also
             from
             its
             Spine
             and
             Inferior
             Costa
             (
             in
             those
             Bodies
             in
             whom
             the
             
               Teres
               Minor
            
             is
             wanting
             ,
             as
             I
             am
             apt
             to
             think
             ,
             it
             was
             in
             the
             Subject
             by
             which
             this
             Figure
             was
             taken
             )
             whence
             Marching
             in
             a
             Triangular
             Form
             according
             to
             the
             Figure
             of
             the
             Bone
             ,
             it
             's
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             .
             This
             moves
             the
             Arm
             directly
             Backwards
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             Supraspinatus
             ,
             it
             being
             plac'd
             above
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             Shoulder-blade
             .
             It
             Arises
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             
               Basis
               Scapulae
            
             that's
             above
             the
             Spine
             ,
             as
             also
             from
             the
             Spine
             and
             Costa
             Superior
             of
             the
             Shoulder-blade
             ,
             and
             hence
             Marching
             between
             the
             
               Processus
               Coracoides
            
             and
             Anchoriformis
             ,
             becoming
             Tendinous
             as
             it
             Marches
             over
             the
             Juncture
             of
             the
             Humerus
             ,
             and
             is
             so
             Inserted
             to
             the
             most
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Shoulder-bone
             .
             It
             's
             Office
             is
             to
             lift
             the
             Arm
             Upwards
             and
             somewhat
             Backwards
             towards
             the
             Occiput
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             
               Spina
               Scapulae
            
             .
          
           
             I
             I
             ,
             The
             Clavicula
             .
          
           
             ✚
             The
             Subclavian
             Muscle
             ,
             free'd
             from
             the
             first
             Rib
             and
             remaining
             on
             the
             Clavicula
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Rotundus
               Major
            
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             made
             bare
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             External
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             last
             nam'd
             Bone
             ,
             whence
             the
             Extending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Carpus
             and
             Fingers
             do
             Arise
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Supinator
               Radii
               Brevis
            
             ,
             as
             it
             Arises
             from
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             and
             passes
             over
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Radius
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Ulna
             .
          
           
             X
             X
             ,
             The
             Deltoides
             Arising
             from
             above
             one
             Third
             of
             the
             Inferior
             and
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             Clavicula
             (
             II
             )
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             intirely
             Fleshy
             ;
             it
             also
             Arises
             partly
             Fleshy
             and
             partly
             Tendinous
             ,
             from
             the
             whole
             Inferior
             Margin
             of
             the
             
               Spina
               Scapulae
            
             (
             H
             )
             ,
             from
             hence
             Descending
             ,
             soon
             becomes
             Thick
             and
             Fleshy
             ,
             Growing
             still
             Narrower
             ,
             till
             it
             is
             Inserted
             by
             its
             partly
             Fleshy
             and
             partly
             Tendinous
             Apex
             ,
             to
             the
             Middle
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             (
             L
             )
             .
             This
             draws
             the
             Arm
             either
             directly
             Upwards
             ,
             or
             somewhat
             Forwards
             ,
             or
             Backwards
             according
             to
             the
             Direction
             of
             its
             differing
             Series
             of
             Fibres
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SIXTY-SEVENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             SOME
             of
             the
             Muscles
             Employ'd
             in
             Bending
             the
             Fingers
             and
             Carpus
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             B
             ,
             C
             ,
             D
             ,
             E
             ,
             The
             Perforatus
             ,
             or
             Sublimis
             ,
             or
             
               Flexor
               Secundi
               Internodii
               Digitorum
            
             ,
             Dissected
             from
             its
             Original
             :
             It
             Arises
             partly
             Fleshy
             and
             partly
             Tendinous
             ,
             from
             the
             Internal
             Extuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             between
             the
             
               Flexores
               Carpi
            
             :
             It
             has
             also
             a
             Disgregated
             Fleshy
             Origination
             from
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             between
             the
             
               Pronator
               Radii
               Teres
            
             ,
             and
             
               Flexor
               Pollicis
               Magnus
            
             ,
             soon
             Composing
             a
             Fleshy
             Belly
             ,
             Lessens
             its
             self
             where
             it
             begins
             to
             Divide
             into
             Two
             Parts
             ,
             each
             of
             which
             being
             again
             Subdivided
             ,
             makes
             Four
             Roundish
             Tendons
             (
             c
             c
             c
             c
             )
             ,
             included
             in
             their
             Proper
             Mucilaginous
             Membranes
             ,
             and
             pass
             under
             the
             Annular
             Ligament
             of
             the
             Carpus
             thro'
             the
             Palm
             :
             Near
             the
             First
             Internode
             of
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             each
             of
             these
             Tendons
             are
             again
             Divided
             or
             Perforated
             (
             E
             )
             ,
             to
             admit
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             following
             Muscle
             to
             pass
             thro'
             'em
             ;
             these
             Tendons
             joining
             again
             ,
             are
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Superior
             Parts
             of
             the
             Second
             Bone
             of
             each
             Finger
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             G
             ,
             H
             ,
             I
             ,
             &c.
             
             The
             
               Perforans
               in
               Situ
            
             ;
             it
             's
             also
             call'd
             Profundus
             and
             
               Flexor
               Tertii
               Internodii
               Digitorum
            
             :
             It
             Arises
             Fleshy
             from
             near
             Two
             Thirds
             of
             the
             Superior
             and
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             and
             Internal
             Edge
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             as
             also
             from
             the
             Ligament
             between
             the
             Radius
             and
             Ulna
             ;
             it
             becoming
             a
             Large
             Thick-Bellied
             Muscle
             ;
             it
             Grows
             Outwardly
             Tendinous
             before
             it
             passes
             over
             the
             
               Pronator
               Radii
               Quadratus
            
             ,
             where
             Dividing
             into
             Four
             Round
             Tendons
             ,
             which
             March
             under
             those
             of
             the
             Perforatus
             (
             last
             Describ'd
             )
             beneath
             the
             Transverse
             Ligament
             of
             the
             Carpus
             ,
             where
             the
             Lumbrical
             Muscles
             M
             ,
             M
             ,
             M
             ,
             M
             ,
             are
             said
             to
             Arise
             :
             These
             Tendons
             pass
             the
             Palm
             H
             ,
             H
             ,
             H
             ,
             H
             ,
             and
             run
             thro'
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             former
             Muscle
             and
             proceeding
             over
             their
             Extremities
             ,
             Terminate
             in
             the
             Superior
             and
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Third
             Bone
             of
             each
             Finger
             I
             I
             I
             I.
             
          
           
             The
             Tendons
             of
             the
             First
             of
             these
             Two
             last
             Describ'd
             Muscles
             A
             ,
             B
             ,
             C
             ,
             D
             ,
             being
             Perforated
             E
             ,
             to
             Transmit
             those
             of
             the
             Inferior
             Muscle
             F
             ,
             H
             ,
             and
             to
             their
             Insertions
             I
             ,
             &c.
             is
             a
             no
             less
             Useful
             than
             Stupendious
             Artifice
             in
             Nature
             :
             For
             since
             its
             requisite
             the
             Fingers
             should
             be
             Bended
             with
             a
             considerable
             Strength
             ,
             and
             each
             of
             their
             Internodes
             should
             be
             Accommodated
             to
             different
             Tactile
             Bodies
             ,
             it
             was
             therefore
             Necessary
             the
             Muscles
             employ'd
             in
             that
             Action
             ,
             should
             not
             only
             be
             Large
             ,
             Proportionable
             to
             the
             Force
             required
             ;
             but
             that
             each
             Internode
             should
             be
             Furnish'd
             with
             a
             Particular
             Instrument
             .
             The
             Internal
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             being
             a
             Necessary
             place
             for
             the
             Rise
             of
             Part
             of
             these
             Muscles
             ;
             but
             upon
             the
             Account
             of
             Bending
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             the
             Extreams
             of
             that
             Part
             of
             them
             might
             suffer
             some
             Approximation
             ;
             it
             was
             therefore
             thought
             fit
             ,
             that
             Place
             should
             be
             allotted
             to
             the
             Bender
             of
             the
             Second
             Internodes
             of
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             to
             which
             not
             so
             much
             Force
             is
             requir'd
             ,
             as
             to
             the
             Bender
             of
             the
             Third
             Internodes
             ;
             for
             the
             Fingers
             like
             so
             many
             Leaves
             are
             more
             effectually
             mov'd
             ,
             when
             the
             
               Vis
               Movens
            
             is
             fastned
             to
             their
             Extreams
             ,
             which
             is
             their
             Third
             Internodes
             ;
             wherefore
             the
             Strongest
             Muscles
             are
             there
             Inserted
             :
             Now
             the
             Origin
             of
             the
             Superior
             Muscle
             being
             confin'd
             to
             the
             Internal
             Extuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             and
             Part
             of
             the
             Radius
             only
             ,
             these
             Places
             could
             not
             Furnish
             Spaces
             for
             a
             Muscle
             so
             Large
             as
             that
             of
             near
             Two
             Thirds
             of
             the
             Superior
             and
             Forepart
             of
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             Internal
             Edge
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             and
             Intermediate
             Ligament
             of
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             whence
             the
             Inferior
             Muscle
             Springs
             :
             Hence
             it
             Appears
             the
             Inferior
             Muscle
             is
             much
             Stronger
             than
             the
             Superior
             ;
             wherefore
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Latter
             are
             Perforated
             ,
             to
             Transmit
             those
             of
             the
             Former
             in
             a
             right
             Progress
             to
             their
             Terminations
             ,
             at
             the
             Extremities
             of
             the
             Fingers
             :
             Nor
             is
             this
             Constructure
             only
             Advantageous
             in
             Bending
             the
             Fingers
             only
             ;
             but
             if
             the
             External
             Muscle
             should
             be
             Divided
             Transversely
             ,
             as
             I
             have
             sometimes
             seen
             it
             ;
             yet
             the
             compleat
             Flexion
             of
             the
             Fingers
             has
             nevertheless
             been
             perform'd
             by
             the
             Internal
             Muscle
             ;
             which
             is
             a
             provident
             Contrivance
             in
             Nature
             .
          
           
             K
             K
             ,
             The
             Mucilaginous
             Membranes
             which
             Involve
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Perforans
             ,
             those
             of
             the
             Perforatus
             not
             being
             Exprest
             in
             this
             Figure
             .
          
           
             L
             L
             ,
             The
             
               Ligamentum
               Transversum
            
             ,
             or
             Annulare
             Divided
             .
          
           
             M
             M
             ,
             The
             Lumbricales
             ,
             or
             
               Flexores
               Primi
               Internodii
               Digitorum
            
             .
             The
             Originations
             and
             Progress
             of
             these
             are
             here
             so
             well
             Exprest
             ,
             that
             they
             need
             no
             other
             Description
             .
          
           
             N
             N
             ,
             &c.
             The
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Lumbrical
             Muscles
             passing
             to
             their
             Terminations
             ,
             with
             the
             
               Musculi
               Inter-Ossei
            
             .
          
           
             O
             O
             ,
             The
             Annular
             Ligaments
             of
             the
             Fingers
             Open'd
             ,
             which
             keep
             in
             the
             Bending
             Tendons
             ,
             when
             they
             Act.
             
          
           
             P
             ,
             The
             
               Abductor
               Pollicis
            
             .
          
           
             Q
             Q
             ,
             The
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Flexor
               Pollicis
               Longus
            
             .
          
           
             R
             R
             ,
             
               Flexor
               Secundi
               Internodii
               Pollicis
            
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             The
             Trunk
             of
             that
             Nerve
             whose
             Branches
             are
             Propagated
             to
             the
             Fingers
             .
          
           
             T
             ,
             The
             Long
             Tendon
             and
             Bellied
             Part
             of
             the
             Muscle
             Palmaris
             .
          
           
             V
             ,
             The
             
               Radialis
               Flexor
            
             .
          
           
             W
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Ulnaris
               Flexor
            
             .
          
           
             X
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Supinator
               Radii
               Longus
            
             .
          
           
             Y
             ,
             The
             Artery
             whose
             Pulfation
             is
             commonly
             Felt
             near
             the
             Carpus
             .
          
           
             Z
             ,
             
               Pronator
               Radii
               Quadratus
            
             ,
             partly
             in
             Sight
             .
          
           
             *
             ,
             The
             Internal
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             .
          
           
             ✚
             ,
             
               Pronator
               Radii
               Teres
            
             .
          
           
             ψ
             ,
             The
             Lower
             Part
             of
             the
             Bicipital
             Muscle
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SIXTY-EIGHTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THE
             Muscles
             Bending
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             Thumb
             ,
             Carpus
             ,
             &c.
             
             Rais'd
             from
             their
             Originations
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Insertions
             .
          
           
             a
             ,
             The
             Perforatus
             .
          
           
             b
             ,
             The
             Perforans
             .
          
           
             c
             c
             ,
             &c.
             The
             Lumbricales
             .
          
           
             d
             ,
             d
             ,
             The
             Six
             Inter-Ossei
             Muscles
             free'd
             from
             between
             the
             Metacarpal
             Bones
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Insertions
             in
             Conjunction
             with
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Communis
            
             .
             These
             draw
             the
             Fingers
             to
             each
             other
             ,
             and
             Assist
             in
             Extending
             them
             .
          
           
             e
             ,
             The
             Fore-finger
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             
               Pronator
               Radii
               Teres
            
             ,
             or
             Rotundus
             :
             It
             Arises
             from
             the
             Internal
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             and
             in
             its
             Oblique
             Descent
             ,
             Cleaves
             to
             the
             
               Flexor
               Carpi
               Radialis
            
             ,
             Lessening
             its
             self
             at
             its
             Insertion
             a
             little
             above
             the
             Middle
             of
             the
             Radius
             Externally
             .
             It
             s
             Name
             declares
             its
             Office
             ,
             and
             Figure
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             
               Pronator
               Radii
               Quadratus
            
             ,
             or
             
               Inferior
               Quadratus
            
             :
             It
             Arises
             from
             the
             Lower
             and
             Inner
             Part
             of
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             and
             passes
             Transversly
             over
             the
             Ligament
             ,
             joining
             the
             Radius
             to
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Superior
             and
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             Radius
             .
             It
             s
             Name
             intimates
             its
             Use
             ,
             and
             Figure
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             
               Supinator
               Radii
               Longus
            
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             
               Supinator
               Radii
               Brevis
            
             ;
             left
             at
             its
             Insertion
             ,
             which
             is
             here
             truly
             Exprest
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             
               Flexor
               Carpi
               Radialis
            
             :
             It
             Arises
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Internal
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             Cleaves
             to
             the
             
               Pronator
               Radii
               Teres
            
             A
             ;
             in
             Half
             its
             Progress
             ,
             becomes
             Tendinous
             ,
             and
             runs
             under
             the
             Annular
             Ligament
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Upper
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Metacarpi
            
             ;
             which
             Sustains
             the
             Fore-finger
             as
             here
             Exprest
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Little
             Finger
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             First
             Bone
             of
             the
             Thumb
             made
             bare
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             
               Adductor
               Pollicis
               ad
               Dorsum
               Manus
            
             ,
             and
             
               Abductor
               Iudicis
            
             Rais'd
             both
             together
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Abductor
               Minimi
               Digiti
            
             :
             This
             we
             have
             often
             seen
             ,
             as
             it
             s
             here
             Represented
             ,
             Divided
             into
             Two
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             Three
             Distinct
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             each
             of
             a
             differing
             Order
             of
             Fibres
             :
             It
             Arises
             First
             from
             the
             
               Ligamentum
               Transversale
            
             ,
             and
             Fourth
             Bone
             of
             the
             Carpus
             ;
             Secondly
             from
             the
             Third
             Bone
             of
             the
             Carpus
             ;
             Thirdly
             and
             Lastly
             from
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Subjacent
             
               Os
               Metacarpi
            
             :
             The
             Two
             First
             ,
             Terminate
             at
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             First
             Bone
             of
             the
             Little
             Finger
             Forwards
             :
             The
             Latter
             Ends
             at
             the
             same
             Part
             of
             the
             said
             Bone
             Internally
             and
             Laterally
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             
               Flexor
               Pollicis
               Longus
            
             :
             This
             we
             have
             Observ'd
             to
             have
             a
             Twofold
             Beginning
             ;
             the
             First
             and
             Superior
             of
             which
             is
             Sharp
             ,
             but
             soon
             Grows
             Fleshy
             at
             the
             Internal
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             between
             the
             Perforatus
             and
             Perforans
             :
             This
             Fleshy
             Body
             becoming
             Tendinous
             ,
             again
             joins
             with
             the
             Middle
             Tendon
             of
             its
             other
             Large
             Head.
             The
             Second
             and
             Inferior
             Origin
             of
             this
             Muscle
             is
             that
             Part
             of
             it
             commonly
             Describ'd
             and
             here
             Figur'd
             .
             It
             Arises
             with
             a
             Double
             Order
             of
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             from
             immediately
             below
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             which
             Unite
             in
             a
             Middle
             Line
             or
             Tendon
             ,
             not
             unlike
             the
             Fibrillae
             of
             a
             Feather
             joining
             to
             their
             Stamina
             ;
             and
             before
             it
             passes
             over
             the
             Articulation
             of
             the
             Carpus
             ,
             and
             under
             the
             Transverse
             Ligament
             ,
             it
             Composes
             a
             somewhat
             Flat
             Strong
             Tendon
             ,
             running
             in
             an
             Interstice
             in
             the
             
               Musculi
               Flexor
               Primi
            
             ,
             and
             
               Secundi
               Internodii
               Pollicis
            
             ,
             to
             its
             Implantation
             at
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Third
             Bone
             of
             the
             Thumb
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             P
             ,
             O
             ,
             
               Flexor
               Primi
            
             &
             
               Secundi
               Ossis
               Pollicis
            
             :
             It
             Arises
             from
             the
             
               Ligamentum
               Transversale
               Carpi
            
             ,
             and
             Bones
             of
             the
             Carpus
             at
             the
             Basis
             of
             the
             
               Mons
               Lunae
            
             ,
             and
             
               Os
               Metacarpi
            
             that
             Sustains
             the
             Middle
             Finger
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             to
             the
             
               Ossa
               Sesamoidea
            
             of
             the
             Second
             Internode
             ,
             and
             partly
             to
             the
             First
             Bone
             of
             the
             Thumb
             .
             Its
             Actions
             are
             Various
             according
             to
             the
             Diversity
             of
             its
             Series
             of
             Fibres
             .
             So
             it
             Bends
             the
             First
             and
             Second
             Bones
             of
             the
             Thumb
             either
             Directly
             or
             Obliquely
             towards
             the
             Carpus
             and
             
               Vola
               Manus
            
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             N
             ,
             &c.
             The
             Abductor
             and
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Flexor
               Secundi
               Internodii
               Pollicis
            
             Rais'd
             together
             .
          
           
             Q.
             The
             
               Ulnaris
               Flexor
               Carpi
            
             :
             This
             like
             the
             Radialis
             derives
             its
             Origin
             from
             the
             Internal
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             as
             also
             from
             the
             Superior
             and
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             and
             is
             partly
             Inserted
             in
             some
             Subjects
             to
             the
             Fourth
             Bone
             of
             the
             Carpus
             ;
             but
             most
             commonly
             it
             passes
             farther
             on
             ,
             and
             runs
             under
             the
             Transverse
             Ligament
             ,
             and
             is
             Implanted
             to
             the
             Upper
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Metacarpis
            
             that
             Sustains
             the
             Little-Finger
             .
             It
             s
             Name
             denotes
             its
             Imployment
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             The
             Biceps
             left
             at
             its
             Insertion
             to
             the
             Radius
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             The
             
               Brachiaeus
               Internus
            
             .
          
           
             T
             ,
             The
             Internal
             Tubercle
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             .
          
           
             V
             ,
             The
             Ulna
             made
             bare
             .
          
           
             W
             ,
             The
             Radius
             .
          
           
             X
             ,
             The
             Ligament
             between
             the
             Ulna
             and
             Radius
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SIXTY-NINTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             REPRESENTS
             the
             External
             Muscles
             lying
             on
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             imploy'd
             in
             Extending
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             Thumb
             and
             Carpus
             .
          
           
             The
             Skin
             with
             the
             Parts
             annex'd
             ,
             Rais'd
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Elbow
             ,
             which
             Bidloo
             Erroneously
             calls
             the
             External
             Apophysis
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             External
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             which
             Bidloo
             (
             in
             like
             Manner
             )
             calls
             the
             Internal
             Apophysis
             of
             that
             Bone.
             
          
           
             D
             ,
             F
             ,
             The
             
               Radialis
               Extensor
               Carpi
            
             :
             This
             has
             Two
             Beginnings
             ,
             and
             does
             indeed
             represent
             Two
             distinct
             Muscles
             ;
             The
             Uppermost
             (
             F
             )
             arises
             immediately
             above
             the
             External
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             below
             the
             
               Supinator
               Radii
               Longus
            
             ;
             The
             other
             Beginning
             is
             beneath
             the
             former
             ,
             either
             from
             the
             Apex
             of
             the
             Extuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             or
             Superiour
             Part
             of
             the
             Radius
             .
             Both
             its
             Tendons
             ,
             marching
             under
             the
             
               Extensores
               Pollicis
            
             ,
             run
             under
             the
             Annular
             Ligament
             ,
             and
             are
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Superiour
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Ossa
               Metacarpi
            
             of
             the
             Fore
             and
             Middle
             Fingers
             .
             
               Vid.
               Tab.
            
             71.
             
             F
             ,
             I.
             
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             
               Extensor
               Carpi
               Ulnaris
            
             :
             This
             Arises
             from
             the
             External
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             as
             also
             from
             the
             Upper
             Part
             of
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Metacarpal
             Bone
             of
             the
             Little
             Finger
             .
             If
             this
             and
             the
             
               Ulnaris
               Flexor
            
             ,
             Act
             ,
             they
             move
             the
             Hand
             Sideways
             towards
             the
             Ulna
             ;
             and
             in
             like
             Manner
             ,
             if
             the
             
               Radialis
               Flexor
            
             and
             Extensor
             ,
             Act
             ,
             they
             move
             it
             towards
             the
             Radius
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Communis
            
             ,
             by
             some
             call'd
             Cnemodactilius
             ;
             It
             springs
             from
             the
             Outward
             Extuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             between
             the
             
               Extensores
               Carpi
            
             ,
             and
             its
             Tendons
             pass
             under
             the
             Annular
             Ligaments
             between
             the
             Lower
             Parts
             of
             the
             Ulna
             and
             Radius
             ,
             marching
             separately
             over
             the
             Back
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             do
             transmit
             Tendinous
             Filaments
             to
             each
             other
             ,
             before
             they
             pass
             the
             First
             Internodes
             of
             each
             Finger
             ,
             and
             are
             Inserted
             to
             the
             First
             ,
             Second
             ,
             and
             Third
             Bones
             of
             the
             Fore
             ,
             Middle
             and
             Third
             Fingers
             .
             There
             being
             no
             Force
             requir'd
             in
             Extending
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             we
             need
             not
             wonder
             that
             the
             Muscles
             imploy'd
             in
             that
             Office
             are
             no
             larger
             in
             Proportion
             to
             their
             Antagonists
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             Extending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Thumb
             ,
             which
             are
             distinctly
             Exprest
             in
             the
             following
             Tables
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Indicator
            
             .
          
           
             K
             
               Inferior
               ,
               Abductor
               Minimi
               Digiti
            
             .
          
           
             K
             Superior
             ,
             The
             Lower
             End
             of
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             next
             the
             Carpus
             B
             ,
             its
             Upper
             Part
             call'd
             Olecranum
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             Annular
             Ligament
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             
               Extensor
               Minimi
               Digiti
            
             ,
             Describ'd
             in
             the
             following
             Table
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Ulnaris
               Flexor
            
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Anconaeus
             :
             It
             Arises
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Inferior
             and
             Back
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             and
             growing
             Thicker
             as
             it
             Marches
             between
             the
             Superior
             Ends
             of
             the
             Ulna
             and
             Radius
             ,
             is
             Inserted
             to
             the
             lateral
             Part
             of
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             a
             Thumbs
             Length
             below
             the
             Olecranum
             ,
             or
             Elbow
             .
             This
             Assists
             in
             Extending
             the
             Cubit
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Supinator
               Radii
               Longus
            
             :
             This
             Arises
             Broad
             and
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             Three
             Finger's
             Breadth
             below
             the
             Termination
             of
             the
             Deltoides
             ;
             and
             Descending
             Obliquely
             ,
             it
             gradually
             lessens
             its
             self
             ,
             and
             makes
             a
             Flat
             ,
             Broad
             Tendon
             ,
             which
             likewise
             grows
             Narrower
             till
             it
             's
             Inserted
             to
             the
             External
             and
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             near
             the
             
               Carpus
               .
               Vid.
               Tab.
            
             68.
             
             C.
             
          
           
             Q
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Gemellus
             ,
             which
             is
             sometimes
             continuous
             with
             the
             Anconaeus
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Brachiaeus
               Internus
            
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Biceps
               Cubiti
            
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SEVENTIETH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             DIVERS
             Muscles
             which
             Extend
             the
             Carpus
             ,
             Fingers
             ,
             and
             Thumb
             ;
             somewhat
             Separated
             from
             each
             other
             and
             Rais'd
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             First
             Internode
             of
             the
             Fore-Finger
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             First
             Internode
             of
             the
             Little-Finger
             .
          
           
             C
             Inferior
             ,
             The
             Second
             Internode
             or
             Bone
             of
             the
             Thumb
             .
          
           
             C
             Superior
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Extensor
               Tertii
               Internodii
               Pollicis
            
             :
          
           
             This
             has
             a
             Broad
             partly
             Fleshy
             Origination
             from
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             immediately
             below
             the
             Beginning
             of
             the
             
               Extensor
               Primi
               Internodii
            
             ,
             or
             between
             it
             and
             the
             Iudicator
             ,
             as
             also
             from
             the
             Ligament
             between
             the
             last
             nam'd
             Bone
             and
             Radius
             ,
             whence
             .
             Descending
             Obliquely
             becomes
             Tendinous
             ,
             as
             it
             Marches
             in
             a
             Proper
             Sinus
             on
             the
             Inferior
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             wherein
             it
             's
             Enclos'd
             by
             an
             Annular
             Ligament
             ,
             passing
             over
             the
             Two
             Tendons
             of
             the
             
               Radiaeus
               Extensor
            
             ,
             to
             its
             Implantation
             at
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Third
             Bone
             of
             the
             Thumb
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Communis
            
             .
          
           
             E
             F
             ,
             &c.
             Its
             Tendons
             passing
             over
             the
             First
             and
             Second
             Joints
             of
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             here
             supported
             with
             a
             Pen.
             
          
           
             G
             G
             ,
             The
             
               Radialis
               Extensor
            
             stretch'd
             out
             with
             a
             Pair
             of
             Compasses
             .
          
           
             H
             H
             ,
             The
             
               Ulnaris
               Extensor
            
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Anconoeus
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Extensor
               Minimi
               Digiti
               Proprius
            
             :
             This
             Arises
             partly
             Tendinous
             at
             the
             Extremity
             of
             the
             External
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             ,
             and
             partly
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             between
             the
             
               Extensor
               Communis
               Digitorum
            
             ,
             and
             
               Ulnaris
               Extensor
            
             ;
             and
             becoming
             Tendinous
             as
             it
             passes
             under
             the
             
               Ligamentum
               Annulare
            
             at
             the
             Carpus
             ,
             where
             it
             is
             Divided
             into
             Two
             ,
             sometimes
             Three
             Tendons
             ,
             which
             are
             again
             United
             near
             their
             Insertions
             to
             the
             First
             ,
             Second
             ,
             and
             Third
             Bones
             of
             the
             Little
             Finger
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Ulnaris
               Flexor
            
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             Upper
             Epiphysis
             of
             the
             Ulna
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Iudicator
            
             ,
             or
             
               Extensor
               Iudicis
               Proprius
            
             :
             This
             Arises
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             Ulna
             next
             the
             Radius
             ,
             immediately
             below
             the
             
               Extensores
               Pollicis
            
             ,
             and
             in
             its
             Oblique
             Descent
             becomes
             Tendinous
             ,
             Running
             under
             the
             Annular
             Ligament
             on
             a
             Sinus
             ,
             in
             the
             Lower
             Part
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             and
             passes
             over
             the
             
               Os
               Metacarpi
               Iudicis
            
             ,
             joins
             with
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Extensor
               Communis
               Digitorum
            
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             with
             it
             .
          
           
             O
             O
             ,
             The
             
               Extensores
               Secundi
            
             &
             
               Tertii
               Internodii
               Pollicis
            
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             The
             Lower
             Part
             of
             the
             Ulna
             .
          
           
             Q
             Q
             Q
             ,
             The
             Inter-Ossei
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             The
             
               Abductor
               Minimi
               Digiti
            
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             The
             
               Adductor
               Pollicis
               ad
               Dorsum
               Manus
            
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SEVENTY-FIRST
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             SHEWS
             the
             Muscles
             Employ'd
             in
             Extending
             the
             Carpus
             ,
             and
             Fingers
             ,
             Rais'd
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Insertions
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             Radius
             made
             bare
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Ulna
             made
             bare
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             Upper
             End
             of
             the
             Radius
             ,
             Articulated
             with
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             Ligament
             joining
             the
             Ulna
             and
             Radius
             together
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Ulnaris
               Extensor
            
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             I
             ,
             cc
             ,
             
               Radialis
               Extensor
            
             :
             I
             ,
             by
             Bidloo
             is
             Erroneously
             call'd
             
               Extensor
               Iudicis
            
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             
               Supinator
               Radii
               Brevis
            
             :
             The
             Origin
             of
             this
             Muscle
             is
             here
             well
             Exprest
             and
             its
             Insertion
             ,
             Tab.
             68.
             
             D.
             
          
           
             H
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Communis
            
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             
               Extensor
               Minimi
               Digiti
               Proprius
            
             .
          
           
             L
             Superior
             ,
             
               Extensor
               Tertii
               Internodii
               Pollicis
            
             .
          
           
             M
             M
             ,
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Carpus
             .
          
           
             N
             N
             N
             ,
             The
             
               Ossa
               Metacarpi
            
             .
          
           
             O
             O
             ,
             
               Extensores
               Primi
            
             &
             
               Secundi
               Internodii
               Pollicis
            
             ,
             which
             derive
             their
             Originations
             from
             the
             Ulna
             ,
             like
             the
             
               Extensor
               Tertii
               Internodii
            
             ,
             and
             are
             Inserted
             to
             the
             respective
             Bones
             of
             the
             Thumb
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Extensor
               Communis
               Digitorum
            
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Iudicator
             .
          
           
             Q
             ,
             The
             Tendinous
             Origin
             of
             the
             
               Ulnaris
               Flexor
            
             ,
             cut
             from
             the
             Ulna
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             The
             Ligament
             Rais'd
             which
             Incloses
             the
             
               Ossa
               Carpi
            
             at
             their
             Articulations
             ,
             with
             the
             Radius
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             The
             
               Adductor
               Pollicis
               ad
               Dor
               sum
               Manus
            
             :
             It
             Arises
             from
             the
             Lower
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Metacarpi
            
             of
             the
             Fore-finger
             ,
             and
             Descends
             Obliquely
             to
             its
             Broad
             Termination
             at
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             First
             Bone
             of
             the
             Thumb
             .
          
           
             T
             ,
             The
             
               Abductor
               Minimi
               Digiti
            
             .
          
           
             V
             V
             V
             ,
             The
             Inter-Ossei
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SEVENTY-SECOND
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             AS
             the
             Arm
             ,
             Cubit
             ,
             and
             Hand
             are
             comprehended
             under
             the
             Title
             of
             the
             Whole
             Hand
             ;
             so
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             Leg
             and
             Foot
             ,
             are
             in
             common
             call'd
             ,
             the
             Foot.
             The
             Bones
             of
             those
             Parts
             are
             Represented
             ,
             Tab.
             103
             ,
             104
             ,
             105.
             where
             we
             shall
             speak
             of
             the
             particular
             Denominations
             of
             the
             Parts
             last
             mention'd
             :
             Our
             Business
             at
             present
             being
             to
             Explain
             the
             Muscles
             which
             move
             the
             Bones
             ;
             First
             of
             the
             Muscles
             which
             move
             the
             Thigh-Bone
             .
             The
             Skin
             and
             Fat
             of
             the
             Buttocks
             being
             Rais'd
             ,
             the
             Muscle
             which
             First
             offers
             its
             self
             to
             View
             ,
             is
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Major
            
             ,
             here
             Rais'd
             and
             laid
             aside
             to
             shew
             its
             Inferior
             Surface
             (
             A.
             )
             The
             Superior
             or
             External
             Surface
             of
             this
             Muscle
             Appears
             Compos'd
             of
             divers
             Muscles
             ,
             in
             whose
             Interstitia
             the
             Fat
             is
             Inserted
             ,
             and
             requires
             an
             Artificial
             Management
             of
             the
             Knife
             in
             freeing
             the
             Muscle
             of
             it
             ,
             so
             as
             to
             leave
             no
             Part
             of
             the
             Fat
             behind
             ,
             nor
             Wound
             the
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             of
             the
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             B
             B
             ,
             C
             ,
             The
             
               Glutaeus
               Major
            
             Rais'd
             and
             Turn'd
             Downward
             .
             This
             Muscle
             is
             not
             well
             Describ'd
             by
             Anatomists
             ,
             they
             only
             mentioning
             its
             Fleshy
             Part
             here
             Exprest
             ;
             besides
             which
             ,
             it
             has
             a
             Large
             Broad
             Tendinous
             Part
             ,
             Springing
             from
             the
             Whole
             External
             Margin
             of
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             (
             O
             O
             )
             next
             the
             
               Musculus
               Communis
            
             of
             the
             Membranosus
             ,
             whence
             Marching
             over
             the
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Medius
            
             (
             D
             )
             ;
             at
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             (
             E
             E
             )
             ,
             it
             meets
             with
             the
             Fleshy
             Part
             of
             this
             Muscle
             ,
             Arising
             from
             the
             Posterior
             Part
             of
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             ,
             hindermost
             Part
             of
             the
             Sacrum
             Laterally
             ,
             and
             
               Os
               Coccygis
            
             ,
             and
             Cleaving
             to
             the
             Broad
             Ligament
             that
             's
             Extended
             between
             the
             Two
             last
             mention'd
             Bones
             and
             Tubercle
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ischium
            
             ;
             its
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             Descend
             Disgregately
             in
             an
             almost
             Semicircular
             Manner
             ,
             and
             become
             Tendinous
             as
             they
             approach
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             where
             it
             's
             United
             with
             its
             First
             Describ'd
             Tendinous
             Beginning
             ,
             which
             together
             Descending
             over
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             ,
             joins
             with
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             Membranosus
             (
             of
             which
             hereafter
             ,
             )
             and
             proceeds
             to
             Frame
             a
             Large
             ,
             Thick
             ,
             Strong
             Tendon
             (
             C
             ,
             )
             Inserted
             to
             the
             
               Linea
               Asperia
            
             on
             the
             Back
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             ,
             near
             Four
             Fingers
             Breadth
             below
             the
             Great
             Rotator
             .
          
           
             The
             First
             Describ'd
             Tendinous
             Origin
             of
             this
             Muscle
             ,
             do's
             not
             only
             serve
             to
             support
             its
             Fleshy
             Body
             ,
             but
             its
             Fibres
             Extending
             themselves
             ,
             Intersect
             those
             of
             the
             Membranosus
             as
             they
             Cover
             all
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             do
             more
             Adequately
             Include
             those
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             Corroborate
             them
             in
             their
             Actions
             ;
             as
             we
             have
             elsewhere
             Observ'd
             of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Cubit
             and
             Fingers
             .
             When
             this
             Muscle
             Acts
             ,
             it
             draws
             the
             Thigh
             directly
             Backwards
             .
          
           
             I
             was
             lately
             Consulted
             in
             the
             Case
             of
             a
             Fistulous
             Ulcer
             a
             little
             above
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             ;
             the
             Sinus
             tended
             Upwards
             ,
             and
             was
             at
             least
             Two
             Inches
             Deep
             from
             the
             Surface
             of
             the
             Skin
             ,
             and
             about
             Three
             Inches
             in
             Length
             :
             I
             could
             Discover
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Sinus
             to
             be
             very
             hard
             like
             a
             Cartilage
             ;
             nor
             was
             it
             at
             all
             sensible
             to
             the
             Touch
             of
             the
             Probe
             ,
             as
             the
             Patient
             Inform'd
             me
             ;
             but
             on
             the
             contrary
             ,
             told
             me
             ,
             
               I
               than
               seem'd
               to
               Grate
               against
               the
               Bone.
            
             The
             Sinus
             had
             been
             divers
             times
             Open'd
             ,
             and
             the
             hard
             Body
             at
             the
             Bottom
             of
             it
             laid
             bare
             ,
             but
             the
             Wound
             could
             not
             be
             Cicatric'd
             :
             I
             Open'd
             it
             again
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             cut
             out
             the
             hard
             Cartilaginous
             Body
             which
             Cover'd
             the
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Medius
            
             ;
             the
             Wound
             afterwards
             Incarn'd
             ,
             and
             was
             Cur'd
             in
             a
             few
             Days
             .
             This
             Preternatural
             hard
             Body
             was
             Fram'd
             in
             the
             First
             Describ'd
             Tendinous
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Major
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Blood-Vessels
             would
             not
             Spring
             from
             it
             to
             afford
             Incarnation
             ;
             nor
             would
             common
             Escharoticks
             Act
             on
             it
             ,
             wherefore
             it
             continued
             to
             lie
             Bare
             ;
             but
             after
             cutting
             it
             out
             thro'
             the
             Blood-Vessels
             from
             the
             Subjacent
             Muscle
             ,
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Medius
            
             Sprung
             up
             ,
             and
             join'd
             with
             those
             of
             the
             Membranes
             under
             the
             Skin
             ,
             by
             which
             means
             a
             Confirm'd
             Ci●atrice
             was
             made
             .
             By
             this
             we
             may
             be
             Inform'd
             how
             Useful
             Anatomy
             is
             in
             Surgery
             .
          
           
             The
             like
             Case
             may
             happen
             on
             the
             Tendinous
             Expansion
             of
             the
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             the
             Membranosus
             ,
             on
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Tibia
             and
             Tarsus
             ,
             where
             dividing
             it
             only
             according
             to
             its
             Length
             may
             be
             sufficient
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             E
             E
             ,
             F
             ,
             
               Glutaeus
               Medius
            
             :
             This
             lies
             chiefly
             under
             the
             Tendinous
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Maximus
             ,
             Arising
             Fleshy
             from
             almost
             the
             Whole
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             ,
             whence
             Descending
             becomes
             Thicker
             and
             Fleshy
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             (
             in
             a
             Semicircular
             Manner
             E
             E
             )
             by
             a
             Short
             Strong
             Tendon
             ,
             to
             the
             Superior
             and
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             .
          
           
             This
             Muscle
             is
             not
             only
             Employ'd
             in
             Extending
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             but
             is
             chiefly
             Serviceable
             in
             Turning
             it
             Inwards
             ;
             and
             this
             Action
             of
             it
             will
             Manifest
             it self
             ,
             if
             in
             Time
             of
             Dissection
             you
             give
             the
             Thigh
             that
             Motion
             as
             it
             lies
             on
             the
             Table
             ;
             you
             may
             then
             Observe
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             this
             Muscle
             Notably
             Relaxt
             ;
             and
             in
             Living
             Persons
             when
             the
             Thigh
             is
             turn'd
             Inwards
             ,
             you
             may
             see
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             this
             Muscle
             Tumified
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             taken
             Notice
             of
             by
             Painters
             ;
             or
             ,
             if
             in
             Performing
             that
             Action
             with
             your
             own
             Thigh
             you
             lay
             your
             Thumb
             on
             this
             Muscle
             ,
             you
             may
             easily
             Feel
             it
             move
             under
             the
             Skin
             :
             Besides
             these
             Actions
             ,
             it
             's
             also
             Employ'd
             in
             Stradling
             or
             Pulling
             the
             Thighs
             and
             Legs
             from
             each
             other
             ;
             it
             Cooperating
             with
             the
             
               Musculus
               Membranosus
            
             in
             that
             Action
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Triceps
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             Pyriformis
             or
             
               Iliacus
               Externus
            
             .
          
           
             I
             I
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Marsupialis
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             Great
             Crural
             Nerve
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             Appendix
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ischium
            
             ,
             whence
             the
             Muscles
             Bending
             the
             Tibia
             and
             
               Musculus
               Quadratus
            
             do
             Spring
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             A
             Ligament
             Protended
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             to
             the
             Tubercle
             of
             the
             Ischium
             ,
             or
             
               Os
               Coxendicis
            
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             .
          
           
             O
             O
             ,
             The
             Spine
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             The
             Great
             Trochanter
             .
          
           
             Q
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Vastus
               Externus
            
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             The
             Upper
             Head
             of
             the
             
               Biceps
               Femoris
            
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             The
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Seminervosus
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SEVENTY-THIRD
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             DIVERS
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             
               Glutaeus
               Major
            
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Medius
             ;
             both
             being
             Rais'd
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Insertions
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             
               Glutaeus
               Minor
               in
               Situ
            
             :
             It
             has
             a
             Semicircular
             Broad
             Beginning
             from
             the
             
               Dorsum
               Ossis
               Ilii
            
             ,
             whence
             its
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             Descend
             to
             their
             partly
             Fleshy
             and
             partly
             Tendinous
             Insertion
             ,
             at
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             .
          
           
             This
             Performs
             the
             same
             Office
             with
             the
             Medius
             ,
             mention'd
             in
             the
             Description
             of
             the
             preceding
             Table
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             F
             ,
             G
             ,
             I
             ,
             The
             Pyriformis
             ,
             by
             some
             call'd
             
               Iliacus
               Externus
            
             ,
             by
             others
             
               Quadrageminus
               Primus
            
             :
             It
             Arises
             Round
             and
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Inferior
             and
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             ,
             within
             the
             Pelvis
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             ,
             Descending
             from
             thence
             Obliquely
             in
             the
             Great
             Sinus
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             (
             Tab.
             99.
             
             Fig.
             2.
             
             F
             )
             above
             the
             Acute
             Process
             of
             the
             Ischium
             (
             Ibid.
             G
             ,
             )
             and
             joins
             with
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Medius
            
             before
             it
             's
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Upper
             Part
             of
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             .
             This
             moves
             the
             Thigh
             somewhat
             Upwards
             and
             Turns
             it
             Outward
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             That
             Part
             of
             the
             Marsupialis
             ,
             call'd
             the
             Marsupium
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             Tubercle
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ischium
            
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             Back-part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             Great
             Trochanter
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Quadratus
               Femoris
            
             :
             It
             Arises
             Broad
             and
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Epiphysis
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ischium
            
             ,
             and
             passes
             Transversly
             of
             an
             equal
             Breadth
             and
             Thickness
             to
             its
             partly
             Fleshy
             and
             partly
             Tendinous
             Implantation
             ,
             at
             the
             Posterior
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
               ▪
            
             below
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             :
             This
             turns
             the
             Thigh
             Outwards
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             Divers
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Tibia
             near
             their
             Origin
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SEVENTY-FOURTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             SEVERAL
             Muscles
             Imploy'd
             in
             Moving
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             ,
             Rais'd
             from
             their
             Originations
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Insertions
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             
               Glutaeus
               Major
            
             ,
             scarcely
             Appearing
             under
             the
             Medius
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             
               Glutaeus
               Medius
            
             ,
             Free'd
             from
             their
             Originations
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Insertions
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             And
             Minor
             ,
             Free'd
             from
             their
             Originations
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Insertions
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             
               Iliacus
               Externus
            
             ,
             or
             Pyriformis
             hanging
             at
             its
             Insertion
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Triceps
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             G
             ,
             The
             Marsupialis
             or
             Bursalis
             ,
             by
             some
             call'd
             
               Obturator
               Internus
            
             :
          
           
             It
             Arises
             Broad
             and
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
               ,
               Ischium
               ,
               Pubis
               ,
            
             and
             Ligament
             that
             's
             Extended
             in
             the
             Great
             Foramen
             of
             the
             Two
             last
             nam'd
             Bones
             Internally
             ;
             whence
             passing
             Transversly
             ,
             it
             's
             Inflected
             on
             the
             Sinus
             of
             the
             Ischium
             N
             ;
             on
             each
             Side
             of
             which
             ,
             namely
             the
             Acute
             O
             ,
             and
             Obtuse
             Process
             P
             ,
             Arises
             its
             Second
             Fleshy
             Body
             ,
             call'd
             Marsupium
             G
             ;
             which
             ,
             Covering
             the
             Tendons
             deriv'd
             from
             its
             former
             Origin
             ,
             Descends
             Obliquely
             with
             them
             to
             their
             Insertion
             at
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             .
          
           
             When
             this
             Muscle
             Acts
             ,
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             is
             directed
             towards
             that
             Part
             of
             the
             Ischium
             N
             ,
             whereon
             its
             Tendons
             are
             Inflected
             ,
             not
             unlike
             a
             Pulley
             ;
             by
             which
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             is
             turn'd
             Outwards
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             
               Obturator
               Exteruus
            
             cut
             from
             its
             Origin
             at
             the
             Great
             Foramen
             (
             R
             )
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ischium
            
             ;
             its
             Name
             is
             deriv'd
             from
             its
             Situation
             ,
             it
             s
             call'd
             
               Rotator
               Femoris
               Extrorsum
            
             from
             its
             Use
             ;
             it
             has
             a
             Large
             Fleshy
             Beginning
             from
             the
             External
             Parts
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ischium
               ,
               Pubis
            
             ,
             and
             Membrane
             that
             Covers
             the
             Foramen
             Externally
             ,
             (
             opposite
             to
             the
             Origin
             of
             the
             Marsupialis
             )
             passing
             Transversly
             Backwards
             ,
             Lessens
             its
             self
             ,
             and
             Grows
             Tendinous
             at
             its
             Implantation
             to
             the
             Root
             of
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Head
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             lying
             out
             of
             the
             Acetabulum
             ,
             after
             the
             
               Ligamentum
               Latum
            
             i●
             cut
             off
             .
          
           
             k
             ,
             The
             Round
             Ligament
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             which
             is
             Fasten'd
             to
             the
             Inferior
             Part
             or
             Margin
             of
             the
             Acetabulum
             ;
             whereby
             the
             Great
             Atrition
             of
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Acetabulum
             ,
             with
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             ,
             is
             prevented
             in
             Walking
             ,
             Running
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             Actions
             .
          
           
             l
             ,
             The
             Mucilaginous
             Gland
             Entertain'd
             in
             a
             particular
             Depressure
             in
             the
             Bottom
             and
             Lower
             Part
             of
             the
             Acetabulum
             ;
             whereby
             the
             too
             Great
             and
             often
             Compressure
             of
             the
             Mucilage
             in
             Ordinary
             Motions
             of
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             is
             Prevented
             .
          
           
             m
             ,
             Some
             Remains
             of
             the
             Mucilaginous
             Glands
             on
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             ,
             near
             the
             Conjunction
             of
             the
             
               Ligamentum
               Latum
            
             ;
             which
             is
             here
             taken
             off
             ,
             to
             shew
             the
             Head
             of
             the
             Thigh-Bone
             and
             Acetabulum
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Coxendicis
            
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             Coccygis
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             Sinus
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ischium
            
             in
             which
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Marsupialis
             pass
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             An
             Acute
             Process
             of
             the
             Ischium
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             The
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Ischium
             whence
             Springs
             the
             Bending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             Q
             ,
             The
             Lower
             Margin
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Pubis
            
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             The
             Great
             Foramen
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ischium
            
             and
             Pubis
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SEVENTY-FIFTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             EXPRESSES
             divers
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             and
             some
             of
             those
             of
             the
             Thigh
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             B
             ,
             C
             ,
             The
             Sartorius
             ,
             or
             
               Fascialis
               Longus
               ,
               seu
               Longissimus
               Femoris
            
             :
             Itarises
             Sharp
             and
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             ,
             close
             by
             the
             
               Musculus
               Communis
            
             of
             the
             Membranosus
             ,
             and
             Descending
             Obliquely
             Inwards
             on
             the
             Rectus
             ,
             and
             
               Vastus
               Internus
            
             ,
             and
             over
             Part
             of
             the
             Triceps
             of
             an
             unequal
             Breadth
             and
             Thickness
             ;
             it
             meets
             with
             the
             Gracilis
             below
             the
             Middle
             of
             the
             Thigh
             Internally
             ,
             and
             Accompanies
             it
             in
             its
             Passage
             over
             the
             Internal
             and
             Inferior
             Head
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ;
             where
             it
             becomes
             Tendinous
             as
             it
             passes
             under
             the
             Strict
             Inclosure
             of
             the
             
               Fascia
               Lata
            
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             Four
             Fingers
             Breadth
             below
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             Internally
             ;
             it
             's
             Employ'd
             in
             moving
             the
             Thigh
             and
             Tibia
             Upwards
             ,
             somewhat
             Forewards
             ,
             and
             Inwards
             ;
             in
             which
             Actions
             ,
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             this
             Muscle
             Appears
             thro'
             the
             Skin
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             observ'd
             by
             Painters
             ,
             and
             Sculptors
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             E
             ,
             F
             ,
             The
             Gracilis
             :
             It
             Arises
             somewhat
             Broad
             ,
             partly
             Tendinous
             and
             partly
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Pubis
            
             Internally
             ,
             between
             the
             Two
             First
             Heads
             of
             the
             Triceps
             ,
             and
             in
             its
             straight
             Descent
             on
             the
             Inside
             of
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             Lessens
             it self
             ,
             becoming
             Tendinous
             a
             little
             above
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             last
             Describ'd
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             is
             so
             Inserted
             immediately
             beneath
             it
             to
             the
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             It
             Assists
             the
             Flexors
             of
             the
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             Rectus
             :
             It
             Arises
             Fleshy
             from
             a
             Prominence
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             ,
             between
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             its
             Spine
             and
             Acetabulum
             ,
             (
             Tab.
             99.
             
             Fig.
             1.1
             ,
             )
             thence
             Descends
             directly
             between
             the
             
               Vastus
               Externus
            
             ,
             and
             Internus
             ,
             over
             the
             Crureus
             :
             Its
             Fibres
             Externally
             Descend
             from
             a
             Middle
             Line
             Obliquely
             Laterally
             ;
             Internally
             they
             pass
             according
             to
             its
             Length
             ,
             and
             become
             entirely
             Tendinous
             Four
             Fingers
             Breadth
             above
             the
             Patella
             ,
             where
             it
             's
             United
             with
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Two
             Vasti
             and
             Crureus
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             with
             them
             to
             the
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             It
             Assists
             in
             Extending
             the
             Leg
             ,
             as
             also
             in
             drawing
             the
             Thigh
             and
             Leg
             Upwards
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             
               Vastus
               Internus
            
             :
             It
             Arises
             partly
             Tendinous
             and
             partly
             Fleshy
             ,
             at
             the
             
               Linea
               Aspera
            
             on
             the
             Back-part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             ,
             from
             immediately
             below
             the
             Lesser
             Trochanter
             ,
             to
             Three
             Fingers
             Breadth
             above
             the
             Inferior
             Appendix
             of
             that
             Bone
             Internally
             and
             Laterally
             ;
             whence
             its
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             Descend
             in
             an
             Oblique
             and
             almost
             Semicircular
             Manner
             ,
             and
             on
             a
             sudden
             becoming
             Tendinous
             ,
             joins
             with
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Rectus
               ,
               Vastus
               Externus
            
             ,
             and
             Crureus
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             to
             a
             Prominence
             on
             the
             Upper
             and
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             after
             joining
             with
             the
             Patella
             .
             It
             s
             Office
             is
             the
             same
             with
             the
             last
             nam'd
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             
               Vastus
               Externus
            
             :
             Its
             Origin
             Externally
             is
             Tendinous
             ,
             Internally
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Lower-part
             of
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             ,
             and
             Exterior
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Linea
               Aspera
            
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             ;
             whence
             its
             Fibres
             Descend
             Obliquely
             Forwards
             ,
             and
             on
             the
             contrary
             become
             Outwardly
             Fleshy
             and
             Tendinous
             Internally
             ,
             and
             immediately
             becomes
             perfectly
             Tendinous
             ,
             joining
             with
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Two
             last
             Treated
             of
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             with
             them
             (
             after
             joining
             with
             the
             Rotula
             )
             to
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             as
             is
             above
             mention'd
             .
          
           
             K
             K
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             Triceps
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             Pectineus
             ,
             by
             some
             call'd
             Lividus
             and
             
               Flexor
               Femoris
            
             ;
             it
             has
             a
             Thick
             Broad
             Fleshy
             Origin
             from
             the
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Pectinis
            
             ,
             or
             Pubis
             ,
             between
             the
             
               Musculus
               Lumbalis
            
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             
               Iliacus
               Internus
            
             ,
             and
             Second
             Head
             of
             the
             Triceps
             ;
             whence
             Descending
             Obliquely
             Backwards
             ,
             becomes
             a
             Flat
             Strong
             Tendon
             near
             its
             Implantation
             to
             the
             Asperity
             ,
             on
             the
             Posterior
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             ,
             immediately
             below
             the
             Lesser
             Trochanter
             ,
             and
             the
             Termination
             of
             the
             Psoas
             .
             This
             Acting
             together
             with
             the
             
               Psoas
               Magnus
            
             ,
             and
             
               Iliacus
               Internus
            
             ,
             do
             not
             only
             Assist
             those
             Muscles
             in
             drawing
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             Upwards
             ,
             but
             by
             its
             Oblique
             Curve
             Descent
             from
             its
             Origin
             to
             its
             Insertion
             :
             It
             Directs
             the
             Thigh
             somewhat
             Outwards
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             provident
             Contrivance
             in
             Nature
             ,
             least
             in
             Walking
             ,
             the
             Thigh-bones
             by
             their
             Oblique
             Position
             should
             be
             Incident
             to
             turn
             Inwards
             ;
             wherefore
             this
             Muscle
             is
             more
             particularly
             Employ'd
             in
             Directing
             the
             whole
             Foot
             ,
             viz.
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             Leg
             ,
             and
             Foot
             Outwards
             ,
             in
             a
             more
             Graceful
             Step.
             
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             Psoas
             together
             with
             the
             
               Iliacus
               Internus
            
             ,
             near
             their
             Insertions
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Pubis
            
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SEVENTY-SIXTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             DIVERS
             Muscles
             lying
             on
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Thigh
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Communis
            
             of
             the
             Membranosus
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             Part
             of
             its
             Tendinous
             Expansion
             Rais'd
             and
             Pinn'd
             out
             ;
             it
             's
             call'd
             Membranosus
             and
             
               Fascia
               Lata
            
             ,
             from
             its
             large
             Membranous
             Expansion
             ,
             Comprehending
             all
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             together
             with
             Part
             of
             those
             of
             the
             Thigh
             :
             It
             hath
             an
             Acute
             Fleshy
             Beginning
             from
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             ,
             between
             the
             Origination
             of
             the
             Sartorius
             ,
             and
             First
             Describ'd
             Tendinous
             Beginning
             of
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Magnus
            
             ,
             being
             Dilated
             to
             a
             Fleshy
             Belly
             after
             an
             Oblique
             Descent
             ,
             it
             becomes
             Tendinous
             Four
             Fingers
             Breadth
             below
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             ;
             whence
             it
             Descends
             Directly
             over
             the
             
               Vastus
               Externus
            
             ,
             to
             its
             Proper
             Termination
             at
             the
             Superior
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ;
             but
             in
             its
             Progress
             thither
             ,
             it
             is
             conjoyn'd
             with
             the
             Tendinous
             Expansion
             of
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Magnus
            
             ,
             that
             Arises
             from
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             Ilium
             ,
             Covering
             the
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Medius
            
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             External
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             those
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ,
             and
             Descending
             over
             the
             Patella
             ,
             Comprehends
             all
             the
             External
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Tarsus
             and
             Toes
             ,
             and
             joins
             with
             the
             
               Ligamentum
               Annulare
            
             ,
             which
             retains
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Toes
             and
             Foot
             :
             Unless
             it
             may
             be
             suppos'd
             this
             
               Fascia
               Lata
            
             should
             End
             at
             the
             Lower-part
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ,
             or
             Superior
             Parts
             of
             the
             Tibia
             and
             Fibula
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             last
             Nam'd
             Bones
             should
             give
             an
             Origin
             to
             the
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             the
             Fascia
             ;
             which
             seems
             to
             be
             Matter
             more
             of
             Controversie
             than
             Use.
             When
             this
             Muscle
             Acts
             ,
             it
             draws
             the
             Leg
             Outwards
             ;
             its
             Tendon
             being
             join'd
             with
             Part
             of
             the
             Tendinous
             Beginning
             of
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Magnus
            
             ,
             having
             a
             differing
             Series
             of
             Fibres
             Intersecting
             each
             other
             ,
             do
             thereby
             Compose
             a
             Strong
             Involucrum
             ,
             as
             well
             Including
             all
             the
             Common
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Leg
             ,
             as
             Covering
             the
             Proper
             ;
             whereby
             those
             Muscles
             are
             Corroborated
             in
             their
             Actions
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             Crureus
             or
             Femoreus
             :
             Its
             Origination
             is
             Large
             and
             Fleshy
             on
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ,
             from
             between
             the
             Greater
             and
             Lesser
             Trochanter
             ,
             as
             Appears
             Tab.
             79.
             its
             Fibres
             Descend
             directly
             ,
             and
             become
             intirely
             Tendinous
             a
             little
             below
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             Rectus
             ,
             soon
             joining
             with
             that
             Tendon
             ,
             together
             with
             those
             of
             the
             Two
             Vasti
             ,
             and
             Fixing
             to
             the
             Patella
             ,
             is
             afterwards
             Implanted
             to
             a
             Prominence
             at
             the
             Superior
             and
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             .
             The
             Extending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Tibia
             are
             much
             Stronger
             than
             their
             Antagonists
             the
             Flexors
             ,
             as
             Appears
             by
             their
             Magnitude
             and
             Conformation
             ;
             whether
             in
             respect
             to
             their
             Variety
             of
             Series
             of
             Fibres
             in
             General
             ,
             or
             Triple
             Order
             of
             those
             of
             the
             Rectus
             in
             Particular
             ,
             and
             its
             Inclosure
             in
             the
             
               Fascia
               Tendinosa
            
             :
             Nor
             is
             this
             Conformation
             without
             some
             considerable
             End
             Design'd
             by
             the
             Author
             of
             Nature
             ;
             for
             should
             not
             the
             Legs
             be
             Extended
             with
             a
             Force
             Exceeding
             the
             Incumbent
             Weight
             ,
             we
             should
             be
             continually
             liable
             to
             an
             Inflection
             at
             the
             Knees
             ,
             thro'
             the
             Pressure
             of
             the
             Whole
             Body
             ;
             much
             less
             should
             we
             be
             able
             to
             Translate
             the
             Body
             from
             one
             Place
             to
             another
             .
             But
             the
             All-wise
             Architect
             of
             Humane
             Bodies
             has
             so
             Fram'd
             these
             Muscles
             ,
             as
             not
             only
             to
             make
             them
             Useful
             in
             Supporting
             the
             Whole
             Body
             ,
             and
             rendering
             them
             Effectually
             Serviceable
             in
             Walking
             ,
             Running
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             :
             But
             thro'
             the
             great
             Proportion
             of
             Strength
             of
             these
             Extending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             they
             are
             also
             Capable
             (
             upon
             Inflection
             at
             the
             Knees
             )
             by
             their
             sudden
             Acting
             to
             Extend
             the
             Legs
             with
             such
             a
             Force
             ,
             as
             to
             remove
             the
             Whole
             Body
             from
             the
             Place
             where
             it
             stood
             ,
             as
             in
             leaping
             :
             In
             which
             Action
             ,
             the
             Extending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             namely
             the
             
               Sacrolumbales
               ,
               Longissimi
               Dorsi
            
             ,
             &c.
             and
             the
             Gasterocnemii
             of
             the
             Feet
             do
             in
             like
             Manner
             Concur
             in
             Extending
             those
             Parts
             :
             A
             likeness
             of
             which
             is
             Represented
             in
             a
             piece
             of
             Whale-bone
             ,
             
               Vid.
               Borell
               .
               De
               Motu
               Animalium
            
          
           
             D
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Sartorius
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             Tendinous
             Part
             of
             the
             Gracilis
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             A
             Portion
             of
             the
             Rectus
             ,
             as
             it
             Appears
             hanging
             down
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             
               Vastus
               Internus
            
             Rais'd
             and
             hanging
             down
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Vastus
               Externus
            
             in
             like
             Manner
             Dissected
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             First
             and
             Largest
             Head
             of
             the
             Triceps
             ,
             which
             Arises
             Broad
             and
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Inferior
             Edges
             and
             External
             Parts
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ischium
            
             and
             Pubis
             ,
             and
             Descending
             with
             an
             Oblique
             Order
             of
             Fibres
             to
             its
             partly
             Tendinous
             and
             partly
             Fleshy
             Insertion
             to
             the
             
               Linea
               Aspera
            
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ,
             immediately
             below
             the
             Implantation
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Quadratus
               Femoris
            
             ;
             the
             Lower-part
             of
             this
             Head
             of
             the
             Triceps
             Composing
             a
             Strong
             Round
             Tendon
             ,
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Internal
             and
             Lower
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             :
             The
             Second
             Head
             of
             this
             Muscle
             Arises
             Tendinous
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Pubis
            
             ,
             but
             in
             its
             Descent
             soon
             becomes
             Fleshy
             ,
             and
             joins
             with
             the
             Former
             ,
             near
             its
             Insertion
             to
             the
             Middle
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Linea
               Aspera
            
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             :
             The
             Third
             and
             last
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Triceps
             ,
             Springs
             from
             the
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Pubis
            
             ,
             between
             the
             Origin
             of
             the
             last
             Describ'd
             Head
             ,
             and
             Pectinaeus
             ;
             and
             Descending
             Obliquely
             ,
             joins
             with
             the
             First
             Head
             near
             its
             Insertion
             to
             the
             
               Linea
               Aspera
            
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ,
             immediately
             above
             the
             Termination
             of
             the
             Second
             Head.
             The
             Triceps
             moves
             the
             Thigh
             Variously
             according
             to
             the
             Diversity
             of
             its
             Beginnings
             ;
             so
             the
             First
             Describ'd
             Part
             of
             it
             draws
             the
             Thigh-bone
             Upwards
             ,
             Inwards
             ,
             and
             somewhat
             Backwards
             ;
             the
             Second
             and
             Third
             Beginnings
             of
             it
             ,
             pulls
             the
             Thigh
             more
             Inwards
             ,
             and
             Turns
             it
             somewhat
             Outwards
             ,
             as
             when
             we
             put
             our
             Legs
             Across
             each
             other
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             Psoas
             ,
             and
             
               Iliacus
               Internus
            
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Pectinaeus
            
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Pubis
            
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             Blood-Vessels
             of
             the
             Thigh
             Ti'd
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Patella
             or
             Knee-pan
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             The
             Inferior
             and
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             Lower
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             .
          
           
             Q
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SEVENTY-SEVENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             SOME
             of
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Thigh
             and
             Leg
             Dissected
             from
             their
             Originations
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Insertions
             .
          
           
             A
             B
             C
             ,
             &c.
             The
             
               Musculus
               Biceps
               Femoris
            
             :
             BB
             ,
             It
             s
             Two
             Heads
             or
             Beginnings
             :
             C
             ,
             Its
             Termination
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             Semimembranosus
             ,
             which
             in
             its
             Proper
             Situation
             is
             partly
             cover'd
             with
             the
             Seminervosus
             (
             E
             )
             :
             It
             has
             its
             Tendinous
             Origin
             from
             the
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ischium
            
             ,
             and
             composing
             a
             Broad
             ,
             Flat
             Tendon
             in
             Half
             its
             Progress
             ,
             on
             the
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Thigh
             it
             becomes
             a
             Round
             Fleshy
             Belly
             ,
             lying
             under
             the
             Long
             Tendon
             of
             the
             Seminervosus
             :
             About
             the
             Lower
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             (
             M
             )
             ,
             this
             Muscle
             is
             converted
             into
             a
             Strong
             Round
             Tendon
             ,
             Running
             in
             a
             Channel
             on
             that
             Appendix
             ,
             and
             is
             afterwards
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Superior
             and
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             :
             This
             Bends
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             which
             Action
             it
             Performs
             the
             more
             Advantageously
             by
             its
             Lower
             Tendons
             ,
             passing
             in
             a
             Channel
             on
             the
             Inferior
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ;
             which
             ,
             as
             a
             Pully
             not
             only
             Directs
             it
             in
             its
             Office
             ,
             but
             renders
             its
             Action
             in
             Bending
             the
             Leg
             more
             Vigorous
             .
             It
             must
             be
             Granted
             ,
             that
             if
             the
             Tendon
             of
             this
             
               Semimembr
               anosus
            
             had
             past
             further
             on
             ,
             and
             Terminated
             with
             those
             of
             the
             
               Seminervosus
               ,
               Gracilis
            
             ,
             and
             Sartorius
             ,
             it
             would
             have
             rendred
             it
             capable
             of
             Performing
             its
             Action
             with
             Force
             ;
             but
             in
             regard
             the
             Number
             of
             Tendons
             here
             on
             this
             Internal
             Side
             of
             the
             Ham
             are
             already
             Increas'd
             to
             Three
             ,
             the
             Fourth
             could
             not
             well
             be
             admitted
             without
             some
             Inconveniency
             ,
             either
             in
             Performing
             its
             Office
             together
             with
             the
             Rest
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             Figure
             of
             the
             Part
             :
             Besides
             it
             seems
             to
             be
             no
             small
             Artifice
             in
             Nature
             ,
             as
             well
             here
             in
             the
             Leg
             ,
             as
             in
             the
             Arm
             ,
             to
             Furnish
             both
             with
             Proper
             Muscles
             ,
             which
             should
             Gradually
             Bend
             them
             :
             Thus
             the
             Shorter
             Beginning
             of
             the
             
               Biceps
               Femoris
            
             and
             the
             Muscle
             now
             Treated
             of
             ,
             are
             Analogous
             to
             the
             
               Brachialis
               Internus
               ,
               Flexor
               Cubiti
            
             ;
             and
             this
             Contrivance
             here
             seems
             the
             more
             convenient
             in
             respect
             of
             Walking
             ;
             in
             which
             a
             moderate
             Flexion
             of
             one
             of
             the
             Legs
             is
             only
             Necessary
             ,
             in
             Order
             to
             its
             Translation
             before
             the
             other
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             Seminervosus
             or
             Semitendinosus
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             
               Glutaeus
               Magnus
            
             Rais'd
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Medius
            
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             made
             bare
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             
               Vastus
               Externus
            
             partly
             cover'd
             with
             the
             Tendinous
             Expansion
             of
             the
             Membranosus
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             Tendon
             of
             the
             Membranosus
             on
             the
             Vastus
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             M
             ,
             The
             Two
             Prominencies
             of
             the
             Lower
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ,
             of
             which
             the
             Internal
             (
             M
             )
             is
             furrow'd
             to
             receive
             the
             Round
             Tendon
             of
             the
             Semimembranosus
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             Trunks
             of
             the
             Blood-Vessels
             cut
             off
             in
             the
             Ham.
             
          
           
             O
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Crural
             Nerve
             .
          
           
             P
             P
             ,
             The
             Two
             Fleshy
             Beginnings
             of
             the
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Externus
            
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SEVENTY-EIGHTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             REPRESENTS
             the
             Muscles
             on
             the
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Thigh
             partly
             free'd
             from
             each
             other
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Originations
             and
             Insertions
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Major
            
             .
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             
               Biceps
               Femoris
               in
               Situ
            
             :
             It
             having
             Two
             Beginnings
             ;
             the
             Superior
             and
             Longest
             of
             which
             ,
             Arises
             from
             the
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ischium
            
             (
             G
             )
             ,
             in
             its
             Descent
             becomes
             Large
             and
             Fleshy
             ,
             and
             Lessening
             it self
             ,
             joins
             with
             the
             Inferior
             and
             Shorter
             Head
             ,
             which
             Springs
             partly
             Fleshy
             and
             partly
             Tendinous
             from
             the
             
               Linea
               Aspera
            
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             ,
             immediately
             below
             the
             Termination
             of
             the
             
               Glutaeus
               Magnus
            
             ;
             soon
             after
             these
             Two
             Heads
             or
             Beginnings
             of
             this
             Muscle
             are
             United
             ,
             it
             becomes
             Tendinous
             as
             it
             Descends
             in
             a
             Channel
             on
             the
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             Lower
             Appendix
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             ,
             and
             is
             Implanted
             to
             the
             Superior
             Epiphysis
             of
             the
             Fibula
             .
          
           
             Besides
             the
             Office
             commonly
             Assign'd
             ,
             this
             Muscle
             together
             with
             the
             Seminervosus
             and
             Semimembranosus
             ;
             it
             's
             likewise
             Imploy'd
             in
             Turning
             the
             Leg
             together
             with
             the
             Foot
             ,
             &c.
             
             Outwards
             in
             Sitting
             with
             the
             Leg
             Bended
             .
          
           
             C
             C
             ,
             The
             Semimembranosus
             remov'd
             from
             its
             Proper
             Situation
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             Seminervosus
             in
             like
             Manner
             Rais'd
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             its
             Origination
             and
             Insertion
             :
             This
             Arises
             from
             the
             same
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ischium
            
             (
             G
             )
             ,
             with
             the
             Upper
             Beginning
             of
             the
             Biceps
             and
             Origin
             of
             the
             Semimembranosus
             (
             CC
             )
             ,
             and
             Descending
             Obliquely
             Inward
             after
             making
             a
             Fleshy
             Belly
             ,
             Composes
             a
             Round
             Tendon
             above
             the
             Ham
             ,
             which
             Descends
             to
             its
             Insertion
             with
             the
             Gracilis
             and
             Sartorius
             ,
             below
             the
             Upper
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Tibia
             Internally
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             Posterior
             Part
             of
             the
             Thigh-Bone
             .
          
           
             F
             F
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Externus
            
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             Protuberance
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Ischium
            
             where
             the
             Bending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Tibia
             above-mention'd
             do
             Arise
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Triceps
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Great
             Crural
             Nerve
             .
          
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SEVENTY-NINTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             EXPRESSES
             Parts
             of
             some
             Muscles
             remaining
             on
             the
             Fore-part
             part
             of
             the
             Thigh-Bone
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             ,
             The
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Thigh-Bone
             .
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Crureus
             Muscle
             Rais'd
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             .
          
           
             b
             b
             ,
             A
             Portion
             of
             the
             Crureus
             still
             remaining
             on
             the
             Thigh-Bone
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             Patella
             ,
             or
             Knee-pan
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             Inside
             of
             the
             Tendon
             of
             all
             the
             Extending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Tibia
             United
             above
             the
             Patella
             .
          
           
             E
             E
             ,
             The
             Mucilaginous
             Glandules
             of
             the
             Knee
             .
             The
             Situation
             of
             these
             Glandules
             as
             well
             as
             others
             of
             this
             Kind
             ,
             is
             so
             Contriv'd
             in
             the
             several
             Articulations
             of
             Bones
             to
             which
             they
             belong
             ,
             as
             that
             they
             are
             not
             liable
             to
             be
             Comprest
             by
             the
             Apposition
             of
             the
             Bones
             in
             their
             Various
             Motions
             :
             Nor
             are
             they
             Destitute
             of
             such
             a
             Compressure
             as
             is
             Necessary
             to
             Accelerate
             their
             Mucilaginous
             or
             Slimy
             Juice
             ,
             when
             Lodg'd
             in
             their
             Excretory
             Tubes
             .
             The
             Tubes
             or
             Excretory
             Ducts
             of
             these
             Glands
             ,
             do
             not
             Discharge
             their
             Contents
             like
             those
             of
             the
             Fauces
             ,
             by
             open
             Apertures
             ;
             but
             are
             Carri'd
             beyond
             the
             Surface
             of
             their
             Glands
             ,
             and
             Frame
             a
             Fimbria
             or
             Fringe-like
             Appearance
             ,
             which
             hangs
             Loose
             or
             Flaggy
             in
             the
             Sinus's
             of
             the
             Articulations
             :
             This
             Contrivance
             in
             these
             Excretory
             Tubes
             of
             the
             Mucilaginous
             Glands
             of
             the
             Joints
             ,
             is
             not
             only
             Necessary
             to
             Defend
             their
             Mouths
             from
             being
             Opprest
             by
             the
             Mucilage
             contain'd
             in
             the
             Sinus's
             of
             the
             Articulations
             in
             its
             Endeavour
             to
             Return
             again
             ;
             but
             the
             too
             Plentiful
             Excretion
             of
             this
             Mucilage
             is
             also
             prevented
             ,
             and
             such
             a
             Quantity
             only
             Emitted
             as
             is
             Necessary
             to
             Lubricate
             the
             Articulations
             in
             their
             Respective
             Motions
             .
             Hence
             it
             Appears
             as
             in
             Violent
             Repeated
             Motions
             of
             the
             Bones
             ,
             there
             is
             a
             greater
             Expence
             of
             the
             Mucilage
             ,
             so
             there
             is
             a
             constant
             Supply
             in
             Proportion
             to
             that
             Expence
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Head
             of
             the
             Thigh-Bone
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             Acetabulum
             ,
             or
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Hip-Bone
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             
               Ligamentum
               Latum
            
             ,
             or
             Broad
             Ligament
             of
             the
             Coxendix
             ,
             which
             Involv'd
             the
             Articulation
             of
             the
             Thigh-Bone
             with
             the
             Hip
             ,
             here
             cut
             from
             the
             Margin
             of
             the
             Acetabulum
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             its
             Connection
             to
             the
             Neck
             of
             the
             Thigh-Bone
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Great
             Trochanter
             .
          
           
             The
             Muscles
             Adjacent
             to
             these
             Parts
             last
             mention'd
             ,
             are
             here
             so
             confusedly
             Exprest
             ,
             as
             no
             Explanation
             of
             them
             can
             be
             Asserted
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             EIGHTIETH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THE
             Muscles
             on
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Leg
             lying
             under
             the
             
               Fascia
               Lata
            
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             next
             the
             Patella
             which
             Composes
             the
             Knee
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Tendons
             of
             the
             
               Musculi
               Peronei
            
             in
             their
             Progress
             towards
             their
             Insertions
             ,
             as
             is
             Exprest
             in
             the
             following
             Table
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             Lower
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ,
             call'd
             
               Malleolus
               Externus
            
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Tibialis
               Anticus
               in
               Situ
               :
               Spigelius
            
             calls
             it
             
               Musculus
               Catenae
            
             ,
             because
             when
             it
             is
             Divided
             ,
             the
             Patient
             is
             Oblig'd
             to
             Use
             a
             Sling
             to
             Support
             the
             Foot
             for
             some
             time
             .
             I
             have
             more
             than
             once
             seen
             this
             Muscle
             Divided
             ,
             whether
             by
             Ignorantly
             Mis-applying
             of
             Causticks
             on
             Nodes
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             Case
             of
             a
             Fracture
             of
             that
             Bone
             ,
             and
             the
             Patient
             after
             some
             Time
             has
             Recover'd
             the
             compleat
             Action
             of
             Lifting
             up
             his
             Foot
             ,
             by
             the
             
               Extensor
               Pollicis
               Pedis
            
             ,
             H
             :
             The
             
               Tibialis
               Anticus
            
             derives
             its
             Fleshy
             Origin
             from
             the
             Lower-part
             of
             the
             Superior
             Apendage
             of
             the
             Tibia
             between
             its
             Prominence
             ,
             where
             the
             Great
             Tendon
             of
             all
             the
             Extending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Leg
             is
             Inserted
             ,
             and
             the
             Origination
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Pedis
               Longus
               seu
               Magnus
            
             ;
             it
             also
             continues
             a
             Disgregated
             Fleshy
             Origination
             for
             near
             Two
             Thirds
             of
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             Externally
             Laterally
             ,
             next
             the
             Fibula
             ;
             which
             Composing
             a
             Fleshy
             Belly
             ,
             Lessens
             its
             self
             in
             Half
             its
             Progress
             ,
             and
             Growing
             into
             a
             Strong
             and
             somewhat
             Round
             Tendon
             ,
             Descends
             Obliquely
             over
             the
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             and
             under
             the
             Annular
             Ligament
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Superior
             and
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Metarsi
               Pollicis
            
             .
          
           
             This
             pulls
             the
             Foot
             Upwards
             and
             Forwards
             ,
             Directly
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             
               Peronaeus
               Longus
            
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Pedis
               Longus
            
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Brevis
            
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Extensor
               Pollicis
               Longus
            
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Externus
            
             .
          
           
             N.B.
             
               That
               the
               Muscles
               are
               Exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               under
               the
            
             Fascia
             Lata
             ;
             
               which
               like
               a
               Bandage
               retains
               their
               Tendons
               in
               their
               Proper
               Situation
               ,
               in
               Order
               to
               Perform
               their
               Offices
               in
               Extending
               the
               Toes
               and
               drawing
               the
               Foot
               Upwards
               .
               In
               the
               following
               Figure
               the
            
             Fascia
             Lata
             
               is
               taken
               off
               ,
               and
               the
               Muscles
               are
               Represented
               more
               Distinct
               ,
               being
               partly
               Separated
               ,
               and
               their
               Tendons
               Rais'd
               .
            
          
           
             
               Part
               of
               the
            
             Gasterocnemius
             Internus
             
               is
               Exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               between
            
             E
             ,
             and
             I.
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             EIGHTY-FIRST
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             DIVERS
             Muscles
             on
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Leg
             ,
             partly
             Divided
             from
             each
             other
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             Superior
             Apophysis
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             to
             which
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Extending
             Muscles
             (
             after
             joining
             with
             the
             Patella
             )
             are
             Inserted
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Upper
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Fibula
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             Heel
             or
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Tibialis
               Anticus
            
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Magnus
            
             or
             Longus
             ,
             it
             being
             the
             Largest
             and
             Longest
             Muscle
             that
             Extends
             the
             Toes
             :
             This
             hath
             an
             Acute
             Fleshy
             Beginning
             Externally
             from
             the
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             the
             Upper
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Tibia
             next
             the
             Fibula
             ;
             as
             also
             a
             Long
             Fleshy
             one
             from
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             last
             Nam'd
             Bone
             ,
             and
             Lessening
             it self
             in
             Half
             its
             Progress
             on
             the
             Leg
             ,
             it
             joins
             with
             a
             Second
             Broad
             ,
             Disgregated
             Fleshy
             Beginning
             ,
             continued
             for
             near
             Half
             the
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ;
             where
             Descending
             under
             the
             
               Ligamentum
               Annulare
            
             of
             the
             Talus
             ,
             it
             is
             Divided
             into
             Five
             Tendons
             ,
             Four
             of
             which
             are
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Third
             Bones
             of
             all
             the
             Lesser
             Toes
             ;
             but
             the
             Fifth
             is
             Implanted
             on
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Metatarsi
            
             of
             the
             Little
             Toe
             ;
             which
             Part
             of
             it
             ,
             Vesalius
             makes
             his
             Ninth
             Muscle
             belonging
             to
             the
             Foot.
             
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Brevis
            
             :
             It
             Ariseth
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             External
             and
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             ,
             soon
             Dilating
             it self
             to
             a
             Fleshy
             Belly
             ,
             which
             being
             Divided
             into
             Four
             Fleshy
             Portions
             ,
             become
             so
             many
             Tendons
             ,
             passing
             over
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Foot
             ,
             make
             Acute
             Angles
             with
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Former
             Muscle
             ,
             as
             they
             run
             over
             the
             First
             Internode
             of
             each
             Lesser
             Toe
             ,
             to
             their
             Insertions
             at
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             their
             Second
             Internodes
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             
               Extensor
               Pollicis
               Pedis
               Longus
               &
               Magnus
            
             :
             It
             being
             the
             Longest
             and
             Largest
             Extender
             of
             the
             Great
             Toe
             :
             Its
             Beginning
             is
             Large
             and
             Fleshy
             on
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ,
             from
             immediately
             below
             its
             Superior
             Appendix
             ,
             to
             Four
             Finger's
             Breadth
             above
             its
             Inferior
             one
             ;
             and
             Descending
             under
             the
             
               Ligamentum
               Annulare
            
             of
             the
             Tarsus
             ,
             between
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Tibialis
               Anticus
            
             ,
             and
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             
               Extensor
               Pedis
               Longus
            
             ,
             Marching
             along
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Foot
             ;
             it
             's
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Second
             Bone
             of
             the
             Great
             Toe
             ;
             its
             Name
             declares
             its
             Use.
             
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             
               Peroneus
               Primus
               seu
               Magnus
               in
               Situ
            
             :
             In
             the
             following
             Table
             it
             's
             Rais'd
             from
             its
             Origin
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             its
             Insertion
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             Skin
             on
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Foot
             ,
             call'd
             
               Planta
               Pedis
            
             ,
             taken
             off
             .
          
           
             L
             L
             ,
             A
             Style
             or
             Bodkin
             Supporting
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Longus
            
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             Lower
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ,
             call'd
             
               Malleolus
               Externus
            
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Bone
             ,
             call'd
             Talus
             and
             Astragalus
             made
             bare
             ,
             so
             that
             its
             Cartilaginous
             Surface
             that
             is
             Articulated
             with
             the
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             and
             Fibula
             ,
             may
             be
             seen
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Mucilaginous
             Gland
             of
             the
             Tarsus
             Entertain'd
             in
             the
             Large
             Cavity
             or
             Interstitium
             ,
             Fram'd
             between
             the
             Talus
             and
             Oblong
             Tubercle
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             ;
             the
             Use
             of
             which
             Cavity
             and
             Mucus
             ,
             is
             taken
             Notice
             of
             by
             
               Realdus
               Columbus
            
             Lib.
             I.
             Cap.
             xxxii
             .
             to
             Moisten
             the
             Articulation
             of
             the
             Bones
             ,
             least
             they
             become
             Dry
             by
             their
             frequent
             Motion
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             The
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Peroneus
               Longus
            
             Marching
             behind
             the
             
               Malleolus
               Externus
            
             ,
             in
             its
             Way
             to
             its
             Insertion
             in
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Foot.
             
          
           
             Q
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Peroneus
               Secundus
            
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             The
             
               Extensor
               Pollicis
               Brevis
               in
               Situ
            
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Externus
            
             .
          
           
             T
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Internus
             .
          
           
             N.
             B.
             
               That
               the
            
             Fascia
             Membranosa
             
               which
               Helps
               to
               Compose
               the
               Annular
               Ligament
               ,
               between
               the
               Two
            
             Malleoli
             
               and
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Foot
               or
            
             Tarsus
             ,
             
               commonly
               ,
               call'd
               the
               Instep
               ,
               is
               here
               taken
               off
               from
               its
               Continuance
               near
               Half
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
            
             Tibia
             ,
             
               that
               of
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Leg
               or
            
             Tibia
             
               remaining
               on
               ,
               as
               is
               well
               Exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               .
            
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             EIGHTY-SECOND
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             SHEWS
             the
             Extending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Toes
             ,
             together
             with
             divers
             Imploy'd
             in
             the
             Motion
             of
             the
             Foot
             Dissected
             from
             their
             Originals
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Tendinous
             Insertions
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             Inside
             of
             the
             
               Tibialis
               Anticus
            
             free'd
             from
             the
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             
               Peroneus
               Secundus
            
             ,
             by
             some
             call'd
             Semifibulaeus
             :
             It
             has
             an
             Acute
             Fleshy
             Beginning
             from
             above
             the
             Middle
             of
             the
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ,
             under
             the
             Fleshy
             Belly
             of
             the
             
               Peroneus
               Longus
            
             ,
             continuing
             to
             derive
             a
             Disgregated
             Fleshy
             Beginning
             from
             the
             Posterior
             Sharp
             Edge
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ,
             Composing
             a
             Fleshy
             Belly
             ;
             it
             Grows
             Tendinous
             as
             it
             passes
             behind
             the
             
               Malleolus
               Externus
            
             ,
             under
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Peroneus
               Longus
            
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Superior
             and
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Metatarsi
            
             of
             the
             Little
             Toe
             .
          
           
             This
             draws
             the
             Foot
             Outwards
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             
               Peroneus
               Primus
            
             or
             Longus
             ,
             so
             call'd
             because
             it
             is
             the
             First
             that
             offers
             its
             self
             to
             View
             ,
             and
             the
             Longest
             Muscle
             plac'd
             on
             the
             
               Os
               Perone
            
             or
             Fibula
             ;
             it
             Arises
             Externally
             Tendinous
             ,
             and
             Internally
             Fleshy
             ,
             from
             above
             Half
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ,
             Descending
             somewhat
             Backwards
             ,
             Composes
             a
             Strong
             Flat
             Tendon
             ,
             which
             becomes
             somewhat
             Round
             as
             it
             Marches
             in
             a
             Channel
             on
             the
             
               Malleolus
               Externus
            
             ;
             whence
             it
             's
             Inflected
             Forwards
             (
             Tab.
             81.
             
             P
             ,
             )
             Accompaning
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Peroneus
               Secundus
            
             to
             its
             Insertion
             (
             
               Tab.
               Ibid.
            
             Q
             ,
             )
             ;
             where
             the
             Tendon
             of
             this
             Muscle
             leaves
             it
             ,
             and
             proceeds
             to
             March
             over
             the
             
               Os
               Cuboides
            
             or
             Spongiosum
             ,
             and
             under
             the
             
               Abductor
               Minimi
               Digiti
            
             ;
             whence
             it
             passes
             in
             
               Planta
               Pedis
            
             ,
             between
             the
             
               Ossa
               Cuneformia
            
             and
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Muscles
             Bending
             the
             Toes
             ,
             to
             its
             Implantation
             at
             the
             Superior
             and
             Hindmost
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Metatarsi
            
             of
             the
             Great
             Toe
             ,
             as
             is
             Exprest
             ,
             Tab.
             86.
             
             Fig.
             1.
             
             M
             ,
             
               Ibid.
               Fig.
            
             2.
             
             F.
             
          
           
             This
             Contrivance
             in
             Nature
             in
             conveying
             the
             Tendon
             of
             this
             Muscle
             ,
             not
             only
             over
             the
             Lower
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ,
             but
             on
             the
             
               Os
               Spongiosum
            
             (
             as
             a
             Rope
             on
             a
             Double
             Pully
             )
             is
             very
             considerable
             in
             respect
             to
             its
             Office
             ;
             for
             since
             the
             Ball
             of
             the
             Great
             Toe
             (
             to
             which
             Part
             this
             Tendon
             is
             Inserted
             )
             is
             Necessary
             for
             the
             Center
             of
             Gravity
             to
             the
             Whole
             Body
             ;
             it
             is
             an
             Instance
             of
             the
             Skill
             of
             the
             Divine
             Architect
             so
             to
             Dispose
             of
             this
             Instrument
             ,
             which
             brings
             that
             Center
             towards
             a
             Perpendicular
             Bearing
             (
             which
             Necessarily
             Projects
             from
             the
             Fulciment
             or
             Tibia
             )
             ,
             by
             adding
             this
             Double
             Pully
             ;
             which
             Composing
             Angles
             of
             Contortion
             do's
             Reciprocally
             Augment
             the
             Force
             of
             making
             the
             Ball
             of
             the
             Great
             Toe
             Approach
             towards
             a
             right
             Bearing
             with
             the
             Tibia
             ;
             and
             by
             this
             means
             sustains
             the
             Weight
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             tho
             it
             is
             not
             in
             a
             Direct
             Position
             with
             the
             Gravity
             of
             the
             Whole
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Pedis
               Longus
            
             .
          
           
             E
             E
             E
             ,
             &c.
             It
             s
             Five
             Tendons
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Extream
             Internode
             of
             the
             Lesser
             Toes
             ;
             Two
             of
             which
             go
             to
             the
             Little
             Toe
             ,
             as
             here
             Exprest
             .
          
           
             e
             ,
             One
             of
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Magnus
            
             ,
             Implanted
             on
             the
             
               Os
               Metatarsi
            
             of
             the
             Little
             Toe
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Pedis
               Brevis
            
             .
          
           
             f
             f
             f
             ,
             Its
             Tendons
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             
               Extensor
               Pollicis
               Longus
            
             ,
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             
               Extensor
               Pollicis
               Brevis
            
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             Fibula
             .
          
           
             L
             L
             L
             ,
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Tarsus
             Connected
             to
             each
             other
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Ossa
               Metatarsi
            
             ,
             by
             Ligaments
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             Great
             Ligament
             of
             the
             Articulation
             of
             the
             Tarsus
             ,
             with
             the
             Tibia
             and
             Fibula
             Divided
             ,
             to
             shew
             the
             Upper
             Cartilaginous
             Surface
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Tali
            
             or
             Astragalus
             .
          
           
             N
             N
             ,
             &c.
             The
             
               Musculi
               Inter-Ossei
            
             lying
             between
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Metatarsus
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             
               Abductor
               Minimi
               Digiti
            
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Flexor
               Pollicis
               Longus
            
             remaining
             
               in
               Situ
            
             on
             the
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Fibula
             .
          
           
             Q
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Internus
            
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             The
             Trunks
             of
             the
             Nerves
             and
             Blood-Vessels
             which
             are
             Inservient
             to
             the
             Muscles
             on
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             The
             Ligament
             between
             the
             Tibia
             and
             Fibula
             which
             Distinguishes
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Fore-part
             from
             those
             behind
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             EIGHTY-THIRD
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             REPRESENTS
             divers
             External
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Leg
             and
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Foot.
             
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             Upper
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             which
             Helps
             to
             Compose
             the
             Internal
             Lateral
             Part
             of
             the
             Knee
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Body
             of
             the
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Popliteus
            
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Upper
             and
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Externus
            
             ,
             so
             call'd
             ,
             because
             it
             's
             the
             External
             Muscle
             which
             Helps
             to
             Compose
             the
             Calf
             of
             the
             Leg
             :
             Ves●●ngius
             Distinguishes
             this
             here
             Exprest
             ,
             with
             its
             Companion
             on
             the
             Outside
             of
             the
             Calf
             ,
             by
             the
             Name
             of
             Gasterocnemius
             ,
             and
             the
             Subjacent
             Muscle
             ,
             he
             calls
             Soleus
             ,
             from
             its
             Figure
             being
             like
             that
             of
             the
             Sole-Fish
             ,
             which
             Others
             ,
             as
             Spigelius
             ,
             &c.
             call
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Internus
            
             .
             This
             External
             Muscle
             is
             also
             call'd
             Gemellus
             ,
             it
             being
             as
             it
             were
             Double
             ;
             it
             having
             Two
             Distinct
             Fleshy
             Originations
             ,
             from
             the
             Superior
             and
             Hindmost
             Parts
             of
             each
             Tubercle
             of
             the
             Lower
             Apendage
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ;
             which
             in
             their
             Descent
             are
             each
             Dilated
             into
             Two
             Large
             Fleshy
             Bellies
             :
             The
             Innermost
             of
             which
             is
             Thickest
             ,
             and
             Largest
             ;
             each
             of
             these
             Fleshy
             Bellies
             having
             a
             Differing
             Series
             of
             Fibres
             ,
             join
             to
             each
             other
             ,
             near
             where
             they
             make
             a
             Broad
             Strong
             Tendon
             ,
             which
             Narrowing
             it self
             ,
             joins
             with
             the
             Great
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Internus
            
             ,
             Four
             Finger's
             Breadth
             above
             its
             Insertion
             to
             the
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             .
          
           
             Riolan
             Asserts
             with
             Vesalius
             ,
             That
             in
             the
             Two
             Beginnings
             of
             this
             Muscle
             ,
             there
             are
             Two
             
               Ossicula
               Sesamoidea
            
             ;
             which
             we
             must
             Acknowledge
             with
             Marchette
             ,
             have
             hitherto
             Escap'd
             our
             Observation
             ,
             tho'
             it
             's
             likely
             it
             may
             be
             so
             in
             Aged
             Bodies
             ;
             as
             Appear'd
             in
             a
             Subject
             I
             lately
             Dissected
             ,
             on
             one
             Side
             only
             .
          
           
             When
             this
             Muscle
             Acts
             ,
             the
             Foot
             is
             said
             to
             be
             Extended
             or
             pull'd
             Backwards
             ,
             which
             Motion
             of
             it
             is
             very
             Necessary
             in
             Walking
             ,
             Running
             ,
             Leaping
             ,
             and
             Standing
             on
             Tiptoe
             ,
             &c.
             
             Hence
             it
             is
             those
             that
             Walk
             much
             ,
             have
             these
             Muscles
             Larger
             than
             others
             ,
             thro'
             the
             frequent
             Use
             of
             them
             ,
             and
             amongst
             whom
             those
             that
             carry
             heavy
             Burthens
             ,
             and
             especially
             Sedans
             or
             Chairs
             in
             this
             Town
             ;
             and
             those
             who
             wear
             Low-heel'd
             Shoes
             have
             these
             Muscles
             Remarkably
             Larger
             than
             others
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Tendinous
             Expansion
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Plantaris
            
             free'd
             from
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Foot.
             
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             Perforatus
             ,
             so
             call'd
             ,
             because
             its
             Tendons
             are
             Perforated
             like
             those
             of
             the
             Fingers
             .
             It
             is
             also
             call'd
             
               Flexor
               Secundi
               Internodii
               Digitorum
               Pedis
            
             ,
             from
             its
             Use
             ,
             and
             Sublimis
             from
             its
             Situation
             :
             It
             Springeth
             from
             the
             Inferior
             and
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             ,
             between
             the
             
               Musculi
               Abductores
            
             of
             the
             Greater
             and
             Lesser
             Toes
             ,
             Dilating
             it self
             to
             a
             Fleshy
             Belly
             ;
             after
             it
             hath
             pass'd
             the
             Middle
             of
             the
             
               Planta
               Pedis
            
             ;
             it
             is
             Divided
             into
             Four
             Fleshy
             Portions
             ,
             which
             become
             so
             many
             Tendons
             ,
             and
             are
             Divided
             near
             their
             Terminations
             to
             Admit
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             following
             Muscles
             or
             Perforatus
             ,
             to
             pass
             thro'
             them
             to
             their
             Insertions
             ;
             these
             Tendons
             being
             United
             again
             ,
             pass
             Underneath
             the
             Perforantes
             to
             their
             Implantations
             at
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Second
             Bone
             of
             each
             Lesser
             Toe
             .
          
           
             H
             H
             ,
             The
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Perforans
             passing
             thro'
             the
             Divisions
             of
             those
             of
             the
             Perforatus
             last
             Describ'd
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Flexor
               Pollicis
               Longus
            
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Abductor
               Pollicis
            
             ,
             so
             call'd
             from
             its
             Office
             :
             It
             Arises
             partly
             Tendinous
             and
             partly
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Internal
             and
             Lateral
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             ,
             and
             in
             Half
             its
             Progress
             Composes
             a
             Tendon
             which
             joins
             with
             another
             Beginning
             ,
             Springing
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Cuniforme
               Majus
            
             ,
             and
             Naviculare
             ;
             both
             Marching
             Forwards
             make
             one
             Tendon
             at
             its
             Insertion
             to
             the
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Sesamoides
            
             of
             the
             Great
             Toe
             Laterally
             :
             It
             draws
             the
             Great
             Toe
             from
             the
             rest
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             
               Abductor
               Minimi
               Digiti
            
             ;
             this
             Muscle
             is
             Outwardly
             Tendinous
             and
             Inwardly
             Fleshy
             in
             its
             Origin
             at
             the
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             ,
             and
             becoming
             Tendinous
             in
             Half
             its
             Progress
             on
             the
             Outside
             of
             the
             Foot
             ;
             it
             joins
             a
             Second
             Fleshy
             beginning
             of
             this
             Muscle
             ,
             Springing
             from
             the
             Superior
             and
             External
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Metatarsi
            
             of
             the
             Little
             Toe
             ,
             makes
             one
             Tendon
             at
             its
             Insertion
             to
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             First
             Bone
             of
             the
             Little
             Toe
             Externally
             Laterally
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             Internal
             Malleolus
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Tibialis
               Anticus
            
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Tendon
             of
             the
             Gasterocnemii
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Small
             Long
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Plantaris
            
             ,
             in
             its
             Descent
             towards
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Foot.
             
          
           
             Q
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Internus
            
             or
             Soleus
             .
          
           
             Note
             ,
             
               That
               Part
               of
               the
            
             Flexor
             Digitorum
             Pedis
             Perforans
             and
             Flexor
             Pollicis
             ,
             
               may
               be
               seen
               in
               this
               Position
               of
               the
               Part
               between
            
             M
             and
             Q
             ;
             
               but
               the
               Membranes
               not
               being
               taken
               off
               (
               in
               the
               Subject
               whence
               this
               Figure
               was
               taken
               )
               those
               Muscles
               are
               here
               Exprest
               very
               Obscurely
               .
            
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             EIGHTY-FOURTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             REPRESENTS
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Hinder-part
             of
             the
             Leg
             ,
             after
             the
             Gasterocnemii
             are
             Dissected
             from
             their
             Originals
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Insertions
             .
          
           
             A
             A
             ,
             The
             Two
             Inferior
             Heads
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             Part
             of
             One
             of
             the
             Semilunary
             Cartilages
             plac'd
             in
             the
             Articulation
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             with
             the
             Tibia
             ;
             this
             Cartilage
             together
             with
             that
             on
             the
             other
             Side
             of
             this
             Articulation
             ,
             Frame
             Two
             Shallow
             Cavities
             on
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             which
             receive
             the
             Prominencies
             of
             the
             Two
             Inferior
             Heads
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             :
             These
             Semilunary
             Cartilages
             are
             Thick
             and
             Large
             ,
             Externally
             towards
             the
             Surface
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             to
             which
             they
             are
             Connected
             and
             Gradually
             become
             Thinner
             as
             they
             Approach
             the
             Center
             of
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ;
             their
             Figure
             very
             aptly
             Represents
             a
             Half-Moon
             ;
             their
             Office
             is
             very
             considerable
             in
             preventing
             those
             frequent
             Luxations
             and
             Dislocations
             which
             this
             Part
             ,
             on
             very
             slight
             Occasions
             ,
             would
             otherwise
             be
             Incident
             to
             ;
             for
             which
             End
             these
             Semilunary
             Cartilages
             are
             Connected
             to
             the
             Broad
             Ligament
             which
             Invests
             this
             Articulation
             ;
             which
             Ligament
             is
             very
             well
             Exprest
             in
             this
             Figure
             ,
             it
             being
             partly
             taken
             off
             from
             the
             Hinder-part
             of
             the
             Articulation
             ,
             to
             shew
             the
             Two
             Heads
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Popliteus
            
             ,
             by
             some
             call'd
             Subpopliteus
             :
             It
             Ariseth
             with
             a
             Short
             Strong
             Tendon
             from
             the
             External
             Head
             of
             the
             Inferior
             Appendix
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Femoris
            
             ,
             whence
             Descending
             Obliquely
             over
             the
             Juncture
             ,
             it
             becomes
             Fleshy
             or
             more
             and
             more
             Expanding
             it self
             ,
             till
             it
             's
             Implanted
             to
             the
             Superior
             Part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             Internally
             ,
             immediately
             below
             its
             Upper
             Appendix
             (
             a
             )
             :
             This
             Muscle
             not
             only
             Assists
             the
             rest
             Imploy'd
             in
             Bending
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             Advantageously
             Situated
             to
             Antagonize
             the
             
               Biceps
               Femoris
            
             ,
             when
             the
             Leg
             or
             Knee
             is
             Bended
             in
             Turning
             the
             Foot
             and
             Toes
             Inwards
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             E
             E
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Externus
            
             Dissected
             from
             their
             Originations
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Inferior
             or
             Internal
             Surface
             of
             the
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Internus
            
             ;
             where
             a
             very
             Elegant
             Disposition
             of
             its
             Fibres
             are
             Curiously
             Exprest
             ,
             which
             Appearance
             I
             have
             frequently
             Observ'd
             ;
             but
             in
             some
             Subjects
             ,
             and
             particularly
             in
             One
             I
             lately
             Dissected
             ,
             a
             quite
             different
             Series
             of
             Fibres
             of
             this
             Muscle
             Offer'd
             :
             This
             Muscle
             lies
             under
             the
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Externus
            
             and
             Part
             of
             the
             Plantaris
             ;
             it
             's
             call'd
             Soleus
             from
             its
             Figure
             ;
             it
             s
             External
             Fleshy
             Part
             is
             Cover'd
             with
             a
             Transparent
             Tendinous
             Expansion
             ,
             which
             makes
             it
             Appear
             of
             a
             Livid
             Colour
             ;
             it
             Arises
             partly
             Tendinous
             ,
             but
             chiefly
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Hindmost
             Part
             of
             the
             Upper
             Appendix
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ,
             and
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             immediately
             below
             the
             Termination
             of
             the
             Subpopliteus
             ,
             and
             Increasing
             to
             a
             Large
             Fleshy
             Belly
             Compos'd
             of
             Various
             Orders
             of
             Fibres
             ,
             all
             which
             being
             United
             into
             a
             Tendon
             ,
             join
             with
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             External
             Muscle
             ,
             and
             are
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Superior
             and
             Hindmost
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             .
             The
             Talus
             together
             with
             the
             Toes
             being
             as
             it
             were
             a
             Leaver
             to
             the
             Whole
             Body
             ,
             ought
             therefore
             to
             be
             Attended
             with
             Muscles
             of
             great
             Strength
             to
             Extend
             them
             ;
             wherefore
             we
             find
             those
             Muscles
             so
             much
             to
             Exceed
             their
             Antagonist
             the
             
               Tibieus
               Anticus
            
             ,
             as
             well
             in
             the
             Advantageous
             Constructure
             of
             their
             Differing
             Series
             of
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             ,
             as
             their
             Magnitude
             and
             Insertion
             at
             the
             Extremity
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             ;
             by
             which
             means
             they
             are
             not
             only
             rendred
             Serviceable
             in
             Walking
             ,
             Running
             ,
             and
             the
             like
             ;
             but
             do
             also
             Support
             the
             Tibiae
             in
             Standing
             ,
             least
             the
             Weight
             of
             the
             Body
             should
             make
             them
             Incline
             Forwards
             at
             their
             Articulations
             with
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Feet
             .
          
           
             G
             G
             ,
             The
             Plantaris
             left
             at
             its
             Origination
             ;
             or
             which
             I
             rather
             believe
             ,
             after
             Dissection
             from
             thence
             ,
             and
             Rais'd
             ,
             is
             there
             again
             Fastn'd
             ;
             its
             Proper
             Situation
             being
             between
             the
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Externus
            
             and
             Internus
             ;
             the
             Latter
             of
             which
             Muscles
             could
             not
             without
             Difficulty
             be
             taken
             from
             its
             Origination
             ,
             as
             is
             Represented
             in
             this
             Table
             ,
             and
             the
             Plantaris
             left
             :
             This
             Muscle
             is
             so
             call'd
             because
             its
             Tendon
             is
             Expanded
             in
             the
             
               Planta
               Pedis
            
             ,
             like
             that
             of
             the
             Palmaris
             in
             the
             Palm
             of
             the
             Hand
             :
             It
             Arises
             Fleshy
             from
             the
             Superior
             and
             Back-part
             of
             the
             External
             Head
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ,
             immediately
             under
             the
             Outmost
             Beginning
             of
             the
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Externus
            
             ;
             whence
             Descending
             Obliquely
             between
             the
             Two
             Gasterocnemii
             ,
             Composes
             a
             Thin
             ,
             Long
             ,
             Flat
             Tendon
             ,
             which
             passes
             Out
             from
             between
             the
             Fleshy
             Bellies
             of
             the
             last
             nam'd
             Muscles
             ,
             and
             Descends
             Internally
             Laterally
             by
             their
             Great
             Tendons
             (
             as
             is
             Exprest
             in
             the
             preceding
             Table
             P
             ,
             )
             and
             Marches
             over
             the
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             ,
             Expanding
             it self
             on
             the
             Sole
             of
             the
             Foot
             ;
             where
             it
             almost
             Inseparably
             Adheres
             to
             the
             Fleshy
             Body
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Flexor
               Digitorum
               Perforatus
            
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             on
             both
             Sides
             the
             First
             Internodes
             of
             each
             Lesser
             Toe
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             to
             that
             of
             the
             Great
             Toe
             .
          
           
             The
             Office
             of
             this
             Muscle
             is
             very
             Obscure
             ;
             its
             Tendinous
             Expansion
             on
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Foot
             ,
             is
             chiefly
             Serviceable
             in
             Defending
             the
             Subjacent
             Muscles
             ,
             Tendons
             ,
             Nerves
             ,
             and
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             from
             being
             Comprest
             in
             Standing
             ,
             Walking
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             N.
             B.
             
               In
               some
               Bodies
               the
               Fleshy
               Beginning
               and
               Long
               Tendon
               of
               this
               Muscle
               is
               wanting
               .
            
          
           
             g
             ,
             The
             Tendinous
             Expansion
             of
             the
             Plantaris
             separated
             from
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Foot.
             
          
           
             H
             ,
             A
             Large
             Nerve
             in
             its
             way
             to
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Foot
             and
             Toes
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Beginning
             of
             the
             
               Flexor
               Pollicis
               in
               Situ
            
             .
          
           
             K
             K
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Peroneus
               Secundus
            
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             Beginning
             of
             the
             
               Perforans
               in
               Situ
            
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             
               Abductor
               Pollicis
            
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             Skin
             and
             Fat
             taken
             off
             the
             Heel
             and
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Foot.
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             EIGHTY-FIFTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             ALL
             the
             Muscles
             Represented
             in
             the
             Preceding
             Table
             Rais'd
             from
             their
             Originals
             ,
             and
             left
             at
             their
             Insertions
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Popliteus
            
             at
             its
             Insertion
             to
             the
             Internal
             and
             Upper
             Part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             a
             ,
             The
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             Knee
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Great
             Bone
             of
             the
             Leg
             call'd
             Tibia
             ;
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             Lesser
             Bone
             call'd
             Fibula
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             Two
             Beginnings
             of
             the
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Externus
            
             ;
          
           
             E
             ,
             its
             Conjunction
             with
             the
             Internal
             Gasterocnem
             Muscle
             .
          
           
             F
             F
             ,
             The
             
               Musculus
               Plantaris
            
             plac'd
             between
             the
             External
             and
             Internal
             Gastarocnem
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             
               Tibialis
               Posticus
            
             ,
             so
             call'd
             from
             its
             Situation
             on
             the
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ;
             it
             's
             also
             call'd
             Nauticus
             ,
             from
             the
             Use
             which
             Mariners
             make
             of
             it
             in
             Climbing
             up
             their
             Masts
             ;
             it
             's
             plac'd
             under
             the
             
               Flexor
               Pollicis
               Longus
            
             and
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Persorans
               Digitorum
               Pedis
            
             ;
             in
             some
             Subjects
             it
             seems
             to
             have
             Two
             Fleshy
             Bellies
             :
             This
             Muscle
             remains
             undivided
             between
             the
             Bones
             after
             the
             Circular
             Incision
             for
             Amputations
             of
             the
             Leg
             below
             the
             Knee
             :
             It
             Springs
             from
             a
             partly
             Tendinous
             and
             Fleshy
             Origination
             at
             the
             Superior
             and
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ,
             as
             also
             from
             the
             Ligament
             between
             the
             Tibia
             and
             Fibula
             ;
             whence
             Descending
             ,
             becomes
             Tendinous
             as
             it
             runs
             in
             a
             Sinus
             on
             the
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Lower
             Appendage
             of
             the
             Tibia
             call'd
             
               Malleolus
               Internus
            
             ,
             under
             an
             Inclosing
             Ligament
             ,
             and
             is
             Inserted
             to
             the
             
               Os
               Naviculare
            
             :
             This
             Draws
             the
             Foot
             Upwards
             and
             Inwards
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             Perforans
             or
             
               Flexor
               Tertii
               Internodii
               Digitorum
               Pedis
            
             ;
             It
             hath
             an
             Acute
             Fleshy
             Origination
             from
             the
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             immediately
             under
             the
             Subpopliteus
             ,
             having
             a
             Double
             Order
             of
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             United
             to
             a
             Middle
             Tendon
             like
             the
             
               Flexor
               Pollicis
               Longus
            
             ,
             but
             ceases
             to
             be
             Fleshy
             as
             it
             Marches
             behind
             the
             
               Malleolus
               Internus
            
             ,
             Running
             in
             a
             Channel
             over
             the
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             ,
             and
             under
             its
             Inclosing
             Ligaments
             ;
             in
             Half
             its
             Progress
             through
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Foot
             ,
             its
             Tendon
             is
             Divided
             into
             Four
             ,
             which
             March
             through
             the
             Fissures
             of
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Perforatus
             I
             ,
             and
             are
             Inserted
             to
             the
             Third
             Bones
             of
             the
             Lesser
             Toes
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             
               Perforatus
               in
               Situ
            
             ,
             Describ'd
             Tab.
             83.
             
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Flexor
               Pollicis
               Pedis
               Longus
            
             is
             an
             Antagonist
             to
             the
             
               Extensor
               Longus
            
             ;
             It
             Arises
             opposite
             to
             it
             from
             the
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Fibula
             ,
             with
             a
             Double
             Order
             of
             Fleshy
             .
             Fibres
             passing
             to
             a
             Middle
             Tendon
             ;
             it
             ceases
             to
             be
             Fleshy
             as
             it
             passes
             over
             the
             Juncture
             of
             the
             Talus
             ,
             running
             through
             a
             Channel
             on
             the
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             ,
             its
             Tendon
             still
             Marches
             under
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Flexor
               Digitorum
               Longus
               Perforans
            
             ,
             to
             which
             it
             most
             commonly
             joins
             ,
             and
             passes
             in
             a
             Depressure
             made
             in
             the
             
               Flexor
               Pollicis
               Brevis
            
             (
             Elgantly
             Exprest
             in
             this
             Figure
             )
             to
             its
             Insertion
             at
             the
             last
             Bone
             of
             the
             Great
             Toe
             :
             Its
             Name
             Declares
             its
             Office.
             There
             are
             many
             remarkable
             Parts
             Exprest
             in
             this
             Figure
             ,
             which
             have
             been
             already
             Explain'd
             in
             the
             preceding
             Tables
             ,
             as
             the
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             made
             bare
             ,
             the
             
               Malleolus
               Internus
            
             ,
             the
             
               Musculus
               Abductor
               Minimi
               Digiti
            
             ,
             &c.
             
             Wherefore
             we
             shall
             not
             Insert
             particular
             Characters
             of
             them
             here
             ,
             as
             we
             have
             done
             in
             the
             foregoing
             Tables
             .
          
           
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             EIGHTY-SIXTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               EXHIBITS
               all
               the
               Muscles
               which
               Appear
               in
               the
               Bottom
               of
               the
               Foot
               ,
               after
               the
               Expansion
               of
               the
               Plantaris
               is
               remov'd
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Lumbricalis
              
               ,
               by
               some
               call'd
               
                 Carnea
                 Massa
                 in
                 Planta
                 Pedis
              
               ;
               It
               Springs
               Fleshy
               from
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Calcis
              
               ,
               and
               Growing
               Tendinous
               ,
               joins
               with
               the
               Tendons
               of
               the
               Perforatus
               ;
               where
               Growing
               Fleshy
               again
               ,
               Divides
               its
               self
               ,
               and
               Composes
               the
               Four
               
                 Musculi
                 Lumbricales
              
               F
               F
               E
               ,
               (
               properly
               so
               call'd
               from
               their
               Figure
               )
               ;
               all
               which
               become
               Tendinous
               at
               their
               Insertions
               to
               the
               Internal
               Parts
               of
               each
               Lesser
               Toe
               ,
               Laterally
               next
               the
               Great
               Toe
               :
               It
               is
               also
               call'd
               
                 Flexor
                 Primi
                 Internodii
                 Digitorum
                 Pedis
              
               ,
               from
               its
               Use.
               
            
             
               a
               a
               a
               ,
               The
               Tendons
               of
               the
               Perforans
               Running
               thro'
               the
               Fissures
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Perforatus
              
               ;
               which
               is
               here
               Dissected
               from
               its
               Original
               ,
               and
               left
               at
               its
               Insertions
               to
               the
               Lesser
               Toes
               ,
               that
               of
               the
               Little
               Toe
               being
               wanting
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Flexor
                 Pollicis
                 Longus
              
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Abductor
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
                 Pedis
              
               cut
               from
               its
               First
               Original
               at
               the
               
                 Os
                 Calcis
              
               ,
               and
               left
               at
               its
               Second
               ,
               at
               the
               
                 Metatarsi
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
              
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Abductor
                 Pollicis
              
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               
                 Flexor
                 Pollicis
                 Pedis
                 Brevis
              
               in
               its
               Proper
               Situation
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Transversalis
                 Pedis
              
               in
               like
               Manner
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Inter-Ossei
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Peroneus
                 Longus
              
               ,
               in
               its
               Way
               to
               its
               Insertion
               in
               the
               Bottom
               of
               the
               Foot.
               
            
             
               N
               ,
               The
               Heel-bone
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               Between
               C
               C
               ,
               and
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Flexor
                 Pollicis
                 Brevis
              
               :
               This
               ,
               as
               Appears
               in
               the
               preceding
               Table
               ,
               seems
               to
               be
               Divided
               into
               Two
               Parts
               ,
               by
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               Long
               Muscle
               Bending
               the
               Great
               Toe
               passing
               over
               it
               :
               It
               Ariseth
               from
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cunesorme
                 Medium
              
               ,
               and
               Marching
               over
               the
               Termination
               of
               the
               
                 Peroneus
                 Longus
              
               ,
               is
               Implanted
               to
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Sesamoidea
              
               of
               the
               Great
               Toe
               ,
               which
               Bones
               are
               (
               like
               the
               Patella
               )
               afterwards
               Tied
               to
               the
               Second
               Internode
               of
               that
               Toe
               :
               Its
               Name
               declares
               its
               Office.
               
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Abductor
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
              
               cut
               from
               its
               Origin
               and
               Pinn'd
               up
               .
            
             
               AAAA
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Inter-Ossei
                 in
                 Situ
              
               ,
               somewhat
               Rais'd
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               C
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Abductor
                 Pollicis
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Flexor
                 Brevis
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Adductor
                 Pollicis
              
               :
               This
               Arises
               partly
               Tendinous
               and
               partly
               Fleshy
               from
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneforme
                 Tertium
              
               ,
               after
               Composing
               a
               Fleshy
               Belly
               ,
               is
               Lessen'd
               at
               its
               Insertion
               to
               the
               Part
               of
               the
               Outermost
               
                 Os
                 Sesamoides
              
               of
               the
               Great
               Toe
               :
               Its
               Denomination
               Expresses
               its
               Use.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Transversalis
                 Pedis
              
               ,
               so
               call'd
               from
               its
               Situation
               :
               It
               Ariseth
               Tendinous
               from
               the
               External
               
                 Os
                 Sesamoides
              
               of
               the
               Great
               Toe
               ,
               and
               becoming
               a
               Fleshy
               Belly
               in
               its
               Progress
               over
               the
               First
               Internodes
               of
               the
               Two
               next
               Toes
               ,
               it
               is
               Lessen'd
               at
               its
               Insertion
               to
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Metatarsi
              
               of
               the
               Little
               Toe
               :
               Its
               Office
               is
               to
               bring
               the
               Lesser
               Toe
               towards
               the
               Greater
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Peroneus
                 Longus
              
               at
               its
               Termination
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Calcis
              
               .
            
             
               N.
               B.
               
                 Parts
                 of
                 the
                 Tendons
                 of
                 the
              
               Perforatus
               and
               Perforans
               ,
               
                 are
                 Exprest
                 at
                 their
                 Terminations
                 on
                 the
                 Bones
                 of
                 the
                 Toes
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Eight
               
                 Musculi
                 Inter-Ossei
              
               of
               the
               Toes
               ,
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               and
               Others
               ;
               the
               First
               of
               which
               lying
               on
               the
               Little
               Toe
               ,
               we
               choose
               to
               call
               from
               its
               Office
               ,
               
                 Flexor
                 Primi
                 Internodii
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
              
               ,
               it
               not
               lying
               between
               the
               Metatarsal
               Bones
               like
               the
               rest
               :
               Its
               Rise
               being
               from
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Metatarsi
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
              
               ,
               it
               passes
               Directly
               to
               its
               Insertion
               in
               the
               First
               Bone
               of
               the
               Lesser
               Toe
               .
               The
               Inter-Ossei
               are
               in
               Number
               Seven
               ,
               they
               derive
               their
               Names
               from
               their
               Situation
               ,
               and
               may
               each
               deserve
               a
               Proper
               Appellation
               from
               their
               Use
               :
               The
               First
               next
               to
               the
               Muscle
               last
               Describ'd
               ,
               may
               be
               call'd
               
                 Adductor
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
              
               ;
               the
               Second
               is
               the
               Largest
               ,
               and
               draws
               the
               next
               Toe
               towards
               the
               Lesser
               ,
               and
               may
               be
               call'd
               
                 Abductor
                 Auricularis
              
               ;
               the
               Third
               Antagonizes
               the
               Former
               ,
               and
               is
               an
               Adductor
               of
               that
               Toe
               ;
               the
               Fourth
               is
               an
               
                 Abductor
                 Medii
                 Digiti
              
               ;
               the
               Fifth
               is
               an
               Adductor
               of
               the
               same
               ;
               the
               Sixth
               is
               an
               Adductor
               ;
               and
               the
               Seventh
               an
               
                 Abductor
                 Indicis
                 Pedis
              
               :
               Their
               Origination
               ,
               Progress
               ,
               and
               Insertion
               ,
               may
               be
               seen
               Exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               C
               C
               ,
               Divers
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Great
               Toe
               which
               are
               confusedly
               Dispos'd
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Abductor
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Peroneus
                 Longus
              
               ,
               at
               its
               Implantation
               to
               the
               
                 Os
                 Metatarsi
              
               of
               the
               Great
               Toe
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             EIGHTY-SEVENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             HAVING
             Examin'd
             the
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Limbs
             and
             most
             of
             those
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             Trunk
             and
             other
             Parts
             of
             the
             Body
             ,
             and
             taken
             Notice
             of
             many
             of
             the
             most
             Remarkable
             Ligaments
             in
             divers
             Articulations
             of
             the
             Bones
             :
             We
             come
             next
             to
             View
             the
             Whole
             Compages
             of
             the
             Bones
             when
             Dried
             ,
             call'd
             the
             Skeleton
             ;
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             which
             is
             Represented
             in
             this
             Table
             .
             If
             you
             Examine
             the
             Proper
             Situation
             of
             each
             Bone
             ,
             you
             will
             find
             none
             of
             them
             plac'd
             in
             a
             Perpendicular
             Bearing
             to
             each
             other
             :
             Above
             Two
             Thirds
             of
             the
             Whole
             Head
             ,
             Projects
             from
             its
             Articulation
             with
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             :
             The
             Whole
             Ribs
             and
             Sternum
             which
             Compose
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ,
             together
             with
             all
             its
             Viscera
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Viscera
             of
             the
             Lower
             Belly
             ,
             Project
             from
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Back
             and
             Loins
             :
             The
             Claviculae
             whose
             Positions
             are
             Horizontal
             ,
             Support
             the
             Arms
             ,
             by
             their
             Connections
             with
             the
             Scapulae
             :
             The
             Articulations
             of
             the
             Thigh-bones
             are
             not
             Perpendicular
             to
             the
             Grand
             Fulciment
             of
             the
             Head
             and
             Trunk
             ;
             (
             i.e.
             the
             Whole
             Vertebrae
             ,
             )
             but
             are
             plac'd
             before
             it
             .
             The
             Thigh-bones
             Stand
             Obliquely
             Inwards
             ,
             and
             so
             do
             the
             Tibiae
             ,
             tho'
             not
             in
             so
             great
             a
             Manner
             .
             We
             Stand
             either
             on
             the
             Extremity
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Calcis
            
             ,
             and
             Ball
             of
             the
             Great
             Toe
             together
             ;
             or
             else
             on
             the
             Ball
             of
             the
             Great
             Toe
             only
             ,
             as
             on
             Tip-Toe
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             Forehead-bone
             Divided
             into
             Two
             Parts
             ,
             by
             means
             of
             a
             Continuation
             of
             the
             Longitudinal
             Suture
             ,
             which
             may
             be
             seen
             in
             divers
             Subjects
             as
             here
             Exprest
             ;
             nor
             do's
             such
             an
             Appearance
             Determine
             the
             Sex
             as
             some
             pretend
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Bregma
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             Temple-bone
             call'd
             Squamosum
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             Yoke-bone
             or
             
               Os
               Iugale
            
             Compos'd
             of
             Two
             Process's
             ;
             the
             one
             deriv'd
             Backwards
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Squamosum
            
             ;
             the
             other
             Forwards
             from
             the
             First
             Bone
             of
             the
             Upper
             Jaw
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             Fourth
             Bone
             of
             the
             Upper
             Jaw
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Lower
             Jaw-bone
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             Teeth
             call'd
             Incisores
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             First
             Rib
             near
             its
             Articulation
             with
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             .
          
           
             I
             ,
             The
             Clavicula
             on
             the
             Right
             Side
             .
          
           
             K
             ,
             The
             
               Processus
               Coracoides
               Scapulae
            
             on
             the
             Left
             Side
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             Sternum
             or
             Brest-bone
             .
          
           
             M
             M
             ,
             &c.
             The
             Seven
             True
             Ribs
             .
          
           
             N
             N
             ,
             &c.
             The
             Five
             Bastard
             Ribs
             ,
             call'd
             Nothae
             or
             Spuriae
             .
          
           
             O
             O
             ,
             &c.
             Divers
             of
             the
             Twelve
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Back
             .
          
           
             P
             P
             ,
             &c.
             Four
             of
             the
             Five
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Loins
             ;
             the
             Uppermost
             being
             hid
             by
             the
             Cartilages
             of
             the
             Bastard
             Ribs
             .
          
           
             Q
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             Its
             Conjunction
             with
             the
             
               Os
               Pubis
            
             in
             the
             Acetabulum
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Pubis
            
             .
          
           
             T
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             .
          
           
             V
             ,
             The
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             
               Ossa
               Pubis
            
             ,
             behind
             which
             ,
             is
             the
             
               Os
               Coccygis
            
             ,
             not
             to
             be
             seen
             in
             this
             Position
             .
          
           
             W
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             or
             Shoulder-bone
             .
          
           
             X
             ,
             The
             Ulna
             ,
             Exprest
             in
             its
             Whole
             Length
             in
             the
             Left
             Arm.
             
          
           
             Y
             ,
             The
             Radius
             ;
             between
             which
             and
             Z
             ,
             are
             contain'd
             the
             Eight
             Bones
             of
             the
             Carpus
             .
          
           
             Z
             ,
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             particularly
             those
             of
             the
             Metacarpus
             .
          
           
             1
             ,
             The
             Thigh-bone
             .
          
           
             2
             ,
             The
             Patella
             or
             Knee-pan
             .
          
           
             3
             ,
             The
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             4
             ,
             The
             Fibula
             .
          
           
             5
             ,
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Foot.
             
          
           
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             EIGHTY-EIGHTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             IS
             the
             Back
             and
             Side
             of
             a
             Humane
             Skeléton
             .
          
           
             What
             has
             been
             said
             in
             the
             preceding
             Page
             relating
             to
             the
             Position
             of
             the
             Bones
             ,
             with
             respect
             to
             their
             Bearing
             on
             each
             other
             ,
             seems
             better
             Explain'd
             in
             the
             Figure
             of
             this
             Table
             :
             Whereby
             it
             Appears
             ,
             if
             the
             Muscles
             which
             draw
             the
             Head
             Up
             ,
             or
             Backwards
             ,
             as
             well
             as
             those
             plac'd
             on
             the
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Whole
             Spine
             ,
             were
             not
             very
             Large
             as
             well
             as
             Numerous
             ,
             the
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Body
             as
             well
             as
             the
             Head
             ,
             would
             be
             continually
             subject
             to
             fall
             Forwards
             .
             Nor
             could
             we
             Stand
             ,
             much
             less
             Translate
             the
             Body
             from
             one
             Place
             to
             another
             ,
             if
             the
             Extending
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Thigh-bones
             ,
             those
             of
             the
             Tibiae
             and
             Feet
             ,
             were
             not
             very
             Strong
             ,
             as
             is
             elsewhere
             taken
             Notice
             of
             in
             the
             Description
             of
             those
             Muscles
             .
             Hence
             we
             may
             easily
             Conceive
             ,
             why
             we
             can
             with
             less
             Difficulty
             continue
             a
             Progressive
             Motion
             for
             a
             longer
             Time
             ,
             than
             in
             a
             Standing
             Posture
             ;
             the
             Former
             being
             an
             Alternate
             Acting
             of
             most
             of
             the
             Muscles
             ;
             the
             Latter
             a
             Continued
             or
             Tonic
             Action
             of
             some
             few
             Muscles
             only
             .
             Hence
             also
             we
             may
             be
             Inform'd
             ,
             why
             the
             greatest
             Part
             of
             the
             Gravity
             of
             the
             Whole
             Body
             is
             sustain'd
             by
             one
             Leg
             only
             in
             Standing
             ,
             rather
             than
             with
             both
             at
             once
             :
             And
             divers
             other
             Phaenomena
             of
             which
             my
             Time
             at
             present
             will
             not
             give
             leave
             so
             much
             as
             to
             make
             mention
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             Forehead-bone
             .
          
           
             B
             ,
             The
             Bregma
             .
          
           
             C
             ,
             The
             Temple-bone
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             Yoke-bone
             .
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             Bone
             of
             the
             Occiput
             ;
             near
             E
             is
             the
             Mammiform
             Process
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Upper-Jaw
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             Lower
             Jaw-bone
             .
          
           
             H
             ,
             The
             Fourth
             Bone
             of
             the
             Upper-Jaw
             which
             Constitutes
             the
             greatest
             Part
             of
             the
             Roof
             of
             the
             Mouth
             .
          
           
             I
             I
             I
             I
             I
             ,
             Five
             of
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ;
             the
             Uppermost
             Arising
             from
             the
             Second
             Vertebra
             ,
             being
             Short
             and
             Double
             ,
             do's
             not
             Appear
             in
             this
             Posture
             .
          
           
             I
             I
             Inferior
             ,
             The
             Spines
             of
             the
             Two
             First
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Back
             or
             Thorax
             .
          
           
             K
             K
             ,
             &c.
             The
             rest
             of
             the
             Spines
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
          
           
             L
             L
             ,
             Those
             of
             the
             Loins
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             First
             Rib.
             
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             Scapula
             or
             Shoulder-blade
             .
          
           
             n
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Clavicula
             Articulated
             to
             the
             Spine
             of
             the
             Scapula
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             Sternum
             or
             
               Os
               Pectoris
            
             .
          
           
             P
             P
             ,
             &c.
             The
             True
             Ribs
             .
          
           
             Q
             Q
             ,
             Some
             of
             the
             Inferior
             or
             Bastard
             Ribs
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Ilium
            
             ,
          
           
             S
             ,
             The
             Sacrum
             ,
          
           
             T
             ,
             The
             Ischium
             ,
          
           
             V
             ,
             The
             Coccygis
             .
          
           
             W
             ,
             The
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Pubis
            
             .
          
           
             X
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             or
             Shoulder-bone
             .
          
           
             Y
             ,
             The
             Ulna
             .
          
           
             Z
             ,
             The
             Radius
             .
          
           
             1
             ,
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Hand
             .
          
           
             2
             ,
             The
             Thigh-bone
             .
          
           
             3
             ,
             The
             Patella
             .
          
           
             4
             ,
             The
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             5
             ,
             The
             Fibula
             .
          
           
             6
             ,
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Foot.
             
          
           
             A
             Particular
             Description
             of
             each
             of
             these
             Bones
             ,
             may
             be
             seen
             in
             the
             Explications
             of
             the
             following
             Tables
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             EIGHTY-NINTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THIS
             and
             the
             Three
             following
             Tables
             Represent
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Skull
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             the
             Upper
             and
             Under
             Jaws
             .
          
           
             The
             Bones
             which
             Compose
             the
             Skull
             are
             the
             
               Ossa
               Frontis
               ,
               Sincipitis
               ,
               Occipilis
               ,
               Temporum
               ,
               Sphenoides
            
             and
             Cribriforme
             :
             Of
             these
             the
             Four
             First
             are
             esteem'd
             Proper
             to
             the
             Skull
             ;
             the
             Two
             Latter
             are
             said
             to
             be
             Common
             to
             the
             Skull
             and
             Upper
             Jaw
             .
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Upper
             and
             Under
             Jaws
             will
             be
             more
             particularly
             Treated
             of
             in
             Tab.
             92.
             
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               The
               Convex
               Fore-parts
               of
               the
               Forehead
               bone
               ,
               with
               those
               of
               the
               Upper-Jaw
               and
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               ,
               as
               they
               Appear
               Separated
               from
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Forehead-bone
               whose
               Superior
               Margin
               ,
               Sutur'd
               with
               the
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Sincipitis
              
               ,
               Composes
               near
               Two
               Thirds
               of
               a
               Circle
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               B
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Superior
               Lamellae
               or
               Table
               which
               sticks
               out
               with
               Sharp
               Edges
               and
               Points
               ,
               which
               are
               receiv'd
               in
               the
               Interstitia
               of
               the
               like
               Fram'd
               by
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Sincipitis
              
               ,
               which
               Conjunction
               is
               call'd
               Sutura
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Frontal-bone
               ,
               Composing
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Orbit
               of
               the
               Eye
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               A
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Frontis
              
               near
               the
               Great
               Cantbus
               of
               the
               Eye
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               Another
               Process
               of
               the
               same
               Bone
               towards
               the
               Lesser
               Canthus
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               join'd
               to
               the
               Frontal-bone
               ,
               by
               Bidloo
               call'd
               Two
               Eminencies
               of
               the
               last
               nam'd
               Bone
               ,
               on
               both
               Sides
               towards
               the
               Temples
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               In
               this
               as
               well
               as
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               may
               be
               seen
               divers
               Foraminulae
               for
               the
               coming
               in
               and
               going
               out
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               whether
               belonging
               to
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               and
               Common
               Integuments
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               or
               Duploi
               of
               the
               Skull
               it self
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Frontis
              
               ,
               where
               a
               Cavity
               is
               Fram'd
               containing
               a
               Pituitous
               Membrane
               ,
               which
               is
               continuous
               with
               that
               of
               the
               
                 Foramina
                 Narium
              
               ,
               and
               Helps
               to
               Separate
               Part
               of
               the
               Mucus
               that
               is
               Excreted
               at
               the
               Nose
               .
               This
               Cavity
               is
               often
               Divided
               with
               a
               
                 Septum
                 Osseum
              
               ;
               as
               Appears
               in
               Tab.
               91.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
               In
               some
               Humane
               Skulls
               this
               Cavity
               scarce
               Appears
               ,
               in
               others
               it
               is
               very
               Large
               ,
               especially
               in
               those
               who
               have
               Projecting
               Eye-brows
               .
               Those
               that
               take
               much
               Snuff
               may
               have
               Part
               of
               it
               ,
               get
               up
               into
               this
               Cavity
               ,
               and
               there
               Lodge
               ,
               and
               prove
               Pernicious
               .
               In
               Quadrupedes
               these
               Cavities
               are
               Large
               and
               Divided
               by
               divers
               Bony
               Partitions
               ,
               and
               Communicate
               with
               each
               other
               by
               Various
               Apertures
               :
               In
               Sheep
               I
               have
               frequently
               found
               in
               those
               Cavities
               divers
               Large
               Maggots
               ,
               not
               unlike
               the
               Great
               
                 Eruca
                 Terrestris
              
               .
               In
               Cows
               ,
               Bulls
               ,
               &c.
               these
               Cavities
               are
               very
               Large
               ;
               in
               these
               Animals
               the
               Pituitary
               Membrane
               which
               Invests
               these
               Cavities
               ,
               frequently
               becomes
               Inflam'd
               and
               Thickned
               ;
               whereby
               the
               Pituita
               is
               Pent
               up
               in
               these
               Cavities
               ,
               and
               causes
               a
               Disease
               in
               those
               Animals
               ,
               call'd
               
                 the
                 Staggers
              
               ;
               for
               which
               the
               Country
               People
               (
               particularly
               in
               Sussex
               )
               perform
               this
               following
               Operation
               ,
               and
               the
               Animal
               is
               presently
               reliev'd
               .
            
             
               The
               Head
               of
               the
               Beast
               being
               held
               in
               a
               convenient
               Posture
               ,
               and
               the
               Operator
               Furnish'd
               with
               a
               Mallet
               and
               Large
               Broad
               Chisel
               :
               With
               One
               or
               Two
               Stroaks
               he
               drives
               his
               Chisel
               into
               the
               
                 Os
                 Frontis
              
               ,
               which
               Composes
               this
               Cavity
               ;
               this
               done
               ,
               he
               raises
               up
               the
               Bone
               with
               its
               Superjacent
               Parts
               ,
               by
               means
               of
               the
               Chisel
               ;
               then
               with
               his
               Fingers
               he
               Separates
               the
               Pituitary
               Membrane
               from
               the
               Bone
               ,
               and
               draws
               it
               out
               :
               This
               done
               ,
               he
               presently
               Depresses
               the
               Rais'd
               up
               Parts
               with
               his
               Hand
               ;
               and
               the
               Divided
               Bone
               afterwards
               Unites
               ,
               and
               the
               Animal
               is
               seldom
               Troubled
               with
               the
               like
               Disease
               afterwards
               .
            
             
               This
               Membrane
               fill'd
               with
               Pituita
               (
               they
               tell
               you
               )
               is
               a
               Water-bag
               lying
               on
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               The
               rest
               of
               the
               Bones
               Exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               are
               Explain'd
               Tab.
               92.
               
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               Concave
               Parts
               of
               the
               same
               Bone
               Represented
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Frontis
              
               which
               receives
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Saw-like
               Appearance
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Frontis
              
               after
               Disjunction
               from
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Sinciput
               ,
               at
               the
               Coronal
               Suture
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Superior
               and
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               ,
               join'd
               to
               the
               Frontal-bone
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Internal
               and
               Anterior
               Process's
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               ,
               which
               Help
               to
               Compose
               the
               
                 Sella
                 Equina
              
               ,
               or
               Turcica
               ;
               in
               this
               Sell
               the
               Pituitary
               Gland
               is
               Lodg'd
               ;
               the
               Contorted
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Carotid
               Arteries
               pass
               by
               it
               on
               each
               Side
               in
               their
               Way
               to
               the
               Brain
               ,
               where
               they
               send
               out
               divers
               Small
               Branches
               which
               Help
               to
               Compose
               the
               
                 Rete
                 Mirabile
              
               :
               This
               Process
               gives
               way
               to
               the
               Optick
               Nerves
               in
               their
               Progress
               to
               the
               Eyes
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               Inferior
               ,
               Two
               Internal
               Long
               Processes
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               join'd
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Frontis
              
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               Superior
               ,
               The
               Impressions
               which
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               make
               in
               the
               Frontal-bone
               in
               their
               Distribution
               on
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               An
               Internal
               Process
               continued
               from
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cribrosum
              
               or
               Ethmoides
               ,
               Distinguishing
               the
               Right
               Side
               of
               the
               Frontal-bone
               from
               the
               Left.
               
            
             
               H
               ,
               That
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cribrosum
              
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Crista
                 Galli
              
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               or
               Sphenoides
               next
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               which
               Composes
               the
               Roof
               of
               the
               Mouth
               ,
               by
               some
               call'd
               
                 Os
                 Palati
              
               .
            
             
               L
               L
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Pterygoides
              
               or
               Aliformis
               .
            
             
               M
               M
               ,
               The
               Internal
               and
               Back-parts
               of
               the
               Two
               First
               Bones
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Upper
               Teeth
               are
               Fasten'd
               .
            
             
               O
               O
               ,
               Two
               of
               the
               
                 Dentes
                 Molares
              
               left
               in
               both
               Sides
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               P
               ,
               The
               Septum
               of
               the
               
                 Foramina
                 Narium
              
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               that
               was
               join'd
               to
               the
               Occipital
               Bone
               by
               Syncondrosis
               ,
               which
               Conjunction
               becomes
               intirely
               Bony
               in
               Aged
               Bodies
               .
            
             
               R
               ,
               The
               Two
               Hinder
               Processes
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               ,
               which
               Compose
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               
                 Sella
                 Turcica
              
               ,
               call'd
               Ephippium
               .
            
             
               N.
               B.
               Between
               C
               D
               ,
               and
               I
               ,
               
                 on
                 either
                 Side
                 ,
                 is
                 Exprest
                 the
                 Second
                 Perforation
                 of
                 the
              
               Os
               Sphenoides
               
                 or
                 Large
              
               Rima
               ,
               
                 thro'
                 which
                 pass
                 the
                 Third
                 ,
                 Fourth
                 ,
                 Sixth
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 Branch
                 of
                 the
                 Fifth
                 Pair
                 of
                 Nerves
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 divers
                 Blood-Vessels
                 ,
                 particularly
                 a
                 Large
                 Branch
                 of
                 the
                 Carotid
                 Artery
                 and
                 Vein
                 ;
                 which
                 Latter
                 is
                 Figur'd
              
               Tab.
               9.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
               F.
               
                 The
                 other
              
               Foramen
               ,
               
                 here
                 Exprest
                 immediately
                 under
                 the
                 last
                 mention'd
                 ,
                 or
                 between
                 it
                 and
                 the
              
               Processus
               Pterygoides
               (
               L
               )
               ,
               
                 is
                 reckon'd
                 the
                 Third
              
               Foramen
               
                 of
                 the
              
               Os
               Cuneiforme
               ,
               
                 by
                 which
                 a
                 Branch
                 of
                 the
                 Fifth
                 Pair
                 of
                 Nerves
                 passes
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Skull
                 :
                 The
                 rest
                 of
                 the
              
               Foramina
               
                 of
                 the
              
               Os
               Cuneiforme
               
                 are
                 the
                 Fourth
                 ,
                 Fifth
                 ,
                 Sixth
                 ,
                 and
                 Seventh
                 ;
                 the
                 First
                 of
                 these
                 namely
                 the
                 F●urth
                 is
                 Exprest
                 in
                 the
                 First
                 Figure
                 of
                 this
                 Table
                 ,
                 and
                 again
                 in
              
               Tab.
               92.
               
               Fig.
               1.
               
               I
               ,
               
                 within
                 the
                 Orbit
                 of
                 the
                 Eye
                 ,
                 and
                 in
              
               Fig.
               2.
               
                 of
                 the
                 same
                 Table
              
               (
               V
               V
               )
               ;
               
                 by
                 this
              
               Foramen
               ,
               
                 or
                 rather
                 Large
              
               Rima
               
                 like
                 the
                 Second
              
               Foramen
               (
               
                 made
                 by
                 the
                 Fourth
                 Bone
                 of
                 the
                 Upper
                 Iaw
                 and
              
               Cuneiforme
               )
               
                 pass
                 the
                 Branches
                 of
                 the
                 Third
                 ,
                 Fifth
                 and
                 some
                 of
                 the
                 Sixth
                 Pan
                 of
                 Nerves
                 ,
                 after
                 passing
                 thro'
                 the
                 Second
              
               Foramen
               ,
               
                 to
                 the
                 Adjacent
                 Muscles
                 and
                 Parts
                 ,
                 together
                 with
                 Large
                 Blood-Vessels
                 of
                 both
                 Kinds
                 ,
                 especially
                 to
                 the
                 Temporal
                 Muscle
                 .
                 The
                 Fifth
              
               Foramen
               
                 of
                 the
              
               Os
               Cuneiforme
               ,
               
                 is
                 Compos'd
                 at
                 its
                 meeting
                 of
                 the
              
               Os
               Petrosum
               and
               Occipitale
               ,
               Exprest
               Tab.
               92.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
               X
               ,
               X
               ;
               
                 which
                 External
                 Aperture
                 there
                 Represented
                 ,
                 is
                 partly
                 fill'd
                 with
                 a
                 Cartilage
                 ,
                 but
                 its
                 Internal
              
               Foramen
               
                 Transmits
                 the
                 Carotid
                 Artery
                 to
                 the
                 Lateral
                 Part
                 of
                 the
              
               Sella
               Equina
               ;
               
                 which
                 Artery
                 First
                 enters
                 the
              
               Cranium
               
                 by
                 the
              
               Os
               Petrosum
               ,
               
                 as
                 Appears
                 in
                 the
                 last
                 mention'd
                 Figure
              
               (
               Z
               Z
               )
               ;
               
                 by
                 this
              
               Foramen
               
                 the
                 Intercostal
                 Nerve
                 passes
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Skull
                 .
                 The
                 Sixth
                 Perforation
                 of
                 the
              
               Os
               Sphenoides
               
                 is
                 Describ'd
                 in
                 the
                 last
                 mention'd
                 Table
                 and
                 Figure
              
               (
               Y
               )
               ,
               
                 and
                 is
                 Compleatly
                 fill'd
                 by
                 a
                 Branch
                 of
                 the
                 Fifth
                 Pair
                 of
                 Nerves
                 :
                 The
                 Seventh
              
               Foramen
               
                 of
                 this
                 Bone
                 is
                 Externally
                 Laterally
                 Adjacent
                 to
                 the
                 Sixth
                 ,
                 and
                 is
                 most
                 commonly
                 of
                 an
                 Oval
                 Figure
                 ;
                 by
                 it
                 a
                 small
                 Branch
                 of
                 the
                 Carotid
                 Artery
                 passes
                 to
                 the
              
               Dura
               Mater
               ,
               
                 Accompanied
                 with
                 a
                 Vein
                 Running
                 Paralel
                 with
                 it
                 ;
                 which
                 Frame
                 those
              
               Sulci
               
                 in
                 the
                 Bone
                 ,
                 Exprest
                 in
                 this
                 Figure
              
               (
               F
               F
               Superior
               )
               ,
               
                 and
                 in
                 that
                 of
              
               Tab.
               91.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
               F
               F.
               
            
             
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             NINETIETH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THE
             Six
             First
             Figures
             Represent
             the
             Internal
             and
             External
             Surfaces
             of
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Proper
             Bones
             of
             the
             Skull
             ,
             when
             Separated
             from
             each
             other
             at
             their
             Sutures
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               The
               Bone
               of
               the
               Sinciput
               or
               Bregma
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               Convext
               Part
               of
               the
               Bregma
               ,
               Circumscrib'd
               by
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Coronal
               Suture
               in
               the
               Fore-part
               ,
               joining
               it
               to
               the
               
                 Os
                 Frontis
              
               ;
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Sagittal
               Suture
               in
               the
               Superior
               Part
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Right
               and
               Left
               Bregma
               are
               Distinguish'd
               ;
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Lambdoidal
               Backwards
               ,
               by
               which
               it
               is
               Connected
               to
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               A
               ,
               B
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               Side
               of
               the
               Bregma
               ,
               on
               which
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               ,
               and
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               Rests
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               Surface
               of
               the
               Left
               Sincipital-bone
               next
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               and
               Brain
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Concave
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sincipitis
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               C
               ,
               D
               ,
               The
               Furrows
               which
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               make
               on
               the
               Internal
               Surface
               of
               this
               Bone
               ;
               where
               may
               be
               observ'd
               many
               Foramina
               these
               Vessels
               have
               ,
               for
               their
               Entrance
               into
               the
               Meditullium●
               of
               the
               Bone
               ;
               sometimes
               we
               have
               seen
               these
               Vessels
               Perforate
               the
               Cranium
               Directly
               ,
               in
               more
               than
               in
               one
               or
               two
               Places
               ,
               especially
               towards
               the
               Occipu●
               ,
               where
               Two
               of
               their
               Large
               Foramina
               are
               commonly
               to
               be
               Observ'd
               on
               the
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               Bone
               ;
               but
               here
               also
               th●y
               sometimes
               pass
               Obliquely
               into
               the
               Meditullium
               :
               The
               Number
               and
               Magnitude
               of
               these
               Foramina
               for
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               may
               be
               seen
               to
               Increase
               near
               the
               Impression
               which
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               makes
               in
               the
               Cranium
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Bregma
               that
               was
               Contiguous
               to
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporale
              
               ,
               and
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Occipital
               Bone
               Separated
               at
               its
               Conjunction
               from
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Cranium
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               Convext
               Surface
               of
               the
               Occipital-bone
               ,
               where
               the
               Muscles
               Extending
               the
               Head
               ,
               are
               Implanted
               ,
               and
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Cucullaris
              
               do's
               Arise
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               First
               Great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               Occipital-bone
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               Descends
               out
               of
               the
               Cranium
               into
               the
               Great
               Cavities
               of
               all
               the
               Vertebrae
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Two
               Depress'd
               Protuberancies
               of
               the
               Occipital-bone
               ,
               which
               are
               receiv'd
               into
               the
               Shallow
               Cavities
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Two
               Depressures
               Fram'd
               at
               the
               Origin
               of
               the
               
                 Musculi
                 Recti
                 Mi●ores
              
               of
               the
               Head.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               A
               Third
               Foramen
               Appearing
               in
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ;
               by
               which
               the
               Nerve
               of
               the
               Ninth
               Pair
               on
               that
               Side
               passes
               out
               of
               the
               Cranium
               ;
               that
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               not
               Appearing
               in
               this
               Position
               of
               the
               Bone.
               The
               Second
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               is
               Fram'd
               at
               its
               Conjunction
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               ,
               and
               Helps
               to
               Compose
               the
               Specus
               which
               receives
               the
               Bulbous
               Part
               of
               the
               Lateral
               
                 Si
                 ?
                 us
              
               ,
               at
               the
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Internal
               Jugular
               Vein
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               and
               Concave
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               next
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               on
               Part
               of
               the
               Cerebrum
               and
               Cerebellum
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               B
               ,
               C
               ,
               A
               Rising
               in
               the
               Bone
               Fram'd
               Collateral
               to
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               ,
               where
               it
               meets
               with
               the
               Two
               Lateral
               Sinuss's
               .
            
             
               D
               F
               ,
               Two
               Depressures
               parting
               to
               each
               Side
               from
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Rising
               ;
               in
               which
               the
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               Lateral
               Sinuss's
               are
               Entertain'd
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               That
               Part
               where
               the
               Longitudinal
               and
               Lateral
               Sinuss's
               meet
               ,
               which
               Conjunction
               is
               call'd
               
                 Torcular
                 Herophili
              
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               Divers
               Foramina
               by
               which
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               enter
               the
               Meditullium
               of
               the
               Bone.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporale
              
               or
               Squamosum
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               ,
               when
               free'd
               from
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
                 ,
                 Sincipitis
              
               ,
               and
               Cuneiforme
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Meatus
                 Auditorius
              
               ,
               being
               the
               continued
               Passage
               from
               the
               C●●c●a
               (
               Exprest
               Tab.
               12.
               
               Fig.
               1.
               
               C
               ,
               D
               ,
               E
               ,
               )
               to
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympa●i
              
               :
               In
               this
               Meatus
               (
               by
               some
               call'd
               
                 Alve●re
                 Auris
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Porus
                 Auditorius
              
               ,
               )
               is
               contain'd
               the
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Cerumen
               commonly
               call'd
               the
               Ear-Wax
               ,
               is
               Separated
               from
               the
               Blood
               ;
               which
               Membrane
               is
               frequently
               Ulcerated
               ,
               being
               very
               liable
               to
               Obstructions
               is
               in
               Circulating
               Blood
               and
               Separated
               Matter
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               vast
               Numbers
               of
               Vessels
               that
               are
               Necessary
               in
               the
               Composition
               of
               its
               Glandulous
               Structure
               ;
               here
               also
               Arise
               Excrescencies
               ,
               some
               of
               which
               we
               have
               seen
               very
               much
               like
               those
               of
               the
               
                 Foramina
                 Narium
              
               ,
               commonly
               call'd
               Polypi
               from
               their
               Figure
               :
               Others
               I
               have
               Observ'd
               to
               be
               like
               Mulber●●s
               ,
               and
               the
               Patient
               has
               suffer'd
               great
               Pain
               when
               they
               have
               been
               but
               touch'd
               with
               a
               Probe
               :
               Nevertheless
               I
               have
               frequently
               Consum'd
               them
               with
               Causticks
               ,
               and
               the
               Patient
               has
               recover'd
               his
               Hearing
               .
               These
               Excrescencies
               last
               mention'd
               ,
               commonly
               Arise
               after
               Impostumations
               on
               the
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Ear.
               
            
             
               B
               ,
               A
               Sinus
               cover'd
               with
               a
               Cartilage
               ,
               which
               receives
               the
               Head
               of
               the
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               by
               the
               Mediation
               of
               a
               Cartilaginous
               Body
               ,
               Describ'd
               in
               our
               Appendix
               Fig.
               8.
               
               S
               ,
               T.
               
            
             
               C
               ,
               D
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporale
              
               plac'd
               between
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitale
              
               and
               Cuneiforme
               ,
               call'd
               the
               Third
               Process
               of
               that
               Bone
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Internal
               Organs
               of
               Hearing
               are
               contain'd
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Second
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Squamosum
              
               or
               Temporale
               ,
               which
               joining
               with
               the
               Process
               of
               the
               First
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               Composes
               that
               Bone
               call'd
               Iugale
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               First
               Process
               of
               the
               Temple-bone
               ,
               call'd
               Mastoides
               or
               Mammiforme
               ,
               whose
               Internal
               Part
               is
               Cavernulous
               ,
               and
               Opens
               into
               the
               Tympanum
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               G
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Temple-bone
               which
               is
               Contiguous
               to
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               H
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Temple
               or
               Squamous-bone
               plac'd
               on
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sincipitis
              
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               C
               ,
               The
               other
               Side
               Sutur'd
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               Face
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Squamosum
              
               next
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Process
               of
               the
               Temple-bone
               ,
               and
               may
               be
               call'd
               
                 Processus
                 Petrosus
              
               ,
               as
               well
               from
               its
               Appearance
               as
               Compactness
               ;
               wherefore
               the
               Whole
               Temple-bone
               is
               by
               some
               call'd
               Petrosum
               .
               In
               this
               Process
               are
               contain'd
               all
               the
               Internal
               Organs
               of
               Hearing
               between
               A
               and
               C
               :
               As
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               ,
               the
               Tympanum
               ,
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Obliquus
              
               ,
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Internus
              
               and
               
                 Musculus
                 Stapidis
              
               ;
               the
               
                 Incus
                 ,
                 Maleus
                 ,
                 Stapis
              
               and
               
                 Ossiculum
                 Quartum
              
               ;
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 à
                 Palato
                 ad
                 Aurem
              
               ;
               the
               
                 Foramen
                 Ovale
              
               and
               Rotundum
               ;
               the
               Labyrinth
               and
               its
               Vestibulum
               ;
               Three
               Semicircular
               Ducts
               ,
               and
               the
               Cochlea
               ,
               together
               with
               its
               
                 Lamina
                 Spiralis
              
               ,
               and
               the
               Expansion
               of
               the
               Auditory
               Nerve
               within
               the
               Labyrinth
               and
               Cochlea
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Squamosum
              
               which
               cleav'd
               to
               the
               Bone
               of
               the
               Sinciput
               .
            
             
               d
               ,
               The
               Foramen
               by
               which
               the
               Auditory
               Nerve
               Enters
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ,
               in
               its
               Way
               towards
               the
               Labyrinth
               and
               Cochlea
               .
            
             
               Having
               already
               said
               something
               of
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 Auditorius
              
               and
               the
               Membrane
               which
               Invests
               it
               ;
               the
               Order
               of
               Parts
               would
               require
               our
               next
               Examination
               of
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               ,
               and
               the
               Muscles
               within
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               ,
               &c.
               but
               the
               succeeding
               Figures
               Representing
               the
               Four
               Little
               Bones
               of
               the
               Labyrinth
               ,
               Cochlea
               ,
               and
               their
               Foramina
               only
               ;
               we
               must
               Prosecute
               the
               Order
               set
               before
               us
               ,
               and
               refer
               to
               our
               Appendix
               to
               what
               properly
               belongs
               to
               this
               Place
               .
               (
               Viz.
               )
               The
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Internal
               Ear
               and
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               The
               Labyrinth
               of
               the
               Left
               Ear
               of
               a
               Foetus
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               B
               ,
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Three
               Semicircular
               Ducts
               Clear'd
               of
               the
               Membranes
               and
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ;
               in
               which
               Bone
               they
               are
               entirely
               Inclos'd
               in
               the
               Adult
               ,
               and
               no
               Marks
               of
               their
               Tracts
               Appear
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Foetus
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               in
               which
               the
               Cochlea
               is
               contain'd
               ,
               Part
               of
               which
               is
               here
               Exprest
               ,
               Broken
               up
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               8.
               
            
             
               The
               Labyrinth
               and
               Cochlea
               of
               the
               Left
               Ear.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               B
               ,
               C
               ,
               The
               Three
               Semicircular
               Ducts
               whose
               Cavities
               are
               Invested
               with
               a
               Membrane
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Auditory
               Nerve
               is
               Expanded
               :
               The
               Extremities
               of
               these
               Ducts
               Open
               into
               the
               Vestibulum
               of
               the
               Labyrinth
               ,
               or
               Cavity
               immediately
               within
               the
               
                 Foramen
                 Ovale
              
               ,
               Figur'd
               in
               our
               Appendix
               :
               One
               of
               the
               Spiral
               Ducts
               of
               the
               Cochlea
               also
               Opens
               into
               the
               Vestibulum
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Cochlea
               Open'd
               ,
               which
               consists
               of
               Two
               Spiral
               Ducts
               ,
               or
               One
               Duct
               Divided
               by
               a
               Bony
               Septum
               ;
               which
               from
               its
               Figure
               is
               call'd
               
                 Lamina
                 Spiralis
              
               :
               One
               of
               these
               Ducts
               (
               as
               above
               Noted
               )
               Opens
               into
               the
               Vestibulum
               of
               the
               Labyrinth
               ,
               at
               its
               Basis
               ;
               the
               other
               in
               like
               Manner
               Ends
               its
               Basis
               at
               the
               Membrane
               within
               the
               
                 Foramen
                 Rotundum
              
               .
               The
               Auditory
               Nerve
               is
               Expanded
               in
               like
               Manner
               in
               the
               Cochlea
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Labyrinth
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               9.
               
            
             
               The
               Four
               Little
               Bones
               of
               the
               Ear
               contain'd
               in
               the
               Tympanum
               ,
               taken
               out
               ,
               and
               Represented
               in
               their
               Proper
               Articulations
               with
               each
               other
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Malleolus
               ,
               the
               Deprest
               Head
               of
               which
               ,
               is
               receiv'd
               in
               the
               Shallow
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Incus
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Incus
               ,
               Articulated
               with
               the
               Stapes
               by
               the
               Mediation
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Orbiculare
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Stapes
               .
            
             
               ....
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Orbiculare
              
               or
               Fourth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               .
            
             
               These
               Bones
               we
               shall
               Figure
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               in
               our
               Appendix
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               10.
               
            
             
               The
               Malleolus
               taken
               from
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Little
               Bones
               of
               the
               Ear
               ,
               with
               Parts
               of
               Two
               of
               its
               Muscles
               remaining
               to
               it
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               .
               ,
               The
               Roundish
               Deprest
               Head
               of
               the
               Malleolus
               .
            
             
               B
               ...
               ,
               A
               Ligament
               which
               Connects
               the
               Head
               of
               the
               Malleolus
               to
               the
               Incus
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Neck
               of
               the
               Malleolus
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Two
               Process's
               of
               the
               Malleus
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               External
               and
               Internal
               Muscles
               are
               Inserted
               :
               Besides
               these
               Process's
               ,
               its
               Long
               Production
               call'd
               the
               Manubrium
               or
               Handle
               of
               the
               Malleus
               ,
               is
               Remarkable
               ,
               which
               Adheres
               to
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               
                 Membra●a
                 Tymp●ni
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               11.
               
            
             
               The
               Incus
               in
               whose
               Lower-part
               (
               as
               it
               s
               here
               Figur'd
               )
               is
               a
               Shallow
               Depressure
               which
               receives
               the
               Roundish
               Head
               of
               the
               Malleus
               :
               Its
               Two
               Process's
               are
               here
               well
               Exprest
               ;
               of
               which
               the
               Shortest
               rests
               in
               a
               Sinus
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ,
               within
               the
               Tympanum
               ;
               but
               the
               Longer
               is
               Articulated
               with
               the
               Stapes
               ,
               by
               the
               Mediation
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Orbiculare
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               12.
               
            
             
               The
               Stapes
               so
               call'd
               from
               its
               Figure
               ,
               whose
               Basis
               Rests
               on
               the
               Margin
               of
               the
               
                 Fenestra
                 Ovalis
              
               ,
               as
               is
               here
               Exprest
               ,
               and
               the
               
                 Os
                 Orbiculare
              
               lying
               under
               it
               ;
               which
               Latter
               is
               Delineated
               som●what
               bigger
               than
               the
               Life
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             NINETY-FIRST
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               SHEWS
               the
               External
               Convex
               Surface
               of
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               and
               its
               Proper
               Sutures
               ,
               Elegantly
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               B
               ,
               The
               Forehead-bone
               ,
               by
               some
               call'd
               
                 Os
                 Coronale
                 ,
                 Inverecundum
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Os
                 Puppis
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Sincipitis
              
               or
               Verticis
               ,
               by
               some
               call'd
               Bregma
               ,
               either
               from
               the
               soft
               moist
               Brain
               lying
               under
               it
               ,
               or
               from
               its
               thin
               moist
               Constitution
               in
               Infants
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               in
               the
               Adult
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               by
               some
               call'd
               
                 Basillare
                 ,
                 Os
                 Prorae
                 ,
                 Os
                 Memoriae
              
               and
               
                 Os
                 Pyxidis
              
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Coronal
               Suture
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Sagittal
               Suture
               or
               
                 Sutura
                 Longitudinalis
              
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Sutura
                 Lambdoides
              
               .
            
             
               Tho'
               the
               Sutures
               here
               Exprest
               are
               Regular
               according
               to
               their
               Common
               Appearance
               ,
               yet
               in
               divers
               Subjects
               we
               find
               Nature
               sport
               very
               considerably
               ;
               sometimes
               the
               Longitudinal
               Suture
               is
               Double
               ,
               at
               other
               times
               it
               passes
               Obliquely
               towards
               the
               Coronal
               Suture
               ,
               and
               in
               some
               Subjects
               it
               Frames
               an
               
                 Os
                 Triquetrum
              
               at
               its
               Conjunction
               with
               the
               Coronal
               Suture
               ,
               or
               else
               divers
               small
               Bones
               of
               Various
               Figures
               ;
               the
               like
               may
               be
               sometimes
               Observ'd
               in
               the
               
                 Sutura
                 Lambdoides
              
               ,
               as
               also
               in
               the
               Coronal
               Suture
               ;
               of
               which
               Latter
               ,
               the
               Figure
               here
               gives
               a
               Specimen
               on
               the
               Right
               Side
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               Concave
               Surface
               of
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Skull
               when
               Saw'd
               from
               its
               Basis.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Inside
               of
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Bregmatis
              
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Sutures
               as
               they
               Appear
               withinside
               the
               Skull
               Approaching
               to
               a
               simple
               straight
               Line
               ,
               which
               Conjunction
               of
               Bones
               is
               call'd
               Harmonia
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Frontis
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Channels
               Fram'd
               by
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               :
               These
               Insculptures
               or
               Furrows
               of
               the
               Bone
               ,
               I
               found
               very
               Large
               in
               the
               Skull
               of
               a
               Person
               I
               lately
               Dissected
               ,
               who
               Died
               Apoplectick
               ,
               in
               whom
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               were
               proportionably
               Augmented
               to
               the
               Magnitude
               of
               a
               Goose-Quill
               .
               In
               this
               Subject
               divers
               Large
               Foveae
               Appear'd
               in
               the
               Skull
               ,
               breaking
               out
               as
               it
               were
               from
               the
               Impression
               of
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               ;
               One
               of
               which
               Foveae
               exceeded
               Half
               an
               Inch
               in
               its
               Diameter
               .
               When
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Cranium
               was
               oppos'd
               to
               the
               Light
               ,
               the
               Foveae
               above
               mention'd
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Large
               Furrows
               of
               the
               Vessels
               Appear'd
               Transparent
               ,
               not
               unlike
               the
               Horn
               commonly
               made
               Use
               of
               in
               Lanterns
               ;
               nor
               indeed
               did
               the
               Thickness
               of
               the
               Skull
               in
               those
               Parts
               much
               exceed
               it
               :
               By
               this
               ,
               we
               may
               be
               Inform'd
               with
               what
               Caution
               we
               ought
               to
               Use
               the
               Trepan
               in
               Perforating
               the
               Skull
               ,
               especially
               near
               the
               Longitudinal
               Suture
               ,
               as
               also
               Laterally
               on
               the
               Bregma
               ,
               where
               those
               Vessels
               usually
               take
               their
               Course
               ;
               and
               that
               more
               especially
               when
               the
               Patient
               has
               suffer'd
               under
               Habitual
               Head-Aches
               ,
               which
               was
               Remarkable
               in
               the
               Person
               last
               mention'd
               ,
               even
               from
               his
               Infancy
               ;
               for
               doubtless
               these
               Cavities
               and
               Furrows
               have
               an
               early
               Date
               ,
               from
               an
               Irregular
               Formation
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ;
               whence
               the
               Refluent
               Blood
               is
               Subject
               to
               be
               Retarded
               ,
               and
               the
               Neighbouring
               Parts
               as
               the
               Pericranium
               ,
               &c.
               suffer
               Tension
               and
               Pain
               .
            
             
               B
               Superior
               and
               E
               ,
               The
               Channel
               or
               Impression
               which
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               makes
               in
               the
               Middle
               and
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               according
               to
               the
               Length
               of
               the
               Sagittal
               Suture
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             NINETY-SECOND
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               SHEWS
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               in
               which
               Part
               of
               the
               Proper
               Bones
               of
               the
               Skull
               already
               Describ'd
               ,
               and
               divers
               of
               those
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               and
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               are
               well
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               B
               ,
               C
               ,
               The
               First
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               constituting
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Orbit
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               and
               Part
               of
               its
               Lesser
               Canthus
               ,
               together
               with
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               and
               Cheek
               :
               B
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               it
               which
               Composes
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Second
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               call'd
               
                 Os
                 Lachrymale
              
               ,
               because
               the
               Ductus
               Arising
               from
               the
               Two
               
                 Puncta
                 Lachrymalia
              
               ,
               passes
               thro'
               it
               into
               the
               Foramina
               of
               the
               Nostril
               on
               that
               Side
               ,
               together
               with
               a
               Branch
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               ,
               and
               some
               Remarkable
               Blood-Vessels
               .
            
             
               Anatomists
               disagree
               in
               their
               Descriptions
               and
               Number
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ;
               
                 Galen
                 in
                 Libel
                 .
                 de
                 Ossib
                 .
              
               reckons
               XI
               .
               
                 De
                 Partium
                 Usu
              
               IX
               .
               
                 In
                 Introductorio
                 sive
                 Medico
                 Galeno
                 Adscripto
              
               XII
               .
               to
               which
               Latter
               Vesalius
               Subscribes
               ;
               but
               Columbus
               mentions
               XIII
               .
               and
               at
               the
               same
               time
               in
               his
               Description
               ,
               omits
               the
               Third
               Pair
               of
               Vesalius
               and
               Others
               ,
               and
               instead
               of
               them
               adds
               Two
               others
               ,
               or
               another
               Pair
               call'd
               
                 Ossa
                 Spongiosa
              
               ,
               plac'd
               within
               the
               Nostrils
               :
               We
               can't
               but
               agree
               with
               
               Vesalius's
               Description
               ,
               being
               so
               very
               clear
               and
               intelligible
               by
               the
               Appearance
               of
               most
               ,
               if
               not
               all
               Skulls
               ;
               nor
               can
               we
               find
               any
               Reason
               to
               omit
               what
               Columbus
               has
               added
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               are
               XV
               in
               Number
               ;
               viz.
               the
               VI.
               Pair
               of
               Vesalius
               ,
               the
               Two
               
                 Ossa
                 Spongiosa
              
               and
               
                 Septum
                 Narium
              
               of
               Columbus
               ,
               by
               him
               call'd
               Vomer
               ,
               from
               the
               likeness
               it
               has
               to
               a
               Plow-Share
               or
               Coulter
               .
            
             
               The
               Third
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               is
               scarcely
               Exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               ,
               or
               in
               that
               of
               Tab.
               89.
               
               Fig.
               1.
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               Foreshorten'd
               Site
               (
               as
               Painters
               Term
               it
               )
               it
               's
               in
               ,
               in
               this
               Position
               of
               the
               Cranium
               :
               This
               Third
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               is
               commonly
               of
               a
               Quadrangular
               Figure
               and
               very
               Thin
               ,
               plac'd
               within
               the
               Orbit
               :
               The
               precise
               Place
               of
               its
               Situation
               is
               Forewards
               ,
               adjoining
               to
               the
               Second
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               or
               
                 Os
                 Lachrymale
              
               ;
               Backwards
               it
               sometimes
               Touches
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cune●forme
              
               at
               One
               Angle
               only
               ;
               Above
               it
               's
               Sutur'd
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Frontis
              
               ;
               Below
               with
               the
               Fourth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Fourth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               Largest
               of
               all
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Jaw
               ,
               Composing
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Orbit
               ,
               the
               greatest
               Part
               of
               the
               Palate
               ,
               and
               containing
               all
               the
               Upper
               Teeth
               in
               its
               Sockets
               ;
               its
               Upper-part
               is
               join'd
               to
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Forehead-bone
               ,
               the
               Bone
               of
               the
               Nose
               ,
               and
               Second
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ;
               Laterally
               to
               the
               First
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ;
               Backward
               to
               the
               Third
               ,
               and
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               ,
               and
               Lastly
               to
               its
               Fellow
               :
               The
               Large
               Foramen
               of
               it
               (
               here
               Exprest
               immediately
               under
               the
               Orbit
               of
               the
               Eye
               )
               serves
               to
               Transmit
               a
               Branch
               of
               the
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               to
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Lips
               ,
               &c.
               
               The
               Second
               ,
               Third
               ,
               Fourth
               and
               Fifth
               Foramina
               ,
               are
               in
               Common
               with
               it
               and
               other
               Bones
               ;
               of
               these
               ,
               the
               First
               is
               Compos'd
               at
               its
               Conjunction
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Lachrymale
              
               ;
               (
               D
               )
               the
               Second
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               ;
               (
               I
               )
               the
               Third
               at
               its
               Conjunction
               with
               its
               Partner
               near
               the
               
                 Dentes
                 Incisores
              
               Fig.
               2.
               
               G
               ;
               and
               the
               Fourth
               at
               its
               Conjunction
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Palati
              
               (
               Ibid.
               Fig.
               2.
               h
               h
               )
               Backwards
               :
               It
               has
               a
               Large
               Cavity
               which
               Opens
               into
               the
               Foramen
               of
               the
               Nose
               ;
               in
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               which
               Aperture
               the
               
                 Os
                 Spongiosum
              
               ,
               mention'd
               by
               
                 Realdus
                 Columbus
              
               ,
               is
               plac'd
               :
               This
               Cavity
               is
               call'd
               
                 Antrum
                 Maxillae
                 Superioris
              
               ;
               by
               some
               call'd
               
                 Antrum
                 Hig●●orianum
              
               ,
               for
               what
               reason
               I
               know
               not
               ,
               since
               't
               was
               Describ'd
               long
               before
               Dr.
               Highmore
               ,
               as
               Appears
               by
               
                 Vesalius
                 ,
                 Columbus
                 ,
                 Baubinus
              
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Fifth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               which
               with
               its
               Partner
               Composes
               the
               Upper
               Bony
               Part
               of
               the
               Nose
               ,
               its
               Sutures
               or
               Conjunctions
               with
               the
               other
               Neighbouring
               Bones
               and
               Figure
               are
               here
               so
               well
               Exprest
               ,
               〈◊〉
               it
               needs
               no
               other
               Description
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Septum
                 Narium
              
               whose
               Bony
               Fore-part
               here
               Exprest
               ,
               is
               Compos'd
               partly
               by
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cribriforme
              
               ,
               and
               partly
               by
               a
               Process
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Sixth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               or
               
                 Os
                 Spongiosum
              
               ;
               this
               and
               its
               Partner
               are
               mention'd
               by
               Columbus
               ,
               and
               call'd
               Spongiosa
               :
               These
               we
               have
               constantly
               observ'd
               to
               be
               Distinct
               Bones
               in
               Humane
               Skulls
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               in
               those
               of
               Quadrupedes
               ;
               in
               which
               Latter
               ,
               these
               
                 Ossa
                 Spongiosa
              
               have
               a
               very
               Remarkable
               Disposition
               ;
               they
               being
               Broad
               ,
               Thin
               ,
               Bony
               Bodies
               ,
               Rol'd
               up
               very
               much
               like
               a
               Piece
               of
               Paper
               ,
               Exprest
               Tab.
               61.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
               D
               D
               :
               Nor
               is
               this
               Involuted
               Disposition
               of
               these
               Bones
               only
               in
               Quadrupedes
               ,
               but
               in
               Humane
               Bodies
               also
               it
               's
               so
               Dispos'd
               (
               tho'
               not
               so
               much
               Turn'd
               in
               )
               and
               Cover'd
               every
               where
               with
               the
               Pituitary
               Membrane
               ,
               which
               Invests
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               
                 Foramina
                 Narium
              
               ;
               on
               which
               the
               Branches
               of
               the
               Olfactory
               Nerves
               are
               Expanded
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               A
               Chink
               or
               Foramen
               Compos'd
               by
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Fourth
               Bone
               ,
               and
               Part
               of
               the
               First
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ;
               commonly
               call'd
               the
               Fourth
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               ,
               or
               the
               Third
               Foramen
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Frontis
              
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Left
               Bregma
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Squamosum
              
               or
               Temporale
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Inferior
               Surface
               of
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Bregma
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporale
              
               call'd
               
                 Processus
                 Mammillaris
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               Compos'd
               of
               a
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               and
               First
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Four
               
                 Dentes
                 Incisores
              
               .
            
             
               F
               Inferior
               ,
               The
               Eight
               
                 Dentes
                 Molares
              
               ,
               Four
               on
               each
               Side
               .
            
             
               The
               rest
               are
               the
               Two
               
                 Dentes
                 Canini
              
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Fourth
               Foramen
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               F
               ,
               The
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               next
               the
               Palate
               ,
               by
               some
               therefore
               call'd
               
                 Os
                 Palati
              
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Seventh
               Pair
               of
               Bones
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Ossa
                 Palati
              
               ;
               these
               Bones
               are
               Perforated
               on
               each
               Side
               (
               h
               h
               )
               near
               the
               
                 Dentes
                 Molares
              
               ;
               which
               Perforation
               is
               in
               Common
               with
               the
               Fourth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               and
               is
               call'd
               the
               Fifth
               Perforation
               of
               that
               Bone
               ,
               as
               above
               mention'd
               .
            
             
               These
               Seven
               Pair
               of
               Bones
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               make
               Fourteen
               on
               each
               Side
               ,
               to
               which
               
                 Realdus
                 Columbus
              
               adds
               another
               which
               has
               no
               Partner
               ,
               and
               is
               reckon'd
               the
               Fifteenth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               Fifteenth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               by
               Columbus
               liken'd
               to
               a
               Coulter
               or
               Plow-Share
               ,
               making
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               
                 Septum
                 Narium
              
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Pterygoides
              
               or
               Aliformis
               ,
               reckon'd
               the
               First
               of
               the
               External
               Process's
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               .
            
             
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Pterigoideus
                 Internus
              
               ,
               Arises
               from
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Sinus
               of
               these
               Process's
               ,
               
                 Vid.
                 App.
              
               Fig.
               8.
               g.
               
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Processus
               ,
               or
               
                 Appendix
                 Styloides
              
               ;
               its
               Upper-part
               being
               Broken
               off
               on
               both
               Sides
               in
               this
               Figure
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               Margin
               of
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 Auditorius
              
               in
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporale
              
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               The
               Sinus
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               or
               Temporale
               ,
               which
               receives
               the
               Head
               of
               the
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               O
               O
               ,
               Two
               Process's
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               Articulated
               with
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               .
            
             
               P
               ,
               The
               Anterior
               Appendix
               or
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ;
               by
               Veslingius
               in
               his
               Animad
               versions
               on
               his
               Figures
               of
               Chap.
               XIII
               .
               Erroneously
               call'd
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Mammiformis
              
               or
               Mastoides
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               ,
               on
               the
               Left
               Side
               .
            
             
               R
               R
               R
               ,
               The
               Great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               passes
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               S
               S
               ,
               The
               Asperities
               and
               Sinus's
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Occiput
               ,
               made
               by
               the
               Insertions
               of
               the
               Muscles
               Moving
               the
               Head.
               
            
             
               T
               T
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Parts
               of
               the
               First
               Bones
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               V
               V
               ,
               The
               Fourth
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               ;
               Vid.
               Fig.
               1.
               
               I.
               
            
             
               W
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               next
               the
               Aliform
               Process
               .
            
             
               X
               X
               ,
               The
               Fifth
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               ,
               Compos'd
               at
               the
               Meeting
               of
               that
               Bone
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ,
               and
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Occipital-bone
               on
               both
               Sides
               .
            
             
               Y
               ,
               The
               Sixth
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cuneiforme
              
               at
               the
               Root
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Pterygoides
              
               ,
               by
               which
               a
               Branch
               of
               the
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               pass
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               Z
               Z
               ,
               The
               Foramina
               of
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Temporum
              
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Carotid
               Arteries
               First
               Enter
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               a
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               whence
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Mylobyoideus
              
               do's
               Arise
               .
            
             
               b
               ,
               A
               Large
               Foramen
               in
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               and
               a
               Branch
               of
               the
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               pass
               to
               the
               Teeth
               ,
               Fig.
               1.
               b.
               The
               External
               Foramina
               of
               this
               Bone
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Branches
               of
               those
               Vessels
               pass
               out
               of
               the
               Bone
               again
               to
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Lips.
               
            
             
               C
               ,
               A
               Fore-shorten'd
               Appearance
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Coronae
              
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               call'd
               the
               Short
               Process
               .
            
             
               D
               E
               ,
               The
               Head
               of
               the
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               call'd
               Condylus
               ,
               which
               is
               Articulated
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               by
               the
               Mediation
               of
               a
               Moving
               Cartilage
               ;
               
                 Vid.
                 App.
              
               Fig.
               8.
               
               T
               ,
               S.
               
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Cervix
               or
               Neck
               of
               the
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Teeth
               of
               the
               Upper
               and
               Lower
               Jaw
               of
               one
               Side
               only
               ,
               when
               taken
               out
               of
               their
               Alveoli
               or
               Sockets
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               &c.
               The
               
                 Dentes
                 Incisores
              
               ;
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Canini
               ;
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Molares
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Right
               Side
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               in
               which
               the
               Alveoli
               or
               Sockets
               ,
               after
               the
               Extraction
               of
               the
               Teeth
               ,
               are
               Represented
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Coronae
              
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               Temporal
               Muscle
               is
               fixt
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Condylus
              
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Alveoli
               or
               Sockets
               of
               the
               Teeth
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               &c.
               Divers
               Teeth
               Broken
               or
               Divided
               Variously
               ,
               to
               shew
               their
               Internal
               Cavities
               or
               Sinus's
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               One
               of
               the
               Grinding
               Teeth
               in
               like
               Manner
               Broken
               to
               Exhibit
               its
               Internal
               Structure
               ,
               Figur'd
               much
               Bigger
               than
               the
               Life
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               Stony
               Part.
               
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Bony
               Striae
               of
               the
               Tooth
               Divested
               of
               its
               Stony
               Cortex
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Bony
               Part
               of
               the
               Tooth
               becoming
               more
               Porous
               ,
               as
               it
               Approaches
               its
               Middle
               Cavity
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Middle
               Cavity
               or
               Hollow
               of
               the
               Tooth
               ,
               Cover'd
               with
               a
               Membrane
               on
               which
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               and
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Tooth
               are
               Distributed
               ;
               by
               which
               the
               Tooth
               derives
               the
               Matter
               which
               makes
               it
               Germinate
               and
               repair
               that
               loss
               it
               sustains
               by
               frequent
               Use
               on
               its
               Cortical
               or
               Stony
               Part
               :
               Thus
               when
               one
               Tooth
               is
               wanting
               in
               either
               Jaw
               ,
               the
               Opposite
               Tooth
               Grows
               Longer
               for
               want
               of
               its
               Resistance
               in
               Mastication
               .
               When
               this
               Internal
               Membrane
               within
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Tooth
               is
               Expos'd
               thro'
               the
               Breaking
               away
               of
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Tooth
               ,
               it
               is
               most
               Exquisitely
               sensible
               to
               the
               Touch
               of
               any
               hard
               Body
               ,
               or
               cold
               Liquor
               ;
               and
               very
               frequently
               a
               Carnous
               Fungus
               will
               Arise
               from
               it
               :
               In
               these
               Cases
               the
               drawing
               out
               of
               the
               Tooth
               is
               the
               best
               Remedy
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               External
               Membrane
               lying
               on
               that
               Part
               of
               the
               Tooth
               within
               the
               Socket
               or
               Alveolus
               :
               They
               who
               Doubt
               of
               the
               Existence
               of
               such
               a
               Membrane
               may
               be
               satisfied
               therein
               ;
               After
               a
               Tooth
               is
               drawn
               from
               a
               Living
               or
               lately
               Dead
               Body
               ,
               and
               laid
               in
               Water
               for
               some
               Days
               ,
               this
               Membrane
               will
               be
               very
               Conspicuous
               even
               to
               the
               Naked
               Eye
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Basis
               of
               the
               Tooth
               ;
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Apex
               of
               one
               of
               its
               Roots
               where
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               Arising
               from
               the
               Parietes
               of
               the
               Alveolus
               or
               Socket
               ,
               are
               Exprest
               ,
               Running
               into
               that
               Part
               of
               it
               which
               lies
               within
               the
               Alveolus
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               8.
               
            
             
               The
               Stony
               Parts
               of
               the
               Teeth
               of
               a
               Foetus
               ,
               which
               lying
               within
               the
               Jaw-bones
               ,
               are
               Cover'd
               with
               the
               Periostium
               ,
               as
               Appear'd
               in
               the
               Dissection
               I
               sometime
               since
               made
               of
               a
               Humane
               
                 Foetus
                 ;
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               101.
               
               L
               L.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Stony
               Capsula
               of
               one
               of
               the
               
                 Dentes
                 Incisores
              
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               That
               of
               the
               Caninus
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Superior
               Stony
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Dentes
                 Molares
              
               in
               a
               Foetus
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               9.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               or
               Bone
               of
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               together
               with
               Two
               Process's
               of
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Middle
               Bone
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               ,
            
             
               B
               ,
               It
               s
               Superior
               Part
               next
               the
               Tongue
               ,
            
             
               C
               ,
               Its
               Internal
               Concave
               Part
               towards
               the
               Fauces
               ,
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Superior
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               loosly
               Tied
               to
               the
               Extremity
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               of
               the
               same
               Side
               ;
               that
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               is
               not
               Letter'd
               in
               this
               Figure
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               One
               of
               the
               Two
               Lateral
               Bones
               which
               Helps
               to
               Compose
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             NINETY-THIRD
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             FROM
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Head
             ,
             we
             Pass
             to
             those
             which
             Support
             it
             and
             the
             Trunk
             of
             of
             the
             Body
             .
             (
             viz.
             )
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             Back
             ,
             Loins
             ,
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             and
             Coccygis
             ;
             all
             these
             together
             have
             generally
             obtain'd
             the
             Name
             of
             Spina
             .
             Since
             it
             's
             Necessary
             the
             Head
             and
             Trunk
             of
             the
             Body
             should
             be
             variously
             Mov'd
             ,
             it
             was
             therefore
             Requisite
             their
             Supporter
             should
             not
             Consist
             of
             One
             Bone
             only
             ,
             but
             that
             it
             should
             be
             Divided
             into
             many
             ,
             which
             are
             call'd
             Vertebrae
             ;
             of
             these
             ,
             there
             are
             Reckon'd
             Twenty-four
             ;
             (
             viz.
             )
             Seven
             of
             the
             Neck
             ;
             Twelve
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             and
             Five
             of
             the
             Loins
             .
             In
             some
             Subjects
             we
             have
             Found
             but
             Six
             Vertebrae
             belonging
             to
             the
             Neck
             ;
             in
             another
             we
             Found
             Thirteen
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ,
             and
             as
             many
             Ribs
             ;
             as
             Appears
             in
             a
             Skeleton
             now
             Hanging
             in
             the
             Middle
             of
             the
             Anatomical
             Theater
             of
             the
             Surgeons
             of
             London
             ;
             The
             like
             I
             don't
             Doubt
             may
             ,
             or
             has
             been
             Observ'd
             of
             the
             Loins
             :
             The
             Inferior
             Part
             of
             the
             Spine
             is
             Compos'd
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             and
             Coccygis
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               The
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               call'd
               Atlas
               ,
               because
               it
               Supports
               the
               whole
               Head.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               Its
               Fore-part
               :
            
             
               B
               ,
               Its
               Back-part
               ,
               wanting
               a
               Spinal
               Process
               :
            
             
               CC
               ,
               It
               s
               Transverse
               Processes
               Perforated
               to
               Transmit
               the
               Cervical
               Artery
               and
               Vein
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               Two
               Oval
               Process's
               ,
               whose
               Surfaces
               are
               Smooth
               and
               Cover'd
               with
               a
               Cartilage
               ,
               which
               Process's
               move
               to
               either
               Side
               on
               those
               of
               Fig.
               3.
               
               B
               B.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Inside
               of
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               next
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Outside
               and
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               same
               Vertebra
               :
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Two
               Process's
               whose
               Two
               Shallow
               Cavities
               are
               Articulated
               with
               Two
               somewhat●
               Convext
               Prominencies
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               Tab.
               92
               ,
               Fig.
               2.
               
               O
               O
               ;
               in
               which
               Articulation
               the
               Head
               is
               Mov'd
               in
               Nodding
               Fore-wards
               ,
               Back-wards
               and
               Side-ways
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               A
               Sinus
               in
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               this
               Vertebra
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Contorted
               Trunk
               of
               One
               of
               the
               Cervical
               Artery
               ,
               passes
               towards
               the
               Great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               N.
               B.
               
                 It
                 is
                 Necessary
                 the
                 Great
              
               Foramen
               
                 of
                 this
                 First
              
               Vertebra
               
                 of
                 the
                 Neck
                 should
                 be
                 much
                 Larger
                 than
                 any
                 of
                 the
                 Inferior
                 ,
                 least
                 the
                 Beginning
                 of
                 the
              
               Medulla
               Spinalis
               
                 should
                 be
                 Incommoded
                 in
                 Turning
                 the
                 Head
                 to
                 One
                 Side
                 ;
                 in
                 which
                 Action
                 ,
                 this
                 First
              
               Vertebra
               
                 Moves
                 with
                 the
                 Head
                 on
                 the
              
               Axis
               
                 or
                 Tooth-like
                 Process
                 of
                 the
                 Second
              
               Vertebra
               
                 of
                 the
                 Neck
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Second
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Tooth-like
               Process
               on
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               this
               Second
               Vertebra
               Inserted
               behind
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               (
               A
               ,
               B
               ,
               Fig.
               1
               ,
               2.
               )
               whose
               Apex
               A
               ,
               is
               Fastned
               by
               a
               Ligament
               to
               the
               Margin
               of
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
                 :
                 Vid.
                 Appen
              
               .
               Fig.
               8.
               
               E.
               
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Two
               Process's
               ,
               whose
               Cartilaginous
               Surfaces
               are
               of
               an
               Oval
               Figure
               ,
               and
               Correspond
               to
               those
               of
               Fig.
               1.
               
               D
               D.
               whereby
               the
               Rotatory
               Motion
               of
               the
               Head
               is
               Perform'd
               .
               The
               other
               Remarkable
               Parts
               of
               this
               Figure
               may
               be
               known
               by
               the
               Explanation
               of
               the
               Following
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Second
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               :
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Tooth-like
               Process
               call'd
               Epistropheus
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               Surface
               of
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Second
               Vertebra
               ,
               join'd
               to
               the
               Superior
               and
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Third
               .
               Fig.
               5.
               
               C.
               
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Its
               Transverse
               Process's
               Perforated
               to
               Transmit
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               as
               in
               Fig.
               1.
               
               C
               C.
               
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               It
               s
               Two
               Oblique
               Descending
               Process's
               plac'd
               on
               the
               Two
               Oblique
               Ascending
               of
               Fig.
               5.
               
               A.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Second
               Vertebra
               next
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Double
               -
               Spinal
               Process
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               Superior
               
                 Musculi
                 Interspinales
              
               are
               Inserted
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Third
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               One
               of
               its
               Oblique
               Ascending
               Process's
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Its
               Transverse
               Process
               Perforated
               like
               as
               in
               the
               Two
               First
               Vertebra
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Body
               of
               the
               Third
               Vertebra
               ,
               on
               which
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Second
               is
               Plac'd
               .
            
             
               N.
               B.
               
                 The
                 Rest
                 of
                 the
                 Figure
                 may
                 be
                 Vnderstood
                 by
                 the
                 Explanation
                 of
                 the
                 Preceding
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               The
               Lower
               Part
               of
               the
               Third
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               ;
            
             
               A
               ,
               It
               s
               Oblique
               Descending
               Process
               :
            
             
               B
               ,
               It
               s
               Transverse
               Process
               Perforated
               as
               above
               Noted
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               The
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Back
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               It
               s
               Transverse
               Process
               not
               Perforated
               like
               those
               of
               the
               Neck
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Its
               Spinal
               Process
               on
               the
               Back-part
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               A
               Shallow
               Depressure
               on
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Transverse
               Process
               which
               Receives
               the
               Tubercle
               of
               the
               First
               Rib.
               
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               94.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
               B.
               
            
             
               D
               ,
               One
               of
               the
               Oblique
               Ascending
               Process's
               ,
               which
               Receives
               the
               Descending
               of
               the
               Last
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Sinus
               ,
               in
               which
               some
               of
               the
               Axillary
               Nerves
               pass
               out
               of
               the
               Specus
               or
               Great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               8.
               
            
             
               The
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               same
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Back
               or
               Thorax
               :
            
             
               A
               ,
               It
               s
               Transverse
               Process
               :
            
             
               B
               ,
               It
               s
               Spinal
               Process
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               A
               Shallow
               Depressure
               in
               the
               Transverse
               Process
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               Second
               Tubercle
               of
               the
               First
               Rib
               is
               Connected
               :
            
             
               D
               ,
               It
               s
               Oblique
               Descending
               Process
               ,
               Receiv'd
               by
               the
               Ascending
               of
               the
               Next
               Vertebra
               .
            
             
               After
               Taking
               out
               the
               Viscera
               from
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Thorax
               of
               the
               Late
               Earl
               of
               Peterborough
               ,
               I
               was
               Desir●d
               by
               One
               of
               his
               Physicians
               Dr.
               Iohnston
               (
               who
               constantly
               Attended
               his
               Lordship
               some
               Time
               before
               his
               Death
               )
               to
               Examine
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Thorax
               ,
               because
               his
               Lordship
               did
               not
               only
               Complain
               of
               very
               Great
               Pains
               about
               the
               Eighth
               and
               Ninth
               Vertebrae
               of
               that
               Part
               ,
               and
               particularly
               the
               Right
               Hypochondrium
               ,
               &c.
               but
               One
               of
               the
               Spinal
               Process's
               of
               those
               Vertebrae
               was
               Observ'd
               to
               be
               very
               Prominent
               some
               Weeks
               before
               his
               Death
               ;
               nor
               could
               he
               Endure
               any
               Motion
               of
               the
               Trunk
               of
               his
               Body
               :
               Besides
               at
               that
               Time
               the
               Lower
               Limbs
               were
               Destitute
               of
               Motion
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               Exquisite
               Sense
               of
               Feeling
               .
               On
               Freeing
               the
               Descending
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               and
               
                 Ductus
                 Thoracicus
              
               from
               the
               Fore-parts
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Thorax
               ,
               I
               Found
               a
               Tumor
               ,
               whose
               Thick
               Hard
               Membrane
               was
               chiefly
               Fram'd
               of
               the
               Ligaments
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               ▪
               I
               Divided
               the
               Tumor
               ,
               and
               a
               Brownish
               Colour'd
               Matter
               Flow'd
               from
               it
               :
               On
               farther
               Examination
               I
               Found
               the
               Upper
               and
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Ninth
               ,
               and
               in
               like
               Manner
               the
               Lower
               Part
               of
               the
               Eighth
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Thorax
               Consum'd
               and
               Gone
               ;
               insomuch
               that
               I
               could
               without
               Difficulty
               put
               the
               Top
               of
               my
               Fore-finger
               into
               the
               Foramen
               ,
               and
               Feel
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               Cover'd
               with
               its
               Membranes
               only
               .
               I
               Doubt
               not
               but
               Part
               of
               the
               Matter
               contain'd
               in
               this
               Tumor
               ,
               had
               Descended
               into
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Specus
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Loins
               and
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               (
               since
               it
               lay
               Open
               )
               whereby
               the
               Inferior
               Nervous
               Distributions
               were
               affected
               ,
               and
               their
               Proper
               Office
               Perverted
               ;
               but
               Decency
               Forbid
               our
               Scrutiny
               in
               this
               Case
               ,
               since
               the
               Bodies
               of
               those
               Vertebrae
               must
               have
               been
               Cut
               away
               with
               a
               Chizel
               to
               have
               made
               such
               a
               Discovery
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               9.
               
            
             
               The
               Upper-part
               of
               One
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Loins
               :
            
             
               A
               ,
               It
               s
               Transverse
               Process
               :
               The
               Rest
               of
               its
               Parts
               may
               be
               known
               by
               the
               Explanation
               of
               the
               Fifth
               and
               Seventh
               Figures
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               10.
               
            
             
               The
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               same
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Loins
               ,
               whose
               Explanation
               may
               be
               Refer'd
               to
               Fig.
               8.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               11
               ,
               12.
               
            
             
               The
               Superior
               Parts
               of
               the
               Two
               Lower
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Loins
               ;
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Their
               Tranverse
               Process's
               :
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Their
               Oblique
               Ascending
               Process's
               :
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Bodies
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               Their
               Spinal
               Process's
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             NINETY-FOURTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THE
             Ribs
             are
             Twelve
             in
             Number
             on
             either
             Side
             ;
             sometimes
             we
             have
             found
             Thirteen
             ,
             at
             other
             times
             but
             Eleven
             on
             each
             Side
             ;
             and
             frequently
             Twelve
             on
             one
             Side
             and
             Eleven
             on
             the
             other
             :
             The
             Seven
             Superior
             are
             call'd
             ,
             
               The
               True
               Ribs
            
             ,
             which
             are
             join'd
             with
             the
             Sternum
             or
             
               Os
               Pectoris
            
             ,
             by
             the
             Mediation
             of
             Cartilages
             .
             The
             Inferior
             Ribs
             are
             the
             
               Nothae
               ,
               Spuriae
            
             ,
             or
             Bastard
             Ribs
             .
             The
             Nine
             Superior
             Ribs
             have
             a
             Twofold
             Articulation
             to
             the
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Back
             ;
             the
             one
             Collateral
             to
             the
             Fore-parts
             of
             the
             Bodies
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             ;
             the
             other
             to
             the
             Fore-parts
             of
             their
             Transverse
             Process's
             .
             The
             Two
             and
             sometimes
             Three
             Inferior
             Ribs
             ,
             are
             only
             Articulated
             to
             the
             Bodies
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             ;
             and
             don
             't
             touch
             their
             Transverse
             Process's
             .
             The
             Lowest
             and
             Last
             Rib
             has
             not
             its
             Cartilaginous
             Extremity
             Fasten'd
             to
             its
             Superior
             Rib
             ,
             as
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             Bastard
             Ribs
             have
             ,
             but
             its
             Extream
             Point
             gives
             an
             Origin
             to
             Part
             of
             the
             Oblique
             Descending
             Muscle
             of
             the
             Abdomen
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               The
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               First
               Rib
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               same
               Rib.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               First
               Rib
               next
               the
               Sternum
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Its
               Protuberance
               Articulated
               in
               a
               Sinus
               of
               the
               Transverse
               Process
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Its
               Little
               Head
               receiv'd
               in
               a
               Sinus
               of
               the
               Anterior
               Bodies
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               ,
               Laterally
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               It
               s
               middle
               Broad
               Flat
               Part.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Sixth
               or
               Seventh
               True
               Rib
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               same
               Rib.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               That
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Bony
               Part
               of
               the
               Rib
               join'd
               to
               the
               Cartilage
               ,
               plac'd
               between
               it
               and
               the
               Sternum
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               other
               Extremity
               Articulated
               to
               the
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Back
               Laterally
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               A
               Tubercle
               Articulated
               to
               the
               Transverse
               Process
               of
               the
               Vertebra
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               Fig.
               3.
               
               A
               Sinus
               Fram'd
               in
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Rib
               for
               the
               Passage
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               which
               ought
               to
               be
               avoided
               in
               Perforating
               the
               Thorax
               ,
               in
               Case
               of
               an
               Empyema
               ,
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Lower
               Edge
               and
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Eleventh
               Rib
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               The
               Upper
               Edge
               ,
               and
               Part
               of
               the
               External
               and
               Internal
               Parts
               of
               the
               same
               Rib.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7
               ,
               8.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               and
               External
               Parts
               of
               the
               Twelfth
               Rib.
               
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             NINETY-FIFTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             REPRESENTS
             the
             
               Scapulae
               ,
               Claviculae
            
             and
             
               Os
               Pectoris
            
             ,
             or
             Sternum
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               The
               External
               Convext
               Part
               of
               the
               Left
               Scapula
               or
               Shoulder-blade
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               The
               Outside
               of
               the
               Scapula
               a
               little
               Arch'd
               or
               Convext
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Spina
                 Scapulae
              
               ;
            
             
               D
               ,
               Its
               Extremity
               call'd
               Acromion
               ,
               Articulated
               to
               the
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Clavicula
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Coracoides
              
               or
               Crow's-Bill-like
               Process
               ,
               by
               some
               call'd
               Ancyroides
               or
               Anchor-like
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Brevis
              
               ,
               or
               Short
               Process
               of
               the
               Shoulder-blade
               which
               receives
               the
               Head
               of
               the
               Arm-bone
               .
            
             
               The
               Rest
               of
               the
               Parts
               which
               Circumscribe
               the
               Scapula
               ,
               are
               Explain'd
               in
               the
               following
               Figure
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               Concave
               Part
               of
               the
               Right
               Shoulder-blade
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               B
               ,
               Various
               Eminencies
               on
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Scapula
               ,
               whence
               the
               Fibres
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Subscapularis
              
               take
               their
               Origin
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               Angle
               of
               the
               Scapula
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Superior
               Angle
               of
               the
               Scapula
               .
            
             
               E
               Superior
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Coracoides
              
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               G
               ,
               The
               Foramina
               for
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               which
               pass
               in
               and
               out
               from
               the
               Meditullium
               of
               the
               Bone.
               
            
             
               G
               Inferior
               ,
               The
               Sinus
               of
               the
               Short
               Process
               of
               the
               Scapula
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Head
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               is
               receiv'd
               .
            
             
               G
               Superior
               ,
               The
               Internal
               or
               Lower
               Part
               of
               the
               Acromion
               of
               the
               Scapula
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Cervix
               or
               Neck
               of
               the
               Short
               Process
               .
            
             
               N.
               B.
               From
               C
               to
               D
               ,
               
                 is
                 call'd
                 the
              
               Basis
               Scapulae
               ;
               From
               D
               to
               F
               ,
               the
               Costa
               Superior
               ;
               From
               H
               to
               C
               ,
               the
               Costa
               Inferior
               Scapulae
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Right
               Clavicula
               or
               Channel-bone
               :
               Some
               call
               the
               
                 Claviculae
                 ,
                 Ossa
                 Humerorum
              
               :
               They
               are
               also
               call'd
               Furculae
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Left
               Clavicle
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Clavicle
               Articulated
               to
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Pectoris
              
               or
               Sternum
               ,
               in
               which
               Articulation
               a
               Cartilaginous
               Body
               is
               plac'd
               not
               Unlike
               that
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
                 .
                 Vid.
                 App.
              
               Fig.
               8.
               
               S
               ,
               T.
               
            
             
               B
               ,
               That
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Clavicula
               join'd
               to
               the
               Acromion
               of
               the
               Scapula
               ,
               by
               Two
               almost
               Plain
               Cartilaginous
               Bodies
               appos'd
               to
               each
               other
               ,
               and
               Connected
               by
               Ligaments
               :
               This
               Conjunction
               of
               the
               Clavicle
               with
               the
               Acromion
               of
               the
               Shoulder-blade
               we
               have
               more
               than
               Once
               seen
               suffer
               a
               Dislocation
               :
               when
               the
               Patient
               has
               fallen
               from
               some
               High
               Place
               ,
               and
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Shoulder
               or
               Acromion
               of
               the
               Scapula
               has
               First
               come
               to
               the
               Ground
               .
               The
               Scapula
               with
               the
               Arm
               in
               such
               Case
               will
               be
               Deprest
               ,
               and
               the
               Outmost
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Clavicle
               will
               be
               seen
               to
               Arise
               up
               :
               This
               Dislocation
               we
               Mention
               ,
               because
               we
               don't
               find
               it
               taken
               Notice
               of
               (
               or
               at
               least
               not
               commonly
               )
               by
               Authors
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Middle
               Superior
               and
               External
               Part
               of
               the
               Right
               Clavicula
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Middle
               Inferiour
               and
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               Left
               Clavicula
               .
               The
               Use
               of
               the
               Claviculae
               is
               to
               support
               the
               Scapulae
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Humerorum
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               External
               and
               Forepart
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Pectoris
              
               or
               Sternum
               ,
               whose
               Appearance
               in
               the
               Adult
               Differs
               very
               much
               from
               that
               of
               the
               Foetus
               ;
               as
               may
               be
               seen
               Tab.
               101.6
               .
               In
               Aged
               Bodies
               it
               's
               intirely
               United
               into
               One
               Bone
               ;
               in
               some
               Adults
               it
               's
               divided
               into
               Two
               ;
               in
               others
               (
               as
               in
               this
               Subject
               )
               it
               has
               Three
               Distinct
               Bones
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Superior
               and
               Largest
               Bone
               of
               the
               Sternum
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               A
               Sinus
               which
               receives
               the
               Internal
               Round
               End
               of
               the
               Clavicula
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               the
               Superior
               Part
               ,
               or
               almost
               Semicircular
               Sinus
               of
               the
               Sternum
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Middle
               Bone
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Pectoris
              
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Sinus's
               in
               the
               Middle
               Bone
               of
               the
               Sternum
               Laterally
               ;
               in
               which
               the
               Cartilaginous
               Extremities
               of
               the
               True
               Ribs
               are
               Receiv'd
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Lower
               Bone
               of
               the
               Sternum
               ;
               the
               Extremity
               of
               which
               is
               commonly
               Cartilaginous
               ,
               and
               call'd
               
                 Cartilago
                 Mucronata
              
               or
               Ensiformis
               ;
               Externally
               it
               Frames
               that
               Cavity
               call'd
               
                 Scrobiculus
                 Cordis
              
               or
               Heart-pit
               ,
               commonly
               call'd
               the
               
                 Pit
                 of
                 the
                 Stomach
              
               :
               The
               Pains
               of
               which
               Part
               are
               call'd
               Cardialgiae
               ,
               they
               Affecting
               the
               Upper
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Stomach
               call'd
               Cardia
               ,
               where
               the
               Plexuss's
               of
               the
               Upper
               and
               Lower
               Stomach
               Nerves
               are
               made
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             NINETY-SIXTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             REPRESENTS
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Arms
             ,
             together
             with
             the
             Two
             Bones
             of
             the
             Cubit
             :
             These
             ,
             together
             with
             those
             which
             Compose
             the
             Hand
             Represented
             in
             the
             Following
             Table
             ,
             are
             commonly
             call'd
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Whole
             Hand
             ;
             but
             are
             properly
             Divided
             as
             above
             .
             First
             of
             the
             Bone
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             which
             is
             properly
             that
             Part
             between
             the
             Elbow
             or
             Cubit
             and
             Shoulder
             ;
             the
             Whole
             Arm
             Comprehends
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Cubit
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               of
               the
               Right
               Arm
               ;
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Round
               Head
               of
               its
               Upper
               Appendix
               Cover'd
               with
               a
               Cartilage
               ,
               which
               is
               Articulated
               with
               the
               Scapula
               by
               Arthrodia
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Circular
               Sinus
               of
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               Ligament
               Involving
               the
               Juncture
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Tendons
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Supraspinatus
                 ,
                 Infraspinatus
                 ,
                 Teres
                 Minor
              
               and
               Subscapularis
               are
               Inserted
               .
            
             
               D
               F
               ,
               Two
               Prominencies
               of
               the
               Shoulder-bone
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               A
               Sinus
               Fram'd
               between
               the
               Two
               last
               Mention'd
               Prominencies
               ,
               wherein
               the
               External
               Tendinous
               Beginning
               or
               Head
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Biceps
              
               is
               Receiv'd
               .
               
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               65.1
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               A
               Convext
               Protuberance
               of
               the
               Lower
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Shoulder-bone
               ,
               which
               is
               Receiv'd
               in
               a
               Shallow
               Concave
               Depressure
               on
               the
               Superior
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Radius
               .
            
             
               H
               K
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               ,
               that
               's
               Articulated
               to
               the
               Upper
               End
               of
               the
               Vlna
               by
               Ginglymus
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Protuberance
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               ,
               from
               which
               the
               Greatest
               Part
               of
               the
               Muscles
               Bending
               the
               Fingers
               and
               Carpus
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Pronator
                 Radii
                 Teres
              
               and
               
                 Palmaris
                 Longus
              
               ,
               do
               Arise
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               An
               Interstice
               between
               the
               Lower
               Appendix
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               and
               its
               Internal
               Protuberance
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               A
               Large
               Foramen
               for
               a
               Blood-vessel
               of
               the
               Bone.
               
            
             
               I
               was
               lately
               Call'd
               to
               a
               Boy
               about
               10
               or
               12
               Years
               of
               Age
               ,
               who
               Four
               or
               Five
               Days
               before
               ,
               in
               Playing
               with
               his
               Companion
               ,
               Receiv'd
               such
               an
               Injury
               in
               One
               of
               his
               Arms
               ,
               as
               he
               could
               not
               afterwards
               Move
               it
               Forewards
               or
               Backwards
               ,
               much
               less
               ,
               Lift
               it
               up
               towards
               his
               Head
               ;
               but
               had
               all
               the
               Actions
               of
               his
               Cubit
               and
               Fingers
               ,
               as
               we
               commonly
               Find
               in
               those
               who
               have
               Dislocated
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               from
               the
               Scapula
               :
               After
               Examining
               the
               Shoulder
               ,
               and
               Finding
               no
               such
               Dislocation
               ;
               by
               Moving
               the
               Arm
               ,
               I
               Found
               the
               Bone
               near
               the
               Shoulder
               Grate
               very
               much
               ,
               which
               I
               Guess
               could
               be
               no
               otherwise
               than
               the
               Upper
               Appendix
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               Divided
               from
               the
               Bone.
               I
               then
               Reduc'd
               it
               to
               a
               Good
               Figure
               ,
               and
               after
               Applying
               a
               Plaister
               
                 De
                 Sapone
              
               to
               Attenuate
               the
               Extravased
               Blood
               ,
               I
               Rol'd
               it
               up
               ,
               and
               he
               has
               Continu'd
               Easie
               ever
               since
               .
               The
               Tingling
               ,
               as
               he
               Told
               me
               ,
               he
               had
               at
               his
               Fingers
               Ends
               ,
               and
               Violent
               Pain
               in
               his
               Shoulder
               ,
               Leaving
               him
               .
               I
               don't
               Find
               Authors
               Mention
               such
               like
               Cases
               where
               the
               Appendages
               of
               Bones
               are
               Broken
               off
               in
               Young
               Bodies
               ;
               but
               I
               am
               Perswaded
               from
               other
               Examples
               as
               well
               as
               this
               ;
               such
               Accidents
               often
               Happen
               ,
               and
               are
               not
               commonly
               Known
               by
               Surgeons
               .
            
             
               N.
               B.
               
                 These
                 Fractures
                 of
                 Bones
                 at
                 their
                 Appendages
                 in
                 Young
                 Bodies
                 ,
                 are
                 sooner
                 Vnited
                 ,
                 than
                 when
                 the
                 Middle-parts
                 of
                 Bones
                 are
                 Broken.
                 
              
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Hinder-part
               of
               the
               Left
               Shoulder-bone
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               A
               Cavity
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Superior
               and
               Back-part
               of
               the
               
                 Vlna
                 (
                 Fig.
              
               3
               ,
               4.
               
               C
               F
               )
               ,
               call'd
               Olecranon
               ,
               is
               Receiv'd
               in
               an
               Extension
               of
               the
               Cubit
               .
            
             
               N
               N
               N
               ,
               The
               Foramina
               for
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               which
               Pass
               to
               and
               from
               the
               Marrow
               ,
               and
               Internal
               Parts
               of
               the
               Bone.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Vlna
               or
               
                 Os
                 Cubiti
              
               of
               the
               Right
               Arm
               :
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               It
               s
               Internal
               Side
               ,
               next
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Body
               :
            
             
               C
               ,
               Its
               Superior
               Part
               or
               Olecranon
               Articulated
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               :
            
             
               D
               ,
               It
               s
               Inferior
               Part
               ,
               whose
               Lateral
               Smooth
               Surface
               is
               Receiv'd
               in
               a
               Sinus
               ,
               at
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Radius
               Laterally
               .
            
             
               E
               F
               ,
               The
               Semicircular
               Sinus
               of
               the
               Vlna
               ,
               which
               Receives
               ,
               and
               is
               Receiv'd
               by
               the
               Two
               Prominencies
               and
               Sinus
               of
               the
               Lower
               Appendix
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
                 ,
                 (
                 Fig.
              
               1.
               
               K
               H
               ,
               )
               which
               Articulation
               is
               call'd
               Ginglymus
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               and
               Lesser
               Acute
               Process
               of
               the
               Vlna
               ,
               call'd
               Styloides
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               That
               Side
               of
               the
               Left
               Vlna
               next
               the
               Radius
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               An
               almost
               Semicircular
               Sinus
               of
               the
               Vlna
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Upper
               Head
               of
               the
               
                 Radius
                 ,
                 Fig.
              
               5
               ,
               6.
               
               B
               B
               ,
               is
               Receiv'd
               Laterally
               :
            
             
               B
               C
               ,
               It
               s
               External
               Side
               next
               the
               Radius
               ;
               B
               ,
               its
               Lower
               End
               next
               the
               Carpus
               ;
               C
               ,
               its
               Superior
               (
               call'd
               Olecranum
               )
               towards
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               A
               Smooth
               Prominence
               at
               the
               Lower
               End
               of
               the
               Vlna
               ,
               which
               is
               Receiv'd
               in
               a
               Sinus
               of
               the
               Radius
               ,
               as
               above-noted
               ,
               Fig.
               3.
               
               D.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Anterior
               Process
               of
               the
               Vlna
               ,
               which
               Frames
               the
               Semicircular
               Sinus
               ,
               Articulated
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
                 ,
                 Fig.
              
               1.
               
               K
               H.
               This
               Process
               is
               Receiv'd
               in
               a
               Sinus
               at
               the
               Inferior
               and
               Forepart
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               ,
               (
               Exprest
               Fig.
               1.
               above
               K
               H
               )
               when
               the
               Cubit
               is
               Bended
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Superior
               and
               Posterior
               Process
               of
               the
               Vlna
               in
               like
               Manner
               ,
               Framing
               its
               Upper
               and
               Semicircular
               Sinus
               ,
               which
               Process
               is
               Receiv'd
               in
               the
               Cavity
               (
               M
               ,
               Fig.
               2.
               )
               of
               the
               Inferior
               and
               Back-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               ,
               in
               an
               Extension
               of
               the
               Cubit
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Lesser
               Sharp
               Process
               of
               the
               Vlna
               ,
               call'd
               Styloides
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Hinder-part
               of
               the
               Radius
               of
               the
               Left
               Cubit
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Neck
               of
               the
               Radius
               :
            
             
               B
               ,
               Its
               Superior
               Appendix
               ;
               in
               whose
               Upper
               Concave
               Sinus
               ,
               (
               not
               Exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               )
               Receives
               the
               Convext
               Tubercle
               of
               the
               Inferor
               Appendix
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
                 ,
                 Fig.
              
               1.
               
               G.
               
            
             
               C
               ,
               D
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Radius
               ,
               which
               is
               Articulated
               with
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Carpus
               ,
               Exprest
               ,
               Tab.
               97.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               A
               Sinus
               in
               the
               Radius
               Laterally
               which
               Receives
               the
               Inferior
               Head
               of
               the
               
                 Vlna
                 ,
                 Fig.
              
               3
               ,
               4.
               
               D
               D.
               
            
             
               F
               ,
               Another
               Sinus
               on
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Radius
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Extensor
                 Tertii
                 Internodii
                 Pollicis
              
               and
               Indicator
               ,
               is
               Entertain'd
               .
               
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               70.
               
               C
               ,
               N.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               The
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Right
               Radius
               :
            
             
               A
               ,
               It
               s
               Tubercle
               a
               little
               Below
               its
               Neck
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               Round
               Internal
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Biceps
              
               is
               Inserted
               .
               
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               65
               ,
               I.
               
            
             
               B
               ,
               A
               Smooth
               Cartilaginous
               Outside
               of
               the
               Superior
               Part
               or
               Head
               of
               the
               Radius
               ;
               which
               is
               Receiv'd
               in
               an
               almost
               Semicircular
               Sinus
               of
               the
               Upper
               End
               of
               the
               
                 Vlna
                 ,
                 Fig.
              
               4.
               
               A
               ,
               By
               this
               Articulation
               of
               the
               Radius
               with
               the
               Vlna
               ,
               the
               Former
               ,
               
                 i.
                 e.
              
               the
               Radius
               is
               Render'd
               Capable
               of
               Turning
               on
               the
               Vlna
               ,
               like
               as
               on
               an
               Axis
               ,
               the
               Vlna
               at
               that
               Time
               Remaining
               Unmov'd
               ;
               which
               Motion
               of
               the
               Radius
               together
               with
               the
               Hand
               ,
               is
               Call'd
               either
               Pronation
               or
               
                 Supination
                 :
                 Pronation
              
               is
               Perform'd
               when
               the
               Palm
               of
               the
               Hand
               is
               Turn'd
               Down
               and
               the
               Back
               of
               it
               is
               Uppermost
               ;
               and
               on
               the
               Contrary
               ,
               when
               the
               Palm
               is
               Turn'd
               Up
               and
               the
               Back
               is
               Undermost
               ,
               it
               's
               Call'd
               Supination
               .
            
             
               C
               D
               ,
               The
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Radius
               Articulated
               with
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Carpi
              
               .
            
             
               N.
               B.
               The
               Foramina
               
                 of
                 the
                 Blood-Vessels
                 of
                 the
                 Bones
                 are
                 well
                 Exprest
                 in
                 this
                 Table
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             NINETY-SEVENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             DEMONSTRATES
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Hand
             properly
             so
             call'd
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               Parts
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Hand
               ,
               next
               the
               Palm
               .
            
             
               These
               are
               Distinguish'd
               into
               Three
               Parts
               ;
               viz.
               The
               Carpus
               or
               Brachialis
               ,
               (
               1
               ,
               2
               ,
               3
               ,
               4
               ,
               &c.
               )
               the
               Metacarpus
               or
               Postbrachialis
               (
               E
               E
               E
               )
               ;
               and
               the
               Fingers
               (
               F
               G
               H
               I
               )
               ;
               First
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Carpus
               or
               Wrist
               :
               These
               are
               Eight
               in
               Number
               ,
               and
               Compos'd
               of
               Two
               Orders
               or
               Ranks
               of
               Bones
               ;
               of
               which
               the
               First
               Rank
               is
               commonly
               reckon'd
               to
               have
               Four
               1
               ,
               2
               ,
               3
               ,
               4
               ;
               the
               Two
               First
               of
               these
               Bones
               jointly
               Compose
               a
               Smooth
               Convext
               Surface
               ,
               Cover'd
               with
               a
               Cartilage
               which
               is
               receiv'd
               in
               a
               Shallow
               Sinus
               at
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Radius
               ,
               Tab.
               96.
               
               Fig.
               5
               ,
               6.
               
               C
               D
               ;
               which
               Articulation
               is
               call'd
               Arthrodia
               :
               The
               Third
               Bone
               here
               Exprest
               ,
               do's
               not
               Help
               to
               Compose
               the
               Articulation
               of
               either
               Rank
               ,
               but
               is
               Fasten'd
               on
               the
               Fourth
               by
               a
               Ligament
               ,
               which
               Conjunction
               is
               call'd
               Syndesmosis
               ;
               the
               Use
               of
               this
               Third
               Bone
               ,
               is
               to
               Help
               to
               Support
               the
               Transverse
               Ligament
               ,
               under
               which
               the
               Tendons
               Bending
               the
               Fingers
               pass
               :
               The
               Fourth
               Bone
               (
               plac'd
               between
               the
               Second
               and
               Eighth
               )
               do's
               not
               Compose
               either
               Rank
               ,
               whether
               Articulated
               with
               the
               Radius
               or
               Metacarpal
               Bones
               ,
               but
               is
               Inserted
               between
               the
               Two
               Ranks
               :
               The
               Fifth
               Bone
               here
               Exprest
               ,
               is
               not
               properly
               to
               be
               reckon'd
               among
               those
               of
               the
               Two
               Ranks
               ,
               but
               like
               the
               Fourth
               is
               plac'd
               between
               them
               ,
               and
               is
               Articulated
               to
               the
               First
               Bone
               of
               the
               Thumb
               ;
               which
               Articulation
               may
               be
               call'd
               Synarthrosis
               :
               The
               Sixth
               Bone
               here
               Exprest
               ,
               ought
               to
               be
               reckon'd
               the
               Seventh
               ,
               the
               Sixth
               not
               being
               Exprest
               in
               this
               Figure
               ,
               but
               is
               Represented
               in
               Fig.
               2.
               
               *
               :
               This
               may
               be
               properly
               reckon'd
               the
               First
               of
               the
               Second
               Rank
               ,
               to
               whose
               Lower
               Part
               the
               Metacarpal-bone
               of
               the
               Fore-Finger
               is
               Articulated
               :
               The
               Seventh
               Bone
               of
               the
               Carpus
               (
               here
               Sign'd
               the
               Sixth
               as
               above
               Noted
               )
               like
               the
               preceding
               ,
               is
               Articulated
               with
               the
               Metacarpal-bone
               of
               the
               Middle-Finger
               ,
               and
               may
               be
               properly
               Esteem'd
               the
               Second
               Bone
               of
               the
               Second
               Rank
               or
               Order
               :
               The
               Eighth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Carpus
               (
               here
               Sign'd
               Seventh
               and
               Eighth
               )
               is
               the
               Third
               and
               Last
               Bone
               of
               the
               Second
               Rank
               :
               The
               Lower-parts
               of
               the
               Metacarpal-bones
               of
               the
               Little
               and
               Ring-Fingers
               ,
               are
               Conjoin'd
               to
               this
               Eigth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Carpus
               by
               Synarthrosis
               :
               The
               Upper-parts
               of
               the
               Three
               Bones
               of
               the
               Second
               Rank
               last
               Treated
               of
               ,
               (
               not
               unlike
               the
               Two
               First
               of
               the
               First
               Rank
               )
               do
               Conjunctly
               Frame
               a
               Convext
               Oblong
               Smooth
               Surface
               on
               their
               Upper-parts
               ,
               which
               is
               receiv'd
               in
               a
               Concave
               fitted
               for
               it
               ,
               fram'd
               by
               the
               Inferior
               Parts
               of
               the
               Two
               First
               Bones
               of
               the
               First
               Rank
               :
               This
               Articulation
               made
               by
               the
               Two
               Ranks
               of
               Bones
               of
               the
               Carpus
               ,
               may
               also
               be
               call'd
               Arthrodia
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               C
               D
               ,
               The
               Four
               Bones
               of
               the
               Metacarpus
               ,
               whose
               Upper-parts
               are
               Articulated
               to
               the
               Sixth
               ,
               Seventh
               and
               Eighth
               Bones
               of
               the
               Carpus
               by
               Synarthrosis
               ,
               and
               their
               Inferior
               Parts
               with
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Fingers
               ,
               by
               Arthrodia
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Interstitia
               of
               the
               Metacarpal-bones
               ,
               wherein
               the
               
                 Musculi
                 Inter-Ossei
              
               are
               plac'd
               ;
               the
               Internal
               Parts
               of
               these
               Bones
               towards
               the
               Palm
               are
               Concave
               ,
               as
               Appears
               in
               this
               Figure
               ;
               but
               their
               External
               Parts
               towards
               the
               Back
               of
               the
               Hand
               are
               Convext
               ,
               as
               is
               Represented
               by
               Fig.
               2
               ;
               the
               like
               may
               be
               Observ'd
               in
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Fingers
               and
               Thumb
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               F
               ,
               &c.
               The
               First
               Internodes
               ,
               or
               Bones
               of
               the
               Fingers
               and
               Thumb
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Second
               Internodes
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               H
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Third
               and
               last
               Internodes
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Fingers
               and
               Thumb
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               Articulations
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Fingers
               with
               each
               other
               ,
               and
               the
               Two
               last
               Bones
               of
               the
               Thumb
               ,
               is
               by
               Ginglymus
               ;
               but
               the
               Fingers
               are
               Articulated
               with
               the
               Metacarpal-bones
               by
               Arthrodia
               ,
               as
               above
               Noted
               .
            
             
               9
               ,
               10
               ,
               11
               ,
               The
               
                 Ossa
                 Sesamoidea
              
               ;
               of
               which
               Ten
               are
               said
               to
               belong
               to
               each
               Hand
               ,
               viz.
               Two
               of
               the
               Thumb
               plac'd
               on
               the
               Inferior
               and
               Internal
               Part
               of
               its
               First
               Bone
               F
               ;
               the
               other
               Eight
               are
               in
               like
               Manner
               plac'd
               on
               the
               Inferior
               and
               Internal
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Metacarpi
              
               .
               In
               Young
               Bodies
               these
               Bones
               are
               not
               found
               ,
               as
               in
               Others
               .
               They
               are
               apt
               to
               be
               lost
               in
               Freeing
               the
               Bones
               ,
               whether
               by
               Boyling
               or
               otherwise
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Bones
               as
               they
               Appear
               on
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Right
               Hand
               ;
               for
               whose
               Explanation
               Consult
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               12
               ,
               13
               ,
               14
               ,
               15
               ,
               16
               ,
               17
               ,
               18
               ,
               19
               ,
               The
               Bones
               of
               the
               Carpus
               Separated
               from
               each
               other
               .
            
             
             
               
            
             
             
               
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             NINETY-EIGHTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             WE
             come
             now
             to
             the
             Two
             Bones
             which
             Compose
             the
             Lower-part
             of
             the
             Spina
             ,
             namely
             the
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             and
             Coccygis
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               The
               Outside
               and
               Back-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               Compos'd
               of
               Four
               or
               Five
               Bones
               like
               Vertebrae
               in
               the
               Foetus
               ;
               all
               which
               are
               United
               in
               the
               Adult
               ,
               and
               some
               Marks
               of
               their
               Conjunction
               only
               Appear
               ,
               especially
               on
               its
               Internal
               Concave
               Part.
               
                 Vid.
                 Fig.
              
               2.
               
               D.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               &c.
               Some
               Vestigia
               or
               Marks
               of
               the
               Conjunctions
               of
               the
               Ascending
               and
               Descending
               Process's
               of
               the
               Five
               Vertebrae
               ,
               which
               Compose
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Foramina
               Fram'd
               by
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Transverse
               Process's
               ,
               and
               chiefly
               fill'd
               with
               a
               Cartilaginous
               Body
               ;
               some
               small
               Branches
               of
               Nerves
               only
               passing
               out
               of
               them
               to
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Glutaeus
                 Maximus
              
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               C
               ,
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Sinus's
               Fram'd
               on
               each
               Side
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               ,
               by
               the
               Meeting
               of
               its
               Transverse
               Process's
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Superior
               Surface
               of
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               ,
               on
               which
               is
               plac'd
               the
               Last
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Loins
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Specus
               or
               Great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               Sacrum
               ,
               being
               continued
               from
               that
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Back
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Nerves
               that
               Help
               to
               Compose
               the
               
                 Cauda
                 Equina
              
               Descend
               to
               their
               Egress
               ,
               thro'
               the
               Internal
               Foramina
               of
               this
               Bone
               ,
               Fig.
               2.
               
               B
               B
               B.
               
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               A
               Sinus
               Fram'd
               in
               the
               Oblique
               Ascending
               Process
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               ,
               which
               receives
               the
               Oblique
               Descending
               Process
               of
               the
               Last
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Loins
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               Those
               Parts
               of
               the
               Sacrum
               join'd
               to
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Ilii
              
               by
               the
               Interposition
               of
               a
               Cartilage
               ;
               which
               Conjunction
               is
               call'd
               Syncondrosis
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               Spines
               of
               the
               Sacrum
               .
            
             
               k
               k
               ,
               Two
               Process's
               of
               the
               Sacrum
               ,
               Connected
               to
               the
               Two
               Process's
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Coccygis
              
               ,
               Fig.
               3.
               
               A
               ,
               B.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Inside
               or
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Smooth
               Inside
               of
               the
               Five
               Vertebrae
               which
               Compose
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Foramina
               by
               which
               the
               Nerves
               pass
               out
               from
               its
               Specus
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               partly
               Cartilaginous
               and
               partly
               Bony
               Connection
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Sacrum
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Sacrum
               join'd
               to
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Coccygis
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Back-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Coccygis
              
               ,
               Compos'd
               of
               Five
               Bones
               join'd
               to
               each
               other
               by
               Syncondrosis
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               B
               ,
               Two
               Ascending
               Process's
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Coccygis
              
               ,
               join'd
               to
               those
               of
               the
               Sacrum
               ,
               Fig.
               1.
               k
               k.
               1
               ,
               2
               ,
               3
               ,
               4
               ,
               5
               ,
               The
               several
               Bones
               which
               Frame
               the
               
                 Os
                 Coccygis
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Coccygis
              
               ,
               whose
               Characters
               are
               Explain'd
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             NINETY-NINTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               Internal
               Concave
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Innominatum
              
               ,
               which
               in
               the
               Foetus
               is
               Manifestly
               Compos'd
               of
               Three
               Bones
               ;
               but
               become
               so
               United
               in
               the
               Adult
               ,
               as
               that
               no
               Marks
               of
               their
               Cartilaginous
               Conjunction
               do's
               than
               Appear
               .
               This
               Bone
               is
               by
               some
               call'd
               
                 Ilium
                 ,
                 Os
                 Coxendicis
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Os
                 Anchae
              
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               Lumbare
               :
               For
               the
               better
               Description
               of
               it
               ,
               Anatomists
               have
               given
               distinct
               Names
               to
               the
               several
               Parts
               of
               it
               ,
               which
               Appear
               in
               the
               Foetus
               ,
               as
               follow
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               C
               D
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Innominatum
              
               ,
               call'd
               Ilium
               :
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Concave
               Part
               of
               it
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Iliacus
                 Internus
              
               is
               plac'd
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Costa
                 Ilii
              
               :
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Spine
               of
               the
               Ilium
               :
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Foramina
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               which
               pass
               into
               its
               Meditullium
               or
               Internal
               Part.
               
            
             
               D
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Ilium
              
               join'd
               to
               the
               Sacrum
               by
               a
               Cartilaginous
               Interposition
               ,
               which
               Conjunction
               is
               call'd
               Syncondrosis
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Innominatum
              
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Os
                 Pubis
              
               or
               Pectinis
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Ischium
              
               ,
               Compos'd
               by
               that
               Bone
               in
               Conjunction
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Pubis
              
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Pubis
              
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Third
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Innominatum
              
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Os
                 Ischium
              
               and
               
                 Os
                 Coxendicis
              
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               A
               Prominencé
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Ilium
              
               ,
               whence
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Rectus
                 Femoris
              
               do's
               Arise
               :
               
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               75.
               
               G.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               External
               Convext
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Innominatum
              
               :
            
             
               A
               B
               B
               ,
               Its
               Cavity
               ,
               wherein
               the
               Head
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Femoris
              
               is
               receiv'd
               ,
               call'd
               Acetabulum
               and
               Pixis
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               A
               Sinus
               Excavated
               in
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Acetabulum
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Mucilaginous
               Gland
               is
               plac'd
               :
               
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               74.1
               .
            
             
               The
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Rotundum
              
               Figur'd
               Tab.
               74.
               k
               ,
               Arises
               from
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Acetabulum
               towards
               its
               External
               Margin
               ;
               whence
               it
               passes
               Upwards
               to
               its
               Termination
               in
               the
               Head
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Femoris
              
               ;
               which
               Disposition
               of
               that
               Ligament
               ,
               is
               no
               small
               Artifice
               in
               Nature
               ,
               in
               preventing
               too
               great
               a
               Coalision
               of
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Acetabulum
               with
               the
               Head
               of
               the
               Thigh-bone
               ,
               in
               Walking
               ,
               Running
               ,
               &c.
               as
               before
               Noted
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               External
               Margin
               of
               the
               Acetabulum
               ,
               whence
               the
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Latum
              
               do's
               Arise
               ;
               which
               Ligament
               is
               Implanted
               in
               the
               Neck
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Femoris
              
               .
            
             
               C
               D
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Dorsum
                 Ilii
              
               .
            
             
               D
               Superior
               ,
               The
               
                 Spina
                 Ilii
              
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               Divers
               Processes
               towards
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Ilium
               ,
               where
               it
               s
               other
               Side
               ,
               Exprest
               in
               the
               Former
               Figure
               D
               ,
               is
               join'd
               with
               the
               Sacrum
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               A
               Sinus
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Ilium
              
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Pyriformis
              
               passes
               towards
               its
               Implantation
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               An
               Acute
               Process
               of
               the
               Ischium
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               An
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Ischium
               ,
               to
               which
               a
               Ligament
               Arising
               from
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               is
               Fasten'd
               :
               From
               this
               Appendix
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Quadratus
                 Femoris
              
               ,
               and
               the
               Muscles
               Bending
               the
               Tibia
               ,
               do
               Arise
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               That
               Part
               where
               the
               
                 Os
                 Ischium
              
               joins
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Pubis
              
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Pubis
              
               or
               Pectinis
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               Great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               Ischium
               and
               Pubis
               .
            
             
               N.
               B.
               
                 The
                 Three
                 Bones
                 which
                 Compose
                 the
              
               Os
               Innominatum
               ,
               
                 all
                 meet
                 and
                 join
                 in
                 the
              
               Acetabulum
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             HUNDREDTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             SHEWS
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Foetus
             of
             one
             Month
             to
             Seven
             Months
             after
             Conception
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               A
               Skeleton
               of
               a
               Foetus
               about
               a
               Month
               after
               Conception
               ;
               in
               which
               the
               Cartilaginous
               Rudiments
               of
               Bones
               have
               divers
               little
               Bony
               Specks
               or
               Ossifications
               in
               the
               Arms
               and
               Legs
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Skeleton
               of
               a
               Foetus
               of
               Six
               Weeks
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Rudiments
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Artus
               or
               Limbs
               do
               Appear
               in
               Bony
               Specks
               ,
               somewhat
               Larger
               than
               those
               of
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               ;
               the
               Claviculae
               being
               Intirely
               Bony
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3
               ,
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Fore
               and
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Skeleton
               of
               a
               Foetus
               of
               about
               Three
               Months
               ;
               in
               which
               the
               Beginnings
               of
               all
               the
               Bones
               Appear
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Skeleton
               of
               a
               Foetus
               of
               about
               Four
               Months
               ;
               in
               which
               the
               Bones
               with
               their
               Cartilaginous
               Appendages
               do
               Appear
               ,
               without
               any
               considerable
               Difference
               (
               except
               in
               Magnitude
               )
               from
               those
               in
               the
               Two
               preceding
               Figures
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               The
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Skeleton
               of
               a
               Foetus
               of
               about
               Four
               Months
               after
               Conception
               .
            
             
               In
               the
               Embryo
               ,
               or
               First
               Rudiments
               of
               the
               Foetus
               within
               the
               Womb
               ;
               those
               Parts
               which
               afterwards
               become
               Bones
               ,
               are
               than
               Intirely
               Cartilaginous
               ,
               till
               about
               the
               End
               of
               the
               First
               Month
               after
               Impregnation
               ;
               at
               which
               Time
               divers
               Bony
               Specks
               or
               Ossifications
               begin
               to
               Appear
               about
               the
               Middle
               of
               the
               Larger
               Bones
               of
               the
               Limbs
               ,
               especially
               in
               the
               Claviculae
               .
               Two
               Months
               after
               Conception
               ,
               the
               Whole
               Head
               do's
               not
               afford
               any
               Bony
               Appearance
               ,
               except
               the
               Third
               Pair
               of
               Bones
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               and
               the
               Two
               Bones
               which
               Frame
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               which
               about
               this
               Time
               Appear
               Distinct.
               The
               Middle-parts
               of
               the
               Claviculae
               are
               Bony
               after
               the
               First
               Six
               Weeks
               .
               The
               Shoulder-blades
               are
               without
               any
               Proper
               Figure
               about
               the
               Second
               Month
               after
               Conception
               ,
               at
               which
               Time
               their
               Ossifications
               begin
               in
               their
               Middle-parts
               :
               About
               the
               Third
               Month
               their
               Spinal
               Process's
               begin
               to
               be
               Bony
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               their
               Coracoidal
               and
               Short
               Process's
               :
               Near
               this
               Time
               the
               Whole
               Spine
               ,
               or
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               Back
               ,
               Loins
               ,
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               and
               Coccygis
               ,
               begin
               to
               be
               Bony
               .
               The
               Sixth
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Back
               Internally
               ,
               some
               Bony
               Specks
               in
               each
               Vertebra
               Appear
               ,
               and
               Gradually
               Lessen
               themselves
               to
               the
               Fifth
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               ;
               the
               like
               Ossifications
               may
               be
               Observ'd
               to
               become
               Less
               and
               Less
               in
               each
               Vertebra
               ,
               towards
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Spine
               ,
               to
               the
               Third
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               .
               The
               Incurvation
               or
               Bending
               Forwards
               of
               the
               Whole
               Spine
               at
               this
               Time
               ,
               is
               Remarkable
               .
               The
               Four
               Upper
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               afford
               some
               Bony
               Appearances
               Laterally
               ,
               about
               the
               Third
               Month
               ;
               near
               which
               Time
               the
               Bodies
               of
               the
               Three
               Upper
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               ,
               seem
               to
               Frame
               One
               Bone
               ,
               but
               its
               Lateral
               Parts
               are
               not
               Bony
               till
               the
               Fourth
               Month
               ;
               at
               which
               Time
               the
               Bodies
               of
               the
               Third
               and
               Fourth
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               begin
               to
               Appear
               .
               The
               Fifth
               and
               Sixth
               Month
               ,
               the
               Epistropheus
               or
               Second
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               has
               a
               Bony
               Speck
               ;
               but
               its
               Tooth-like
               Process
               is
               yet
               Cartilaginous
               :
               The
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Atlas
               or
               First
               Vertebra
               is
               yet
               wanting
               .
               The
               
                 Os
                 Coccygis
              
               is
               Cartilaginous
               till
               about
               the
               Eighth
               or
               Ninth
               Month
               ;
               at
               which
               Time
               ,
               in
               its
               Internal
               Part
               ,
               call'd
               its
               Body
               ,
               Two
               Offeous
               Specks
               Appear
               about
               the
               Bigness
               of
               Two
               great
               Pin's
               Heads
               .
               All
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Spine
               of
               the
               Foetus
               (
               at
               this
               Time
               )
               Appear
               Compos'd
               of
               Three
               Bones
               ;
               First
               that
               of
               the
               Bodies
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               Forwards
               ;
               Secondly
               its
               Two
               Lateral
               Parts
               which
               Frame
               their
               Transverse
               Process's
               :
               Their
               Spinal
               Process's
               not
               Appearing
               Bony
               till
               some
               Time
               after
               the
               Partus
               ;
               whence
               (
               as
               Spigelius
               Observes
               )
               Rope-Dancers
               ,
               Tumblers
               ,
               &c.
               by
               early
               Practice
               whilst
               they
               are
               Children
               ,
               the
               Spines
               of
               the
               Back-bone
               give
               way
               to
               the
               Inflection
               of
               their
               Vertebrae
               Backwards
               ;
               the
               common
               Position
               of
               the
               Spines
               being
               Obliquely
               Descending
               ,
               they
               do
               thereby
               incline
               more
               Horizontal
               ,
               and
               their
               Points
               are
               also
               rendred
               more
               Obtuse
               .
            
             
               The
               
                 Os
                 Innominatum
              
               about
               the
               Second
               Month
               after
               Conception
               is
               Cartilaginous
               ,
               except
               that
               Part
               of
               it
               call'd
               Ilium
               ,
               where
               it
               Frames
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Acetabulum
               ,
               it
               has
               a
               Bony
               Speck
               about
               the
               Bigness
               of
               a
               Common
               Pin's
               Head.
               In
               the
               Fourth
               Month
               the
               
                 Os
                 Coxendicis
              
               or
               Ischium
               ,
               (
               another
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Innominatum
              
               )
               has
               a
               Bony
               Appearance
               ,
               where
               it
               meets
               the
               Ilium
               within
               the
               Acetabulum
               ,
               not
               exceeding
               the
               Head
               of
               a
               common
               Pin
               in
               Magnitude
               ;
               the
               like
               may
               be
               Observ'd
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Pubis
              
               within
               the
               Acetabulum
               :
               These
               Three
               Bones
               which
               Compose
               the
               Innominatum
               ,
               remain
               Distinguish'd
               in
               the
               Foetus
               by
               a
               Cartilaginous
               Interposition
               ,
               which
               continues
               till
               the
               Seventh
               Year
               ,
               at
               which
               Age
               those
               Cartilaginous
               Marks
               Disappear
               .
               In
               the
               Second
               Month
               all
               the
               Ribs
               except
               the
               First
               and
               Last
               ,
               are
               so
               harden'd
               ,
               that
               the
               Channels
               (
               Exprest
               Fig.
               4.
               
               Tab.
               94.
               
               E
               ,
               )
               or
               
               Sinus's
               for
               the
               Intercostal
               Blood-Vessels
               and
               Nerves
               ,
               Appear
               .
            
             
               The
               Time
               of
               the
               Ossification
               of
               the
               Sternum
               is
               uncertain
               ;
               but
               Eustachius
               is
               mistaken
               in
               saying
               ,
               It
               's
               altogether
               Cartilaginous
               in
               Children
               Newly
               Born.
               Kerckringius
               affirms
               he
               never
               Diffected
               a
               Foetus
               of
               Four
               Months
               ,
               but
               he
               found
               some
               Little
               Bony-Bodies
               in
               the
               Sternum
               .
               Their
               Number
               and
               Figure
               Varying
               in
               most
               Subjects
               ,
               we
               need
               not
               say
               more
               of
               them
               in
               this
               place
               .
               The
               Ossification
               of
               the
               Artus
               is
               very
               Early
               ,
               as
               Appears
               by
               the
               First
               and
               Second
               Figures
               of
               this
               Table
               ,
               where
               the
               Middle-parts
               of
               the
               Bones
               First
               Appear
               in
               little
               White
               Specks
               a
               Month
               after
               Conception
               ,
               as
               above
               Noted
               ;
               but
               some
               of
               their
               Appendages
               are
               Intirely
               Cartilaginous
               for
               some
               Months
               after
               the
               Birth
               .
               The
               Eight
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               Carpus
               become
               Bony
               some
               Time
               after
               the
               Birth
               .
               The
               Appendages
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Metacarpus
               and
               Fingers
               ,
               continue
               Intirely
               Cartilaginous
               some
               Months
               after
               the
               Birth
               ;
               the
               like
               may
               be
               Observ'd
               of
               the
               Feet
               and
               Toes
               ;
               the
               Patellae
               in
               like
               Manner
               are
               Intirely
               Cartilaginous
               some
               Months
               after
               the
               Birth
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             HUNDRED
             &
             FIRST
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             REPRESENTS
             the
             Fore-parts
             of
             the
             Bones
             '
             of
             a
             Foetus
             of
             Nine
             Months
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             The
             Fronticulus
             fram'd
             at
             the
             Meeting
             of
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Sinciput
             and
             Frontal
             Bones
             ,
             it
             being
             a
             Discontinuation
             of
             those
             Bones
             in
             the
             Foetus
             ;
             which
             continues
             in
             the
             Infant
             for
             Divers
             Months
             ,
             and
             sometimes
             Years
             .
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             The
             Two
             Frontal-bones
             .
          
           
             C
             C
             ,
             Parts
             of
             the
             Bregma
             or
             Sincipital-bones
             .
          
           
             D
             D
             ,
             The
             Sagittal
             Suture
             Extended
             to
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Nose
             .
          
           
             E
             E
             ,
             The
             Coronal
             Suture
             ;
             they
             are
             call'd
             Sutures
             in
             Respect
             of
             their
             Appearance
             in
             the
             Adult
             ,
             but
             here
             in
             the
             Foetus
             they
             rather
             seem
             to
             Deserve
             the
             Term
             Harmonia
             ;
             they
             Approaching
             to
             simple
             Lines
             ,
             and
             are
             not
             Indented
             till
             the
             Bones
             become
             Hard
             ;
             but
             since
             a
             Membrane
             Interposes
             ,
             Spigelius
             call's
             this
             Conjunction
             in
             Infants
             Synymensis
             .
          
           
             F
             ,
             The
             Cartilage
             of
             the
             Nose
             cut
             off
             ;
          
           
             G
             ,
             It
             s
             Septum
             .
          
           
             H
             H
             ,
             The
             Upper-jaw
             ,
             or
             properly
             the
             Fourth
             Bone
             of
             the
             Upper
             Jaw
             .
          
           
             I
             I
             ,
             The
             Two
             Bones
             which
             Compose
             the
             Lower
             Jaw
             ;
          
           
             K
             ,
             Their
             Suture
             ,
             or
             more
             properly
             their
             Conjunction
             by
             Synchondrosis
             .
          
           
             L
             L
             ,
             The
             External
             or
             Stony
             Parts
             of
             the
             Teeth
             ,
             yet
             lying
             within
             their
             Alveoli
             or
             Sockets
             ,
             and
             Cover'd
             with
             the
             Periostium
             of
             the
             Jaw-bone
             :
             The
             Time
             of
             their
             Breaking
             forth
             is
             uncertain
             ,
             and
             the
             Order
             they
             Appear
             in
             ,
             is
             commonly
             well
             known
             ;
             yet
             in
             this
             too
             they
             sometimes
             vary
             ,
             and
             the
             
               Dentes
               Canini
            
             Appear
             before
             the
             Incisores
             ;
             if
             their
             Eruption
             is
             Tedious
             ,
             the
             Gums
             thro'
             frequent
             Use
             are
             so
             harden'd
             ,
             as
             to
             Occasion
             ill
             Symptoms
             ;
             in
             which
             Case
             not
             only
             the
             Gums
             ,
             but
             the
             Periostium
             ,
             which
             at
             that
             Time
             immediately
             Cover's
             the
             Upper-parts
             of
             the
             Sockets
             ,
             is
             to
             be
             Divided
             by
             a
             Sharp
             Instrument
             ;
             whereby
             the
             Imprison'd
             Tooth
             is
             set
             at
             Liberty
             ,
             and
             the
             Tension
             of
             the
             Periostium
             Reliev'd
             .
             In
             Practising
             this
             Operation
             ,
             we
             ought
             to
             have
             Regard
             to
             the
             Time
             of
             the
             Eruption
             of
             those
             Teeth
             we
             cut
             upon
             ;
             for
             those
             only
             ought
             to
             have
             their
             Gums
             and
             Periostium
             Divided
             ,
             which
             Appear
             somewhat
             Prominent
             :
             By
             too
             early
             Dividing
             of
             those
             Parts
             they
             Unite
             again
             ,
             and
             their
             Cicatrice
             Render's
             them
             more
             Obstinate
             to
             the
             Eruption
             afterwards
             ,
             especially
             if
             the
             Periostium
             its
             self
             was
             not
             Divided
             before
             .
          
           
             M
             ,
             The
             Left
             Clavicle
             .
          
           
             N
             ,
             The
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             Right
             Scapula
             .
          
           
             O
             ,
             The
             Acromion
             of
             the
             Scapula
             join'd
             with
             the
             Extremity
             of
             the
             Clavicle
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             The
             Cartilaginous
             Appendix
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             .
          
           
             Q
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             .
          
           
             R
             R
             ,
             The
             Ulnae
             .
          
           
             S
             S
             ,
             The
             Radii
             .
          
           
             T
             T
             ,
             The
             Cartilages
             which
             Compose
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Carpus
             on
             both
             Sides
             .
          
           
             V
             V
             ,
             The
             
               Ossa
               Metacarpi
            
             ,
             whose
             Extremities
             are
             Cartilaginous
             .
          
           
             W
             W
             ,
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             whose
             Knuckles
             or
             Appendages
             are
             Cartilaginous
             .
          
           
             X
             ,
             The
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ;
          
           
             Y
             ,
             Those
             of
             the
             Back
             ;
          
           
             Z
             ,
             Those
             of
             the
             Loins
             .
          
           
             1
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             .
          
           
             2
             ,
             The
             Coccygis
             .
          
           
             3
             ,
             The
             Ilium
             .
          
           
             4
             ,
             Ischium
             .
          
           
             5
             ,
             Pubis
             .
          
           
             6
             ,
             6
             ,
             The
             Sternum
             with
             Divers
             little
             Bony
             Bodies
             .
          
           
             7
             ,
             7
             ,
             The
             True-ribs
             .
          
           
             8
             ,
             8
             ,
             &c.
             The
             Bastard-ribs
             .
          
           
             9
             ,
             The
             Ensiformal
             Cartilage
             of
             the
             Sternum
             .
          
           
             10
             ,
             The
             Thigh-bone
             ;
          
           
             11
             ,
             Its
             
               Trochanter
               Major
            
             yet
             Cartilaginous
             .
          
           
             12
             ,
             The
             
               Trochanter
               Minor
            
             in
             like
             manner
             Cartilaginous
             .
          
           
             13
             ,
             The
             Cartilage
             which
             makes
             the
             Patella
             .
          
           
             14
             ,
             The
             Tibia
             .
          
           
             15
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Surae
            
             or
             Fibula
             .
          
           
             16
             ,
             The
             Cartilages
             which
             make
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Tarsus
             .
          
           
             17
             ,
             The
             
               Ossa
               Metatarsi
            
             .
          
           
             18
             ,
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Toes
             ,
             which
             are
             Cartilaginous
             at
             their
             Extremities
             ,
             like
             those
             of
             the
             Fingers
             .
          
           
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             HUNDRED
             &
             SECOND
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             IS
             the
             Back-part
             of
             the
             Skeleton
             of
             a
             Foetus
             of
             Nine
             Months
             .
          
           
             A
             ,
             Part
             of
             the
             Sagittal
             Suture
             .
          
           
             B
             B
             ,
             The
             
               Ossa
               Bregmatis
            
             .
          
           
             C
             C
             ,
             The
             
               Sutura
               Lambdoides
            
             .
          
           
             D
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Occipitis
            
             which
             commonly
             in
             the
             Foetus
             is
             Divided
             into
             Four
             Bones
             ;
             Three
             of
             which
             Appear
             in
             this
             Figure
             ;
             the
             Fourth
             lying
             between
             the
             
               Ossa
               Petrosa
            
             ,
             and
             is
             join'd
             to
             the
             
               Os
               Sphenoides
            
             ,
             Tab.
             92.
             
             Fig.
             2.
             
             P.
             
          
           
             E
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Temporum
            
             or
             Squamosum
             not
             yet
             join'd
             with
             that
             Part
             or
             Process
             of
             it
             ,
             call'd
             Petrosum
             .
          
           
             F
             F
             ,
             The
             Lower
             Jaw
             .
          
           
             G
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Iugale
            
             .
          
           
             H
             H
             ,
             &c.
             The
             Seven
             Vertebrae
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
          
           
             I
             I
             ,
             &c.
             
             Twelve
             of
             the
             Thorax
             ,
          
           
             K
             K
             ,
             &c.
             Five
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             without
             their
             Spinal
             Process's
             .
          
           
             L
             ,
             The
             Right
             Scapula
             .
          
           
             M.
             Part
             of
             the
             Right
             Clavicula
             .
          
           
             N
             N
             ,
             &c.
             The
             True
             Ribs
             .
          
           
             O
             O
             ,
             &c.
             The
             Bastard
             Ribs
             .
          
           
             P
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Humeri
            
             .
          
           
             Q
             ,
             The
             Ulna
             .
          
           
             R
             ,
             The
             Radius
             .
          
           
             S
             ,
             The
             Cartilages
             which
             Compose
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Carpus
             .
          
           
             T
             ,
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Metacarpus
             .
          
           
             V
             ,
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Fingers
             .
          
           
             W
             ,
             The
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             ;
          
           
             X
             ,
             The
             Ilium
             ,
          
           
             Y
             ,
             The
             Ischium
             ,
          
           
             Z
             ,
             The
             Pubis
             ,
          
           
             1
             ,
             The
             Thigh-bone
             .
          
           
             2
             ,
             The
             Cartilaginous
             Appendages
             of
             the
             Lower-part
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ,
             and
             Upper-parts
             of
             the
             Tibia
             and
             Fibula
             .
          
           
             3
             ,
             The
             Tibia
             ,
          
           
             4
             ,
             The
             Fibula
             .
          
           
             5
             ,
             The
             Cartilages
             which
             Frame
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Tarsus
             .
          
           
             6
             ,
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Metatarsus
             .
          
           
             7
             ,
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             Toes
             .
          
           
             N.
             B
             
               There
               are
               divers
               Remarkable
               Parts
               of
               this
               Figure
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               of
               the
               preceding
               Table
               ,
               which
               have
               escap'd
               Lettering
               :
               As
               the
               Spines
               of
               the
            
             Scapulae
             ,
             
               Cartilaginous
               Appendages
               of
               the
            
             Ossa
             Humeri
             ,
             Ulnae
             ,
             Radii
             ,
             Femoris
             ,
             Tibiae
             Fibulae
             ,
             
               &c.
               but
               most
               of
               these
               being
               already
               Letter'd
               on
               other
               Figures
               of
               the
               Bones
               ,
               we
               shall
               Omit
               their
               Repetition
               on
               these
               ,
               since
               the
               Additional
               Letters
               already
               made
               with
               a
               Pen
               on
               these
               Figures
               ,
               are
               so
               Numerous
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             HUNDRED
             &
             THIRD
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             THE
             Bones
             of
             the
             Inferior
             Artus
             or
             Limbs
             are
             Divided
             into
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             Shank
             ,
             and
             Foot.
             
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               The
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Left
               Thigh-bone
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Thigh-bone
               ,
               call'd
               its
               Head
               ,
               cover'd
               with
               a
               Cartilage
               ,
               which
               is
               receiv'd
               in
               the
               Acetabulum
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Innominatum
              
               ,
               Tab.
               99.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
               A
               B
               B.
               
            
             
               The
               Round
               Ligament
               Arising
               from
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Acetabulum
               ,
               is
               Inserted
               near
               the
               Middle
               of
               this
               Head
               of
               the
               Thigh-bone
               ,
               Fig.
               2.
               
               B.
               This
               Articulation
               of
               the
               Thigh-bone
               with
               the
               Hip-bone
               ,
               is
               call'd
               Enarthrosis
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Trochanter
                 Major
              
               ,
               which
               in
               Young
               Bodies
               Appears
               join'd
               with
               a
               Cartilage
               to
               the
               Thigh-bone
               ,
               and
               is
               therefore
               call'd
               an
               Epiphysis
               or
               Appendix
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Cervix
               or
               Neck
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Femoris
              
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Latum
              
               is
               Fasten'd
               .
            
             
               D
               E
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               Appendix
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Femoris
              
               ,
               Framing
               Two
               Heads
               :
               The
               Smooth
               Cartilaginous
               Surface
               which
               Appears
               between
               them
               ,
               receives
               the
               Internal
               Surface
               of
               the
               Patella
               ,
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               F
               ,
               A
               Sinus
               whence
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Poplitaeus
              
               has
               its
               Tendinous
               Origin
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Posterior
               Part
               of
               the
               Right
               Thigh-bone
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               It
               s
               Head.
               
            
             
               B
               ,
               A
               little
               Depressure
               ,
               where
               the
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Rotundum
              
               is
               Implanted
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Lesser
               Trochanter
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Psoas
              
               and
               
                 Iliacus
                 Internus
              
               ,
               are
               Inserted
               .
            
             
               D
               E
               ,
               The
               Two
               Inferior
               Heads
               of
               the
               Thigh-bone
               ,
               which
               are
               receiv'd
               in
               Two
               Shallow
               Depressures
               ,
               Fram'd
               by
               Two
               Semilunary
               Cartilages
               ,
               plac'd
               on
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Tibia
               :
               The
               Sinus
               between
               these
               Two
               Heads
               ,
               receives
               a
               small
               Prominence
               on
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Tibia
               ,
               especially
               in
               its
               Flexion
               :
               This
               Articulation
               of
               the
               Thigh
               with
               the
               Tibia
               ,
               is
               by
               Gynglimus
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Great
               Trochanter
               ,
               where
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Pyriformis
                 ,
                 Marsupialis
                 ,
                 Obturator
                 Externus
                 ,
              
               and
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Glutaei
                 Medii
                 ,
                 Minimi
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Quadratus
                 Femoris
              
               ,
               are
               Inserted
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Linea
                 Aspera
              
               ,
               to
               which
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Quadratus
                 Femoris
                 ,
                 Glutaeus
                 Maximus
                 ,
              
               and
               the
               Greatest
               Part
               of
               the
               Triceps
               are
               Inserted
               :
               The
               
                 Vastus
                 Externus
              
               and
               Internus
               ,
               do
               chiefly
               Arise
               from
               the
               
                 Linea
                 Aspera
              
               .
            
             
               In
               some
               Bodies
               ,
               especially
               Aged
               ,
               we
               find
               Two
               
                 Ossa
                 Sesamoidea
              
               on
               the
               Superior
               Parts
               of
               the
               Two
               Lower
               Heads
               of
               the
               Thigh-bone
               D
               E
               :
               The
               Office
               of
               which
               ,
               is
               to
               Defend
               the
               Bending
               Tendons
               of
               the
               Tibia
               from
               too
               great
               a
               Collision
               on
               those
               Heads
               of
               the
               Bone
               ,
               which
               they
               would
               else
               be
               Subject
               to
               :
               The
               like
               Ossification
               I
               have
               more
               than
               once
               Observ'd
               in
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Peroneus
                 Longus
              
               ,
               at
               its
               Contortion
               over
               the
               
                 Os
                 Calcis
              
               towards
               the
               Bottom
               of
               the
               Foot.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3
               ,
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Former
               Figure
               Represents
               the
               External
               Rough
               Part
               of
               the
               Patella
               ;
               the
               Latter
               the
               Internal
               Smooth
               Surface
               of
               the
               same
               Bone
               cover'd
               with
               a
               Cartilage
               ;
               which
               is
               applied
               to
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Juncture
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Femoris
              
               with
               the
               Tibia
               ,
               where
               it
               's
               Fasten'd
               by
               the
               Tendon
               of
               all
               the
               Extending
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Tibia
               ;
               wherefore
               by
               Spigelius
               its
               Conjunction
               is
               call'd
               Syntenosis
               .
               The
               Use
               of
               the
               Patella
               (
               by
               some
               call'd
               
                 Rotula
                 ,
                 Mola
                 ,
                 Scutum
                 ,
                 Os
                 Scutiforme
                 ,
              
               &c.
               )
               is
               to
               prevent
               the
               Thigh-bone
               from
               Thrusting
               out
               Forwards
               ,
               especially
               in
               Walking
               down
               any
               Steep
               Place
               ,
               and
               from
               Pressing
               on
               the
               Tendons
               of
               the
               Extending
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Tibia
               :
               It
               also
               Defends
               the
               Articulation
               of
               the
               Thigh
               and
               Tibia
               ,
               especially
               in
               Kneeling
               ;
               and
               like
               a
               Pully
               Acts
               on
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Femoris
              
               ,
               to
               Extend
               the
               Tibia
               when
               Inflected
               .
            
             
             
               
            
             
             
               
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             HUNDRED
             &
             FOURTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               SHEWS
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Right
               Tibia
               ,
               or
               
                 Major
                 Focile
              
               of
               the
               Leg.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               sharp
               Edge
               on
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Tibia
               ,
               call'd
               its
               Spina
               .
            
             
               A
               Superior
               ,
               A
               Prominence
               on
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Tibia
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               Great
               Tendon
               of
               the
               Muscles
               ,
               Extending
               the
               Leg
               ,
               is
               Inserted
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               A
               Process
               in
               the
               Middle
               of
               the
               Upper
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Tibia
               ,
               to
               which
               a
               Ligament
               is
               Inserted
               ,
               proceeding
               from
               the
               Hollow
               or
               Sinus
               ,
               between
               the
               Heads
               of
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Thigh-bone
               ,
               Exprest
               Fig.
               2.
               in
               the
               preceding
               Table
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Malleolus
                 Internus
              
               ,
               Fram'd
               by
               the
               Lower
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Tibia
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Left
               Tibia
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Tibia
               whence
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Perforans
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Flexor
                 Tertii
                 Internodii
                 Digitorum
                 Pedis
              
               ,
               do's
               Arise
               ,
            
             
               B
               ,
               A
               Prominence
               in
               its
               Upper
               Appendix
               ,
               to
               which
               a
               Ligament
               is
               Fasten'd
               ,
               continued
               from
               the
               Sinus
               between
               the
               Two
               Heads
               of
               the
               Lower
               Appendix
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Femoris
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               A
               Sinus
               in
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Tibia
               and
               its
               Appendix
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Fibula
               is
               receiv'd
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Another
               Small
               Sinus
               in
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Tibia
               ,
               wherein
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Tibialis
                 Posticus
              
               passes
               towards
               its
               Insertion
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               A
               Prominence
               receiv'd
               in
               a
               Shallow
               Depressure
               of
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Fibula
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Malleolus
                 Internus
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Left
               Fibula
               with
               its
               Lower
               End
               Uppermost
               ,
               it
               's
               also
               call'd
               
                 Os
                 Surae
                 ,
                 Canna
                 Minor
                 ,
                 Focile
                 Minus
                 ,
              
               and
               
                 Os
                 Peronae
              
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               Part
               of
               the
               Fibula
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Its
               Edge
               ,
               whence
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Peronaeus
                 Longus
              
               do's
               Arise
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Two
               Extreams
               of
               the
               Bone
               ,
               properly
               so
               call'd
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               It
               s
               Lower
               Appendix
               which
               makes
               the
               
                 Malleolus
                 Externus
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               It
               s
               Upper
               Appendix
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Fibula
               ,
               whence
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Flexor
                 Pollicis
                 Longus
              
               ,
               do's
               Arise
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3
            
             
               A
               B
               C
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Right
               Fibula
               next
               the
               Tibia
               ,
               with
               its
               Lower
               End
               Uppermost
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Former
               Figure
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               A
               Smooth
               Cartilaginous
               Surface
               of
               the
               Lower
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Fibula
               ,
               which
               is
               Entertain'd
               in
               the
               Sinus
               of
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Tibia
               ,
               Fig.
               2.
               
               C
               ;
               and
               Touches
               the
               
                 Os
                 Calcis
              
               Externally
               Laterally
               .
               
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               105.
               
               Fig.
               1.
               
               A.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               A
               Shallow
               Depressure
               on
               the
               Superior
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Fibula
               ,
               which
               receives
               the
               Prominence
               of
               the
               Tibia
               ,
               Fig.
               2.
               
               E.
               
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Bone
               next
               its
               Appendix
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             HUNDRED
             &
             FIFTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             WE
             come
             now
             to
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             Foot
             it self
             :
             These
             like
             those
             of
             the
             Hand
             are
             Divided
             into
             Three
             Parts
             ,
             viz.
             The
             Bones
             of
             the
             
               Tarsus
               ,
               Metatarsus
            
             ,
             and
             those
             of
             the
             Toes
             .
             The
             Tarsus
             is
             Compos'd
             of
             Seven
             Bones
             ,
             which
             in
             this
             Table
             are
             Represented
             Separated
             from
             each
             other
             ;
             the
          
           
             
               1
               ,
               Is
               the
               Astragulus
               or
               Talus
               ,
               by
               some
               call'd
               
                 Os
                 Balistae
              
               ;
            
             
               2
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Calcis
                 ,
                 Calcaneus
              
               or
               
                 Pedis
                 Calcar
              
               ;
            
             
               3
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Spongiosum
              
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Cuboides
                 ,
                 Os
                 Tesserae
                 ,
                 Grandinosum
              
               and
               Polymorphon
               ;
            
             
               4
               ,
               5
               ,
               6
               ,
               The
               Three
               
                 Ossa
                 Cuneiformia
              
               ;
            
             
               7
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Naviculare
              
               or
               Cymbiforme
               ;
               it
               's
               also
               call'd
               Scaphoeides
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               The
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Right
               Foot
               ,
               when
               join'd
               to
               each
               other
               with
               Wires
               in
               their
               Natural
               Situation
               .
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Calcis
              
               :
               A
               ,
               It
               s
               External
               Lateral
               Smooth
               Side
               ,
               Cover'd
               with
               a
               Cartilage
               which
               touches
               the
               Internal
               and
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Inferior
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Fibula
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Malleolus
                 Externus
              
               :
               B
               ,
               The
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Calcis
              
               ,
               Cover'd
               with
               a
               Cartilage
               which
               is
               receiv'd
               in
               a
               Sinus
               of
               the
               Lower
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Tibia
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Calcis
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Naviculare
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Spongiosum
              
               or
               Cuboides
               .
            
             
               F
               G
               H
               ,
               The
               Three
               
                 Ossa
                 Cuneiformia
              
               .
            
             
               I
               K
               L
               M
               N
               ,
               The
               Five
               
                 Ossa
                 Metatarsi
              
               or
               Second
               Division
               of
               the
               Foot.
               
            
             
               1
               ,
               2
               ,
               3
               ,
               &c.
               to
               13
               ,
               All
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Toes
               according
               to
               Bidloo
               ,
               but
               we
               suspect
               the
               Second
               Bone
               of
               all
               the
               Lesser
               Toes
               was
               wanting
               in
               the
               Subject
               ,
               by
               which
               this
               Figure
               was
               Delineated
               ;
               for
               I
               am
               perswaded
               the
               Painter
               follow'd
               the
               Life
               very
               strictly
               ,
               as
               appears
               by
               the
               Figure
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               The
               Bones
               of
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               or
               Bottom
               of
               the
               Right
               Foot.
               
            
             
               A
               B
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Astragalus
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Calcis
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Naviculare
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Spongiosum
              
               or
               Cuboides
               .
            
             
               G
               H
               ,
               Two
               of
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Cuneiformia
              
               .
            
             
               I
               K
               L
               M
               N
               ,
               The
               
                 Ossa
                 Metatarst
              
               .
            
             
               O
               O
               ,
               The
               
                 Ossa
                 Sesamoidea
              
               of
               the
               Great
               Toe
               .
            
             
               N.
               B.
               
                 The
                 Bones
                 of
                 the
                 Toes
                 (
                 as
                 Exprest
                 in
                 the
                 Former
                 Figure
              
               )
               
                 wanting
                 their
                 Second
                 Internodes
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               One
               of
               the
               Nails
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Nail
               ,
               commonly
               call'd
               its
               Root
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Its
               Side
               ,
               which
               was
               Border'd
               with
               a
               Protension
               of
               the
               Cuticula
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               Its
               External
               Convex
               Part
               ,
               where
               its
               Series
               of
               Fibres
               Appear
               Extended
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               ,
               from
               A
               to
               C.
               
            
             
               D
               ,
               It
               s
               Limbus
               or
               Extream
               Part
               ,
               which
               Projects
               over
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Finger
               or
               Toe
               .
            
             
               The
               Nails
               Arise
               from
               their
               Subjacent
               Parts
               ,
               call'd
               their
               Roots
               ,
               Fram'd
               of
               a
               Complication
               of
               Nerves
               and
               Blood-Vessels
               ;
               whence
               Horny
               Fibres
               or
               Tubes
               Arise
               ,
               and
               being
               United
               ,
               Compose
               that
               Hard
               Body
               call'd
               the
               Nail
               .
               The
               Horny
               Fibres
               which
               make
               the
               Outside
               or
               Convex
               Surface
               of
               the
               Nail
               ,
               Arise
               from
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               its
               Root
               next
               the
               Second
               Internode
               of
               the
               Finger
               ;
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               Horny
               Fibres
               which
               Arise
               from
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               its
               Root
               towards
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Finger
               ;
               successively
               make
               the
               Internal
               Concave
               Surface
               of
               the
               Nail
               :
               So
               that
               the
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Nail
               which
               Extends
               it self
               beyond
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Finger
               ,
               is
               Fram'd
               of
               all
               the
               Fibres
               which
               Arise
               from
               the
               Surface
               of
               its
               Root
               ,
               and
               is
               much
               Thicker
               than
               its
               other
               Extream
               towards
               its
               Root
               :
               Hence
               it
               happens
               that
               the
               External
               Surface
               towards
               the
               Root
               of
               the
               Nail
               is
               Protruded
               Forwards
               towards
               its
               Top
               ;
               as
               may
               be
               Observ'd
               if
               you
               Mark
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Nail
               towards
               its
               Root
               ,
               you
               will
               see
               it
               advance
               to
               the
               Top
               ;
               which
               at
               Length
               is
               either
               Worn
               away
               or
               cut
               off
               .
               When
               any
               Corosive
               Matter
               (
               as
               in
               a
               Paronychia
               or
               the
               like
               )
               destroys
               the
               Tender
               Roots
               of
               the
               Horny
               Fibres
               ,
               the
               Nail
               necessarily
               falls
               off
               ;
               but
               nevertheless
               it
               will
               Bud
               again
               ,
               and
               a
               New
               Nail
               will
               Grow
               in
               its
               place
               ;
               which
               commonly
               do's
               not
               prove
               so
               Beautiful
               as
               the
               Former
               ,
               whether
               occasion'd
               by
               too
               early
               Using
               it
               ,
               or
               its
               being
               Expos'd
               to
               the
               External
               Air
               ,
               or
               some
               inconvenient
               Covering
               made
               Use
               of
               ,
               to
               Defend
               it
               from
               Outward
               Injuries
               .
            
             
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
         
           AN
           APPENDIX
           ,
           Representing
           the
           EXTERNAL
           MUSCLES
           ,
           And
           Divers
           PARTS
           OF
           HUMANE
           BODIES
           Which
           are
           either
           Omitted
           ,
           or
           not
           well
           Exprest
           in
           the
           Preceding
           TABLES
           .
        
         
           Done
           after
           the
           LIFE
           .
        
         
         
           
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIRST
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               REPRESENTS
               the
               External
               Muscles
               as
               they
               Appear
               in
               their
               Proper
               Situation
               on
               the
               Forepart
               of
               the
               Body
               ,
               after
               the
               Skin
               ,
               Fat
               ,
               and
               Membranes
               are
               taken
               off
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Quadratus
                 Colli
              
               lying
               on
               each
               Side
               the
               Neck
               ,
               and
               Tendinous
               Expansion
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Membranosus
              
               from
               the
               Fore-parts
               of
               the
               Thighs
               .
            
             
               1
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Frontalis
              
               .
            
             
               2
               ,
               The
               
                 Orbicularis
                 Palpebrarum
              
               .
            
             
               3
               ,
               The
               
                 Elevator
                 Labit
                 Superioris
              
               ,
               and
               
                 Dilatator
                 Alae
                 Nasi
              
               .
            
             
               4
               ,
               The
               
                 Elevator
                 Labii
                 Superioris
                 Proprius
              
               .
            
             
               5
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Elevator
                 Labiorum
                 Communis
              
               .
            
             
               6
               ,
               The
               
                 Orbicularit
                 seu
                 Sphincter
                 Labiorum
              
               .
            
             
               7
               ,
               The
               
                 Depressor
                 Labii
                 Inferioris
                 Proprius
              
               .
            
             
               8
               ,
               The
               
                 Depressor
                 Labiorum
                 Communis
              
               .
            
             
               9
               ,
               The
               
                 Zygomaticus
                 seu
                 Distortor
                 Oris
              
               .
            
             
               10
               ,
               The
               Buccinator
               .
            
             
               11
               ,
               The
               Temporalis
               .
            
             
               12
               ,
               The
               Masseter
               .
            
             
               a
               ,
               The
               Parotid
               Salival
               Gland
               .
            
             
               b
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               .
            
             
               c
               ,
               The
               Salival
               Duct
               ,
               where
               it
               Arises
               from
               the
               Parotid
               Gland
               ,
               and
               passes
               over
               the
               Masseter
               Muscle
               ,
               whence
               it
               Marches
               thro'
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Baccimator
              
               to
               its
               Orifice
               in
               the
               Internal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Mouth
               ,
               against
               the
               
                 Dentes
                 Molares
              
               .
            
             
               d
               ,
               The
               Lower
               Jaw-bone
               made
               bare
               .
            
             
               e
               ,
               The
               Insertion
               of
               the
               Right
               Mastoid
               Muscle
               ,
               to
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Mammiformis
              
               .
            
             
               13
               ,
               The
               Genichyoideus
               .
            
             
               14
               ,
               14
               ,
               The
               Mastoidei
               ,
               where
               their
               Two
               Beginnings
               are
               Exprest
               on
               each
               Side
               ;
               the
               One
               from
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Sternum●g
               and
               the
               Other
               from
               the
               Clavicula
               f
               :
               The
               Termination
               of
               the
               Right
               Mastoid
               in
               the
               
                 Pr●cessus
                 Mammilaris
              
               e
               ,
               is
               also
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               15
               ,
               The
               Sternobyoideus
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               ,
               that
               of
               the
               Right
               not
               being
               Figur'd
               .
            
             
               16
               ,
               16
               ,
               The
               Caracobyoideus
               Marching
               under
               the
               Mastoid
               Muscle
               .
            
             
               17
               ,
               17
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Scalenus
               .
            
             
               18
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Elevator
                 Scapulae
              
               .
            
             
               19
               ,
               19
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Trapezius
               or
               Cucullaris
               ,
               on
               each
               Side
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Claviculae
               .
            
             
               20
               ,
               The
               De●toides
               .
            
             
               21
               ,
               21
               ,
               The
               Two
               Pectoral
               Muscles
               .
            
             
               f
               ,
               f
               ,
               The
               Claviculae
               .
            
             
               g
               ,
               The
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Pectoris
              
               or
               Sternum
               ;
            
             
               h
               ,
               The
               
                 Scrobicu●us
                 Cordis
              
               at
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Sternum
               .
            
             
               22
               ,
               The
               
                 Biceps
                 Humeri
              
               .
            
             
               23
               ,
               23
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Coracobrachiales
               .
            
             
               24
               ,
               24
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Brachiales
                 Flexores
              
               .
            
             
               25
               ,
               25
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Brachiales
                 Extensores
              
               .
            
             
               i
               ,
               A
               Branch
               of
               the
               Axillary
               Nerves
               ,
               which
               passes
               between
               the
               Internal
               Protuberance
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               k
               ,
               and
               the
               Olecranum
               or
               Elbow
               .
            
             
               k
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Protuberance
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               .
            
             
               l
               ,
               The
               Large
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Axillary
               Artery
               ,
               which
               is
               frequently
               Prickt
               by
               Bold
               Blood-Letters
               .
            
             
               m
               ,
               A
               Thin
               Membranous
               Tendon
               Springing
               from
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Biceps
                 Humeri
              
               ,
               which
               is
               Expanded
               over
               all
               the
               External
               Muscles
               on
               the
               Cubit
               .
            
             
               26
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Brachialis
                 Flexor
              
               .
            
             
               27
               ,
               
                 Pronator
                 Radii
                 Teres
              
               .
            
             
               28
               ,
               28
               ,
               
                 Radialis
                 Flexor
              
               .
            
             
               29
               ,
               29
               ,
               
                 Pal●oris
                 Longus
              
               .
            
             
               30
               ,
               30
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Musculi
                 Flexores
                 Secundi
                 Internodii
                 Perfor●●ue
              
               .
            
             
               31
               ,
               31
               ,
               The
               
                 Ulnaris
                 Flexor
              
               .
            
             
               32
               ,
               32
               ,
               The
               
                 Supinator
                 Radii
                 Longus
              
               in
               both
               Arms.
               
            
             
               33
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Radialis
                 Extensor
              
               .
            
             
               34
               ,
               A
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Flexor
                 Tertii
                 Internodii
                 Pollicis
              
               .
            
             
               35
               ,
               35
               ,
               The
               
                 Abductor
                 Pollicis
              
               on
               both
               Hands
               .
            
             
               n
               ,
               The
               
                 Ligamentum
                 Annulare
              
               of
               the
               Carpus
            
             
               o
               ,
               o
               ,
               The
               Tendinous
               Expansion
               of
               the
               
                 Palmaris
                 Longus
              
               .
            
             
               36
               ,
               The
               
                 Caro
                 Musculosa
                 Quadrata
              
               .
            
             
               37
               ,
               The
               
                 Abductor
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
              
               .
            
             
               38
               ,
               38
               ,
               The
               Fleshy
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Obliquus
                 Descendens
                 Abdominis
              
               on
               both
               Sides
               ,
               41
               ,
               42
               ,
               q
               ,
               q
               ,
               their
               Tendons
               Running
               over
               the
               Recti
               to
               the
               
                 Linea
                 Alba.
              
               
            
             
               39
               ,
               39
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Latissimus
                 Dorsi
              
               on
               both
               Sides
               .
            
             
               40
               ,
               40
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Serrati
                 Majores
                 Antici
              
               .
            
             
               41
               ,
               41
               ,
               The
               
                 Recti
                 Abdominis
              
               ,
               as
               they
               Appear
               under
               the
               Tendons
               of
               the
               Two
               Oblique
               Muscles
               .
            
             
               p
               ,
               The
               
                 Linea
                 Alba.
              
               
            
             
               q
               ,
               q
               ,
               The
               Tendons
               of
               the
               Two
               Oblique
               Muscles
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Linea
                 Semilunaris
              
               ,
               before
               they
               March
               over
               the
               Rectus
               to
               the
               
                 Linea
                 Alba.
              
               
            
             
               r
               ,
               r
               ,
               The
               Fore-parts
               of
               the
               Spines
               of
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Ilii
              
               .
            
             
               s
               ,
               s
               ,
               The
               
                 Glandulae
                 Inguinales
              
               ;
               neither
               these
               Glans
               ,
               nor
               those
               in
               the
               Axillae
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Glandulae
                 Axillares
              
               ,
               are
               any
               where
               mention'd
               in
               the
               preceding
               Descriptions
               :
               Their
               Office
               is
               to
               receive
               the
               Lympha
               from
               all
               the
               Inferior
               Parts
               ,
               and
               Discharge
               it
               again
               by
               their
               Exporting
               Lymphe-Ducts
               in
               its
               Way
               towards
               the
               Thoracick-Duct
               .
               If
               any
               Parts
               of
               the
               Legs
               or
               Thighs
               are
               Diseas'd
               ,
               as
               in
               an
               Anasarca
               ,
               with
               an
               Erysipelas
               ,
               Abcess
               ,
               Exulceration
               ,
               especially
               with
               a
               Caries
               of
               the
               Bone
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               ;
               you
               will
               most
               commonly
               find
               the
               Inguinal
               Glandules
               Tumid
               and
               Hard
               :
               The
               like
               may
               be
               Observ'd
               of
               the
               Axillary
               Glands
               ,
               when
               the
               Mammae
               ,
               Arms
               ,
               Cubits
               ,
               or
               Hands
               are
               in
               like
               Manner
               Affected
               .
               The
               Intumescence
               of
               these
               Lymphatick
               Glands
               ,
               in
               the
               Cases
               above
               mention'd
               ,
               is
               caus'd
               by
               the
               Vitiated
               Lympha
               ,
               Arising
               from
               the
               Diseas'd
               Parts
               ,
               not
               pasting
               the
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Glandulosae
              
               ;
               whence
               a
               Tumor
               is
               begun
               ,
               and
               is
               still
               Increas'd
               by
               the
               Accession
               of
               the
               succeding
               Lympha
               ,
               and
               the
               Whole
               Gland
               becomes
               Distended
               to
               a
               vast
               Magnitude
               ;
               as
               Appear'd
               in
               the
               Case
               of
               the
               Late
               Sir
               
                 William
                 Cranmer
              
               ,
               in
               whom
               ,
               after
               Death
               ,
               I
               found
               the
               Glandule
               of
               the
               Right
               Inguine
               to
               Weigh
               above
               Six
               Pounds
               ,
               and
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Crural
               Artery
               passing
               thro'
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               it
               .
               Tho'
               the
               Surface
               of
               this
               Tumified
               Gland
               seem'd
               to
               have
               Matter
               Fluctuating
               in
               divers
               Parts
               of
               it
               ,
               yet
               no
               other
               than
               a
               Glandulous
               Appearance
               Offer'd
               on
               Dividing
               it
               Variously
               .
               The
               like
               Intumescence
               of
               the
               Inguinal
               Glands
               happen'd
               after
               Castration
               ,
               in
               a
               
                 Hernia
                 Carnosa
              
               of
               the
               same
               Side
               ,
               which
               in
               like
               Manner
               prov'd
               Fatal
               .
               In
               the
               Case
               of
               an
               Anasarca
               of
               one
               Leg
               ,
               on
               which
               an
               Erysipelas
               happen'd
               ,
               I
               found
               the
               Inguinal
               Gland
               on
               the
               same
               Side
               very
               much
               Indurated
               and
               somewhat
               Distended
               .
               When
               the
               Excoriation
               from
               the
               Erysipelas
               began
               to
               Abate
               of
               the
               Flux
               of
               Matter
               ,
               the
               Inguinal
               Gland
               above
               became
               more
               and
               more
               Distended
               ;
               at
               length
               the
               Outward
               Skin
               on
               it
               began
               to
               look
               Red
               ,
               and
               soon
               after
               Imposthumated
               :
               After
               the
               contain'd
               Pus
               was
               Discharg'd
               ,
               I
               could
               pass
               my
               Probe
               very
               Deep
               into
               divers
               Interstices
               of
               the
               Gland
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Matter
               was
               Lodg'd
               ;
               all
               which
               Sinus's
               after
               some
               Weeks
               Clos'd
               by
               the
               Use
               of
               Desiccative
               Topicks
               ,
               with
               convenient
               Bandage
               ,
               without
               Hard
               Tents
               or
               Dozils
               .
               In
               this
               Case
               the
               Patient
               took
               divers
               Doses
               of
               Calamel
               ,
               and
               Strong
               Purges
               .
               The
               like
               Intumescence
               of
               these
               Glands
               also
               happens
               in
               Venerial
               Cases
               ,
               especially
               when
               the
               External
               Parts
               of
               the
               Penis
               are
               Ulcerated
               ,
               as
               I
               have
               elsewhere
               taken
               Notice
               of
               .
            
             
               t
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Pubis
              
               .
            
             
               u
               u
               ,
               The
               Process's
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               Covering
               the
               Spermatick
               Vessels
               ,
               as
               they
               Descend
               to
               the
               Testes
               .
            
             
               42
               ,
               The
               Pyramidales
               .
            
             
               43
               ,
               43
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Communis
                 Membranosi
              
               on
               both
               Sides
               ,
               Part
               of
               its
               Tendinons
               Expansion
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               being
               Exprest
               ,
               Fasten'd
               to
               the
               Upper
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Fibula
               x.
               
            
             
               44
               ,
               44
               ,
               The
               Sartorius
               on
               both
               Sides
               .
            
             
               45
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Glutaeus
                 Medius
              
               made
               Tumid
               by
               the
               Great
               Trochanter
               .
            
             
               46
               ,
               46
               ,
               The
               
                 Rectus
                 Femoris
              
               on
               both
               Thighs
               .
            
             
               47
               ,
               47
               ,
               The
               
                 Vasti
                 Externi
              
               .
            
             
               48
               ,
               48
               ,
               The
               
                 Vasti
                 Interni
              
               .
            
             
               49
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Pectineus
               .
            
             
               50
               ,
               50
               ,
               The
               Great
               and
               First
               Describ'd
               Heads
               of
               the
               Triceps
               on
               both
               Sides
               .
            
             
               51
               ,
               51
               ,
               The
               Gracilis
               partly
               Exprest
               on
               both
               Sides
               .
            
             
               w
               w
               ,
               The
               Patellae
               or
               Knee-pans
               .
            
             
               x
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               Membranosus
               ,
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Upper
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Fibula
               .
            
             
               y
               ,
               The
               Right
               Tibia
               made
               bare
               .
            
             
               z
               ,
               The
               
                 Malleolus
                 Internus
              
               .
            
             
               *
               ,
               The
               
                 Malleolus
                 Externus
              
               .
            
             
               †
               †
               ,
               The
               Annular
               Ligament
               of
               the
               Tarsus
               .
            
             
               52
               ,
               The
               
                 Tibialis
                 Anticus
              
               .
            
             
               53
               ,
               53
               ,
               The
               
                 Extensor
                 Pollicis
                 Pedis
                 Longus
              
               on
               both
               Feet
               .
            
             
               54
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Peroneus
                 Secundus
              
               or
               Semifibuleus
               .
            
             
               55
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Peroneus
                 Primus
              
               or
               Fibuleus
               .
            
             
               56
               ,
               56
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Gasterocnemus
                 Externus
              
               on
               both
               Legs
               .
            
             
               57
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Flexor
                 Tertii
                 Internodii
                 Digitorum
                 Pedis
                 Perforans
                 .
              
            
             
               58
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Gasterocnemus
                 Internus
              
               .
            
             
               59
               ,
               The
               
                 Abductor
                 Pollicis
              
               .
            
             
               60
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Extensor
                 Secundi
                 Internodii
                 Digitorum
                 Pedis
              
               ,
               or
               
                 Extensor
                 Brevis
              
               .
            
             
               61
               ,
               The
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Extensor
                 Pollicis
                 Brevis
              
               .
            
             
               62
               ,
               The
               
                 Extensor
                 Tertii
                 Internodii
                 Digitorum
                 Pedis
                 Longus
                 .
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SECOND
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               1.
               
            
             
               THE
               External
               Muscles
               and
               other
               Parts
               as
               they
               Appear
               on
               the
               Back-part
               of
               a
               Humane
               Body
               ,
               after
               the
               Skin
               ,
               Fat
               ,
               and
               Membranes
               are
               remov'd
               .
            
             
               1
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Temporalis
              
               .
            
             
               2
               ,
               The
               
                 Orbicularis
                 Palpebrarum
              
               .
            
             
               3
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Zygomaticus
               .
            
             
               4
               ,
               The
               
                 Depressor
                 Labiorum
                 Communis
              
               .
            
             
               5
               ,
               The
               Masseter
               .
            
             
               6
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Mastoideus
               .
            
             
               7
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Elevator
                 Scapulae
              
               .
            
             
               8
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Splenius
               .
            
             
               9
               ,
               The
               Occipitalis
               .
            
             
               10
               ,
               10
               ,
               10
               ,
               The
               Cucularis
               or
               Trapezius
               ,
               on
               both
               Sides
               .
            
             
               a
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Bregmatis
              
               ;
            
             
               b
               ,
               The
               Occipitis
               .
            
             
               c
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Sagittal
               Suture
               ,
               or
               Longitudinal
               Suture
               .
            
             
               d
               ,
               The
               Lambdoidal
               Suture
               .
            
             
               e
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               .
            
             
               f
               ,
               The
               Parotide
               Salival
               Gland
               .
            
             
               Under
               this
               Parotide
               Salival
               Gland
               ,
               are
               plac'd
               divers
               Lymphatick
               Glands
               ,
               which
               receive
               Lympha
               from
               their
               Importing
               Lymphe-ducts
               ,
               Arising
               from
               the
               Neighbouring
               Parts
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Parotide
               Salival
               Gland
               it self
               .
               Besides
               these
               Lymphatick
               Glands
               immediately
               under
               the
               Parotides
               ,
               there
               are
               still
               others
               of
               the
               same
               kind
               below
               them
               ,
               lying
               near
               the
               Jugular
               Veins
               ,
               and
               are
               continued
               to
               the
               Claviculae
               ;
               all
               these
               Transmit
               Lympha
               (
               by
               their
               Exporting
               Lymphe-ducts
               )
               either
               to
               the
               Subclavian
               Glands
               ,
               or
               to
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Thoracick-duct
               immediately
               .
               These
               Lymphatick
               Glands
               become
               Tumid
               in
               Scrophulous
               Cases
               ,
               and
               may
               be
               happily
               remov'd
               by
               Incision
               ,
               and
               no
               great
               Flux
               of
               Blood
               follow
               ;
               which
               Practice
               is
               Preferable
               to
               the
               Application
               of
               Escharoticks
               which
               are
               commonly
               made
               use
               of
               .
               I
               have
               at
               this
               Time
               a
               Patient
               in
               whom
               not
               only
               the
               above
               mention'd
               Superior
               Lymphatick
               Glands
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               were
               Distended
               ,
               but
               the
               Parotide
               Salival
               Gland
               of
               the
               same
               Side
               was
               very
               much
               Indurated
               ,
               and
               not
               a
               lit
               tle
               Distended
               also
               ;
               in
               the
               Middle
               of
               which
               Induration
               of
               the
               Parotide
               Gland
               ,
               I
               found
               an
               Aperture
               whence
               the
               Spittle
               Flow'd
               in
               no
               small
               Quantity
               ,
               in
               Mastication
               :
               In
               Pressing
               the
               Part
               near
               the
               Aperture
               ,
               I
               found
               the
               Spittle
               Gush
               out
               ,
               which
               had
               Lodg'd
               it self
               between
               the
               Skin
               and
               the
               Gland
               .
               After
               the
               External
               Skin
               was
               Divided
               ,
               I
               could
               plainly
               see
               the
               Spittle
               Arise
               from
               divers
               Interstices
               of
               the
               Lobuli
               of
               the
               Gland
               ;
               when
               he
               Chaw'd
               any
               Thing
               ,
               the
               Spittle
               Flow'd
               on
               his
               Handkerchief
               (
               
                 per
                 Stillicidium
              
               ,
               )
               which
               he
               was
               wont
               to
               hold
               under
               his
               Ear
               to
               receive
               it
               .
               The
               Sinus's
               from
               whence
               the
               Spittle
               was
               Discharg'd
               being
               thus
               laid
               Open
               ,
               the
               Quantity
               of
               Spittle
               which
               Flow'd
               ,
               soon
               Abated
               ;
               the
               Fungous
               Flesh
               being
               remov'd
               by
               the
               Application
               of
               Gentle
               Escharoticks
               ,
               the
               Flux
               of
               Saliva
               Lessen'd
               .
               He
               Drinking
               of
               a
               Decoction
               of
               
                 Sarsaparila
                 ,
                 China
                 ,
                 Lig.
                 Guiaci
                 ,
              
               &c.
               for
               his
               common
               Drink
               ,
               and
               Eating
               of
               a
               very
               Drying
               Diet
               ,
               such
               as
               Biskets
               ,
               Almonds
               ,
               and
               the
               like
               .
            
             
               Aquapendens
               in
               Treating
               of
               the
               Wounds
               of
               the
               Cheeks
               ,
               mentions
               a
               clear
               Water
               not
               unlike
               the
               Tears
               of
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               which
               he
               saw
               Flow
               from
               a
               very
               small
               Hole
               when
               the
               Patient
               Eat
               ;
               to
               which
               he
               adds
               ,
               
                 Vnde
                 &
                 quomodo
                 effluat
                 ,
                 Ego
                 certe
                 nescio
                 .
              
            
             
               The
               Accurate
               Nuck
               tells
               us
               (
               from
               Roonhuyse
               a
               Dutch
               Writer
               )
               of
               a
               Patient
               in
               whom
               the
               Spittle
               Flow'd
               from
               an
               Ulcer
               in
               the
               Cheek
               ,
               not
               unlike
               that
               above
               mention'd
               :
               Nor
               was
               the
               Flux
               of
               Spittle
               Abated
               ,
               and
               the
               Ulcer
               brought
               to
               a
               Cicatrix
               without
               a
               Drying
               Diet
               ,
               as
               the
               Incomparable
               Nuck
               takes
               Notice
               .
               A
               Flux
               of
               Lympha
               sometimes
               happens
               in
               Wounds
               of
               the
               Limbs
               ,
               where
               the
               Lymphe-ducts
               are
               Wounded
               .
               After
               Letting
               Blood
               in
               the
               Flexure
               of
               the
               Cubit
               ,
               I
               saw
               (
               the
               next
               Day
               )
               a
               vast
               Quantity
               of
               Lympha
               had
               Stain'd
               the
               Shirt
               which
               lay
               over
               the
               Orifice
               ,
               and
               about
               the
               Arm
               ;
               the
               next
               Day
               after
               ,
               the
               Flux
               of
               Lympha
               Abated
               ,
               and
               the
               Orifice
               soon
               after
               Clos'd
               .
               Perhaps
               a
               great
               Part
               of
               that
               Thin
               Matter
               call'd
               Gleet
               ,
               which
               we
               find
               some
               Days
               after
               Amputations
               ,
               or
               large
               Wounds
               ,
               Flows
               from
               the
               Divided
               Lymphe-ducts
               as
               well
               as
               Nutritive
               Tubes
               of
               the
               Part.
               When
               Lymphe-ducts
               are
               broken
               in
               Old
               Ulcers
               ,
               and
               the
               Flux
               of
               Lympha
               do's
               not
               easily
               Abate
               ,
               tho'
               the
               Patient
               is
               confin'd
               to
               a
               Drying
               Diet.
               The
               like
               Difficulty
               attended
               the
               restraining
               of
               the
               Flux
               of
               Lympha
               when
               a
               Lymphe-duct
               was
               Open'd
               in
               an
               Issue
               in
               the
               Leg
               ,
               as
               was
               Communicated
               to
               me
               by
               
                 Mr.
                 Bernard
              
               and
               
                 Mr.
                 Guddier
              
               both
               Experienc'd
               Surgeons
               of
               this
               Town
               ;
               in
               which
               Case
               a
               Drying
               Diet
               stopt
               the
               Flux
               ,
               and
               the
               Ulcer
               was
               soon
               after
               Cicatric'd
               ;
               tho'
               many
               Desicatives
               Topicks
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               Actual
               and
               Potential
               Cauteries
               ,
               had
               before
               prov'd
               Ineffectual
               .
               By
               this
               we
               may
               see
               (
               however
               some
               endeavour
               to
               Disparage
               Anatomy
               )
               how
               Useful
               it
               is
               in
               the
               Practice
               of
               Surgery
               .
            
             
               g
               ,
               The
               Spine
               of
               the
               Seventh
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               .
            
             
               h
               ,
               h
               ,
               The
               Tendons
               of
               the
               Cucularis
               on
               both
               Sides
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Spines
               of
               the
               Scapulae
               .
            
             
               i
               ,
               i
               ,
               The
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Spines
               of
               the
               Scapulae
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               Claviculae
               are
               Connected
               .
            
             
               k
               k
               ,
               The
               Lower
               Angles
               of
               the
               Scapulae
               .
            
             
               l
               l
               ,
               The
               
                 Basis
                 Scapulae
              
               .
            
             
               m
               m
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Appendices
               of
               the
               Vlnae
               ,
               call'd
               Olecrani
               .
            
             
               n
               n
               ,
               The
               External
               Protuberance
               of
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Humerum
              
               ,
               where
               the
               Radii
               are
               Articulated
               ,
               and
               the
               Muscles
               Extending
               the
               Carpi
               and
               Fingers
               do
               Arise
               .
            
             
               o
               o
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Vlna
               next
               the
               Carpus
               .
            
             
               11
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Deltoides
              
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               .
            
             
               12
               ,
               12
               ,
               The
               Infraspinatus
               on
               both
               Sides
               .
            
             
               13
               ,
               13
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Rotundi
                 Minores
              
               .
            
             
               14
               ,
               14
               ,
               The
               
                 Rotundi
                 Majores
              
               .
            
             
               15
               ,
               15
               ,
               15
               ,
               The
               
                 Latissimi
                 Dorsi
              
               .
            
             
               **
               Their
               Tendinous
               Parts
               passing
               over
               the
               Sacrolumbales
               and
               
                 Dorsi
                 Longissimi
              
               .
            
             
               16
               ,
               16
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Rhomboides
               on
               both
               Sides
               ,
               near
               their
               Insertions
               to
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Shoulder-blades
               ,
               ll
               .
            
             
               17
               ,
               17
               ,
               The
               Gemellus
               ,
               or
               
                 Biceps
                 Externus
              
               on
               both
               Arms.
               
            
             
               18
               ,
               18
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Brachiales
               .
            
             
               19
               ,
               19
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Supinator
                 Radii
                 Longus
              
               on
               both
               Sides
               .
            
             
               20
               ,
               20
               ,
               The
               Anconeus
               :
            
             
               21
               ,
               21
               ,
               The
               
                 Radialis
                 Extensor
              
               on
               either
               Cubit
               .
            
             
               22
               ,
               22
               ,
               The
               
                 Extensor
                 Digitorum
                 Communis
              
               :
            
             
               23
               ,
               23
               ,
               The
               
                 Extensor
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
              
               :
            
             
               24
               ,
               24
               ,
               The
               
                 Vlnaris
                 Extensor
              
               :
            
             
               25
               ,
               25
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Perforatus
               or
               
                 Flexor
                 Secundi
                 Internodii
                 Digitorum
              
               .
            
             
               26
               ,
               26
               ,
               The
               
                 Vlnaris
                 Flexor
              
               on
               both
               Cubits
               .
            
             
               27
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Tendons
               of
               the
               
                 Radialis
                 Flexor
              
               &
               Palmaris
               .
            
             
               28
               ,
               28
               ,
               The
               
                 Abductores
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
              
               on
               either
               Hand
               .
            
             
               29
               ,
               The
               
                 Adductor
                 Pollicis
                 ad
                 Dorsum
                 Manus
              
               .
            
             
               30
               ,
               The
               Extending
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Thumb
               .
            
             
               31
               ,
               31
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Oblique
               Descending
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               on
               both
               Sides
               .
            
             
               32
               ,
               The
               
                 Glutaeus
                 Major
              
               .
            
             
               33
               ,
               33
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Glutaeus
                 Medius
              
               on
               both
               Sides
               .
            
             
               34
               ,
               The
               Fleshy
               Part
               of
               the
               Membranosus
               or
               
                 Musculus
                 Communis
                 Membranosi
              
               .
            
             
               p
               p
               ,
               The
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Spines
               of
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Ilii
              
               .
            
             
               q
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Sacrum
              
               .
            
             
               r
               ,
               A
               Prominence
               made
               by
               the
               Great
               Trochanter
               under
               the
               Tendinous
               Expansion
               of
               the
               
                 Glutaeus
                 Major
              
               .
            
             
               f
               ,
               f
               ,
               The
               Great
               Crural
               Nerves
               as
               they
               Descend
               in
               the
               Ham.
               
            
             
               t
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Fibula
               .
            
             
               u
               u
               ,
               The
               Lower
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Fibula
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Malleolus
                 Externus
              
               .
            
             
               w
               ,
               The
               Lower
               Appendix
               of
               the
               Tibia
               or
               
                 Malleolus
                 Internus
              
               .
            
             
               x
               ,
               The
               Tendon
               of
               the
               Gasterocnemii
               .
            
             
               y
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Calcis
              
               .
            
             
               35
               ,
               35
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Vasti
                 Externi
              
               .
            
             
               36
               ,
               36
               ,
               The
               
                 Biceps
                 Femoris
              
               on
               both
               Sides
               .
            
             
               37
               ,
               37
               ,
               The
               Seminervosi
               or
               Semitendinosi
               .
            
             
               38
               ,
               38
               ,
               The
               Semimembranosi
               .
            
             
               39
               ,
               39
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Triceps
                 Femoris
              
               on
               both
               Sides
               .
            
             
               40
               ▪
               Part
               of
               the
               Gracilis
               on
               the
               Left
               Thigh
               .
            
             
               41
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Sartorius
               on
               the
               same
               Thigh
               .
            
             
               42
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Vastus
                 Internus
              
               on
               the
               same
               Thigh
               also
               .
            
             
               43
               ,
               43
               ,
               The
               
                 Gasterocnemii
                 Externi
              
               .
            
             
               44
               ,
               44
               ,
               The
               
                 Gasterocnemii
                 Interni
              
               Cover'd
               with
               the
               Tendons
               of
               the
               Externi
               .
            
             
               45
               ,
               The
               
                 Peroneus
                 Longus
              
               .
            
             
               46
               ,
               46
               ,
               The
               
                 Abductor
                 Minimi
                 Digiti
              
               on
               both
               Feet
               .
            
             
               47
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Extensor
                 Digitorum
                 Longus
              
               on
               the
               Right
               Foot.
               
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             THIRD
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               3.
               
            
             
               SHEWS
               the
               Trunks
               and
               large
               Ramifications
               of
               all
               the
               Arteries
               of
               a
               Humane
               Foetus
               ,
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               and
               Display'd
               after
               Dissection
               .
            
             
               1
               ,
               The
               Aorta
               ,
               or
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               ,
               cut
               from
               its
               Origin
               at
               the
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Left
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               2
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Great
               Coronal
               Artery
               of
               the
               Heart
               Arising
               from
               the
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Aorta
               ;
               the
               Rise
               of
               the
               Lesser
               Coronal
               Artery
               ,
               not
               Appearing
               in
               this
               Position
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               .
            
             
               3
               ,
               The
               
                 Canalis
                 Arteriosus
              
               Fill'd
               with
               Wax
               ,
               by
               Injecting
               it
               into
               the
               Aorta
               :
               This
               Arises
               from
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Pulmonick
               Artery
               (
               near
               its
               Two
               Ramifications
               which
               pass
               into
               the
               Lungs
               )
               and
               after
               an
               Oblique
               Descent
               under
               the
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Aorta
               ,
               Empties
               it self
               into
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               its
               Descending
               Trunk
               ,
               as
               here
               Exprest
               28.
               
               Besides
               this
               Communication
               between
               the
               Right
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               of
               a
               Foetus
               ,
               and
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               ;
               there
               is
               another
               call'd
               
                 Foramen
                 Ovale
              
               ,
               by
               which
               Part
               the
               Blood
               ,
               at
               its
               Entrance
               into
               the
               Right
               Ventricle
               ,
               passes
               into
               the
               Pulmonick
               Vein
               ,
               and
               the
               Left
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               thence
               to
               the
               Aorta
               .
               Hence
               it
               Appears
               ,
               That
               the
               Blood
               which
               Flows
               into
               the
               Right
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Heart
               of
               the
               Foetus
               ,
               Passes
               immediately
               (
               by
               the
               
                 Canalis
                 Arteriosus
              
               )
               to
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Blood
               of
               the
               Left
               Ventricle
               (
               which
               is
               Receiv'd
               immediately
               from
               the
               
                 Vena
                 C●●a
              
               ,
               or
               Right
               Article
               of
               the
               Heart
               )
               into
               the
               Pulmonick
               Vein
               ,
               and
               Left
               Ventricle
               :
               So
               that
               the
               Blood
               in
               the
               Foetus
               ,
               which
               Runs
               into
               the
               Right
               Ventricle
               ,
               passes
               immediately
               to
               the
               Aorta
               ,
               by
               the
               Systole
               of
               the
               Heart
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Blood
               of
               the
               Left
               Ventricle
               :
               Not
               do's
               any
               Part
               of
               the
               Blood
               of
               the
               Right
               Ventricle
               pass
               into
               the
               Left
               ;
               Or
               any
               Blood
               of
               the
               Left
               Ventricle
               first
               pass
               the
               Right
               ,
               as
               in
               the
               Adult
               .
               Hence
               the
               Heart
               in
               the
               Foetus
               may
               be
               said
               to
               have
               but
               One
               Ventricle
               in
               Effect
               ,
               since
               the
               Blood
               which
               passes
               One
               ,
               do's
               not
               come
               into
               the
               Other
               ,
               before
               it
               arrives
               at
               the
               Aorta
               .
               After
               the
               Birth
               ,
               when
               the
               Infant
               has
               Receiv'd
               Air
               into
               the
               Lungs
               (
               and
               their
               Vesciculae
               remain
               Distended
               ,
               and
               the
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Pulmonick
               Arteries
               and
               Vein
               consequently
               are
               more
               Display'd
               )
               the
               Blood
               th●●
               begins
               to
               pass
               their
               Extremities
               ,
               more
               freely
               than
               before
               ;
               and
               the
               Arterious
               Chanel
               at
               length
               becomes
               neglected
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               the
               
                 Foramen
                 Ovale
              
               ;
               the
               Former
               becoming
               a
               Lig●●●●
               ,
               and
               the
               Latter
               Closing
               up
               .
               The
               too
               early
               Occlusion
               of
               these
               Passages
               in
               Children
               ,
               often
               produces
               many
               Disorders
               ,
               as
               Inflammation
               of
               Divers
               Parts
               of
               the
               Head
               ,
               Neck
               ,
               and
               Lungs●
               in
               which
               Cases
               ,
               Bleeding
               is
               of
               great
               Use
               :
               Of
               this
               ,
               I
               have
               met
               with
               many
               In●●●nces
               in
               the
               Dissection
               of
               Children
               .
               I
               have
               often
               found
               the
               
                 Foramen
                 Ovale
              
               open
               in
               the
               Adult
               :
               The
               
                 Canalis
                 Arteriosus
              
               ,
               for
               what
               I
               have
               observ'd
               ,
               closes
               sooner
               than
               that
               Foramen
               .
            
             
               4
               ,
               4
               ,
               The
               Subclavian
               Arteries
               ,
               Arising
               from
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               Axillary
               Arteries
               ,
               and
               those
               of
               the
               Arms
               (
               23
               ,
               23
               ,
               )
               are
               con●●'d
               .
            
             
               5
               ,
               5
               ,
               The
               Two
               Carotide
               Arteries
               Arising
               from
               Aorta
               ,
               between
               the
               Subclavian
               Arteries
               .
            
             
               6
               ,
               6.
               
               The
               Two
               Vertebral
               Arteries
               ,
               Arising
               from
               the
               Sub●lev●culae
               ,
               which
               pass
               thro'
               all
               the
               Transverse
               Processes
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               from
               whence
               they
               are
               freed
               .
            
             
               7
               ,
               7.
               
               The
               Arteries
               which
               Convey
               Blood
               to
               the
               Lower
               Part
               of
               the
               Face
               ,
               Tongue
               ,
               Adjacent
               Muscles
               ,
               and
               Glandules
               .
            
             
               8
               ,
               8.
               
               The
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Temporal
               Arteries
               Spring
               from
               the
               Carotides
               ,
               and
               giving
               Branches
               to
               the
               Parc●ide
               Glands
               (
               9
               ,
               9.
               )
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Temples
               (
               10
               ,
               10.
               )
               also
               to
               the
               Neighbouring
               Muscles
               ,
               Hairy-Scalp
               ,
               and
               Forehead
               .
            
             
               11
               ,
               11.
               
               The
               Occip●tal
               Arteries
               ,
               whose
               Trunks
               pass
               close
               by
               the
               Mammi●o●●
               Process
               ,
               and
               are
               Distributed
               on
               the
               Hinder
               Pa●●
               of
               the
               Hairy-Scalp
               ,
               where
               they
               are
               Inosculated
               with
               the
               Branches
               of
               the
               Temporal
               Arteries
               .
            
             
               12.
               
               Di●ers
               Arteries
               ,
               which
               carry
               Blood
               to
               the
               
                 Fauces
                 Ga●ga●con
              
               and
               Muscles
               of
               those
               P●●●●
               .
            
             
               13
               ,
               13.
               
               The
               Contortions
               of
               the
               Carotid
               Arteries
               ,
               as
               they
               pass
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               to
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               14
               ,
               14.
               
               Those
               Parts
               of
               the
               Carotid
               Arteries
               ,
               where
               they
               pass
               by
               each
               Side
               of
               the
               
                 Solla
                 T●●ica
              
               ,
               where
               Di●e●●
               Small
               Branches
               do
               Arise
               from
               them
               ,
               and
               help
               to
               Compose
               the
               
                 Rete
                 〈◊〉
              
               ,
               which
               is
               more
               conspicuous
               in
               Quadrupedes
               than
               Men.
               
            
             
               15
               ,
               15.
               
               The
               Contortions
               of
               the
               Vertebra
               Arteries
               ,
               as
               they
               pass
               the
               Transverse
               Processes
               of
               the
               First
               
               Vend●●
               ●●
               the
               Neck
               ,
               towards
               the
               Great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occiputis
              
               .
               I
               have
               more
               than
               once
               taken
               Notice
               ,
               That
               the
               Cavities
               of
               these
               Arteries
               ,
               where
               they
               are
               Con●e●●ed
               ,
               have
               been
               Larger
               than
               their
               Inferior
               Trunks
               ;
               whereby
               the
               Impetus
               of
               the
               Blood
               must
               necessarily
               be
               very
               much
               Lessen'd
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               by
               their
               Contortions
               only
               .
               In
               Quad●●pedes
               the
               Angles
               of
               these
               Contortion
               :
               of
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Brains
               are
               more
               Acute
               ,
               which
               in
               them
               is
               the
               more
               Necessary
               to
               Lessen
               the
               Force
               of
               the
               Blood
               at
               their
               Extremities
               ,
               by
               Reason
               of
               the
               Horizontal
               Position
               of
               their
               Trunks
               .
            
             
               16.
               
               The
               Vertebral
               Arteries
               ,
               where
               they
               Ascend
               on
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               ,
               towards
               the
               〈◊〉
               Protuberance
               ,
               or
               
                 Po●a
                 Var●●
              
               .
            
             
               17
               ,
               17.
               
               The
               Communicant
               Branches
               between
               the
               Carotid
               and
               Vertebral
               Arteries
               ;
               in
               this
               Subject
               ,
               somewhat
               Larger
               than
               we
               Commonly
               find
               them
               .
            
             
               18
               ,
               18.
               
               The
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Arteries
               within
               the
               Skull
               ;
               the
               Larger
               Trunks
               of
               which
               lie
               between
               the
               Lobes
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               and
               in
               its
               S●●●i
               .
               From
               the
               Extremities
               of
               these
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Brain
               are
               Continu'd
               its
               Veins
               ,
               whose
               Trunks
               vary
               much
               in
               their
               Position
               from
               the
               Arteries
               :
               They
               Entring
               the
               Brain
               at
               its
               Basis
               ,
               and
               Distributing
               themselves
               ,
               as
               above
               noted
               ;
               whereas
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Veins
               are
               Extended
               on
               the
               Surface
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               and
               Discharge
               their
               Blood
               into
               the
               Longitudinal
               S●r●s
               .
               Nor
               do's
               the
               Veins
               of
               the
               Brain
               Accompany
               its
               Arteries
               at
               their
               Ingress
               ,
               as
               in
               other
               Parts
               :
               Or
               the
               Arteries
               and
               Vein
               .
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Meter
              
               ,
               pass
               the
               same
               F●ramen
               in
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               19
               ,
               19.
               
               The
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Larynx
               Thyroid
               Glandules
               ,
               and
               Adjacent
               Muscles
               and
               Parts
               ,
               Arising
               from
               the
               Subclavian
               Arteries
               .
            
             
               20
               ,
               20.
               
               Others
               Arising
               near
               the
               Former
               ,
               which
               convey
               Blood
               to
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               and
               Scapul●
               .
            
             
               21
               ,
               21.
               
               The
               Mammariae
               ,
               which
               Arise
               also
               from
               the
               Subclavian
               Arteries
               ,
               and
               Descend
               on
               the
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               True
               R●bs
               Internally
               ,
               about
               Half
               an
               Inch
               distant
               on
               each
               Side
               the
               Or
               Pectoris
               ,
               or
               S●rm●n
               .
               Some
               Branches
               of
               these
               pass
               thro'
               the
               Pectoral
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               i●●●costal
               Muscles
               ,
               and
               give
               Blood
               to
               the
               Mammae
               ,
               where
               they
               meet
               with
               some
               Branches
               of
               the
               Intercostal
               Arteries
               ,
               to
               which
               they
               are
               Inosculated
               .
               These
               Maminary
               Arteries
               join
               with
               the
               large
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Epigastricks
               (
               57
               ,
               57.
               )
               also
               ,
               by
               which
               Means
               the
               Impetus
               of
               the
               Blood
               in
               Integuments
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               ,
               is
               carry'd
               on
               with
               more
               Force
               ;
               the
               Ex●●●es
               of
               the
               Intercostal
               and
               Lumbal
               Arteries
               do
               also
               Inosculate
               with
               each
               other
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               with
               These
               .
            
             
               22
               ,
               22.
               
               The
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Humeri
              
               ,
               and
               some
               of
               those
               of
               the
               Scapul●
               .
            
             
               23
               ,
               23.
               
               Those
               Parts
               of
               the
               Large
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Arms
               ,
               which
               are
               liable
               to
               be
               Wounded
               in
               Opening
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Basilica
              
               ,
               or
               Innermost
               of
               the
               Three
               Veins
               in
               the
               Bending
               of
               the
               Cubit
               ,
               (
               See
               Fig.
               1.
               of
               this
               Appendix
               between
               26.
               and
               m
               ,
               )
               where
               the
               Precise
               Progress
               of
               this
               Artery
               is
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               24
               ,
               24.
               
               The
               Divisions
               of
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Arm
               below
               the
               Flexure
               of
               the
               Cubit
               .
            
             
               25.
               
               A
               Communicant
               Branch
               of
               an
               Artery
               ,
               Arising
               from
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Artery
               of
               the
               Arm
               ,
               above
               its
               Flexure
               at
               the
               Cubit
               ,
               which
               is
               Inosculated
               with
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Cubit
               below
               .
               In
               some
               Subjects
               you
               will
               not
               find
               This
               Communicant
               Branch
               ,
               as
               here
               repres●●d●
               in
               whom
               there
               are
               divers
               Smaller
               Branches
               of
               the
               same
               Kind
               .
               By
               these
               〈◊〉
               Branches
               (
               of
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Brachial
               Artery
               with
               those
               of
               the
               Cubit
               )
               the
               Blood
               still
               passes
               ,
               tho'
               the
               Trunk
               (
               23
               )
               is
               firmly
               Ty'd
               ,
               which
               is
               done
               
                 In
                 taking
                 up
                 the
                 〈◊〉
              
               ;
               as
               it
               's
               call'd
               when
               't
               is
               Wounded
               ,
               in
               the
               Cause
               of
               an
               Aneurisma
               .
               Besides
               firmly
               Tying
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Artery
               above
               the
               Place
               where
               it
               is
               Wounded
               ;
               it
               is
               also
               Necessary
               to
               tie
               it
               in
               like
               manner
               below
               ,
               least
               the
               Blood
               Convey'd
               by
               the
               Communicant
               Branches
               to
               the
               Inferior
               Trunk
               ,
               still
               pours
               out
               at
               the
               Wound
               of
               the
               Artery
               from
               below
               ,
               in
               a
               Retrograde
               Manner
               .
            
             
               26.
               
               The
               External
               Artery
               of
               the
               Cubit
               ,
               which
               makes
               the
               Pulse
               near
               the
               Carpus
               .
            
             
               27.
               
               The
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Hands
               and
               Fingers
               .
            
             
               28
               ,
               28.
               
               The
               Descending
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               .
            
             
               29.
               
               The
               
                 Arteria
                 Bronchalis
              
               ,
               Springing
               from
               one
               of
               the
               Intercostal
               Arteries
               ;
               It
               sometimes
               Arises
               immediately
               from
               the
               Descending
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Aorta
               ,
               at
               other
               times
               from
               the
               Superior
               Intercostal
               Artery
               ,
               which
               Springs
               from
               the
               Subclavian
               .
               These
               Bronchial
               Arteries
               Inosculate
               with
               the
               Pulmonary
               Arteries
               ,
               as
               I
               have
               elsewhere
               taken
               Notice
               ,
               and
               which
               I
               s●re
               find
               is
               mention'd
               and
               Figur'd
               by
               the
               Accurate
               
                 Ruysch
                 ,
                 Epist
                 ,
                 Anatom
              
               .
               6.
               
               Fig.
               5.
               c
               ,
               c
               ,
               c.
               
            
             
               30.
               
               A
               Small
               Artery
               Springing
               from
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               
                 Aorta
                 Descendens
              
               ,
               passing
               to
               ●
               
                 Gula●
                 Prysch
              
               tells
               us
               of
               Branches
               of
               Arteries
               from
               the
               Superior
               Intercostal
               ,
               which
               〈◊〉
               the
               Gula.
               
            
             
               31
               ,
               31.
               
               The
               Intercostal
               Arteries
               on
               each
               Side
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
                 Descendens
              
               .
            
             
               32.
               
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Caeliaca
              
               ,
               from
               whence
               Springs
            
             
               33
               ,
               33.
               
               The
               Hepatick
               Arteries
               ,
               and
            
             
               34.
               
               The
               
                 Arteria
                 Cystica
              
               ,
               lying
               on
               the
               Gall-bladder
               ,
            
             
               35.
               
               The
               
                 Arteria
                 Cerenaria
                 Ventriculi
                 Inferior
              
               ,
            
             
               36.
               
               The
               Pylorica
               ,
            
             
               37
               ,
               37.
               
               The
               
                 Epiplaica
                 Dextra
                 ,
                 Sinistra
              
               ,
               and
               Media
               ,
               Springing
               from
               the
               Coronaria
               .
            
             
               38.
               
               The
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Coronary
               Artery
               ,
               which
               embrace
               on
               the
               Bottom
               of
               the
               Stomach
               .
            
             
               39.
               
               The
               
                 C●●r●ria
                 Ventriculi
                 Superior
              
               .
            
             
               40
               ,
               40.
               
               The
               Phrenick
               Arteries
               ,
               or
               the
               Two
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Diaphragm
               ;
               that
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               Arising
               from
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               ,
               the
               Right
               Springing
               from
               the
               Caeliacae
               .
            
             
               41.
               
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Splenick
               Artery
               ,
               Arising
               from
               the
               Caeliaca
               :
               This
               is
               Contorted
               in
               the
               Adult
               ,
               as
               it
               appears
               Tab.
               36.
               
            
             
               42.
               
               Two
               Small
               Arteries
               going
               to
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Duodemum
               and
               Pancreas
               ;
               the
               Rest
               of
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Pancreas
               Spring
               from
               the
               Splenick
               Artery
               in
               its
               Passage
               to
               the
               Spleen
               .
            
             
               43.
               
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Mesenterica
                 Superior
              
               ,
               Turn'd
               towards
               the
               Right
               Side
               .
            
             
               44
               ,
               44.
               
               The
               Branches
               of
               the
               Superior
               Mesenterick
               Artery
               ,
               freed
               from
               the
               Small
               Guts
               ;
               here
               the
               Various
               Anastomoses
               ,
               the
               Branches
               of
               this
               Artery
               make
               in
               the
               Mesentery
               ,
               before
               they
               arrive
               at
               the
               Intestines
               ,
               may
               be
               observ'd
               .
            
             
               45.
               
               The
               Inferior
               Mesenterick
               Artery
               ,
               Arising
               from
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               .
            
             
               46.
               
               A
               Remarkable
               Anastomosis
               of
               this
               Inferior
               Mesenterick
               Artery
               ,
               with
               the
               Superior
               .
            
             
               47
               ,
               47
               ,
               47.
               
               The
               Branches
               of
               the
               Inferior
               Mesenterick
               Artery
               ,
               as
               they
               pass
               to
               the
               
                 Intestinum
                 Colon
              
               ;
            
             
               48
               ,
               48.
               
               Those
               of
               the
               Rectum
               .
            
             
               49
               ,
               49.
               
               The
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Kidneys
               .
            
             
               50
               ,
               50.
               
               The
               Vertebral
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Loins
               .
            
             
               51
               ,
               51.
               
               The
               Spermatick
               Arteries
               ,
               which
               descend
               to
               the
               Testes
               ,
               are
               so
               Small
               as
               to
               escape
               being
               Fill'd
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               52.
               
               The
               
                 Aneria
                 Sacra
              
               .
            
             
               53
               ,
               53.
               
               The
               Iliaci
               .
            
             
               54
               ,
               54.
               
               The
               
                 Rami
                 Iliaci
                 Externi
              
               :
            
             
               55
               ,
               55.
               
               The
               
                 Iliaci
                 Interni
              
               ;
               which
               are
               here
               Larger
               in
               the
               Foetus
               proportionably
               ,
               than
               in
               the
               Adult
               ,
               by
               Reason
               of
               their
               Conjunction
               with
               the
               Two
               Umbilical
               Arteries
               .
            
             
               56
               ,
               56.
               
               The
               Two
               Umbilical
               Arteries
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               57
               ,
               57.
               
               The
               Epigastrick
               Arteries
               ,
               which
               Ascend
               under
               the
               Right
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               ,
               and
               are
               Inosculated
               with
               the
               Mammariae
               ,
               as
               above
               Noted
               .
            
             
               58
               ,
               58.
               
               Branches
               of
               the
               External
               Iliac●
               Arteries
               ,
               passing
               between
               the
               Two
               Oblique
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               .
            
             
               59
               ,
               59.
               
               Branches
               of
               the
               Internal
               Iliack
               Arteries
               ,
               which
               Convey
               Blood
               to
               the
               Extending
               and
               Obturating
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Thighs
               .
            
             
               60
               ,
               60.
               
               The
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               which
               pass
               to
               the
               Penis
               .
            
             
               61
               ,
               61.
               
               The
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               .
            
             
               62
               ,
               62.
               
               The
               Internal
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Pudendum
               ,
               which
               with
               those
               here
               Exprest
               of
               the
               Penis
               ,
               make
               the
               Hypogastrick
               Arteries
               in
               Women
               .
               The
               External
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Pulendum
               ,
               Arise
               from
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Crural
               Artery
               ,
               which
               is
               immediately
               below
               the
               Epigastricks
               .
            
             
               63.
               
               The
               Penis
               Distended
               with
               Wind
               ,
               and
               Dry'd
               .
            
             
               64.
               
               The
               
                 Glans
                 Penis
              
               .
            
             
               65.
               
               The
               Upper
               Part
               or
               
                 Dorsum
                 Penis
              
               ,
               cut
               from
               the
               Body
               of
               the
               Penis
               ,
               and
               Rais'd
               to
               Show
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Caevernosa
                 Penis
              
               .
            
             
               66
               ,
               66.
               
               The
               
                 Corpora
                 Caevarnosa
                 Penis
              
               ,
               Fred
               from
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Pubis
              
               ,
               and
               Ty'd
               after
               Inflation
               .
            
             
               67.
               
               The
               Two
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Penis
               ,
               as
               they
               Appear
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               in
               each
               Cavernous
               Body
               of
               the
               Penis
               .
            
             
               68.
               
               The
               Capsula
               ,
               and
               Septum
               of
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Cavenosa
                 Penis
              
               .
            
             
               69.
               
               The
               Crural
               Arteries
               .
            
             
               70
               ,
               70.
               
               The
               Arteries
               ,
               which
               pass
               to
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Thighs
               and
               Tibiae
               :
               The
               Nomination
               of
               each
               Muscle
               in
               this
               Place
               would
               be
               Tedious
               ,
               and
               of
               no
               Use
               ;
               wherefore
               I
               shall
               pass
               Them
               by
               here
               ,
               as
               I
               have
               done
               in
               the
               Arms
               ;
               it
               being
               sufficient
               ,
               we
               know
               ,
               the
               Progress
               of
               the
               Great
               Trunks
               ,
               to
               avoid
               Wounding
               them
               in
               Chirurgical
               Operations
               ,
               or
               to
               find
               them
               on
               Occasion
               :
               We
               shall
               begin
               first
               with
               the
               Description
               of
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Arm.
               So
               soon
               as
               the
               Subclavian
               Artery
               has
               past
               the
               Claevicula
               ,
               it
               marches
               thro'
               the
               Axilla
               ,
               wherefore
               it
               's
               call'd
               Axillaris
               ,
               whence
               it●
               .
               Trunk
               Descends
               between
               the
               
                 Masculus
                 Brachiaeus
                 Intermu
              
               and
               Externus
               ,
               on
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Arm
               ,
               and
               is
               Divided
               below
               the
               Bending
               of
               the
               Cubit
               ,
               as
               you
               see
               it
               Exprest
               in
               the
               Figure
               ;
               it
               Parting
               with
               Several
               Branches
               to
               the
               Neighbouring
               Muscles
               ,
               and
               Parts
               it
               Passes
               by
               ;
               Their
               Distribution
               not
               being
               alike
               in
               any
               Two
               Subjects
               ,
               I
               have
               hitherto
               Examin'd
               ,
               or
               in
               the
               Right
               and
               Left
               Sides
               of
               the
               same
               ,
               as
               appears
               in
               this
               Figure
               :
               Tho'
               the
               Progress
               of
               their
               Large
               Trunks
               are
               commonly
               Uniform
               ;
               yet
               in
               that
               too
               ,
               they
               vary
               considerably
               ,
               and
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Artery
               at
               the
               Flexure
               of
               the
               Cubit
               sometimes
               runs
               Collateral
               with
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Basilica
              
               ,
               tho'
               it
               most
               commonly
               passes
               Under
               that
               Vein
               :
               Of
               this
               ,
               Those
               that
               Let
               Blood
               ought
               to
               take
               Notice
               ,
               and
               that
               the
               Vessel
               they
               See
               or
               Feel
               has
               no
               Pulsation
               ,
               before
               they
               thrust
               their
               Launset
               into
               it
               .
               Nor
               can
               I
               omit
               a
               Useful
               Observation
               in
               this
               Place
               ;
               which
               is
               ,
               That
               the
               Operator
               before
               He
               applies
               his
               Ligature
               on
               the
               Arm
               ,
               should
               first
               feel
               for
               the
               Artery
               ,
               because
               afterwards
               its
               Palsation
               cannot
               be
               so
               easily
               Discover'd
               ;
               the
               Reason
               of
               which
               is
               Obvious
               .
               After
               Amputation
               ,
               above
               the
               Elbow
               ,
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Axillary
               Artery
               only
               ,
               affords
               any
               Considerable
               Flux
               of
               Blood
               :
               In
               Amputations
               below
               the
               Elbow
               ,
               we
               find
               Two
               ,
               sometimes
               Three
               ,
               and
               Four
               Considerable
               Trunks
               ,
               which
               may
               require
               
                 Tying
                 Up
              
               ;
               the
               Manner
               of
               which
               Practice
               is
               so
               well
               Describ'd
               in
               the
               Works
               of
               
                 Ambrose
                 Pary
              
               ,
               I
               shall
               omit
               saying
               any
               Thing
               of
               it
               in
               this
               Place
               ,
               tho'
               it
               has
               been
               most
               commonly
               Disus'd
               in
               this
               Kingdom
               till
               of
               Late
               ;
               the
               many
               Conveniencies
               of
               which
               Practice
               will
               (
               I
               don't
               doubt
               )
               sufficiently
               Recommend
               it
               to
               a
               General
               Use
               ,
               as
               well
               in
               other
               Impetuous
               Fluxes
               of
               Blood
               ,
               as
               in
               those
               after
               Amputations
               .
               After
               the
               External
               Iliack
               Artery
               (
               54
               )
               is
               past
               out
               of
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Abdomen
               ,
               it
               obtains
               the
               Name
               of
               the
               Crural
               Artery
               ,
               (
               69.
               )
               and
               Descends
               obliquely
               on
               the
               Crural
               Vein
               ,
               on
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Thigh
               ,
               immediately
               Under
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Sartorius
              
               :
               About
               Four
               Fingers
               Breadth
               above
               the
               Knee
               ,
               these
               Two
               Large
               Blood
               Vessels
               pass
               thro'
               the
               Lower
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Triceps
              
               to
               the
               Ham
               ,
               (
               71.
               )
               here
               the
               Vein
               is
               Plac'd
               Above
               the
               Artery
               as
               in
               other
               Parts
               ,
               and
               so
               Descends
               to
               the
               Foot
               ,
               after
               being
               Divided
               in
               Three
               Branches
               ,
               as
               is
               Exprest
               in
               Fig.
               72.
               
            
             
               71.
               
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Crural
               Artery
               ,
               which
               passes
               the
               Ham.
               
            
             
               72.
               
               The
               Three
               Large
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Leg.
               
            
             
               73.
               
               The
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Foot.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               4.
               
            
             
               The
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               ,
               as
               they
               Appear
               by
               a
               Microscope
               in
               the
               Transparent
               Fin
               of
               a
               Living
               Grig
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Fin
               of
               a
               Grig
               ,
               lying
               in
               a
               Glass
               Tube
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Cartilaginous
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Ribs
               ,
               on
               which
               the
               Fin
               is
               Extended
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Small
               Scratches
               ,
               or
               Streaks
               we
               commonly
               find
               in
               the
               Glass
               Tube
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Branches
               of
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               Proceeding
               from
               their
               Larger
               Trunks
               in
               the
               Body
               of
               the
               Grig
               ,
               Conveying
               the
               Blood
               to
               the
               outmost
               Margine
               of
               the
               Fin.
               
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               Continu'd
               to
               the
               Veins
               ,
               wherein
               One
               Globule
               of
               the
               Blood
               only
               moves
               before
               another
               .
               Besides
               these
               Communications
               of
               the
               Veins
               with
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               there
               are
               still
               others
               which
               are
               Larger
               ,
               wherein
               more
               than
               two
               Globules
               can
               pass
               together
               :
               Those
               are
               every
               where
               Interspers'd
               with
               the
               Lesser
               ,
               as
               plainly
               appears
               in
               the
               Fin
               and
               Tail
               of
               the
               Flounder
               ,
               Fig.
               5.
               
               F.
               
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Veins
               which
               convey
               the
               Refluent
               Blood
               to
               the
               Heart
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Magnitude
               of
               the
               Arta
               ,
               taken
               by
               the
               Microscope
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               5.
               
            
             
               The
               Extremity
               ,
               or
               outmost
               Margin
               of
               the
               Side-Fin
               of
               a
               Small
               Living
               Flounder
               ,
               view'd
               with
               a
               Microscope
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Cartilaginous
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Ribs
               ,
               on
               each
               Side
               of
               which
               ,
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Great
               Blood
               Vessels
               pass
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Arteries
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Veins
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               Their
               Lesser
               Extremities
               Continu'd
               to
               each
               other
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Large
               Branches
               of
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               ,
               Inosculating
               with
               themselves
               ,
               before
               they
               arrive
               at
               their
               Extremities
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Larger
               Conjunctions
               of
               the
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               ,
               at
               the
               outmost
               Margin
               of
               the
               Fin.
               
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Arta
               which
               the
               Microscope
               took
               in
               ,
               as
               it
               appears
               to
               the
               Naked
               Eye
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               6.
               
            
             
               Represents
               (
               according
               to
               our
               Conception
               )
               the
               Origination
               of
               the
               Lympheducts
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Small
               Branch
               of
               an
               Artery
               ,
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               Its
               Extremity
               Continued
               to
               the
               Vein
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Branch
               of
               a
               Vein
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               A
               Lympheduct
               Arising
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               ,
               either
               by
               the
               Mediation
               of
               Divers
               Vesiculae
               ,
               or
               Small
               Tubes
               ;
               which
               have
               Apertures
               into
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               7.
               
            
             
               The
               Manner
               of
               the
               Origin
               of
               the
               Excretory
               Ducts
               ,
               from
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Artery
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Vein
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               A
               Branch
               of
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 Excretorius
              
               .
            
             
               d
               d
               ,
               The
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               .
            
             
               e
               e
               ,
               The
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Excretory
               Tubes
               ,
               at
               their
               Rise
               from
               the
               Pores
               in
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               Blood
               Vessels
               ,
               before
               they
               Unite
               in
               the
               Branch
               of
               the
               Duct
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FOURTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               8.
               
            
             
               IS
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               with
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               remaining
               on
               it
               ,
               together
               with
               divers
               Muscles
               and
               other
               Parts
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               B
               ,
               C
               C
               ,
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               :
               A
               ,
               its
               Fore-part
               ,
               behind
               which
               ,
               the
               Tooth-like
               Process
               of
               the
               Second
               Vertebra
               is
               plac'd
               ;
               B
               ,
               it
               s
               Back
               part
               wanting
               a
               Spinal
               Process
               where
               the
               
                 Musculi
                 Recti
                 Minores
                 Postici
              
               Arise
               ;
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Transverse
               Process's
               :
               D
               D
               ,
               Two
               somewhat
               Oval
               Process's
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               ,
               which
               Move
               Side-ways
               on
               the
               like
               Process's
               on
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               Second
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               A
               Cavity
               immediatly
               behind
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               ,
               Fenc'd
               with
               a
               strong
               Ligament
               Backwards
               next
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Tooth-like
               Process
               of
               the
               Second
               Vertebra
               Tab.
               93.
               
               Fig.
               3
               ,
               4.
               
               A
               A
               ,
               is
               receiv'd
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Great
               Foramen
               ,
               through
               which
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               Descends
               from
               the
               Head.
               
            
             
               G
               ,
               A
               Small
               Muscle
               ,
               which
               from
               its
               Position
               I
               call
               
                 Rectus
                 Lateralis
              
               :
               I
               first
               met
               with
               it
               in
               Dissection
               ,
               some
               time
               since
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               found
               it
               was
               partly
               Mention'd
               by
               Galen
               ,
               and
               Describ'd
               by
               Fallōppius
               :
               It
               Arises
               from
               the
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Transverse
               Process
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               and
               Ascends
               directly
               to
               its
               Implantation
               in
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ;
               when
               it
               Acts
               ,
               it
               Nods
               the
               Head
               Laterally
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Rectus
                 Anterior
                 Minor
              
               ,
               so
               call'd
               from
               its
               Progress
               ,
               Situation
               and
               Size
               ,
               it
               being
               much
               less
               than
               the
               
                 Rectus
                 Major
              
               ,
               Tab.
               18.
               
               L
               L.
               It
               Arises
               from
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               ,
               and
               is
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Appendix
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipisis
              
               :
               This
               with
               its
               Partner
               Nod
               the
               Head
               Forewards
               ,
               and
               may
               be
               term'd
               Annuentes
               .
            
             
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               Perforations
               in
               the
               Transverie
               Process's
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Vertebral
               Arteries
               and
               Veins
               Pass
               .
            
             
               K
               K
               ,
               The
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Vertebral
               Arteries
               in
               their
               Contorted
               Passage
               between
               the
               Transverse
               Process
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               and
               Great
               Foramen
               (
               F
               )
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               L
               L
               ,
               The
               Mamiform
               Process's
               .
            
             
               M
               M
               ,
               The
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 Auditorius
              
               .
            
             
               N
               N
               ,
               A
               Probe
               Inserted
               into
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 à
                 Palato
                 ad
                 Aurem
              
               .
               This
               Passage
               from
               the
               Fauces
               admits
               the
               Air
               to
               Pass
               from
               thence
               into
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               ,
               whereby
               the
               
                 Membra●ea
                 Tympani
              
               becomes
               more
               Distended
               ,
               and
               the
               least
               Impetus
               of
               the
               outward
               Air
               Shakes
               it
               ,
               together
               with
               its
               little
               Bones
               that
               are
               Contiguous
               to
               it
               .
               Besides
               this
               Passage
               into
               the
               Tympanum
               ,
               there
               is
               another
               Passage
               out
               of
               it
               ,
               by
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               into
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 Auditorius
              
               ,
               by
               which
               some
               in
               holding
               their
               Nostrils
               and
               Mouths
               ,
               and
               forcing
               up
               their
               Breath
               ,
               can
               move
               a
               small
               Feather
               or
               the
               Flame
               of
               a
               Candle
               ,
               when
               held
               near
               the
               Outward
               Ear
               ;
               in
               others
               it
               's
               still
               Opener
               ,
               and
               they
               can
               Blow
               Smoke
               out
               at
               their
               Ears
               .
               Tho'
               this
               Passage
               thro'
               the
               Tympanum
               is
               not
               commonly
               so
               Open
               as
               in
               the
               First
               Case
               ,
               yet
               naturally
               there
               is
               a
               Small
               Passage
               by
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               into
               the
               
                 Measus
                 Auditorius
              
               ,
               which
               seems
               necessary
               ,
               to
               the
               End
               when
               the
               Tympamon
               is
               Fill'd
               with
               Air
               ,
               any
               Sudden
               Impetus
               of
               the
               External
               Air
               should
               not
               Violate
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               .
               The
               
                 Meatus
                 à
                 Palato
                 ad
                 Aurem
              
               do's
               not
               only
               Convey
               Air
               into
               the
               Tympamon
               ,
               but
               (
               constantly
               remaining
               Open
               )
               it
               Admits
               of
               a
               Fluctuation
               of
               the
               Contain'd
               Air
               of
               the
               Tympamon
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               a
               Fresh
               Supply
               :
               If
               this
               Passage
               is
               Straiten'd
               ,
               a
               Difficulty
               of
               Hearing
               necessarily
               Follows
               ;
               if
               it
               is
               totally
               Obstructed
               ,
               a
               Deafness
               ;
               in
               which
               Case
               ,
               the
               Taking
               of
               Sneezing
               Powders
               gives
               Relief
               .
            
             
               O
               ,
               The
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               Continu'd
               from
               the
               
                 Foramina
                 Narium
              
               to
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Fauces
               .
            
             
               P
               P
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Scyloides
              
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               The
               Carotid
               Artery
               Cut
               off
               near
               its
               Entrance
               into
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               .
            
             
               R
               R
               ,
               The
               Lower
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Iugalia
              
               .
            
             
               S
               ,
               A
               Cartilaginous
               Body
               lying
               in
               the
               Depressure
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               ,
               where
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Condyliformis
              
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               is
               Articulated
               .
            
             
               T
               ,
               The
               same
               Intermediate
               Cartilage
               of
               the
               Articulation
               Rais'd
               .
            
             
               V
               ,
               The
               Smooth
               Sinus
               in
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporale
              
               ,
               which
               Receiv'd
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               t
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Mucelaginous
               Gland
               of
               this
               Articulation
               ,
               Clearing
               to
               the
               above-mention'd
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               W
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporale
              
               Cut
               off
               .
            
             
               X
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               in
               like
               Manner
               Saw'd
               off
               .
            
             
               Y
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Occipitalis
              
               ,
               as
               it
               Arises
               from
               that
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               where
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Head
               are
               Inserted
               ,
               whence
               Mounting
               it
               ,
               soon
               becomes
               Tendinous
               ,
               and
               Marches
               on
               the
               Sincipus
               ,
               where
               it
               's
               Join'd
               with
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               Fromalis
               :
               Unless
               it
               may
               be
               Suppos'd
               ,
               that
               the
               Occipital
               and
               Frontal
               Muscles
               are
               One
               Biventral
               Muscle
               ,
               Arising
               from
               the
               Occiput
               and
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Lower
               Part
               of
               the
               Skin
               of
               the
               Fore-head
               ,
               and
               being
               Fasten'd
               to
               the
               Hairy-scalp
               ,
               Moves
               it
               Forewards
               and
               Backwards
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               Lifts
               up
               the
               Lower
               Part
               of
               the
               Forehead
               with
               the
               Eyebrows
               .
            
             
               Z
               Z
               ,
               The
               Thinner
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               where
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Head
               are
               Inserted
               .
            
             
               a
               ,
               The
               Gargareon
               Supported
               by
               the
               Probe
               ,
               N
               N
               ,
               Inserted
               into
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 à
                 Palato
                 ad
                 Aurem
              
               .
            
             
               b
               b
               ,
               The
               little
               Glandules
               ,
               which
               Appear
               in
               Cutting
               the
               Fauces
               from
               hence
               .
            
             
               c
               c
               ,
               The
               Extremity
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Pterygoides
              
               ,
               or
               more
               properly
               the
               Extremity
               of
               a
               Small
               Slender
               Process
               above
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Pterygoides
              
               in
               this
               Position
               of
               the
               Skull
               ;
               since
               Anatomists
               in
               Describing
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Uvrela
               have
               call'd
               this
               Process
               Pterigoides
               or
               Aliformis
               ,
               we
               shall
               still
               Retain
               the
               same
               Name
               ,
               tho'
               the
               Aliform
               Process's
               Exprest
               ,
               Tab.
               92.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
               K
               ,
               are
               Distinct
               Process's
               ,
               and
               no
               ways
               like
               these
               .
            
             
               dd
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Sphenopirrigostaphilini
              
               ,
               so
               call'd
               from
               their
               Origin
               ,
               Progress
               ,
               and
               Insertion
               :
               they
               are
               also
               call'd
               Pterigopalatini
               and
               Sphenoterigopalatini
               ;
               they
               Arise
               Fleshy
               from
               an
               Acute
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               Exprest
               
                 Appen
                 .
                 Fig.
              
               15.
               
               H.
               whence
               they
               Pass
               to
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Pterygoides
              
               ,
               c
               c
               ,
               where
               they
               become
               Tendinous
               ,
               and
               are
               Reflected
               over
               those
               Process's
               to
               their
               Insertions
               on
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Gargareon
               :
               When
               these
               Act
               ,
               they
               Draw
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Gargareus
               towards
               the
               Pterigoid
               Process's
               ,
               whereby
               it
               's
               pull'd
               somewhat
               Upwards
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               Forewards
               .
            
             
               e
               e
               ,
               The
               Sphenostaphilini
               :
               These
               Arise
               from
               the
               same
               Process's
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               with
               the
               former
               ,
               and
               are
               Inserted
               on
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Gargareon
               Opposite
               to
               the
               Former
               .
               These
               Draw
               the
               Uvula
               Upwards
               and
               Backwards
               ,
               whereby
               it
               Prevents
               the
               Ascent
               of
               the
               Aliment
               into
               the
               
                 Foramina
                 Nariton
              
               in
               Deglutition
               ,
               as
               it
               Happens
               in
               those
               in
               whom
               the
               Uvula
               is
               wanting
               .
            
             
               f
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Pterygoideus
                 Externus
              
               Left
               at
               its
               Origin
               ,
               at
               the
               External
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Pterygoides
              
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Upper
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               it self
               ;
               whence
               it
               Passes
               Backwards
               to
               its
               Insertion
               at
               the
               Neck
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Condyloides
              
               of
               the
               Lower-Jaw
               .
               When
               this
               and
               its
               Partner
               Act
               they
               Draw
               the
               Lower-Jaw
               Forewards
               ,
               whereby
               the
               Fore-teeth
               of
               the
               Lower-Jaw
               are
               Driven
               beyond
               those
               of
               the
               Superior
               ,
               as
               Falloppius
               Observes
               .
            
             
               g
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Pterygoideus
                 Internus
              
               also
               Free'd
               from
               the
               Lower-Jaw
               ,
               and
               Left
               at
               its
               Origin
               :
               Tab.
               15.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               N.
               It
               's
               Represented
               at
               its
               Insertion
               .
            
             
               h
               ,
               Some
               Appearance
               of
               the
               
                 Septum
                 Narium
              
               Backwards
               .
            
             
               i
               i
               ,
               The
               
                 Denies
                 Molares
              
               .
            
             
               k
               k
               ,
               The
               Canini
               .
            
             
               l
               ,
               The
               In●isores
               .
            
             
               m
               ,
               The
               
                 Glandulae
                 Labiorum
              
               ,
               as
               they
               Appear
               in
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Upper
               Lip.
               Under
               the
               InInternal
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Mouth
               ;
               each
               of
               these
               Glands
               has
               an
               Excretory
               Duct
               ,
               which
               Perforates
               the
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Mouth
               at
               a
               small
               Papilla
               ,
               by
               which
               a
               Salival
               Humor
               is
               Emitted
               into
               the
               Mouth
               :
               The
               like
               Glands
               may
               be
               seen
               on
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Cheeks
               .
            
             
               n
               ,
               The
               Tip
               of
               the
               Nose
               .
            
             
               o
               ,
               The
               Hairs
               of
               the
               Palpabrae
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               9.
               
            
             
               The
               External
               Surface
               of
               One
               of
               the
               
                 Glandulae
                 Tonfillae
              
               or
               Amigdalae
               ,
               where
               the
               many
               large
               Foramina
               of
               its
               Excretory
               Ducts
               Appear
               ,
               by
               which
               its
               Pituitous
               Matter
               is
               Discharg'd
               into
               the
               Fauces
               ,
               which
               joins
               with
               the
               Aliment
               in
               its
               Descent
               to
               the
               Gula.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               10.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               Fill'd
               with
               Quick-silver
               ,
               with
               the
               Neighbouring
               Lymphatick
               Glands
               remaining
               in
               their
               Proper
               Situation
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Adjacent
               Parts
               ;
               as
               I
               could
               make
               a
               Sketch
               of
               them
               whilst
               I
               was
               Demonstrating
               the
               Parts
               of
               a
               Humane
               Body
               to
               some
               Worthy
               and
               Ingenious
               Gentlemen
               ,
               when
               Professor
               Bidloo
               favor'd
               me
               with
               a
               Visit.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Kidneys
               .
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               The
               Emulgent
               Veins
               ,
               of
               which
               that
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               is
               Lower
               than
               the
               Left.
               
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Ascending
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               Distended
               with
               Wind
               ;
               the
               Lower
               Part
               of
               which
               is
               Comprest
               by
               the
               Iliack
               Artery
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               .
            
             
               b
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               Cut
               from
               its
               Entrance
               into
               the
               Liver
               and
               Ty'd
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Two
               Iliack
               Veins
               ,
               which
               may
               be
               seen
               Distended
               with
               Wind
               below
               the
               Right
               Iliack
               Artery
               ,
               as
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               is
               above
               ;
               The
               External
               Iliack
               Veins
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Crutal
               Veins
               ,
               lie
               immediatly
               under
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Arteries
               that
               Accompany
               them
               ,
               till
               they
               Pass
               by
               the
               Lower
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Triceps
              
               and
               
                 Os
                 Femoris
              
               ,
               to
               the
               Ham
               ,
               where
               the
               Vein
               is
               Uppermost
               and
               the
               Artery
               Passes
               Underneath
               ,
               after
               the
               same
               Manner
               the
               Great
               Trunks
               of
               Veins
               and
               Arteries
               do
               in
               other
               Parts
               .
               This
               Contrivance
               in
               Nature
               of
               Placing
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Iliack
               and
               Upper
               Parts
               of
               the
               Crural
               Arteries
               on
               the
               Veins
               ,
               is
               an
               Admirable
               Artifice
               to
               Accelerate
               the
               Ascention
               of
               the
               Blood
               to
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               and
               Heart
               ,
               as
               it
               Arises
               from
               the
               Inferior
               Parts
               ,
               by
               means
               of
               the
               Pulsation
               of
               the
               Arteries
               .
               If
               you
               Inject
               the
               Arteries
               with
               Wax
               and
               afterwards
               Fill
               the
               Veins
               with
               the
               same
               ,
               you
               will
               see
               by
               the
               Figure
               of
               the
               Wax
               Contain'd
               in
               the
               Veins
               ,
               what
               Effect
               the
               Pulsations
               of
               the
               Arteries
               have
               on
               them
               ,
               in
               Order
               to
               Promote
               the
               Ascention
               of
               the
               Refluent
               Blood
               from
               below
               .
               In
               this
               Compressure
               made
               by
               the
               Iliack
               Artery
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               ,
               on
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               it
               s
               Contain'd
               Blood
               is
               Forc'd
               to
               Ascend
               towards
               the
               Heart
               ,
               the
               Valves
               in
               the
               Crural
               Veins
               Opposing
               its
               Descent
               :
               By
               this
               means
               also
               the
               Pondus
               of
               the
               Refluent
               Blood
               from
               below
               is
               Lessen'd
               ,
               to
               the
               End
               its
               Motion
               may
               be
               the
               better
               Carri'd
               on
               at
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Vessels
               in
               the
               Legs
               and
               Feet
               ,
               and
               a
               Kind
               of
               a
               Pulsation
               made
               by
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               ,
               whereby
               the
               Lymphatick
               Lumbal
               Gland
               R
               R
               ,
               lying
               between
               it
               and
               the
               Bodies
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               is
               gently
               Comprest
               ,
               of
               which
               hereafter
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Ascending
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               below
               the
               Kidneys
               .
            
             
               d
               d
               ,
               The
               Iliack
               Arteries
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Culiata
                 Arteries
              
               Cut
               off
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Mesenterica
                 Superior
              
               in
               like
               Manner
               Cut
               off
               .
            
             
               e
               e
               ,
               The
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Testes
               ;
               the
               Right
               Appearing
               at
               its
               Origin
               from
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               D
               ;
               the
               Left
               Passing
               thro'
               the
               Lumbal
               Gland
               ,
               Q.
               
            
             
               f
               f
               ,
               The
               Spermatick
               Veins
               near
               their
               Entrance
               into
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               ,
               and
               Emulgent
               Vein
               of
               the
               Left
               ;
               where
               there
               are
               Valves
               Plac'd
               ,
               which
               Hinder
               the
               Descent
               of
               the
               Blood
               from
               those
               Large
               Vessels
               into
               these
               Veins
               .
            
             
               g
               g
               ,
               The
               Upper
               Parts
               of
               the
               Ureters
               Distended
               with
               Wind
               ;
            
             
               h
               h
               ,
               Their
               Lower
               Parts
               ,
               as
               they
               Pass
               to
               the
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               not
               Extended
               :
               About
               these
               Parts
               of
               the
               Ureters
               ,
               as
               they
               Descend
               over
               the
               Iliack
               Arteries
               ,
               we
               frequently
               find
               them
               Dilated
               by
               Reason
               of
               the
               Pulsation
               of
               those
               Arteries
               ,
               which
               Prevents
               the
               free
               Descent
               of
               the
               Urine
               ,
               and
               especially
               Stones
               and
               Gravel
               ,
               both
               which
               often
               Pass
               them
               :
               Tho'
               more
               than
               once
               I
               have
               Seen
               One
               of
               the
               Ureters
               compleatly
               Obstructed
               by
               Small
               Stones
               in
               this
               Part.
               
            
             
               i
               ,
               Some
               Fat
               Remaining
               on
               the
               Ureter
               ,
               as
               it
               Passes
               out
               of
               the
               Kidney
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Glandulae
                 Renales
              
               or
               
                 Capsulae
                 Atrabilares
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Lower
               Fleshy
               Part
               of
               the
               Diaphragm
               ,
               which
               Arises
               from
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Loins
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               Fissura
               of
               the
               Diaphragm
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Gula
               Passes
               to
               the
               Stomack
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               Bladder
               of
               Urine
               Distended
               with
               Wind.
               
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               Urachus
               Turn'd
               down
               .
            
             
               M
               M
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Psoi
                 Magni
              
               .
            
             
               N.
               The
               
                 Saecculus
                 Chyliferous
              
               or
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               (
               Exprest
               A.
               Fig.
               11.
               )
               as
               it
               Appears
               when
               Fill'd
               with
               Mercury
               ,
               after
               freeing
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               ,
               B
               ,
               from
               its
               Accompanying
               the
               
                 A●eria
                 Magna
              
               ,
               D.
               
            
             
               O
               ,
               A
               Large
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Vinae
                 Lactea
                 Secundi
                 Geruris
              
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Mercury
               was
               Injected
               .
            
             
               P
               ,
               The
               Tube
               which
               Convey'd
               in
               the
               Mercury
               .
            
             
               Q
               Q
               The
               
                 Glandula
                 Lumbalis
              
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               ,
               Lying
               partly
               on
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               .
            
             
               R
               R
               ,
               The
               Right
               Lumbal
               Gland
               ,
               Lying
               partly
               under
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               .
            
             
               S
               S
               ,
               Some
               Communicant
               Branches
               of
               Lympheducts
               between
               the
               Two
               Lumbal
               Glands
               .
            
             
               f
               f
               ,
               The
               Lympheducts
               Arising
               from
               the
               Inguinal
               Glandules
               ,
               
                 App.
                 Fig.
              
               1.
               
               S
               S.
               as
               well
               as
               Divers
               other
               Lymphatick
               Glandules
               Lying
               on
               the
               Iliack
               Branches
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               (
               C
               C
               d
               d
               :
               )
               These
               Discharge
               all
               the
               Lympha
               ,
               arising
               from
               the
               Inferior
               Parts
               into
               the
               Lumbal
               Glands
               ,
               whence
               it
               Passes
               immediatly
               into
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               ,
               and
               is
               afterwards
               Convey'd
               by
               the
               Thoracick
               Duct
               (
               Fig.
               11.
               
               MM.
               )
               into
               the
               Subclarian
               Vein
               (
               Fig.
               12.
               
               HL
               :
               )
               This
               is
               the
               Ordinary
               Course
               of
               the
               Lympha
               ,
               arising
               from
               the
               Inferior
               Parts
               in
               its
               Way
               to
               the
               Mass
               of
               Blood
               again
               .
               Hence
               it
               Appears
               ,
               the
               Lympha
               of
               the
               Inferior
               Parts
               Meets
               with
               the
               Chyle
               in
               its
               Receptaculum
               ,
               whereby
               the
               Chyle
               is
               there
               not
               only
               farther
               Dilated
               ,
               but
               its
               Ascention
               is
               Accelerated
               towards
               the
               Subclavian
               Vein
               ,
               by
               an
               Additional
               Impetus
               from
               the
               Ascending
               Lympha
               .
            
             
               Here
               we
               can't
               but
               take
               Notice
               of
               a
               Considerable
               Artifice
               in
               Nature
               in
               the
               Disposition
               of
               these
               Lymphatick
               Lumbal
               Glands
               ,
               whereby
               the
               Progress
               of
               the
               Lympha
               is
               Promoted
               towards
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               .
               As
               the
               Lympheducts
               Pass
               from
               the
               Inferior
               Parts
               ,
               they
               Accompany
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Arteries
               ,
               by
               whose
               Continual
               Motion
               of
               Systole
               and
               Diastole
               ,
               the
               Ascent
               of
               the
               Lympha
               is
               Promoted
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Blood
               ;
               but
               when
               the
               Lympha
               Arrives
               at
               the
               Lumbal
               Glands
               ,
               the
               Pulsation
               of
               the
               Ascending
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Great
               Artery
               being
               not
               sufficient
               (
               by
               reason
               those
               Glands
               are
               much
               Larger
               than
               the
               Exterior
               Surface
               of
               that
               Artery
               can
               give
               a
               Sutable
               Impulse
               to
               ;
               )
               One
               of
               the
               Lumbal
               Glands
               R
               R
               ,
               is
               Plac'd
               under
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               B
               ,
               or
               between
               it
               and
               the
               
                 Vertebrae
                 Lumbares
              
               ,
               by
               which
               its
               Vesiculae
               are
               gently
               Comprest
               ,
               and
               their
               Contain'd
               Lympha
               is
               Push'd
               on
               towards
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               .
            
             
               T
               T
               ,
               The
               Spermatick
               Vein
               and
               Artery
               on
               both
               Sides
               Involv'd
               in
               the
               Duplicature
               of
               the
               Peritonaeum
               as
               they
               Pass
               towards
               the
               Testes
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               11.
               
            
             
               The
               Lumbal
               Glandules
               with
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               and
               Part
               of
               the
               Thoracick
               Duct
               &c.
               
               Fill'd
               with
               Mercury
               and
               Free'd
               from
               the
               Body
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               b
               b
               ,
               The
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               Compos'd
               of
               Three
               Trunks
               ;
               One
               of
               which
               A
               ,
               is
               very
               Large
               Exprest
               at
               N
               ,
               Fig.
               10.
               the
               other
               Two
               are
               much
               less
               ,
               and
               he
               immediatly
               under
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Great
               Artery
               D
               ,
               Fig.
               10
               :
               This
               Division
               of
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               into
               Three
               Trunks
               has
               not
               been
               taken
               Notice
               of
               ,
               which
               Makes
               me
               Suspect
               the
               Descriptions
               we
               have
               hitherto
               had
               of
               it
               ,
               have
               been
               Taken
               from
               Quadrupedes
               ;
               where
               by
               Reason
               of
               its
               Horizontal
               Position
               ,
               it
               is
               likely
               One
               
                 Secculus
                 Chyliferus
              
               may
               be
               Sufficient
               ;
               but
               in
               Men
               ,
               in
               whom
               the
               Thoracick
               Duct
               ,
               and
               Receptaculum
               Inclines
               to
               a
               Perpendicular
               Position
               ,
               it
               seems
               to
               be
               a
               necessary
               Contrivance
               that
               it
               should
               be
               Divided
               into
               Three
               Channels
               (
               especially
               before
               it
               intirely
               Passes
               under
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Great
               Artery
               )
               the
               better
               to
               Support
               the
               Chyle
               and
               Lymphe
               in
               their
               Ascending
               Progress
               .
            
             
               a
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               a
               Lympheduct
               Arising
               from
               the
               Diaphragm
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Ductus
                 Thoracicus
              
               above
               the
               Diaphragm
               ,
               where
               it
               Passes
               between
               the
               Descending
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               and
               Bodies
               of
               the
               
                 Vertebrae
                 Thoracis
              
               ;
               which
               Disposition
               of
               it
               is
               very
               necessary
               ,
               to
               the
               End
               the
               Pulsation
               of
               the
               Artery
               may
               continually
               Press
               this
               Duct
               ,
               and
               thereby
               Hasten
               the
               Ascent
               of
               its
               Contents
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               A
               Trunk
               of
               One
               of
               the
               
                 Vasa
                 Lactea
                 Secundi
                 Generis
              
               ,
               Exprest
               Fig.
               10.
               
               O
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Mercury
               was
               Injected
               .
            
             
               c
               ,
               A
               Considerable
               Double
               Valve
               ,
               which
               Hinders
               a
               Retrocession
               of
               Chyle
               and
               Lympha
               in
               this
               Lacteal
               Vessel
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Surface
               of
               the
               Left
               Lumbal
               Gland
               Plac'd
               on
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               .
            
             
               d
               ,
               Another
               Small
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Vasa
                 Lactea
                 Secundi
                 Generis
              
               ,
               with
               a
               Small
               Gland
               of
               the
               Mesentery
               ,
               from
               whence
               it
               Arises
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Lympheducts
               ,
               which
               Arise
               from
               the
               Inferior
               Parts
               and
               Empty
               themselves
               into
               the
               Left
               Lumbal
               Gland
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Glandula
                 Lumbalis
              
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               Plac'd
               under
               the
               
                 Vena
                 Cava
              
               .
            
             
               G
               H
               ,
               The
               Lympheducts
               of
               the
               Inferior
               Parts
               ,
               which
               Empty
               themselves
               into
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Gland
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               A
               Large
               Lympheduct
               ,
               which
               Discharges
               in
               self
               into
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
                 Majus
              
               .
            
             
               K
               L
               ,
               The
               Communicant
               Branches
               of
               Lympheducts
               between
               the
               Right
               and
               Left
               Lumbal
               Glandules
               .
            
             
               M
               M
               ,
               The
               Thoracick
               Duct
               where
               its
               Valves
               ,
               which
               Hinder
               the
               Descent
               of
               the
               Chyle
               and
               Lympha
               ,
               are
               faintly
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               N
               N
               ,
               Divers
               Divisions
               and
               Inosculations
               of
               this
               Duct
               ,
               whereby
               the
               Ascention
               of
               the
               Chyle
               may
               be
               the
               better
               Carri'd
               on
               .
            
             
               O
               ,
               Divers
               Lympheducts
               ,
               which
               Arise
               from
               the
               Lymphatick
               Glands
               on
               the
               Back-parts
               of
               the
               Lungs
               ,
               and
               are
               the
               Exporting
               Lympheducts
               of
               those
               Glands
               ;
               their
               Importing
               Lympheducts
               Spring
               from
               the
               Lungs
               themselves
               and
               Adjacent
               Parts
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               12.
               
            
             
               The
               Thoracick
               Duct
               at
               its
               Entrance
               into
               the
               Subclavian
               Vein
               ,
               with
               its
               Lympheducts
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Thoracick
               Duct
               where
               it
               Leaves
               the
               Descending
               Trunk
               of
               the
               
                 Arteria
                 Magna
              
               ,
               and
               Accompanying
               the
               Gula
               as
               it
               Passes
               towards
               the
               Left
               Side
               of
               the
               Bodies
               of
               the
               Upper
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Thorax
               ,
               in
               its
               Way
               to
               the
               Subclavian
               Vein
               ,
               where
               that
               of
               the
               Former
               Figure
               is
               Cut
               off
               and
               Ty'd
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Two
               Lympheducts
               ,
               which
               Sprang
               from
               the
               Thymus
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               A
               Division
               and
               Inosculation
               of
               the
               Thoracick
               Duct
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               A
               Large
               Lympheduct
               ,
               whose
               Extremities
               Arise
               panly
               from
               the
               Thymus
               and
               partly
               from
               the
               Right
               Subclavian
               Gland
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Left
               Subclavian
               Lymphatick
               Gland
               .
               The
               Subclavian
               Glands
               (
               tho'
               not
               Mention'd
               by
               any
               Author
               I
               Know
               of
               )
               are
               Two
               Large
               Glands
               Plac'd
               under
               each
               Clavicle
               ,
               and
               seem
               to
               be
               One
               of
               those
               Belonging
               to
               the
               Concatenation
               of
               Glands
               of
               the
               Internal
               Jugular
               Vein
               :
               They
               Receive
               their
               Importing
               Lympheducts
               from
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Neck
               and
               Glands
               last
               Mention'd
               on
               the
               Jugular
               Veins
               ,
               and
               perhaps
               from
               the
               Thyroid
               Gland
               .
            
             
               F
               G
               ,
               The
               Exporting
               Lympheducts
               of
               the
               Subclavian
               Gland
               ,
               which
               Empty
               themselves
               into
               the
               Thoracick
               Duct
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Large
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Thoracick
               Duct
               near
               its
               Entrance
               into
               the
               Subclavian
               Vein
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               External
               and
               Superior
               Part
               of
               the
               Subclavian
               Vein
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Axillary
               Vein
               not
               Fill'd
               with
               Wax
               from
               the
               Thoracick
               Duct
               by
               Reason
               of
               the
               Valves
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Internal
               Jugular
               and
               Cervical
               Veins
               Cut
               off
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               Wax
               Injected
               by
               the
               Thoracick
               Duct
               Cut
               Transversely
               ,
               with
               the
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Vein
               as
               it
               Passes
               towards
               the
               Heart
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig
               13.
               
            
             
               A
               Lymphatick
               Gland
               with
               its
               Importing
               and
               Exporting
               Lympheducts
               Fill'd
               with
               Mercury
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Gland
               whose
               Vesiculae
               are
               Distended
               with
               Mercury
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Importing
               Lympheduct
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Mercury
               was
               Injected
               into
               the
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Glandulosae
              
               ;
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               Its
               Ramifications
               before
               they
               Enter
               the
               Gland
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Ramifications
               of
               the
               Exporting
               Lympheducts
               ,
               as
               they
               Arise
               out
               of
               the
               Gland
               and
               Unite
               in
               One
               Trunk
               ,
               Call'd
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Exporting
               Lympheduct
               ,
               which
               Passes
               either
               into
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyli
              
               immediatly
               ,
               or
               Thoracick
               Duct
               ,
               or
               else
               into
               another
               Lymphatick
               Gland
               .
            
             
               Besides
               this
               Communication
               of
               Lympheducts
               by
               the
               Mediation
               of
               Lymphatick
               Glands
               ;
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Lympheducts
               themselves
               are
               frequently
               Inosculated
               with
               each
               other
               ,
               and
               tho'
               they
               commonly
               Enter
               into
               the
               next
               Lymphatick
               Gland
               (
               where
               they
               Meet
               with
               a
               Fresh
               Supply
               of
               Lymphe
               Separated
               from
               the
               Blood-vessels
               of
               the
               Gland
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               an
               Impetus
               from
               thence
               )
               yet
               it
               sometimes
               Happens
               there
               is
               a
               Communicant
               Branch
               from
               the
               Importing
               to
               the
               Exporting
               Lympheduct
               ,
               as
               Appears
               in
               the
               Following
               Figure
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               14.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Gland
               Fill'd
               with
               Mercury
               as
               in
               the
               Foregoing
               Figure
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Importing
               ,
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               Exporting
               Lympheduct
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Communicant
               Branch
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             FIFTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               15.
               
            
             
               DIVERS
               Parts
               of
               the
               Organ
               of
               Hearing
               of
               a
               Man.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               Convext
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporale
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sincipitis
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Mastoides
              
               Continuous
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               another
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporale
              
               ,
               which
               makes
               the
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Styloides
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               ,
               behind
               which
               the
               Carotide
               Artery
               passes
               towards
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               An
               Acute
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               ,
               whence
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Gargareon
               Spring
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               A
               Perforation
               between
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               and
               Temporum
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               
                 Ductus
                 à
                 Pala●o
              
               passes
               into
               the
               Tymparnum
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               Sixth
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               which
               is
               near
               the
               Root
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Pterygoides
              
               ;
               by
               which
               a
               Branch
               of
               the
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               passes
               out
               of
               the
               
                 Cranium
                 .
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               92.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               Y.
               
            
             
               a
               ,
               The
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               
                 Porus
                 Auditorius
              
               or
               Passage
               from
               the
               External
               Ear.
               
            
             
               b
               b
               ,
               The
               Breaking
               off
               of
               the
               Bone
               which
               Composes
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               Meatus
               or
               
                 Porus
                 Auditorius
              
               .
            
             
               c
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Extermus
                 Auris
              
               ,
               by
               some
               call'd
               
                 Laxator
                 Externus
              
               .
               This
               Small
               Muscle
               is
               plac'd
               under
               the
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               of
               the
               
                 Porus
                 Auditorius
              
               ,
               which
               Separates
               that
               Matter
               call'd
               the
               Ear-Wax
               :
               In
               Beginning
               is
               Fleshy
               on
               the
               External
               Margin
               ,
               at
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Porus
               ,
               soon
               becoming
               Tendinous
               ,
               passes
               to
               its
               Broad
               Tendinous
               Expansion
               on
               the
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               .
               When
               it
               Acts
               ,
               it
               draws
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               towards
               a
               Plan
               Outwards
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Handle
               or
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Malleus
               ;
               by
               which
               means
               the
               Great
               Concussion
               made
               in
               the
               Outward
               Air
               ,
               is
               Hindred
               from
               Violating
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               ;
               which
               at
               that
               Time
               is
               Relaxt
               .
            
             
               d
               ,
               The
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Malleus
               ,
               call'd
               its
               Manubriton
               ,
               lying
               immediately
               under
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               ,
               and
               is
               Contiguous
               to
               it
               .
            
             
               e
               ,
               The
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               or
               Thin
               Transparent
               Membrane
               ,
               commonly
               call'd
               the
               
                 Drum
                 of
                 the
                 Ear.
              
               
            
             
               f
               ,
               A
               Sinus
               in
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               for
               the
               Articulation
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Condyloides
              
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               g
               ,
               The
               Conjunction
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               .
            
             
               h
               h
               ,
               The
               Edges
               of
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Bones
               Saw'd
               ost
               .
            
             
               *
               The
               Suture
               between
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               and
               Sincipitis
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               16.
               
            
             
               The
               Organs
               of
               Hearing
               as
               they
               are
               made
               to
               Appear
               on
               the
               Internal
               Parts
               of
               the
               same
               Bones
               ,
               Represented
               in
               the
               foregoing
               Figure
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Inside
               of
               the
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sincipitis
              
               which
               lies
               on
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               next
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               The
               Channels
               in
               the
               Bone
               which
               Receive
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               lying
               on
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               b
               b
               b
               ,
               The
               Conjunction
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               with
               the
               Bones
               of
               the
               Sincipus
               and
               Occipus
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Sutura
                 Squamosa
              
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               next
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               c
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               or
               
                 Processus
                 Perrosus
              
               of
               that
               Bone
               ,
               which
               Touches
               the
               Anterior
               Appendix
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               .
            
             
               d
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               at
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Pterygoides
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               .
            
             
               e
               ,
               The
               External
               Semicircular
               Duct
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               Open'd
               ;
               Exprest
               at
               k
               ,
               Fig.
               18.
               
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               firmly
               Adheres
               .
            
             
               f
               f
               ,
               The
               External
               Lamina
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               cut
               off
               with
               a
               Chizel
               ,
               to
               shew
               the
               Two
               Internal
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Malleus
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               and
               the
               Articulation
               of
               the
               Malleus
               with
               the
               Incus
               ,
               with
               the
               Cavernulae
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               which
               Communicate
               with
               those
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Mastoides
              
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               A
               Channel
               on
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Superior
               Long
               and
               Narrow
               Sinus
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               passes
               from
               the
               
                 Sella
                 Turcica
              
               to
               the
               Tortuous
               Part
               of
               the
               Lateral
               Sinus
               .
            
             
               g
               ,
               The
               Perforation
               in
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Petrosus
              
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Carotide
               Artery
               passes
               in
               a
               Tortuous
               Manner
               towards
               the
               
                 Sella
                 Turcica
              
               to
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               H
               ....
               The
               Head
               of
               the
               Malleus
               Articulated
               with
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Incus
               .
            
             
               I
               ...
               The
               Basis
               of
               the
               Incus
               and
               its
               Short
               Process
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               K
               ...
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Obiiquus
              
               or
               
                 Semicircularis
                 Auris
              
               ;
               this
               
                 Du
                 Verny
              
               Describes
               instead
               of
               the
               
                 Laxator
                 Externus
              
               Exprest
               at
               c
               ,
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               :
               It
               is
               plac'd
               in
               a
               Proper
               Furrow
               of
               the
               Bone
               which
               is
               above
               the
               Bony
               Part
               of
               the
               Channel
               ,
               from
               the
               Palate
               to
               the
               Ear
               ,
               whence
               it
               Marches
               Obliquely
               to
               its
               Insertion
               at
               a
               Small
               Acute
               Process
               near
               the
               Neck
               of
               the
               Malleus
               :
               When
               it
               Acts
               ,
               it
               draws
               the
               Handle
               of
               the
               Malleus
               Sideways
               towards
               the
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               ;
               whereby
               it
               assists
               the
               External
               Muscle
               ,
               in
               making
               the
               
                 Memorana
                 Tympani
              
               capable
               of
               Resisting
               any
               great
               Impetus
               made
               in
               the
               Outward
               Air
               ,
               from
               Injuring
               that
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               L
               ...
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Intermos
                 Tympani
                 Auris
              
               :
               The
               Fleshy
               Part
               of
               this
               ,
               like
               the
               Former
               ,
               is
               Inclos'd
               within
               a
               Bony
               Channel
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ,
               lying
               on
               the
               Upper
               Side
               of
               the
               Bony
               Part
               of
               the
               Duct
               
                 A
                 Pala●o
                 ad
                 Aurem
              
               ,
               as
               here
               Exprest
               ;
               when
               it
               is
               Advanc'd
               to
               the
               Upper
               Side
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               ,
               it
               is
               Converted
               into
               a
               Small
               Tendon
               which
               passes
               out
               of
               its
               Bony
               Channel
               ,
               not
               unlike
               a
               Rope
               from
               a
               Pully
               ,
               to
               the
               Opposite
               Part
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               ,
               and
               is
               Fasten'd
               to
               the
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Malieus
               .
               This
               Muscle
               Arises
               from
               that
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               that
               Touches
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ,
               and
               Helps
               to
               Frame
               the
               Aqueduct
               or
               
                 Meatus
                 à
                 Pala●o
                 ad
                 Aurem
              
               .
               The
               Strong
               Membrane
               which
               Lines
               the
               Bony
               Channel
               in
               which
               this
               Muscle
               is
               Entertain'd
               ,
               passes
               out
               with
               its
               Tendon
               to
               the
               Internal
               Acute
               Process
               of
               the
               Malleus
               ,
               where
               the
               preceding
               Muscle
               is
               Inserted
               .
               Placentinus
               seeing
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               Former
               Muscle
               at
               its
               Insertion
               ,
               and
               not
               Discovering
               that
               Muscle
               ,
               suppos'd
               it
               belong'd
               to
               the
               Muscle
               last
               mention'd
               ,
               which
               he
               Describes
               and
               Figures
               with
               Double
               Tendinous
               Terminations
               .
               When
               this
               Internal
               Muscle
               of
               Eustachius
               Acts
               ,
               it
               draws
               the
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Malleus
               towards
               the
               
                 Foramen
                 Ovale
              
               and
               Rotundum
               ;
               whereby
               the
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               becomes
               Concave
               ,
               and
               the
               Membrane
               it self
               much
               Extended
               ,
               which
               is
               Necessary
               when
               Sounds
               are
               Low.
               
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               ,
               by
               which
               a
               Branch
               of
               the
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               ,
               passes
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               The
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Petrosus
              
               or
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Auditory
               Nerve
               passes
               to
               the
               Organ
               of
               Hearing
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               17.
               
            
             
               The
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               of
               a
               full
               Grown
               Foetus
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               It
               s
               Superior
               and
               Anterior
               Margin
               which
               was
               Contiguous
               to
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sincipitis
              
               and
               Sphenoides
               :
            
             
               B
               ,
               Its
               Posterior
               Part
               which
               Touches
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               A
               Large
               Foramen
               by
               which
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               Enter
               the
               Bone
               ;
               this
               Foramen
               Appears
               at
               the
               Root
               of
               the
               Mammiform
               Process
               of
               the
               Adult
               ;
               which
               Process
               do's
               not
               Appear
               in
               the
               Foetus
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               A
               Process
               of
               this
               Bone
               in
               the
               Foetus
               at
               the
               meeting
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sincipitis
              
               ,
               with
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               which
               is
               not
               Conspicuous
               in
               the
               Adult
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Sinus
               in
               which
               the
               Condyloide
               Process
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               is
               Receiv'd
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Processus
                 Petrosus
              
               ;
               wherein
               the
               Three
               Semicircular
               Ducts
               and
               Cochlea
               are
               Excavated
               .
            
             
               H
               ...
               The
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Incus
               which
               is
               Articulated
               to
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Stapes
               ,
               by
               the
               Mediation
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Orbiculare
              
               .
            
             
               I
               ....
               The
               
                 Os
                 Orbiculare
              
               and
               Stapes
               ,
               Articulated
               to
               the
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Incus
               .
            
             
               K
               ....
               The
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Malleus
               which
               is
               Connected
               to
               the
               Internal
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               .
            
             
               By
               this
               mutual
               Articulation
               of
               the
               Four
               Little
               Bones
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               with
               each
               other
               ,
               and
               the
               Connection
               of
               the
               Internal
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               ,
               to
               the
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Malleus
               ;
               whatever
               Motions
               are
               made
               by
               the
               Outward
               Air
               which
               shakes
               that
               Membrane
               ,
               the
               Malleus
               is
               necessarily
               Mov'd
               ,
               consequently
               the
               Incus
               and
               Stapes
               :
               Now
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Stapes
               exactly
               Covering
               the
               
                 Foramen
                 Ovale
              
               ,
               the
               Air
               contain'd
               in
               the
               Labyrinth
               and
               Cochlea
               ,
               is
               thereby
               necessarily
               Agitated
               ,
               and
               the
               Effects
               of
               the
               Various
               Tremulous
               Motions
               of
               the
               Stapes
               ,
               are
               Represented
               to
               the
               Expansions
               of
               the
               Auditory
               Nerves
               ,
               in
               the
               Labyrinth
               and
               Cochlea
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               
                 Circulus
                 Osseus
              
               of
               the
               Foetus
               .
            
             
               M
               ...
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Cochlea
                 in
                 Situ
              
               ,
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               N
               ....
               The
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Stapedis
              
               Descending
               from
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ,
               to
               its
               Implantation
               on
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Stapes
               ,
               whereby
               it
               Draws
               the
               Stapes
               Upwards
               towards
               the
               Foramen
               ,
               and
               Shuts
               it
               .
            
             
               O
               ,
               The
               Stapes
               .
            
             
               P
               ,
               The
               
                 Ossiculum
                 Quartum
              
               or
               Orbiculare
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Stapedis
              
               Free'd
               from
               its
               Bony
               Pipe
               ,
               Excavated
               in
               the
               
                 Os
                 Perro●●on
              
               ,
               near
               the
               Bottom
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               .
               The
               Pipe
               which
               contains
               the
               Fleshy
               Part
               of
               this
               Muscle
               is
               Less
               than
               the
               Sixth
               Part
               of
               an
               Inch
               in
               Length
               ,
               and
               is
               much
               Larger
               than
               the
               Foramen
               ,
               by
               which
               its
               Tendon
               passes
               to
               its
               Implantation
               in
               the
               Stapes
               .
            
             
               R
               -
               ,
               -
               The
               Basis
               of
               the
               Incus
               where
               the
               Head
               of
               the
               Malleus
               is
               Articulated
               ;
            
             
               S.
               -
               -
               It
               s
               Short
               Process
               which
               Rests
               on
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ;
            
             
               T
               ,
               -
               It
               s
               Long
               Process
               that
               is
               Articulated
               with
               the
               Stapes
               .
            
             
               V.
               -
               The
               Head
               of
               the
               Malleus
               which
               is
               Articulated
               with
               the
               Incus
               .
            
             
               W
               ...
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Malleus
               ,
               where
               the
               Internal
               Muscle
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               of
               Eustachius
               is
               Inserted
               .
            
             
               X.
               .
               The
               External
               Acute
               Process
               of
               the
               Malleus
               ,
               where
               it
               Begins
               to
               Cleave
               to
               the
               
                 Membrana
                 Tympani
              
               ;
            
             
               Y
               —
               It
               s
               Internal
               Acute
               Process
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Obliquus
              
               or
               Externus
               of
               
                 Du
                 Verny
              
               ,
               is
               Implanted
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               18.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               Face
               of
               the
               same
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               next
               the
               Brain
               ,
               Represented
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Concave
               and
               unequal
               Surface
               of
               the
               Bone
               next
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Porous
               Substance
               of
               the
               Bone
               as
               it
               Appears
               after
               it
               's
               cut
               away
               to
               shew
               its
               Cavity
               ,
               call'd
               Tympanum
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Posterior
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
              
               which
               Touches
               the
               Occipital
               Bone.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Extremity
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Petrosus
              
               next
               the
               Anterior
               Appendix
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ...
               The
               Lower-part
               of
               the
               
                 Annulus
                 Osseus
              
               .
            
             
               G
               ...
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Obliquus
                 Auris
              
               ,
               left
               at
               its
               Insertion
               .
            
             
               H.
               -
               .
               The
               Long
               Process
               or
               Handle
               of
               the
               Malleus
               .
            
             
               I
               ...
               Part
               of
               the
               Incus
               where
               it
               's
               Articulated
               with
               the
               Malleus
               .
            
             
               K
               ...
               The
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               cut
               away
               into
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               F
               ,
               G
               ,
               H
               I
               ,
               K.
               The
               Tympanum
               Open'd
               :
               Besides
               the
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               at
               the
               Extremity
               of
               the
               
                 Meatus
                 Auditorius
              
               ;
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               is
               Lin'd
               with
               a
               Thin
               Transparent
               Membrane
               ,
               which
               (
               I
               am
               apt
               to
               think
               )
               is
               also
               Extended
               on
               the
               
                 Malleus
                 ,
                 Incus
                 ,
                 Os
                 Orbiculare
                 ,
              
               and
               Stapes
               ,
               since
               the
               Accurate
               Ruysch
               has
               Observ'd
               divers
               Blood-Vessels
               on
               those
               Bones
               .
            
             
               k
               ,
               The
               Superior
               or
               External
               of
               the
               Three
               Semicircular
               Ducts
               Free'd
               from
               the
               Adjacent
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ,
               and
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               l
               ,
               The
               Middle
               Semicircular
               Duct
               also
               Clear'd
               and
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               m
               ....
               Part
               of
               the
               Third
               and
               most
               Internal
               Semicircular
               Duct
               also
               partly
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               n
               ,
               The
               Foramen
               by
               which
               the
               Auditory
               Nerve
               Enters
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               19.
               
            
             
               The
               Salival
               Glandules
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               together
               with
               those
               under
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               Dissected
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Two
               Inferior
               Maxillary
               Glands
               ,
               which
               are
               Represented
               
                 in
                 Situ
                 ,
                 Tab.
              
               15.
               
               Fig.
               1.
               
               M
               M
               ,
               Compos'd
               of
               divers
               Lobuli
               ,
               Inclos'd
               in
               One
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Glandulae
                 Sublinguales
              
               Cover'd
               with
               their
               Common
               Membrane
               ;
               One
               of
               which
               Glandules
               is
               Represented
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               ,
               in
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Table
               ,
               Fig.
               2.
               
               W.
               
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Two
               Arteries
               which
               Spring
               from
               the
               Carotides
               ,
               and
               Convey
               Blood
               into
               the
               above
               mention'd
               Salival
               Glands
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               Two
               Branches
               of
               Arteries
               ,
               Arising
               from
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Trunks
               ,
               which
               pass
               to
               the
               Tongue
               .
               Besides
               the
               Branches
               now
               mention'd
               ,
               each
               of
               these
               Large
               Trunks
               sends
               out
               another
               considerable
               Branch
               Exprest
               Tab.
               12.
               
               Fig.
               4.
               
               F.
               which
               is
               Employ'd
               on
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Face
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               of
               the
               Vein
               Arising
               from
               the
               Extremitties
               of
               the
               Arteries
               of
               those
               Glands
               ,
               and
               those
               of
               the
               Neighbouring
               Parts
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               A
               Branch
               of
               the
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Salival
               Ducts
               of
               the
               Inferior
               Maxillary
               Glands
               ,
               as
               they
               pass
               to
               their
               Excretory
               Pores
               at
               the
               Extremity
               of
               each
               Papilla
               plac'd
               under
               the
               Tongue
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Two
               Papillae
               last
               mention'd
               ,
               where
               the
               Excretory
               Ducts
               of
               the
               Sublingual
               Glands
               also
               empty
               themselves
               at
               the
               same
               Pores
               with
               the
               Two
               Salival
               Ducts
               .
               This
               Protrusion
               of
               the
               Salival
               Ducts
               which
               Frame
               the
               Papillae
               ,
               is
               a
               necessary
               Contrivance
               to
               Hinder
               any
               Particle
               of
               the
               Masticated
               Aliment
               from
               Entring
               those
               Ducts
               ,
               or
               the
               Exceted
               Saliva
               from
               Repassing
               them
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               Salival
               Duct
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               Open'd
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               ,
               and
               Expanded
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               A
               Small
               Stone
               as
               it
               Appear'd
               lying
               in
               the
               above
               mention'd
               Duct
               :
               It
               was
               of
               a
               bright
               Yellow
               Colour
               ,
               not
               unlike
               that
               of
               Arumpigmentum
               .
               In
               Dissecting
               these
               Parts
               the
               Lesser
               End
               of
               it
               happen'd
               to
               Break
               off
               ,
               as
               it
               is
               here
               Exprest
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               20.
               
            
             
               The
               Internal
               or
               Back
               Side
               of
               the
               Larynx
               ,
               with
               the
               
                 Aspera
                 Arteria
              
               and
               Part
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Concare
               Part
               of
               the
               Epiglottis
               as
               it
               Appears
               when
               Pinn'd
               up
               .
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               Divers
               Small
               Glands
               at
               the
               Root
               of
               the
               Epiglottis
               ,
               which
               are
               Cover'd
               with
               a
               Loose
               Membrane
               which
               makes
               the
               Glottis
               ,
               and
               is
               Continued
               to
               that
               of
               the
               Inside
               of
               the
               Mouth
               ,
               Fauces
               ,
               and
               Gula.
               
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Extremities
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Ligaments
               which
               Fasten
               them
               to
               the
               Two
               Superior
               Long
               Processes
               of
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Internal
               Concave
               Part
               of
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               b
               b
               ,
               The
               Two
               Long
               and
               Superior
               Processes
               of
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               c
               c
               ,
               The
               Superior
               Parts
               of
               the
               Arytenoidal
               Cartilages
               which
               were
               Cover'd
               with
               the
               Loose
               Membrane
               above
               mention'd
               ,
               and
               Compose
               the
               Glottis
               .
            
             
               d
               ,
               The
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Annular
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Crico●rytenoidei
                 Possici
              
               which
               Open
               the
               Arytenoidal
               Cartilages
               c
               c
               ,
               by
               Drawing
               them
               Backwards
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Arytenoideus
              
               which
               Draws
               the
               Two
               Arytenoidal
               Cartilages
               nearer
               each
               other
               ,
               and
               Streightens
               the
               Rimula
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Cartilaginous
               Part
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               Forewards
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               Posterior
               and
               Membranous
               Part
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               next
               the
               Gula.
               
            
             
               e
               e
               ,
               Divers
               Small
               Glands
               which
               Appear
               on
               this
               Membranous
               Part
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               ,
               and
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Bronchiae
               .
               The
               Excretory
               Ducts
               of
               these
               Glands
               ,
               I
               am
               perswaded
               ,
               Discharge
               themselves
               into
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               and
               Bronchia
               ,
               and
               serve
               to
               Moisten
               their
               Cavities
               ,
               and
               Defend
               them
               from
               the
               Inspired
               Air
               ,
               whence
               Arises
               Part
               of
               that
               Moisture
               which
               is
               Rejected
               in
               Expiration
               ;
               a
               great
               Part
               of
               it
               Arising
               also
               from
               the
               Saliva
               ,
               as
               the
               Air
               passes
               the
               Mouth
               ;
               whence
               it
               happens
               ,
               less
               Moisture
               passes
               with
               the
               Expired
               Air
               by
               the
               
                 Foramina
                 Narium
              
               only
               ,
               than
               when
               we
               Expire
               thro'
               the
               Mouth
               ;
               and
               consequently
               the
               Ha●●ms
               is
               more
               or
               less
               Wet
               ,
               as
               the
               Mouth
               is
               more
               or
               less
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               f
               f
               ,
               The
               Beginning
               of
               the
               Bronchia
               .
            
             
               The
               Glands
               above
               mention'd
               are
               most
               commonly
               Affected
               in
               Catarths
               ,
               and
               most
               of
               those
               Defluctions
               on
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               which
               cause
               frequent
               Coughing
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               21.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               Open'd
               and
               Pin'd
               out
               to
               shew
               its
               Inside
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Its
               Cartilages
               Divided
               according
               to
               the
               Length
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Its
               Internal
               Membrane
               Compos'd
               of
               Longitudinal
               Fibres
               ,
               Rais'd
               :
               This
               Draws
               the
               Cartilages
               nearer
               each
               other
               ,
               and
               Shortens
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Transverse
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               lying
               on
               the
               Membranous
               Part
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               next
               the
               Gula
               :
               These
               Pull
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               Little
               Semicircular
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               nearer
               each
               other
               ,
               whereby
               they
               Strenghten
               its
               Canalis
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               22.
               
            
             
               The
               Larynx
               or
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               after
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               is
               taken
               off
               ,
               as
               it
               Appears
               Laterally
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Epiglottis
               ;
            
             
               B
               ,
               Its
               Root
               cut
               from
               the
               Tongue
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Arytenoidal
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Cricoidal
               or
               Annular
               Cartilage
               ;
            
             
               d
               ,
               Its
               Fore-part
               which
               Appears
               immediately
               under
               the
               Thyrois
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Cricoarytenoideus
                 Posticus
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Thyroarytenoideus
               Free'd
               from
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               ,
               and
               left
               at
               its
               Insertion
               to
               the
               Arytenoidal
               Cartilage
               Lateraly
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Cricoarytenoideus
                 Lateralis
              
               ;
               it
               Arising
               from
               the
               
                 Cartilage
                 Cricoides
              
               ,
               and
               is
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Arytenoides
               .
               It
               Assists
               with
               its
               Partner
               in
               Opening
               the
               Glottis
               or
               Arytenoidal
               Cartilages
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               23.
               
            
             
               The
               Larynx
               together
               with
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Epiglottis
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               whole
               Larynx
               is
               Suspended
               ,
               which
               makes
               it
               Appear
               much
               longer
               in
               this
               than
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Epiglottis
               cut
               from
               the
               Root
               of
               the
               Tongue
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Sides
               of
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               drawn
               from
               each
               other
               ;
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               It
               s
               Superior
               Long
               Processes
               Tied
               to
               the
               Extremities
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               .
            
             
               b
               ,
               One
               of
               its
               Two
               Inferior
               Short
               Processes
               Cleaving
               to
               the
               Annular
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               c
               ,
               One
               of
               the
               Arytenoidal
               Cartilages
               (
               which
               Compose
               the
               Rimula
               of
               the
               Larynx
               ,
               )
               Cover'd
               by
               the
               Glottis
               .
            
             
               d
               d
               ,
               The
               Annular
               Cartilage
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Membranous
               Part
               of
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               which
               Touches
               the
               Gula
               ,
               as
               it
               Descends
               to
               the
               Stomach
               .
            
             
               e
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Cricoarytenoideus
                 Posticus
              
               .
            
             
               f
               ,
               The
               
                 Cricoarytenoideus
                 Lateralis
              
               .
            
             
               g
               ,
               The
               Thyroarytenoideus
               Arising
               from
               the
               Internal
               Concave
               Part
               of
               the
               Thyroid
               Cartilage
               ,
               and
               is
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Backpart
               of
               the
               Arytenoidal
               Cartilage
               above
               the
               Insertion
               of
               the
               
                 Cricoarytenoideus
                 Lateralis
              
               :
               This
               and
               its
               Companion
               on
               the
               other
               Side
               Acting
               together
               ,
               Draw
               the
               Two
               Arytenoidal
               Cartilages
               nearer
               each
               other
               ,
               and
               Streighten
               the
               Rimula
               :
               They
               Act
               in
               Deglutition
               ,
               whereby
               any
               Part
               of
               the
               Aliment
               is
               effectually
               Hindred
               from
               Descending
               into
               the
               Larynx
               ,
               by
               the
               Assistance
               of
               the
               Epiglottis
               ,
               which
               at
               that
               Time
               exactly
               Covers
               the
               Rimula
               .
               These
               Muscles
               are
               so
               Strong
               in
               some
               ,
               who
               by
               adequately
               Closing
               this
               Passage
               to
               the
               Wind-Pipe
               ,
               can
               suffer
               Liquors
               pour'd
               into
               their
               Mouths
               to
               pass
               the
               Gula
               ,
               without
               the
               Action
               of
               Deglutition
               ,
               or
               the
               Assistance
               of
               the
               Epiglottis
               ;
               as
               't
               is
               evident
               if
               they
               hold
               their
               Mouths
               Open
               and
               their
               Tongues
               Deprest
               ,
               whilst
               a
               Quantity
               of
               Liquor
               Descends
               from
               thence
               into
               their
               Stomachs
               .
            
             
               The
               Use
               of
               the
               Epiglottis
               is
               to
               Cover
               the
               Glottis
               in
               Deglutition
               ,
               so
               that
               the
               Aliment
               may
               Descend
               over
               it
               into
               the
               Gula
               and
               Stomach
               .
               Nor
               has
               the
               Epiglottis
               any
               Muscles
               to
               Depress
               it
               in
               that
               Action
               ;
               but
               when
               the
               Tongue
               is
               Elevated
               ,
               the
               Epiglot
               is
               necessarily
               Deprest
               :
               Hence
               it
               is
               ,
               when
               the
               Tongue
               is
               very
               much
               Intumisied
               (
               as
               it
               is
               frequently
               in
               those
               who
               are
               in
               great
               Salivations
               )
               the
               free
               Action
               of
               Deglutition
               is
               Hindred
               ,
               and
               the
               Patient
               is
               necessitated
               to
               Swallow
               even
               Fluids
               very
               leasurely
               ,
               and
               not
               without
               Difficulty
               ,
               especially
               if
               the
               Tongue
               is
               so
               Distended
               ,
               that
               it
               cannot
               be
               Contain'd
               within
               the
               Teeth
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               24
            
             
               The
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Tongue
               as
               it
               Appears
               when
               taken
               out
               with
               its
               Proper
               Muscles
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Tip
               of
               the
               Tongue
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               Its
               Root
               Free'd
               from
               the
               Epiglottis
               and
               
                 Os
                 Hyoides
              
               .
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               The
               Vilous
               Nervous
               Bodies
               of
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               which
               stand
               Obliquely
               from
               the
               Apex
               or
               Tip
               of
               the
               Tongue
               towards
               its
               Root
               .
            
             
               b
               b
               ,
               The
               Glands
               plac'd
               at
               the
               Root
               of
               the
               Tongue
               ,
               whose
               Excretory
               Pores
               may
               be
               seen
               to
               Open
               in
               their
               Middle
               ,
               whence
               a
               Salival
               Humour
               is
               emitted
               ,
               nor
               unlike
               the
               Glands
               of
               the
               Fauces
               and
               
                 Foramina
                 Narium
              
               ,
               and
               those
               plac'd
               in
               the
               Cheeks
               and
               Lips.
               
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Ceratoglosii
              
               Exprest
               
                 in
                 Situ
                 ,
                 Tab.
              
               14.
               
               Fig.
               1.
               
               D
               D
               ,
               on
               one
               Side
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Styloglossi
               in
               like
               Manner
               Exprest
               ,
               
                 Tab.
                 ibid.
                 Fig.
                 ibid.
              
               C.
               
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               25.
               
            
             
               The
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               with
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               ,
               and
               their
               common
               Duct
               which
               passes
               thro'
               the
               Prostatae
               into
               the
               Urethrae
               ,
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               ,
               where
               the
               Ramifications
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               are
               Conipicuous
               to
               the
               Naked
               Eye
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               C
               ,
               The
               Larger
               Cells
               of
               the
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               and
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               Open'd
               .
            
             
               b
               ,
               c
               c
               ,
               The
               Lesser
               Cells
               of
               the
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               and
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               within
               the
               Larger
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Place
               where
               the
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               and
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               Communicate
               with
               each
               other
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               common
               Duct
               of
               the
               
                 Vesiculae
                 Seminales
              
               and
               
                 Vas
                 Deferens
              
               which
               passes
               thro'
               the
               
                 Glandulae
                 Prostatae
              
               ,
               and
               Discharges
               the
               Semen
               into
               the
               Ure●●ra
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SIXTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               26.
               
            
             
               REPRESENTS
               the
               Internal
               Surface
               of
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Cranium
               ,
               with
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               remaining
               on
               it
               ,
               done
               immediately
               after
               the
               Brain
               was
               taken
               out
               ;
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               being
               first
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Edges
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               as
               they
               Appear
               when
               its
               Upper-part
               is
               Saw'd
               off
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               lying
               on
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Two
               Lateral
               Sinus's
               fill'd
               with
               Wax
               in
               their
               Declive
               and
               Tortuous
               Progress
               ,
               to
               their
               Egress
               at
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               d
               d
               ,
               The
               Two
               Superior
               Long
               Sinus's
               which
               Communicate
               between
               the
               Circular
               Sinus
               22
               ,
               and
               Lateral
               Sinus's
               .
            
             
               e
               e
               ,
               Two
               Inferior
               short
               Sinus's
               ,
               which
               also
               Discharge
               themselves
               into
               the
               Two
               Lateral
               Ones
               at
               their
               Egress
               .
            
             
               f
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Cristae
                 Gaelli
              
               or
               Middle
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Ethmoides
              
               or
               Cribrosum
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Olfactory
               Nerves
               pass
               to
               the
               
                 Foramina
                 Narium
              
               .
            
             
               g
               g
               ,
               Divers
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               not
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               their
               Smallness
               .
            
             
               h
               h
               ,
               The
               First
               Arteries
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               not
               fill'd
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               i
               i
               ,
               The
               Second
               Branches
               of
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               :
               These
               Arise
               from
               the
               Carotides
               before
               they
               Enter
               the
               Skull
               ,
               and
               pass
               thro'
               a
               small
               Foramen
               Reckon'd
               a
               Fifth
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               ,
               at
               the
               Root
               of
               an
               Acute
               Process
               of
               that
               Bone
               ,
               whence
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Gargarton
               Spring
               :
               After
               these
               Arteries
               Enter
               the
               Skull
               ,
               their
               Larger
               Branches
               lie
               on
               the
               Exterior
               Surface
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               as
               Exprest
               Tab.
               6.
               
               Fig.
               1
               ,
               2
               ,
               and
               4
               ,
               which
               are
               Entertain'd
               in
               Furrows
               on
               the
               Internal
               Surface
               of
               the
               Cranium
               ,
               Exprest
               Tab.
               91.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
               F
               F
               :
               As
               the
               Branches
               of
               these
               Arteries
               become
               still
               more
               and
               more
               Divided
               ,
               and
               less
               on
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               so
               their
               Channels
               on
               the
               Top
               of
               the
               Skull
               scarce
               Appear
               ;
               nor
               do
               any
               of
               them
               Enter
               the
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               ,
               as
               Dr.
               Ridley
               has
               well
               Observ'd
               .
               Besides
               those
               Branches
               of
               these
               Arteries
               which
               carry
               Blood
               to
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               there
               are
               others
               also
               which
               convey
               Blood
               to
               the
               Meditulliton
               of
               the
               Skull
               A
               A
               ,
               and
               do
               Inosculate
               with
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               Hairy-Scalp
               .
               The
               Branches
               of
               these
               Arteries
               on
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               are
               Accompanied
               with
               Veins
               ,
               which
               do
               not
               pass
               out
               of
               the
               Cranison
               at
               the
               same
               Perforation
               where
               the
               Arteries
               Enter'd
               ,
               but
               leave
               them
               where
               the
               Inferior
               and
               Foremost
               Angle
               of
               the
               Bregma
               Touches
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               and
               Temporum
               Internally
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               pass
               between
               the
               Two
               Internal
               Long
               Processes
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               and
               
                 Os
                 Frontis
              
               ,
               and
               March
               out
               at
               the
               Second
               Perforation
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               or
               Large
               
                 Rima
                 ,
                 Tab.
              
               89.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
               C
               D
               ,
               I.
               Nor
               do
               the
               Larger
               Branches
               of
               these
               Blood-Vessels
               always
               continue
               their
               whole
               Progress
               between
               the
               Skull
               and
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               but
               Parts
               of
               them
               March
               in
               Bony
               Inclosures
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               especially
               at
               the
               Inferior
               Angle
               of
               the
               Bregma
               above
               mention'd
               ,
               and
               afterwards
               pass
               our
               again
               in
               their
               Usual
               Manner
               :
               Nor
               are
               the
               Perforations
               in
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               always
               Regular
               where
               these
               Arteries
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               Enter
               :
               They
               sometimes
               Marching
               thro'
               the
               Sixth
               Perforations
               of
               the
               Sphenoides
               ,
               where
               the
               Branches
               of
               the
               
                 Far
                 Quintum
                 Nervorum
              
               pass
               out
               ;
               at
               other
               times
               their
               Perforations
               are
               at
               the
               Conjunctions
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               with
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Petrosa
              
               ,
               between
               the
               Acute
               Processes
               of
               the
               First
               nam'd
               Bone
               ,
               and
               Perforations
               of
               the
               Latter
               where
               the
               Carotide
               Arteries
               Enter
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               k
               ,
               The
               Third
               Branch
               of
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               Enter
               the
               Cranium
               ,
               where
               the
               Eighth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               pass
               out
               :
               I
               don't
               remember
               I
               ever
               saw
               any
               Branches
               of
               Veins
               Accompany
               these
               Arteries
               .
            
             
               Besides
               these
               Arteries
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               I
               don't
               doubt
               but
               on
               a
               diligent
               Search
               ,
               many
               more
               may
               be
               found
               ;
               and
               in
               some
               Subjects
               some
               of
               these
               may
               be
               wanting
               ,
               especially
               those
               in
               whom
               divers
               Branches
               pass
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Skull
               near
               the
               Longitudinal
               Suture
               ;
               of
               which
               ,
               we
               commonly
               find
               Two
               Remarkable
               Ones
               towards
               the
               Occiput
               ,
               as
               has
               been
               taken
               Notice
               of
               ,
               Tab.
               90.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               Great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               passes
               to
               the
               Specus
               in
               the
               Vertebrae
               .
            
             
               m
               m
               ,
               Some
               Veins
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               which
               Communicate
               with
               the
               Inferior
               Short
               Sinus's
               .
            
             
               n
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               .
            
             
               o
               o
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Ethmoides
              
               or
               Cribriforme
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Olfactory
               Nerves
               pass
               out
               of
               the
               Cranium
               .
            
             
               P
               P
               ,
               The
               Optick
               Nerves
               cut
               off
               at
               their
               Egress
               .
            
             
               q
               q
               ,
               The
               Great
               Branches
               of
               the
               Carotide
               Arteries
               cut
               off
               at
               their
               Entrance
               into
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Skull
               .
            
             
               r
               ,
               One
               of
               the
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Third
               Pair
               on
               the
               Left
               Side
               ,
               made
               hare
               from
               the
               Duplicatute
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               in
               which
               it
               passes
               before
               it
               Marches
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               with
               the
               following
               Pair
               .
            
             
               s
               s
               ,
               The
               Fourth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               Free'd
               from
               the
               Duplicature
               last
               mention'd
               ,
               and
               Turn
               '
               up
               at
               their
               passing
               the
               Second
               Perforation
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               or
               Large
               Rima
               ,
               Exprest
               Tab.
               89.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               between
               C
               ,
               D
               ,
               I.
               
            
             
               t
               t
               ,
               The
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               on
               the
               Right
               Side
               Expanded
               ,
               before
               it
               is
               Divided
               into
               Three
               Branches
               ,
               on
               the
               contrary
               Side
               its
               Trunk
               is
               Whole
               .
               
                 Vid.
                 Fig.
              
               27.
               
            
             
               V
               ,
               The
               Upper
               and
               Foremost
               Branch
               of
               the
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               on
               the
               Left
               Side
               ,
               before
               it
               passes
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               at
               the
               Second
               Perforation
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               ,
               with
               the
               Third
               ,
               Fourth
               ,
               and
               Sixth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               w
               ,
               The
               Nerve
               of
               the
               Sixth
               Pair
               on
               the
               Left
               Side
               Free'd
               from
               the
               Duplicature
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ;
               in
               which
               it
               is
               Inclos'd
               at
               a
               considerable
               Distance
               before
               it
               Accompanies
               the
               Third
               ,
               Fourth
               ,
               and
               Foremost
               Branch
               of
               the
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               at
               its
               Egress
               .
            
             
               x
               ,
               The
               Intercostal
               Nerve
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               ,
               Compos'd
               of
               Two
               Branches
               from
               the
               Fifth
               Nerve
               ,
               and
               joining
               with
               the
               Body
               of
               the
               Sixth
               in
               this
               Subject
               ,
               whether
               this
               Disposition
               is
               Constant
               ,
               I
               must
               confess
               my
               late
               Enquiries
               have
               not
               afforded
               me
               an
               Opportunity
               of
               Observing
               .
            
             
               y
               ,
               The
               Two
               Branches
               of
               the
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               which
               Help
               to
               Compose
               the
               Intercostal
               Nerve
               .
            
             
               z
               z
               ,
               The
               Contortion
               of
               the
               Carotide
               Artery
               Collateral
               to
               the
               
                 Sella
                 Turcica
              
               .
            
             
               1
               ,
               1
               ,
               The
               
                 Glandula
                 Pituitaria
              
               lying
               in
               the
               
                 Sella
                 Turcica
              
               .
            
             
               2
               ,
               2
               ,
               The
               Circular
               Sinus
               or
               Vein
               Environing
               the
               Pituitary
               Gland
               ,
               and
               was
               First
               taken
               Notice
               of
               by
               Dr.
               Ridley
               .
            
             
               3
               ,
               The
               Infundibulum
               in
               whose
               Inside
               ,
               I
               conceive
               ,
               the
               Trunks
               of
               Exporting
               Lympheducts
               pass
               from
               the
               Pinial
               Gland
               ;
               besides
               which
               ,
               the
               Inmost
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Infundibulum
               it self
               Transmits
               the
               Aqueous
               Humour
               of
               the
               Ventricles
               of
               the
               Brain
               into
               the
               Pituitary
               Gland
               ,
               where
               it
               joins
               with
               the
               Lymphs
               above
               mention'd
               .
            
             
               4
               ,
               4
               ,
               Two
               Arteries
               taken
               Notice
               of
               by
               Vieustens
               ,
               which
               pass
               out
               of
               the
               Cranium
               to
               the
               Glandulous
               Membranes
               of
               the
               
                 Foramina
                 Narium
              
               and
               Neighbouring
               〈◊〉
               .
            
             
               5
               ,
               5
               ,
               The
               Bended
               Parts
               of
               the
               Lateral
               Sinus's
               as
               they
               pass
               that
               Part
               of
               the
               Cranium
               ,
               where
               the
               
                 Os
                 Temporum
                 ,
                 Sincipitis
              
               ,
               and
               Occipitis
               meet
               .
            
             
               6
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               Rais'd
               and
               Reclin'd
               Laterally
               ,
               to
               shew
               the
               Progress
               of
               the
               Third
               ,
               Fourth
               ,
               Fifth
               ,
               and
               Sixth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               7
               ,
               7
               ,
               The
               Hard
               and
               Soft
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Auditory
               Nerves
               Entring
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               .
            
             
               8
               ,
               8
               ,
               The
               Eighth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               or
               
                 Par
                 Vagum
              
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Accessory
               Nerves
               (
               **
               )
               Accompanying
               them
               at
               their
               Egress
               .
            
             
               **
               ,
               The
               Accessory
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               9
               ,
               9
               ,
               The
               Ninth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               27.
               
            
             
               The
               Trunk
               and
               Three
               Branches
               at
               One
               of
               the
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Fifth
               Pair
               within
               the
               Cranium
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Trunk
               ,
            
             
               B
               ,
               It
               s
               Gangleon
               ,
            
             
               C
               ,
               Its
               Foremost
               Branch
               Exprest
               at
               V
               ,
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               ,
               passing
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               at
               the
               Second
               Perforation
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               ;
            
             
               D
               ,
               It
               s
               Middle
               Branch
               somewhat
               less
               than
               the
               other
               Two
               ,
               which
               passes
               out
               at
               a
               Distinct
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               ,
               Collateral
               to
               the
               
                 Sella
                 Turcica
              
               ,
               and
               is
               Reckon'd
               the
               Third
               Foramen
               of
               that
               Bone
               ,
               Exprest
               Tab.
               89.
               
               Fig.
               2.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Third
               Branch
               of
               this
               Nerve
               ,
               which
               passes
               the
               Sixth
               Perforation
               of
               the
               Sphenoides
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               28.
               
            
             
               The
               Basis
               of
               the
               Brain
               with
               the
               Large
               Trunks
               of
               its
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               both
               Kinds
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               some
               of
               their
               Ramifications
               being
               clear'd
               of
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               Ten
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               and
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Foremost
               ,
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Hindmost
               Lobes
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Cerebellion
               which
               in
               this
               Subject
               was
               very
               Large
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               Two
               Lateral
               Sinus's
               cut
               off
               after
               their
               Declive
               and
               Tortuous
               Progress
               ,
               Exprest
               in
               the
               First
               of
               the
               Two
               precedent
               Figures
               C
               C
               ,
               5
               ,
               5.
               
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Vertebral
               Arteries
               as
               they
               pass
               the
               Transverse
               Processes
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               in
               their
               Tortuous
               Progress
               thro'
               the
               Great
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               ,
               to
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               and
               Brain
               .
               
                 Vid.
                 Append.
                 Fig.
              
               8.
               
               K
               K.
               
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Vertebral
               Sinus
               or
               Large
               Vein
               ,
               in
               whose
               External
               Membrane
               the
               Wax
               is
               Extravast
               ,
               which
               makes
               it
               Appear
               with
               an
               Unequal
               Surface
               ,
               as
               here
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               G
               G
               G
               ,
               A
               Continuation
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               Divided
               according
               to
               its
               Length
               ;
               One
               Side
               lying
               on
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               ,
               the
               other
               being
               Rais'd
               and
               Pinn'd
               out
               .
            
             
               a
               ,
               A
               Foramen
               to
               whose
               Margin
               the
               Upper
               Broad
               Part
               of
               the
               Infundibulum
               is
               Fasten'd
               ,
               and
               Opens
               into
               it
               ,
               insomuch
               that
               if
               you
               take
               out
               the
               Brain
               with
               the
               Infundibulum
               remaining
               to
               it
               ,
               and
               Insert
               a
               Blow-Pipe
               into
               the
               Fourth
               Ventricle
               ,
               you
               may
               thereby
               not
               only
               Distend
               that
               and
               the
               Two
               Lateral
               Ventricles
               with
               Wind
               ,
               but
               you
               will
               also
               see
               the
               Infundibulum
               Rise
               and
               be
               Distended
               also
               .
            
             
               b
               b
               ,
               Two
               White
               Protuberances
               behind
               the
               Infundibulum
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Two
               Large
               Branches
               of
               the
               Carotide
               Arteries
               cut
               off
               ,
               before
               they
               pass
               between
               the
               Foremost
               and
               Hinder
               Lobes
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               d
               d
               ,
               Two
               Communicant
               Branches
               between
               the
               Carotide
               and
               Cervical
               Arteries
               ,
               by
               which
               the
               Latter
               chiefly
               became
               fill'd
               with
               Wax
               ,
               it
               being
               Injected
               into
               One
               of
               the
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Carotide
               Arteries
               only
               of
               One
               Side
               :
               Hence
               we
               may
               be
               Inform'd
               ,
               not
               only
               of
               the
               Inosculations
               of
               the
               Large
               Branches
               of
               the
               Carotide
               Artery
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               with
               those
               of
               the
               Left
               ,
               but
               of
               their
               Communications
               also
               with
               the
               Vertebral
               Arteries
               ,
               as
               they
               pass
               the
               Transverse
               Processes
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               ;
               the
               Wax
               in
               such
               an
               Injection
               pouring
               out
               by
               the
               Vertebrals
               ;
               as
               I
               have
               had
               occasion
               more
               than
               once
               to
               Observe
               by
               Injecting
               these
               Arteries
               as
               above
               mention'd
               ,
               after
               the
               Head
               together
               with
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               have
               been
               taken
               from
               the
               Body
               .
            
             
               e
               e
               e
               e
               ,
               Two
               Large
               Branches
               of
               the
               Cervical
               Artery
               sometimes
               seeming
               as
               tho'
               they
               came
               from
               the
               Communicant
               Branches
               ;
               from
               the
               Foremost
               of
               these
               chiefly
               Spring
               the
               Arteries
               of
               the
               
                 Plexut
                 Choroeides
              
               ;
               from
               the
               Two
               Hindmost
               Arise
               those
               Branches
               which
               go
               to
               the
               Chorocid
               Plexus
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               f
               ,
               Two
               Little
               Branches
               of
               the
               Carotides
               .
            
             
               h
               h
               ,
               The
               Two
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Vertebral
               Arteries
               which
               Compose
               the
               Cervical
               .
            
             
               g
               ,
               The
               Cervical
               Artery
               .
            
             
               i
               i
               ,
               The
               Spinal
               Artery
               whick
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               Retrograde
               Motion
               of
               the
               Wax
               ,
               or
               some
               Coagulated
               Blood
               in
               it
               near
               the
               Vertebral
               Artery
               ,
               was
               not
               fill'd
               with
               Wax
               as
               the
               rest
               .
            
             
               k
               ,
               A
               Small
               Branch
               of
               an
               Artery
               Running
               between
               the
               Fasciculae
               of
               the
               Nerve
               of
               the
               Ninth
               Pair
               ,
               on
               the
               Right
               Side
               near
               their
               Originals
               .
            
             
               l
               l
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Cr●ra
                 Medullae
                 Oblongata
              
               ,
               immediately
               before
               they
               meet
               at
               their
               Conjunction
               under
               the
               
                 Pons
                 Varolii
              
               .
            
             
               m
               m
               ,
               The
               Annular
               Protuberance
               or
               
                 Pons
                 Varolii
              
               .
            
             
               n
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Caudex
                 Medullaris
              
               or
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               on
               the
               Right
               Side
               ,
               call'd
               by
               Willis
               and
               
                 Vicussen●us
                 ,
                 Corpora
                 Pyramidalia
              
               ,
            
             
               o
               ,
               That
               Part
               on
               the
               same
               Side
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Corpus
                 Os●●●●●
              
               .
            
             
               p
               ,
               A
               Branch
               of
               the
               Carotide
               Arteries
               which
               Divide
               the
               Two
               Anterior
               Lobes
               of
               the
               Brain
               from
               each
               other
               ;
               from
               whence
               Spring
               some
               Small
               Branches
               which
               Accompany
               the
               Olfactory
               Nerves
               at
               their
               Egress
               by
               the
               
                 Os
                 Cribriforme
              
               ,
               Fig.
               26.
               4
               ,
               4.
               
            
             
               q
               q
               ,
               Little
               Branches
               from
               the
               Cervical
               Arteries
               which
               Run
               under
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               that
               Covers
               this
               Part
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               pass
               further
               to
               the
               
                 Plexus
                 Chorotides
              
               in
               the
               Fourth
               Ventricle
               ,
               and
               Cerebellum
               .
            
             
               r
               r
               r
               r
               ,
               Other
               Branches
               passing
               into
               the
               Annular
               Protuberance
               .
            
             
               s
               s
               ,
               The
               Two
               First
               Medullary
               Processes
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               which
               are
               continued
               to
               the
               
                 Protuberancia
                 Annularis
              
               ,
               and
               seem
               to
               Compose
               Part
               of
               it
               :
               The
               Two
               Second
               Processes
               of
               the
               Cerebel
               are
               Exprest
               Tab.
               10
               Fig.
               1.
               
               S
               S.
               
            
             
               t
               t
               ,
               The
               Veins
               on
               the
               Cerebellum
               which
               pass
               according
               to
               its
               Sulci
               or
               External
               Furrows
               which
               Vary
               very
               much
               in
               their
               Progress
               from
               those
               of
               the
               Brain
               it self
               .
            
             
               v
               v
               v
               ,
               Other
               Veins
               Variously
               Distributed
               on
               the
               Cerebel
               which
               Empty
               themselves
               into
               the
               Lateral
               Sinus's
               .
            
             
               w
               w
               ,
               The
               Sulci
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               in
               which
               large
               Branches
               of
               Veins
               and
               sometimes
               Arteries
               may
               be
               seen
               .
            
             
               x
               x
               x
               ,
               Their
               Capillary
               Branches
               as
               they
               Appear
               under
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               on
               the
               External
               Corrical
               Surface
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               1
               ,
               2
               ,
               3
               ,
               4
               ,
               5
               ,
               &c.
               The
               Ten
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               with
               Seven
               of
               those
               of
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               .
            
             
               1
               ,
               1
               ,
               The
               First
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Par
                 Olfaectorium
              
               ,
               they
               are
               much
               Larger
               in
               Brutes
               ,
               and
               are
               Hollow
               ;
               which
               Hollownesses
               Communicate
               with
               the
               Ventricles
               of
               their
               Brains
               ,
               but
               do
               not
               Appear
               so
               in
               Humane
               Bodies
               .
               They
               are
               call'd
               
                 Processus
                 Mammillares
              
               ,
               from
               their
               Appearance
               in
               Quadrupedes
               .
               By
               the
               utmost
               Scrutiny
               that
               Exact
               Anatomizer
               of
               these
               Parts
               ,
               Dr.
               Ridley
               and
               my Self
               could
               make
               ,
               we
               never
               Discover'd
               but
               One
               Original
               to
               each
               of
               these
               Nerves
               ;
               which
               is
               from
               the
               Under
               and
               Foremost
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Crura
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               ,
               whence
               they
               pass
               in
               an
               Oblique
               Manner
               for
               some
               Space
               between
               the
               Fore
               and
               Hindmost
               Lobes
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               and
               March
               out
               from
               thence
               as
               Appears
               in
               the
               Figure
               :
               As
               they
               pass
               thro'
               the
               
                 Os
                 Ethmoides
              
               (
               o
               o
               ,
               Fig.
               26.
               )
               these
               Medullary
               Bodies
               are
               Converted
               into
               as
               many
               Nervous
               Fasciculi
               ,
               as
               there
               are
               Perforations
               in
               that
               Bone
               ,
               which
               are
               afterwards
               Expanded
               on
               the
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               that
               Invests
               the
               
                 Foramina
                 Narium
              
               .
            
             
               2
               ,
               2
               ,
               The
               Second
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               ,
               call'd
               Optici
               ,
               or
               Seeing
               Nerves
               :
               These
               Arise
               from
               the
               Two
               Large
               Medullary
               Protuberances
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Thalami
                 Nervorum
                 Opticorum
              
               ,
               Exprest
               in
               the
               following
               Table
               ,
               c
               c
               ,
               Fig.
               30.
               and
               passing
               over
               the
               
                 Crura
                 Medullae
                 Oblongatae
              
               ,
               March
               to
               their
               Conjunction
               here
               Exprest
               Ψ
               ;
               after
               parting
               from
               each
               other
               again
               ,
               they
               soon
               pass
               the
               First
               Foramina
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               P
               P
               ,
               
                 App.
                 Fig.
              
               26.
               where
               the
               Great
               Branches
               of
               the
               Carotide
               Arteries
               lie
               Contiguous
               to
               them
               ;
               whence
               it
               happens
               in
               any
               great
               Plethora
               (
               as
               after
               plentiful
               Drinking
               or
               the
               like
               )
               these
               Arteries
               by
               reason
               of
               their
               Turgescence
               ,
               so
               Press
               on
               the
               Optick
               Nerves
               ,
               as
               to
               Distort
               the
               Course
               of
               their
               Fibres
               ,
               and
               make
               Objects
               seem
               Disorder'd
               .
               Some
               Branches
               of
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               are
               Visible
               to
               the
               Naked
               Eye
               at
               they
               pass
               thro'
               the
               Bodies
               of
               those
               Nerves
               ,
               and
               are
               Conspicuous
               also
               on
               their
               Expansions
               within
               the
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               which
               Compose
               the
               
                 Tunica
                 Retinae
              
               .
            
             
               3
               ,
               3
               ,
               The
               Third
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               passing
               out
               between
               the
               Two
               Branches
               of
               the
               Cervical
               Artery
               e
               e
               e
               e
               ;
               these
               Arise
               from
               the
               Upper
               and
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Annular
               Process
               ,
               where
               the
               
                 Crura
                 Medullae
                 Oblongatae
              
               meet
               :
               Nor
               do
               the
               Beginnings
               of
               these
               Nerves
               Appear
               till
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               above
               mention'd
               and
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               are
               remov'd
               :
               They
               Enter
               the
               Duplicature
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               on
               each
               Side
               the
               Pituitary
               Gland
               ,
               as
               Exprest
               Tab.
               9.
               
               Fig.
               3.
               
               H
               H
               ,
               and
               pass
               out
               of
               the
               Skull
               with
               the
               following
               Nerves
               ,
               to
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               wherefore
               these
               are
               call'd
               
                 Par
                 Oculorum
                 M●terium
              
               .
            
             
               5
               ,
               4
               ,
               The
               Fourth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Brain
               as
               they
               Appear
               after
               their
               Progress
               between
               the
               Cerebrum
               and
               Cerebellum
               :
               They
               Arise
               Remote
               from
               their
               Appearance
               in
               this
               Figure
               ,
               even
               at
               the
               Back-Side
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
                 ,
                 Tab.
              
               10.
               
               Fig.
               1.
               v
               v.
               In
               taking
               out
               the
               Brain
               you
               'll
               find
               them
               under
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Second
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               near
               the
               
                 Sella
                 Turcica
              
               :
               They
               March
               into
               the
               Duplicature
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               immediately
               under
               the
               Former
               ,
               and
               pass
               the
               Second
               Foramen
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               with
               them
               into
               the
               
                 Orbita
                 Oculi
              
               :
               They
               are
               call'd
               
                 Par
                 Patheticiam
              
               ,
               either
               because
               some
               Branches
               of
               them
               pass
               to
               the
               Oblique
               Mindes
               of
               the
               Eye
               ,
               or
               that
               considerable
               Branches
               (
               if
               not
               their
               Whole
               Trunks
               )
               pass
               the
               Trochleae
               Cartilages
               of
               the
               Eyes
               .
            
             
               5
               ,
               5
               ,
               The
               Fifth
               Pair
               are
               very
               Large
               in
               their
               Originals
               ,
               at
               the
               Upper
               and
               Lateral
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Annularis
              
               ,
               near
               the
               Pedunculus
               or
               Second
               Process
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               .
               In
               taking
               out
               the
               Brain
               from
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               Skull
               ,
               you
               'll
               find
               these
               Nerves
               immediately
               under
               the
               Pathetick
               :
               Nor
               can
               you
               well
               see
               them
               to
               cut
               them
               off
               (
               in
               this
               Operation
               )
               unless
               you
               First
               Divide
               the
               Second
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               where
               it
               's
               Fasten'd
               to
               the
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Inner
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               :
               After
               they
               pass
               over
               the
               Extremity
               of
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Process
               they
               Frame
               Gangleons
               ,
               and
               each
               is
               Divided
               into
               Three
               Branches
               Reprepresented
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               .
            
             
               6
               ,
               6.
               
               The
               Sixth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               are
               about
               the
               Bigness
               of
               the
               Third
               ,
               and
               Arise
               from
               the
               Hinder-part
               of
               the
               Annular
               Process
               ,
               not
               far
               from
               the
               Basis
               of
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Pyramidalia
              
               ;
               as
               they
               pass
               on
               the
               Annular
               Protuberance
               ,
               some
               Branches
               of
               the
               Cervical
               Artery
               run
               over
               them
               :
               They
               Enter
               the
               Duplicature
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               below
               the
               Former
               .
               
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               9.
               
               Fig.
               3.
               
               N
               N
               ,
               and
               pass
               over
               the
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Internal
               Process
               of
               the
               Petrosum
               with
               the
               Former
               ,
               as
               is
               Represented
               Fig.
               26.
               w.
               
            
             
               7
               ,
               7
               ,
               The
               Seventh
               Pair
               are
               the
               the
               Auditory
               or
               Hearing
               Nerves
               ,
               each
               of
               which
               are
               Compos'd
               of
               Two
               Nerves
               ;
               the
               One
               being
               Hard
               ,
               the
               other
               Soft
               ,
               which
               have
               Distinct
               Originals
               :
               The
               Former
               or
               Hard
               Trunk
               Springing
               from
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               ;
               the
               Latter
               or
               Softer
               Arising
               very
               Remote
               from
               it
               ,
               being
               continu'd
               from
               divers
               Bright
               Medullary
               Fibres
               that
               Appear
               in
               the
               Fourth
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               whence
               they
               Creep
               on
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               
                 Caudex
                 Medullaris
              
               ,
               till
               they
               meet
               with
               the
               Harder
               Trunk
               ,
               which
               they
               Accompany
               to
               the
               
                 Ossa
                 Petrosa
              
               ,
               Fig.
               26.
               7
               ,
               7.
               
               The
               Soft
               Nerves
               being
               Expanded
               within
               the
               Labyrinths
               and
               Cochleas
               of
               the
               Organs
               of
               Hearing
               ;
               whilst
               the
               Hard
               Trunks
               pass
               thro'
               the
               Bone
               ,
               and
               Expand
               themselves
               in
               a
               Larger
               Field
               ,
               as
               the
               Accurate
               Vieussens
               Represents
               them
               .
            
             
               8
               ,
               8
               ,
               The
               Eighth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               or
               
                 Par
                 Vagum
              
               ;
               each
               of
               those
               have
               Ten
               or
               Twelve
               Nervous
               Fibrillae
               Springing
               from
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               ,
               immediately
               below
               the
               Annular
               Process
               m
               ,
               m
               ,
               and
               under
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Olivaria
              
               o
               o
               ,
               or
               between
               them
               and
               the
               Third
               or
               Cordal
               Processes
               of
               the
               
                 Cerebellum
                 ,
                 Tab.
              
               10.
               
               Fig.
               1.
               
               W
               W
               ,
               whence
               they
               March
               Accompanied
               with
               divers
               Small
               Blood-Vessels
               of
               both
               Kinds
               ,
               to
               their
               Egress
               with
               the
               Lateral
               Sinus's
               8
               ,
               8
               ,
               Fig.
               26.
               where
               they
               meet
               with
               the
               Spinal
               Accessory
               Nerves
               **
               which
               go
               out
               with
               them
               ,
               and
               are
               Distributed
               as
               Vicussens
               has
               Exprest
               them
               .
            
             
               9
               ,
               9
               ,
               The
               Ninth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               ,
               whose
               Various
               Originals
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               differ
               from
               those
               of
               the
               Left
               :
               They
               continue
               to
               derive
               their
               Beginnings
               at
               Various
               Distances
               from
               the
               Upper-parts
               of
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Olivarea
              
               ,
               to
               Half
               an
               Inch
               in
               Length
               on
               the
               
                 Caudex
                 Medullaria
              
               ;
               some
               of
               the
               Fibres
               of
               that
               on
               the
               Left
               Side
               ,
               passing
               over
               the
               Vertebral
               Artery
               of
               the
               same
               Side
               ,
               when
               those
               of
               the
               contrary
               Side
               pass
               from
               under
               it
               :
               After
               passing
               a
               short
               Space
               ,
               these
               Nervous
               Fibres
               Collectively
               pass
               the
               Third
               Perforation
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
                 .
                 Vid.
                 Fig.
              
               26.
               9
               ,
               9.
               
               Tab.
               9.
               
               Fig.
               3.
               
               R
               R.
               Tab.
               90.
               
               Fig.
               3.
               E.
               
            
             
               k
               ,
               A
               Small
               Branch
               of
               the
               Vertebral
               Artery
               which
               I
               have
               seen
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               and
               pass
               out
               with
               One
               of
               these
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               **
               The
               Spinal
               Accessory
               Nerves
               as
               they
               Ascend
               from
               under
               the
               Vertebral
               Arteries
               to
               the
               
                 Par
                 Vagum
              
               :
               They
               Arise
               much
               Lower
               from
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               than
               Vieussens
               describes
               them
               ,
               even
               from
               the
               Formost
               and
               Hindmost
               Beginnings
               of
               the
               Seventh
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Neck
               (
               16
               )
               and
               in
               their
               Collateral
               Ascent
               to
               the
               Spinal
               Marrow
               ,
               they
               still
               receive
               New
               Roots
               from
               all
               the
               Nervous
               Origins
               they
               pass
               by
               ,
               except
               those
               of
               the
               Ninth
               Pair
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               10
               ,
               The
               Tenth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Brain
               on
               One
               Side
               ,
               or
               more
               properly
               the
               First
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               which
               pass
               out
               between
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               and
               the
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               11
               ,
               12
               ,
               13
               ,
               14
               ,
               15
               ,
               16
               ,
               17
               ,
               The
               rest
               of
               the
               Nerves
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               which
               pass
               out
               between
               the
               Vertebrae
               successively
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               29.
               
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               ;
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               Its
               Second
               Processes
               which
               Help
               to
               Compose
               the
               Annular
               Protuberance
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Crura
                 Medullae
                 Oblongatae
              
               cut
               off
               from
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Annular
               Process
               Divided
               thro'
               its
               Middle
               ,
               its
               External
               Surface
               (
               m
               m
               ,
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               )
               being
               cut
               off
               with
               a
               Razor
               ,
               or
               large
               sharp
               Knife
               .
            
             
               b
               b
               ,
               The
               Cineritious
               and
               Medullary
               Striae
               which
               Appear
               in
               this
               Section
               of
               the
               Annular
               Protuberance
               .
            
             
               c
               ,
               The
               Middle
               Medullary
               Tract
               to
               which
               the
               Lateral
               Striae
               run
               .
            
             
               d
               d
               ,
               The
               Cineritious
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               under
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Pyramidalia
              
               :
               In
               this
               Section
               the
               
                 Corpora
                 Olivaria
              
               are
               Divided
               .
            
             
               e
               ,
               The
               Left
               Chordal
               Process
               partly
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             SEVENTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               30.
               
            
             
               THE
               Brain
               lying
               on
               its
               Basis
               after
               its
               Two
               Hemispheres
               are
               cut
               off
               ,
               and
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               ;
               the
               Cerebellum
               remaining
               intire
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Fornix
               as
               it
               Appears
               when
               cut
               from
               its
               Roots
               b
               ,
               b.
               and
               turn'd
               Back
               ,
               with
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Corpus
                 Callosum
              
               remaining
               on
               it
               .
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               The
               Blood-Vessels
               that
               Appear
               on
               this
               Inferior
               Surface
               of
               the
               Fornix
               .
            
             
               b
               b
               ,
               The
               Roots
               of
               the
               Fornix
               .
            
             
               c
               c
               ,
               The
               
                 Thalami
                 Nervorum
                 Opticorum
              
               or
               Beginnings
               of
               the
               Optick
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               δ
               δ
               ,
               The
               
                 Corpora
                 Striata
              
               ;
               that
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               remaining
               Whole
               ;
               the
               Right
               being
               Divided
               to
               shew
               its
               Striae
               .
            
             
               d
               d
               ,
               The
               
                 Crura
                 Fornicis
              
               where
               they
               begin
               to
               Wind
               down
               on
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               
                 Crura
                 Medullae
                 Oblongatae
              
               :
               These
               Crura
               of
               the
               Fornix
               are
               call'd
               Hyppocampi
               or
               Bombycini
               .
            
             
               e
               e
               ,
               The
               
                 Plexus
                 Choroides
              
               whose
               Arteries
               Arise
               from
               the
               First
               Branches
               of
               the
               Cervical
               Artery
               e
               e
               ,
               
                 Appen
                 .
                 Fig.
              
               28.
               
            
             
               f
               ,
               The
               Meeting
               of
               the
               Plexus
               at
               the
               Root
               of
               the
               Fornix
               ,
               where
               its
               Two
               Veins
               pass
               to
               its
               other
               Part
               g
               g.
               
            
             
               g
               g
               ,
               The
               other
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Plexus
                 Choroeides
              
               ,
               whose
               Arteries
               Spring
               from
               the
               Second
               Branches
               of
               the
               Cervical
               Artery
               ,
               join'd
               with
               the
               First
               by
               Communicant
               Branches
               ;
               which
               do
               not
               Appear
               here
               ,
               by
               reason
               they
               lie
               under
               the
               
                 Crura
                 Fornicis
              
               d
               d.
               
            
             
               h
               h
               ,
               Two
               Veins
               which
               Arise
               from
               the
               Upper-parts
               of
               the
               
                 Plexus
                 Choroeides
              
               ,
               and
               pass
               the
               Third
               Ventricle
               to
               the
               other
               Part
               of
               the
               same
               Plexus
               g
               g
               ,
               near
               the
               Nates
               and
               Testes
               .
            
             
               i
               i
               i
               i
               i
               i
               ,
               The
               Branches
               of
               the
               Carotide
               Arteries
               cut
               off
               ,
               as
               they
               Appear
               Injected
               with
               Wax
               ,
               and
               passing
               between
               the
               Cortical
               Foldings
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               k
               ,
               A
               Branch
               of
               a
               Vein
               which
               passes
               according
               to
               the
               Length
               of
               the
               
                 Corpus
                 Striatum
              
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               ,
               and
               Discharges
               its
               Blood
               into
               the
               Veins
               of
               the
               
                 Plexus
                 Choroeides
              
               ;
               that
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               being
               taken
               away
               to
               shew
               the
               Striae
               .
            
             
               l
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Rima
               of
               the
               Third
               Ventricle
               that
               do's
               somewhat
               Appear
               under
               the
               Vein
               ,
               h.
               
            
             
               m
               ,
               A
               long
               Medullary
               Tract
               between
               the
               
                 Corpus
                 Striatum
              
               and
               
                 Thalamus
                 Nervi
                 Optici
              
               ,
               call'd
               by
               Dr.
               
                 Willis
                 ,
                 Processus
                 Medullaris
                 Transversus
              
               .
            
             
               n
               n
               n
               n
               ,
               The
               
                 Centrum
                 Ovale
              
               of
               Vieussens
               .
            
             
               o
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Corpus
                 Callosum
              
               by
               Vieussens
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Fornix
                 Vera
              
               ,
               between
               which
               ,
               and
               the
               Fornix
               p
               ,
               is
               plac'd
               the
               
                 Septum
                 Lucidum
              
               ,
               Dividing
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Right
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Brain
               from
               the
               Left.
               This
               Septum
               by
               some
               call'd
               Speculum
               ,
               is
               a
               Continuation
               of
               the
               Inward
               Membrane
               which
               Invests
               the
               Two
               Superior
               Ventricles
               ,
               meeting
               in
               their
               Upper-parts
               not
               unlike
               the
               Pleura
               on
               the
               Sternum
               ,
               where
               it
               Composes
               the
               Mediastinum
               ,
               and
               Divides
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Thorax
               .
               In
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               this
               Septum
               I
               have
               more
               than
               once
               seen
               its
               Duplicature
               fill'd
               with
               a
               Watrish
               Humour
               in
               Hydropick
               Brains
               ,
               as
               Vieussens
               also
               takes
               Notice
               .
            
             
               O
               ,
               The
               Fourth
               Sinus
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               fill'd
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               P
               ,
               The
               Longitudinal
               Sinus
               cut
               off
               ,
               where
               it
               meets
               the
               Fourth
               and
               Two
               Lateral
               Sinus's
               ,
               call'd
               
                 Torcular
                 Herophili
              
               .
            
             
               Q
               Q
               ,
               The
               Two
               Lateral
               Sinus's
               also
               Extended
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               R
               ,
               A
               Vein
               fill'd
               with
               Wax
               on
               the
               Second
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               r
               ,
               Some
               Branches
               of
               Veins
               as
               they
               Appear
               on
               the
               Second
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               p
               ,
               The
               Fornix
               cut
               off
               near
               its
               Two
               Roots
               .
            
             
               q
               q
               ,
               Some
               Lymphe-ducts
               on
               the
               
                 Plexus
                 Choroeides
              
               which
               Accompany
               the
               Vein
               h
               h
               h
               ,
               in
               their
               Way
               to
               the
               
                 Glandula
                 Pinialis
              
               not
               seen
               in
               this
               Figure
               ;
               that
               Gland
               being
               plac'd
               under
               the
               Fornix
               A
               ,
               a
               ,
               with
               the
               Nates
               and
               Testes
               ,
               as
               is
               Exprest
               Tab.
               10.
               
               Fig.
               1.
               
               Q
               ,
               O
               ,
               O
               ,
               P
               ,
               P.
               
            
             
               These
               Lymphe-ducts
               perhaps
               were
               seen
               by
               that
               Accurate
               Anatomist
               .
               Mons.
               Beddevold
               ,
               in
               Examining
               an
               Ox's
               Brain
               ;
               of
               which
               he
               Communicated
               an
               Account
               to
               the
               Accurate
               Nuck
               as
               Mons.
               Beddevold
               himself
               told
               me
               ,
               and
               Appears
               in
               an
               Epistle
               at
               the
               End
               of
               
               Nuck's
               
                 Adenographia
                 Curiosa
                 .
                 Vidi
              
               ,
               says
               he
               ,
               
                 Lymphaticum
                 in
                 Cerebro
                 Bivino
                 ,
                 quod
                 examine
                 tuo
                 (
                 ut
                 Originem
                 scias
                 &
                 Insertionem
                 )
                 erit
                 Dignissimum
                 .
                 Non
                 longe
                 à
                 Glandula
                 Pineali
                 ,
                 à
                 qua
                 Ramos
                 forte
                 habet
                 ,
                 incumbit
                 Plexui
                 Choroidaeo
                 ad
                 Infundibuli
                 latera
                 sese
                 extendens
                 .
              
            
             
               S
               S
               S
               S
               ,
               The
               Cerebellum
               Cover'd
               with
               the
               Second
               Process
               of
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               in
               its
               Upper-part
               ,
               and
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               it self
               on
               the
               Hinder-part
               .
            
             
               f
               f
               ,
               Some
               Branches
               of
               Veins
               which
               Appear
               fill'd
               with
               Blood
               on
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               ,
               Covering
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               ;
               which
               vary
               in
               their
               Course
               from
               those
               Subjacent
               Vessels
               on
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               ,
               which
               are
               immediately
               Distributed
               on
               the
               Cerebellum
               it self
               ,
               and
               faintly
               Appear
               in
               those
               Stroaks
               running
               somewhat
               Parallel
               with
               the
               Lateral
               Sinus's
               .
            
             
               T
               T
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Vertebral
               Arteries
               .
            
             
               V
               V
               ,
               The
               Vertebral
               
               Sinus's
               on
               which
               the
               Wax
               Appears
               Extravast
               ,
               as
               in
               Fig.
               28.
               
               F.
               
            
             
               W
               ,
               The
               Back-part
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               Cover'd
               with
               the
               
                 Dura
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               x
               x
               ,
               A
               Probe
               Supporting
               the
               large
               Veins
               of
               the
               
                 Plexus
                 Choroides
              
               in
               the
               Third
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
             
               †
               †
               †
               The
               Medullary
               ;
            
             
               ***
               The
               Cineritious
               Part
               of
               the
               Brain
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               31.
               
            
             
               The
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               cut
               thro'
               its
               Hinder-part
               and
               Reclin'd
               Laterally
               ;
               together
               with
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               Cerebellum
               Cover'd
               with
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               only
               ,
               where
               its
               Circular
               Sulci
               in
               which
               its
               Large
               Blood-Vessels
               pass
               ,
               are
               Exprest
               ,
               together
               with
               divers
               Arborious
               Ramifications
               of
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               which
               Decussate
               those
               of
               its
               Sulci
               as
               they
               March
               under
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               Branching
               of
               the
               Medullary
               Part
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               ,
               as
               it
               Appears
               when
               Divided
               .
            
             
               a
               ,
               The
               Vermicular
               Process
               on
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Two
               Pathetick
               Nerves
               near
               their
               Origin
               .
            
             
               c
               c
               ,
               The
               Nates
               ;
            
             
               d
               d
               ,
               The
               Testes
               ,
               in
               whose
               Surfaces
               the
               Blood-Vessels
               Appear
               Distributed
               under
               the
               
                 Pia
                 Mater
              
               .
            
             
               f
               ,
               The
               
                 Glaudula
                 Pinialis
              
               which
               we
               take
               to
               be
               a
               Lymphatick
               Gland
               ,
               Receiving
               Lympha
               from
               the
               Lymphe-ducts
               of
               the
               
                 Plexus
                 Choroeides
              
               ,
               and
               Discharges
               it
               into
               Exporting
               Lymphe-ducts
               which
               pass
               the
               Third
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               to
               the
               Infundibulum
               and
               
                 Glandula
                 Pituitaria
              
               ;
               the
               Manner
               we
               Conceive
               these
               Lymphe-ducts
               pass
               the
               Infundibulum
               ,
               is
               on
               its
               Internal
               Surface
               ,
               and
               so
               pierce
               the
               Pituitary
               Gland
               ;
               it
               being
               unusual
               in
               the
               Practice
               of
               Nature
               for
               Lymphe-ducts
               before
               they
               Arrive
               at
               the
               
                 Receptaculum
                 Chyl●
              
               to
               Discharge
               their
               Contents
               in
               large
               Cisterns
               ,
               to
               be
               again
               transmitted
               by
               narrow
               Conduits
               to
               the
               Thoracick-duct
               ,
               as
               it
               must
               do
               ,
               if
               as
               some
               Conceive
               ,
               the
               Infundibulum
               it self
               is
               a
               meer
               Lymphe-duct
               ,
               which
               in
               some
               measure
               I
               am
               apt
               to
               think
               with
               Dr.
               Ridley
               it
               do's
               ;
               as
               I
               have
               already
               intimated
               ,
               
                 Append.
                 Fig.
              
               26.3
               .
            
             
               g
               g
               ,
               The
               First
               Process's
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               which
               pass
               towards
               the
               Nates
               .
            
             
               e
               ,
               The
               Transverse
               Process
               which
               Unite
               the
               Two
               First
               Processes
               of
               the
               Cerebellum
               ,
               whence
               the
               Pathetick
               Nerves
               take
               their
               Rise
               .
            
             
               h
               h
               ,
               The
               Third
               ,
               or
               Cordal
               Process's
               Arising
               from
               the
               Cerebellum
               ,
               and
               Descend
               on
               both
               Sides
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Oblongata
              
               .
            
             
               i
               i
               ,
               Some
               Bright
               Striae
               which
               Appear
               in
               the
               Fourth
               Ventricle
               of
               the
               Brain
               ,
               and
               Help
               to
               Compose
               the
               Medullary
               Trunks
               of
               the
               Auditory
               Nerves
               ;
               these
               sometimes
               have
               Various
               Originals
               from
               the
               Upper-part
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Ventricle
               ;
               at
               other
               Times
               some
               of
               these
               Striae
               Arise
               Lower
               than
               here
               Exprest
               .
            
             
               k
               k
               ,
               l
               l
               ,
               n
               ,
               The
               Fourth
               Ventricle
               Open'd
               and
               Expanded
               .
            
             
               o
               ,
               The
               Beginning
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               .
            
             
               p
               p
               ,
               The
               Accessary
               Nerves
               .
            
             
               q
               q
               ,
               Those
               Parts
               of
               the
               Tenth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               which
               Arise
               from
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               
                 Medulla
                 Spinalis
              
               .
            
             
               m
               m
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Eighth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               where
               they
               meet
               the
               Accessary
               Nerves
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               32.
               
            
             
               The
               Lower
               Jaw
               with
               some
               of
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Under
               Lip
               remaining
               to
               it
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               External
               Left
               Side
               of
               the
               Bone
               made
               bare
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Condyliformis
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Corone
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               An
               Acute
               Process
               ,
               on
               the
               Internal
               Part
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               beyond
               the
               
                 Dentes
                 Mollares
              
               ,
               under
               which
               the
               Trunks
               of
               Nerves
               and
               Blood-Vessels
               pass
               into
               the
               Meditullium
               of
               the
               Bone
               ,
               and
               give
               Branches
               to
               each
               Tooth
               .
            
             
               d
               ,
               Some
               Branches
               of
               the
               same
               Nerves
               and
               Blood-Vessels
               Marching
               out
               of
               the
               Bone
               again
               to
               the
               Muscles
               ,
               Glands
               ,
               and
               Membranes
               of
               the
               Lower
               Lip.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               Inside
               of
               the
               Lower
               Lip
               Co●er'd
               with
               its
               Proper
               Membrane
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               Inner
               Face
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Depressor
                 Labii
                 Inferioris
                 Proprius
                 .
                 Vid.
                 Tab.
              
               12.
               
               Fig.
               5.
               
               H.
               
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               Some
               of
               the
               Small
               Salival
               Glandules
               which
               Appear
               immediately
               under
               the
               Membrane
               E.
               
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               These
               Muscles
               I
               could
               never
               find
               Describ'd
               by
               any
               Author
               ,
               tho'
               they
               are
               constant
               in
               Nature
               ,
               or
               at
               least
               in
               all
               those
               Bodies
               I
               have
               ever
               look'd
               for
               them
               .
               I
               call
               them
               
                 Elevatores
                 Labii
                 Inferioris
                 Proprii
              
               from
               their
               Office.
               They
               Spring
               Fleshy
               from
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               ,
               immediately
               under
               the
               Gengivae
               of
               the
               
                 Dentes
                 Incisores
              
               ,
               and
               Descend
               to
               their
               Insertions
               in
               the
               Skin
               ,
               which
               Composes
               the
               Chin
               :
               When
               they
               Act
               ,
               they
               Draw
               up
               the
               Skin
               on
               the
               Chin
               ,
               and
               make
               it
               Appear
               Variously
               Indented
               ,
            
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             EIGHTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               33.
               
            
             
               THE
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Face
               as
               they
               Appear
               after
               the
               Skin
               ,
               Fat
               ,
               Membranes
               ,
               and
               
                 Musculi
                 Quadrati
                 Genarum
              
               are
               taken
               off
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Frontales
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Orbiculares
                 Palpebrarum
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Dilatator
                 Aloe
                 Nasi
              
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Elevator
                 Labiorum
                 Communis
              
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Elevator
                 Labii
                 Superioris
                 Proprius
              
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Sphincter
                 Labiorum
              
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Zygomatici
                 seu
                 Distortores
                 Oris
              
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Depressor
                 Labiorum
                 Communis
              
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               
                 Depressor
                 Labii
                 Inferioris
                 Proprius
              
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               Buccinator
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               Temporalis
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               
                 Elevator
                 Auriculae
              
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               The
               Masseter
               .
            
             
               a
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               .
            
             
               b
               ,
               The
               Cartilage
               of
               the
               Auricula
               free'd
               from
               the
               Skin
               .
            
             
               c
               c
               ,
               The
               Parotide
               Gland
               .
            
             
               d
               ,
               The
               
                 Ductus
                 Salivalis
                 Superior
              
               of
               the
               Parotide
               Gland
               ,
               as
               it
               Descends
               over
               the
               Masseter
               thro'
               the
               Buccinator
               into
               the
               Mouth
               .
            
             
               e
               e
               ,
               A
               Branch
               of
               the
               Carotide
               Artery
               which
               passes
               thro'
               the
               Inferior
               Maxillary
               Gland
               .
            
             
               f
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               Bone
               made
               Bare
               .
            
             
               g
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Inferior
               Maxillary
               Gland
               .
            
             
               O
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Biventer
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               P
               ,
               The
               Mastoideus
               .
            
             
               Q
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Cucularis
               .
            
             
               R
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Elevator
                 Scapulae
              
               .
            
             
               S
               S
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               
                 Musculi
                 Sternohyoidei
              
               .
            
             
               T
               T
               ,
               Parts
               of
               the
               Coracohyoidei
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               34.
               
            
             
               The
               Left
               Eye
               with
               its
               Muscles
               free'd
               from
               the
               Orbit
               and
               Dry'd
               .
            
             
               A.
               The
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eye
               Fill'd
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               a
               a
               ,
               The
               Optick
               Nerve
               in
               like
               manner
               Distended
               with
               Wax
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Superior
               and
               External
               Margin
               of
               the
               Bone
               of
               the
               Orbit
               next
               the
               Nose
               .
            
             
               b
               ...
               ,
               A
               small
               Cartilage
               call'd
               the
               Trochlea
               ,
               in
               which
               the
               Long
               Tendon
               of
               the
               Superior
               Oblique
               Muscle
               (
               D
               )
               passes
               to
               its
               Insertion
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               Inferior
               and
               External
               Margin
               of
               the
               Orbit
               ,
               where
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Obliquus
                 Inferior
              
               (
               I
               )
               takes
               its
               Origin
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Obliquus
                 Superior
              
               as
               it
               Arises
               from
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Orbit
               ,
               and
               passes
               thro'
               the
               Trochlea
               b
               ...
               to
               its
               Insertion
               on
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eye
               .
               This
               Contortion
               of
               the
               Tendon
               of
               this
               Muscle
               renders
               it
               capable
               of
               drawing
               the
               whole
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eye
               Outwards
               ,
               and
               turning
               its
               Papilla
               Downwards
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Atollens
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Abducens
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Deprimens
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               Adducens
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               
                 Obliquus
                 Inferior
              
               ,
               whose
               Origin
               from
               the
               External
               Margin
               of
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Orbit
               ,
               renders
               it
               capable
               of
               performing
               the
               same
               Action
               in
               Opposition
               to
               the
               Trochlearis
               or
               
                 Obliquus
                 Superior
                 ,
                 i.
                 e.
              
               of
               drawing
               the
               Posterior
               and
               Lateral
               Part
               of
               the
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eye
               towards
               its
               Origin
               ,
               whereby
               the
               whole
               Eye
               is
               drawn
               Outwards
               ,
               and
               its
               Pupilla
               turn'd
               Upwards
               ;
               else
               the
               Projection
               of
               the
               Eyebrows
               would
               hinder
               our
               looking
               Upwards
               ,
               unless
               the
               Head
               at
               the
               same
               Time
               was
               drawn
               very
               much
               Back
               .
            
             
               Besides
               these
               Proper
               Offices
               of
               the
               Two
               Oblique
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Eyes
               ,
               they
               have
               conjunctly
               a
               very
               usefull
               common
               Office
               in
               holding
               the
               Bulb
               of
               the
               Eye
               as
               it
               were
               on
               an
               Axis
               ,
               they
               prevent
               its
               being
               drawn
               Inwards
               ,
               when
               any
               of
               the
               Streight
               Muscles
               Act
               ;
               by
               which
               means
               ,
               each
               performs
               its
               proper
               Office
               in
               turning
               the
               Eye
               either
               Upwards
               ,
               Downwards
               or
               Side-ways
               ;
               which
               is
               no
               Inconsiderable
               Artifice
               in
               Nature
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               35.
               
            
             
               Represents
               the
               Inferior
               Part
               of
               the
               Skull
               with
               its
               Basis
               uppermost
               ;
               the
               Left
               Side
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               together
               with
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               and
               its
               Muscles
               Arising
               from
               it
               ,
               remaining
               to
               the
               Occiput
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               The
               Left
               Side
               of
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Pterygoideus
                 Internus
                 ,
                 in
                 Situ
                 .
              
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Foramen
               of
               the
               Fourth
               Bone
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               ,
               by
               which
               a
               Large
               Branch
               of
               the
               Fifth
               Pair
               of
               Nerves
               passes
               to
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Face
               ,
               and
               a
               Branch
               of
               the
               Carotide
               Artery
               to
               the
               Inner
               Cavities
               of
               these
               Bones
               ,
               as
               you
               see
               them
               Exprest
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Depressor
                 Labii
                 Superioris
                 Proprius
                 &
                 Constrictor
                 Aloe
                 Nasi
                 ,
              
               here
               cut
               from
               its
               Insertion
               to
               the
               Upper
               Lip
               ,
               and
               left
               at
               its
               Origin
               from
               the
               Gums
               of
               the
               Upper
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               d
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Elevator
                 Labii
                 Inferoris
                 Proprius
              
               left
               to
               its
               Origin
               from
               the
               Lower
               Jaw
               .
            
             
               e
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Inferior
               Margin
               of
               the
               Orbit
               ,
               where
               the
               Inferior
               Oblique
               Muscle
               of
               the
               Eye
               Springs
               ,
               Exprest
               in
               the
               preceding
               Figure
               at
               C.
               
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               .
            
             
               f
               f
               ,
               The
               Styloidal
               Process's
               of
               which
               that
               of
               the
               Right
               Side
               is
               broken
               off
               ,
               which
               frequently
               happens
               by
               means
               of
               the
               Rope
               after
               the
               Common
               Execution
               of
               Malefactors
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               Mammiform
               Process's
               .
            
             
               H
               ,
               The
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               remaining
               on
               the
               Occiput
               .
            
             
               g
               g
               ,
               Two
               Process's
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               which
               are
               Articulated
               with
               the
               like
               Process's
               of
               the
               Second
               .
            
             
               h
               ,
               The
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Transverse
               Process
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               .
            
             
               i
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Annuens
              
               or
               
                 Rectus
                 Minor
                 Anticus
              
               ,
               Exprest
               somewhat
               Foreshorten'd
               in
               
                 Appen
                 .
                 Fig.
              
               8.
               
            
             
               k
               ,
               The
               
                 Rectus
                 Lateralis
              
               or
               
                 Abnuens
                 Lateralis
              
               .
            
             
               l
               ,
               The
               
                 Obliquus
                 Superior
                 Capitis
              
               .
            
             
               m
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Rectus
                 Minor
                 Posticus
              
               .
            
             
               I
               ,
               The
               Auricula
               or
               Outward
               Ear.
               
            
             
               n
               ,
               The
               Lobe
               of
               the
               Ear
               cut
               off
               .
            
             
               o
               ,
               That
               Part
               of
               the
               Superior
               Orbit
               where
               the
               Trochlea
               is
               Fasten'd
               .
            
             
               K
               K.
               The
               
                 Os
                 Occipitis
              
               .
            
             
               L
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Squamosum
              
               .
            
             
               M
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Frontis
              
               .
            
             
               N
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Sphenoides
              
               .
            
             
             
          
        
         
           
           
             THE
             NINTH
             TABLE
             .
          
           
             
               Fig.
               36.
               
            
             
               SHEWS
               divers
               Muscles
               Employ'd
               in
               the
               Motions
               of
               the
               Head
               and
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               which
               Appear
               on
               the
               Back-part
               .
            
             
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Hairy
               Scalp
               remaining
               on
               the
               Fore-part
               of
               the
               Head.
               
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Os
                 Occiputis
              
               ,
               made
               bare
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Splenius
              
               left
               at
               its
               Insertion
               .
            
             
               a
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Iugale
              
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Complexus
              
               Rais'd
               from
               its
               Insertion
               ,
               to
               shew
               its
               Inside
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Recti
                 Majores
              
               ,
               that
               on
               the
               Right
               Side
               remaining
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               ,
               that
               of
               the
               Left
               hanging
               down
               from
               its
               Origin
               .
            
             
               F
               F
               ,
               The
               
                 Obliqui
                 Superiores
                 ,
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               G
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Obliqui
                 Inferiores
                 ,
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               H
               H
               ,
               The
               
                 Recti
                 Minores
              
               ,
               also
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               .
            
             
               b
               ,
               The
               
                 Processus
                 Mastoides
              
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               ,
               made
               bare
               .
            
             
               c
               ,
               The
               Back-part
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               made
               bare
               .
            
             
               d
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Complexus
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Mammiform
               Process
               ,
               by
               Falloppius
               made
               a
               Distinct
               Muscle
               ,
               which
               with
               its
               Corresponding
               Part
               on
               the
               other
               Side
               ,
               he
               reckons
               the
               Third
               Pair
               of
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Head.
               
            
             
               I
               I
               I
               I
               ,
               The
               
                 Spinales
                 Colli
              
               ,
               that
               of
               the
               Left
               Side
               remaining
               
                 in
                 Situ
              
               ,
               the
               Right
               being
               Rais'd
               from
               its
               Inferior
               Part
               ,
               and
               Turn'd
               to
               One
               Side
               ,
               to
               shew
               its
               Subjacent
               Muscle
               the
               
                 Transversalis
                 Colli
              
               .
            
             
               K
               ,
               The
               
                 Transversalis
                 Colli
              
               which
               Arises
               from
               the
               Transverse
               Processes
               of
               the
               Inferior
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               ,
               and
               is
               Inserted
               to
               the
               Spinal
               Processes
               of
               its
               Superior
               Vertebrae
               .
            
             
               L
               L
               L
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Interspinales
                 Colli
              
               ;
               These
               are
               not
               taken
               Notice
               of
               by
               Authors
               ,
               tho'
               they
               are
               Distinct
               Fair
               Muscles
               as
               they
               are
               here
               Represented
               :
               It
               was
               for
               these
               Muscles
               the
               Spinal
               Processes
               of
               the
               Vertebrae
               of
               the
               Neck
               are
               made
               Double
               :
               They
               draw
               the
               Spinal
               Processes
               nearer
               each
               other
               ,
               when
               we
               pull
               the
               Head
               very
               much
               Back
               ,
               as
               when
               we
               would
               look
               on
               the
               Zenith
               .
            
             
               e
               e
               e
               e
               ,
               The
               Apices
               of
               the
               Double
               Spinal
               Processes
               .
            
             
               f
               ,
               The
               Extremity
               of
               the
               Spine
               of
               the
               First
               Vertebra
               of
               the
               Thorax
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               37.
               
            
             
               Represents
               Part
               of
               the
               Organ
               of
               Hearing
               of
               a
               Calf
               ,
               where
               a
               Small
               Bone
               (
               Distinct
               from
               that
               plac'd
               between
               the
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Incus
               and
               Stapes
               )
               may
               be
               seen
               in
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Stapedis
                 .
                 Schelbamer
              
               tells
               us
               of
               the
               like
               Bone
               found
               in
               some
               Animals
               lying
               in
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               Internal
               Muscle
               of
               the
               Ear
               ,
               Describ'd
               by
               Eustachius
               ;
               but
               whither
               he
               has
               mistaken
               it
               for
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Stapedis
              
               ,
               no
               Opportunity
               has
               hitherto
               given
               me
               occasion
               to
               Observe
               .
               The
               Knowledge
               of
               this
               Small
               Bone
               in
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Stapedis
              
               of
               a
               Calf
               ,
               was
               Communicated
               to
               me
               by
               the
               Ingenious
               Dr.
               Adare
               ;
               but
               there
               is
               no
               such
               Contrivance
               in
               Humane
               Bodies
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Foramen
                 Rotundum
              
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               Stapes
               on
               the
               
                 Foramen
                 Ovale
              
               .
            
             
               E
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Stapedis
              
               lying
               bare
               in
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Tympanum
               ;
               it
               not
               being
               Inclos'd
               in
               a
               Bony
               Channel
               in
               this
               Animal
               ,
               as
               in
               Humane
               Bodies
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               The
               Small
               Bone
               in
               the
               Tendon
               of
               the
               
                 Musculus
                 Stapedis
              
               ,
               which
               is
               plac'd
               on
               a
               Rising
               of
               the
               
                 Os
                 Petrosum
              
               ,
               on
               which
               it
               Acts
               as
               on
               a
               Pully
               ,
               by
               which
               means
               it
               draws
               the
               Stapes
               from
               the
               
                 Foramen
                 Ovale
              
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               Cochlea
               Open'd
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               38.
               
            
             
               The
               Back-parts
               of
               the
               Muscles
               of
               the
               Pharynx
               and
               Oesophagus
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               A
               ,
               That
               Part
               which
               Composes
               the
               Pharynx
               .
            
             
               B
               B
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Pterygopharyngeus
              
               :
               This
               is
               Erroneously
               Divided
               into
               Two
               Pair
               of
               Muscles
               by
               Authors
               ,
               as
               Appears
               by
               Tab.
               34.
               
               Fig.
               3
               ,
               4.
               after
               Bourdon
               :
               It
               has
               Two
               Thin
               Fleshy
               Origins
               from
               the
               Roots
               of
               the
               
                 Processus
                 Pterygoides
              
               ,
               and
               in
               a
               Semicircular
               Manner
               Embraces
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Fauces
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Tonsillae
               .
               When
               it
               Acts
               in
               Deglutition
               ,
               it
               not
               only
               Straitens
               the
               Fauces
               ,
               but
               Compresses
               the
               Tonsillae
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               the
               Lesser
               Glands
               of
               the
               Fauces
               ,
               and
               Forces
               out
               their
               contain'd
               Matter
               at
               the
               same
               Time
               ,
               to
               join
               with
               the
               Aliment
               in
               its
               Descent
               to
               the
               Stomach
               ;
               this
               Muscle
               Acts
               in
               like
               Manner
               in
               Secretion
               or
               Hawking
               up
               any
               Tenacious
               Matter
               ,
               whither
               Log'd
               in
               the
               Fauces
               or
               Excretory
               Ducts
               of
               the
               Tonsillae
               .
               I
               chuse
               to
               make
               this
               a
               Distinct
               Muscle
               from
               the
               Oesophageus
               ,
               not
               only
               because
               it
               s
               Extended
               on
               that
               Part
               call'd
               the
               Pharynx
               ,
               but
               it
               Acts
               Distinct
               from
               the
               Oesophageus
               ;
               for
               when
               this
               is
               Contracted
               in
               Deglutition
               ,
               that
               is
               Dilated
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               The
               Tonsillae
               .
            
             
               D
               D
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculi
                 Stylopharyngei
              
               which
               draw
               the
               Fauces
               Upwards
               and
               Dilate
               them
               .
            
             
               E
               E
               ,
               The
               Oesophageus
               or
               
                 Constructor
                 Gulae
              
               .
            
             
               F
               ,
               Part
               of
               the
               Superior
               Long
               Process
               of
               the
               Scutiformal
               Cartilage
               ,
               whence
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Muscle
               partly
               Arises
               .
            
             
               G
               ,
               The
               
                 Musculus
                 Vaginalis
                 Gulae
              
               ,
               Cover'd
               with
               its
               External
               Membrane
               .
               The
               Fibres
               of
               this
               Perforated
               Muscle
               of
               the
               Gula
               ,
               have
               a
               Double
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               ;
               the
               External
               Descend
               according
               to
               their
               Length
               ,
               the
               Internal
               Parts
               Obliquely
               ;
               the
               Former
               seem
               to
               Arise
               from
               the
               Arytenoidal
               Cartilages
               under
               the
               Glottis
               ,
               and
               passing
               somewhat
               Obliquely
               to
               the
               Back-part
               of
               the
               Gula
               ,
               Descend
               to
               the
               Stomach
               ;
               the
               Latter
               Order
               of
               Fibres
               seem
               to
               be
               a
               Continuation
               of
               the
               
                 Constrictor
                 Gulae
              
               ,
               and
               Descend
               Obliquely
               to
               the
               Upper
               Orifice
               of
               the
               Stomach
               .
               The
               Office
               of
               this
               Muscle
               is
               to
               Press
               the
               Aliment
               after
               Deglutition
               into
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               to
               which
               ,
               by
               its
               own
               Weight
               it
               is
               apt
               to
               Descend
               in
               Humane
               Bodies
               ;
               but
               in
               Quadrupedes
               the
               Position
               of
               the
               Gula
               being
               Horizontal
               ,
               this
               Muscle
               is
               Compos'd
               of
               a
               Double
               Order
               of
               Spiral
               Fibres
               ,
               mutually
               Intercussating
               each
               other
               ;
               as
               it
               is
               Describ'd
               by
               Dr.
               Willis
               and
               Others
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               39.
               
            
             
               A
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Intestinum
                 Duodenum
              
               Distended
               with
               Wind.
               
            
             
               A
               ,
               It
               s
               External
               Membrane
               ,
               continued
               from
               the
               Peritonaeum
               ,
               Rais'd
               .
            
             
               B
               ,
               The
               External
               Surface
               of
               the
               Gut
               with
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Membrane
               remaining
               on
               it
               .
            
             
               C
               ,
               The
               External
               Longitudinal
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Intestine
               .
            
             
               D
               ,
               The
               Orbicular
               or
               Circular
               Fibres
               plac'd
               immediately
               under
               the
               Former
               ,
               which
               by
               Dr.
               Cole
               are
               thought
               to
               be
               Spiral
               ,
               and
               a
               continued
               Thread
               from
               one
               Extream
               of
               the
               Gut
               to
               the
               other
               ,
               by
               which
               means
               the
               Peristaltick
               Motion
               of
               the
               Intestines
               are
               continued
               .
            
             
               By
               what
               I
               could
               ever
               Observe
               in
               Examining
               these
               Fibres
               ,
               whether
               after
               Boyling
               or
               not
               ,
               I
               must
               confess
               I
               could
               never
               be
               satisfied
               whither
               they
               are
               Continued
               and
               of
               a
               Spiral
               Disposition
               ,
               nor
               indeed
               is
               it
               possible
               to
               Untwist
               a
               Single
               Fibre
               if
               they
               were
               so
               Dispos'd
               ,
               by
               reason
               of
               its
               Smallness
               and
               Collateral
               Adhesion
               to
               each
               other
               ,
               by
               means
               of
               their
               Blood-Vessels
               ;
               but
               on
               the
               contrary
               they
               rather
               Appear
               on
               very
               strict
               Examination
               ,
               to
               be
               Semicircular
               ,
               some
               longer
               and
               others
               shorter
               ;
               by
               which
               means
               they
               more
               Adequately
               bring
               the
               Sides
               of
               the
               Intestine
               nearer
               each
               other
               ,
               in
               Order
               to
               drive
               on
               its
               Contents
               .
               Besides
               this
               Office
               of
               the
               Muscular
               Fibres
               of
               the
               Intestines
               ,
               by
               their
               Reciprocal
               Co-operation
               ,
               they
               not
               only
               Compress
               their
               Subjacent
               Glands
               ,
               and
               Drive
               out
               their
               contain'd
               Mucus
               to
               join
               with
               the
               Aliment
               ;
               but
               by
               Collaterally
               pressing
               each
               Side
               of
               the
               Guts
               ,
               they
               Open
               the
               Mouths
               of
               the
               Lacteal-Vessels
               to
               receive
               the
               Chyle
               .
            
          
           
             
               Fig.
               40.
               
            
             
               Represents
               a
               Portion
               of
               the
               
                 Intestinum
                 Iejunum
              
               Distended
               with
               Wind
               ;
               it
               s
               External
               Membrane
               and
               Muscular
               Fibres
               being
               taken
               off
               .
            
             
               A
               A
               ,
               Some
               of
               the
               Semicircular
               Fibres
               still
               remaining
               on
               the
               Intestine
               .
            
             
               C
               C
               ,
               Divers
               Small
               Glands
               scater'd
               at
               Various
               Distances
               between
               the
               last
               mention'd
               Clusters
               of
               Glands
               .
            
             
               We
               are
               beholding
               to
               the
               Learned
               Wepher
               and
               the
               Accurate
               Peyer
               ,
               for
               the
               Discovery
               of
               these
               Clusters
               of
               Glands
               of
               the
               Small
               Guts
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               those
               Solitary
               Glands
               scatter'd
               up
               and
               down
               in
               the
               Large
               Guts
               :
               Tho'
               Dr.
               Willis
               and
               Others
               had
               mention'd
               a
               Glandulous
               Membrane
               of
               the
               Guts
               ,
               yet
               it
               Furnisht
               us
               with
               no
               tollerable
               Idea
               of
               their
               Existence
               and
               Office.
               They
               are
               supplied
               with
               Blood-Vessels
               ,
               Nerves
               and
               Lympheducts
               ,
               in
               Common
               with
               the
               Intestines
               and
               Excretory
               Ducts
               of
               their
               own
               ;
               but
               I
               can
               by
               no
               means
               think
               the
               Nerves
               Import
               any
               Part
               of
               the
               Matter
               ,
               which
               these
               Glands
               Discharge
               by
               their
               Excretory
               Pores
               ,
               into
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Intestine
               .
            
             
               Peyer
               takes
               Notice
               that
               these
               Glandulous
               Clusters
               are
               plac'd
               in
               that
               Part
               of
               the
               Gut
               ,
               Opposite
               to
               its
               Connection
               with
               the
               Mesentery
               ,
               but
               you
               will
               frequently
               find
               them
               near
               the
               Mesentery
               ;
               yet
               I
               never
               found
               them
               in
               that
               Part
               of
               the
               Gut
               ,
               to
               which
               the
               Mesentery
               is
               Connected
               .
            
             
               The
               Matter
               they
               separate
               from
               the
               Blood
               ,
               and
               Discharge
               by
               their
               Excretory
               Pores
               into
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Gut
               ,
               is
               very
               Tenacious
               ,
               and
               since
               it
               s
               Comprest
               from
               them
               by
               the
               Peristaltick
               Motion
               of
               the
               Guts
               ,
               at
               the
               very
               instant
               the
               Alimentary
               Contents
               are
               passing
               by
               ,
               it
               affords
               us
               no
               mean
               Argument
               ,
               that
               it
               cannot
               so
               join
               with
               them
               ,
               as
               to
               render
               any
               of
               the
               Chylous
               Particles
               more
               fit
               to
               pass
               the
               Mouths
               of
               the
               Lacteal
               Vessels
               ;
               but
               that
               it
               only
               serves
               as
               a
               Vehicle
               to
               those
               Contents
               of
               the
               Guts
               ,
               and
               Defends
               the
               Inward
               Villous
               Membrane
               from
               being
               Offended
               ,
               either
               by
               Sharp
               Humours
               ,
               or
               any
               Acuminated
               Bodies
               which
               often
               pass
               that
               Way
               .
            
             
               The
               Glands
               of
               the
               
                 Coecum
                 ,
                 Colon
              
               and
               Rectum
               ,
               which
               are
               Analogous
               to
               these
               of
               the
               Small
               Guts
               ,
               differ
               very
               much
               from
               them
               in
               Figure
               and
               Situation
               ;
               the
               Former
               lying
               in
               Clusters
               ,
               whereas
               these
               from
               their
               Appearance
               ,
               Peyer
               and
               Others
               call
               Solitary
               Glands
               ;
               they
               being
               Small
               ,
               Lentiformal
               ,
               and
               very
               Numerous
               ,
               plac'd
               from
               each
               other
               at
               Various
               Distances
               ,
               not
               unlike
               the
               Stars
               in
               the
               Firmament
               .
            
             
               All
               these
               Glands
               of
               the
               Intestines
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               those
               of
               the
               Stomach
               ,
               Liver
               ,
               and
               Pancreas
               ,
               are
               Affected
               with
               Cathartick
               Medicines
               ,
               and
               Help
               to
               Discharge
               the
               Matter
               Evacuated
               by
               Stool
               ;
               by
               Affected
               ,
               I
               don't
               mean
               that
               the
               Purging
               Medicine
               bestows
               any
               Particles
               ,
               immediately
               as
               it
               passes
               by
               them
               into
               the
               Cavity
               of
               the
               Gut
               ;
               but
               that
               after
               its
               Particles
               are
               past
               into
               the
               Blood
               by
               the
               Chyle
               Ducts
               ,
               it
               meets
               with
               a
               Fit
               Strainer
               in
               the
               Parts
               last
               mention'd
               ,
               as
               well
               as
               these
               Glands
               by
               which
               it
               passes
               off
               again
               with
               the
               Serous
               Part
               of
               the
               Blood.
               
            
          
        
         
           FINIS
           .
        
      
       
         
         
         
           THE
           INDEX
           .
        
         
           
             A.
             
          
           
             ABdomen
             or
             Lower
             Belly
             Open'd
             ,
             Tab.
             33
             ,
             40.
             of
             a
             Woman
             ,
             T.
             49.
             with
             Child
             ,
             T.
             54
             ,
             55
             ,
             56.
             of
             a
             
               Foetus
               ,
               T.
            
             62
             ,
             63.
             its
             Integuments
             ,
             T.
             31.
             
             Muscles
             vide
             Muscles
             .
             Cavity
             ,
             T.
             41
             ,
             49
             ,
             52.
             
          
           
             
               Acesabu●●nt
               ,
               T.
            
             99.
             
             Fig.
             2.
             
          
           
             Acretion
             of
             Parts
             in
             General
             ,
             v.
             Introduction
             .
          
           
             Acromion
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             Scapula
             .
          
           
             Adipose
             Ducts
             their
             Use
             ,
             T.
             4.
             
             F.
             13.
             
          
           
             
               Allontois
               ,
               T.
            
             55
             ,
             56
             ,
             57.
             
             F.
             7.
             
             T.
             58
             ,
             59.
             whence
             call'd
             ,
             T.
             59.
             a
             Description
             of
             it
             ,
             ib.
             its
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             whether
             Existent
             in
             Humane
             Bodies
             ,
             T.
             58.
             
          
           
             Alveari●●n
             ,
             v.
             Ear
             
               Meatus
               Auditorius
            
             .
          
           
             
               Alveoli
               ,
               T.
            
             92.
             
             F.
             5.
             
          
           
             
               Amnios
               ,
               T.
            
             55
             ,
             56
             ,
             57.
             
             F.
             37.
             
             T.
             58
             ,
             59.
             
             Transparent
             ,
             full
             of
             Vessels
             ,
             T.
             55
             ,
             59.
             
             Uses
             of
             its
             contain'd
             Liquor
             ,
             T.
             58.
             
             Glands
             in
             it
             in
             Cows
             ,
             and
             their
             suppos'd
             Use
             ,
             T.
             55.
             
          
           
             Amygdals
             ,
             v.
             Tonsils
             .
          
           
             Anasiomoses
             of
             Arteries
             and
             Veins
             ,
             v.
             Arteries
             .
          
           
             Anatomy
             prov'd
             Useful
             in
             Surgery
             ,
             
               Introduct
               .
               T.
            
             15.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             72.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             Aneon
             .
             v.
             Bones
             Ulna
             .
          
           
             Animal
             Spirits
             ,
             the
             Common
             Hypothesis
             concerning
             them
             ,
             Rejected
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             6.
             
          
           
             Annular
             Cartilage
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             5
             ,
             6
             ,
             7
             ,
             8.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             20
             ,
             22
             ,
             23.
             
          
           
             An●hesix
             ,
             v.
             Ear
             External
             .
          
           
             
               Antitragus
               ,
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             
               Aquaeductus
               Ateris
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             8.
             
          
           
             Arm
             ,
             T.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
          
           
             Arteries
             their
             Tunicks
             External
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             4.
             
             Middle
             or
             Fibrous
             ,
             
               T.
               cad
               .
               F.
            
             5.
             
             Internal
             ,
             
               T.
               cad
               .
               F.
            
             6.
             farther
             they
             run
             from
             the
             Heart
             ,
             they
             Subdivide
             and
             Grow
             Thinner
             ,
             ib.
             their
             Extremities
             Transparent
             ,
             ibid.
             View'd
             in
             the
             Fin
             of
             a
             Living
             Grig
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             4.
             of
             a
             Flounder
             ,
             F.
             5.
             
             Arteries
             and
             Veins
             a
             continu'd
             Channel
             ,
             ib.
             Tying
             them
             Advis'd
             in
             cutting
             off
             the
             Breast
             ,
             T.
             19.
             
             F.
             5.
             in
             Amputation
             ,
             T.
             64.
             
             F.
             8.
             
             Direction
             for
             Tying
             them
             in
             an
             Aneurism
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             how
             to
             Secure
             the
             Artery
             of
             the
             Lower-Part
             of
             the
             Face
             ,
             &c.
             in
             Incisions
             ,
             T.
             12.
             ,
             F.
             14
             Aneurism
             in
             a
             Small
             Artery
             coming
             out
             of
             the
             Skull
             to
             the
             Forehead
             ,
             and
             how
             Cur'd
             ,
             T.
             5.
             
             F.
             1.
             a
             System
             of
             them
             by
             Bidloo
             Erroneous
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             15.
             an
             Exact
             one
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Aorta
             or
             great
             Artery
             ,
             T.
             22.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             7.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             its
             Valves
             Semil●●●r
             .
             T.
             22.
             
             F.
             13.
             
             Ascending
             Trunk
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
             Descending
             Trunk
             ,
             T.
             41
             ,
             42
             ,
             49
             ,
             50
             ,
             63.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Coronal
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             T.
             22.
             
             F.
             11.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Subclavian
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Carotid
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             6.
             
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             T.
             14.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             15.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3
             ,
             8
             ,
             28
             ,
             30.
             their
             Contortions
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             6.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
             Reason
             of
             them
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             6.
             passing
             by
             the
             
               Sella
               Turcica
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3
             ,
             26.
             
          
           
             —
             Vertebral
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3
             ,
             8
             ,
             28
             ,
             30.
             their
             Contortions
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
             Reason
             of
             them
             ,
             ib.
             their
             Cavities
             sometimes
             Larger
             there
             ,
             ib.
             Ascending
             on
             the
             
               Medulla
               Oblongata
               ,
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             —
             Cervical
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             28.
             
          
           
             —
             Communicant
             Branches
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3
             ,
             28.
             
          
           
             —
             Lower-part
             of
             the
             Face
             ,
             Tongue
             ,
             T.
             12.
             
             F.
             4.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Temporal
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             its
             Branches
             to
             the
             Parotid
             Gland
             ,
             ib.
             Temples
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Occipital
             ,
             ib.
             Inosculates
             with
             the
             Temporal
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Of
             the
             
               Fauces
               ,
               Uvula
            
             ,
             &c.
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Larynx
             ,
             &c.
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Neck
             and
             
               Scapula
               ,
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             —
             Mammary
             ,
             T.
             32.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
             Inosculate
             with
             the
             Intercostals
             and
             Epigastrick
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Muscles
             of
             the
             Shoulder
             and
             
               Scapula
               ,
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             —
             Arillary
             being
             the
             Beginning
             of
             the
          
           
             —
             Brachial
             ,
             T.
             64.
             
             F.
             8.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             1
             ,
             3.
             an
             Account
             of
             their
             Progress
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             their
             Division
             at
             the
             Cubit
             ,
             ib.
             a
             Communicant
             Branch
             ,
             ib.
             where
             Wounded
             in
             Letting
             Blood
             ,
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             —
             Cubit
             which
             makes
             the
             Pulse
             at
             the
             Wrist
             ,
             T.
             67.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Hands
             and
             Fingers
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Bronchial
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             their
             Rise
             ,
             ib.
             Inosculate
             with
             the
             Pulmonary
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Of
             the
             
               Gula
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Intercostal
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Celiack
             ,
             T.
             42.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             its
             Various
             Ramifications
             making
             the
          
           
             —
             Hepatick
             ,
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Systick
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Coronary
             Inferior
             of
             the
             Stomach
             ,
             T.
             33
             ,
             34.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Pylorick
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Epiploick
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Coronary
             Superior
             ,
             T.
             34.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Ap.
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Phrenick
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             their
             Origin
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Splenick
             ,
             T.
             36.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Of
             the
             Duodemun
             and
             
               Pancreas
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Mesenterick
             Superior
             ,
             T.
             40.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             41
             ,
             42
             ,
             50
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
             Inosculate
             with
             themselves
             and
             Mesenterick
             Inferior
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Mesenterick
             Inferior
             ,
             T.
             40.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             41
             ,
             42
             ,
             50.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             its
             Branches
             to
             the
             Colon
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
             
               Rectum
               ,
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             —
             Emulgent
             ,
             T.
             42
             ,
             43.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Vertebral
             of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Spermatick
             of
             a
             Man
             ,
             T.
             41
             ,
             42
             ,
             44.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             T.
             46.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             5.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             their
             Rise
             ,
             T.
             42.
             an
             Error
             concerning
             it
             Noted
             ,
             and
             the
             Cause
             of
             it
             ,
             ib.
             very
             small
             at
             their
             Beginning
             ,
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             different
             in
             Men
             and
             Brutes
             ,
             and
             the
             Reason
             of
             it
             ,
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Spermatick
             of
             a
             Woman
             ,
             T.
             50
             ,
             53.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             3.
             
             Communicate
             with
             the
             Hypogastricks
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Sacrae
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Iliack
             ,
             T.
             49
             ,
             50
             ,
             63.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
             External
             ,
             T.
             42
             ,
             50.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
             Internal
             ,
             T.
             50.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
             Larger
             Proportionably
             in
             a
             Foetus
             than
             in
             an
             Adult
             ,
             and
             the
             Reason
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Umbilical
             ,
             T.
             59
             ,
             60.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             5.
             
             T.
             61.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5
             ,
             7
             ,
             9.
             
             T.
             62
             ,
             63.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
             Various
             Inequalities
             in
             their
             Trunks
             ,
             T.
             61.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             5.
             the
             Causes
             of
             them
             ,
             F.
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Epigastrick
             ,
             T.
             32.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Of
             the
             Oblique
             Muscles
             of
             the
             
               Abdomen
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Of
             the
             Extensors
             and
             Obturators
             of
             the
             Thigh
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Penis
               ,
               T.
            
             47.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Bladder
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Internal
             of
             the
             
               Pudendum
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Hypogastrick
             how
             Compos'd
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             External
             of
             the
             Pudendum
             their
             Origin
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Crural
             ,
             ib.
             an
             Account
             of
             their
             Progress
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Leg
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Foot
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Pulmonary
             ,
             T.
             22.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             8.
             
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             T.
             25.
             
             F.
             10.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Arthrodia
               ,
               T.
            
             97.
             
             F.
             1.
             their
             Semilunar
             Valves
             ,
             T.
             22.
             
             F.
             14.
             
          
           
             Arytencides
             Cartilage
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             8.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             20
             ,
             22
             ,
             23.
             
          
           
             
               Aspera
               A●teria
            
             ,
             v.
             Wind-Pipe
             .
          
           
             Asiragalus
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Atlas
             ,
             v.
             Epistrophicus
             .
          
           
             Atlas
             ,
             v.
             Vertebrae
             .
          
           
             Auricles
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             v.
             Heart
             .
          
        
         
           
             B.
             
          
           
             BLadder
             of
             Urine
             of
             a
             Man
             
               in
               Situ
               ,
               T.
            
             41.
             taken
             out
             ,
             T.
             42.
             
             F.
             2.
             of
             a
             Woman
             
               in
               Situ
               ,
               T.
            
             49.
             taken
             out
             ,
             T.
             50.
             of
             a
             
               Foetus
               in
               Situ
               ,
               T.
            
             63.
             
             F.
             1.
             taken
             out
             ,
             F.
             2.
             its
             Back-part
             Cover'd
             with
             Far
             ,
             T.
             44.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Fore-part
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Suspended
             by
             the
             
               Uracus
               ,
               T.
            
             44.
             
             F.
             2.
             its
             Situation
             ,
             ib.
             Structure
             ,
             ib.
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             its
             Fibres
             and
             Glands
             sometimes
             Tumified
             ,
             and
             cause
             a
             Thickness
             of
             its
             Sides
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Bladder
             of
             Gall
             ,
             v.
             Gall-bladder
             .
          
           
             Blood
             ,
             an
             Account
             of
             it
             according
             to
             the
             Chymists
             ,
             T.
             23.
             
             F.
             15.
             
             View'd
             with
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             
               T.
               cad
               .
               F.
            
             16.
             no
             Fibres
             discernable
             in
             it
             ,
             ib.
             its
             Fibrous
             Appearance
             caus'd
             by
             a
             Coagulation
             of
             the
             
               Serum
               ,
               ib.
            
             another
             way
             of
             Examining
             it
             ,
             ib.
             how
             made
             ,
             Introduct
             .
          
           
             Bones
             in
             an
             Embrio
             Cartilaginous
             ,
             T.
             100.
             
             F.
             6.
             
             Time
             of
             their
             Formation
             ,
             ib.
             Appendixes
             sometimes
             Broken
             off
             ,
             a
             Case
             Recited
             ,
             T.
             96.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             —
             All
             in
             a
             Skelleton
             of
             an
             Adult
             ;
             its
             Fore-part
             ,
             T.
             87.
             〈◊〉
             and
             〈◊〉
             T.
             ●●
             of
             a
             〈◊〉
             Month
             after
             Conception
             ,
             T.
             100.
             
             F.
             1.
             of
             Six
             Weeks
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             2.
             of
             Three
             Months
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             3
             ,
             4.
             of
             Four
             Months
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             5
             ,
             6.
             of
             Nine
             Months
             ,
             T.
             101
             ,
             10●
             .
          
           
             —
             Skull
             ,
             the
             External
             Surface
             of
             its
             Upper-part
             ,
             T.
             91.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Internal
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             2.
             
             Channels
             in
             it
             for
             the
             Passage
             of
             Vessels
             ,
             ib.
             very
             Large
             and
             Transparent
             in
             an
             Apopletick
             Person
             ,
             ib.
             Inferior
             Surface
             of
             its
             
               Basis
               ,
               T.
            
             92.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             8
             ,
             36.
             
             Internal
             Part
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             26.
             
          
           
             —
             Forehead
             its
             Convext
             or
             Outer
             Part
             ,
             T.
             89.
             
             F.
             1.
             a
             Description
             of
             its
             Cavity
             ,
             ib.
             its
             Inner-part
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Sinciput
             its
             External
             Part
             ,
             T.
             90.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Internal
             ,
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Occiput
             External
             Part
             ,
             T.
             90.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             Internal
             ,
             T.
             7.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T
             90.
             
             F.
             4.
             
          
           
             —
             Temples
             External
             Part
             ,
             T.
             90.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             15.
             in
             a
             
               Foetus
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             17.
             
             Internal
             Part
             ,
             T.
             90.
             
             F.
             6.
             of
             a
             
               Foetus
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             18.
             
          
           
             —
             Ear
             ,
             T.
             90.
             
             F.
             9
             ,
             10
             ,
             11
             ,
             12.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             15
             ,
             16
             ,
             17
             ,
             18.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Os
               Cuntiforme
               ,
               T.
            
             89.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             an
             Account
             of
             its
             
               Foramina
               ,
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             —
             
               Os
               Cribrosum
               ,
               T.
            
             8.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             T.
             89.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             26.
             
          
           
             —
             Upper-Jaw
             ,
             T.
             89.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             T.
             92.
             
             F.
             1.
             their
             Number
             and
             Description
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Lower-Jaw
             ,
             T.
             92.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             5.
             its
             Processes
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             32.
             
          
           
             —
             Teeth
             ,
             v.
             Teeth
             .
          
           
             —
             Tongue
             ,
             T.
             92
             ,
             F.
             9.
             
          
           
             —
             Vertebrae
             their
             Number
             ,
             and
             Reason
             why
             Divided
             ,
             T.
             93.
             
             First
             of
             the
             Neck
             or
             Atlas
             ,
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             8.
             
             Second
             with
             its
             Toothlike
             Process
             ,
             F.
             3
             ,
             4.
             
             Third
             ,
             F.
             5
             ,
             6.
             
             First
             of
             the
             
               Thorax
               ,
               F.
            
             7
             ,
             8.
             
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             8.
             a
             Caries
             found
             in
             them
             ,
             the
             Case
             Related
             ,
             ib.
             Of
             the
             Loins
             ,
             F.
             9
             ,
             10
             ,
             11
             ,
             12.
             
          
           
             —
             Ribs
             their
             Number
             ,
             Distinction
             ,
             and
             Articulations
             ,
             T.
             94.
             the
             First
             ,
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             the
             Seventh
             ,
             F.
             3
             ,
             4.
             the
             Eleventh
             ,
             F.
             5
             ,
             6.
             the
             Twelfth
             ,
             F.
             7
             ,
             8.
             
          
           
             —
             Scapula
             or
             Shoulder-blade
             ,
             its
             External
             Part
             ,
             T.
             95.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Internal
             Part
             ,
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Clavicle
             or
             Channel-bones
             ,
             T.
             95.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             4.
             its
             Joint
             with
             the
             Acromion
             sometimes
             Dislocated
             ,
             and
             the
             Symptoms
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Starnum
             or
             Breast-bone
             in
             an
             Adult
             ,
             T.
             95.
             
             F.
             5.
             in
             a
             
               Foetus
               ,
               T.
            
             101.
             
          
           
             —
             Shoulder-bone
             ,
             T.
             96.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Ulna
               ,
               T.
            
             96.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             4.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Radius
               ,
               T.
            
             96.
             
             F.
             5
             ,
             6.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Carpus
               ,
               T.
            
             97.
             their
             Number
             ,
             Disposition
             ,
             and
             Articulations
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Metacarpus
               ,
               T.
            
             97.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Fingers
             and
             Thumb
             ,
             T.
             97.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Ossa
               Sesamoidea
            
             of
             the
             Hand
             ,
             T.
             97.
             
             F.
             1.
             of
             the
             Great
             Toe
             ,
             T.
             105.
             
             F.
             2.
             sometimes
             found
             on
             the
             Lower
             Heads
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             ,
             T.
             103.
             
             F.
             2.
             also
             on
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Peroneus
               Longus
               ,
               ib.
            
             in
             the
             Tendon
             of
             the
             
               Musculus
               Stapedis
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             37.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Os
               Sacrum
               ,
               T.
            
             98.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Os
               Cotoygie
               ,
               T.
            
             98.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             4.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Os
               Innomination
            
             in
             a
             Foetus
             consists
             of
             Three
             ,
             therefore
             Distinguish'd
             into
          
           
             —
             
               Os
               Ilium
               ,
               T.
            
             99.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Os
               Ischium
               ,
               T.
            
             99.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Os
               Pubis
               ,
               T.
            
             99.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Thigh-bone
             ,
             T.
             103.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Patella
             or
             Knee-pan
             ,
             T.
             103.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             4.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Tibia
               ,
               T.
            
             104.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Fibula
               ,
               T.
            
             104.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             3.
             
          
           
             —
             Tarsus
             or
             Instep
             ;
             which
             are
             the
          
           
             —
             
               Talus
               ,
               T.
            
             105.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Heel
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Os
               Spongiosion
            
             of
             the
             Foot
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Ossa
               Cuneiformia
               ,
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             —
             
               Os
               Naviculare
               ,
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             —
             
               Metatarsus
               ,
               T.
            
             105.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Toes
             ,
             T.
             105.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
          
           
             Brain
             ,
             its
             Upper-part
             with
             its
             Membranes
             ,
             T.
             5.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Cover'd
             with
             the
             
               Dura
               Mater
               ,
               T.
            
             6.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Hinder
             and
             Lateral
             Part
             with
             its
             Membranes
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             4.
             
             Two
             Hemispheres
             ,
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Foremost
             Lobes
             ,
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             28.
             
             Hinder
             Lobes
             ,
             T.
             7.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             28.
             cut
             Transversly
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30.
             
             Cortical
             Part
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30.
             
             Anfractus
             or
             Windings
             on
             its
             Surface
             ,
             T.
             5.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Medullary
             Part
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30.
             
             View'd
             with
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             the
             Distribution
             of
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             the
             Glands
             and
             their
             Tubes
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             2.
             its
             Arteries
             ,
             v.
             Arteries
             Carotid
             ,
             Vertebral
             Veins
             before
             they
             Enter
             the
             Longitudinal
             
               Sinus
               ,
               T.
            
             6.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             4.
             the
             Manner
             of
             their
             Entrance
             ,
             and
             the
             Reason
             of
             it
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             3.
             a
             Large
             Vein
             emptying
             it self
             at
             the
             Torcular
             ,
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Blood-Vessels
             lying
             in
             the
             Duplicature
             of
             the
             
               Pia
               Mater
               ,
               T.
            
             5.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Wounds
             liable
             to
             great
             and
             dangerous
             
               Fungus
               ,
               T.
            
             8.
             
             F.
             5.
             in
             Concussions
             what
             Vessels
             injur'd
             ,
             T.
             5.
             
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             Breasts
             of
             a
             Man
             ,
             T.
             1
             ,
             19.
             
             F.
             2.
             in
             a
             Foetus
             of
             both
             Sexes
             they
             contain
             a
             Serous
             Liquor
             ,
             T.
             63.
             of
             a
             Woman
             ,
             T.
             2
             ,
             19.
             
             F.
             1.
             their
             Glands
             ,
             Lactiferous
             Ducts
             ,
             Plexus
             of
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             
               Sacculi
               Adiposi
            
             lying
             on
             them
             ,
             T.
             19.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Nipple
             and
             Areola
             ,
             v.
             Nipple
             .
             Arteries
             ,
             Veins
             ,
             Nerves
             ,
             Lympheducts
             ,
             T.
             19.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Lactiferous
             Ducts
             ,
             v.
             Lactiferous
             Ducts
             .
             Milky
             Tumors
             in
             them
             ,
             how
             caus'd
             ,
             T.
             19.
             
             F.
             4.
             
          
           
             Bregma
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             of
             the
             Sinciput
             .
          
           
             
               Bronchia
               ,
               T.
            
             24.
             
             F.
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4.
             
             T.
             25.
             
             F.
             5
             ,
             6
             ,
             8
             ,
             9
             ,
             10.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             20.
             
             Glands
             in
             its
             Membranous
             Part
             ,
             and
             their
             Use
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             20.
             its
             Cartilages
             of
             Various
             Forms
             ,
             and
             how
             Connected
             ,
             T.
             25.
             
             F.
             8.
             a
             Representation
             of
             it
             in
             Tin
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             11.
             how
             to
             prepare
             it
             ,
             F.
             10.
             
          
        
         
           
             C.
             
          
           
             
               CAlamus
               Scriptorus
            
             ,
             v.
             Ventricle
             ,
             Fourth
             of
             the
             Brain
             .
          
           
             
               Calcis
               Os
            
             ,
             v
             Bones
             ,
             Heel
             .
          
           
             
               Canalis
               Arteriosus
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             its
             Origin
             ,
             Insertion
             ,
             and
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             after
             the
             Birth
             it
             becomes
             a
             Ligament
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             
               Cartalis
               Venosus
            
             turn'd
             into
             a
             Ligament
             ,
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             5.
             
          
           
             Canthus
             Greater
             and
             Less
             ,
             v.
             Eye
             its
             External
             Part.
             
          
           
             
               Caruncula
               Lachrymalis
               ,
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             
               Carunculae
               Myrtiformes
            
             how
             caus'd
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             3.
             
          
           
             Carpus
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Cartilage
             Ensiformal
             ,
             T.
             26.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             95.
             
             F.
             5.
             
          
           
             Cartilages
             Semilunar
             on
             the
             Upper-head
             of
             the
             
               Tibia
               ,
               T.
            
             84.
             
          
           
             —
             Of
             the
             
               Larynx
               ,
               T.
            
             24.
             of
             the
             Wind-Pipe
             ,
             T.
             25.
             
             F.
             8.
             
          
           
             Cataracts
             Directions
             for
             Couching
             ,
             T.
             11.
             
             F.
             24.
             
          
           
             Catarrhs
             the
             Parts
             Affected
             in
             them
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             20.
             
          
           
             Cavernous
             Bodies
             of
             the
             Penis
             ,
             v.
             Penis
             .
          
           
             Caul
             ,
             v.
             Omentum
             .
          
           
             Center
             of
             Gravity
             to
             the
             Whole
             Body
             ,
             where
             ,
             T.
             82.
             
          
           
             
               Centrum
               Ovale
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30.
             
          
           
             Cerebel
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             7.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             28
             ,
             29
             ,
             30
             ,
             31.
             its
             
               Meditullium
               ,
               T.
            
             9.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             31.
             
             Vernicular
             Process
             ,
             T.
             7.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             31.
             
             First
             Process
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             31.
             a
             Transverse
             Process
             joining
             them
             ,
             ib.
             Second
             Process
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             28
             ,
             29.
             
             Third
             or
             Cordal
             Process
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             29
             ,
             31.
             
          
           
             Cheeks
             their
             Inside
             ,
             T.
             14.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Chorion
               ,
               T.
            
             55
             ,
             56
             ,
             57.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             7.
             
             T.
             58
             ,
             59
             ,
             60.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             6.
             
             Branching
             of
             its
             Vessels
             ,
             T.
             61.
             
             F.
             7
             ,
             8.
             
          
           
             Chyliferous
             Duct
             ,
             v.
             Thoracick
             Duct
             .
          
           
             Chylification
             ,
             Introd
             .
          
           
             Cilia
             their
             Cartilages
             ,
             T.
             11.
             
             F.
             5.
             
          
           
             Circulation
             between
             the
             Mother
             and
             the
             Foetus
             prov'd
             ,
             T.
             54.
             
             Manner
             of
             it
             thro'
             the
             Heart
             of
             a
             
               Foetus
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             Clavicles
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             
               Clitoris
               ,
               T.
            
             51.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             The
             Glans
             ,
             T.
             50
             ,
             51.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             Prepuce
             ,
             T.
             50
             ,
             51.
             
             F.
             1.
             what
             it
             is
             ,
             
               ib.
               Crura
               ,
               T.
            
             51.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Contexture
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Capsula
             or
             Proper
             Membrane
             ,
             
               ib.
               Septum
               ,
               ib.
            
             Cause
             of
             its
             Extension
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Coccygis
               Os
            
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Cochlea
             ,
             v.
             Ear.
             
          
           
             Cacum
             ,
             v.
             Intestines
             .
          
           
             Colon
             ,
             v.
             Intestines
             .
          
           
             
               Columnae
               Carncae
            
             ,
             v.
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Conception
             ,
             Introd
             .
          
           
             Concha
             ,
             v.
             Ear
             External
             .
          
           
             
               Condylus
               Processus
            
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             of
             the
             Lower
             Jaw
             .
          
           
             Coracoidal
             Process
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             Scapula
             .
          
           
             
               Corpus
               Callosum
               ,
               T.
            
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30.
             it
             s
             
               Corpus
               Transversale
               ,
               T.
            
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Corpus
               Glandosum
            
             in
             Men
             ,
             v.
             Prostates
             ;
             in
             Women
             ,
             v.
             Vagina
             .
          
           
             
               Corpora
               Scriata
               ,
               T.
            
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30.
             
          
           
           
             
               Corpora
               Pyramidalia
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             28.
             
          
           
             
               Corpora
               Olivaria
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             28.
             
          
           
             
               Corpora
               Cavernosa
               Penis
            
             ,
             v.
             Penis
             .
          
           
             
               Corone
               ,
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             Cricoidal
             Cartilage
             ,
             v.
             Annular
             .
          
           
             
               Crista
               Galli
            
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             
               Os
               Cribrosum
            
             .
          
           
             Cuticle
             ,
             v.
             Scarf-Skin
             .
          
        
         
           
             D.
             
          
           
             DIaphragm
             ,
             v.
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             Diastole
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             T.
             22.
             
             F.
             1.
             v.
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Diploe
             of
             the
             Skull
             ,
             T.
             5.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             3.
             
          
           
             Dislocation
             of
             the
             Clavicle
             and
             Acromion
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Dissimilar
             Parts
             ,
             what
             ,
             T.
             4.
             
             F.
             6.
             
          
           
             
               Ductus
               Hygropthalmici
               Lachrimalis
               ,
               T.
            
             11.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             
               Bilarius
               ,
               T.
            
             36.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             M.
             
               Pancreaticus
               ,
               T.
               ib.
               F.
               ead
               .
            
          
           
             —
             
               Thoracis
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             10
             ,
             11
             ,
             12.
             
             
               A
               Palato
               ad
               Aurem
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             8.
             
             
               Hepaticus
               ,
               T.
            
             38.
             
             F.
             5.
             
          
           
             Duodenum
             ,
             v.
             Intestines
             .
          
           
             
               Dura
               Mater
               ,
               T.
            
             5.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             T.
             7.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             26.
             
             Blood-Vessels
             Distended
             with
             Wind
             ,
             T
             ,
             6.
             
             F.
             1.
             lying
             in
             its
             Duplicature
             ,
             T.
             5.
             
             F.
             2.
             pass
             from
             it
             to
             the
             Skull
             ,
             T.
             5.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             1.
             a
             particular
             Account
             of
             them
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             26.
             
             Quadruplicatures
             ,
             T.
             7.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             First
             Process
             ,
             v.
             Falx
             .
             Second
             Process
             ,
             T.
             7.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
        
         
           
             E.
             
          
           
             EAR
             External
             ,
             T.
             12.
             
             F.
             1.
             2.
             the
             
               Meatus
               Auditorius
               ,
               T.
            
             90.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             15.
             
             Cartilages
             of
             the
             
               Meatus
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             8.
             its
             Glandulous
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             90.
             
             F.
             5.
             its
             Use
             and
             Diseases
             ,
             ib.
             The
             
               Membrane
               Tympani
            
             or
             Drum
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             15.
             
             
               Annulus
               Osseus
            
             in
             Embrio's
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             17
             ,
             18.
             
             Cavity
             of
             the
             
               Tympanum
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             16
             ,
             18.
             
             Lin'd
             with
             a
             Membrane
             ,
             F.
             18.
             which
             is
             Communicated
             to
             its
             Bones
             ,
             ib.
             a
             Passage
             into
             it
             from
             the
             Palate
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             8.
             another
             one
             of
             it
             into
             the
             
               Meatus
               ,
               ib.
            
             The
             Use
             of
             both
             ,
             ib.
             its
             Bones
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
             a
             Distinct
             one
             in
             the
             Ear
             of
             a
             Calf
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             37.
             
             Labyrinth
             ,
             T.
             90.
             
             F.
             7
             ,
             8.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             16
             ,
             18.
             
             
               Cochlea
               ,
               T.
            
             90.
             
             F.
             8.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             17
             ,
             37.
             
             
               Foramen
               Rotundum
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             37.
             its
             Muscles
             ,
             v.
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             Eggs
             taken
             from
             the
             
               Ovaria
               ,
               T.
            
             57.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Impregnated
             ,
             F.
             2.
             
             Introd
             .
          
           
             Embrio
             ,
             v.
             Foetus
             .
          
           
             Empiema
             Caution
             in
             Opening
             ,
             T.
             94.
             
             F.
             4.
             
          
           
             Epidydymidae
             ,
             v.
             Testicles
             .
          
           
             
               Epigastrium
               ,
               T.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Epiglottis
               ,
               T.
            
             13.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             5
             ,
             6
             ,
             7
             ,
             8.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             20
             ,
             22
             ,
             23.
             
             Glands
             at
             the
             Root
             of
             it
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             20.
             its
             Use
             ,
             T.
             14.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             23.
             mistaken
             by
             some
             for
             an
             Excrescence
             ,
             T.
             13.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Epistropheus
               ,
               T.
            
             93.
             
             F.
             4.
             
          
           
             Eye
             its
             External
             Parts
             ,
             T.
             11.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             Glands
             ,
             v.
             Lachrymal
             Glands
             .
          
           
             —
             Bulb
             ,
             T.
             11.
             
             F.
             6
             ,
             11
             ,
             14.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             34.
             its
             Muscles
             ,
             v.
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             —
             Optick
             Nerve
             ,
             v.
             Nerve
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Tunica
               Adnata
               ,
               T.
            
             11.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             6
             ,
             9.
             another
             Membrane
             of
             
               Columbus
               ,
               T.
            
             11.
             
             F.
             9.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Tunica
               Sclerotis
               ,
               T.
            
             11.
             
             F.
             11
             ,
             12
             ,
             16
             ,
             17
             ,
             18.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Tunica
               Cornea
               ,
               T.
            
             11
             ,
             F.
             11
             ,
             12
             ,
             16
             ,
             17.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Tunica
               Coroides
               ,
               T.
            
             11.
             
             F.
             12
             ,
             17.
             
             
               Ligament
               .
               Ciliare
               ,
               T.
            
             11.
             
             F.
             13.
             its
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Tunica
               Retina
               ,
               T.
            
             11.
             
             F.
             14
             ,
             15
             ,
             17
             ,
             18.
             
             Iris
             and
             
               P●pilla
               ,
               F.
            
             6.
             
          
           
             —
             Humor
             Crystaline
             ,
             T.
             11.
             
             F.
             19
             ,
             21
             ,
             23.
             
          
           
             —
             Humour
             Vitreous
             ,
             T.
             11.
             
             F.
             20
             ,
             22
             ,
             24.
             
          
           
             —
             Humour
             Aqueous
             ,
             F.
             21.
             
          
        
         
           
             F.
             
          
           
             FOetus
             of
             Seven
             Months
             in
             the
             Womb
             ,
             T.
             56.
             its
             Posture
             Various
             ,
             when
             best
             for
             Birth
             ,
             ib.
             of
             Twenty-Five
             Days
             after
             Conception
             ,
             T.
             57.
             
             F.
             3.
             of
             Forty
             Days
             ,
             F.
             4.
             of
             Two
             Months
             and
             a
             Half
             ,
             F.
             5.
             of
             Three
             Months
             ,
             F.
             6.
             of
             Eight
             Months
             ,
             F.
             7.
             
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             62
             ,
             63.
             
          
           
             Falloppian
             Tubes
             ,
             T.
             5.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             4.
             
          
           
             
               Falx
               ,
               T.
            
             8.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             3
             ,
             4.
             its
             Use
             ,
             F.
             8.
             
          
           
             Fat
             ,
             T.
             4.
             
             F.
             13.
             its
             Membranes
             ,
             ib.
             Globules
             with
             ther●
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             ib.
             what
             it
             is
             ,
             
               ib.
               Lobi
            
             of
             it
             on
             the
             
               Abdomen
               ,
               T.
            
             31.
             
          
           
             Foetus
             their
             Glandulous
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             14.
             
             F.
             3.
             
          
           
             Fermentation
             of
             the
             Aliment
             in
             Chylification
             ,
             Introd
             .
          
           
             Fermentation
             of
             the
             Blood
             in
             its
             Vessels
             ,
             v.
             Intestine
             Motion
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             Fibre
             of
             a
             Muscle
             ,
             T.
             64.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             Fibula
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             
               Fistula
               Lachrymalis
            
             ,
             its
             Cause
             and
             way
             of
             Cure
             ,
             T.
             11.
             
             F.
             5.
             
          
           
             Fistulous
             Ulcer
             in
             the
             Upper-part
             of
             the
             Thigh
             how
             Cur'd
             ,
             T.
             72.
             
          
           
             
               Foramen
               Ovale
            
             Describ'd
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             
               Fornix
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30.
             its
             Roots
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30.
             
             
               Crura
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30.
             
          
        
         
           
             G.
             
          
           
             GAll-bladder
             ,
             T.
             37.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5.
             its
             Duct
             ,
             T.
             37.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             5.
             
             Internal
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Duct
             ,
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             Valves
             in
             it
             how
             made
             and
             their
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             Gall-ducts
             Enter
             it
             ,
             none
             into
             the
             Bladder
             ,
             prov'd
             ,
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             3.
             
          
           
             Gangleon
             in
             the
             Nerves
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             6.
             
             
               Ap
               F.
            
             27.
             
          
           
             Gargareon
             ,
             v.
             Uv●la
             .
          
           
             
               Ginglimus
               ,
               T.
            
             96.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             Glands
             Adipose
             ,
             v.
             Omentum
             .
          
           
             —
             Axiliary
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             1.
             their
             Use
             ,
             Tumours
             in
             them
             how
             Cau●'d
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Inguinal
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             1.
             their
             Use
             ,
             Causes
             of
             Tumors
             in
             them
             ,
             Cases
             related
             ,
             One
             where
             it
             Weigh'd
             Six
             Pounds
             .
          
           
             —
             Lachrymal
             ,
             T.
             11.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             3
             ,
             5.
             their
             Ducts
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             5.
             
          
           
             —
             Lips
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             8.
             
          
           
             —
             Lymphatick
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             13
             ,
             14.
             those
             of
             the
             Neck
             Tumid
             in
             Scrophulas
             and
             their
             Cure
             ,
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Lumbal
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             10
             ,
             11.
             
          
           
             —
             Maxillary
             ,
             T.
             15.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             19.
             their
             Arteries
             ,
             Veins
             ,
             Nerves
             ,
             Salival-duct
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             15.
             
          
           
             —
             Miliary
             ,
             v.
             Skin
             .
          
           
             —
             Mucilaginous
             of
             the
             
               Vertebrae
               ,
               T.
            
             10.
             
             F.
             8.
             their
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Parotide
             ,
             T.
             12.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             33.
             a
             Remarkable
             Case
             of
             an
             Abscess
             in
             it
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             2.
             its
             Salival-duct
             ,
             T.
             12.
             
             F.
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             1
             ,
             33.
             
             Symptoms
             and
             Cure
             of
             it
             when
             Wounded
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Piliferous
             ,
             T.
             4.
             
             F.
             6.
             
          
           
             —
             Pinial
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             31.
             its
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Pituitary
             ,
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             26.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Renales
               ,
               ib.
               T.
            
             42
             ,
             50.
             in
             a
             
               Foetus
               ,
               T.
            
             63.
             their
          
           
             —
             Composition
             and
             Vessels
             Describ'd
             ,
             T.
             42.
             
             Subclavian
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             12.
             
          
           
             —
             Sublingual
             ,
             T.
             15.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             19.
             their
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             Nerves
             ,
             Salival-duct
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             19.
             
          
           
             —
             Skin
             ,
             or
             Sudoriferous
             ,
             T.
             4.
             
             F.
             6.
             
          
           
             —
             Thyroid
             ,
             T.
             15.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             7.
             their
             Use
             ,
             Colour
             and
             Compactness
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             7.
             
          
           
             
               Glans
               Penis
               ,
               T.
            
             48.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5.
             
          
           
             Glottis
             how
             Compos'd
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             20.
             
          
           
             Gula
             or
             Gullet
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             Gums
             ,
             T.
             13.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             View'd
             with
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             F.
             10.
             
          
        
         
           
             H.
             
          
           
             Haemorrhoids
             how
             Caus'd
             ,
             T.
             39.
             
             F.
             7.
             
          
           
             Hairs
             View'd
             with
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             T.
             4.
             
             F.
             7
             ,
             8
             ,
             9
             ,
             10
             ,
             11
             ,
             12.
             their
             Rise
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             6.
             how
             Nourish'd
             and
             their
             Composition
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Hairy-Scalp
             ,
             T.
             5.
             
             F.
             1.
             its
             Piliferous
             Bodies
             ,
             and
             Miliary
             Glands
             ,
             ib.
             Number
             and
             Largeness
             of
             its
             Blood-Vessels
             Noted
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Hearing
             how
             perform'd
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             17.
             
          
           
             Heart
             
               in
               Situ
               ,
               T.
            
             21
             ,
             24.
             in
             a
             
               Foetus
               ,
               T.
            
             63.
             taken
             out
             ,
             T.
             22.
             
             F.
             1.
             cut
             Transversly
             ,
             F.
             9.
             it
             s
             External
             Membrane
             ,
             F.
             1.
             
             Fibres
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5.
             how
             to
             prepare
             and
             show
             them
             ,
             F.
             2.
             
             The
             Right
             Auricle
             ,
             T.
             22.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             Open'd
             ,
             F.
             6
             ,
             8.
             
             Left
             Auricle
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             7
             ,
             8.
             
             The
             Right
             Ventricle
             ,
             T.
             22.
             
             F.
             8
             ,
             9.
             
             Left
             Ventricle
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             7
             ,
             9.
             
             
               Columnae
               Carniae
               ,
               F.
            
             7
             ,
             10.
             their
             Origin
             ,
             Composition
             ,
             and
             Use
             ,
             F.
             7.
             
             Valves
             Semilunar
             or
             Sigmoidal
             ,
             F.
             8
             ,
             13
             ,
             14.
             
             Mitral
             or
             Tricuspid
             ,
             F.
             6
             ,
             7
             ,
             12.
             the
             
               Septum
               ,
               F.
            
             7
             ,
             9.
             a
             Sinus
             between
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             F.
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             Coronary
             Vessels
             ,
             F.
             8
             ,
             11.
             
             Nerves
             ,
             F.
             8.
             
             Glands
             at
             its
             
               Basis
               ,
               T.
            
             21.
             
          
           
             
               Helix
               Auriculae
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             Hernia
             of
             the
             Intestines
             ,
             how
             Incident
             to
             Women
             ,
             T.
             50.
             
          
           
             
               Hircus
               Ariculae
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             Humour
             of
             the
             Amnios
             ,
             v.
             Amnios
             .
          
           
             Humors
             of
             the
             Eyes
             ,
             T.
             11.
             
             F.
             19
             ,
             20
             ,
             21
             ,
             22
             ,
             23
             ,
             24.
             
          
           
             Hymen
             how
             Fram'd
             and
             its
             different
             Appearance
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             Imperforated
             in
             a
             Married
             Woman
             ,
             the
             History
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             
               Hypochondrium
               ,
               T.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Hypogastrium
               ,
               T.
            
             1.
             
          
        
         
           
             I.
             
          
           
             
               ILia
               ,
               T.
            
             1.
             
             T.
             32.
             
             Fig.
             1.
             
             R
             R.
             
          
           
             Inous
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             of
             the
             Ear.
             
          
           
             
               Infundibulum
               ,
               T.
            
             9.
             
             F.
             ●
             ,
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             26.
             its
             Connection
             to
             the
             
               Glandula
               Pituitaria
               ,
               T.
            
             9.
             
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             
               Inguina
               ,
               T.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             Intestine
             Motion
             of
             the
             Blood
             in
             its
             Large
             Vessels
             ,
             Introd
             .
          
           
             —
             Of
             the
             Chyle
             ,
             Introd
             .
          
           
             Intestines
             ,
             T.
             33
             ,
             40.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             their
             Fibres
             Describ'd
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             39.
             
             Glands
             their
             Kinds
             ,
             Disposition
             ,
             and
             Use
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             40.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Duodeman
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             38.
             its
             Membranes
             External
             ,
             and
             Muscular
             ,
             ib.
             Perforated
             by
             the
             Biliary
             and
             Pancreatick
             Ducts
             ,
             T.
             36.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Reason
             of
             its
             Curvation
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Iejuam
               ,
               T.
            
             39.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             39.
             
             External
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             39.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Origin
             of
             it
             ,
             ib.
             Muscular
             Membrane
             ,
             ib.
             Arteries
             ,
             Veins
             ,
             Nerves
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Ileum
               ,
               T.
            
             39.
             
             F
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             
               Valvulae
               Connive●●●s
            
             how
             made
             ,
             their
             Order
             ,
             and
             Use
             ,
             T.
             39.
             
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Coecum
               ,
               T.
            
             39.
             
             F.
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             T.
             40.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Colon
               ,
               T.
            
             33
             ,
             39.
             
             F.
             4
             ,
             5.
             its
             Cells
             ,
             ib.
             Valves
             and
             how
             Caus'd
             ,
             ib.
             Ligament
             ,
             T.
             40.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             54.
             
             Compos'd
             of
             Fleshy
             Fibres
             ,
             and
             their
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             T.
             39.
             
             F.
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             Reason
             why
             the
             Excrements
             can't
             return
             ,
             ib.
             an
             Experiment
             illustrating
             how
             it
             happens
             in
             Iliack
             passions
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Rectum
               ,
               T.
            
             3●
             .
             F.
             6
             ,
             7.
             its
             External
             Coat
             whence
             deriv'd
             ,
             F.
             6.
             
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             ib.
             Fatty
             Appendages
             of
             it
             ,
             ib.
             Internal
             Coat
             ,
             and
             its
             Composition
             ,
             F.
             7.
             its
             Diseases
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Iris
             ,
             its
             Inner
             〈…〉
             ●
             .
             11.
             
             F.
             17.
             v.
             Eye
             .
          
        
         
           
             K.
             
          
           
             KIdneys
             
               in
               Situ
               ,
               T.
            
             41.
             in
             a
             Foetus
             Conglomerate
             ,
             T.
             63.
             taken
             out
             ,
             T.
             42
             ,
             43.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             T.
             50.
             their
             Adipose
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             42.
             
             Proper
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             43.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             3
             ,
             5.
             
             
               Pelvis
               ,
               T.
            
             43.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             6
             ,
             7.
             
             Glandulous
             Part
             ,
             T.
             43.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             View'd
             with
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             F.
             5.
             
             
               Tubuli
               Urinarii
               ,
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5
             ,
             6.
             
             
               Carunculae
               Papillares
               ,
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             4
             ,
             5
             ,
             6.
             
             Emulgent
             Arteries
             and
             Veins
             ,
             T.
             42
             ,
             43.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             Nerves
             ,
             Lymphe-ducts
             and
             their
             Use
             ,
             T.
             43.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Manner
             of
             their
             Secretion
             ,
             ib.
             Stones
             in
             them
             ,
             how
             they
             cause
             Pain
             ,
             ib.
             Ill
             Effects
             of
             their
             Laxity
             Related
             in
             a
             Case
             ,
             ib.
             
          
        
         
           
             L.
             
          
           
             LAbyrinth
             ,
             v.
             Ear.
             
          
           
             Lachrymal
             Bone
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             of
             the
             Upper-Jaw
             .
          
           
             Lachrymal
             Ducts
             ,
             v.
             Glands
             Lachrymal
             .
          
           
             Lacteal
             Vessels
             ,
             T.
             39.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             40.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             10.
             their
             Valves
             ,
             T.
             40.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Rise
             ,
             Progress
             ,
             and
             Use
             ,
             T.
             39.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             Lactiferous
             Vessels
             in
             the
             Breast
             ,
             T.
             19.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5.
             their
             Beginning
             ,
             Form
             ,
             and
             Orifices
             ,
             F.
             4.
             
          
           
             Lambdoidal
             Suture
             ,
             v.
             Suture
             .
          
           
             
               L●mina
               Spira●u
               ,
               T.
            
             90.
             
             F.
             8.
             
          
           
             Larynx
             ,
             its
             Fore-part
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             5
             ,
             7.
             
             Back-part
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             6
             ,
             8.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             20.
             
             View'd
             Laterally
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             22
             ,
             23.
             its
             Cartilages
             ,
             v.
             Thyroidal
             ,
             Annular
             ,
             Arytetenoidal
             ,
             Epiglo●●●
             .
          
           
             Ligament
             Annular
             of
             the
             Wrist
             ,
             T.
             64.
             
             F.
             8.
             
             T.
             67
             ,
             69.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             —
             Of
             the
             Ancle
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             1.
             how
             Compos'd
             ,
             T.
             81.
             
          
           
             —
             Imbanding
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             T.
             67.
             
          
           
             —
             Between
             the
             Ulna
             and
             
               Radius
               ,
               T.
            
             68
             ,
             71.
             
          
           
             —
             Between
             the
             Tibia
             and
             
               Fibula
               ,
               T.
            
             82.
             
          
           
             —
             Round
             of
             the
             Thigh-bone
             Fasten'd
             to
             the
             Acetabu●●m
             ,
             and
             its
             Use
             ,
             T.
             74
             ,
             99.
             
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Broad
             Covering
             the
             Joint
             of
             the
             Thigh
             and
             Hip
             ,
             T.
             79.
             
          
           
             —
             Investing
             the
             Knee
             ,
             T.
             84.
             
          
           
             —
             Of
             the
             Ancle
             Joint
             ,
             T.
             82.
             
          
           
             —
             Joining
             the
             Bones
             of
             the
             
               Tarsu●
               ,
               T.
            
             82.
             
          
           
             —
             Of
             
               Ossa
               Carpi
            
             at
             their
             Articulation
             ,
             T.
             71.
             
          
           
             —
             Reaching
             from
             the
             
               Os
               Sacrum
            
             to
             the
             Appendix
             of
             the
             
               Ischium
               ,
               T.
            
             72.
             
          
           
             —
             Ciliare
             ,
             v.
             Eye
             .
          
           
             
               Linea
               Alba
               ,
               T.
            
             31.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Linea
               Semilunaris
               ,
               ib.
            
             how
             Compos'd
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Liver
             
               in
               Situ
               ,
               T.
            
             33
             ,
             41
             ,
             49.
             in
             a
             
               Foetus
               ,
               T.
            
             62.
             a
             Compages
             of
             Vessels
             and
             the
             several
             Offices
             of
             them
             ,
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             5.
             how
             found
             in
             Dead
             Bodies
             ,
             Three
             Instances
             ,
             
               ib.
               Scirrhoma
            
             Cur'd
             ,
             ib.
             Proportionably
             Larger
             in
             a
             Foetus
             ,
             and
             by
             what
             means
             ,
             T.
             62.
             
             Discharges
             more
             Gall
             in
             Children
             ,
             and
             the
             Benefit
             of
             it
             ,
             ib.
             taken
             out
             ,
             T.
             37.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             its
             Convex
             Part
             ,
             T.
             37.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Concave
             Part
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             2.
             
             Cut
             in
             Two
             to
             shew
             its
             Inside
             ,
             ib.
             Portion
             of
             it
             View'd
             with
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Lobuli
             of
             Glands
             ,
             ib.
             Fissure
             in
             it
             ,
             T.
             37.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Suspensory
             Ligament
             ,
             T.
             3
             37.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             Umbilical
             Ligament
             ,
             T.
             37.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             T.
             41
             ,
             49.
             
             External
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             37.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Hepatick
             Artery
             ,
             T.
             37.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             
               Vena
               Porta
               ,
               T.
            
             37.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             2
             ,
             5.
             
             
               Vena
               Caeva
               ,
               T.
            
             37.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             2
             ,
             5.
             
             Nerves
             ,
             Lymphe-ducts
             ,
             and
             their
             Use
             ,
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Hepatick
             ,
             or
             Gall-Ducts
             ,
             T.
             37.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             3
             ,
             5.
             their
             Orifice
             in
             the
             
               Duodenum
               ,
               T.
            
             36.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Gall-bladder
             ,
             v.
             Gall-bladder
             .
             how
             to
             Prepare
             a
             Scheme
             of
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Capsula
             of
             the
             Vessels
             ,
             T.
             37.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             38.
             
             F.
             5.
             
          
           
             Lungs
             
               in
               Situ
               ,
               T.
            
             21.
             in
             a
             
               Foetus
               .
               T.
            
             63.
             taken
             out
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Part
             of
             a
             Lobe
             Divided
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             2
             ,
             3.
             their
             External
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             Ramification
             of
             their
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             2
             ,
             3.
             they
             Communicate
             with
             the
             Intercostals
             and
             Bronchial
             ,
             F.
             1.
             
             Adhaesions
             how
             Caus'd
             ,
             F.
             3.
             
          
           
             Lympha
             Course
             of
             it
             from
             the
             Inferior
             Parts
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             10.
             
          
           
             Lymphatick
             Glands
             ,
             v.
             Glands
             .
          
           
             Lympheducts
             their
             Origination
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             6.
             
             Manner
             of
             Communication
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             13
             ,
             14.
             of
             the
             Spleen
             ,
             Penis
             ,
             Testicles
             ,
             Arise
             from
             the
             Veins
             ,
             T.
             36.
             
             F.
             1.
             several
             Arising
             from
             the
             Inferior
             Parts
             ,
             Lungs
             ,
             &c.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             10
             ,
             11
             ,
             12.
             
          
        
         
           
             M.
             
          
           
             MAlleus
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             of
             the
             Ear.
             
          
           
             Malleoli
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             ,
             
               Tibia
               ,
               Fibula
            
             .
          
           
             Mammillary
             or
             Mastoid
             Processes
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             of
             the
             Temples
             .
          
           
             Maxillary
             Glands
             ,
             v.
             Glands
             .
          
           
             
               Meatus
               Auditorius
            
             ,
             v.
             Ear.
             
          
           
             Meatus
             from
             the
             Palate
             to
             the
             Ear
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             
               Meatus
               Cysticus
            
             .
             v.
             Gall-bladder
             .
          
           
             
               Mellastinum
               ,
               T.
            
             21.
             a
             Continuation
             of
             the
             Pleura
             ,
             an
             Interstice
             in
             it
             Noted
             ,
             its
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             that
             it
             Divides
             the
             Breast
             ,
             prov'd
             -
             by
             an
             Hydropick
             Body
             ,
             ib.
             its
             Arteries
             ,
             Veins
             ,
             Nerves
             ,
             Lymphe-ducts
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             
               Medulla
               Oblongata
            
             ,
             its
             
               Crura
               ,
               T.
            
             9.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             28
             ,
             29.
             
             
               Caudex
               ,
               T.
            
             9.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             28.
             
             Hinder-part
             going
             out
             of
             the
             Skull
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             7.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             1.
             a
             Portion
             of
             it
             cut
             off
             and
             Divided
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             4.
             
          
           
             
               Medulla
               Spinalis
            
             with
             all
             its
             Nerves
             Springing
             from
             it
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             its
             Beginning
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             31.
             a
             Portion
             of
             it
             taken
             out
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             7.
             
             Divided
             ,
             F.
             5.
             its
             Common
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             7.
             
             Sacculi
             of
             Fat
             between
             it
             ,
             and
             the
             Proper
             ,
             ib.
             its
             Proper
             Membrane
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             5
             ,
             7.
             
          
           
             
               Membrana
               Adiposa
            
             ,
             v.
             Fat.
             
          
           
             
               Membrana
               Carnosa
               ,
               T.
            
             4.
             
             F.
             14.
             the
             same
             with
             the
             Common
             Membrane
             of
             the
             Muscles
             ,
             T.
             4.
             
             F.
             15.
             its
             Structure
             and
             Extension
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Membrane
             Pituitous
             of
             the
             Cavity
             of
             the
             Fore-head
             ,
             T.
             89.
             
             F.
             1.
             its
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             Maggots
             found
             in
             it
             in
             Sheep
             ,
             ib.
             why
             taken
             out
             for
             the
             Cure
             of
             the
             Staggers
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Glandulous
             of
             the
             
               Meatus
               Auditorius
            
             ,
             v.
             Ear.
             
          
           
             —
             Mucilaginous
             Inclosing
             the
             Tendons
             of
             the
             
               Perfo●
               rans
               ,
               T.
            
             67.
             
          
           
             —
             Of
             the
             
               Fauces
               ,
               T.
            
             13.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             14.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             8.
             
          
           
             —
             Of
             the
             Palate
             ,
             T.
             13.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             14.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             4.
             
          
           
             Mesentery
             ,
             T.
             31.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             40.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             its
             Origine
             ,
             Structure
             and
             Vessels
             ,
             T.
             40.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Glands
             ,
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             
               Vasa
               Lactea
            
             ,
             v.
             Lacteal
             Vessels
             .
             Fat.
             T.
             40.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             Metacarpus
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Metacarsus
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Milk
             deriv'd
             from
             the
             Blood
             ,
             T.
             19.
             
             F.
             5.
             a
             Description
             of
             it
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Monstrous
             Conception
             ,
             T.
             62.
             
          
           
             Mucilaginous
             Glands
             ,
             T.
             74.
             
             Description
             of
             their
             Excretory-Ducts
             in
             General
             ,
             T.
             79.
             
          
           
             〈…〉
             whence
             deriv'd
             ,
             T.
             34.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Ill
             Consequences
             of
             wanting
             it
             in
             a
             Remarkable
             Case
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Muscles
             their
             Fibres
             ,
             T.
             64.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             Disposition
             of
             them
             in
             the
             
               De●●ides
               ,
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             4.
             in
             the
             Biceps
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             F.
             5.
             
             
               Membranosus
               ,
               F.
            
             6.
             
             
               Genaellus
               ,
               F.
            
             7.
             
             Motion
             how
             Perform'd
             by
             them
             ,
             T.
             64.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Introd
             .
             redder
             than
             other
             Parts
             ,
             the
             Cause
             of
             it
             ,
             ib.
             Extensors
             of
             the
             Tibia
             ,
             why
             Stronger
             than
             the
             Flexors
             ,
             T.
             76.
             the
             same
             in
             the
             Talus
             and
             Toes
             ,
             and
             the
             Reason
             ,
             T.
             84.
             
             Tibialis
             Divided
             ,
             and
             the
             Use
             of
             the
             Foot
             recover'd
             ,
             T.
             80.
             
          
           
             Muscles
             ,
             
               Abductor
               Auris
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Retrahens
               Auriculam
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Abductor
               Indicis
               ,
               T.
            
             68.
             
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Abductor
               Minimi
               Digiti
               Manus
               ,
               ib.
            
             I
             ,
             K
             ,
          
           
             —
             
               Abductor
               Minimi
               Digiti
               Pedis
               ,
               T.
            
             86.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Abductor
               Oculi
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             9.
             
             D.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Abductor
               Pollicis
               Manus
               ,
               T.
            
             64.
             1.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Abductor
               Pollicis
               Pedis
               ,
               T.
            
             84.
             
             M.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Accelerator
               Urinae
               ,
               T.
            
             47.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             H
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             Acclivis
             ,
             v.
             
               Obliquus
               Ascendens
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Adductor
               Minimi
               Digiti
               Pedis
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Transversalis
               Pedis
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Adductor
               Oculi
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             9.
             
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Adductor
               Pollicis
               Manus
               ,
               T.
            
             71.
             
             S.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Adductor
               Pollicis
               Pedis
               ,
               T.
            
             86.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             D.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Anconeus
               ,
               T.
            
             69.
             
             O.
             
          
           
             —
             Ani-scalptor
             ,
             v.
             
               Latissimus
               Dorsi
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Ani
               Sphincter
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Sphincter
               Ani.
            
             
          
           
             —
             
               Ani
               Levator
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Levator
               Ani.
            
             
          
           
             —
             Annuens
             ,
             v.
             
               Rectus
               Minor
               Anticus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             Antithenar
             ,
             v.
             
               Adductor
               Pollicis
               Manus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Aperiens
               Palpebram
               Rectus
               ,
               T.
            
             11.
             
             F.
             4.
             
             A.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Arytaernideus
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             9
             ,
             20.
             
             F.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Attollens
               Auriculam
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             A.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Attollens
               Nasi
               Alam
            
             ,
             v.
             Elevator
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Attollens
               Oculi
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Elevator
               Oculi
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Attollens
               Palpebram
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Aperiens
               Palpebram
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Auriculae
               Elevator
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Attollens
               Auriculam
            
             .
          
           
             —
             Basiglossus
             ,
             v.
             Tongue
             .
          
           
             —
             Bibitorius
             ,
             v.
             
               Adductor
               Oculi
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Biceps
               Internus
               Humeri
               ,
               T.
            
             65.
             
             I.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Biceps
               Externus
               Humeri
            
             ,
             v.
             Gemellus
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Biceps
               Femeris
               ,
               T.
            
             77.
             
             A
             ,
             B
             ,
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             Bicornis
             ,
             v.
             
               Extensor
               Carpi
               Radialis
            
             .
          
           
             —
             Biventer
             ,
             v.
             Digastricus
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Bractiaeus
               Externus
               ,
               T.
            
             65.
             
             L.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Bractiaeus
               Internus
               ,
               T.
            
             65.
             
             K
             K.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Bu●●inator
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             A
             ,
             B.
             
          
           
             —
             Bursalis
             ,
             v.
             Marsupialis
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Caro
               Musculosa
               Quadrata
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Palmaris
               Brevis
            
             .
          
           
             —
             Catenae
             ,
             v.
             
               Tibieus
               Anticus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Ceratoglossus
               ,
               T.
            
             14.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             D
             D
             ,
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             Ciliaris
             ,
             v.
             
               Orbicularis
               Palpebrarum
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Clitoridis
               Musculi
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Erector
               Clitoridis
            
             .
          
           
             —
             Cnemodactilius
             ,
             v.
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Communis
               Manus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Collateralis
               Penis
            
             ,
             v.
             Erigens
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Complexus
               ,
               T.
            
             16.
             
             F
             ,
             G
             ,
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Constrictor
               Palpebrarum
            
             ,
             v.
             Orbicularis
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Constrictor
               Labiorum
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             I.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Constrictor
               Alae
               Nasi
               seu
               Depressor
               Labii
               Superioris
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             32.
             
          
           
           
             —
             
               Coratobrachi●lis
               ,
               T.
            
             69.
             
             F.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Coracohyoidous
               ,
               T.
            
             15.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             C
             C
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Cr●naster
               ,
               T.
            
             45.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             B.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Cricoerytemoideus
               Posticus
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             20.
             
             E
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Cricoerytemoideus
               Lateralis
               ,
               ib.
               F.
            
             22.
             
             G
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Cricothyroideus
               ,
               T.
            
             24.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             H
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Crurcus
               .
               T.
            
             76.
             
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Cubiteus
               Extensor
            
             v.
             Ulnaris
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Cubiteus
               Flexor
            
             v.
             Ulnaris
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Cucullaris
               ,
               T.
            
             27.
             
             A
             ,
             B.
             
          
           
             —
             Declivis
             ,
             v.
             
               Obliquus
               Descendens
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Delioides
               .
               T.
            
             66.
             
             X
             ,
             X.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Depressor
               Labii
               Superioris
               ,
               seu
               Constrictor
               Alae
               Nasi
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             35.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Depressor
               Labii
               Inferioris
               Proprius
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Depressor
               Labiorum
               Communis
               ,
               T.
               ib.
               F.
               ib.
            
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Depressor
               Maxillae
               Inferioris
            
             ,
             v.
             Digastricus
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Depressor
               Oculi
               ,
               T.
            
             11.
             
             F.
             7.
             
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Detrusor
               Urinae
               ,
               T.
            
             44.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             C
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Diaphragma
               ,
               T.
            
             52.
             
             B
             ,
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Digastricus
               ,
               T.
            
             15.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             A
             ,
             B
             ,
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Dilatator
               Alae
               Nasi
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Director
               Penis
            
             ,
             v.
             Erector
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Distortor
               Oris
            
             ,
             v.
             Zygoma●icus
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Dorsi
               Latissimus
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Latissimus
               Dorsi
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Dorsi
               Longissimus
               ,
               T.
            
             28.
             
             N.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Elevator
               Ani
            
             ,
             v.
             Levator
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Elevator
               Auris
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Attollens
               Auriculam
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Elevator
               Oculi
               ,
               T.
            
             11.
             
             F.
             7.
             
             A.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Elevator
               Labiorum
               Communis
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             D.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Elevator
               Labii
               Inferioris
               Proprius
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             32.
             
             H
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Elevator
               Labii
               Superioris
               Proprius
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             4.
             
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Elevator
               Scapulae
            
             ,
             v.
             Levator
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Erector
               Clitoridis
               ,
               T.
            
             51.
             
             E
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Erigens
               seu
               Erector
               Penis
               ,
               T.
            
             47.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             F
             F.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Extensor
               Carpi
               Radialis
               ,
               T.
            
             69
             D
             ,
             F.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Extensor
               Carpi
               Ulnaris
               ,
               ib.
            
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Extensor
               Communis
               Digitorum
               Manus
               ,
               T.
            
             69.
             
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Extensor
               Digitorune
               Pedis
               Longus
               ,
               T.
            
             81.
             
             F.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Brevis
               ,
               T.
               ib.
            
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Extensor
               Minimi
               Digiti
               Manus
               ,
               T.
            
             69.
             
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Extensor
               Primi
               Ossis
               Pollicis
               Manus
               ,
               T.
            
             71.
             
             O.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Extensor
               Pollicis
               Pedis
               Longus
               ,
               T.
            
             81.
             
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Extensor
               Secundi
               Ossis
               Pollicis
               Manus
               ,
               T.
            
             71.
             
             O.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Extensor
               Pollicis
               Pedis
               Brevis
               ,
               T.
            
             81.
             
             R.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Extensor
               Tertii
               Ossis
               Pollicis
               Manus
               ,
               T.
            
             70.
             
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Externus
               Auris
               vel
               Laxator
               Externus
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             15.
             c.
             
          
           
             —
             Fascialis
             ,
             v.
             Sartorius
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Fascia
               Lata
            
             ,
             v.
             Membranosus
             .
          
           
             —
             Fibuleus
             ,
             v.
             
               Peroneus
               Primus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             Fidicinales
             ,
             v.
             
               Lumbricales
               Manus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Flexor
               Capitis
               ,
               T.
            
             18.
             
             L.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Flexor
               Carpi
               Radialis
               ,
               T.
            
             68.
             
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Flexor
               Carpi
               Ulnaris
               ,
               ib.
            
             Q.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Flexor
               Primi
               Internodii
               Digitorum
               Manus
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Lumbricales
               Manus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Flexor
               Pollicis
               Manus
               Longus
               ,
               T.
            
             68.
             
             L.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Flexor
               Pollicis
               Pedis
               Longus
               ,
               T.
            
             85.
             
             K.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Flexor
               Pollicis
               Pedis
               Brevis
               ,
               T.
            
             86.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             A.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Flexor
               Primi
               Internodii
               Digitorum
               Pedis
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Lumbricales
               Pedis
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Flexor
               Secundi
               Internodii
               Digitorum
               Manus
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Perforatus
               Manus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Flexor
               Primi
               &
               Secundi
               Ossis
               Pollicis
               Manus
               ,
               T.
            
             68.
             
             M
             ,
             P
             ,
             O.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Flexor
               Secundi
               Internodii
               Digitorum
               Pedis
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Perforatus
               Pedis
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Flexor
               Tertii
               Intermodii
               Digitorum
               Manus
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Perforans
               Manus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Flexor
               Tertii
               Internodii
               Digitorum
               Pedis
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Perforans
               Pedis
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Framalis
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             33.
             
             A
             A.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Externus
               ,
               T.
            
             83.
             
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Internus
               ,
               T.
            
             84.
             
             F.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Go●●●●
               ,
               T.
            
             66.
             
             C
             ,
             D.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Genyoglossus
               ,
               T.
            
             14
             F.
             1.
             
             E
             ,
             F
             ,
             G
             ,
             I
             ,
             L
             ,
          
           
             —
             
               Genyohyoideus
               ,
               T.
               ib.
               &
               F.
               ead
               .
            
             O.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Glucaeus
               Major
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             A.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Glucaeus
               Medius
               ,
               ib.
            
             D.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Glucaeus
               Minimus
               ,
               T.
            
             73.
             
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Gracilis
               ,
               T.
            
             75.
             
             D.
             
          
           
             —
             Graphoides
             ,
             v.
             Digastricus
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Hyochyroideus
               ,
               T.
            
             15.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             P.
             
          
           
             —
             Hypsiloglossus
             ,
             v.
             Basioglossus
             ,
             no
             such
             Muscle
             in
             Humane
             Bodies
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Iliacus
               Externus
            
             ,
             v.
             Pyriformis
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Iliacus
               Internus
               ,
               T.
            
             52.
             
             N
             N.
             
          
           
             —
             Immersus
             ,
             v.
             Subscapularis
             .
          
           
             —
             Indicator
             ,
             or
             
               Extensor
               Indicis
               Proprius
               ,
               T.
            
             70.
             
             N.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Infraspinatur
               ,
               T.
            
             66.
             
             F.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Intercostales
               Externi
               ,
               T.
            
             26.
             
             C
             ,
             D.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Intercostales
               Interni
               ,
               T.
            
             26.
             
             C
             ,
             D.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Internus
               Auris
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             16.
             
             L.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Interossei
               Manus
               ,
               T.
            
             68.
             d
             d.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Interossei
               Pedis
               ,
               T.
            
             86.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             A
             A
             A.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Interspinales
               Colli
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             36.
             
             L
             L.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Labiorum
               Sphincter
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Constrictor
               Labiorum
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Latissimus
               Dorsi
               ,
               T.
            
             27.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Laxator
               Externus
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Externus
               Auris
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Levator
               Ani
               ,
               T.
            
             47.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             E
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Levator
               Scapulae
               ,
               T.
            
             28.
             
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             Lividus
             ,
             v.
             Pectineus
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Longissimus
               Dorsi
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Dorsi
               Longissimus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Longissimus
               Oculi
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Obliquus
               Superior
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Longus
               Colli
               ,
               T.
            
             18.
             
             A
             A.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Longus
               Femoris
            
             ,
             v.
             Sartorius
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Lumbricales
               Manus
               ,
               T.
            
             67.
             
             M
             ,
             N.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Lumbricales
               Pedis
               ,
               T.
            
             86.
             
             F
             ,
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Marsupialis
               ,
               T.
            
             74.
             
             F
             ,
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Mastoideus
               ,
               T.
            
             18.
             
             I
             I.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Masseter
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             O
             O.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Membranosus
               ,
               T.
            
             76.
             
             B.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Minimi
               Digiti
               Manus
               Abductor
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Abductor
               Minimi
               Digiti
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Minimi
               Digiti
               Pedis
               Abductor
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Abductor
               Minimi
               Digiti
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Minimi
               Digiti
               Tensor
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Extensor
               Minimi
               Digiti
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Mylohyoideus
               ,
               T.
            
             15.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             E
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             Nauticus
             ,
             v.
             
               Tibieus
               Posticus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Nonus
               Humeri
               Placentini
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Ro●●ndur
               Minor.
            
             
          
           
             —
             
               Obliquus
               Ascendens
               ,
               T.
            
             32.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             R
             ,
             P.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Obliquus
               Descenden●
               ,
               T.
            
             31.
             
             C
             ,
             D
             ,
             E
             ,
             F
             ,
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Obliquus
               Minor
               seu
               Inferior
               Oculi
               ,
               T.
            
             11.
             
             F.
             8.
             
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Obliquus
               Superior
               Oculi
               cum
               Trochlea
               T.
            
             11.
             
             F.
             7.
             
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Obliquus
               Inferior
               Capitis
               ,
               T.
            
             17.
             
             F
             F.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Obliquus
               Superior
               Capitis
               ,
               T.
               ib.
            
             G
             ,
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Obliquus
               Tympani
               Auris
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             16.
             
             K.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Obturator
               Externus
               ,
               T.
            
             74.
             
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Obturator
               Internus
            
             ,
             v.
             Marsupialis
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Occipitalis
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             8.
             
             Y.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Oesophagaeus
               ,
               seu
               Sphincter
               Gulae
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             38.
             
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Orbicularis
               Palpebrarum
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             4.
             
             D
             D.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Orbicularis
               Labiorum
            
             ,
             v.
             Constrictor
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Palmaris
               Longus
               ,
               T.
            
             64.
             
             C
             ,
             F.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Palmaris
               Brevis
               ,
               T.
               ib.
            
             K.
             
          
           
             —
             Patie●●iae
             ,
             v.
             
               Levator
               Scapulae
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Pectoralis
               ,
               T.
            
             20.
             
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Pectoralis
               Internus
            
             ,
             v.
             Triengularis
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Pecti●●ns
               ,
               T.
            
             75.
             
             L.
             
          
           
             —
             Pedieus
             ,
             v.
             
               Perforatus
               Pedis
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Perforans
               Manus
               ,
               T.
            
             67.
             
             A
             ,
             B.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Perforans
               Manus
               ,
               ib.
            
             F
             ,
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Perforatus
               Pedis
               .
               T.
            
             83.
             
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Perforans
               Pedis
               ,
               T.
            
             85.
             
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Pero●●us
               Primus
               ,
               T.
            
             82.
             
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Pero●●us
               Secundus
               ,
               T.
               ib.
            
             B.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Plantaris
               ,
               T.
            
             84.
             
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Platysma
               Myoides
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Quadratus
               Genae
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Popliteus
               ,
               T.
            
             84
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Pronator
               Radii
               Teres
               ,
               T.
            
             68.
             
             A.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Pronator
               Radii
               Brevis
               seu
               Quadratus
               ,
               ib.
            
             B.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Psoas
               Magnus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Psoas
               Parvus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Pierygoideus
               Externus
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Q.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Pierygoideus
               Internus
               ,
               T.
            
             15.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             N.
             
          
           
             —
             Pierygopalatinus
             ,
             v.
             Sphenopterygopalatinus
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Pierygopharyngeus
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             38.
             
             B.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Pyramidalis
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             1
             ,
             42.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Pyriformis
               ,
               T.
            
             73.
             
             D.
             
          
           
             —
             Quadragemini
             ,
             v.
             Pyriformis
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Quadratus
               Femoris
               ,
               T.
            
             73.
             
             N.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Quadratus
               Genae
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             33.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Quadratus
               Lumborium
               ,
               T.
            
             30.
             
             V.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Radialis
               Extensor
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Extensor
               Carpi
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Rectus
               Abdominis
               ,
               T.
            
             32.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             L
             ,
             M
             ,
             N
             ,
             O
             ,
             P.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Rectus
               Femoris
               ,
               T.
            
             75.
             
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Rectus
               Capitis
               Lateralis
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             8.
             
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Rectus
               Capitis
               Major
               Anticus
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Flexor
               Capitis
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Rectus
               Capitis
               Minor
               Anticus
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             8.
             
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Rectus
               Capitis
               Major
               Posticus
               ,
               T.
            
             17.
             
             A
             ,
             B.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Rectus
               Capitis
               Minor
               Posticus
               ,
               T.
               ib.
            
             C
             ,
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Rectus
               Palpebrae
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Aperiens
               ,
               &c.
            
             
          
           
             —
             Renuans
             ,
             v.
             
               Rectus
               Capitis
               Minor
               Anticus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Retractor
               Alae
               Nasi
               ,
               seu
               Elevator
               Labii
               Superioris
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             33.
             
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Retrahens
               Auriculam
               ,
               T
            
             ,
             12.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             B
             ,
             C
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Rhomboides
               ,
               T.
            
             28.
             
             A
             ,
             B
             ,
             C
             ,
             D.
             
          
           
             
               Rotundus
               Major
               ,
               T.
            
             65.
             d.
             
          
           
             
               Rotundus
               Minor
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Teres
               Minor.
            
             
          
           
             —
             
               Sacer
               ,
               T.
            
             29.
             
             M
             M.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Sacrolumbalis
               ,
               T.
               ead
            
             .
             A
             ,
             B
             ,
             D
             ,
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Sartorius
               ,
               T.
            
             75.
             
             A
             ,
             B
             ,
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Scalenus
               Primus
               ,
               T.
            
             18.
             
             B
             B.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Scalenus
               Secundus
               ,
               T.
            
             18.
             
             B
             B.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Scalenus
               Tertius
               ,
               T.
            
             18.
             
             B
             B.
             
          
           
             —
             Semifibuleus
             ,
             v.
             
               Peroneus
               Secundus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Semimembranosus
               ,
               T.
            
             77.
             
             D.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Seminervosus
               ,
               T.
               ib.
            
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Semispinatus
               ,
               T.
            
             29.
             
             M
             M.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Serratus
               Major
               Anticus
               ,
               T.
            
             20.
             
             D
             ,
             E
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Serratus
               Minor
               Anticus
               ,
               T.
            
             20.
             
             K.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Serratus
               Superior
               Posticus
               ,
               T.
            
             28.
             
             I.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Serratus
               Inferior
               Posticus
               ,
               T.
               ib.
            
             K.
             
          
           
             —
             Soleus
             ,
             v.
             
               Gasterocnemius
               Internus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Sphenopterygopalatinus
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             8.
             d
             d.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Sphincter
               Ani
               ,
               T.
            
             47.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             A
             ,
             B
             ,
             C
             ,
             D.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Sphincter
               Gulae
            
             ,
             v.
             Oesophagaeus
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Sphincter
               Labiorum
            
             ,
             v.
             Constrictor
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Sphincter
               Vaginae
               Uteri
               ,
               T.
            
             51.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             F
             F.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Sphincter
               Vesicae
               ,
               T.
            
             48.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             K.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Spinalis
               Colli
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             36.
             
             I
             I.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Splenius
               ,
               T.
            
             16.
             
             A
             A.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Stapedis
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             17.
             
             Q.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Sternohyoideus
               ,
               T.
            
             15.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             F
             F.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Sternothyroideus
               ,
               T.
            
             15.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             H
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Stylohyoideus
               ,
               T.
            
             15.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             N.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Styloglossus
               ,
               T.
            
             14.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Stylopharyngeus
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             38.
             
             D
             D.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Subclaevius
               ,
               T.
            
             20.
             
             A.
             
          
           
             —
             〈…〉
             C.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Subscapularis
               ,
               T.
            
             65.
             
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             Succenturiatus
             ,
             v.
             Pyramidalis
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Supraspinatus
               ,
               seu
               Superscapularis
               ,
               T.
            
             66.
             
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Supinator
               Radii
               Longus
               ,
               T.
            
             69.
             
             P.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Supinator
               Radii
               Brevis
               ,
               T.
            
             71.
             
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             Supopliteus
             ,
             v.
             Subpopliteus
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Suspensor
               Testiculi
            
             ,
             v.
             Cremaster
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Temporalis
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             M
             ,
             K.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Tensor
               seu
               Extensor
               Digitorum
               Manus
               ,
               T.
            
             69.
             
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Tensor
               Pollicis
            
             ,
             v.
             Extensor
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Teres
               Major
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Rotundus
               Major
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Teres
               Minor
               ,
               T.
            
             66.
             
             F.
             
          
           
             —
             Thenar
             ,
             v.
             
               Abductor
               Pollicis
               Manus
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Thyroarytaenoideus
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             22.
             
             F.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Tibialis
               Anticus
               ,
               T.
            
             81.
             
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Tibialis
               Posticus
               ,
               T.
            
             85.
             
             G.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Transversalis
               Abdominis
               ,
               T.
            
             32.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             I
             ,
             K
             ,
             K.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Transversalis
               Colli
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             36.
             
             K.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Transversalis
               Dorsi
            
             ,
             v.
             Semispinatus
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Transversalis
               Lumborum
            
             ,
             v.
             Sa●er
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Transversalis
               Femoris
            
             ,
             v.
             Quadratus
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Transversalis
               Pedis
               Placentini
               ,
               T.
            
             86.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             E.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Transversalis
               Penis
               ,
               T.
            
             47.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             I.
             
          
           
             —
             Trapezius
             ,
             v.
             Cucullaris
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Triangularis
               ,
               T.
            
             26.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             B
             B.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Triceps
               ,
               T.
            
             76.
             
             I.
             
          
           
             —
             Trochlearis
             ,
             v.
             
               Obliquus
               Superior
               Oculi
            
             .
          
           
             —
             
               Vaginalis
               Gulae
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             38.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Vaginae
               Uteri
               Sphincter
            
             ,
             v.
             Sphincter
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Vastus
               Externus
               ,
               T.
            
             75.
             
             I.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Vastus
               Internus
               ,
               T.
               ib.
            
             H.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Ulnaris
               Extensor
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Extensor
               Carpi
            
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Ulnaris
               Flexor
            
             ,
             v.
             
               Flexor
               Carpi
            
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Zygomaticus
               ,
               T.
            
             12.
             
             F.
             4.
             
             E.
             
          
        
         
           
             N.
             
          
           
             NAils
             ,
             T.
             105.
             
             F.
             3.
             their
             Origin
             and
             Composition
             ,
             
               ib.
               Nates
            
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             31.
             
          
           
             Navel
             ,
             T.
             1.
             
             R.
             
          
           
             Navel-String
             ,
             T.
             56
             ,
             57.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             7.
             
             T.
             59
             ,
             60.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             T.
             62
             ,
             63.
             its
             Loose
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             60.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             Fibres
             ,
             F.
             4.
             
             Succiferous
             Tubes
             ,
             T.
             60.
             
             F.
             4.
             a
             Conjecture
             of
             their
             Use
             ,
             T.
             58.
             
             Part
             of
             its
             External
             Surface
             ,
             in
             Cows
             full
             of
             Tubercles
             ,
             T.
             59.
             its
             Course
             Various
             ,
             T.
             56.
             its
             Vessels
             Injur'd
             ,
             have
             bad
             Effects
             ;
             Two
             strange
             Cases
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Nerve
             Describ'd
             by
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             6.
             
             Fibrillae
             ,
             and
             Manner
             of
             their
             Cohaesion
             ,
             ib.
             not
             Tubulated
             ,
             ib.
             Blood-Vessels
             pass
             with
             them
             ,
             ib.
             Globules
             in
             them
             ,
             and
             whence
             Deriv'd
             ,
             ib.
             Fibres
             proceeding
             from
             the
             Brain
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             2.
             from
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             5.
             passing
             thro'
             the
             
               Dura
               Mater
               ,
               ib.
            
             their
             Gangleons
             ,
             or
             
               Plexus
               Ganglio
               Form●s
               ,
               T.
            
             10.
             
             F.
             4
             ,
             5
             ,
             6.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             27.
             
          
           
             —
             Olfactory
             ,
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             18.
             
          
           
             —
             Optick
             ,
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             T.
             11.
             
             F.
             7
             ,
             9
             ,
             10
             ,
             11
             ,
             14
             ▪
             15
             ,
             16.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             26
             ,
             28
             ,
             38.
             their
             Conjunction
             ,
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             T.
             11.
             
             F.
             18.
             
          
           
             —
             Motory
             or
             Third
             Pair
             ,
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             26
             ,
             28.
             
          
           
             —
             Pathetick
             ,
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             26
             ,
             28.
             
          
           
             —
             Fifth
             Pair
             ,
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             26
             ,
             27
             ,
             28.
             
             ●
             Branch
             of
             them
             making
             the
             Gustatory
             ,
             T.
             14.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             —
             Sixth
             Pair
             ,
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             26
             ,
             28.
             
          
           
             —
             Auditory
             ,
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             26
             ,
             28.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Par
               Vagum
               ,
               T.
            
             7.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             16
             ,
             28.
             
          
           
             —
             Accessory
             Spinal
             ,
             T.
             7.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             28.
             
          
           
             —
             Ninth
             Pair
             ,
             T.
             7.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             26
             ,
             28.
             
             Branches
             Running
             to
             the
             Tongue
             and
             
               Larynx
               ,
               T.
            
             14.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             —
             Tenth
             Pair
             ,
             T.
             7.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             28.
             
          
           
             —
             All
             of
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             of
             the
             Neck
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             28.
             
             Several
             Branches
             of
             the
             Spinal
             Nerves
             ,
             viz.
             Axillary
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             1.
             
             One
             passing
             thro'
             the
             
               Coracobrachiaeus
               ,
               T.
            
             65.
             
             Running
             to
             the
             Fingers
             ,
             T.
             67.
             
             Crural
             ,
             T.
             72
             ,
             77
             ,
             78.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             2.
             
             Trunks
             on
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             
               Tibia
               ,
               T.
            
             82.
             
             Running
             to
             the
             Bottom
             of
             the
             Foot
             and
             Toes
             ,
             T.
             84.
             in
             the
             Ann
             ,
             T.
             64.
             
          
           
             Nipple
             and
             
               Areola
               ,
               T.
            
             19.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             View'd
             with
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             F.
             3
             ,
             4.
             
             Structure
             of
             the
             Nipple
             ,
             F.
             4.
             how
             to
             Examine
             it
             ,
             ib.
             Observations
             on
             the
             Colour
             of
             the
             
               Areola
               ,
               F.
            
             3.
             
          
           
             Nose
             its
             External
             Parts
             ,
             T.
             14.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             Nostrils
             their
             Pituitary
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             14.
             
             F.
             5.
             its
             Nature
             and
             Extent
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Nutrition
             ,
             Introd
             .
          
           
             
               Nymphae
               ,
               T.
            
             50
             ,
             51.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
        
         
           
             O.
             
          
           
             Occiput
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Olecranon
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             ,
             Ulna
             .
          
           
             
               Omentum
               in
               Situ
               ,
               T.
            
             33.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Ala
               Superior
               ,
               ib.
               Inferior
               ,
               T.
            
             40.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             —
             Bursa
             and
             how
             to
             Demonstrate
             it
             ,
             T.
             33.
             
             F
             21
             Glands
             ,
             T.
             34.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Membranes
             dear'd
             of
             F●●
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             2.
             
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             T.
             33.
             
          
           
             
               Orbiculare
               Os
            
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             of
             the
             Ear.
             
          
           
             Ovaria
             Entire
             ,
             T.
             50
             ,
             51.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             T.
             53.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             4.
             in
             a
             
               Fo●tus
               ,
               T.
            
             63.
             
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             5.
             their
             External
             Membrane
             ,
             Glands
             ,
             
               Vesiculae
               .
               ib.
            
             Ligament
             between
             them
             and
             the
             Tube
             ,
             
               ib.
               T.
            
             53.
             
             F.
             4.
             their
             
               Vasa
               Praeparantia
               ,
               T.
            
             53.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             4.
             
          
        
         
           
             P.
             
          
           
             PAlate
             its
             Bones
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             of
             the
             Upper-Jaw
             .
             Glandulous
             Membrane
             ,
             v.
             Membrane
             .
          
           
             
               Pancreas
               in
               Situ
               ,
               T.
            
             36.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             41.
             
             External
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             36.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Duct
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             Arteries
             ,
             F.
             1.
             its
             Use
             ,
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             
               Pancreas
               Asellii
               ,
               T.
            
             40.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Par
               Vagum
            
             ,
             v.
             Nerves
             .
          
           
             Parotid
             Gland
             ,
             v.
             Glands
             .
          
           
             Passions
             why
             they
             disorder
             the
             Reason
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             6.
             
          
           
             
               Patella
               ,
               T.
            
             103.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             4.
             its
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             
               Penis
               ,
               T.
            
             45.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             1.
             its
             Back-part
             ,
             T.
             44.
             
             F.
             ●
             .
             its
             
               Membrana
               Carnosa
               ,
               T.
            
             47.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Praepuce
               ,
               T.
            
             48.
             
             F.
             1.
             how
             Compos'd
             ,
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Cavernous
             Bodies
             ,
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             3.
             
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             1.
             their
             Structure
             ,
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             
               Gians
               ,
               T.
            
             47.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Infiated
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             3
             ,
             4.
             
             View'd
             with
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             F.
             2.
             
             
               Glandulae
               Odoriferae
               ,
               T.
            
             48.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Muscles
             ,
             v.
             Muscles
             .
             Arteries
             ,
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             3.
             
             Tying
             them
             Advis'd
             after
             Excision
             ,
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             Veins
             ,
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Nerves
             ,
             ib.
             Lymphoticks
             ,
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             6.
             their
             Origin
             ,
             T.
             36.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Pericardium
               ,
               T.
            
             21.
             its
             Origin
             ,
             Composition
             and
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             Lymphe-ducts
             ,
             Glands
             that
             separate
             the
             Humour
             ,
             Evident
             in
             some
             Morbid
             Bodies
             ,
             Instan'd
             in
             a
             Child
             ,
             ib.
             Another
             Case
             where
             it
             Adher'd
             to
             the
             Heart
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             
               Pericranium
               ,
               T.
            
             5.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             7.
             
             F.
             2.
             its
             〈◊〉
             and
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             their
             Number
             ,
             whence
             deriv'd
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Periostium
             of
             the
             Skull
             ,
             T.
             5.
             
             F.
             1.
             if
             different
             from
             the
             
               Pericranium
               ,
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             
               Peritonaeu●
               ,
               T.
            
             32.
             
             F.
             1.
             its
             Internal
             Surface
             ,
             T.
             41.
             made
             up
             of
             divers
             
               Laminae
               ,
               T.
            
             32.
             gives
             a
             Membrane
             to
             each
             
               Viscus
               ,
               ib.
            
             vastly
             Extended
             in
             Dropsies
             ,
             ib.
             Two
             Cases
             mention'd
             ,
             ib.
             Examin'd
             with
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             T.
             32.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Process
             of
             its
             Internal
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             32.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             4.
             
             External
             Process
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             1.
             
             Perforations
             Describ'd
             ,
             T.
             32.
             
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             
               Petrosum
               Os
            
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             of
             the
             Temples
             .
          
           
             
               Pi●
               Mater
            
             Covering
             the
             Brain
             ,
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             5.
             the
             C●●●bel
             ,
             T.
             9.
             
             F.
             1.
             the
             Spinal
             Marrow
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Lining
             the
             Ventricles
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Piles
             ,
             v.
             Haemorrhoids
             .
          
           
             
               Placenta
               Uterina
            
             ,
             its
             Convex
             Surface
             ,
             T.
             55
             ,
             58.
             
             Concave
             ,
             T.
             56
             ,
             59
             ,
             60.
             
             F.
             1.
             cut
             Transver●ly
             ,
             T.
             60.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Washe
             from
             its
             Blood
             ,
             T.
             61.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Twenty-Five
             Days
             after
             Conception
             ,
             T.
             57.
             
             F.
             3.
             its
             Composition
             ,
             T.
             58.
             an
             Hypothesis
             of
             its
             Glands
             and
             their
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             Blood-Vessels
             fill'd
             with
             War
             ,
             T.
             60.
             
             F.
             1.
             their
             Ramifications
             ,
             T.
             56
             ,
             59.
             
             Re●●ula●
             
               Ple●●●
               ,
               T.
            
             61.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Reason
             of
             removing
             it
             after
             the
             Birth
             ,
             T.
             54.
             
          
           
             
               Pla●●ra
               ,
               T.
            
             26.
             
          
           
             
               P●●xus
               Chorocides
               ,
               T.
            
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30.
             
             Delineated
             by
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             3.
             its
             Arteries
             and
             Veins
             Describ'd
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30.
             
             Lymphe-ducts
             and
             Glands
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             3.
             
          
           
             
               Plexus
               Pampiniformis
            
             ,
             v.
             Vein
             Spermatick
             .
          
           
             
               Pomum
               Ad●●●
               ,
               T.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Pons
               Varolii
            
             ,
             v.
             Annular
             Procuberance
             .
          
           
             Pores
             ,
             v.
             Scarf-Skin
             .
          
           
             Polypus
             of
             the
             Ear
             ,
             T.
             90.
             
             F.
             5.
             
          
           
             
               Procidentia
               Ani
            
             how
             Caus'd
             ,
             T.
             39.
             
             F.
             7.
             a
             Case
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Prostates
             their
             Fore-part
             Divided
             ,
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Back-part
             ,
             T.
             44.
             
             F.
             2.
             their
             Inside
             Exhibited
             ,
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             Inflated
             ,
             F.
             4.
             their
             
               Ostiola
               ,
               T.
            
             47.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             4●
             .
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Pubis
               Os
            
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Pudendum
             of
             Women
             ,
             T.
             2
             ,
             50.
             
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             3.
             the
             
               Labia
               ,
               T.
            
             50.
             
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             3.
             how
             Extended
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Punctum
               Lachrymale
               ,
               T.
            
             11.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             Pupil
             ,
             v.
             Eye
             .
          
           
             Pylorus
             ,
             v.
             Stomach
             Orifices
             .
          
        
         
           
             R.
             
          
           
             RAdius
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Receptacle
             of
             Chyle
             ,
             T.
             40.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Fill'd
             with
             Mercury
             ,
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             10
             ,
             11.
             
             Consist
             in
             Humane
             Bodies
             of
             Three
             Trunks
             Describ'd
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             11.
             
          
           
             Region
             of
             the
             Navel
             ,
             T.
             1.
             
          
           
             Ribs
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
        
         
           
             S.
             
          
           
             
               SArum
               Os
            
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Salival
             Glands
             ,
             v.
             Glands
             Parotid
             ,
             Maxillary
             ,
             Sublingual
             .
          
           
             Salival
             Ducts
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Scapula
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Scarf-Skin
             of
             several
             Parts
             of
             the
             Body
             view'd
             with
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             T.
             4.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4.
             
             Compos'd
             of
             divers
             Strata
             of
             Scales
             ,
             F.
             1.
             how
             to
             shew
             them
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             
               Scrobiculus
               Cordis
               ,
               T.
            
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Scrotum
               ,
               T.
            
             41.
             
             Septum
             dividing
             it
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Secondine
             ,
             T.
             59.
             what
             it
             is
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Sensation
             by
             what
             Medium
             perform'd
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             6.
             
             Introd
             .
          
           
             
               Sesanoidea
               Ossa
            
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Shoulders
             ,
             T.
             1.
             
          
           
             Similar
             Parts
             ,
             what
             ,
             T.
             4.
             
             F.
             6.
             
          
           
             Sinus
             Longitudinal
             of
             the
             
               Dura
               Mater
            
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Dried
             and
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Part
             of
             it
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             Back-part
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Blown
             up
             and
             Dried
             ,
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             2.
             cut
             Transversly
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             4.
             
             Orifices
             of
             Veins
             in
             it
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             —
             Lateral
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Dried
             ,
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             Injected
             with
             Wax
             ,
             
               App.
               F.
            
             30.
             its
             Tortuous
             Part
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             4.
             
             Injected
             with
             Wax
             ,
             
               App.
               F.
            
             26.
             cut
             off
             below
             it
             ,
             
               App.
               F.
            
             28.
             
             Bylbous
             Part
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             4
             ,
             5.
             its
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             Transverse
             Ligaments
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Fourth
             ,
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Fill'd
             with
             Wax
             ,
             
               App.
               F.
            
             30.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Falcis
               Inferior
            
             Dried
             ,
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             4.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Superior
               ,
               App.
               F.
            
             26.
             
          
           
             —
             
               Inferior
               ,
               ib.
            
             
          
           
             —
             Circular
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Skeleton
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Skin
             ,
             its
             Outer
             Surface
             ,
             as
             it
             Appears
             to
             the
             Naked
             Eye
             ,
             T.
             4.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             View'd
             with
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             F.
             6.
             its
             Papillae
             made
             up
             of
             Glands
             and
             Nerves
             ,
             T.
             4.
             
             F.
             6.
             
             Sudoriferous
             Glands
             of
             Two
             Sorts
             ,
             Pyramidal
             ,
             and
             Miliary
             ,
             ib.
             Sweat-Vessels
             ,
             Arteries
             ,
             Veins
             ,
             Nerves
             ,
             Lymphe-ducts
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             S●ull
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Smelling
             how
             perform'd
             ,
             Introd
             .
          
           
             S●●ff
             much
             of
             it
             may
             be
             pemicious
             ,
             T.
             89.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             Spec●●
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             Vertebrae
             .
          
           
             Specus
             of
             the
             
               Os
               Petros●um
            
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             of
             the
             Temples
             .
          
           
             Spina
             of
             the
             Back
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             Skeleton
             .
          
           
             Spines
             of
             the
             Vertebrae
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             Vertebrae
             .
          
           
             
               Sp●●gins●●
               Os
            
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             of
             the
             Upper
             Jaw
             ,
             and
             Ta●●
             .
          
           
             Spleen
             Lower-part
             
               in
               Situ
               ,
               T.
            
             41.
             of
             a
             
               Foetus
               ,
               T.
            
             63.
             
             Concave
             Part
             ,
             T.
             36.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Partly
             made
             bare
             ,
             ib.
             External
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             36.
             
             F.
             1.
             of
             a
             Quadrupede
             ,
             F.
             4.
             
             Proper
             Membrane
             ,
             ●●
             In●ide
             of
             it
             ,
             F.
             5.
             
             Cells
             in
             a
             Brute
             ,
             T.
             36.
             
             F.
             4.
             
             Existent
             in
             Men
             ,
             and
             the
             Difference
             ,
             ib.
             Fibres
             .
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             4
             ,
             6.
             
             Arteries
             Injected
             ,
             T.
             36.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             3
             ,
             6.
             
             
               App.
               F.
            
             3.
             
             Veins
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             1.
             
             Injected
             ,
             F.
             3
             ,
             6.
             
             Nervous
             
               Plexus
               ,
               T.
            
             36.
             
             F.
             6.
             
             Lymphe-ducts
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             1
             ,
             6.
             whence
             they
             Arise
             ,
             F.
             1.
             its
             Office
             ,
             Introd
             .
          
           
             
               Sphaem●●●er
               Os
            
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             S●yloi●es
             Process
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             of
             the
             Temples
             ,
             Ulna
             .
          
           
             S●●pe●
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             Ear.
             
          
           
             Scaggers
             a
             Disease
             in
             B●●tes
             ,
             the
             Cause
             and
             Cure
             of
             it
             ,
             T.
             ●9
             .
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             Stomach
             
               in
               〈◊〉
               ,
               T.
            
             33
             ,
             4●
             .
             taken
             out
             ,
             T.
             34.
             
             F.
             5.
             its
             Orifices
             ,
             T.
             34.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             T.
             35.
             
             F.
             8.
             
             Instated
             ,
             F.
             9
             ,
             10.
             
             External
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             34.
             
             F.
             ●
             .
             a
             P●●ation
             of
             it
             ,
             T.
             35.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             Muscular
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             35.
             
             F.
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             Orders
             of
             Fishes
             ,
             ib.
             Inner
             Membrane
             may
             be
             Divided
             into
             Three
             ,
             viz.
             Villous
             ,
             and
             how
             to
             Demonstrate
             it
             ,
             T.
             35.
             
             F.
             6.
             
             Gl●●dalous
             ,
             how
             to
             shew
             it
             ,
             ib.
             Tendinous
             or
             Nervous
             ,
             F.
             7.
             
             Superior
             and
             Inferior
             Coronary
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             T.
             34.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             T.
             35.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Inosculating
             ,
             T.
             35.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             
               Plexus
               ,
               F.
            
             3.
             
             Plexus
             of
             Blood-Vessels
             on
             the
             Inside
             ,
             F.
             ●
             Nervous
             
               Plexus
               ,
               T.
            
             34.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Wounds
             of
             it
             not
             always
             Mental
             ,
             their
             Symptoms
             Two
             Cases
             Related
             ,
             T.
             35.
             
             F.
             10.
             
          
           
             〈◊〉
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Suture
             Co●●nal
             ,
             Sa●ital
             ,
             La●doid●l
             ,
             T.
             91.
             
             F.
             1.
             often
             irregular
             ,
             ib.
             as
             they
             Appear
             on
             the
             Inside
             of
             the
             Sk●ll
             ,
             F.
             2.
             in
             Infants
             and
             Children
             ,
             T.
             101.
             
             E
             E.
             
          
           
             Satures
             Bastard
             or
             False
             ,
             T.
             92.
             
          
        
         
           
             T.
             
          
           
             TA●●
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Ta●sus
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             
               Tactus
               Organa
               ,
               Introd
            
             .
          
           
             Tasting
             how
             perform'd
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Testicles
             ,
             T.
             41
             ,
             42
             ,
             44.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Divested
             of
             their
             Tunicles
             ,
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             46.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             cut
             Transversly
             ,
             T.
             46.
             
             F.
             3.
             proportionably
             Larger
             in
             Quadrupedes
             than
             Men
             ,
             Reason
             of
             it
             ,
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             
               Tunica
               Vaginalis
               ,
               T.
            
             45.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             
               Tunica
               Albuginea
               ,
               T.
            
             45.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             46.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             Glandulous
             Part
             ,
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             46.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             Seminal
             Vessels
             ,
             T.
             46.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4.
             
             
               Epididymis
               ,
               T.
            
             42
             ,
             45.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             how
             Compos'd
             ,
             T.
             4●
             .
             F.
             3.
             
             T.
             46.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             
               Vas
               Deferens
               ,
               T.
            
             42
             ,
             44.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             T.
             46.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             1.
             its
             Contortions
             ,
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             T.
             46.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Vaginal
             Tunick
             ,
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             Origin
             ,
             Progress
             ,
             Insertion
             Describ'd
             ,
             T.
             46.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Arteries
             ,
             v.
             Arteries
             Spermatick
             .
             Veins
             ,
             v.
             Veins
             Spermatick
             .
             Extremities
             of
             both
             Less
             than
             in
             other
             Parts
             ,
             T.
             46.
             
             F.
             4.
             
             Nerve
             ,
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             46.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Lymphe-ducts
             ,
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             2.
             their
             Origin
             ,
             T.
             36.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             Teeth
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Testes
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             31.
             
          
           
             
               Thalami
               Nervorum
               Optitorum
               ,
               T.
            
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30.
             
          
           
             Thighs
             ,
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
          
           
             Thoracick-duct
             fill'd
             with
             Mercury
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             11.
             its
             Insertion
             ,
             T.
             40.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             4.
             
             Fill'd
             with
             Wax
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             12.
             
             Divisions
             ,
             and
             Valves
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             11.
             
             Lymphe-ducts
             Entring
             it
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             12.
             its
             Advantagious
             Situation
             Noted
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             11.
             
          
           
             Thorax
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             21.
             in
             a
             
               Fo●tus
               ,
               T.
            
             63.
             it
             s
             Viscera
             taken
             out
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Cavity
             ,
             T.
             26.
             
             Wounds
             in
             it
             may
             be
             suddenly
             Mortal
             without
             Hurting
             the
             Viscaera
             ,
             Reason
             of
             it
             and
             the
             Cure
             ,
             T.
             52.
             
             External
             Air
             must
             be
             kept
             out
             ,
             an
             Observation
             to
             confirm
             it
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             
               Thymus
               ,
               in
               Situ
               ,
               T.
            
             21.
             in
             a
             
               Foetus
               ,
               T.
            
             63.
             
             Observations
             of
             its
             Bigness
             in
             different
             Ages
             and
             Persons
             ,
             T.
             21.
             never
             wanting
             ,
             ib.
             its
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Tibia
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Tongue
             ,
             T.
             13.
             
             F.
             1.
             its
             External
             Covering
             in
             Brutes
             view'd
             with
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             T.
             13.
             
             F.
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             Subjacent
             Membrane
             ,
             its
             Superior
             Part
             ,
             F.
             6.
             
             Lower-part
             ,
             F.
             7.
             
             Small
             Vessels
             ,
             ib.
             Nervous
             Papillary
             Plexus
             and
             Glands
             ,
             F.
             8.
             
             Appears
             alike
             in
             Men
             ,
             except
             the
             Horny
             Covering
             ,
             F.
             2.
             
             Villous
             and
             Nervous
             Bodies
             and
             Glands
             in
             a
             Humane
             Tongue
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             24.
             
             Various
             Orders
             of
             Fibres
             ,
             T.
             13.
             
             F.
             9.
             
             Muscles
             ,
             v.
             Muscles
             .
          
           
             Tonsils
             ,
             
               in
               Situ
               ,
               T.
            
             13.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             External
             Surface
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             9.
             
          
           
             
               Torcular
               Herophisi
               ,
               T.
            
             6.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30.
             
             Vein
             Emp●ying
             it self
             at
             it
             ,
             T.
             8.
             
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             Tradaea
             or
             Wind-pipe
             its
             Fore-part
             ,
             T.
             15.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             ●4
             .
             F.
             1
             ,
             7.
             
             T.
             25.
             
             F.
             8.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             22.
             
             Back-part
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             6.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             20
             ,
             23.
             
             Small
             Glands
             which
             Appear
             on
             it
             ,
             their
             Use
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             20.
             
             A
             Portion
             of
             it
             cut
             off
             ,
             T.
             25.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Open'd
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             21.
             
             External
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             25.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Muscular
             Fassiculi
             lying
             between
             its
             Cartilages
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             2.
             
             Glandulous
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             25.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             Internal
             Membrane
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             4.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             25.
             
             Order
             of
             its
             Fibres
             ,
             and
             their
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             Trepan
             to
             be
             Used
             with
             great
             Care
             ,
             T.
             91.
             
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             Trochlea
             of
             the
             Eye
             ,
             T.
             11.
             
             F.
             7.
             
          
           
             
               Tubae
               Falloppiaenae
               ,
               T.
            
             49
             ,
             50.
             in
             a
             
               Foetus
               ,
               T.
            
             63.
             
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             51
             ,
             F.
             5.
             
             T.
             53.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             Distended
             ,
             
               in
               C●itu
            
             ,
             and
             afterwards
             ,
             T.
             53.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             by
             what
             means
             ,
             F.
             2.
             
             Time
             of
             it
             uncertain
             ,
             ib.
             Orifices
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Cavity
             ,
             T.
             50.
             
             Internal
             Membrane
             Rugous
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Expanded
             ,
             T.
             53.
             
             F.
             3.
             
             
               F●●riae
               ,
               T.
            
             50
             ,
             51.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             T.
             53.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Embracing
             the
             
               Ovaria
               ,
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             1.
             
             Number
             of
             Blood-Vessels
             and
             Colour
             Noted
             ,
             T.
             53.
             
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             Tumor●
             Milky
             ,
             how
             Ca●●'d
             ,
             T.
             19.
             
             F.
             4.
             
          
           
             〈◊〉
             ,
             v.
             Ear.
             
          
        
         
           
             V.
             
          
           
             
               VAgina
               Uteri
            
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             3
             ,
             4.
             
             Inverted
             ,
             T.
             53.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Strained
             
               in
               C●●ta
            
             ,
             and
             by
             what
             means
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             1.
             〈…〉
             and
             Use
             ,
             ib.
             other
             Glands
             their
             Ducts
             ,
             and
             Use
             Describe
             〈◊〉
             Rugous
             Membrane
             Describ'd
             ,
             
               ib.
               Caen●●●l●
               Myrtiformes
            
             and
             
               Hymen
               ,
               ib.
            
             Insertion
             of
             the
             
               Meatus
               Urinarius
               ,
               T.
            
             51.
             
             F.
             3.
             
          
           
             Vapours
             in
             Expiration
             whence
             they
             proceed
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             20.
             
          
           
             
               Vas
               Deserens
            
             ,
             v.
             Testicles
             .
          
           
             
               Vasa
               Breviae
               ,
               T.
            
             36.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             
               Vasa
               Praeparania
            
             in
             a
             Man
             ,
             v.
             Artery
             Spermatick
             ,
             Vein
             Spermatick
             .
          
           
             
               Vasa
               Praeparantiae
            
             in
             a
             Woman
             ,
             T.
             50
             ,
             53.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             4.
             
          
           
             Valves
             in
             the
             Veins
             ,
             v.
             Veins
             .
          
           
             
               Valvulae
               Connive●●●e
            
             ,
             v.
             Intestines
             .
          
           
             
               Valvulae
               Tricuspides
            
             or
             Mitrales
             ,
             v.
             Heart
             .
          
           
             
               Valvulae
               Sigmoides
            
             or
             Semilio●●res
             ,
             v.
             Arteries
             ,
             Aorta
             ,
             Pulmonary
             .
          
           
             Veins
             their
             Coats
             ,
             T.
             23.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3.
             
             Valves
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             7
             ,
             8
             ,
             9
             ,
             10
             ,
             11
             ,
             12
             ,
             13.
             continued
             Channels
             from
             the
             Arteries
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             4
             ,
             5.
             
             Use
             of
             the
             Valves
             ,
             and
             their
             Number
             Noted
             ,
             T.
             26.
             
             F.
             6.
             their
             Distance
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             14.
             
          
           
             —
             Aryg●●
             ,
             sc.
             
               Sine
               Pari
            
             its
             Use
             ,
             Introd
             .
          
           
             —
             Umbilical
             Open'd
             T.
             61.
             
             F.
             4.
             
             Injected
             ,
             F.
             5.
             
             Entring
             the
             Liver
             ,
             T.
             62
             ,
             63.
             
          
           
             —
             Spermatick
             ,
             T.
             42
             ,
             44.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             
             T.
             46.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Injected
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             5.
             their
             Ramifications
             on
             the
             
               Testes
               ,
               T.
            
             45.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Plexus
               Pampiniformis
            
             or
             
               Varicosus
               ,
               T.
            
             44.
             
             F.
             2.
             how
             they
             Empty
             themselves
             ,
             T.
             42.
             why
             T●●tnous
             in
             Men
             ,
             and
             Straight
             in
             Quadrupedes
             ,
             T.
             45.
             
             F.
             2.
             
          
           
             —
             Internal
             Jugular
             ,
             T.
             6.
             
             F.
             ●5
             .
             T.
             15.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2.
             care
             must
             be
             had
             of
             it
             in
             c●●ing
             〈…〉
             Necks
             ,
             ib.
             if
             Wounded
             how
             to
             be
             Treated
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             —
             Subclavian
             Wounded
             ,
             and
             how
             Cur'd
             ,
             T.
             〈…〉
          
           
             —
             On
             the
             Inside
             of
             the
             Arm
             ,
             T
             64.
             
             F.
             8.
             
          
           
             —
             In
             the
             Ham
             ,
             T.
             77.
             
          
           
             —
             Of
             the
             Muscles
             on
             the
             Fore-part
             of
             the
             
               Tibia
               ,
               T.
            
             8●
             .
          
           
             —
             Corresponding
             to
             the
             
               Arteria
               Bronchialis
               ,
               T.
            
             24.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             —
             Pulmonick
             lying
             on
             the
             
               Bronchia
               ,
               T.
            
             24.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Entring
             the
             Heart
             ,
             T.
             22.
             
             F.
             12.
             
          
           
             
               Vena
               Cavae
            
             Descending
             Trunk
             ,
             T.
             24.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Ascending
             ,
             T.
             41
             ,
             42
             ,
             49
             ,
             50.
             
             Branches
             Iliack
             ,
             T.
             42
             ,
             50.
             
             Emulgent
             ,
             T.
             50.
             v.
             Kidneys
             .
             Vertebral
             ,
             T.
             50.
             
          
           
             
               Vena
               P●●sa
            
             it●
             Use
             ,
             Introd
             .
          
           
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Heart
             ,
             v.
             Heart
             .
          
           
             Ventricles
             of
             the
             Brain
             ,
             T.
             10.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             30
             ,
             31.
             
          
           
             Vertebrae
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             
               Vasiculae
               Seminales
            
             their
             Fore-part
             ,
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Instated
             ,
             T.
             44.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Divided
             ,
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Vasiculae
               ,
               F.
            
             2.
             
             Seminal-ducts
             ,
             ib.
             Blood-Vessels
             ,
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             
               Vesiculae
               Mi●●●
               ,
               Ap.
               F.
            
             25.
             
          
           
             Ulna
             ,
             v.
             Bones
             .
          
           
             Umbilical
             Rope
             ,
             v.
             Navel-String
             .
          
           
             Umbilical
             Vessels
             ,
             v.
             Arteries
             ,
             Veins
             ,
             Urachus
             ,
             and
             Excretory-ducts
             .
          
           
             
               Urachus
               ,
               T.
               ib.
               F.
            
             3
             ,
             4.
             
             T.
             62
             ,
             63.
             an
             Account
             of
             it
             ,
             T.
             49.
             
          
           
             Ureters
             ,
             
               in
               Situ
               ,
               T.
            
             41.
             in
             a
             
               Foetus
               ,
               T.
            
             63.
             taken
             out
             ,
             T.
             42
             ,
             50.
             their
             Origin
             ,
             T.
             43.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4
             ,
             6
             ,
             7.
             
             Insertion
             ,
             T.
             44.
             
             F.
             2.
             
             Membranes
             Examin'd
             by
             a
             Microscope
             ,
             T.
             44.
             
             F.
             1.
             
          
           
             Urethra
             where
             it
             Bends
             under
             the
             
               Os
               Pubic
               ,
               T.
            
             44.
             
             F.
             2.
             sometimes
             Wounded
             by
             Ignorant
             Lythoromists
             ,
             Instances
             given
             ,
             ib.
             Bulb
             of
             the
             Cavernous
             Body
             ,
             T.
             44.
             
             F.
             2.
             an
             Induration
             in
             it
             Hinders
             Erection
             of
             the
             Glans
             ,
             an
             Observation
             proving
             it
             ,
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             5.
             
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Caruncle
             and
             Ostiolae
             of
             the
             Prosta●
             in
             it
             ,
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Cavernous
             Body
             Open'd
             after
             Inflation
             ,
             T.
             48.
             
             F.
             4.
             cut
             Transversly
             ,
             F.
             6.
             
             
               Capsula
               ,
               T.
            
             48.
             
             F.
             6.
             where
             Divided
             in
             cutting
             for
             the
             Stone
             ,
             T.
             47.
             
             F.
             5.
             
          
           
             Urinary
             passage
             in
             Women
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Open'd
             ,
             F.
             3.
             
          
           
             
               Uterus
               ,
               T.
            
             50.
             
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             4.
             
             Cavity
             and
             Thickness
             before
             Impregnation
             ,
             ib.
             Fore-part
             soon
             after
             Impregnation
             ,
             T.
             53.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Blood-Vessels
             more
             Extended
             than
             before
             ,
             ib.
             Back-part
             of
             the
             same
             ,
             
               T.
               ead
               .
               F.
            
             4.
             
             Blood-Vessels
             Injected
             ,
             ib.
             after
             Seven
             Months
             gone
             with
             Child
             ,
             T.
             54.
             the
             same
             Divided
             ,
             T.
             55
             ,
             56.
             
             Veins
             much
             Dilated
             ,
             T.
             54.
             
             Inequalities
             of
             the
             Inner
             Surface
             ,
             T.
             56.
             
             Vessels
             Inosculate
             with
             those
             of
             the
             
               Placenta
               ,
               T.
            
             54.
             
             External
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             53.
             
             F.
             4.
             
             Round
             Ligament
             ,
             T.
             50
             ,
             53.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             4.
             their
             Composition
             and
             Progress
             ,
             T.
             50.
             
             Broad
             Ligament
             ,
             T.
             50
             ,
             53.
             
             F.
             1
             ,
             4.
             what
             it
             is
             ,
             T.
             50.
             
             Cervix
             or
             Neck
             Divested
             of
             its
             common
             Membrane
             ,
             T.
             53.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             Open'd
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             4.
             its
             Orifice
             ,
             
               ib.
               Rugae
               ,
               ib.
            
             Moisten'd
             with
             a
             Serous
             Liquor
             ,
             T.
             51.
             
             F.
             4.
             stop'd
             with
             a
             Glutinous
             Matter
             after
             Impregnation
             ,
             ib.
             Grows
             Thicker
             as
             the
             Birth
             Grows
             on
             ,
             T.
             5●
             .
             〈…〉
             swell'd
             after
             the
             Birth
             ,
             ib.
             
          
           
             〈◊〉
             ,
             T.
             13.
             
             F.
             1.
             
             T.
             14.
             
             F.
             3.
             its
             Use
             in
             Deglutition
             ,
             Introduct
             .
          
        
         
           
             W.
             
          
           
             WInd-Pipes
             its
             Upper-part
             ,
             v.
             L●rynx
             .
             Middle-part
             ,
             v.
             Trachea
             .
             Lower-part
             ,
             v.
             Bronchia
             .
          
           
             Womb
             ,
             v.
             Uterus
             .
          
           
             Wounds
             Gleeting
             whence
             it
             proceeds
             ,
             
               Ap.
               F.
            
             2.
             
          
           
             Wry
             Necks
             Caution
             in
             Cutting
             them
             ,
             T.
             15.
             
             F.
             2.
             
          
        
         
           
             Y.
             
          
           
             YArd
             ,
             v.
             Penis
             .
          
        
         
           FINIS
           .